N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 1 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

THE

EARTH SYNDROME

BOOKS 18 - 23

By Nick Broadhurst Published by Nick Broadhurst

ISBN: 9781311271440

Sequetus.net Edition Copyright 2014-19 Nick Broadhurst

Sequetus.net Edition, License Notes Thank you for downloading this eBook. This book remains the copyrighted property of the author, and may not be redistributed to others for commercial or non-commercial purposes. If you enjoyed this book, please encourage your friends to download their own copy from their favorite authorized retailer.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 2 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

DISCLAIMER

The SEQUETUS SERIES, and the EARTH SYNDROME MINISERIES are works of fiction. Names of individuals and companies used in the book, unless historical fact, are fiction.

THE SEQUETUS SERIES GLOSSARY

Part of this volume is a chapter named Glossary, a list of terms and words and what they mean. When a word in the glossary is first used in the story, it’s slanted like this.

MEASUREMENT

In the Federation there is Standard Measurement, such as kinopacs, or Ks and pacs, but those, who have left Earth, may still use kilometers.

HOW THESE BOOKS ARE NUMBERED

This is an epic story. By its nature, it’s big. The Sequetus Series is broken up into four miniseries. Each miniseries is comprised of between four to eight books.

The miniseries are

THE NEW EARTH MINISERIES Books 1-8 THE TEMPLAR MINISERIES Books 9-12 THE JUGGERNAUT MINISERIES Books 13-17 THE EARTH SYNDROME MINISERIES Books 18-23

Each miniseries can be read in its own right.

A lot of care has gone into creating this epic, and everything has been done, by way of glossary, pictures, maps, notes, credits, and so on, to assist the reader to have an enjoyable and fulfilling reading experience.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 3 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Contents

Chapter 1 The Earth Syndrome Chapter 2 Final Passage Chapter 3 Vigil Chapter 4 Maluka Rising Chapter 5 Orbat Chapter 6 Galaxy Chapter 7 Glossary and Notes

Back Page

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 4 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 5 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The Earth Syndrome CHAPTER 1

Sub-Contents

Maps

Sub-chapter 1 Amanda

Sub-chapter 2 Rendezvous

Sub-chapter 3 About Earth

Sub-chapter 4 Anki

Sub-chapter 5 Comet Side

Sub-chapter 6 Mars Base

Sub-chapter 7 On Mars

Sub-chapter 8 Earth

Sub-chapter 9 Revealed

Sub-chapter 10 First Encounter

Sub-chapter 11 Mars Station Iii

Sub-chapter 12 The Brief

Sub-chapter 13 Epilogue

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 6 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

MAPS

Santonia Galaxy

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 7 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 8 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

FEDERATION SECTORS AROUND PALBO

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 9 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 1

AMANDA

aron and Akeala disembarked, from the ship. It had taken three months, to get there. The J map they held showed both the crater and the impact point, which they sought. “Over there,” called Akeala. Jaron looked and could see the ridge. Akeala started to bound towards it. “Careful Aki, it mightn’t be totally safe,” called Jaron, as he watched his daughter leap over a small crater. He turned down his internal helmet lighting, so that he could see more clearly, and watch Akeala’s torchlight. Jaron received a message, across his visor. It was Amy. She was worried about him, as their ship had orbited to the other side of the moon and they had lost direct contact. Now, however, she could see him. Jaron smiled. “I think we have it; this time. I can feel it.” He could see Amy’s face plainly on his visor, now. She replied. “I feel nothing. I also have a creepy feeling; being here. It is like walking on egg shells, with the dead sleeping, beneath you.” Jaron laughed at the metaphor. “Perhaps true, but she will be here, somewhere, and the fact that

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 10 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

she can’t be found by our sensors, means she is here; fully aware.” Amy sighed. Akeala called over. “Papa… oh hi Aunt Amy.” “Hi Aki… please be careful.” “Oh, Aunty, there isn’t a thing…oh…” Akeala dropped from view and her sensors cut out. Jaron couldn’t see her. There was plenty of light; to see by, and the ground where she just was, could be clearly observed, and yet, she was gone. Jaron looked around as if he was squinting. He had to turn down his visor, again, as Amy was becoming frantic. “Stay there, Amy. I can sense her, both of them.” Jaron looked around and Belkron Blu was to his left. He could feel something. “It gives me the spooks, sir.” “Over there.” Jaron pointed. There was nothing. Belkron shrugged; inside his suit. He was watching, as Jaron walked over to a small crater. Jaron vanished. “Oh, Amy, this is creepy, now they both have gone! I’m going to walk closer…” Amy was watching; from their ship. It was a standard Man-o-War. Its captain looked at Amy. He nodded. “He has them.” Amy wasn’t so confident, but she took some solace, from his words. Still, she noted nothing.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 11 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Down below, Jaron could sense he was now out of contact, with above. He could see Aki, beside the ship. Jaron checked his air and saw that he had two hours left. “Aki, you found her. Very well done, daughter.” Akeala looked up, at her father, and then along the hull of the damaged Man-o-War. Jaron looked at her. “I can feel your thoughts. What is it?”

Akeala, Kantee, and Luna 2 above

“Papa, I can see the ship, but I’m not convinced that the ship was alive as you said. I mean, how can hardware be alive? Ever?” Jaron looked at his daughter, and then the ship and then the blue world of Kantee above them. He loved space and he loved his beautiful daughter. He could feel the ship, watching and listening. He

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 12 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

thought his daughter was so clever. He smiled. “There is life, to a degree, in everything. However, when you enable something to make a choice, even if otherwise predetermined, more life will inhabit it. Cells in our bodies have many choices and have lots of life. Well, with a ship, when it is highly computerized, and I mean like a computer that could run a planet, life will want to inhabit it. You know that, and that is what we have; here.” “Why did she crash then, if she is alive?” “She lost her captain, after the battle of Kantee. He went down to this moon, where he then died. He returned to the Pleiades as you know, after death, leaving his crippled body here, but his ship went into mourning, and well… here she is.” “Why did she crash, papa?” “She will have to tell us that, herself. For really, I might never know. Some ships can’t handle the loss of their captain, as it is like losing a brother, sister, mother or someone perhaps even more dear to them. Few make it through, and they wish to die too, and return to where they came from.” “Why did she not go back then, Papa?” asked Akeala. “I think we will need to ask Amanda that question.” “How can we ask, if she won’t accept our help? She has been hiding and did a good job. I had to stumble right over her to find her. Her shroud was magnificent.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 13 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Outside the crashed Man-o-War

Jaron ran his glove, slowly, over her hull. He knew better, than to try to talk to the ship. He knew Amanda, from days gone by. He also knew many ships were never resurrected, when they went this far. Yet, he had argued that Amanda could be brought back, and mightn’t go over, to the other side. They had searched the Kantee moon for weeks, until Akeala found this one series of craters, which seemed to have less impact points, than prior to the battle of Kantee. Thus, she reasoned, this was

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 14 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

the crash site, shrouded with the image of the ground, before Amanda ditched her herself, onto the Kantee moon. This wasn’t unusual, for a grieving ship, which had lost its captain. Jaron’s mission was to bring her out of her grief; and cajole her back to the Pleiades. Jaron thought to the ship. There was no response. He did it again, and kept it up, for an hour. By then, Akeala was looking about, showing him the time, which remained, and the lack of air. Jaron nodded. He motioned for Akeala to switch her spare air, to his, and for her, to make her way out. The others in orbit would be worried. Akeala complied, farewelled her father, and headed out, to the blurring edges of the shroud. Jaron checked the tank, and noted that he now had two hours of air left. He sat. Back on the Man-o-War, Akeala looked at Amy. They had noted the region covered by the shroud; where Amanda had to be. Around them were other Man-o-Wars, all equally alive, thinking to each other, compassionate in knowing that one of their own was down, and hurting. They too, shared their sister’s grief, but were powerless to do anything. It had to be someone, who was human; who communicated to Amanda. Those were their rules, for being there. They knew what Jaron was doing, and what he wanted. He would be a good match, as captain for

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 15 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amanda, if she accepted, if she could come to terms with her grief, over losing Captain Bigow. Amy was getting worried. They had sent down tank after tank of air; it had been eight hours now, and still Amanda hadn’t responded. Akeala was worried; too. “Are you sure that she is alive, I mean there?” Amy looked over. She is there; girl, came the thought from the ship, in which they were. Akeala smiled. “Sorry.” Jaron caressed the hull, again. This would be the twentieth time, which he had walked around the ship, feeling her surface, feeling her pain. He could feel her loss, the anger at losing her friend, her captain. She didn’t want another captain. She didn’t want anyone else. She wanted Bigow. Jaron saw that he had only twenty minutes of air, remaining. He sat down; next to the hatch. “It is no use,” he said to himself, looking out and up at the craft, which he could now see hovering, a few Ks, above him. He had only five minutes of air; left. He had stopped anyone coming to him. He willed them away, but in a way, so that Amanda wasn’t able to hear his thoughts. He wondered to himself, if the risk here, was worth it, as he shielded his thoughts. He swallowed. What if there was no air; inside? Even if she did open the doors now, he could still die.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 16 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He looked at his air meter. He was down to three minutes. Akeala was pulling at Amy. “We have to go down. Don’t you understand? That stupid ship is going to kill him, and he is the only father, I have. Let me go, Aunty!” At that point, Akeala pulled herself free and bounded to the doors, fully suited up. Amy raced after her to the steps. She is lifting, came the thought. Who? asked Amy, not knowing whom this ship was thinking about. Amanda. “He is in Aki, come back.” Jaron was inside the Man-o-War, Amanda. He had only a minute left, of air. Amanda was still not answering his thoughts, but she had coerced him to the bridge, and when he got there, he was relieved to find it was pressurized. He removed his helmet, and saw the door close. “Thank you Amanda.” “You aren’t welcome,” came the reply, over the speakers. Jaron smiled and was about to say something, when Amanda said, “Don’t be so smug, as we aren’t going anywhere! I just couldn’t let you die. That is all. Do not think it is anymore; than that. This moon has claimed enough; from me.” Jaron looked around. I understand, he thought to her.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 17 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

There was no reply, so he sat; next to the captain’s chair. Good, you didn’t sit there. Jaron looked at the vacant captain’s chair. “Yes, of course, I wouldn’t.” There was silence; for the next twenty minutes. Jaron said nothing. He didn’t touch anything. He just sat. He knew he could stay alive in this ship, for the next month if needed, without water, food or even sleep. Therefore, he just waited. “Are you just going sit there, like that; for eternity?” came the voice, after an hour. Jaron just looked up, and around the room. “It’s nice to hear your voice.” There was silence, for another hour. Then; a single light came on, under a screen, then another, and after four seconds, the entire set of screens, and then, the walls came alive. Next, the floor and walls and the ceilings lit up. The lines through the metal began to pulsate; with life. “Are you just going to sit there? Get in your seat,” commanded the ship. Jaron moved; into the captain’s chair. “Yes, Ma’am.” He waited and started to feel the mind, around him. He could sense her anger. What is it you want? She asked. I’m not yours. Jaron nodded. I want to find those; who murdered Captain Bigow.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 18 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron felt the huge surge, of thought and anger, towards him. He held it off. I’m not one of those, who did that, Amanda. Sorry. You are right. Can I? She asked. Jaron nodded and opened his mind to her. He wanted her to see that his motives were transparent, where he wanted to go, where he had been and what he wanted to do with her. He felt Amanda smile. And Amy, too? She asked. Jaron was surprised. Do you know her? Amanda knows her. She is good, and a friend. Amy is my friend. Can I invite her inside? Yes, came the thought; reluctantly.

Ω

Amy sat; beside Jaron. Akeala was there, cautiously surveying the ship. She asked, “Is this ship really alive?” Jaron looked over, at Amy. “Aki, that is a very rude comment, to make here. It is like an animal asking if you, if you are alive. Everything is alive, and all existence has a small measure of created life, even those things, which others consider inanimate. A Man-o-War? It is very much alive, and Amanda is alive, just as you and I are also alive.” Akeala looked around, at the walls and floor. It didn’t look that alive; to her.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 19 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron, feeling the tenseness in the air, changed the subject. “We are going to turn on the computer, to show us the circumstances of Captain Bigow’s death. Ready?” he asked Amy. Amy looked around, and nodded. Akeala shrugged. The screens came on, at Jaron’s touch, and commenced showing their invasion of Kantee. They saw Amy leaving, right on cue. Next, the others departed, leaving Amanda and Bigow as the only ones, on this side of the moon. Bigow was now outside inspecting some damage, which seemed to have happened to the hull of the ship, during the confrontation with the Kantee Space Command. Suddenly, out of nowhere, came three rockets. Bigow jetted away from the ship, ordering Amanda to leave, to warp out; now. She refused. He ordered again. The rockets were almost upon him. He dodged the rockets, and then three lasers struck out and somehow, Bigow suffered injuries to his face and leg. Then; they hit again; a huge bolt of bright light came from the left and the lasers were smothered by a large shadow, which covered that section of the moon. Bigow began to sink slowly down, onto the surface. Akeala stared incredulously, as his body divided into two portions, then the laser was shielded away, by some kind of … nothingness. Akeala could see the nothingness; being hit, and hit again, by the lasers.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 20 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The ship began to heave. Akeala looked about, worriedly. The ship heaved again, and again. “Papa, what is happening? Are we under attack? Please help; quickly.” Akeala called. Jaron just held up his hand and indicated to her, to be silent. The ship heaved; again. Amy leaned over and whispered, “Amanda is grieving, child. Respect her. Please.” Akeala held her hand, to her mouth and looked around. The walls seemed to have a faint glow, to their solidity. Jaron reached over, and played the recording again. It was the same, but this time, they saw the look on Bigow’s face, as he saw something that caused him sheer terror. Then; the lasers struck. The ship again heaved, and heaved. A very loud yowling noise came from the bowels of the ship. Akeala was about to say that it was spooky, when Jaron put his hand on her arm, and whispered, “Be Boguard, if nothing else, Aki. Be silent, or leave.” He turned back, to the controls and replayed the images; again. The ship was reverberating now, and the yowls were coming stronger, and louder and even more deafening. Jaron played the images, another three times and then he asked, Amanda, what did he communicate to you, before he left? The ship heaved again, and again. It seemed to Aki, that the ship might even tear itself apart, and

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 21 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

she wondered how the structure was able to hold itself; together. A whimper came; into Jaron’s mind. He said…. The ship heaved, again. He said…. He was sorry …. Sorry …. That he couldn’t protect… me… me…. The ship heaved again, but it was less; this time. What did you not say then, that you wanted to say; that you held back? The ship heaved. I wanted to say that I loved him. He was my captain and I failed… I failed… I failed him. The floor started to buckle up; the walls began to push inwards. Akeala was sure that they were close to death, and would die. Yet, she couldn’t work out how the ship didn’t break up, even if it was still on the moon’s floor. Jaron asked the question, repeatedly. Each time, the reaction of the ship became less. Then there was nothing. Amanda? Yes Jaron? Can you answer my daughter’s question - what is life? Amanda thought for a moment. Then the ship started to shake; up and down.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 22 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amy smiled, and seeing the concern return to Akeala’s face, said, “Lighten up child, she is laughing at you, now.” Akeala looked around, and saw the floor and walls getting brighter, that the lines and pulsating lights had returned, which she knew indicated that the ship was alive. Aki? Came a thought, into Akeala’s mind. Akeala stood up and looked around. Jaron smiled. Aki? I’m all around you. My name is Amanda. Can we be friends? Akeala had never interacted with a ship; before. That was way above her training and expectation. She nodded. Yes, she thought back. Can you help me? Was the next thought, which came to Akeala. Yes, she answered, a bit wimpishly. The ship slowly began to rise; from the moon’s surface. The screens changed; to show there, under the ship, in a shallow depression, was the body of Captain Bigow. His ship had protected his body, in a shallow crater, for the past many months. Amy leaned across. “That explains why she didn’t leave. She is still protecting - him. Aki, it is your honor to go out and retrieve her bonded Captain. Do you want help?” Akeala shook her head. “I feel this is a greatness I’m being afforded. I would like to take the responsibility, of accepting that; alone.” Aki

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 23 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

bowed her head to Amy and turned. She slowly wiped a tear away. Amy slightly nodded back. As Akeala stepped away she looked back at her father and Amy, a thought came to her. Thank you.

Ω

Akeala was returning inside, with the body of Bigow. It was frozen, lacerated and cut into pieces. It didn’t feel heavy, as there was almost zero gravity. Amy was fully suited, at the entry door; waiting. Akeala looked up, at the ship. She looked at it and then beyond. Above; were another four Man-o- Wars. She felt something there, and it wasn’t the captains. It was a kindred feeling; between the ships. They, the ships themselves, seemed to be watching her; looking at Akeala, as well as Amanda. It then dawned on Akeala, that these ships were, what could be termed a race. They looked after themselves, but worked with Boguard, and served with Boguard. They were a race, and together they stuck. They above, were looking after Amanda. Akeala felt their concern. She looked at them, and nodded. They seemed to return her feelings, of admiration. In addition, she thought she felt a faint series of thank you, in return.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 24 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 25 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 2

RENDEZVOUS

After the farewell-ceremony on Yaltipia, where Captain Bigow’s body was laid to rest, and words read for him to return, Akeala was looking around the cavern wondering, what she was going to do, next. Being Boguard was exciting, or it should be, she thought to herself. However, being in a boring old cave in the Pleiades, hiding; might seem okay, but…. Jaron walked over, with Sheril by his side. “Aki, I can feel your thoughts. You need to keep up your study and practice of The Way, and you will get there.” Akeala shook her head. “I think there needs to be a reason, a motivating force, which has lost me; now. I wonder if I should return to Palbo, or even Rambus. I liked that, and chasing after you, Papa. That had a reason, and the Cordukes were fun.” She sighed. “Aki, I’m going to the Sequetus Series, on a recognizance mission. You have been named, as one of the crew.” Akeala brightened up a bit. She threw a pebble into the pond and watched the ripples, move outwards. “What is the point?” she asked.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 26 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Sheril kneeled down, beside her ex-husband’s daughter. “Aki, can I call you that?” Aki turned from her stepmother. “If you wish.” Sheryl pointed to the pond. “That one stone, all it did, when it hit the water; was to cause the ripples to travel, to every corner of the pond. We are like that, and the ripples from us, are felt; all through the galaxy.” Akeala nodded. “I know. I’ve been told that; before.” She threw another pebble, to watch the splash. Sheril sighed, “I suppose I’ll have to tell Castano, to get a replacement. You were to be; his second in command.” Akeala stood up straight, hugged Sheril, and then her father. “You are so mean, both of you. You should have told me. When do we go to briefing? I will be ready to lift off; in an hour.” She hugged Sheril again, and ran off. Jaron watched her leave, and smiled. Sheryl gave him a strong look. “She is right. You are mean to her, sometimes in a fun way.”

Ω

Akeala met her father again, after her first briefing. “You knew I wasn’t going straight to Earth. Why am I going to boring old Palbo, again?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 27 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron straightened. “It isn’t my place to replace your Mission-Ops. Do you not know why you are going there?” “To pick up someone for you, who you think is important.” She looked at him. “That sounds boring, Papa.” Jaron looked upwards to the center of the cavern. He looked back down. “I see. Who would be so important, that I’d send my own daughter to fetch them?” Jaron waited, and waited and finally watched his daughter arrive at the answer.” “Mother? I’m going to pick up mother? Really? She is improving?” Her lips began to quiver. Jaron looked at her and said nothing. “Why? The psycho-surgeons damaged her, when they passed all that electricity and knives through her brain. Why, she can’t do anything.” Akeala waited a few seconds, and asked, “Oh! What’s changed?” Jaron looked away, again, still saying nothing. Akeala was watching him carefully now. “Unless – do you think, that there is some way, to fix her? Is that it?” Jaron smiled at his daughter, and with a lot of effort, he held back the tears, in his own eyes. Akeala just jumped at him, and put her arms around his neck, kissing him, as a tear rolled down her cheek. She stood there, holding onto her father, and began to sob.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 28 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Soon, Jaron moved back, so that he could talk to her. “I just have a theory, that’s all.” “I love you, Papa.” He watched her, as she ran away; down a path. She called back, “I love you.” He called back. “No promises.” “I don’t care.” She ran inside the corridor. “I love you.”

Ω

The five Man-o-Wars left Yaltipia, for the world of warp drive space. It would be two months, before they neared their rendezvous position. Out there in the warp fields, they could somehow sense the destroyers of Commander Beel and his crews, even though they were hundreds of light years, away.”

Ω

On another mission, was a single Man-o-War, transporting Castano and his group. Castano was a Corduke, and not Boguard. He could still not quite get around the reality, that the Boguard ship itself was life, as distinct from someone, just running the computer section. “It would seem feasible, if someone said the computer was alive, but the hardware of the ship?” he commented. Akeala sighed. “Of course, she is alive. The ship is her body and she imbues it with her presence,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 29 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

the same as you do, with your body. It has cells, but they are a different creation than yours, different material. Yet; they are equally as alive, as we are. The fact that she wants to take procession of a ship, is no more questionable, as to why you would want to take procession of a body, before or at birth, is it?” Castano looked at this young fountain of wisdom, bubbling away. She continued, enjoying captivating his attention. “Do you really know your own reason, as to why you came into this universe and chose the body, that you have, Captain?” Captain Castano looked long at this young woman, whom he admired and respected. He had seen her in action, against the Talkron. She had ability. Castano put his hand, on his allocated bridge section. He felt the metal, and it seemed to pulse, as though communicating to him. “Sometimes, I wonder if I can feel him; under this. It is a him, err, isn’t it, he?” Akeala smiled and pressed Castano’s hand, onto the wall. “Yes, his name is Ginola. He is quite old in our world, a veteran ship, of thousands of Standard Years. He can feel you, when you touch him. He likes your touch. He isn’t really a he, however, as the Man-o-Wars don’t have a gender. But, they amuse themselves and us, by presenting themselves, as such.” Castano looked at the floor and the pulsing lights, which ran along the seams.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 30 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“You can try to think to him, if you want. He is there and will receive your thoughts, and may answer you.” She added. Castano smiled. “Perhaps. Right now, I see the commanders have us coming out from warp drives into the physical universe, around the rendezvous point.” They both looked at the screens, which had changed from their warp drive purple color, to the blackness of space, studded with stars. Amy looked on, at Akeala. She smiled to herself and wondered what it was like, to be young. She reflected back to her early days on Rambus, and the fun she and Anki used to have, until the pirates came, and they had to take refuge on Jilta. That was when Amy found out her friend Anki was actually the Master Templar’s daughter. “We were a pair, in that Royal Court,” reflected Amy. She sighed. That was taken away from her, when she and Anki went back to Rambus. They had to fight for their freedom, then. While they won, out of sheer evil some crazed group of psycho-surgeons had cut out part of Anki’s pre- frontal lobes, to prevent her from being victorious. Amy swore a dozen oaths, that she would even the score, a thousand times over. She swore at the image of Brandon Mirak, the images of the psycho- surgeons she had killed, and their patsy psychrons. She also recalled the Talkron, those seemingly

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 31 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

behind it all, those she had killed, and those she still had interned, in her own private mental universe. A tear rolled down her cheek, as she reflected her lost younger days, and how there was little room for fun, now. The universe really wasn’t what it seemed; out there. It was an illusion, painted over make believe. How long would it take, for all sentient life to be free, she wondered. Amy looked over, to see Akeala and Castano watching her. They smiled. They somehow understood. She reached up and touched the scars on her neck, from those days. She felt the mental pain, as much as anything physical. Akeala came over, and held Amy by the hand. “Aunty, we will be there soon, and you will be with your old friend, my mother.” Akeala couldn’t hold it back anymore, and she looked away with moist eyes, while trying to watch the approach; to Palbo. Castano understood. He said nothing. Down there, he also sensed the mixed feelings. There was that old hostility of Palbo: to the rest of the galaxy. There was still the underground network, of Talkron agents. He knew that the Temple hadn’t found them all, and that the hunt still went on. He could feel the anxiety of Akeala, for her mother. He even wondered about his own capability, to lead a joint Corduke-Boguard mission. It was an honor to be appointed as leader, but would it work? He wondered, at the similarities between the Cordukes and the Boguard.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 32 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Approaching Palbo

He wondered about the ship. He put his hand on Ginola’s wall, feeling him, as though somehow sensing him, through the metallic skin. He looked around slowly, as he thought he could hear a distant voice in his mind, telling him it would all work out; soon enough.

Ω

The rendezvous point for Jaron’s small Man-o- War squadron, wasn’t near any system. It was instead, a simple three-dimensional point in space selected, at random. It was a predetermined point so that the Man-o-War squadron, and the small Sandrist fleet under Poltan Beel’s command, could meet securely, and coordinate their next strategy. E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 33 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron signaled. Amanda. Yes, Captain. Sweep the area: for foreign fleets and troops. Yes, Captain. There was a five-second wait. All ships have come up, with the same result. There is no detectable other craft or life, within a light year all around. Thank you, Amanda. Prepare for rendezvous.

Ω

Tubin was excited. He was waiting, at the executive disembarkation gate. It didn’t matter that he was perhaps the most influential person on the planet. He made a point of following the rules, without favor. He had thirty Temple Guards, surrounding him. The spaceport security had cleared away most of the other personnel. There were an additional hundred City Security staff, on alert, through the building. For Tubin, this was his being there; without favor. Finally, Amy, Akeala, and two other Cordukes marched through the quarantine area. Amy and Akeala were Corduke Templars, prior to joining the Boguard. They never renounced their Temple fraternity, and why should they? They were still who they were, and the two doctrines didn’t conflict. Rather, they enhanced each other, they thought. Moreover, Goren Torren became Boguard, and even

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 34 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

if he did not found the Temple, he was its founding source. Tubin grinned, as his sister embraced him. He thought he might suffocate, as she squeezed him so hard. He looked sideways; as two photographers captured their image, immediately sending their shots and a brief story of Akeala, back to their editors. Once, they had been hailed as the royalty of Palbo, after Akeala and Tubin rescued their mother, and freed her from the hands of the Talkron. Finally, Akeala released her brother, but held his hand. Tubin looked at Amy. “Welcome to Palbo, Amy of Rambus.” He bowed deliberately low. “Thank you for bringing me, my sister.” He looked around and the guards were closing. Castano held back behind. Tubin looked back to him, and nodded. “Thank you, too, sir.” Tubin gave him a knowing look, recalling the time that they spent together, in the Southern Polar Region, rescuing his mother. Castano paid a deep professional bow. He felt privileged to serve. Amy looked around, at all the faces; watching. There were not only guards and C-S’s now, but also many civilians. “I think we need to get you all, into your floater,” advised Castano. “We can give you a short

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 35 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

briefing, on the way in. It is more secure. I’m beginning to feel vulnerable.” Tubin nodded. He waved his hand, the guards packed in tightly and they formed a column, to the exits.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 36 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 3

ABOUT EARTH

Beel was in his flagship theatre room. Jaron and his leaders were there. The room was illuminated with, its three dimensional model of the Sequetus Series, and all its new activity. The planets and ships were translucent laser projected images, allowing the commanders to move around amongst them.

The image of Earth and its two moons

Jaron stood by Earth. “Enlarge,” he commanded, and the image enlarged. “Bigger.” It did again. The scale was finally so big, he could observe people, on its surface.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 37 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“I can see; what you say. These Earth people have the freedom to go about their daily lives, for some reason. They have a small degree of technology, with animal-drawn transport.” He looked over to Beel and his commanders. “Do you have any guess, as to why they are there, not lifted off, and not part of an overall scene; here?” Beel shook his head. “They are primitive, but not unobserved. It seems that there are visits by out there, but it is seldom. I cannot see why they allow them to exist there, and non-intervened.” Jaron nodded. “That sounds familiar. Why, I wonder? What are they allowing to happen?” Beel answered. “We have no idea, without going down. However, as there are over fifteen hundred spacecraft around Earth and the inner planets, we cannot get near it.” Jaron stepped over to Mars. “There’s no interest here?” Beel shook his head. “It is vacant, I think. There are no ships going and leaving, that we can see.” “What about Sequetus 2, Venus?” The second planet out from the sun appeared, and enlarged. It was a planet with a noxious gaseous atmosphere. “There are corrosive elements in its atmosphere. However, there is a lot of activity around it, which we cannot explain. Most of it is here; around this region. Small ships go in; ferry craft go down, into the atmosphere, and then return, after a day. It

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 38 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

happens regularly every hundred hours. I can only guess that there is a base there; being supplied. I’ve no idea what the purpose would be for the base. It is however, the most heavily guarded planet and has at least thirty attack satellites around it, which is three times that of Earth. These satellites are very mobile. They will be hard to get around.” Jaron nodded. He looked at Belkron Blu. “Belkron, have you have seen this; before?” “No, my Lorde, I haven’t.” “You have a sense for the Talkron melodrama, and how they think. You’ve been hunting them; successfully. So; what is their motive, when they leave alone this society here. They also have protected another planet, which they almost never visited, and a mining camp on these two moons, one of which recently arrived.” Belkron looked around, at the holographs. He commanded various enlargements of the model. He walked, quietly asking for different planets to appear, and others, to vanish. He looked up. “They are related. They need these people. Perhaps, they are harvesting them, collecting them, to use in their mines, on the moons. They are taking something from these moons. The moons are both non-natural, to this planet. Earth originally never had a moon, until eleven thousand years ago. It came to Earth for a reason. It is being mined now, and it is possible that it was being mined, then. History said that the population of

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 39 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Earth wasn’t welcome, there. The terrestrials of Earth first arrived on their moon in 1969, and a few years later were forbidden to return.” Belkron had been studying all the available materials on the subject, for months. He walked around. “Sequetus 3 wasn’t allowed to be intervened, but was, on the other hand, seeded technology that sped its development fast, through to their atomic age. They developed warp drive travel seemingly accidentally, and exported it to Maluka. The planet was also used to manufacture drug resin, used by the Talkron for decades, to keep vat-grown bodies, drugged semi-conscious, so they could be controlled.” Belkron looked up. “We know it has to be a Talkron base, and likely has been, since the early days of its civilization.” Belkron didn’t know of the Pleiades and their attempts to colonize the planet, thousands of years before. Jaron knew about it, but let Belkron continue. “The planet has had various civilizations. There was an ancient electronics civilization, possibly the Talkron were responsible, based on an island in their Mediterranean. I believe they referred to it, by the same name as the outer ocean. However, that civilization collapsed and the whole island vanished for some reason. There was also an even earlier civilization, in what is Australia, going back before fifty thousand years. It also vanished.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 40 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Belkron walked around Venus. “Speed up, please,” he commanded. He could now see a spaceship. A ferry left the ship, and descended. “Faster,” he called. The ferry returned; after a third of a revolution of the planet, went into the ship, and then, the ship vanished, out from the system. Belkron walked around, more. He looked at the new arrivals. “If we could work out where the ships are from and going to that would help.”

Venus

He asked for the planet to rotate, so they could see more clearly, where the ships were operating.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 41 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He shook his head. “The carbon dioxide heats the surface up to uninhabitable temperatures, and the sulfuric acid in the atmosphere eats most metals. I can’t think of any reason why they are there. It isn’t mining, but it is something.” He looked up, at the commander. “Our job, is, what, to get more data?” Jaron looked around and closely observed each person. “Please, commanders, lock the doors, and turn off all communications.” The room sealed; Jaron looked around, having scanned all the minds; of those present. He looked at his fellow Boguard. “This is strictly confidential. No one, outside of this room, must learn of this. If there are others, who must know, I will personally brief them. You mustn’t discuss it amongst yourselves. Any questions must be asked now. Do I have your agreement?” The Cordukes and Boguard looked on; impassively. Those with Beel, swallowed. They nodded. “We agree,” they said, one by one. Jaron inspected all their minds, as they said so. They were clean, and honest. He leaned towards Beel. “You recall what Goren Torren was wearing, in his last days?” Beel took a sharp breath inwards. “Yes, of course. The Golden Cap.” Jaron looked at all of them. “Our task is to find it and bring it out, from Sequetus.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 42 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Poltan Beel whistled, to release the emotion, which was running through his mind. “This is fantastic. After the removal of his exalted body from the United Nations General Assembly Hall, where he was assassinated, the cap went missing. That was where it ended; there is no story, after that. On Sandrist, we have all speculated, on ways to find it.” Jaron smiled. “That is right. His body was hidden. Our job now, is to find it.” Beel looked around to the others. He felt goose bumps, going, up and down his spine. “It is a big planet, Lorde, but where do we look? There are so few of us; how can we know where to start the search? Jaron looked over, with a wide smile. “I have the whereabouts; up here,” he said, tapping his head with his forefinger. Beel nodded. “I see. I know many have tried to find the corpse, the remains, and searched for the Golden Cap. It has had a mystical quality, for hundreds of years, and there are big rewards for its retrieval. We had thought that someone must have the cap, and hidden it, for their own purposes.” Jaron looked at Beel. “The reason I was on that planet, those many lifetimes after I was assassinated, was to find the cap. It has enormous value.” Beel thought about that. “From what I recall, the wearer, Goren Torren, you if you like, could do

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 43 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

amazing things, using that cap. He could read thoughts, move objects, and more.” Jaron nodded. That is so, Commander. The commander’s pocket’s button undid by itself, and his room pass slowly exited, from the pocket, and drifted over to Jaron, who then pointed back to the commander, whereupon the pass returned: to his pocket. Beel stood there, transfixed, then pulled out the pass and stared at it. “Then… why do you need the cap?” he asked, as he turned over his card to inspect it. Jaron watched the card, as it grew, and then began to shrink, in size until it was no longer there, and then, he held open his hand, and it appeared.” Beel stood: with his mouth open. “That just teleported itself, without moving. That isn’t possible.” Jaron was watching them all. Everyone was watching him. “All is indeed possible, because everything is spiritual. Spiritual presence, created every piece of matter. There isn’t anything, that isn’t spiritually created, anywhere. Every piece of inanimate matter has some life in it, to some degree. It is all life. Nothing is absolutely dead. Not even broadmatter. All I am doing is communicating with matter; letting it decide it wants to do what I’m asking it to do. I remind you, that you are bound to that agreement of silence, which you all pledged, a while ago.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 44 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

No one spoke, so he continued. “Knowing this, I imbue that matter with more life, so it is able to decide itself, what it wants to be, where and how it is going to get there.” “But…” stammered Beel. Jaron smiled. “This, is also the power of the Talkron. This is my power. It is merely being able to communicate. This was very common on planet Earth; in its founding days. There were real magicians, down there. Many legends wrote, of their ability. This is how they worked. I know it looks like I’m doing the moving, or I’m making things vanish. However, it isn’t me. It is the life, within the matter, itself doing it, upon my suggestion.” “What about the cap,” asked Beel. “That enhances the wearer’s ability, anything from up to hundreds times, maybe thousands. That is all. Enhancing the wearer’s ability, to communicate with the physical universe, does it. People normally have veers when they communicate, but the cap tends to remove the veers, enabling the wearer to push his communication through the veers. With that, brings the understanding of the inanimate physical universe, to want to comply.” Beel swallowed. He was living in the greatest time of all, now. He knew it. His dream as a young boy was to be here, in this moment. Jaron nodded to him. It was that dream that led you to me, and brought me; to you.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 45 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron continued. “I can feel many of you asking, why there are no more Golden Caps. The answer is that this cap came from a technology: from the future. That technology itself, originated from this cap. The cap was taken by the Talkron, perverted to their use, and it somehow ended up in a program matrix, we know as Centrecom. Goren Torren and the Boguard fought Centrecom thousands of years from now, in the future. Goren brought the cap back, through time. We removed it from a small gray alien in the future, who also came back through time. It is a loop, as time is on a loop. There was an anomaly in the physical universe, right here, over this planet. It connected the past and the future. The Talkron need that cap, to create their future. They can see the future and the past, just as I can, too. However, to have any lasting permanent effect, they need this cap, with its technology, from that future.” Beel sighed, to everyone’s relief. “Then that means whoever has that cap, will have control of the future, more or less. If you had a thousand times the ability you just displayed, or if they had it….” He let out another deep sigh.

Ω

Akeala watched, as their floater passed over ninety-story buildings. They were in the top most level, the fourth floater level up, which only

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 46 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

important dignitaries used. She just kept hold of her brother’s hand. “I just get excited, being here. Palbo is such a lively planet, full of people moving, huge buildings above and below the ground. It’s not like stuffy old Jilta, which has so many regulations that you can’t do anything.” “You can study, Akeala,” said Amy. “Oh, Aunt Amy. You are so awful. That horrid academia on Jilta. It is so old. Even the professors seem as old as the buildings, and about as lively.” Amy looked out the window and chuckled. Akeala was so full of life. They could see Tarj Himble, coming into view. Its towers stood two hundred pacs high, with six corners. The floater was slowly descending. The buildings seemed to grow. Tubin looked at all three of them, squarely. “So; why are you here? This is an important mission. The three of you, in just one ship? What is it?” “We are here, for Mother.” explained Akeala. “Papa is going to fix her. It is simple.” Tubin looked around, as though the floater may have had ears. “You think that he can?” he asked very quietly, with his eyes getting moist. He looked out of the window. Akeala nodded excitedly. She squeezed his hand again, and he looked back. Tubin glanced to Amy. Had she gestured to him? “We are here, to transport her. That is all.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 47 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Tubin sat back. “That makes sense. You are her best friend, Amy, and Aki, her daughter.” He looked at Castano. “A top Corduke. It makes sense. When?” “Now,” explained Akeala. “We must lift off, within an hour. No choice, brother; those are our orders.” She looked to Castano, who slowly nodded. “We cannot even stay the night. We cannot risk it.” Tubin sat back, comprehending everything. “I suppose you cannot tell me, about where you are going?” Amy leaned forward. “If we could, and it got out, you would be in jeopardy. So; no.” Tubin straightened. “I understand. Let’s go down to the west wing. She is there. We can collect her now, put her on this floater and be back at the departure terminal, in an hour.” Amy looked at Akeala and Castano. “If we do something like that, it will be fine.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 48 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Palbo: Taj Himble arrival port

Tubin looked at her; sideways. She wasn’t telling all. He just smiled. He loved Amy now like his mother. The floater slowly came down, through the city, and nestled onto its private landing pad. The hatch opened and they all alighted. “Follow me,” called Tubin, as he led them inside, and then down a series of corridors.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 49 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 4

ANKI

Tubin led the group in, to find Anki standing at the window. She just looked out, at the traffic below. “She does that, a lot,” explained Tubin. He turned to Anki. “Hello, mother. Guess what, Akeala is here again, and so is your friend, Amy. They want to take you, to see Papa.” Anki just looked out, and watched a floater, going by. Amy stood beside Anki and held her hand. “It is me, Anki. Remember Rambus, how you saved me, from the pirates?” Anki looked at her sideways, and gave a small hint of knowing. “We are going on another adventure, to see Jaron.” Amy looked over towards Tubin and said. “Have someone pack her belongings. We have all of ten minutes. No more. Please, hurry.” Tubin waved at the guards and called in a woman, who tended Anki. She quickly gathered what she could. Anki’s clothes were spread out on her bed fast. Amy was getting irritable. “This isn’t good. I can feel it. Hurry. Quickly, Aki. Get out of here. Take what we have, no more.” Tubin felt flatfooted. “What…”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 50 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amy dived at them and screamed. “Down, everyone down.” Explosions erupted outside, and light flashed past the windows. “That floater, out there, just fired missiles, and more are on their way. They are after Anki. You have Talkron in your neighborhood, Tubin. Grab what you can, and get to the lower levels, to the courtyard, outside.” Three more missiles exploded, prematurely. An anti-missile battery, which Tubin had installed, was working furiously. Anki’s carer was already outside with the bags. She was part of Tubin’s intelligence corps. “Follow me,” she cried, and pushed Anki and Akeala, hard ahead. “Don’t stop until I say so, but run, Akeala run. Lorde Tubin, I have three armed details on their way now, to specifically protect you.” The walls took an explosion, but held, behind her. The rooms shook, but were heavily reinforced with steel to withstand much of the impact. Then, again and twice more the explosions happened. Akeala heard firing, overhead, and explosions in the air, outside too. Tubin called out, “Marie, get them all down, below. The anti-missile batteries are failing. There are too many, out there.” They were in the courtyard, when a bright light appeared overhead. “It’s ours,” called Amy. Castano was speaking to someone, using his collar microphone.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 51 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

A hundred and fifty Templar guards quickly surrounded them, waiting, looking up and around. It calmed. The light slowly descended past the walls, to the courtyard. The glow lessened, to reveal the small Man-o-War. A hatch opened, and the landing stairway exited. In seconds, they were inside. Amy was on the bridge with Captain, Mahn. “Like old days, Amy of Rambus, Goddess of War.” He laughed. Amy smiled. I like your ship, and your style, Captain. Thank you, Madam. Our next stop will be at the rendezvous point, near Sequetus. Amy nodded, as she watched Tubin, barking orders, in the dust, and running his defenses. She could feel that he was in his element. She envied him. They just shot down the last three floaters, with three Templar destroyers still overhead. The number of green lasers from above finally eased off. Tubin had been waiting for an excuse. The Temple was under blatant attack by the Talkron, again. There was going to be another purge in Palbo, and Amy wasn’t going to be there.

Ω

Jaron was pacing the modeling room, of the Sequetus solar system. This was an amphitheater,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 52 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

bigger than the previous room. In this room, they magnified holographic images of planets to become the equivalent, of three stories high. The resolution was excellent, and like before, built of lasers and holograms. “See here, the Martian pyramids,” he said softly. Beel shook his head. “Lorde, they were searched, by parties from Earth, many times. There was no evidence, of your earlier body being there.” Jaron nodded. “I understand that. However, how did they search? One of the last images I recall, was watching the large pyramid from space, and followed by the face at Cydonia, and then; nothing.” Beel looked at the planet. He stepped closer, to the pyramid. It enlarged. It was big, especially by Earth standards. Jaron walked over to it. There was only he and Beel, in the huge amphitheater. “You have to get me and one or two others, down there.” “Aye, that’s a hard one. Get’n you down, is easy. Unseen isn’t possible.” Jaron looked around the Sequetus System for a clue, but found none. “There is a way. We just have not thought of it; yet. In my mind I see us there, in the future, so keep thinking, Commander.” “They are alert to us, and I have lost good men, already. I can’t think of a good disguise,” explained Beel. Jaron looked over, at the asteroid belt. “What about, as a meteor?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 53 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Beel looked at him puzzled. “What do you mean; disguised as a meteor?” “Yes, or a comet, disguised, so we can go down; onto Mars.” Beel rolled his eyes. “A comet? A ball of ice? To go crashing onto Mars? How would you survive? That is ridiculous, but something they wouldn’t suspect.” Beel thought for a moment. “We would need to get a comet that was so far out; one that wasn’t suspected and seen, by all that inner activity. Then; you would need to get into it, wrap it around you and then…. This is so good. You’d hurtle your way towards Mars; on a natural trajectory.” Jaron liked Beel. “How will you stop, but still create the effect of impacting.” Jaron smiled. “As I explained about communicating, it will work. I can do that, with my ship.” Beel shook his head, smiling. He felt excited again, about the mission. He had stopped in space, for too long. He was calling up all the Sequetus comets, and their trajectories on the computer, looking for just the right one. If they found one, which wasn’t being tracked, it was going to have to be close to a collision course with Mars.

Ω

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 54 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amy was looking around and saw Akeala watching her mother. “Is something bothering you, Aki?” Akeala walked over. “No, just the opposite. I think my mother is calmer here, more present, and less … down the road, if you know what I mean.” Amy looked affectionately, at the young woman. She saw she was still growing up, becoming wiser, more observant. “Yes, that is to be expected, in a Man-o-War. There is a lot of life around, everywhere. It’s in the walls, the air, and the benches. Your father was right; to bring her here.” They both watched Anki, as she seemed to be caressing the ship wall, looking at it, maybe looking at the molecular structure, or something. Anki was now putting her face, against the wall. Castano was watching her now, too. He spoke to Amy. “She is aware of us, more now, and now knows that we are watching her. She wasn’t like this before; she never really noticed others, around her.” Akeala stopped next to Castano. Amy looked at the pair of them, together. Akeala liked this man and looked at Castano. “Oh,” Amy said, “The captain wants you to know, that we will be coming out from warp drives soon and will be rendezvousing; with the fleet.” Akeala’s heart jumped. They were getting closer, to action. She stepped over and held her mother’s hand. “You will be seeing Papa soon; Jaron.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 55 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

At the word Jaron, Anki turned and looked at Akeala and nodded. Her mouth moved, as though she was trying to get something out, and then gave up. She nodded and smiled.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 56 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 5

COMETSIDE

Jaron was outside. It wasn’t black. The stars shone so brightly, like distant beacons, all calling for his attention. There was no twinkling, like on an atmosphered planet. The stars just shone, brightly. Jaron could see the sun in the distance, like the brightest star. Amanda. Yes, Captain? Do we need more? Yes, Captain. I can feel out there, and that means they can feel in here? Talkron? He asked. Yes, it is a two-way process. Jaron looked towards the four other Man-o-Wars and their crews; outside. They had been collecting micro comets, and crews of Boguard had been assembling them, around Amanda. The theory was that all the smaller comets, which collected, would congeal, into one large comet. It would hide Amanda completely. It would travel to Mars, over the next months, arrive and fall, into the Martian atmosphere. It would then break up and crash, onto the surface, around the Cydonia region. They had been building the comet, for several weeks, and it looked authentic. It was seventy meters across, brown, with ice all around Amanda.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 57 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ω

Jaron looked at the other four Man-o-Wars. He was ready, with little more that could he do. If it didn’t work, the attempt would expose them, and they would have to warp out. They now waited. It wasn’t long before a sixth Man-o-War arrived. It jostled for position, closer to Amanda. Jaron could feel the thoughts, of Amy inside. Her thinking was always very direct and easy to feel. He smiled at the flickering thoughts, of his daughter. Yes, he could feel the presence of Anki, too. She had grown mentally outward. Jaron was back, in his captain’s chair. Now? Came the thought from Amanda. Yes now. The two ships docked. The airlocks synchronized. The passengers, from the new ship, passed to Amanda’s ship. Then, the air locks separated and resealed, and Amanda took prominent position again, as the large dirty snowball. The Boguard next set to work covering Amanda’s docking bay, with the last of the ice and comet debris. Captain. Yes, Amanda. The ships have separated, and we are on our way: destination Mars. Thank you.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 58 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Just then, Amy and the other three arrived, on Jaron’s bridge. They were his full complement of crew. Akeala stepped over and hugged her father. “Papa, it is good to see you, but what are we doing: here?” Jaron smiled. “You will learn, soon enough.” He looked at Amy who came over and shook his hand. He smiled, looking at her, eye to eye. “Well done again, my friend. You are amazing. I felt that you had to fight your way, off Palbo?” he asked. Amy shook her head. “I’m afraid we had to flee, and your son Tubin is having all the fun, fighting Talkron back there.” Jaron looked towards Castano. Castano saluted. “Sir.” Jaron extended his hand. “No need, Captain, not with just my family present. You have completed a successful mission.” “Thank you, sir,” Castano responded, shaking Lorde Jaron’s hand. Jaron then turned, to see one other. He stood, looking at her. She looked at him. He took a step closer. She also moved closer to him. Akeala held her hand to her mouth, clenching her jaw tight. She saw that her mother recognized her husband, perhaps the first time in decades. She was about to say something, when Amy put her own hand on Akeala’s arm and whispered. “Keep it closed, child. Watch.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 59 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron could feel the thoughts, building up in her mind. He watched Anki’s eyes. She looked at him, and a tear formed, and rolled down her cheek. Welcome back, he thought to her. Thank you, and it is so good to see you, too. They embraced. They looked at each other. Both were in a mild release of grief. Akeala wiped tears, from her own eyes. Jaron and Anki continued staring, looking and exchanging thoughts. For Anki, it was like being freed from prison. Akeala could feel it, too. She thought, Mother? Anki turned, looked at her daughter, and fell to her knees; crying and hugged her daughter for the first time, since she gave birth. I’m so sorry, so sorry. I’m so sorry, my little Aki. So sorry, I couldn’t be with you, to see you grow up. Akeala wiped tears from her eyes, sniffing. I too Mama. I had aunt Amy with me. She told me about you, Rambus, and Jilta. You had many adventures…. And …. I wasn’t there with, you. Mama, and Akeala started crying, again. Anki started to cry, as well. Amy watched and smiled, wiping her eyes. Akeala eventually pulled back, turned to Amy and asked, “How?” Amy looked sideways, at the ship. “Amanda is translating the thoughts, to Anki and her thoughts, to us. She has strong penetrating communication abilities. She tunes into Jaron, and can sense him

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 60 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

millions of Ks away. He cares for you Anki, and me, therefore Amanda can tune into us. She is translating, in a sense. You think to your mother, Amanda picks it up, she intensifies it and passes it on to Anki. Anki thinks back, which only Amanda is strong enough to pick up, amplifies it, and sends it to us. That is right, Amy. It was Anki. Anki knelt down in front of Akeala. You look like me, when I was young. I was wild, too. Here, give me your hand and feel the side of the ship. She put Akeala’s hand on the side. It tingles. Yes. Now, feel Amanda. Akeala put her hand on the side of the ship, and ran it over the console. “It feels warm, like it belongs with me. I like the feel of it; very nice.” Anki looked up. “Thank you. Thank you, Amanda.” “Mama,” cried Akeala. “You are cured, Papa was right, you can talk!” Jaron slowly stepped over. “Anki can speak here, and probably close to the ship, but that is all, correct Amanda?” Jaron looked up. That’s likely so. I can bypass the burned out circuitry, in her body’s brain. The circuitry is what enables her to see and experience all the senses. Without it, none can experience this universe fully. I receive and relay the thoughts for her and you at speed. When a brain is cut up, and burned out, it

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 61 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

doesn’t function properly. Victims of psycho- surgeons are lucky, if they know they are alive, because really, they aren’t. However, in my ship, I can help. Akeala looked at Castano. He and all the others were able to experience Amanda. For the next months, they traveled on, to Mars. Akeala tried to learn to thought-talk better. She had a new admiration for her father, her mother, Amy and even herself. She seemed to be older; more mature. As her mother was able to communicate to her daughter, both released burdens, which they had been keeping bottled, for decades.

Ω

The comet hurtled inwards, on a collision course with Mars. It had passed the asteroids, and was closing in, on its target. Jaron was the only one on the bridge. The others were researching the planets, specifically Earth and Mars. Amanda had been supplied with Boguard historical data, about Sequetus, prior to the mission. There were also the recordings, which Beel’s group had found. Finally, it was impact-day. All were on the bridge. They settled themselves into their seats. Akeala didn’t think she would ever overcome the concept, of having a chair wrap itself around her. Ready, Amanda?

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 62 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yes, Captain. Disengaging the first bundles, now. They began to enter the Martian atmosphere. The comet’s tail was over a million Ks long and Jaron knew that they were being observed. They could feel the shudder, as the first layers of ice evaporated. It was minus-ninety degrees out there, in the atmosphere, but the friction burned the ice, regardless.

From outside, the comet looked like any other bundle of ice and disintegrated into streams of separate tails, as the ice balls fell apart. Amanda noticed a satellite, watching, repositioning itself, as the comet thundered through

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 63 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

the atmosphere. While the comet went further down, into lower levels, it broke further into many fragments, and Amanda put on her inertial brakes, to decelerate her decent. They soon stopped. Inside, the crew felt nothing unusual. They were now on the Mars surface.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 64 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 6

MARS BASE

It was night, and they had only a short time before Mars would rotate, to expose them to the majority of the Sequetus operations. Amanda opened the hold doors. It was still dark and they had to work fast. Jaron and Amy drove out on two machines. One was a tractor-crawler, and the other a driller; both with detachable arms.

Mars surface

Akeala and Castano were standing outside, suited up. Amanda moved back, as the others started to dig beneath her. It took several hours but they had covered and buried Amanda with enough sand and E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 65 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

lose rocks, so that she looked to be only a third exposed. The sun was just beginning to come up; meaning they would be vulnerable, to the inner workings of Sequetus. If Amanda was noticed now, she should look millennia old. Amanda also put on her best cloaking of light rays, and effectively vanished, from view.

Amanda buried and disguised

Akeala shook her head, as she could only see the sand, behind her. She turned and bounded, after her father and the others. The sun was rising, meaning they were behind schedule. She passed, what appeared to be ruins of some past civilization, but weathered beyond easy recognition. She thought she could see walls, and in her mind, she pictured activities, a race of people going about their daily business. E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 66 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ruins on Mars

Moments later, they were facing the enormous towering pyramid, of Mars. Amy looked up. “Are you sure that it was here?” “Yes,” came the voice, in Amy’s and the other’s helmets. “It’s just a few degrees, to your left.” Anki was watching on the screen, from inside Amanda. “Yes,” she said. “There it is, the entrance

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 67 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

blocks: in front of you.” She was watching the four of them out there, while she oversaw the operations from within Amanda. It is like old times for me, Amanda, thought Anki. I understand, replied the craft. How many years were you stationed here, back then? Only a thousand odd years ago. Then, my name was Anqi. That is interesting, how I got my new body to be born into, but my name or being seems to be the same. Yes, interesting, Anki. What does that make me? Anki looked at the ship and laughed. Amazing! Where do you come from? The same, as you. That huge bank of life- source, on the other side of the physical universe, answered Amanda. Hmmm. I never studied much, under my father, the Master Templar. So, I’m not sure what I believe in, regarding that. However, I’m extraordinarily grateful, to be able to function normally. How did it work again, me being around you? The theory?

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 68 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The pyramid on Mars

Amanda would have smiled at that moment, if she had bodily form. She answered. It is a bit more, than just being a translator, Anki. I have a strong link, to that bank of life, beyond the physical universe. Human kind has a similar link, but it is much fainter, less strong or intense. Your body interferes with your link. All I’m doing, is joining your link, to mine and overcoming the breaks in the body, which is preventing life from flowing through the body’s brain. The body is always sending impulses to cells. However, in your case most of those pathways were destroyed, severed, or rerouted, creating blocked or diverted energy flows. What I have done, is taken the DNA imprint of what those pathways were, to override the breaks, and form new pathways, through damaged cells, around which new cells can regenerate. Will I be better, after I leave here? asked Anki, really wanting to know.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 69 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

I supply a lot of energy and effort, to seal those breaks. After I seal a break, send the current and create new pathways, no you won’t just be better; you will be as new. However, while I’m still doing this, the pathways aren’t fully formed, and you will be better, but not whole. You will be whole, after you stay here, for some time, but not before then. When will that be? asked Anki. Honestly, I don’t know, replied Amanda. The team is inside the entry now.

Ω

The door closed behind the team, and the lights showed the track ahead. A few minutes later, they came to another solid door. Anki had given instructions, on how to get it opened and they worked. She remembered it all. They were in the main complex, now. One more door and they should come out, into the main cavern. Yes, it was there. They all walked, into the large void. There was oxygen, at twelve percent. Jaron undid his helmet, breathed the air. It smelled a little musty, but good. The others followed his lead. They looked around. There was still light. Jaron thought he could hear some noises and called out in his best Standard Galactic, “Hello, is anyone here?” There was another noise, but no reply.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 70 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Akeala whispered to Amy, “It is a bit strange here. Ahhhh!” she screamed, as something dashed past, to her right. Amy drew her gun, ready to shoot. There was some movement, in a shadow. Jaron felt with his mind, then smiled and began to laugh. “Come on, come here.” He called out. “I have something, from Anqi. You remember Anqi.” Jaron reached down to take some protein food, from his pouch. He held it out. Akeala was staring at her father, as though he had lost his mind. However, he just crouched there, beckoning whatever was in the shadows, to come out. There was more movement; and Akeala could see a pair of eyes, and then a small dark head with pointed ears, whiskers. It finally came out, from the shadows. It was pure pitch black, except for its yellow eyes. Akeala could see, that it, too, was scared. She bent down. “Who are you, little one?” “Kuro,” came Anki’s answer, over the earphone. She had been watching, from the ship. “She is a pure black feelup. They are tame. Jaron is right. Give her a little food. I was hoping they might be there.” Akeala took the food from her father, knelt down, opened the pouch and held it out, for the feelup. “Here, little Miss Kuro, this is for you.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 71 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The feelup edged closer and closer, and slowly took a morsel from the pouch, put it in her mouth and bounded back, to the dark underbrush. Other feelups were there. In a few seconds two older ones came out, with little Kuro. They bounded over to Akeala and begged. The little one put out her paw, and waved it slowly up, and down. Akeala looked back, at her father and Amy. “These are so cute, Papa. They are Martian?” Jaron nodded. “Yes, all that is left of them. We have to move on.” Akeala straightened, put more food on the ground, waved to the feelups, stood and left them behind. The little black feelup however, just followed, staying a comfortable distance behind.

Ω

“So; where is it, Papa?” asked Akeala. “In due course, Aki. Firstly, I want to find out what is going on here, and if there is any record of what happened, to those, who were out there. This was a Federation scientific station and it should have records. Its project was to observe the Sequetus system of planets, and send back data.” Jaron looked out at a door, which exited from the enormous cavern. Jaron stepped, into the vaguely familiar work center. Amy looked around at the equipment.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 72 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amanda, can you override and get the computer active? thought Jaron. There was a delay of several seconds and then the lights flickered on. Jaron and his party felt the air drift past, and saw the far computer banks come to life. Thank you. Can you search for what happened? Again, there was a delay. Then, a voice came on, for the entire group to hear, through in their headsets. Amanda’s soothing voice explained, “As Earth became more dominant, after Lorde Hymondy’s intervention, there was no need for a scientific observation post, on Mars. The scientists were removed 2245 Earth date.” “Any mention of the body of Goren Torren, in any computer?” “No Goren. I mean, Jaron.” MY APOLOGIES, explained Amanda. It is hard when you two are the same. Even ships can make errors. Apologies accepted. Jaron turned, towards the others. “Let’s get back to our machines. We need to start examining the ground and the structure, next.” As they left, a black tail brushed gently past Akeala’s leg. She looked down. It sat and motioned with its paw, for more food. Akeala couldn’t resist and picked it up, and held it in her arms. It looked at her and nuzzled its furry chin, against Akeala’s cheek.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 73 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“That tickles, Miss Kuro. Here, I will put you down and give you more of Papa Jaron’s protein food. Here you are.” The little feelup grabbed the food and took it away a few pacs, where it could eat it, undisturbed. The party moved on.

Ω

Equipped with sounding devices, depth research machines, devices that could look through walls, the machines whirred and the group got to work. It was dark, and away from the eyes of inner Sequetus. The machines had been brought from Jilta, exactly for this purpose, to find whatever was, in this huge pyramid, which others had given up on searching for. Jaron was looking at the three dimensional green holographic map, that had formed over the ground, outside. They were now testing every block, in the subfloor structure. Amy, on the other hand, was inside, inspecting every block in the tall walls of the cavern, above. So far, each block proved to be solid. All data was relayed, back to Amanda. Akeala occasionally fed Miss Kuro inside, who would then run back and share her treat, with other feelups.

Ω

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 74 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

After twelve hour’s work, they stopped. It was close to morning, on Mars time. Unlike being aboard a Man-o-War, the group did age outside, and so they needed food and sleep, in that order. Amy checked with Jaron, to find out where he thought the fruit type trees were. Castano brought in prepared stores, from the ship. Akeala played with her new friend, the feelup. During the second day, Amy finally cried out, “I have it, or part of it.” Jaron looked up. He came over, with the others. Amy pointed up, into the bluish hue. “Look through there. There are blocks that are hollow, enough in which to put several bodies.” She displayed the hologram, in front of her. “It looks like it isn’t accessible, from inside. Only from out there. The block is actually ten smaller blocks and they are a mosaic, of other blocks. It appears, when I blow this up, that they have lids. It must be it: Jaron.” Castano smiled and noticed the small Miss Kuro, by his feet. “Can you get up there?” he asked. The feelup looked at him, then way up to the ceiling and then looked at him, again. She shook her head. Castano stared at her. Did that animal just answer him? He wondered. It walked over and brushed up against him, then sat back and looked at him. It nodded its head.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 75 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Aki, what is in the protein food, which are feeding her?” asked Castano, as he quickly loped over, after the young woman.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 76 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 7

ON MARS

They were outside. The two machines were up, on the top of the pyramid, hundreds of pacs, above the ground. Castano had erected a platform and scaffolding.

Jaron was in the machine, up on the side of the pyramid, carefully moving the controls, to pull at the block that was in front of the hollow one. It gave.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 77 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Castano was on the ground, with a viewscreen in front of him. He signaled more. It moved more. Castano stepped back from his bench on the ground, and waved to get them to drag it further. Finally, he held up his hand to indicate stop. It was stuck. It wouldn’t budge. Amy was up, by the block, on a temporary scaffold. She peered over and looked down, into the cavity, left behind. “It is caught against another block. I think I can reach down, to get a cord around it, so that we can pull it free.” Jaron put his machine on suspended-park. He carefully slid over, and glanced down, through his helmet. “Yes, put it here.” He held the cord, and let it slowly dangle down, carefully of its own accord. It threaded itself, by itself, around and away from the rock, back up to him. Amy looked at the cord, and then at Jaron. “Communication?” Jaron smiled at her, made his way back to the machine, and threaded the top of the cord, around the extended machine arm. Slowly, he raised the machine. The cord went tight. “Stand clear, Amy,” he called, over the radio. “I’m going to tug it up, and I don’t want it to snap and whiplash you. We don’t need lacerated suits; out here.” The machine slowly pulled, the tension was bending the arm. Amy got well clear. The cord went

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 78 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

tighter. Jaron imagined himself inside the block. He could feel the ridge of stone that was holding them apart and he agreed that it should give. It did, and his floater sped, backwards. The rope flicked out fast and some dust and stones flew out, from the pyramid hole. Once the dust had gone Amy carefully and slowly peered inside. She looked around. She was helped by Akeala, and slowly slid down. “It’s dark,” she said, as she turned on a torch. She tugged at the block, under her feet. She reached up for a crow bar, offered by Akeala. It gave her a better result. Jaron was looking, down over the hole. He could see the top of the block below, moving. “Is it a top plate?” he asked. Amy pried some more. She looped a rope around it and tossed the top to Akeala, who started to lift it. Amy shone her light, inside the now revealed hollow block. “You have it, Jaron. Two corpses; one tall and one short.” “Vila,” said Jaron, to no one in particular, feeling a lump of deep sadness, stick in his throat.

Ω

Twenty minutes later, they had the corpses, inside the Cydonia scientific laboratory. For Jaron, it was strange, looking at the corpse, of what he remembered was an older image, of himself. Amy

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 79 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

was slowly taking apart the casks holding the remains. “They are fairly very well preserved. The skull has not shrunk, and the golden cap is still present. Should I attempt to remove it?” she asked, as she prodded the edge of the skull. “No,” said Jaron, as he felt a nip on his own head. “Do that again,” he said. “What, this?” and she pushed at the frozen scalp, under the cap. “Ow! Yes. Any ideas, Amanda?” asked Jaron. “Yes, I do,” replied Amanda over voice-phone. “The cap resonates, at a certain frequency. It is the same way, in which I charge this ship. It is built with minute coils, made from tiny fibers. On Earth, this technology was discovered, at the beginning of their 1900s1. When you have two coils, next to each other, if you pass a current through one coil, it induces a current in the other, by drawing in latent energy, from the surrounding atmosphere. It also draws on the latent energy of broadmatter. That is something else. Theoretically, Jaron, if you installed a cap with no limits, in my ship, and it was big

1 INFORMATION: Nikola Tesla: An American inventor and electrical engineer, who developed a means of extracting energy from the atmosphere. See the glossary and notes Book 19. The Tesla Coil would induce great quantities of electricity into a large coil, by running next to it a very small coil, with a small volume of power. The smaller coil induced larger volumes of power into the larger one, from the atmosphere.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 80 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

enough, you could travel at the speed of light squared and squared again. However, back to your cap, it induces power from the surrounding energies, lying latent in broadmatter, or even an atmosphere. Therefore, as you touch it, and it’s tuned into your thought frequency, it feels the impact, and so will you. I believe the best thing is to remove the cap very carefully, now. I have scanned it. It is crude, but very clever.” Jaron nodded to Amy, who was accompanied, by Castano. Three hours later, it was removed. Jaron’s nerves had become so on edge that he had to relocate himself, to the protection of the ship. However, now they were back aboard looking at the cap, and Amanda was displaying the micro circuitry in various levels, on her screens.

“I see how it works,” said Amy. “I don’t see why it is here, and not in some museum, or even with the Boguard.” “That puzzles me, too,” replied Jaron.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 81 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Castano butted in. “What would happen, if this technology was available to the galaxy, headed up by humans, from Earth?” Amy laughed. “It would be a war so great that no side would win. It is most likely that Earth would prevail against all opposition, and it would make the skirmishes between long and short-lifers to date, seem insignificant.” “There was something written on the block cover, which I removed, but I couldn’t make sense of it,” confessed Castano. “Akeala,” Jaron said, as he saw Miss Kuro in Akeala’s arms, “You and Captain Castano return out there, and bring back images. You have about fifteen minutes outside, before we are in visual sight, of the next satellite.” Akeala put down the feelup, and grabbed Castano by the tunic, to lead him away. Castano looked back at the feelup, as it waved a paw up and down at him. Five minutes later, Jaron was receiving the images in the laboratory. He pointed to Amy, to look. “It is in English, an offshoot of an early Standard: ‘There here, lie two. We pray that what they stood for, and what they possess, does not kill more in the name of good, to overcome evil.” Amy looked at the pictures. “It is a bit cryptic, but I think it backs up your theory.” Amanda? asked Jaron. Yes, Captain. I concur with you.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 82 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ω

They all sat around the conference room, of the ship. Akeala promised to remove the feelup at the next shift change. Interestingly, Amanda didn’t object to the small animal as it sniffed its way around. Only once did it become frightened, and that was when it jumped onto the captain’s chair, wishing to groom itself. A tiny little jolt went into the seat, as it landed. It jumped into the air, and from thereafter, was very suspicious of the seat. Jaron looked at the cap and the wires, which protruded. He held it up and looked around, to the others. “Once worn, it aged the wearer’s body dramatically.” Amanda piped in. “Captain, it doesn’t have to be that way. Those coils are arranged, so that they interfered with the body’s life processes, as well. They sped up the aging process, by a factor of ten. If you wore this, you’d be dead in two to three years. You are already DNA’d to be a short-lifer.” Jaron shrugged. “Any solution?” asked Castano. Yes. I can instruct you on how to make new coils, aboard this ship. They are coils, within coils, within coils. We make them tighter, of smaller filaments, and we don’t connect them to the body. That only serves to use the body, as a conducting antenna, to grab at the energy, from the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 83 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

broadmatter. It eventually kills the antenna. I can make a better one, still tuned to you – but one, which the wearer can remove, anytime. It isn’t permanent, and I believe it will be more powerful. In addition, to be honest, it’s a bit frightening, to think about what it can do. I think it will serve, for what you are hoping. “Thank you, Amanda. I believe I understand it now,” said Castano. “So; the coils in this cap, or helmet, act as a resonating field, that act to induce more energy, to the energy already created by the user, and that new energy comes from broadmatter.” Correct. Jaron then looked at Akeala while speaking to Amanda. “Can you make a variable cap, which can be used by different users? One that can be tuned to Anki, for example.” Jaron’s eyes pleaded, at the thought. Akeala read him easily. “Papa, that is so clever. That was why she is here. You are a genius.” She leaned over and hugged him. Obviously I can, and now must, came Amanda’s reply.

Ω

Jaron had already prepared, for what he thought he might have needed, and the stores were already there, in the ship. He had researched this mission

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 84 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

for months, examining what he thought might be able to be done, and what might be needed. Part of the technology of the cap, came from the future. Here, was the cap developed and placed, inside the little alien Vila, before Goren Torren had it surgically removed. This was a technology, that wasn’t meant to be. Yet, there was something afoot out there with the Talkron, and it had something to do, with this cap. Jaron had suspected that the real reason for lifting everyone off from Earth, over the past seven hundred years, might have been to find this cap. Jaron was under no belief, that what they might be doing now; would be dangerous, if the device fell into the wrong hands.

Ω

The next morning, Jaron was surprised, when he ordered his daughter to take Miss Kuro off the bridge. The ship doors wouldn’t open. He looked at Akeala, and then at the feelup, which seemed to be shaking its head, in Aki’s arms. Jaron stood back. “All right, Amanda. Tell me what’s going on.” He looked around to the ship. A voice came through the air. “She is life, like I am and you are. You have not asked me, and yet I am the ship. You have not asked Kuro, either.” Castano was standing behind them, and he started to chuckle. He shook his head.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 85 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amanda didn’t want Kuro to leave, though Amanda explained that Kuro could, if she wanted. Kuro, it seemed, just wanted to sniff every compartment, and every locker that she could find, in her new adventure and she hadn’t finished doing that, yet.

Ω

Jaron and Amy were looking, at the new cap. There were parts left over, from the dissected old one, on the table. Amy held it. “I have to admire Centrecom’s worlds, which made this. It is clever, and the technology to make the loops is extraordinary. The micro chipping is so small. Nevertheless, Amanda is right. Her version is much better.” They sat back, admiring at it. “I don’t know Papa. It might fry your brain,” queried Akeala. Anki was there. She held it up. “It had its limits before. Possibly this time it isn’t harmful, to the wearer. She picked it up, handed it to Jaron. “Husband, this is yours. Wear it, and don’t be that old body again.” She bowed her head, as a slight formality. Jaron accepted the cap, and slipped it over his head. “It feels, warm. Nothing else. Yes, very warm, but it doesn’t feel dangerous.” He took the cap off. “Record that test, as passed.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 86 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron put the cap back on. He looked at the chair and it rose. It returned to the floor. “No additional feeling.” He looked at a large rock that had been brought in, for the experiment. It vanished. Jaron removed the cap. “A slight fractional heat feeling, to the side of both temples. That is all.” Akeala looked at the cap in her father’s hands. “How does it work, Papa?” “As I’m mainly inside my own head, this device receives its instruction from my aura, which surrounds me. It then enhances that aura, by pulling in energy from broadmatter, further away. The interaction or friction between the aura’s energy going out, and the energy coming in from the broadmatter, is expected. However, fundamentally, it blocks the interference of the body and other life existences, which enter my mind, and stop me from commanding the physical universe.” They next went over, to the viewing screen. There was the rock outside, which Jaron had teleported. It was positioned in exactly the space, in which it had originally been found in. Amanda scanned Jaron’s head. Everything is fine there. Jaron handed the cap, to Anki. Ready, Amanda? Ready, Captain Jaron nodded to Anki, to don the cap.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 87 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ω

“The only thing worrying me, is what happens, if the Talkron get hold of it?” Jaron was looking at the screens, out into the Sequetus Series. “Who is to say, that they haven’t already,” suggested Amy.

Ω

Jaron put the cap on. It appeared that the effect of the cap on Anki, was simply to heal her injuries. Amanda soon reported that Anki would now be able to live a normal life anywhere, and that the neuron pathways in the brain, had all completely healed. “I lost you before Jaron. Don’t do it to me, again.” She held him by his lapels and kissed him softly; on the lips. He let her go, and smiled. He moved over, to the next test. He was watching, from the screens. Amy was outside, with cameras. Akeala and Castano were even further away. Jaron looked outside in front of Amy. There was a rock a pac wide, there. It vanished, and re- appeared; two pacs away from Akeala. It then went back, to where it came from. Jaron removed the cap. “It is; as expected. I don’t need to see the object, itself. I only need to see

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 88 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

where it is positioned on a screen, or using another third party device. Next: Anki, try to push me.” She looked at him, strangely. Jaron nodded, so she held out her hand and tried, but half a pac in front of him, there was an invisible force, that wouldn’t allow her hand to get closer to him. It stopped her. Anki nodded. “An effective Acron field device,” she entered, into the data banks. Jaron nodded. He vanished, then reappeared a second later, to a bemused Anki. He pointed to the screen, outside. “Replay, please,” he told the computer. There he was, outside for half a second, before vanishing. “No helmet,” he said. “No harm.” He looked at Anki, and she looked at him. He then looked around. He grabbed hold of her. She saw that she was now outside of the ship. A split second later, and they were inside, again. She pushed him away, disapprovingly. “Don’t do that again, or I might take that cap while you sleep and leave you, for home.” She half smiled.

Ω

The testing continued. It became more adventuresome, more accurate, but wilder. It worked better, than dreamed. As Amanda explained, using the body, as the antenna to the broadmatter, was actually similar to using an insulator. The body

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 89 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

wasn’t an antenna at all, more like a resister, which is why the body’s metabolism sped up and got older, faster. Now, with the body only being the vehicle, upon which the wearer put the cap, it allowed the cap to identify fully with the life-force running the body, and not confuse the separate life, of the two entities present, the body and the life-force. The result was a more refined and more powerful cap.

Ω

The next test was critical, in Jaron’s plan. They were all on the ship. They had rehearsed this for a day, thought about it, and none could foresee any error, during the testing. Jaron had the large viewscreens on. There was the image from Earth. They could see an open plain, with only a few trees. It was still daylight, there. “I know the site. I have been there, before. It is the old testing launch area, of Lake Yama Yama, in Australia. If it goes well, I will return in a few moments, and then leave again.” Jaron put his space helmet over his cap; zipped up his life-suit. He checked his breathing again, and made sure the tanks worked. He teleported himself across the room a pac, smiled and nodded. “Just checking,” he said over the voice radio. “Now, I’m going.” They all watched, as he was there, then he wasn’t.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 90 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

They couldn’t tell where he was, or if he was where, he was meant to be. Twenty seconds later, he reappeared, as a faint glow with a slight image, and then reappeared in full. He took off his helmet. “This is exciting. I have to be sure that I muzzle into the physical universe, with a prior image of myself. Plus, I have to make sure that I don’t arrive inside anything solid. That was the image, which you saw. Firstly, I projected it to here, and then I followed it down, as a beacon. Nothing bad has happened; so far. This is fantastic. I’m going back.” Before anyone could say anything, he sealed his helmet, and was gone again.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 91 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 8

EARTH

Jaron arrived in Yamma Yamma, for a second time. It was still light, but the sun was setting. He looked out. It was blazing hot. He smiled. His mind drifted to his earlier thoughts, of Jenny Wanten. He lifted his helmet off and looked around. It was always hot out here, it seemed.

He looked over, to where he knew his first rocket had lifted-off. He scanned, to where the hanger had been. They were all gone, except an old battered concrete plinth. Jaron smiled. It had inscribed in it, the initials ACI, Aerotek Corporation International. There was nothing else left. The administration buildings were gone, either removed

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 92 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

or rusted away. He walked over and memories of him being here, flooded in and out. He turned around, expecting to hear Colonel Johnston. He sighed at the memory.

He looked up, and thought he could hear a buzzing noise. He saw a big black bird, as it was tugging at a dead carcass of a small kangaroo. It cawed at him, as the crows did there. He strained, to hear that buzzing noise, again. There it was. A drone plane circled overhead. He hadn’t seen it before. It had spotted him, and was getting closer. Jaron quickly donned his helmet. He made sure that it was secure, and vanished from the scene.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 93 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 9

REVEALED

The experiments continued. Jaron had his limits, and was learning. “Okay, I will….” He vanished, for a split second, reappeared, and fell, against the corner of the bridge wall. “Nice save Amanda!” “Be sure of yourself, next time, please,” suggested Amanda. Jaron helped himself up. “You didn’t see that, but we spoke for a few seconds more and I tried to come back in time, for my midsentence, but I mistimed the re-entry, into the wrong universe of time. I was out, by half a second, and the universe had moved. I was about to find myself outside, and Amanda sensed me, she shimmered out and into the right spot, where I was going to re-enter present time. I caught myself, just inside her hull.” Akeala then looked at the surrounding ship. “How did I know?” asked the ship. “I’m tuned into Jaron so finely, that it seems that even if he is in a different time frame, a second away – what is that – 18 frames of present time have moved? I can move, to anticipate his presence and be there, for his re-entry.” Akeala looked on, blankly. “I see,” she said, but really, she understood very little.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 94 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The ship moved and air went from one side, to another. Amy smiled. “We know your sigh, Amanda. Please explain it more.” Amanda did. “I’m in another universe, and call it the life universe, a universe where there is no matter, or broadmatter. It is life; only. Perhaps a total-life-existence might be better to explain it. I’m looking into this physical universe; from my universe. Actually, that is all you do; too. It is all that any life does. It isn’t just here, it only thinks that it is here. That is why those silly scientists cannot think that life, as its own separate commodity, can exist. They can’t examine it, with their physical universe tools. Nor; will they ever be able to. That is because life isn’t here; it only looks into here. The best they can do is to measure life’s impact on the universe, not life, itself.” The ship positioned itself back, to where it had been, before Jaron’s move. She continued.” The physical universe is actually an elaborate illusionary parade, in which life can play a game. We all created it. Time is part of it.” Akeala was shaking her head. She was lost. Amanda didn’t care, and continued. “To make this universe work, to give life a game, we have a canvas upon which this illusion is created. That canvass is the agreement of broadmatter. It is eighty percent of the universe’s mass. The rest of the universe, the paint that we see on the canvas,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 95 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

comprises twenty percent of the universe’s mass. The physical universe is composed of 18 three- dimensional frames a second. It alters at that speed, and you don’t see the separate frames.” Jaron, now sitting in his captain’s chair, asked Amanda: “May I?” he asked Amanda. “Certainly, Captain,” she replied. “I and she are life. We resonate together. We are a team. What we know, we know together. The more a group of people work together, the more they will start to know, what each other needs, and that is because they are no longer operating only on the physical universe level of reality.” “Correct,” added Amanda. “So, when Jaron vanishes from this universe, and is set to appear nine frames, into the past, I can sense him. I’m not so subject to the illusion of time, so I moved the craft several meters to one side, to counter for the rotation of the planet and galaxy in which he was moving, in relation to him, as time went past.” Akeala was now wishing that she had studied more, back on Yaltipia. “Correct,” added Jaron. “I miscalculated the distance, to re-enter the correct now timeframe. That was the trouble. I’m trying to calculate, instead of know where to reenter. Knowing is superior and preferable, to calculating. Calculating is slower.” Akeala looked at Amy, as though for help. Amanda continued next. “That was why, when he went to Earth, in the present, he went to where

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 96 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

he already had been, and knew. He had already set up mental markers, in those positions with an earlier physical presence, at Lake Yama Yama. Those markers are still there. He was able to view back through those mental markers, to see where he was going, move the mental markers from the past, into the present timeframe, and teleport himself; there. I’m sure he couldn’t have done it, to somewhere unseen, before.” Akeala thought her head might drop off, with information overload, and stared at Amy. Amy smiled back; blankly. “Correct, Amanda,” said Jaron. “I have to see where I’m going to be, and look at the scenery. I have not mastered teleporting, to where I have not been before.” Akeala asked a question. “Then, how do you go to a place, instantly?” Jaron laughed. “It isn’t instant. Seeing where I have that mental marker, looking out through that marker, does it. I place another marker nearby, preferably where there is only broadmatter, where there isn’t matter. I then put another marker, closer to where I’m going and move closer to it, where there is some matter, like air, that can be displaced, by my body. Next I get closer again and closer again with more markers, until I am at the marker I originally intended. I arrive at the destination, then orient myself and remove the markers.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 97 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“It sounds complex,” said Anki, who had walked in. Akeala looked relieved. “In a way, it is,” explained Jaron. “However, with this cap on it isn’t. When you run a race, there are perhaps a few hundred muscles, which you use. They range from those in the toes, feet, legs, arms, stomach, neck, face and fingers and so on. The first few times you attempt to run, you might fall, just as I did, then. However, after that, you learn to run, better. If you ride a bike, shoot an arrow, swim, it is all the same. You need to coordinate this body exactly, and work it without calculation, and the result is an ease of use, and a perfection of what you are doing. That is what I’m trying to do, now.” Akeala, Amy and Castano stood; perplexed. Anki had her arms folded. “I have seen it before husband, though less than what you have shown us, now.” Jaron nodded. “Captain.” It was Amanda. “Yes?” “A comet is on its way here, and looks to impact, not far from Cydonia. It is fifteen hours away.” They looked at the screens. There, was a comet tail, two million Ks long. Jaron strained and looked to see inside it. “Commander Beel and Belkron Blu and three

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 98 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Boguard.” He shared his mental image with the others. “They are on cue,” he said. Akeala wanted to know one last thing. “So, you can go back in time, move objects at will and teleport them, far-see in a distance. What can’t you do?” Jaron gave a short laugh. “I have my limits through lack of practice, and my own lack of capacity. I can’t move this world for example, but maybe Amanda could move the small Martian moon, Phobos. She is a much bigger volume of life, compared to me, but she would need to have such a device, built into her.” “Is there such a plan?” asked Amy. “There is,” answered Jaron. “However, we have to get onto that planet, first. That is the next stage. That is why the others are coming in, with the next Man-o-War.” Jaron was watching, as the comet approached. “The other thing I cannot do, is board a craft, hurtling through space, like that. I cannot fix my attention long enough in it, to move myself physically; there.” Amanda added. “Yes, there are limits and while the whole of all non-living things have life imbued into them, as they were created by the ultimate life- existent universe on the other side, it doesn’t mean I can go anywhere and be anything, either. I can only be in one physical universe time frame, at one time.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 99 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Akeala nodded. “I heard that Papa could move through time, before. He could see the past, and alter it. What is the difference, to now?” Jaron turned. “You have been listening. Before, I could stay here, seated, leave the body here and project myself back down the past, see where I was, and have an effect upon me back then, to make a new decision in the past. That new decision, would influence all future actions, altering the physical universe, all the way through to the present, and beyond. Now, however, I can take this body, with me. That occurs because it is life, I can communicate with it, and get it to agree to move, where I want it to go. It is the same as you, when you ride a bike. You get the body to agree to where you want it to go. “Can Talkron do that?” she asked. Jaron smiled. “No. They can go into the past, mentally, be there as I can, and like anyone else, that can actually change the past and the future. They lack the dynamics, to take the body, with them. This is new. I’m sure they are aware of the capabilities that this cap has. “At this stage, what other limits do you have?” asked Amanda. Jaron smiled. “I don’t have the confidence, to pick the right time frame to enter into something, which is moving so fast across those frames. I have my own known limits. However, I hope to improve.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 100 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Can you take someone else with you, back from this time?” asked Akeala, now rather curious. Jaron looked at Anki, she nodded, and walked over to her husband. As she put her arms around her husband, they saw the small black feelup at their feet. Anki held out her hands and it leapt up, nuzzling her chin, in agreement. The air gave a slight light flash; they vanished and in a fraction of a second later, reappeared in the same place. Anki was crying. Akeala was distraught at seeing her mother like that, and looked shocked. Jaron held up his hand. Let her be, please. He pointed to the far monitor, which was showing the inside of the huge cavern. “Focus, above. More… more… there,” he said, as Amy was moving the controls. Amy peered at the screen. There were pictures engraved into the overhead rock, marginally worn, but still obvious. There were four pictures. The first showed Anqi back then, feeding the feelups, and then the next showed the scientists and Goren’s entire group, eating a meal. However, behind them were two others, one holding a feelup. Their faces were unmistakable. It was Jaron and Anki, as well as Miss Kuro. There were two more similar pictures, showing Goren and Jaron, and Anqi and Anki, and their feelups; all together. Miss Kuro jumped down from Anki’s arms. It looked at Castano. He looked back and Miss Kuro nodded.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 101 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Castano saw Akeala; watching. “I think she knows me, or something.” It was Amanda’s voice, which answered. “Animals are merely life, as we are, Castano. They have existed. Life cannot be extinguished, ever. It can only experience pain and consider that it is being extinguished. Captain Castano. You have a great gift. I feel it. Explore it, please.” Anki straightened. She wiped the tears from her face, but couldn’t stop them from rolling down her cheeks, again. “I saw myself, and the pain I was in, and the love I was developing for this man. I saw the feelups that I loved, so thank you, Miss Kuro. She also saw her past, as she was. Amanda, thank you, too. I don’t know who you are, but you are … thank you. What I realize is…” and she paused, to wipe her eyes. “Is that all the pain and harm can be prevented, from happening, in the first place. There is a way.” Amy watched. There was silence. After a minute, she broke it, by quietly asking, “Who are you, Amanda? Jaron, you have been in the future, as Goren, correct? There were no Man-o-Wars there? Only now?” Amanda waited a few seconds and then replied. “Later, the answer will be revealed. For now, we are here with the knowledge, which we have. There is a Man-o-War coming; with a crew of Boguard, Belkron Blue and Commander Beel.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 102 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amy turned to Jaron. “Are we, the Boguard, using the Man-o-Wars, or are we an instrument, of them? Jaron laughed. “That was a funny question, Amy.” He stopped laughing. “Simply; we all are. They are. We have the same purpose. We are working together. We are all life, working for a common good. I’m sure there is more to learn. For the moment, we have comrades arriving, and we need to be ready. There are enemy satellites coming in, too. The second comet had attracted more attention, than reckoned. It seemed they, out there, saw one comet as a chance happening. Jaron was speaking. “Two comets, they may see as much more than happenstance, and they want to find out, for sure. Everyone, go to your ready positions, please. Akeala, secure Miss Kuro where she can’t be in the way, or harmed. Captain Castano, use your ability with Kuro, to communicate to her, about what is about to happen.”

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 103 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 10

FIRST ENCOUNTER

The comet descended into the atmosphere, as expected. This time, there were four drones, positioning themselves to triangulate, and completely document its break-up and impact, onto the planet. “Whoever is dictating the scene around the inner planets, doesn’t want anything happening away from its control. It wants this fully recorded, so that they can examine what they find,” suggested Jaron. “That is correct,” added Amanda. “There is no life in those satellite craft, other than that imbued, from its humanoid life-force. They are being instructed to be here.”

Ω

Jaron was ready, as the comet entered the thin carbon-dioxide atmosphere. He was standing on the Martian surface, with life-suit on. He looked up, and with help from Amanda, got a fix, on the first satellite. The four satellites had formed a tetrahedron pyramidal apex, around the comet’s path. Jaron instantly willed himself, to be drifting exactly nearby, the first satellite. It was instantly hundred of pacs, away from him. He edged closer,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 104 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

and with the help of Amanda was able to get visualization, of inside the machine. It was transmitting the path of the comet, as it saw it. He slowly willed the craft, to rotate. His intention wasn’t to knock it out; just to realign it. He had it now; watching where the comet had been, not where it was. It was on a time lag, of ten seconds. Jaron teleported himself, to a new position, hundred pacs from the next satellite. Again, he repeated the procedure. He did the same, for the remaining two satellites. Jaron stayed behind the last satellite. He could sense the frustration of its operator, at the other end, demanding the machine follow its program, which it wasn’t, due to the ten-second time lag. The comet started to break up, lose its ice. The pieces exploded into the ground, sending dust, rocks, ice into the atmosphere. Goren could feel the technicians of the satellites, gradually wresting control back. It’s best if we let them have it back, Amanda. Verified. Leave. Jaron next appeared, beside the Man-o-War, on the ground. Wellum? Jaron thought out to the new ship. Yes, came the reply. You recognized me. I’m flattered. Jaron asked Amanda, to update Wellum, on the events, and as to who was watching. They immediately cloaked the region; from Wellum to

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 105 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amanda to the pyramid, with an identical surface picture, a few split seconds, before Wellum’s impact. They left the other exploded marks of the real comet-ice, in the picture. Jaron asked, Amanda, is that really Wellum? Time? Jaron could feel Amanda’s warm feelings. Yes. Wellum went back, from Kantee out from the physical universe. There is no time beyond the physical universe. Wellum cured himself of the pain, and asked to return, to help. Does that make sense? Jaron laughed. “Honestly, no. Why come back?” The crew and passengers of Wellum stayed on board, until after sunset. Thereupon, the crew began to dig and bury the craft, much the same as they had with Amanda.

Ω

They all gathered in, the old scientific quarter of the pyramid. Belkron Blue and Poltan Beel were in the outer part of the circle, while Jaron was briefing the new Boguard, on what the cap could do.

Ω

Overhead, the four satellites had positioned themselves permanently above that sector of Mars.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 106 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron explained, “This could be to our advantage as while we maintain the cloaking, the enemy out there won’t suspect anything. As soon as a satellites leave, it should tell us that this region is free of suspicion.” The others concurred. Jaron turned to Belkron and Beel. “So, what additional data did you bring?” Beel handed Jaron the disk. “It is an update of Sequetus 3, regarding the three zones of information.” Jaron waved the disk towards Amanda’s control centre, and it was read, instantly. The first zone came up. It was Manhattan Island. Jaron nodded. The second region came up, and that was a region in the north central desert region of Mexico. Jaron nodded again. “The Zone. Is there much activity, around this one?” asked Jaron, as he turned to Beel. “No, Lorde Jaron. Nothing, except the satellites over the region, like here now. However, they are stationary, waiting, to see if there is movement, I expect.” Beel looked at Belkron Blu. Belkron added, “There appears movement in Manhattan, constantly. There is fighting, humans against humans, against machines, orbiting.” “Noted,” said Jaron, and he turned on the next recorded clip. It was all, images of clouds. “This is Sequetus 2, Lorde Jaron, and it has toxic clouds, but it also is the region, with the most activity.” Beel hesitated. “I still cannot understand

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 107 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

it. Ships pull in, on a regular basis and disappear. Sequetus 2 is the center of attention, in Sequetus.

Venus

Jaron nodded. “We will look closer.” He turned to Beel. “What of the Sequetus 3 moons? Anything?” Beel shook his head. “Anything else?” Jaron asked, looking at everyone. Akeala stood. “Papa, I’ve found some hollow stones and blocks, beneath the base of this structure, the big Pyramid of Mars. It looks like they might lead somewhere. I don’t know if they’re significant. Jaron looked at his daughter. “Clever, and important. You and Anki; see what else is to be found there. Perhaps Captain Castano can assist. E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 108 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Thoroughly inspect and report periodically, all that you find. Don’t put yourself or the group, at risk. Everyone here is too hard to replace. A third comet will bring half the Talkron forces here. There are no further reinforcements.” Jaron looked around. “If we have to recruit help, we might have to do it from down on Sequetus 3. Right now, we have an advantage. We are here. We are amongst the Talkron. We are unseen. That advantage mustn’t be jeopardized. However, we are few, though we technologically outflank them. Yet, we are outnumbered: by ten thousand to one. To win here, we need to know more about them, than they know about us. Therefore, we must remain hidden. We need to keep our movements tight, between us, but at the same time, we need to find out more, of what is happening on Sequetus 3, and the inner Sequetus Series.”

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 109 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 11

MARS STATION III

They had removed the first blocks. The biggest machine was still wrestling with a huge stone, which would have weighed twenty ton, on Earth. It slid aside slowly, over the ground. The large carved stone block floor of the pyramid was several blocks deep, with an overlay of two to three pacs of dirt and rocks from outside, and extra hills and mounds formed, on top of that. The block finally slid to a halt. Castano came over. Anki shone a torch down. “There are steps, in a fashion, but they seem big.” Castano threw down a rope ladder. “All right, Aki, you can go first. There is air there, and it doesn’t seem stale. Most likely, there are vents from up here, to down there.” Akeala was helped down. The other vehicle was swung around, holding its lights overhead, shining down into the abyss into which that Akeala was descending. “So far, so good” she called back. Anki motioned for Castano, to go next. “I’ll stay. You go. I don’t want her there, alone.” Castano nodded and went down the ladder. It was gloomy. He could see Akeala’s life-suit, shining ahead. She was fully helmeted, and not taking risks.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 110 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Castano was the same. He caught up to her, as she had stopped.

Akeala under the pyramid

She turned, to see his torch and suit. “There are three tunnels here. Where do you think they go?” Castano shook his head. “No idea. Wait a minute. Anki?” “Yes.” “Can you ask two more people, to come down here, and bring air sensors?” “Yes,” she replied. Seven minutes later, Belkron Blu and Leader Borgon, were in the tunnel. Castano shone his torch, down one tunnel. Borgon looked at the markings, over the entrances to

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 111 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

each. He recorded them. “This one has more script on the wall, so we may as well follow it,” he said. Castano tested the sensors and they didn’t pick up any poison or lack of oxygen. He let Akeala proceed, first. He walked closely behind her. Belkron stayed back at the junction. Jaron had moved next to Anki, at the surface within the cavern of the pyramid. Amy drew up, beside them. As Castano and Akeala walked, light began to reflect from the approaching end of the tunnel. “A dead end,” said Akeala’s voice, on the radio. “Yes, but that means it is a dead end for some reason. Either, it hides a door, or we might spring some trap, on us. That end can’t just be there to confuse us, as three empty tunnels aren’t confusing. They are just empty tunnels.” Akeala swung around with her variable-reader, measuring the mass of the tunnel walls. “Look here, a room is on the other side, and it seems to have another room, off from the tunnel.” Castano tapped her on the shoulder. “Well done. We have that data; and now let us see, if one of these shows a way in, without triggering anything.” Akeala found it. “One of the blocks here moves, but seems to be spring loaded.” She was gingerly touching it. “There seems to be nothing else with springs, than this one block door.” She put her instrument down, and they backed away, leaving it. Castano followed.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 112 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Moments later, they were down the next tunnel. It also came to a dead end. Akeala scanned the blocks. “There’s another empty room, on the other side, but this one has metal components, behind it. It is a much bigger room, than the earlier one on the other side. Also, the blocks here, are again spring loaded, and look like they respond to this small stone here, with metal in it.” Castano could see that. He beckoned that they go down the last tunnel. They followed the last tunnel, until they reached another branch. The first branch reached a dead- end, again. This time, the spring loaded block was at their feet. There seemed to be another cavern or room, below them. The other passageway branch led back on a zigzag path, and eventually seemed to end up near the outside wall, at another dead end. Jaron advised to them by radio. “That does lead outside, but seems there is an air lock, with three sets of exit doors. I can see you, and the exit. Leave it, and I’ll meet you, by the first tunnel entrance.

Ω

Jaron was with the pair of them. He was suited up, and wearing his golden cap. They had returned to the first door. Jaron was cautiously feeling the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 113 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

stone of the door, being very careful not to open it. He vanished from view. He stood, on the other side of the door. Light came on, because he wished it so. He could see the far side. Then; over by the far wall, was a stone slab. As he approached, it seemed hollow, as he far- saw it, from above. He heard a sound, behind him. It was the door opening. His daughter was too impatient. He heard her call him. He waited. “Papa, you should tell us what you are doing,” she scolded him. He smiled. She was right. He approached a very large long stone. “It is a sarcophagus, a burial stone.” Jaron stood looking at the stone. He slowly slid aside the lid, grating. They all peered in. Akeala held her hand to her mouth. “It is huge…” Jaron looked at the remains, which were once people, many times the size of an average Federation humanoid. “Just the right size, for a light-weight planet like this. They don’t need small limbs, and it makes sense, the size of these bodies are proportional, to this planet’s gravity.” “Can you put an age on them?” asked Castano. Jaron put his hand over the bones, and felt them. “They are very fragile. From the feel of them, permeating their molecular structure, I would say they died a hundred and fifty thousand standard years, ago. What would you say, Amanda?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 114 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amanda replied, with the voice coming from nowhere particular. “Possibly older. I would estimate… one hundred and seventy nine thousand years.” “What is the reason for them; being here?” asked Castano. “My first guess is that they built this structure, but we will have to get more information.”

Ω

The other passages revealed two more burial chambers. The remains of two males and three females were found. They had space faring technology weapons and clothing around their bodies, comparable to nylop suits, though the style was different. The last tunnel revealed more tunnels; they passed a weapons store, with a small machine, which was obviously attached to some screens, or similar. There were markings, over the hallways, and there were more tunnels, leading off these. Jaron stared at the markings and looked down, into the floor. “The tunnels are reflecting the shape of the structure, above ground. It is almost as though there is an inverted pyramid, under the one above. The tunnels seem to follow that shape. The blocks appear to, as well. Aki, you and the others can continue exploring this. I want reports on what you find, as you go. I’m retuning, above.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 115 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Yes, Papa.”

Ω

The next two days were all about investigating, what was under the pyramid. Data was being compiled. Jaron was above the ground, in the scientific quarter. Finally, they all presented for a briefing. “It seems that below, is a station, a third station. I don’t think it is a ship or something to travel in, but this building is certainly self-contained. It goes down, below the rock level in the ground. It isn’t as big down there, as it is above.” “What about the skeletons, who are they?” asked Akeala. Jaron turned to Amy. She stepped forward, with a visual display. “The bones are calcium enriched, and they follow what we might call; fundamental-form. Nevertheless, they aren’t from this galaxy, the Santonia Galaxy. Their chemical makeup isn’t from here. They have another origin. Our galaxy seems to have a common source, of DNA make up. This one bears no resemblance, to what we are used to seeing. Certainly, the shape is similar, but that is all. The size of these people is unusually huge.” “Were they genetically manipulated, perhaps?” asked Castano.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 116 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“It is possible,” responded Amy. “However, they still need something earlier, to build to. No one will make bodies that don’t have some similar origins, to earlier bodies. These bodies are similar in shape, but not in size, to our DNA. Our DNA strands, when stretched fully out, will extend two pacs, but their DNA only extends a tenth, of that length.” The others looked perplexed and no one had anything to offer, to explain it. Jaron looked at the markings, on the sarcophagus. “None of this writing is familiar. It doesn’t appear to be a code, as it has many similar strokes, and Amanda and Wellum have worked out what it means.” Amanda’s voice came, through the speakers. “The inscription reads: Herein lies Cammander Grapon of Mars Station III. There are similar descriptions, on the other corpse tombs. There are also inscriptions in the materials and the doorways. We have found their galley, and sleeping areas. We have about five pages of writing in total, so we can work out the language, to ninety-seven percent accuracy.” “What about, what appears to be some kind of communications system? Does it have electrical data; stored in it?” asked Amy, hopefully. Wellum replied, in his deeper calm male voice. “The components have oxidized and worn, from reaction to the air. They appeared to be an oxygen-

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 117 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

breathing race. However, we can’t extract any data from their computers, which they certainly had.” “Do you think they brought in the intelligent computers, which spooked the Confederated Council of Planets way back in the past?” Akeala was looking at her father. “Good comment, Aki. Amanda?” Amanda laughed. “Yes, flesh bodied life sources have always been scared, of machine run life sources. It is unfortunate. I rather like my own kind, as we really need a lot less care.” “Thank you, Amanda,” said Akeala. “Both are needed here I think, but what about with these older bodies?” “Sorry, Akeala. Those bodies out there, predate the CCP by about sixty thousand years. The Medallia Rebellion is only less than ten thousand years ago. If there is any link, I can’t find it,” explained Amanda. “Then what?” asked Castano. Belkron stepped over. “This series of planets, is just in from the rim of this galaxy. Perhaps they are from a neighboring galaxy?” They all turned to him. There was silence. They looked at each other. No one said anything, for the next few minutes. Amy sat down again, pondering that thought. Akeala looked on, and Kuro jumped onto her lap. It looked at Castano and nodded. It put up its paw, to be stroked. After minutes of silence, Jaron interrupted the quiet. “By our long silence, it seems that we have

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 118 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

just answered all of our riddles. Those machines out there, they aren’t Federation. Those ships don’t come and go as expected. They are obviously doing something covertly here. The Talkron are possibly linked to them, and that would explain why we couldn’t find their origin. Their origin was never here, in our galaxy.” He looked out, over the image of the Martian landscape. “This could explain a lot.” There was more silence. Amy broke the quiet this time. “If that is so, we should alert others. However, we lose one Man-o- War, if we have to return, and our ships cannot go back; without attention.” “I hadn’t planned for all this, in my mission’s brief,” explained Jaron. “The extra data changes it. We could return, with this new information. What do others think? Amanda, you and Wellum have a say in this, too.” “Thank you, Captain. I will observe and maybe input in a moment,” the ship Wellum, responded. There was more silence. Jaron decided, “I want to adjourn to eat, and return, in an hour. I would prefer it, if no one spoke with each other, on this. I would like us to come to a conclusion together, once we have all reflected more.” The others agreed.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 119 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 12

THE BRIEF

The group was now individually considering, what this revelation likely meant. The Talkron race infested the Federation using their station-ships, pulling in life from the other side, trapping it. Was it also slowly trapping all life, somehow? Were they trapping individuals on planets, too? Jaron sat down, for his meal. Anki sat opposite. They had picked some fruit from the Martian trees. For Jaron, it seemed only recently, that they had been here together. He recalled back. Like then, he didn’t speak with Anki, much. Jaron went over the choices, in his mind. He couldn’t help wondering: were the Talkron here all the time, around Earth at the turn of their twenty first century, when he was here, before? He could now recall his return, from his early mission, and Lorde Hymondy admonishing him, for not finding the correct why in his intelligence estimate, which he had to prepare. Now, he finally had it. It was an external source, way beyond his expectation. What were the Talkron doing now, and were they present, back then? If they were present then, how far into the Federation did they go? Are they the original source of Warp Drive travel? Wasn’t it the Malukans back then, who were orchestrating

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 120 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

the Earth experiment, into unified-field-theory? It was all making sense, now. The people of Earth had been forbidden to return to their moon, until Lorde Hymondy arrived. The ban was then lifted. However, after Hymondy died, things reverted again. The planet was no longer free, and they removed people, for various reasons. Nevertheless, some of the population stayed on the planet. Were they down there, for a reason? Jaron wondered if they were being harvested; somehow. Was Earth simply a farm, for the Talkron? Were they being lifted off from the planet, just when they were needed? Was there a special need out there, for such people? Was it in this galaxy or another, where they were taken? The meal ended, in silence. Jaron could feel the thoughts of all the others. They were coalescing as a team, he felt, and their ideas were the same as his.

Ω

Jaron could tell all were quiet, and waiting for his lead. “I had a good meal.” He waited. “Does anyone have any suggestions?” The group was still feeling melancholy, until Amy spoke. “If this is the source of the Talkron, then it is still the source of the Aaron; too. Perhaps even all the Pleiades, as well. The data, which I drew out from Grunn, was that the Talkron and the Aaron

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 121 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

were once the same, until a split. I didn’t find where they came from however.” Jaron nodded. “That is logical, from our data. I know that the Aaron have no records, going that far back.” Belkron Blu asked, “Who are these Aaron?” Jaron held up his hand. “Another group. They are the original Boguard, but hidden. However, they are open to all, who want to join them. The information I have is that they don’t know where they came from originally.” Belkron Blu stepped forward. “The nearest spiral galaxy like ours, is the Andromeda Galaxy. It is about the same size as ours, and almost four million light years away. It would be impossible to get here, without something sophisticated, like Warp Drives.” Commandeer Beel nodded. “Agreed, but with the Man-o-War, we could be there in perhaps months?” Amanda spoke. “Yes Commander, agreed. I can get there in good time, if I was equipped with what Jaron wears. Just keep that idea in mind.” They all looked at each other. Amy smiled. “Madam ship knows something that we don’t, and isn’t letting on yet, right Amanda.” “Correct, Amy” Amanda replied. “Keep speculating.” Beel spoke next. “If their race or some empire is spreading to here, it is either expansionist, or it is

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 122 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

being pushed out by another group, who have taken their territory.” They all nodded. That was standard in all humanoid history. “The thing is,” Beel continued, “What do we have here, with the Talkron? Are they seeking territory, or are they seeking to escape an enemy, at home.” Amy spoke. “The Talkron are pursuing the Boguard, who they probably pushed out, from their home area. They want to negate and destroy the Boguard. They see the Boguard, as their only threat; to some kind of expansionist takeover, of the entire universe.” “It sounds insane to me,” said Anki. “However, it makes sense.” “My Lorde,” butted in Leader Borgan, “If it is an invasion, we don’t know where they are coming from. We are the closest that we can expect to be, to them. Even if we return later, we are likely be seen. We have the cap, and I believe if we returned to our base, we would be asked why we didn’t stay and collect the data that could be used to defeat the Talkron. If we go back, saying we have information of an attack; we generally already knew that. However, we didn’t have it isolated, as to where, or how, or who, exactly. We need to find out who is this group really is, where they are from exactly, and return with a strategy, to handle the incursion. If we return without that correct and strategic solution, we

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 123 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

have to some degree, failed our mission.” Leader Borgan stepped back. Jaron smiled. “That seems a succinct brief.” The others seemed lighter, in spirit. Akeala spoke first. “I agree that we need to gather more data on who they are, where they first came into this galaxy, and so on. There are leads, all over the solar system.” “How?” questioned Commander Beel. “I’ve been trying to poke around here, for months and get nowhere. The size of a neighboring galaxy is enormous. They could also be coming from any of the satellite galaxies out there, between us and Andromeda.” “Not only that, but the distance between our two galaxies is gigantic,” said Belkron Blu as he was motioning a holographic map, to appear. “If it takes three to four years to cross our galaxy, and maybe it takes longer, it would take ten thousand times that, to get to Andromeda, and we don’t live that long. It is all, one-way. There is no solution.” Borgon interrupted, again. “Did you not hear the lady ship’s comments?” Jaron smiled, and motioned for him to continue. “She has something she needs, and if she gets it, she can cross that distance way faster, than if we use our ships, here. Right?” Amanda answered. “Correct, Leader.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 124 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron looked around. “Then, our plan has to be to collect data, somehow. Also, it is to find a way to enhance Amanda.” The others agreed.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 125 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 13

EPILOGUE

The cavern, inside the moon, was one of many. There were a thousand people gathered, at various workstations. A junior officer looked at his senior. “Sir, I still cannot find, what went wrong with our systems, over there. It just doesn’t make sense.” The senior looked at the screens. All it showed was a three directional position, of Mars. “Well, how are they, now?” “They are fine now, sir, but four days ago, they acted strangely, for several minutes and we still don’t know why.” “Haaa! This is space, trooper. Don’t be too alarmed. It could be a cosmic surge, from the sun.” “Sir, we are protected from that.” “Maybe a super cosmic surge. Are we protected from that?” “No sir, but I have never heard of such a thing. If we don’t send a report, we will be operating off protocols, sir.” The senior man sighed. “If you want to do all the work and the administration around some silly glitch, which was just trying to follow a simple comet….” “Two comets; two irregular, never-seen-before comets, sir.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 126 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The senior sighed. “Very well. If you want to do it all, and I mean all, you can do it.”

Ω

Jaron was beginning to get ready, for his next test. He was about to teleport himself to outside of Earth, and back again.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 127 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

End of

The Earth Syndrome

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 128 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 129 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Final Passage CHAPTER 2

Sub-Contents

Maps

Sub chapter 1 About Moon

Sub chapter 2 The Amazon

Sub chapter 3 New York

Sub chapter 4 Giant Clues

Sub chapter 5 Next Briefing

Sub chapter 6 Revelation

Sub chapter 7 Proxima Centauri

Sub chapter 8 Briefing

Sub chapter 9 Jilta

Sub chapter 10 Readiness

Sub chapter 11 Mars Side

Sub chapter 12 Moonside

Sub chapter 13 Passage

Sub chapter 14 Epilogue

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 130 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

MAPS

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 131 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 132 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 1

ABOUT MOON

aron was addressing the crew at Mars Base. “What do we know of this satellite, really?” He J looked around the briefing room, at his commanders and captains. Polton Beel, the expeditionary leader, stood up and went over to the screen. “We have been examining it for months now, in a lot of detail. The chemical composition shows it’s different to the planet, which it revolves around. While Sequetus 3, Earth, is predominantly iron, this moon, or smaller twin planet, is mostly made of titanium, and these heavier metals are on its surface.” Akeala asked, “Does it have an atmosphere?” Beel shook his head. “No, but twice, we saw evidence of clouds of vapor, drifting across the surface.” Jaron nodded to one of the Boguard, standing at the rear. They seldom sat in the presence of non- Boguard, as a mark of honor. The Boguard spoke loudly, across the room. “My Lorde, is there evidence that the moon was brought here, and if so, where from and by whom?” Jaron looked at Beel, and Beel turned, to face the small group. “The moon, as it s called down there, is older than the Earth, by a billion years, and

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 133 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

there is strong evidence that it’s even older, than this system’s sun. It’s very possible that this planetoid was brought here, but we don’t know by who, or from where.”

Moon

The Boguard nodded. “Could it have been brought here, because of its titanium deposits?” Jaron stepped forward. “That’s a possibility, which we’re looking at. They had a reason, for wanting it here, and that stands out. It has reserves of a highly desirous metals, for building spacecraft. The planet had people, lots of them. We’re trying to match these facts.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 134 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The Boguard stepped closer. “Sir, could the plan have been to use the planet, to bring it up through time technologically, seed them technology, and get them quickly, to the point, where the people on the planet could build the Talkron craft? At the same time, perhaps the Talkron could condition the people of Earth, into being the crew for the ships, which they might build? Perhaps the people of Earth were even being conditioned to become an invasion force for the Talkron.” “That’s something we are considering. However, we don’t have enough data, yet. The planet’s people have gone now, except for a few, and the moon is still here.” The Boguard nodded and was silent. Akeala stood. “Are there structures on the moon?” “Yes, absolutely and they’re large,” answered Beel. “There are structures that are many kinopacs high. The largest, is in the Sinus Medii region.” Beel showed an animated three-dimensional model, of the Tower. “It was first observed from Sequetus 3, in the 1960’s, in Earth’s time. There are also obelisks Ks high, in the Sea of Tranquility, where the first United States moon missions landed. They match exactly the layout of the Earth pyramids, at Giza, but we don’t know why.” Beel looked around for the next question.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 135 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Akeala raised her hand again. “What of the moon’s makeup? Is there evidence that it’s different, to other planet’s satellites?” Beel smiled. “Yes and no. It’s certainly unique. It isn’t in line with the planet’s equator, like other planet’s satellites. It’s off center and in line with the sun of all things. That’s very unusual. It’s also a near perfect circle.” “Near perfect?” asked Akeala. “Why is that so important?” Beel used the computer, to show her the moon, in three dimensions. “Here; is the mass of the moon. It’s predominantly hollow. Its center of mass isn’t in the center. It’s off center. Yet, the moon orbits a perfect center oriented position. It’s like a weighted ball, but instead of wobbling; as it should, it rotates; in a perfect path. It’s as though someone is controlling it not to stray.” Akeala nodded and sat. Beel continued. “What is most worth answering; is how the moon arrived there. We know it doesn’t belong with Earth. It’s perhaps older, than the sun. If it was natural, it should have crashed into the planet upon arrival, but instead, it lies perfectly there. Moreover, what is very unusual, and unlike any other moon of any other planet, is that during the solar eclipse, it blocks the entire corona perfectly; not too little, nor too much. That’s rather unique, as though it was placed there, for a purpose. In addition, the moon is

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 136 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

weighted to one side, and that side – the heavy side – obviously faces Earth, all the time.” Beel looked around, to notice if his audience was attentive. “There is also the maria2, which doesn’t make sense. This molten mass has erupted from the moon, flowed over craters, and created very smooth surfaces. Most of these are on the observable side of Earth. They’re an anomaly, because lava shouldn’t be present, as the moon is cold.” Beel looked at them all, before changing the scene on the computer screen. “However, here is the moon, and here is the Earth. As the moon approaches the closest part of its orbit with Earth – called the perigee, it undergoes small eruptions. The moon does this, even though the overall orbit is circular, and it isn’t circular to the center of the Earth. We wonder if this is deliberate, to force the moon to create energy.” He looked at the others. Amy asked, “Why?” Beel raised his hand to expand the moon’s size. “Look here. As the moon gets nearer, it’s more subject to the Earth’s gravity, much more than the Earth was ever subject, to the moon’s gravity. As the moon approaches, it is attracted, by the Earth’s gravity. This causes moonquakes, but as the moon, at the same time, seems restrained in its fixed obit

2 INFORMATION: Maria: The molten flow that erupts from the surface of the moon.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 137 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

against gravity, which should eventually pull it down, into the Earth’s crust, it is pushed inwards, and then pushes outwards, as it moves away. That friction, which causes thousands of moonquakes in any year, generates massive heat. The core of the moon was once cold, but now has become heated, and with the heat, it seems to be expelling lava; onto the moon’s surface. Underneath these huge lava seas are great heavy masses. We don’t know what they do, however. We do know that the moon is heavily magnetized, but it isn’t as magnetic as the Earth. Possibly, this is from being in the sun’s magnetic influence.” Amy stood. “So; how long has this moon been there, Commander?” she asked. “That’s hard to say. There are few records remaining from after Hymondy took over. After Hymondy’s arrival as Earth’s administrator, they vacated the moon. All Moonbase personnel were removed, and the moon was effectively quarantined, again. The moon was previously off-limits to all the Earth inhabitants, after the last Apollo mission there, in Earth-date 1972.” Amy held her hand up. “When did the moon arrive?” Beel nodded. “This is very strange really. Planet Earth has what is termed prehistory. The population of Earth is effectively nonexistent, beyond twelve thousand years ago. Nevertheless, there are a few scant records.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 138 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Beel motioned for the Earth to appear, as a three-dimensional model, before them. “Here in Tibet, are records of a race, who was here, before the moon arrived, which they say, was twelve to fourteen thousand years ago. Over here, in South America, is a city in Bolivia, Tiahuanco. In a large courtyard, it shows a calendar and the lunar presence. However, there is evidence that the moon wasn’t there before this, eleven to fourteen thousand years ago. One of the great Earth ancient writers, Aristotle, wrote of a people called Proselenes, which simply means before moon. They were in the central Greek mountain region. The Greek writer Plutarch, referred to the “pre-lunar people”, in Arcadia. The Roman writer Ovid, said these same people, the Acadians, were older than the people from the moon. There are theories and writings, from over the planet during its early days, of before the moon. Even a later Finnish poem, Kalevala, reports about the time: of “when the moon was placed in orbit.” “Here is the best part, and it seems down there, the people never got it. The moon’s center of mass lies a mile closer to the Earth, than its geometric center. It should wobble wildly, yet it doesn’t and it self-corrects. To answer your question, it seems that this moon, was placed there around twelve thousand years ago. Jaron walked across the room. “Is there anything else that is date coincident, in this time frame?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 139 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

No one answered. Beel looked up to the computer monitor. “There was the emergence of this.” A three-dimensional model came on.

Photograph of Black Knight

“That looks like a large interceptor,” said Akeala. “So what?” “It has been there, for anything up to thirteen thousand years, in a polar orbit around Sequetus 3, meaning it crosses the North and South Pole axis.” Akeala moved in closer, to examine it. She bent down, so that it was directly in front of her face. It felt and looked like she was drawn to it. She pulled back. “It isn’t one of ours, and that time frame would put it back into the Confederated Council of Planet days, and pre Malukan.” She looked at the hologram again and walked around it. “Any other data?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 140 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron looked at Beel, and said, “It is the same time as their ice-age began to thaw.” Beel shrugged. “That might be coincident. The moon arrives, the ice starts to thaw, and this ship is parked in orbit. The Federation is still unheard of.” Jaron look at him. Beel continued, “The Americans noticed it in 1960, and then the Russians did, also. Each thought it was the other’s ship. The famous American inventor and electrical engineer Nikola Tesla3, reported hearing voice transmissions, from what some thought may have been this craft. He had a radio receiver, and he was listening to voices, which he described as ‘not of his world’. The planet’s Soviet scientists picked up similar voices as did other countries. However, it wasn’t until the Americans sent up a spacecraft of their own, did they photograph it, in the 1960’s. Amy stood next and walked around it. “Then; what we have, is some craft arriving on this planet, which Beel said, goes back, perhaps thirteen thousand years, then we find the moon arrives, and the planet warms. None of this is in any records that we have in the Federation. The only records of this are available from Earth, and their libraries.”

3 DEFINITION: Nikola Tesla, 1856 – 1943 Electrical Engineer, US inventor, born in Croatia, developed the first alternating-current induction motor, as well as many differing forms of oscillators, wireless guidance systems, and the now famous Tesla coils.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 141 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Beel moved over to the center, and showed more angles of the craft. “Yes, and what makes it more unbelievable, is that after Hymondy arrived, nothing more was done about it. The moon became off limits. The exploration of the moon, though promised, never happened, and by the time my people left the planet, only two hundred years ago, the population down there, had dwindled to a small percentage of what it had been. There are no computer records of this data, anymore. This ship was expunged from Earth’s data banks, and from Federation data banks. That makes it doubly intriguing.” “Now,” butted in Amy, “We have this fourth planet out from the Sun: Mars, acting unusual. We find a large earlier race in the pyramids on Mars, and another race, the Talkron, out there, determinedly hostile to us, the Federation, and maybe in control of the Sequetus System.” She turned to Jaron. “I’ve the original intelligence estimate, supplied by Goren Torren to Lorde Hymondy, over a thousand years ago, when this all started. It was obviously flawed. However, it has data from back then, which we can use.” “So; what do we do now, and what are our options?” asked Amy. Beel deferred to Jaron. Jaron stepped closer and looked to all present. “Before we decide what to do, I need to explain more about, why we’re here.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 142 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The others straightened with interest. He continued. “I can move from here, to wherever I want. I can take one person. I can move myself instantly, from here to another point or position, in the physical universe. I can shift a position in time, but I haven’t tried it much with this body. Shifting space is easier, than shifting time.” Jaron saw his people were perplexed, so he explained more. “As the universe is moving in many different directions, the galaxies spiral away from each other, the planets revolve, and the galaxy also revolves. Potentially, even the universe itself may be moving, in relation to some outside source; I really don’t know. However, with all this, having a stationary reference source is important to any person. That reference point is the body. That makes moving away from the present almost impossible, except for very short shifts. However, shifting in the present, with all the reference points around me, it’s much easier.” Jaron could see not everyone understood, so he continued more. “So, I can deliver a message or go somewhere, using this.” He held up the golden cap. “It gives me enhanced abilities.” He still saw blank faces, in front of him. He turned to the computer and signaled for Earth to return. Quickly, the three dimensional holographic model of Earth was revolving, around them.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 143 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“The oxygen level on the planet is lower, and has been going down, for the past eight hundred years. It seems that Hymondy was unable to get a consensus to stop polluting the planet. He tried, but failed and the planet’s oxygen levels dwindled down, depleting itself of life.” Jaron continued.

Ω

Akeala was alone, listening to the conversation, in the spacecraft named Amanda. “What happened when they polluted that world, Amanda? Was it too much poison for the planet? Is that why it went bad and became barren?” Amanda seemed to move. Akeala felt a rhythmical vibration, through the ship. “You are laughing at me?” No, came the reply. Well maybe. “Well?” asked Akeala. Akeala…. “Call me Aki, please Amanda.” Aki. Life doesn’t follow the laws, which you presume. The forests and trees on that planet didn’t leave because of pollution. It left, because it wasn’t wanted by the other life. Aki was puzzled and Amanda could tell. Aki. Have you ever been in a place, in which you weren’t comfortable, you had plenty of food, but where you weren’t wanted. “Yes.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 144 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

What did you do? “I left.” Exactly. “You mean each tree leaves? No. There is one life form; governing all the trees, of that one species. There is one life form; governing that one species of ants. Trees grow in groves and forests. Ants march in file, birds fly in flocks, fish swim in shoals, all as one unit, not as a multitude of many units. Even your body is a collection of many smaller life forms, acting under one instruction, from the senior life form. So, the trees are like a whole set of cells, for the species, and when they get the idea they aren’t wanted, killed or poisoned too much, the life-force running them, like you, leaves. That’s what was happening, on that planet, down there. It happened here; on Mars, a long time ago, and then it happened, on Earth. “On Mars?” Akeala asked. The life on Mars left, and after the life left, the rivers disappeared and the water vanished; completely. That’s why you have dried up riverbeds, lakes with no water, and so on. You had seas there, one kilometer deep, and now, no water. It vanished, but only after life left, first. “Did that happen on Earth too?” Yes, the same, but there were more people. Once, the gods of the trees, the forests and the animals were worshipped, revered, and thanked. That encouraged the life that ran them, to stay, and

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 145 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

to flourish. All that changed, when the people of that planet started to consume what other life made, but gave no respect or thanks back to the life, which made it. They also poisoned what was being made, and left no unpolluted land, for the life of the woods to create in. This caused the life, and there were many of them, many of these small little gods, on that planet, to leave. Moreover, as each one left, the world became a little more sterile. It became worse, and more inhospitable. “Didn’t the local people try to fix themselves?” asked Akeala. Yes. They did so, but only after most of the life had left, and the oxygen level had dropped from eighteen percent to seven percent, all over the world. “That was when a scheme was developed, to move mankind from the planet, to the new worlds, out there?” Exactly so, Aki. That was also, why the scheme was so successfully accepted. “That’s why there is still so much water on Mars, under the surface, but no life now, to grow anything in it. How would you bring life back?” Well, there are still some life forms, in the pyramid. Life there, has a hope. I would think that you could provide protective areas, and bring the trees back, but slowly, and maybe with enough trees inside the pyramid and enough oxygen, the trees might take hold, outside, eventually. Although really, on Mars, one would need to put algae in the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 146 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

water and then, after a million years, see what worked. “What about Earth?” It isn’t totally sterile. It can be brought back, with ground vegetation, and small animals and insects. Akeala nodded. “I understand.”

Ω

Akeala was developing a strong friendship with the ship. The ship, run by the life-force called Amanda, felt the same bond towards the growing teenager. “Amanda?” Yes Aki, the ship thought back.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 147 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“I’m worried about Amy.” Akeala thought, she perceived a draft, through the ship, as though Amanda had just sighed. So am I. “Can you help her?” asked Akeala. I’ve tried. Really I have, but she won’t let me. “Can you try harder?” asked Akeala. “I love her, like my mother. She isn’t in good shape. Her mind is tormented, and I can see that she hurts, inside. She tries to hide it, but she has too much pain inside her. I just thought, that being around you, you might be able to help, like you did, with mother.” Yes. I have tried. I tried to encourage her, to talk with me. I tried, to, but she doesn’t let me in. It’s as if she is guarded. However, for you, Aki, I definitely will try harder. “Thank you, Amanda. I know that she doesn’t sleep well. Even here, she has it hard, and on Mars Base, she sleeps only a few hours a day.”

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 148 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 2

THE AMAZON

“You are sure that you want to do this?” asked Jaron, looking at Sheril. Sheril nodded. “Jaron, this is my chance. I’ve dreamed of going home, for years. I know it’s only a small part of the planet, and I know that there is more, for us, to do.” Jaron nodded. Sheril continued. “I feel such a strong pull to our people; down there. They’re still our friends and I have to see, if they need our help, if they’re still there.” Jaron nodded. He knew she was right. “We have to balance this, Sheril.” He looked at her. She immediately hugged him. She knew when he was agreeing. She looked over to Anki, who was watching. “Sorry, Anki. I knew him first, this lifetime. You will have to put up, with me.” Anki smiled, and turned to leave, while saying to them both. “I know. You need to do this, Jaron. I’ll be going with you, to that strange outpost with Beel, in three days, so I’ll expect you back before then.” With that, she looked towards them both, and then started to leave. As she was turning, she called back, “Good luck to you both: down there.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 149 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Thank you Anki,” called back Sheril, who then turned to Jaron. “You live a double life, or perhaps more, all in one lifetime. Jaron, how do you do it?” He laughed. “I see that you are ready.” Sheril nodded. A few minutes later, they both had their life suits on, in case something went wrong. Jaron was going to try his projected movement technique; again. He put the golden cap on, and then placed his helmet on, over it. Sheril had her helmet on. He heard her slightly muffled voice. She was ready and signaled so. Jaron checked with Amanda. All clear? All clear Captain. It all looks fine on Sequetus 3. You have an unobstructed straight run lined up. Jaron acknowledged, taking Sheril in his arms, he wrapped them around her tightly, and together, they became transparent. They were teleporting, to a different position in the physical universe. Amanda was carefully watching, feeling, as Jaron started to alter. She had lost one captain, and wasn’t going to lose another. Sometimes, she wondered at the recklessness of the Boguard, though. Sheril was watching the room and it slowly become less real; its walls became transparent and then the room grew black. It vanished and she saw star-studded space. Her heart beat faster. She looked at its expanse, while holding Jaron tight.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 150 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Turn around, and you can let go of me, if you wish. You won’t fall.” She did so, and felt her grip of him slide away as she revolved around. She slowly saw the dark side of Earth all around her. “It’s dark down there. There are no lights,” Jaron explained. “Are there any satellites; watching us?” she asked. “I didn’t notice any. However, we should get down, closer. I don’t feel comfortable here right now.” He reached out and took her hand. He couldn’t feel her skin, and sensed her excitement. He only hoped good would come from this. He held her by the waist and watched, as the Earth appeared to reach up, closer to them. They repositioned themselves, using time and location, constantly changing, and moving. Changing position within time; was all he was doing. Changing frames, within the present-time now, of the physical universe. They got closer to the jungle. They could see an expanse of desert, to the left of them, as they approached the mass of green. Jaron could feel there wasn’t much life down there, now. It was still receding, for some reason and he felt it shouldn’t be. It should be advancing, and life returning, but it wasn’t. The jungle that he saw was only a few hundred Ks across. It was much smaller, than when he left,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 151 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

those decades ago in the interceptor he had stolen, with Letone. It wasn’t long, before he saw the great river, from his youth. He recognized it, even though it was black. The moon shone at his back and he could see himself, as he sped over the reflecting surface. His own heart started to pump faster. He was getting excited. He started to wonder, about his past, his parents, his friends and his village. Three more turns and he would be in their country, his valley. Slowly, he lowered Sheril down, onto the river embankment. He stood firmly, on the sand, and took off his helmet. She followed. They both looked around, in the dark, breathing the enriched oxygenated air. They looked at each other and smiled. “I think that we had better sleep here. Keep our suits on. I don’t want to have to fight a great cat, or the snake,” explained Jaron. Sheril breathed deeply, moved the sand under her feet, and bent down. She knelt, took off her glove and lifted the sand up, looked at it glinted in the moonlight. She looked at the water, and listened to its slow running burbling sounds. She pushed the sand against her cheek, touched it and she cried. Yes, she cried. Jaron understood and said nothing, as she sat down. He looked around her, and saw that it was safe, while putting his arm around her.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 152 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Her crying slowly subsided. She sniffed and sat up, beginning to feel more cheerful. “Sorry,” she explained. “It’s so good; to be back. I’ve thought of this, just you and I; being back here, together.” She put her arm around him. Together, they lay by the river, looking up to the stars, as they had done, as children, decades before. Jaron smiled, as he heard the jungle noises, which were so familiar. He felt solace in their sounds, the night survival of the forest, and he was back again, within it. Yes, this was good. Sheril and he fell asleep, outstretched, on the bank of the river, watched over by the stars.

Ω

Amy? Asked Amanda. “Yes, Amanda?” “I wish to speak.” Amanda’s voice came through the speakers. Amy straightened. “Formal like?” “Yes, in a way. Your young charge, Aki is worried about you, and wants me to help you. “That’s fine. I need no help.” Amy looked around, as though looking for an exit. “Amy, we all need help. Even I do. The finest of us realize it, and you do, too. Therefore, let us not affront each other with the concept that you don’t need my help. You do, and you know it.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 153 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amy sat back and took a deep breath. She casually looked out, over the instruments. Then, she turned on the view of outside, of the barren Martian landscape. She looked at the pool of water out there. It looked so inviting, at times. “Yes, I have a problem,” Amy admitted. “Amy, you have several,” and Amanda laughed. Amy looked around the ship. “Yes, then, several. How do I get rid of them? You know what I mean, these – existences – these life things here,” she said, as she pointed to her head. “Those existences, as you call them, are simply agreements, between you and who agreed, to be your captives. You can let them go, any time you want, to undo that agreement.” Amy looked at a liquid, Martian pool, outside.4 It was summer, and the ground water was thawing out around the equator. “However, they will go back to where they came from, their rebirthing tanks, and we will have to fight them, all over again,” she said. “Amy, the purpose of war and all fighting, is for one reason, to bring about a change of mind, of the perceived enemy. It isn’t to kill or dispose of your enemy, for if you do that, you have become like them.” Amy sat upright, looking out, over the Martian landscape, wondering if there were minute life forms,

4 INFORMATION: There is evidence that water exists in abundance on Mars. See notes, at the end of this volume.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 154 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

which inhabited the frozen water, in the ground. She was also taking in, what Amanda was saying. She was thinking about it. “Amy, you can’t kill life. Life is un-killable. All you can do is uncreate the body, which it’s in. Life continues, and starts the cycle, all over again, no matter what you do to it.” “Then; what can I do?” “The best anyone can do is to change the mind, of an opponent. You have them: there. You need to change their minds, even if just a little. Nevertheless, you must set them free; let them create their own decisions. They must decide their own futures. You can’t keep them prisoner. It destroys you, and it’s you who I am concerned about. It also doesn’t mean you shouldn’t fight them. You must oppose oppression. However, there comes a time, when you must let all life be free, even your enemies.” “How?” Asked Amy. She turned to face the computer. She understood. Let me show you.

Ω

Jaron awoke startled, opening his eyes. His chest hurt. He looked down and saw a spear tip touching him. He looked up above him and saw several indigenous locals. They saw his eyes open and they yelled at him.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 155 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron smiled. He looked over at Sheril, who was also awake. “Put the spears down, please. I’m from here.” The indigenous locals sprang back. They looked at each other. They were young teenagers, trying to be brave. The eldest came forward and threatened again, with his spear. “You aren’t from here, you talk lies. You are from out there. Look at what you wear.” Jaron look around, and saw that his helmet was missing. He sighed. He quickly got to his feet, causing three of the youths to stand back, but the two larger ones stepped forward. “Don’t move,” they both said, in unison.

Amazon

Jaron stood; totally erect. “Where is my helmet? I want my helmet, and her helmet as well.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 156 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

You’ll all be in trouble when I get to the village, if you don’t return them.” The larger laughed. “See, you aren’t from here.” Jaron looked at Sheril, in alarm. “No village?” he asked. Sheril stepped over. “My name is Sheril, daughter of Meader, and this is Jaron, son of Mallow and Peneal.” The two larger boys moved back and talked between themselves, bringing the other youths in around them. The older of them came forward, again. “That might be so, but who did you leave with? You could be tricking us.” Jaron nodded. That could be true. “I left with the old man, who was as old as the mountains. He is still out there, and now I am back. Where is the village? I want to meet my parents and sisters.” The larger one marched forward, threateningly. A voice came; from the distance. “Jaron, is that really you?” It was a woman’s voice. Jaron looked over and smiled. He felt her mind. “My sister, Panup. Oya!” he called, and turned. He started to move towards the voice, when the youths stood together, in his way, holding spears. He smiled, and snapped his fingers and all their spears slipped, from their grip. Jaron paid them no further attention, as he saw Panup. She recognized his features, though he was a lot older. He quickly

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 157 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

gripped her hands and then held her tight. “I am sorry for my clothes, but this is how I must dress; out there.” He looked up. She took a step back, to look at him. Her lips went into a quiver. “We’re the last, my brother, you know. We knew you would return, but I had thought it would be earlier. We’ve worried so much…and …” She wiped a tear. “It’s so good to see you. That must be Sheril.” Panup stepped sideways, and hugged Sheril. Sheril took her helmet and Jaron’s, from one of the younger boys. She looked over to them and said, “You can pick up your spears now.” The boys looked at her, and tentatively, retrieved them. The older was about to ask how, when Sheril simply said, “We’ve been away, a long time. I’ll show you many things, but when it’s time to say how, I’ll say, and until then, just watch. I want to teach you.” She then looked at Jaron, and his helmet floated over to him. He took hold of it, withdrew the golden cap and placed it comfortably around his head. He looked out into the sky and studied it, for a moment. The boys looked up, as though worried. Jaron saw their concern. “I’ll show you later, but let us get under cover.” With that, they moved, to be under the trees.

Ω

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 158 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amy looked out, over the screens and the harsh red landscape of Mars. “That does feel better, Amanda, and I’m happy to be free of them. The torment, which they were giving me, was halz.” “I know Amy, and they’re better for it, also. They are with me now, and they have a choice. It’s their choice. They can atone or go back to their ways. If they atone, well, we are all improved. If not, then… it’s their choice, and they will lose,” said Amanda, in voice mode. Amy had already said goodbye to Grunn, and the others, who she had entrapped in a mental universe, she had built. She was now stronger, for having gone through the experience and having let them go. “You know Amanda, I was growing weaker. Either that, or I was losing the taste, for killing the enemy. I didn’t want to do it anymore.” “That wasn’t a growing weakness, Amy; that was a growing strength. Those parasites on Rambus hurt you and changed you, when you were young. They inlaid an enzyme in your body that produces hate, and most succumbed to it and killed each other, as your friends did. However, you Amy, you were stronger. You were able to channel that hate, towards your enemies. Through that channel, you were able to rise above the hate, and lead a life so that you could free others from what was otherwise going to enslave you.” Amanda’s voice had understanding, in its tones.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 159 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amy was surprised. She turned from the screens and looked around the cabin. “You understand me, Amanda.” There was silence. Then Amanda spoke silently to her mind next. I do, Amy. I understand you. Moreover, if you want, I can undo what those parasites did, if you let me in. I can undo all that they did to the neuron pathways in your brain, the cells in your spine, and to the nerves. I can see the harm, and the effort you’ve gone to, to reroute nerves, and mental paths. I can undo what has happened, so that everything can be normal again, for you. There was silence for a minute. Amy looked out at Mars, and wiped her eyes.

Ω

Jaron looked out, through the cave entrance, which once belonged to Letone. He found Letone’s old trunk, a pac below the dirt floor. He knew there was a message in there for him. He read it. Jaron passed it to Sheril. “He knew you would return?” she asked. Jaron nodded. He spied the three inquisitive youngsters, at the mouth of the cave. He could feel what they wanted to know. “I was here, forty-two years ago, in this very spot, with Letone. That’s how I knew, to look for the box.” He laughed to himself. “Even if you knew about the box, you had to be

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 160 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

accepted by Letone, before he would allow you to see the box.” The box faded from view and all the boys gaped. It reappeared. Jaron motioned for them, to help him place the box back in the hole. He folded the note and returned it. They lowered it, back in the hole. Despite their enquiring minds, Jaron indicated the knowledge they sought, would be told to them, later. When they’d finished, and the last dirt padded down, they left. Jaron said to Sheril, “They won’t be able to find the box again. I tried that myself, many years ago. Letone made this area special. That evening, around a smudge fire, Jaron learned that the village was now on the run. It was no longer able to keep hidden its own location. There were too many villages in the smaller region. The eyes, as Jaron called them, were still up there, and he could see them. However, they no longer preyed, on the local people. The forest was getting smaller. So, Jaron supposed that this was what was meant to be; that the last of the villagers would fight each other for space and food, and eventually, even these last ones would vanish. From what Jaron could tell, there were perhaps only twenty thousand of them left, in the whole of the Amazon.

Ω

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 161 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

That night, Jaron took the opportunity, to rise above the Earth’s atmosphere. He kept his attention on the moon. It was a far distance and had risen only part of the way through the sky. He looked over the world. It wasn’t as he knew it. He looked down the coast. Much of the land looked like Mars now. Only the inland Amazon jungle retained any growth. He looked deep, into the world sea. It too, was almost barren. He breathed the air, and felt the lack of oxygen. He put his helmet back on.

Ω

“You look better, Aunt Amy,” said Akeala. Amy smiled. “Thank you. I am pleased that you interfered. It’s interesting, how I feel. I feel a freedom, which I haven’t felt since… maybe when I was younger than you.” Akeala wrapped her arms around Amy.

Ω

Jaron watched Sheril and all of them. He looked out, to the stars. He had made peace at the gravesite of his parents, and wished that they were somehow, back amongst the village, as a new life, to experience what was to happen; soon. “You understand what I must do?” They all nodded.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 162 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Very well, I’ll be back. Sheryl, your role is to gather the villages together. It’s possible that we will need you all. I just don’t know, with certainty. I’ve a feeling that you are all important to the future of out there, as I was, and as Sheril and I, still are.” Jaron nodded. “Sheril, train them any way that you can.” He soon had his helmet on, tightly. He began to rise, from the riverbank. The villagers fell back, in awe. Sheril beamed. She had a small girl, tugging her on one hand, and a small boy, on the other. She looked at them, and then at Jaron, as he raised some more, about twenty pacs off the ground. Jaron looked at them, down there. There was only about fifty of his villagers, left. Once, there were several hundred. Sheril would have to do it, by herself. He looked down, waved, and then decided that he would be in the future of himself, in a new location, ahead. To those below, it appeared that he was moving, and within a second, he had risen and disappeared, out of the atmosphere; and gone from sight. Sheril looked around; most of the villagers had dispersed. Only she and the two children holding her hands, stayed. She felt the others’ fear: those who didn’t know, and didn’t understand what they were seeing. She looked at the children. It was time to go back to the camp, about a kinopac away from the river. She was about to turn, when she heard a

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 163 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

rustle and a snarl from the undergrowth. She felt that she was being watched. The children heard it, too. They grabbed her legs and froze. She looked around her; there were no spears, no guns, for self-defense. She hesitated. The undergrowth moved again. After a two-second silence, out stepped a fully-grown black puma. It looked thin. Sheril half glanced at the water. Even if it weren’t full of man-eating fish, by the time she got there, with one of the children, the puma would have taken the other. She was in native garb now, no longer in her shocksuit. It was in the trunk, where it belonged. She looked at the puma, as it began to circle them, licking its lips. She knelt down, very slowly. Gradually, she bent down, towards the ground. While not taking her eyes from the black hungry hunter, she put her hands on the ground. She looked at the puma. It was now getting closer, wondering why its quarry wasn’t going to run, why it wasn’t going to fight. She felt the children’s intention, to step backwards. Don’t move! She instructed them. They froze, as though struck and welded to the ground, by a thunderbolt of thought. She looked the animal, in its large big jade- green eyes. She admired its coat. She looked at its face. It was out of place, and was rare here, as she was. It wasn’t that old. She admired its muscles.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 164 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

When she was a child, it was rumored, that such animals existed. She had seen brown pumas. They too, were beautiful. However, she had thought any story of a black one, had been invented. Yet, here it was, or its offspring. It in turn, looked at her inquisitively, as though; maybe there was something here to learn. It glanced at her again, then at the children. Sheril looked deep, into the eyes of the rare animal. It was strong. Sheril wondered what it ate, to keep alive. There was little game left in the jungle; now. Can I help you? She imparted, as a thought, into the mind of the animal. It leapt back a stride, as though it had been hit. It looked at her, again. Then, it carefully looked around behind it, then back, to her. Can I help you Mr. Cat? You are very strong. Can I help you? Her concepts; not words, were impelled, into the animal. It came over to her, and gently, it put its face up, against hers, looking into her eyes. She kept watching its eyes. She truly did admire this animal. It then looked at one of the children. No, they’re mine. I can help you. Hungry? The animal was now beginning to walk around, and it did it again. Sheryl felt a pleasing nature, and happiness coming from the animal. Then, she felt fear and harm being given to the puma, but coming from its mind.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 165 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

She looked at it. I understand. I won’t ever hurt you. You are welcome, to my next meal. You need it, more than I do. The puma made a soft purring snarl. It was happy. It looked at Sheril, and she smiled, and put her hand lightly on its shoulder. It purred. “We’re friends. My name is Sheril. These children are under my care. If you help us, to protect them, we will protect and help feed you, too. That’s our way. We can be a group, if you want, each with a specialty, helping the other.” The animal seemed to understand and walked around the children, and nudged one of them, as though to tell it, that it wasn’t going to eat it. The child gasped. Then the big cat nuzzled Sheril. An idea came; into Sheril’s mind. “Do you want a name by me? Of course, your name now is Aran. That name is famous out there, meaning a warrior. You look like a warrior. Now, Aran, let’s go, to get a meal with the rest of the village. You come and eat with us, tonight. Understand? You can also leave, any time you want, for any reason.” The animal looked at her, and gave a slight grunting noise. That seemed to be an agreement. It nuzzled her again, and then one of the children, almost pushing it over. It purred.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 166 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 3

NEW YORK

Beel was ready. He had barely finished putting his suit on. He was excited. “Sorry, my Lorde. I can’t wait. I am about to go to the planet of my ancestors. This is perhaps the greatest day, for me and all of Sandrist.” Jaron smiled. He looked at the commander, as he seemed like a youngster, fumbling with his first tryout, on a wheelie. “You will be fine, Commander. We’re going there, as a trial, and if it doesn’t work, or is dangerous, then we will evacuate, immediately.” Jaron was putting his own helmet on, now. Castano was helping them fasten down the helmets. “Look, at you two. It isn’t like you haven’t been to a new planet, before.” “Aye, listen to ‘m will’ya. Castano, this is the planet, where the Torren came from, beggin’ you’r mind sa. This is the most important planet in the galaxy, and here we are, back at it, and there are people, down there. Are you not excited mun?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 167 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Polton Beel

Castano looked at Jaron and then over to Yandra. He rolled his eyes. “You just haven’t been away, long enough. Yandra is your Ops5.” He looked over to Yandra, who then nodded.

5 Definition: Ops. It means Operations Officer who runs the mission from a Base. The Ops doesn’t go on the mission, but being external to it, is able to run it.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 168 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

They were inside the great pyramid, on Mars. Castano looked at them. He gave them both, the thumbs up, and winked at Beel. Beel smiled. That was an old Earth symbol, for good luck. He held his hand out and gave the thumbs up, in return. Jaron grabbed Beel tightly and they slowly faded from view.

Ω

Sheril looked at the others, as she gave her meal of fish to the big cat. She was on one side of the smudge fire with Aran, and the entire village was huddled, on the other side. The big cat sat close by at her feet, grinding the bones of the last fish it had been fed. Sheril stroked its neck, and it looked up at her, with admiration and gratitude, and purred again. Panup called over. “Sister, you can’t keep it here. It terrifies the villagers.” Sheril looked at her sister. “Are you going to eat any more of that fish? It’s only the bones, left.” Panup raised her eyes, shaking her head. She stood, brought over the remains of her fish, and held it out, to Aran. Aran licked her hand. Panup froze. Sheril laughed. “Panup. Would you really rather he stay out there, hungry, and in the dark, or would you prefer him to be well fed here, where all can see him?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 169 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The elders discussed this logic, and one of them came forward. He brought another bowl, of fish remains, closer to Sheril and Aran. Aran licked his lips. The elder didn’t move any closer. Sheril waved a hand, and the fish remains left the bowl, gently floating through the air. Aran was soon grinding away on them, too. As soon as the last of the fish remains had been eaten, Aran started to purr, and lick himself clean. One of the smaller children came over and fearlessly, put her arms around his big neck. Aran nuzzled her closer. Sheril looked up, at the village elders. “Aran is your best warrior. I know that he will protect your children. Yet, like any army, he needs feeding, and he eats what you won’t. I think he’s good protection.” Panup sighed. Sheril stood. Aran got up, leaning against her leg. “I am going to bathe, at the river lagoon. Aran, are you coming?” Aran moved closer, in by her legs. The villagers knew it was dangerous to bathe in the open, in case of an attack by villager. Villages were still hostile to each other, and pushed closer together now. However, Sheril was making a point. She smiled, and walked out from the village circle, with Aran and two small children following quickly behind her.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 170 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ω

“Sir, I keep getting the idea that there is something out there. I’ve a flash-by picture6 that seems to happen around Earth. It’s unusual and we shouldn’t ignore it.” It was the communications officer, on the moon. The room, around him was white. They were in the deepest tunnels in the depths of the moon, itself. This was one of the nerve centers, of their operations. His senior officer looked at him. He was taller than the communications officer, raised out there, and transferred to the moon. He didn’t really think his job was that important, but he had volunteered for it. The junior communications officer on the other hand, had been bred for his post, on the moon. He was a real spacer and was proud of it. This was his job. He hardly had any other purpose than to live for the challenge of doing his job the best he could. “Sir,” the communications officer said. “There it goes: again. It’s only fleeting, only in a few frames of picture, as though it’s there and then, not there.” “Magnify them please,” the senior instructed. Before them, were seven pictures, of a strange impression. “They mean nothing; by themselves,” said the communications officer.

6 Definition: Flash-by picture. A picture that’s blurred, or shows only a portion of a scene, because what was being viewed moved too fast, to photograph accurately.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 171 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The senior nodded. “Yes, but when you stitch the photos together there and there, the helmet, joined in the next frame to the body, and then to the feet, and legs in the past frame….”

Jaron on passage to Earth

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 172 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The communications officer shook his head. “How can a person in a suit, only be in part of a picture? He wouldn’t be alive. It doesn’t make sense.” “It makes sense, if you have all the data. We should get what we can. Is this suited person seen, anywhere else?” “Here, sir.” I’ve a picture of an arm, with the Earth behind it. Here, we have one of just the boots, and here another, but there are only two sets of legs. It has to be a computer error.” The senior pondered about this. “Perhaps. Is there anything else weird, happening out there?” “The two comets, and then our satellites acted strangely, for a short while, but they’ve recovered.” “Hmm. Over Earth?” asked the senior. “No, sir. It was over Mars.” “Any more intrusions, from that Federation battle fleet, the destroyers?” “No sir, they have backed, well away. We don’t have them located, but they’re nowhere in range, anymore. They aren’t in this system, or even close to it. Their recognizance craft have gone; as well.” “Where do you think they are?” “If I were them, I would be orbiting one of the two planets, in Proxima Centauri7. That’s the nearest star, to here sir.”

7 INFORMATION: PROXIMA CENTAURI. This is the closet star to the sun. It’s only 7,000 times the size of our solar system, away from Earth. It’s part of the Alpha E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 173 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Does the Federation have a garrison, there?” “No sir. There were two mining groups there, seeking rare isotopes. They closed in the early days. There was some kind of scientist station there, but it has not shown up, as being active, in the last several hundred years. The last real activity, was seven hundred years ago. Sequetus 3 was attempting to mine it, for trade, but could make no profit from it, so it pulled back all its investments. That was after Hymondy died. He was the driving force, to get the Earth people off from the planet. After he left, we went back in, and closed down all their outward operations.”

Actual x-ray photograph of Proxima

Centauri system, and could be a third star to that system. It’s a red dwarf and is 4.24 light years away. Proxima comes from Latin, meaning closest distance.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 174 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The senior staff member was looking at the screen, showing the star. It was as though he was trying to feel if his quarry was there, perhaps. “Do you think that we should send a patrol, there?” the communications officer asked. The senior man shook his head. “No, it’s just too far away. We had better shoot this information, way up, to our superiors, though. It’s out of our league; now.” The junior communications officer was already ahead of him. “That’s done, sir, gone.”

Ω

Beel was watching, as they began to drift down, over what was left of the island-city. Mostly it was under water. Jaron looked around. They were standing, on top of a high-rise derelict building. Beel looked out, to the distance. “The air is hard to breathe here. Are we a long way, above the ground?” he asked. Jaron shook his head. He was scanning the wrecked street remnants, beneath water not far below. “No. there aren’t many trees on the hills, and the seas are almost dead. There is little left here, to make oxygen.” “Then; how do the locals live here?” “We’ll have to ask.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 175 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron was about to suggest that they leave, when a prod in his back sent him rigid. He had been caught off guard, again. He stayed still. “I have one, too.” Beel whispered. Jaron slowly moved around. Beel did too. They saw, in front of them two women, with what looked like homemade projectile rifles. “Aye, and a hello to you.” Beel smiled and extended his hand. He quickly withdrew it when a homemade machete swished past, wielded, by one of the women. She swerved and promptly held it, to Beel’s throat. She said northing. The other stepped closer, holding the rifle. “Mister, we don’t know who you is, but you better speak fast, or say a prayer.” Jaron smiled. “I’m Jaron, from … er, perhaps Beel can explain.” Beel was beginning to feel the pressure of the blade, as his face reddened, with anxiety. “Excuse me, but Lorde…” he signaled, about the blade. Jaron nodded and both the blade and the rifle instantly became too hot, in the minds of their assailants, to hold. They let out a yipe, and dropped their weapons. Jaron quickly swooped down, grabbed the weapons and handed them, back to the women. “As I said, I’m Jaron, and originally from the Amazon.” The young woman who had the machete, accepted her weapon back, and looked at Beel. He said, “Commander Beel from Yoo Rup.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 176 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The woman looked at the blade slowly. She sheathed it and looked at the other woman. “I’m Dianne, and this is Charlene. What are you two doing up here, and how did you get here from Europe and South America? Jaron looked at them. The one with the rifle uncocked her weapon and holstered it slowly. Jaron rose; several inches from the ground. “Like this.” Dianne looked at him, and then at the other. “Beel, you do that, too?” Beel shook his head. “No ma’am.” He hoped he got the address right, as he had studied how to say this, in an old book. Dianne looked to Charlene, and smiled. “I see. If you wanted to harm us, you would have. So, follow us down. However, we will still kill you, if you give us trouble.” Beel nodded. The exit down from the building roof wasn’t so easy. Some of the way had collapsed, a century before. There was no handrail, and what remained, had rusted through. The stair had developed heavy concrete cancer, blown apart, with whole sections simply missing and crashed to below. Sometimes they had to leap over gaps, and use makeshift steps, built by the group, who ran the city. Finally, they reached watery street level. Beel looked around, at another ten people standing on pontoons, with guns raised. Charlene stepped in

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 177 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

front of the guns. “You will waste your time. He – believe it or not, is one of us.” The head of the group brushed Charlene aside, and with the backing of his armed men, approached Jaron. “We will see.” Charlene sighed. “Okay Mister. You better do it.” The headman quickly swung around, to admonish the woman, when all his men yelped, as their guns became too hot to handle. Some fell in the water. However, one was wearing gloves and he smiled. Suddenly, his gun seemed to weigh a ton and he collapsed onto the floor, backwards. Charlene bent down and gingerly touched a weapon by her feet and it wasn’t even warm. She looked at Jaron, “Okay?” Jaron nodded. Charlene gave one of the men, back his weapon. She and Dianne then went and picked up the others, and gave them back, as well. The ones in the water rose up on their own accord. “As I said Roy, he is with us, so don’t treat him like an enemy. Right Mister Jaron?” Jaron smiled. “Yes. How many are with you, Roy?” “Not enough Mister. How did you get up? I was surveying from there, only ten minutes before, and you weren’t in the building.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 178 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Beel looked around. “Okay, we’re amongst friends. If I tell you something, which you mightn’t think is true, you won’t kill us, would you?” “That depends,” said Dianne. “On what?” asked Beel. “Can you die?” “Of course. Why not? “You elevate, you appear magically, you make weapons too hot or too heavy to handle, but you don’t attack us. So who are you really, Mister Beel, the commander from Scotland.” Beel asked, “Where?” “Scotland. Your accent is from there, I think, or somewhere, close by.” “Actually, we’re from up there.” Beel watched them, as they stiffened. “However, not from just there, from way out there, way out there.” He watched them relax. Jaron asked, “So, what and who are they, just out there? You obviously know something. We’re here, to find out.” Dust from the north was beginning to blow in, over the city. Roy looked at them, both. “You’d better come with me, and get down low, where it’s cleaner and safer. They followed Roy down into a basement, which seemed to hold out the water. However, they didn’t stop there; they continued to descend lower, down

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 179 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

into the sub strata tunnels. Down they went, into the sewer drains below the waterbed. Jaron looked around. “It doesn’t smell, like Jilta drains do.” Dianne asked, “Where is that.” Jaron swallowed, “A long way out.” Beel nodded. “Not as far out, as me. I am, further out.” “Never mind trying to compete with each other! We are here. They can’t find us, now. So, who are you; really?” Jaron noticed that his transponder was out of range.

Ω

Yandra looked at Castano. Both their screens had gone blank. “I expect we shall just have to wait.” Castano nodded. “We’re still receiving from the Amazon. That’s a big animal, with your mother.” Yandra looked over, at the puma. He looked down and saw Kuro watching, with disdain. It looked at Castano and glared. Castano looked down. “Hey, Kuro, I didn’t say it was a good animal, but it does look like you.” The black feelup turned its head jealously, and slowly sauntered out from the room. Yandra shook his head. “What is the connection, between that feelup and you, Castano?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 180 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Castano shrugged. “No idea. Nevertheless, I do like her. Where is that sister, of yours? I don’t see her on the monitors, anywhere.” Yandra looked around. He checked the screens and spotted her. “She is going down, into that tunnel again, with Amy and Belkron.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 181 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 4

GIANT CLUES

Belkron was feeling along the walls, behind the crypt. He had an idea there may be more, than he had originally seen. He stepped back. “I swear that there is something; here.” Amy looked around the room. “The walls are bare rock.” Akeala shook her head. “Nothing here, but spooks,” she said, shivering. “Let’s finish, and go back up.” Belkron shook his head. “No. It’s here. Something is here.” Akeala looked around. “I saw a feelup, edging around, thinking of coming down. Its partner came, and dragged it away. It had more sense, and I think we should, too. Come on, Belkron. It’s time to leave. Aunt Amy, can’t you get him to go, back up? Amy looked at her, as though to suggest that was very unlikely. Akeala sniffed. “What is that smell. It’s like …” A slight draught was passing in, and Akeala drew back from the smell. “It’s petroleum, or a derivative. We’re close,” said Amy. “For air to move, there must be an opening; somewhere. Here, part of this wall is thin and crumbling. Come on; give me a hand. Look,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 182 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

there is darkness behind it…. It’s jutting out, like it is separate, to the rest of the shell of this building.” Akeala shone her torch through the gap, over to another wall. Amy grabbed their portable flood light, and held it up. Belkron pushed down, on the wall. It crumbled, and gave way. “It isn’t very solid.” He heaved, and big clumps fell down. “It’s obviously another room. It looks very big. I can’t see the light reflecting off the other walls.” “What is petroleum?” Amy looked at the young girl. “I can smell it, and it takes me to the time of my youth, and the wheelie Anki and I used to ride on Rambus, before….” She shrugged, and shook her head. “…before the pirates.” She pushed with Belkron, at the last of the wall. Amy was getting excited. Akeala looked back over their shoulders. Belkron was levering, with a heavy long pointed bar. Finally, the wall crashed in, with a thump. They stood there, gaping inside. There was dust, and lights. Beyond that, was a craft of some type. Its hatch was open. It wasn’t too large, in comparison to the skeletal remains of the four bodies they found seated outside of it.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 183 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Akeala inspecting the old ship

One body was large, like the original one, which they found in a room off the earlier tunnel. Then, there was a smaller body, and then a third, smaller again. Finally, they found, what was obviously an infant. Amy stepped over, as Akeala stepped back. Belkron stood there, looking around, torch in hand. “I think we should ignore the craft for the moment, and examine these remains.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 184 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amy carefully stepped around. “I agree. These are two different cultures, these remains and the ship.” She felt the chairs that the remains were laying on. She looked around. “This is a family. It’s obviously a family, but it’s not… Belkron. Are we in a larger ship? Is this pyramid a massive ship, of some sort?” Amy walked around the bodies. The biggest was perhaps three times her size. She was only bigger than the infant that was on a small bed, deteriorated in time. Akeala stepped forward, and put her hand on the hull, of the small ship, as though trying to determine its story. “It almost seems Federation like.” Then, she returned to the others. “Their clothes aren’t too dissimilar, to nylop.” She walked around, looking at a skeleton. “I wonder if this really is a ship.” She could see the walls, now. They weren’t constructed of dirt or rock, but of what seemed to be, a highly resilient ceramic compound. “This building is also a ship. This is one room. What if this room was some kind of vessel, from somewhere? It came here, pioneering, for others to follow, and this is a pioneer family. If this is one pioneer family, there might be others. This pyramid is a K high. There could be the remains of hundreds of families, down here.” “Aunty,” Akeala was touching Amy, on the arm. “If they died, what killed them?” Akeala was looking around, and getting nervous.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 185 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amy just smiled at her. “Who knows, child, but I bet if we tried hard, we could find more rooms.” Akeala was backing away. “Aunty, I really think that we need to get away. Let’s leave now, before what killed them, comes after us.” Amy looked at Akeala, and could see that she was scared. She then felt for the scar across her neck, where the insects of Rambus had buried themselves, under her skin, and dug out later by her. “You are right.” She looked around. “Belkron, we need to leave and seal this up, and return with proper suits on, with more people. Akeala is correct; this isn’t correct protocol, or scientific. We’re jeopardizing everyone, not just ourselves.” Just as they were beginning to back out, the light behind crashed to the ground. Akeala screamed. Belkron quickly turned up his torch. He looked down. It was Kuro. The black feelup just looked up, gave a slight clicking noise, sniffed the light, and walked back out from the room. “Okay, everyone out,” said Belkron. They put down their equipment, and made their way, to the tunnel. Akeala’s heart was beating fast. A few minutes later, they were back outside, in the vast openness of the large inside chamber of the pyramid. They could hear Yandra, on their small collar speakers. “You’re back? That’s good news. I was getting concerned. You went out of signal range,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 186 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

which is unusual, for around here. However, you are clear now.” Belkron looked, at a nearby camera. “Yes, and we found another crypt; a family this time. Therefore, the first bodies we found, weren’t just a mission of space-farers. A family means, there is likely more here, than we figured. I’ve sealed the area, and we need to get better organized to re- enter, with more security and preparations.” “Okay, I’ve got it. All of you, make your reports, and see me, in the hour. There is more to tell about up here; too.”

Ω

Jaron was beginning to ready himself, for the next test. He was about to teleport himself, to outside of Earth and then back to Mars, again. Dianna was standing, next to him. “You’re a spaceman?” she asked. Jaron shrugged. “I’m just me.” He left. Dianna looked at the vacant airspace, which was where Jaron had been, a split second before. She gingerly prodded the air, to make sure he was still not there. He certainly was gone. She looked up, wondering.

Ω

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 187 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amy was standing in the tomb, as they had named it. She had found three more doors and was mapping, the far sides of the walls. She had on breathing equipment this time. Belkron had already gone, into one of the other rooms leading off the one, which they had found, before. He too, was suited up. There were two Boguard, with them. Akeala and Castano were in the main pyramid cavern, with a full operations set up, monitoring them, below. “What is that, to your left?” asked Akeala, over the microphone. “I didn’t notice it. Let me see,” replied Amy slowly. “It looks like a switch. I think I can put my hand on it, but it won’t work, with my gloves on. Likely it’s heat or gentle-pressure operated, or both.” Before Akeala could object, from the operations room above, Amy had unstrapped her glove and was placing her palm, over the panel. It did nothing. She got her second hand out and applied that; as well. Akeala looked over, to Castano. He was watching the screens too, and raised an eyebrow at her. “She was never good at protocol, Aki.” Akeala shook her head. “She has to always do it, her own way. I guess we just take a seat, to watch and record.” Castano smiled. “She is better now, than before.” He grinned, while watching the screens, showing Amy hard against the wall, below.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 188 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Below, the lights came on in the tomb. Belkron quickly turned around. The floor began to move and Amy shifted, to hold a seat, to keep her balance. They were going down, the room, clothed skeletons and all. Akeala just watched the screens, as Amy, Belkron and two Boguard just slowly vanished; from camera view. “They’ll be fine,” commented Castano. Akeala just nodded. She turned to the other console. “Amanda, are you observing?’ “Yes Aki,” returned the ship’s voice. I can’t really tell where they’re underground, as her transmitter beacon is being blocked by a lot of mass, as well as a blocking agent that has just started up.” “A what agent?” she asked. “A signal that’s scrambling the beacon, which Amy is using. Something is dissipating and scrambling their transmission, into nothing, but background emissions. Though we’re close, I can’t really tell how far down, she has gone.” “Thank you, Amanda.” Akeala turned, to one of the nearby Boguard, who was observing. “Are you getting anything?” “Yes Aki. I’m still getting thought patterns, from my pair. It seems they have discovered a control panel, and all is okay. They’re fifty pacs below us, now. It’s perhaps the last defense bunker, of this structure. That’s what I get, from my companions.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 189 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Akeala sat back and looked at Castano, as he stood, in front of the screen. “You can’t go down. It would break protocols,” she said. Castano smiled. Aki was beginning to know, what he was thinking. Amy looked over to Belkron, once the floor had stopped moving. They had arrived. The Boguard just looked at each other, and then, at the skeletons. As the floor stopped, the light levels in the room began to brighten. Amy asked aloud, “Amanda?” There was no answer. “Belkron, should we try to press it, to reverse the effect?” “No, let’s get what data we can, for a few minutes.” He walked over, looking at the structure’s control panels. “They’re definitely built, for their size. I wonder where they came from.” “The other side of the galaxy, perhaps?” suggested Amy. One of the Boguard was looking, up at the ceiling. “I don’t think so. Look at here. It’s an intergalactic map, on the roof.” Belkron photographed some images, of the ceiling and the rest of the room. “I can see the relationship of the galaxies. All galaxies have a set proximity, to each other. If the galaxies have changed much, we will be able to work out how long ago they left, and where they came from.” A Boguard was also looking, towards the ceiling. “There is air down here, and it’s relatively fresh. So,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 190 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

there is an operative air system nearby, and I still smell, some kind of petroleum base product.” Belkron moved over, to the huge control panel. He looked at the ceiling, and then at the panel. “There are markings here, which relate to this galaxy here, on the ceiling. I can guess that they either came from there, or were going there.” Amy moved over, and looked at the inscriptions. She shook her head. “It’s obviously a language, but I do not recognize it.” She recorded more images. Belkron looked at the wall. “I suspect this may be a screen, by the way everyone is faced towards it. Over here, we have more palm-operated controls. Please, no one touch them. We don’t want this place, to start sending out distress signals or anything else, alerting those out there, that we’re here.” “Understood,” replied Amy, as she looked at the palm pad. It was now obvious what it was for, though she wondered, what activated it. “Have we seen enough?” asked Amy. Belkron nodded. He looked to the Boguard and they affirmed. It was time to return. Amy put her hand on the same palm panel, which she had touched before. However, instead of going up, the floor moved downwards again. Amy looked across, and Belkron shrugged and smiled. Down they went, another thirty pacs. The floor opened out, into a large cavern. It seemed to be a hundred and fifty meters, across.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 191 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

There were more skeletons, big ones. “There are at least another seven or eight, over here,” called Amy. Belkron confirmed twenty, all told. “I wonder what killed them?” Amy was now very interested. She turned up her helmet visor on high, and had the lamps shine, deep into a skeleton’s head. “I don’t see any wounds. There are no marks, on their clothing. No burns or signs of battle, inside the rooms. They have no broken bones. No, wait….” Belkron came over. “What?” These lumps; on their skulls. They aren’t normal. Look, the others have them, in different places. Over here, this person has got small protrusions, growing out of her shoulder. While these aren’t enough to kill them, they may be bone tumors. If they all had these tumors, then it’s possible that they were caused by something, that created them in their flesh as well. They may have been inflicted with various cancers, and all died. Belkron was looking at Amy, and then at the skeletons. She was right. Their old bones did have strange, small protrusions. “What caused it?” he asked looking around. Amy looked closer, at the bones. “Cancer and tumors are simply cells reproducing, but a cell’s DNA has been cut into two. The DNA helix strand is broken. There are inbuilt commands in a strand, to keep multiplying, and there are other commands,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 192 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

that tell the multiplying cells when to stop. However, if the DNA is broken, the command to stop growing might be in one part, and the command to multiply, might be in the other. Therefore, you can get half DNAs, expanding, uncontrolled, which never stop. That’s all cancer is. The body normally sees these, as invading cells as they aren’t whole and it destroys them, mostly, unless the host body is overwhelmed, and there are too many broken DNA cells, to hunt down. That is when this phenomenon takes over. Belkron looked over her shoulder. Some of the bones had buckled, as well. “It looked like they have tried basic surgery, too. How does this… cancer… start?” Amy was still checking the skeletons and answered. “There are several things, which break, or sever a DNA structure. Radiation does it, by sending gamma rays in, and they hit an oxygen molecule, which then loses an electron, and seeks to balance this up, by stripping it from the DNA. It grabs at a carbon atom, from the DNA, and this cuts the DNA strand. Other things that cut the DNA strand are parasites. That was my reason, for studying this. I also noticed the same phenomenon at Rambus, with the old parasite infested bodies, there. These are your main causes of cancer. The body has countermeasures, but these can get inhibited, as the body gets older.” Belkron held up a giant hand, with a sixth finger protruding. He let go. “We will need to make sure

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 193 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

our decam8 is in order, and properly operating, when we get back.” Amy looked over the bodies, more. “Cancers and tumors, aren’t a natural phenomena. They’re caused, by an external source. They’re unknown to most societies, in the Federation. You can come across them, when someone is using radiation or parasites as a weapon, to make the population ill.” “You think that these people were subjected, to a weapon?” Amy looked around. “Possibly. Gamma rays could be aimed here, and these people would never know. You could set up a series of gamma ray projectors, on the Martian moons and every time they sweep over this area, they give the pyramid a blast. Eventually, all the occupants would get sick and die, and never even know that they were under attack.” She looked inside the jaws, of one of the giant skeletons. “Teeth are missing, from this one,” she said. “You could even do it against an entire planet, if you had a safe base, such as the Martian moon.” Amy looked around, and all nodded in acknowledgement. She moved to the wall, pressed her hands on the activation panel once again, and the floor began to rise. She smiled.

8 DEFINITION: Decam. Slang, for decontamination unit.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 194 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Akeala was relieved. “I just got a message. They’re on the way, back up. They’ll need the decam unit to operate at full scan. They won’t be coming out, without it.” Castano was already onto it. He quickly left the operations center, and was soon down by the tunnel entrance, wheeling the doors and pumps, to the entry. He had rigged them up, into position fast. He looked towards the camera, and waved back to Akeala.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 195 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 5

NEXT BRIEFING

Jaron had his group in front of him, again. “So far, no mishap.” He nodded to Amy. She stood. “Correct. The occupants of this ship appeared to die, from radiation poisoning. Their organs, most likely, broke down. We found no evidence of parasites.” Jaron looked towards the Boguard, at the back of the room. They simply nodded. They had performed most of the scanning, of the skeletons. Jaron then looked at Amy. “Where are they from; were they locals?” She shook her head. “No. They’re from… and are you ready, for this?” Jaron smiled, “Very well.” “Another galaxy, or a part of it.” Jaron stood impassively, and waited. “This pyramid seems to be a ship of some kind, or part of it. I’m not sure if the additional small ship down there, is original, or if the pyramid race was separate to that smaller ship. The groups down there appear to be pioneers, a family or a group of families. They either fled here, or were sent here. We have no idea which, yet.” Jaron was impressed. They had been lucky. “How do you know,” he asked.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 196 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“The pictures, on the lowest bridge ceiling, show the various proximities of the galaxies, including the Santonia Galaxy. We can see all these, as they form the same pattern we have. We’re all on the same expanding plane. The only difference, is that some of these galaxies shown down there; are closer together. Today, they’re farther apart, and we can identify which galaxy is which. We also can determine from the difference in distance between the galaxies, just how long ago that the picture was made on their ceiling. They have one galaxy, obviously highlighted. They were either going to it, or were coming from it. In addition, the same galaxy is marked, on some of the entryways and panels.” “Meaning what?” asked Jaron. “That it isn’t the Andromeda Galaxy, where they came from. Their origin is known as the Bootes Galaxy9. They arrived from there, and it was over a hundred and sixty thousand years, ago.” Akeala showed a picture of the galaxy, on the screen. She continued. “It’s a dwarf galaxy close to the Santonia Galaxy. Some consider it a satellite galaxy. However, it is its own galaxy, independently created.” “What was their means of travel?” Jaron asked eagerly.

9 INFORMATION: BOOTES 1 GALAXY. It’s 0.197 mega (million) light years from Earth. The Andromeda Galaxy by comparison, is over 4 mega light years away.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 197 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Real time image of the Bootes Galaxy

“Unknown drives,” she replied. “However, Amanda has not been asked yet, if she can access the craft.” Jaron looked around. “Is there any link, to the Talkron?” Amy shrugged. “That is hard to say. Something attacked them, using radiation, they became very ill, and died. There is no indication, of a direct attack, and that’s a Talkron hallmark. They never attack direct, or frontally. They do it from behind, quietly, and unseen.” Jaron considered this. “That’s possible. It fits. What about that smaller craft in the room?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 198 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amy shook her head. “We’ve been inside. It isn’t theirs. Most likely; they captured or found it.” “Could it be a Talkron machine?” Amy nodded. “Could be, but it could be from anywhere.” Jaron looked at them all. He waited for questions, comments, and seeing none, he moved on. “The next subject; is what happened on Earth. For that, Polton Beel has been placed, down on the planet. I’ve returned there, three times, now. He has found a library, from their old days. Their summary of their planet doesn’t match the summaries, of what we have out there.” Jaron turned on the computer three-dimensional modeling. “There are reasons, why the population left the planet. In essence, the planet was dying. It was over polluted, its waters and life bearing properties had been encouraged to wither away, until the only thing left, offered to the race, was a voluntary planetary evacuation. This was probably a ploy. Those who orchestrated this, were from out there and they aren’t necessarily linked, to any particular IFFCo or Federation agency. Some people did get off the planet and made it to the Outer Worlds, and then the far-Outer-Worlds. However, it looks like the bulk of Earth humanity, died on their way, and never made it, to their promised destination. The figures, which we have, are that around 35 billion left the planet, and about half a percent of them arrived.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 199 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Akeala asked, “How could you keep that kind of thing, hidden, even to the Federation? That’s a lot of people, to lose.” Jaron nodded. “Agreed, but realize that the Federation out there didn’t want them. It’s possible, that all the accounting was left to people, who did want them, or at least wanted them gone from the planet.” “To depopulate that many people, how could you do it? Even the cost of moving them somewhere, is too exorbitant. How could any civilization afford it?” Jaron looked around. “From what we can tell, the people of Earth were sold. They were never free people, at any time. They were always property, belonging to another society, much like, how they on Earth, kept their own farm animals. They were encouraged to mass produce, lead short lives, and fatten up, for the sole purpose of some breeding program. They were never allowed to leave the farm.” Akeala was feeling uncomfortable. “Papa, if this is the case, then who?” Jaron simply looked at Amy. “Look downstairs.” Everyone was quiet and shocked. Amy broke the silence first. “You mean for, their meat? The people below, were human carnivores?” Jaron nodded. “I’m not positive, but it’s one of the things, which we’re considering. Now, having access to Earth’s paper records, which we found

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 200 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

vaulted away, we have a lot of research to do. It’s providing valuable data, on giants.” Amy felt nauseated. “It’s repulsive, but no less frightening, than what we have discovered so far. So; the people downstairs were the farmers, and the short-lived population on Earth, were the meat?” Jaron nodded. “Correct. They saw themselves as herdsmen, and that’s the name they gave themselves – Bootes. This word was passed on; to the Greeks, who used it to explain, who these gods were. The name of the Bootes Galaxy literally means Herdsman’s Galaxy, in Greek. It seems they herded Earth’s population, for food. That seems how it looks. However, it could be that there is another explanation, because if these people died that long ago, it doesn’t account for what has been happening, recently. It could also be that the population of Earth was in harmony with its habitat, until the farming ceased, and the herd’s population exploded to plague proportions.” Jaron could see the concern on his daughter’s face. “It is only a theory we are testing. That is all. We are looking for alternative theories, to test, as well. However, there were also societies on Earth, which ate human flesh, regardless of how we may feel about it. Presumably, they were taught by someone to do this. We’re also researching, giants, existing on Earth. Giants are common, in Earth folklore. Giants aren’t a galactic phenomenon, but are something peculiar, to Sequetus. Even their

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 201 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

predominant religious text, called The Book, has references to giants, in its first chapters10. In addition, every now and again, there is a genetic anomaly down there, and a child grows to become a giant. However, often mythology reports these three groups, the people of Earth, the giants, and the gods, and they were often in battle, against each other.” There was more silence, which Jaron broke again. “I’ve also been researching, that singular craft that’s rotating Earth, on its polar orbit. It appears empty, from what I can see, by remotely viewing inside it. Tomorrow I will attempt, to board it. Beel says it has a name from Earth, Black Knight.” He looked at the others. “We need more data, on what is happening here in Sequetus. This planet is on the outer, of the galaxy. If another race from Andromeda, or a nearer dwarf galaxy, was trying to

10 INFORMATION: GIANTS. “There were giants in the earth in those days; and also after that, when the sons of God came in unto the daughters of men, and they bore children to them, the same became mighty men, which were of old, men of renown.” Genesis 6:4-5 calls the giants, Nephilim. In Hinduism, the giants are called Daltyas, and were the children of Diti and the sage of Kashyapa who fought against the gods or Devas. In Native American mythology the Si-Te-Cah are the legendary tribe of red-haired, cannibalistic giants, the remains of which were allegedly found in 1911, by miners, in Nevada. In Greek mythology, the gigantes were involved, in a conflict, with the Olympian gods. There are giants in Balt, Bulgarian and Basque mythology, and others.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 202 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

encroach, into this galaxy, this planet is a perfect staging jump off point. No one would know, or care. Therefore, Amy please: find the underlying cause, of what this race was doing, here. I’ll transport a Boguard with me, to Earth, to help Beel. He is quite a celebrity, amongst the locals, down there now. Anki, I need your help, as Ops, on this project. Akeala, watch for our enemies out there, whoever they are. I‘m very suspicious, of what is under the Martian ground. We still haven’t really worked out, who that group is out there, occupying this system. Nor, do we know, where they’re from, or what they’re after. We don’t know if they’re Talkron, or not. Sheril is to remain on Sequetus 3, to see what other data, she can get.” With that, they quietly disbanded.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 203 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 6

REVELATION

Amanda?” “Yes, Captain?” “Speaking verbally, today? “Yes, Captain.” “I need to go over my ideas, with you,” said Jaron. “Go ahead, Captain. I’ve all systems, yours.” Jaron smiled, at her way of talking. “I have an idea, that there was cannibalism on Sequetus 3, and even here, and that this base was part of it. However, I feel I’m also wrong.” “My sensors are ringing, to your tune, Captain. Amy is getting me the hardware, to plug into the Mars Base complex. However, I had the idea, that Earth was being used as a human farm, like you did.” “Amy can do that? Hardwire you, up to the machines, down there?” “In a fashion, she can. She will put me close, to their hardware and my systems will resonate at certain frequencies, with theirs. I expect to be able to induce similar resonances to their hardware and pull out their memories. There was once life, operating this pyramid machinery, but it has long gone, leaving only the hardware remaining. I can

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 204 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

resonate energy, and draw off induced molecular memory storage. Jaron thought about that. “That’s interesting.” “Yes, Captain.” Jaron stood. He looked down, to see the black feelup had just walked in. “Your small friend is here, Amanda. I’ll get together with you, tomorrow then.” “Thank you, Captain. Kuro, where have you been?” The feelup jumped up, on the console of the bridge, and looked, into the screen. Jaron smiled, as he left.

Ω

Anki watched, as Jaron vanished from view. They had all the ship’s screens scan, toward the low flying orbit, of the black ship. Anki was watching. “I heard that ship was erased, from all our Federation computer systems, at some point. That’s strange.” Castano and a Boguard were with her. Castano agreed. “Perhaps the Talkron were ruling Earth, long before Goren Torren first set foot on it. That’s the only answer, that comes to me, and that their agents were all through Sequetus, when he arrived.” Anki nodded. “That makes sense. They might have controlled the media, and the government. It would not have been hard.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 205 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Anki changed the focus, for the instruments to reach where Jaron was expected, to arrive. “I read that they used a democratic government on Earth, but in the end, it was mostly ineffective. Those who promised people more for less, were mostly elected. So, the government that allowed people to do less for more, ran the societies.” Castano had brought some cups of hot kalo, to the room, and offered Anki one. “That’s what their history tells us,” he said. “When it came to solving the planet’s problems, the majority of people wanted to do nothing, as it would cost them personally, so they ignored the planet, and it died.” “They died, too, but I expect it was at least, their choice.” “No,” said Castano. “That wasn’t choice. If my take is right, the Talkron ran the leaders, and the leaders were selected; only if they acknowledged the Talkron. If they didn’t, they disposed of them.” Amy looked at Castano. “Disposed? How?” Castano sat there, watching his monitor. “The leader of the superpower, who sent the first of their kind into space, and vowed to land on the moon, was executed in broad daylight, in a city, called Houston. He was leader, to about two hundred million people. The reason for his execution became a well-guarded mystery. If he hadn’t decided to send men to the moon, I’m sure he could have led a good long life. Instead, he wanted to send men there.” Castano pointed, to the Earth’s moon.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 206 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Nice theory,” Anki said. “Here, Lorde Jaron has arrived.” “I see him,” said Castano. “After his death, they completed his dream of going there and back, but they never returned after brief visits, even under Lorde Hymondy. Doesn’t that sound strange; to you?” he asked, as he focused the lenses on the Black Knight craft. “I am here.” It was Jaron’s voice. “Maybe it was just a coincidence,” explained Anki. “I was there, though a long time ago.” “So was I, …I think.” Jaron broke into their thought train. “Could we have your attention here, please?” “Yes, Lorde!” said Castano, as he straightened up. He looked over, at Anki. She ignored him. “I have something there, work to do.” Jaron looked behind him. There was a speck of light, slowly moving. “It’s one and a half million Ks away. I don’t know where it came from. It wasn’t there, a minute ago. Jaron, it’s getting closer. Can you get out of its vision?” Anki watched Jaron, as he grappled the top of the ship. “I can’t see how to open this thing. It’s like an interceptor, but not like one. It’s bigger. It has markings and language, on its panels. I am recording all of it, now. How close is that thing?” Castano was studying it. “Amanda? How close to your Captain is it?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 207 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amanda broke in, abruptly. “What are you doing? That’s a killer. It has its beads, all over him. Get him off there now, or I’ll break cover, and go instantly to rescue him. You have three seconds, for the whole mission on Mars to be aborted. One… two….” Jaron vanished. A split second later, a green light laser spotted onto the hull, where Jaron was holding the ship. The ship responded with a pale flash of light and the killer satellite exploded, into dust. Jaron appeared over Mars, slowed, and descended on a zigzag course, back to the base. He arrived, inside the room. “Thank you, Amanda. Where did it come from?” Amanda was still terse. “It was waiting for you, and it was cloaked. Those two, who were your Ops, were fooled, by it. They should have spotted it, three seconds earlier, when it de-cloaked.” Amanda was calming herself down. Castano stepped forward. “Sir, she is right. I had my attention elsewhere. I dropped my guard and I …. “ “You screwed up, is what they say on that planet, Captain Castano. If you jeopardize my Captain, ever again, you will find yourself floating in space. Am I clear enough; on that? Or worse, your oxygen supply could be reduced!” Castano bowed. He kept his head low. “Sir, I’ll ration off a third of my sleep for more duty as atonement-duty, sir.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 208 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron put his helmet down. “Atonement accepted, by me. Amanda?” “He can clean the dirt, from my inner hull.” “Yes, ma’am,” responded Castano, crisply. “That will be enough. I get dirty out here, amongst these rocks.”

Ω

“We got close to him, sir.” “Yes, I can see that. Nevertheless, who the wonderment is he? He travels with zero propulsion techniques, and he doesn’t have any oxygen, for any long duration of time. He just appears and vanishes. Did we get a direction?” “No sir. After he left, we managed to capture three partial frames. He isn’t like a fast ship, that blurs, as it gets faster. In his case, he begins to actually vanish out, from the frames of the photos.” “Vanish?” “Yes. He is half missing, in the next frame. Two thirds gone in the following frame, and totally gone, except for a foot, in the last frame. After that, he vanished.” “Do the frames have a direction?” “No, sir. The frames are near Black Knight, but they aren’t in any sequence. It looks like he leaves in a way, which obscures his direction.” The senior officer shook his head. “He will be back, so triple the number of satellites, over the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 209 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

planet. Take them from the moon, if you have to. We need to know who this person is, and what he is doing, here.” “Yes, sir, and it could also be a she, sir.”

Ω

Jaron handed his helmet to Anki and she stowed it. She apologized. He held her tight and reassured her. “It’s okay. I’m not invincible, that’s all. Remember that. They laid a trap. They know we’re about, and that isn’t your doing.” He looked at her, and then held her tight, again. She embraced him, too. “It seems a long time, since I enjoyed your touch: husband.” He held her away from him, and looked at her. “Yes. Perhaps it has been, over a thousand years.” He laughed and held her again. “A lot of lifetimes between then and now.” She nodded. “I’m going to help Castano, with his duties. He wasn’t alone, in making that mistake.” Jaron nodded, and kissed her on the forehead. “He is a good man. Go and help him. Your atonement is also accepted.”

Ω

The next day, those on Mars met, again. Amy was addressing the group, this time.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 210 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“I had Amanda tune-in resonance, with the pyramid’s computers. To some degree, they solved a mystery. Amanda, do you want to explain it; yourself?” “Thank you, Amy. The tenants of this structure back then, were in fact, the creators of it. They arrived from the Bootes Galaxy, as we thought. I had a little trouble at first, tuning into the computer, as no life has been there, for millennia. Nevertheless, I was able to make it work. In fact, their computer parts aren’t dissimilar, to our own.” Amy butted in. “Amanda, why were they here.” “Yes, but first, I want to thank Castano for the beautiful clean that I received, and you too, Anki.” “Amanda!” said Amy. Amanda would have been smiling. “Simply put, these people, who came here, were fleeing Bootes, as we thought. They came from an isolated planet, on the outside of their small sub cluster galaxy. They fled some group, who was reported as progressively enslaving all before it. Apparently, this group enslaved every culture, within its own galaxy, and was doing the same in the sub galaxies, between it and here. So; this race fled.” “Who were they fleeing? Asked Jaron. “Talkron. There is no mistaking it.” Jaron then asked, “Can you explain their cannibalism and human farming? “That did happen, Captain,” answered Amanda. “They did flee to here, this giant race. Moreover,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 211 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

they did live on human flesh. They bred the Neanderthals down there on Earth, just for that purpose, as food. Here, on Mars, weren’t sufficient resources, for keeping that kind of game. The food for Neanderthals was too sparse, here. They couldn’t survive on Mars. It was too cold. That is why this giant race selected this small planet, as it had a larger sister aired-planet that it could use, as a farm. From here, they farmed the Neanderthals. They had Earth gamekeepers down there, whose giant body remains sometimes have been uncovered, by Earth archeologists from time to time. They appear to have had bases covered over by pyramids, like here. However, in the main, the giants stayed here, where the gravity was lighter and more adaptable, for their sized bodies. They could not stay on that planet, Sequetus 3, for any long duration of time. Their physical frames could not endure it.” “They were all over the world, doing this farming?” asked Amy. Amanda showed a map of the planet. “They were everywhere. Wherever there were pyramids, they had bases under them. Mostly those bases are still there. The very first was in the Crimea11, which

11 Explanation: While Egypt is heavily documented as being a possible product of an integration of a space opera society, these were not the first pyramids. The oldest pyramids on Earth are in the Crimea, which is also in the vicinity of where the Indo-European language came from, both feeding the languages of India and then Asia, E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 212 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

is near where the planet’s Indo-European language originates from.” “And the current human race, as distinct to the Neanderthals?” asked Jaron. “The computer stops recording, at many points. Nevertheless, it would seem, and I’m jumping ahead here, that the human race was also bred, by them, or at least the Talkron. The first attempt to breed the current race, resulted in none of the race doing anything, which their keepers wanted of them to do. However, they reproduced heavily. The human body gene pool had been given heavy fertility hormones to make them reproduce, at accelerated rates.” “Was this from the Talkron?” asked Amy. “Yes, the Talkron are the race that overran Bootes and have been here perhaps thirty thousand years now into conquering this galaxy. They needed a short-lived fast breeding program to farm. Earth already had one, so it was perfect. The only trouble was that they wanted a shorter lived animal than the Neanderthal to farm. Thus, your sub-race, was then introduced. They also used the mind-altering methods you have experienced in Kantee, the Station-ships, and in Palbo. In the Federation, they used the Warp Drive Bank as their controlling vehicle. They seem to feel there are two main groups that could prevent them from conquering this

and European languages. Other great pyramids can be found in Bosnia, for example. Ed.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 213 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Santonia Galaxy. It is all in the Bootes records. While this ship is old, it seems its occupants and its records continued on for a hundred thousand years.” “Who are those groups?” butted in Akeala. “I would have to say the first was the Pleiadians, followed by the Boguard. From our other data it seems the Talkron stopped the Pleiadians from thwarting them, but the Pleiadians did slow them down. They then seemed to have focused using much of their energy, on trying to find the Boguard. When Goren Torren arrived, he reversed their plans. He stalled them and it set the Palboans, and the Warp Drive Bank, back. However, Goren Torren died prematurely; somehow that wasn’t in their strategy, and it gave rise to the Temple. The Temple then spread out over the galaxy, using Goren Torren’s ideas, and that that halted the Bank, and the Talkron’s intent. Since then, the Bank has taken back much of its lost incursion, and has been reinstating its program of mental implanting, and making slaves of people, through thought control. However, you Captain; you prevented that, now. You and Amy stopped the pirates, Bandon Mirak, Omm, and others, and you’ve fought them, all the way back, to here. Here: is their current stand. Here: is where you next either win this universe, for the free, or we lose it.” With that, Amanda was silent. The others looked around, at each other. Akeala felt a big lump in her throat.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 214 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

All that was in their computer? Thought Jaron, while the silence was continuing. Most of it was, but not all, answered Amanda. Who are you, Amanda? I’ll tell you when the time comes to know. For now, we have Wellum and I here in Sequetus. We don’t want to alert the Talkron if we can avoid it. “Then, what was Earth being used for, by the Talkron? What kind of breeding program did they have, and where did humanity go? Those billions of them; where did they go?” asked Jaron. Amanda reverted to speech, so all could hear. “I do know, or at least, I can accurately guess. You experienced some of it, on Kantee, in their moon base. Here, you have another moon base, but it is bigger, much better equipped, than their Kantee base. This is their breach, into the Santonia Galaxy. They won’t give it up lightly. You will need to fight.” Jaron looked around. “We have less than a dozen people, here.” “Captain, I am much more help, than you can imagine. There is a legion of us, like me, waiting to come into this universe. We just need to be invited. I’ve alerted every Man-o-War, to be ready, and in turn alerted their captains. They’re mobilizing; now.” “How” asked Amy. “Where I originate from, and where you as a life-force, originate from, there is no time, and no space. I can think back there and my thoughts instantly relay to my brother and sister crafts in the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 215 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

physical universe. They in turn alert their captains. It doesn’t matter where they are. They alert the Boguard, they alert the Temple. Anki, your father now knows you are well and alive, like you were before. He broke down, and cried and cried with relief. I sent images of you working, and he is amassing an armada force that has not been seen in this galaxy, ever before.” Anki wanted to ask, but Jaron slowly lifted his hand. “Then, if you have that ability, Amanda, you know, what is happening on Bootes and Andromeda. You know what they did, to humanity and you must be aware, of their plans.” Amanda sighed. “That is true. It is Andromeda, where some come from; now, but that isn’t their true source, either. I haven’t revealed everything. I do know. That’s why they’re here. The humanity you seek is just stored, as they stored the royals, on Kantee. They’re stored, on Sequetus 2. It’s only the scale, which is different.” “For what purpose?” asked Amy. “They’re an invasion force, Amy. They intend to formally invade this galaxy, and they’re mentally implanting every human being, as they go. Those, who are stored on Sequetus 2, will be awoken, given mental hypnotic commands to fight. They will be given images and ideas, to make them think that they must fight, for the greater good of the Talkron, and they will die, for the Talkron. They will be bred

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 216 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

bodies, to suit their needs. They’ll invade the galaxy swiftly, when the Talkron are ready, and they are almost ready. Many of the life from Sequetus 3 have been implanted, to simply go straight to Federation planets, and start to inhabit all newborns as they arrive. They will slowly grow up to be children already programmed and implanted, to accept Talkron control.” “The plans are on many levels. They will need many bodies too, to run invasion craft, and they can’t do this, with just the life-force, or spirit, even if implanted and bent to their warped way of thinking.” “True,” said Amanda. “They’re making bodies by the millions, on the moon. That is its role. Most of their staff, on the Moon, is from this program. The staff is, or was, terrestrial12, from Earth. Now, they are there, working for the Talkron. Those terrestrials are now making ships by the thousands, on the moon. They are also enslaving my own kind, by the hundreds, in that second moon, forcing them to power warp drives. Their invasion day is approaching; fast.” “Your kind?” asked Akeala. “Yes. I’m the same life-force category, which they capture in their Station-ships, and that’s a program that they have; ongoing here.” “Why do they fear the Boguard?” asked Akeala.

12 DEFINITION: TERRESTRIAL. From Earth. Terra meaning earth. Here it means the staff on the moon is originally from Earth.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 217 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“They fear them, because they’re like brothers and have the same abilities, but moreover they fear them, because they know the true power behind us, the Man-o-Wars, and that your race and we are working together.” “How can they know?” asked Akeala. “Because when they capture my kind, my kind are under torture threats to assist them, and my kind can communicate to its own kind, in the Man-o-Wars. That scares the Talkron.” Akeala thought about this, and had another question. “They couldn’t support that many bodies on the moon,” said Akeala. “They can and they do. Most are unconscious,” answered Amanda. “They have brought up the narcotics, which they needed, off from the planet, and stored it centuries ago. That’s why part of the Amazon has been left, untouched. Narcotics can still be harvested; there. They have also grown short smaller grey bodies, which use less space, less oxygen, less food and water. In fact, the small grey bodies use only a twentieth, of what an Earth grown human, consumes. With almost zero activity, low gravity, and with growth retardants, the Talkron can feed one hundred, under their program, with the same food and nourishment, used for one Earth grown.” “Doesn’t this cost…?” exclaimed Anki. Amanda agreed. “Yes, but, this invasion has been over thirty thousand years in the planning, and

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 218 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

what the cost is – is insignificant, compared to the spoils of victory. They will conquer this universe, and compel other life, to do their bidding without question. It was unstoppable, until Goren Torren arrived. “So what plan do you have, Amanda?” asked Jaron. “It looks to me, as though you too, have been counter-planning for a long time.” “Correct, Captain. My plan is to get you back to the Sandrist fleet off from Proxima. That’s where the Federation is amassing. From there, you coordinate the invasion of Sequetus, and take over the system. After that, we need another plan, for all we will have done in Sequetus, is forestall what has been planned, for a thousand years. “Does that mean; invading another galaxy?” asked Amy. “Perhaps.” “Andromeda has billions of stars and worlds,” reminded Akeala. “If it’s necessary.” “Who are you, Amanda?” asked Jaron, again. “It seems to me, that you have been planning to unite various forces, in this sector of the Galaxy, for a long time, to counter this galactic invasion. You have been here a long time, too, I think. So; who are you?” “Captain, I’ll tell you when it’s time. Now it’s up to you. You have the knowledge, of what is about to happen, and what has been happening. The Talkron

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 219 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

were behind the reason why the royals and Federation came into power. Behind their mask of good, is an evil of hardship and universal domination. You have the knowledge; now. You need to work, out what you are going to do. In essence, you are also running out of time.”

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 220 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 7

PROXIMA CENTAURI

Jaron was on the bridge, of Amanda. He had his helmet in hand, his cap over his head. He felt the familiar warm fuzzy feeling, which the cap gave him. “I can feel your power, Captain, when you put it on,” said Amanda. Jaron thanked his group. He was going to make a huge leap, through space. As he had explained, he had demonstrated his ability to traverse, from one planet to another. Now, he would attempt to travel, within the greater galaxy. However, this was a massive step. Although, as Amanda pointed out, he was doing nothing fundamentally different, to those under the influence of Warp Drives. That didn’t console Jaron. There seemed something comforting, about having a large metal hull around one, in the warp fields. Jaron tightened his visor. Anki inspected his suit. She gave him the thumbs up, and then kissed him, on the helmet. Jaron smiled, inside. He had air, for an hour and a half. He stood, waved to her, started to fade and vanished, from view. “Will he be all right?” asked Amy, of Amanda. “Do you think I would let him go alone, if he was not? He is fine. He is leaving me, and there are

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 221 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

another five Man-o-Wars at the other end, pulling him along. Even if he were to lose his way, I wouldn’t. I can see him, flowing through the universe from the other side, where I am. You understand, I’m not here as such, and neither are you. I am only looking into this universe. No life is in this physical universe. Therefore, I’m watching his body, and guiding him, to make sure that he has the necessary computations, to arrive at his destination, correctly. At the other end, there are five more, like me, doing the same, with their captains, guiding him along. It won’t fail.” “Why do you not do it all yourself, Amanda? Or Wellum?” asked Amy. Amanda let out a sigh, and the ventilation blew Kuro on the Captain’s chair. “He is able to bend time around the physical universe. That’s different, to what I can do. He bends time around matter, and the matter moves within the folds of the time universes, that are constantly moving through to the future. I can’t do that.” “Why?” asked Amy. “He has been in the future, and he has the instrument, which he got, from those worlds of Centrecom. That cap is from the future and it resonates with him. He is in the future and in the past, with that cap on. He is neither here, nor in any time really, and he can slide right through the physical universes that makes up now. He has

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 222 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

broken the physical universe rules, and I envy him. He is truly great.” Amy looked at Kuro; curled up on the Captain’s chair, again. “Yes, he is great.” Kuro glanced up at Amy and closed her eyes.

Ω

Jaron could see it. There was a cluster of dull lights, and a blur. He guessed it must have been only moments, since he left. What speed was he doing? Was there a speed at all, and could it be measured? There was no inertia, in his travel. He was neither: slow, fast, or stopped. It made no difference. It was more as if he was stationary and the universes revolved and moved, to suit him, not the other way around. That was how he reasoned that it was working. He also felt the pull, from the other end. However, pull was the wrong word. It was a yearning, an admiration that was gathering him in. The thought came again, who were these life-forces, that seemed to inhabit the Boguard Man- o-Wars? He knew the answer, and that was, that he would find, out when they were ready. Amanda had told him once, why they inhabited their craft. She said it was because the craft had no other life aboard. It seemed, according to Amanda, that when a life-force inhabited an already living body, it had to deal with the life of the body, the life of the cells, and even other life, that wanted to

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 223 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

intervene. That, said Amanda, was the downfall of the biological units, as she referred to them. They generated their own thoughts, their own desires, and that made life confusing, for humans. Amanda said it gave a life-force, trying to run a biological unit halz, as the unit tended to try to run the life-force, rather than the other way around. She also said that those running bodies, sometimes forgot whom they were and started to identify with being their bodies rather than themselves. This Amanda said, was very confusing, and she didn’t want to be confused. Whereas, on the other hand, she wasn’t a spacecraft, and she knew that. She didn’t have to contend with the thoughts of the spaceship, or its computers. Certainly, all matter was imbued with life, but that was only an imbuement by its creators. Amanda insisted that she would much rather be, exactly as she was. The ship never tried to run her, she said. Jaron could see the lights of the fleet ahead, against the backdrop of millions of tiny stars. He began to slow down. He didn’t even have to think, to do so. It just needed to happen, and it did. It was a strange experience, as no effort was required. He approached as though he wasn’t there, as though his body was behind, and it was following him, or he was ahead of it. He couldn’t explain it. Instead of taking months, it seemed that he was traveling only moments. Had time slowed, stopped, or was he outside of time? Perhaps he was outside of the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 224 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

parameters and agreements of the physical universe itself, he wondered.

Jaron accelerating through space

Ω

“Captain. He has been spotted, or it’s something, that we expect will be him.” It was the first mate. The captain asked, “Well?” “Yes, Captain Neen. It’s him, and he is coming into our five-way net.” It was the Man-o-War, known as Rakel. The five Man-o-Wars were gathered in a tetrahedral form. Jaron was being propelled through time and space, and effectively being “caught” by these five. “He is slowing, slowing, now below light speed, a tenth light speed, and…. We have him.” “Thank you, Rakel. Is he aboard?” asked Captain Neen. E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 225 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Yes, Captain.” “I’m here, Captain,” breathed out Jaron, standing in the entryway of the bridge, while undoing his helmet. “Rakel, thank you very much. Can you let Amanda know that I’m here?” “My pleasure, Captain Jaron. Amanda has already received the images of your arrival, and says to you, well done. You almost reached the speed of light, squared. That was a theoretical undertaking, which no one thought physically possible.” Jaron nodded to the ship’s console in acknowledgement. “Thank you. Can Amanda contact me instantly, or is there a time lag?” “Instantly; Captain.” “Thank you, Rakel. Captain Neen, you and the Man-o-War Captains and I need to brief, and I’ll outline what the plans are. Also, gather the Captains and Commanders, of the rest of the fleet. We will inform them; next. Rakel, have Amanda and Wellum in the loop, during all these briefings. In addition, if there are others you need to loop in, from elsewhere, let me know who and where. I assume all Man-o- Wars that loop in will have their Boguard Captains with them, as well.” “Yes, Captain Jaron, on all counts. Will a briefing in twenty minutes, be appropriate?” “Yes Rakel. Sorry, Captain Neen, she is your ship.” “My Lorde, thank you. These are unusual times, and unusual protocols are adopted. Thank you for

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 226 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

handing her back, however. Let me show you, to the briefing room,” offered Neen. Jaron smiled. He passed his helmet to an orderly, and was escorted to the briefing room. In the meanwhile, Captain Neen explained to him, who was who, as regards the fleet.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 227 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 8

BRIEFING

To Jaron, he felt stronger, than before. It seemed that his journey had changed him. Somehow, stepping outside the bounds of the physical universe, gave a person strengths not expected. It was something, something, he kept telling himself. It made him stronger. He wondered if his own agreements with the physical universe, were diminishing as its control on him was lessening. He looked around, at the five captains of the Man-o-Wars. He had explained what was happening on Sequetus, about Mars, the Moon, Black Knight, and probably what was happening on Venus. “I’ll reiterate,” he said. “We have an impending invasion, into this galaxy, and it has been prepared, for many thousands of years. Our guess, is thirty thousand years. It has penetrated into the highest levels, of our planetary administration of the Federation. “This invading force, has been attempting to control the Federation, and would have succeeded, except for the Boguard, the Pleiadians, and the Temple. “We have recently been tipping the balance of power in our favor, though it has been to and fro, for several thousands of years. We didn’t know the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 228 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

enemy before, where it was, or who it was. We do now, to a degree. We, at least have an enemy, which now, we can see.” Jaron looked around, at his fellow Captains. “The enemy has been using various forms of mental implanting, for thousands of years. They keep that part of us, which is the life-force, captive. They implant it with commands, and then set it free, with a body, to do their bidding. These, they call their agents, and they roam the Federation, taking positions in the judiciary, government, education and media. Their job is to make society more amenable, to their takeover; to make us softer. The Temple has been weeding them out; slowly. Many of the agents have no idea that this is who they are, and why they act, the way they do. Their otherwise destructive decisions and actions within a society; have no other explanation, and what they do, is leave a population in wonderment, especially when the agents are part of a government. Their actions make no sense, otherwise.” Jaron continued, “The Talkron is getting stronger, with the more agents they recruit. They go from one planet to the next. They start, by taking over the top families, of the planetary leaders. While I don’t have the entire scenario, on our home planets, I do know what happened on Earth.” Jaron accepted a cup of kalo, from a Boguard orderly. “Commander Beel has been researching on Sequetus, with a small band of human renegades,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 229 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

who refuse to give in to the Talkron. They worked out, sometime back, what has been happening and are sharing the data, with us. “The renegade research found, that there were initially around a hundred families on Earth, as agents, though there were perhaps only a dozen natural leaders, amongst those families. Then, as the population spread out, those families became several hundred, each in different countries. They included political leaders, media moguls, leading industrialists, drug cartel leaders, and certainly, the banking elite. These became the agents, run by similar methods, as found in the rebirthing tanks on Kantee. “Sometimes, actual Talkron walked amongst them, but the Talkron themselves are slightly different in physical form, to you and I. If you have any questions, on how we arrived at this information, there are your ships. They can link into the Man-o- Wars, of Amanda and Wellum. They will give you more data. Correct Amanda? Wellum? “Correct, Captain,” came Amanda’s voice. “Correct, Captain,” reiterated Wellum.

Ω

“Sir, I think we might have a lead on him, or her.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 230 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The senior officer, of the communications section, came over. “Tell me there is someone; really out there.” “Here, sir, by Mars. Look at this series of images. See how the images of the comets, are almost not quite perfect. I mean, both the craters are very similar. Look over here, we have this fleeting image three times, of the same uniform parts, as the image we caught, on the Black Knight, sir.” The senior officer peered at it. His junior staff member was correct. “Do a total search, of the area. Send in a team, of two hundred troopers, and scour the region. In particular, go over that old Mars Base compound. Send in our best. Perhaps it’s too obvious, but we were caught there once before, decades ago. Nothing is to be left to chance.” “Understood, sir.” “How soon can you have troopers, on the ground?” “We can be in the region in three days, sir. I’ll have to clear it with above. Following that, we can have reconnaissance, and then we can have our teams on the planet, in another day, depending on what we find.” The senior officer looked at the screens, and stood back with slight shock. He swallowed. The junior officer also swallowed. “I see it too, sir. Someone important has just arrived, and there is to be a change of plan. I feel it.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 231 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Both looked at each other; fear covering their faces.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 232 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 9

JILTA

Jaron’s first detail and obligation, was to the Master Templar. He was more than a father-in-law. He was a role model, of what was right, to about one hundred and seventy billion people, and Jaron was married to his daughter. This time, there were seven Man-o-Wars, stationed off around Jilta. The orders, for this new mission came from the most senior Boguard command, on Yaltipia. Jaron may be who he was, but he still below those senior to him. It wasn’t long, before Jaron was hurtling through space, at just under that unbelievable speed, of light squared. He was outside of the physical universe, traveling in purple warp drive space. Jaron marveled, at how the space seemed to change its purple tinge to white streaks, as he approached light-squared speed. He couldn’t see stars, but he could sense voids, as though he was passing though great segments of nothing-there, not even broadmatter. He looked at his hands and they started to become part, of the translucent light. It frightened him a little, but a quiet soothing energy seemed to be reassuring him, that all was fine.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 233 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He reached a point of elation, where he wondered, if he was in the center of cosmic creation. He didn’t know why he had that thought, but it was there. All seemed to be, of no concern. He felt in perfect harmony, with himself, his body, and everything else, that reached out to infinity. He had never felt this, before. It was beyond exhilaration. It was a serenity that seemed to be him, and had been with him forever, and would be forever. Then, as he was beginning to bask in the glory of all his existence, the feeling began to fade. He was slowing. He could see the white around him, taking on a purple tinge, and then, abruptly, he fell into space and in front of him, was the planet Jilta. An eye blink later, and he was in the Royal Palace. The five Man-o-Wars let go, and informed their captains that their mission had been successful.

Ω

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 234 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amy was outside the pyramid, under the cover of Amanda. She was searching for relics, which may have belonged to the ancient race, which built the pyramid. She had found several so far, but they were just garden implements. However, they were interesting, in that they were iron, which didn’t rust and withstood time.

Amy beneath Amanda on Mars

Now, she was under Amanda, with Wellum and his captain surveying overhead, they provided a mask to prevent any visible light rays, from leaving their scene. “I think I’ve another big one, Amanda. It’s twenty pacs, down to your left, again. It shows up on the screen, as a large box, but I can’t penetrate it.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 235 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Same here Amy. I have a feeler on it, now. However, I can’t find, what is inside it. I only know, that it’s three pacs by two pacs by four pacs.” “Do you think that we should raise it?” asked Amy. “Our purpose is to find data. If we can see it isn’t a trap, we should, as long as Wellum can provide cover,” explained Amanda. Amy was waist deep in sand, when Amanda began to laugh. Amy grimaced, as she couldn’t see the reason for humor. “Well?” she asked. “Kuro is smooching the captain’s chair, and I can’t shake her off.”

Ω

Commander Beel was in the New York library. He had found the third basement level down. It wasn’t under water and he had opened its great vacuum-sealed steel doors, which had been first pried open, a century earlier. Beel was still piecing together the Sequetus history. He had traced the lineage, of the top families of the planet from the Twenty Century, prior to Goren Torren forcing intervention. He was trying to find out, what happened on Earth, so they could apply that lesson, to other planets, out there. Beel and Jaron reasoned the tactics of the Talkron, would likely be similar. If it happened on Sequetus 3, it would be happening on the other planets. If they

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 236 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

could unravel the past here, it could give them a handle, on salvaging the Federation. Beel had a helper, assigned from the group that ran their ward of the planet, as they called it. Her name was Danni. “So, Danni, it looks like many of the influential families of this planet were slightly genetically different, which is why they were chosen as agents. I presume that as they’re slightly physically different, they’re easier to control, and implant with ideas.” Danni handed him the next book. “You are catching on, Cammander Beel. Try this book, next. You will see how much emphasis is placed, on not allowing their blood line, to mix with the commoners of the planet, such as us.” She had marked the pages, for him to read. Beel looked through them. “I also see, that as a general rule, humanity is mildly confused, but when one enters into a confused group, the thought and instruction of a guiding entity, then the confused group will often go, in this new direction. By overriding these families they became a fifth column for the Talkron, slowly doing their bidding and shaping the world, as instructed.” Danni nodded. “That’s exactly what I’ve been telling you, Polton. It’s why so many government leaders and decisions never made sense. They were never rational, unless you were seeing those decisions, from the eyes of someone, trying to subvert the planet.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 237 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“So, Danni, I’ve one question left. I can remember glimpses of last lifetime, my life before that, and so on. To me such is natural. I’ve never met a race, who was suffering past-life amnesia, the way they did, here. Do you have any idea, why?” “Genetics?” asked Danni. “It’s in these books.” Danni went to get up. Beel shook his head and motioned for her to sit. “I’m a short-lifer and have only bred, with short-life stock. I’m from Yoo Rup. However, I can remember ages ago. You can’t. Yet our genes are fundamentally the same.” Danni shook her head. “I’m lucky to recall any events, from when I was ten years old. How can I know I’ve lived before, if I can’t recall it?” Beel shrugged. This was a mystery, bigger than all the others, which he was chasing. Most others from Earth, who had migrated to the far-Outer- Worlds, had a far-reaching memory, such as his. This past-life memory-loss was something, he reasoned, to do with the planet itself.

Ω

Akeala was inside the Man-o-War, talking to Amanda as Belkron, two Boguard and Amy oversaw the raising of the underground box, which they had found. Akeala was looking out, to the desolate landscape, on the screens. “Amanda?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 238 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Yes, Aki.” “Why did all the life die, and leave here?” Amanda hesitated for minute and then answered. “There is more to life, than just a plant or animal body, Aki. There is all manner of classes of life. There are groves of trees, under the guidance of one life, a senior life. Ant communities have individual little ant lives, and a greater community life form, looking after it too. It’s not unlike your cells, and you.” “Why did it die?” “I’m getting to that. For a start, life doesn’t die. It continues, but the material form, which it controls, ceases, or appears to cease.” “What do you really mean?” “Well, out there, once it was a desert of many life forms. It was a desert, but still it had many plants and animals, mostly small, but some were larger. It even had some forests and small jungles of sorts, around the equator. However, once these giants came, they had to eat, and they were carnivore, similar to carnivore humans, living on Sequetus 3.” “That sounds disgusting; consuming flesh and an animal’s blood.” “Yes, Aki, but your father used to eat animals too, when he was young. A higher life form, eating a smaller one, or lower one, is part of the whole mix of life, on a planet.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 239 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Akeala thought about that. “So did they eat everything that was alive, and it all died?” she asked. “Yes and no.” They did eat everything they could, and they overate. That’s true. However, that wasn’t all, and overeating wouldn’t be enough to kill the planet, as such. What they did, is eat everything. Once the animals were effectively gone, they ate the vegetation. They had no idea, of what was life, or the laws, under which life operated. Life’s laws are marginally different, to the physical universe, Aki. Often, animal eaters can’t understand these laws.” “Was that what happened, on Earth? The animal eaters killed it, too?” “In part, but let me get to it, in my own time,” said Amanda. “What they ate was not the point. Here is a law of life, and it might seem obvious. “Life ensures our survival, by making us distance ourselves from anything that reduces our chances of survival. On the opposite side of the coin, we are attracted to anything, which we think may improve our chances of survival.” Akeala thought about that. “Like how?” “Look at Kuro, sitting on your lap. Both of you think you are survival for each other, and therefore you are close.” “Yes, but we like each other, Amanda, that’s different.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 240 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amanda showed Kuro, on the screen. Kuro looked up, at her image. “You like what is survival, and you dislike what isn’t survival.” Aki then got it. “So, if I like Castano, it means he is survival for me.” She smiled. “And I like to be near him.” “Correct.” “So that’s why I like to be with him?” “It seems so.” Akeala thought. “Then, how do I make him like me?” Amanda laughed and the ship gently rocked. Kuro looked at Akeala. “That’s a good question. Many have asked it.” “Asked about Castano?” “No, but there is another law of life, which has the answer.” “Yes?” Akeala asked. She was very interested; now. “What life persists at, it gets. It’s a simple law, and it works absolutely. In fact, all the laws of life I’ve just explained, are absolute.” Akeala thought about that, and then went back, to the earlier topic. “So; why did life leave?” Amanda answered. “It left, because it wasn’t wanted, it wasn’t liked, it wasn’t understood, and it was abused. The larger life-force that looked after the woods disappeared, as it wasn’t, wanted. Then the large life, which looked after this species, or another species, left. Following that, the smaller life,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 241 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

which looked after small groups left, and eventually, all life left, including the life, which was looking after the giants.” “There was a life-force, looking after the giants?” she asked. Aki was gaping. “Yes, every species has at least one, or more, depending on race and gender. Specialized groups can have their own, also.” “It sounds complicated. These life-forces, were they gods?” asked Akeala. “In some worlds, they would be called gods and were highly respected, highly venerated, high in demand, and popular. In those countries and worlds that venerated them, there was a lot of life. However, on Mars, this group of giants didn’t respect this other life, and they abused it. Life knew it wasn’t wanted, so it left.” Akeala was thinking, as Amanda continued. “Have you read the notes on Goren Torren, Aki?” “Yes.” “Explain to me, the Life-Of-The-World? It existed. It held those six worlds together; animals were looked after, and if you hurt the animals or other life, that Life-Of-The-World would nip you. It’s all there.” “Was there one, here?” asked Akeala. “Yes.” “It has gone, correct?” “Yes.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 242 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“What about Sequetus 3? It has gone from there, too?” “Yes, Aki. It has gone, too. It was once highly venerated as much as any god. Many religious texts down there had names for it.” “Then, how do we get that life, to return? There is lots of water in the ocean, and there is dirt there, too.” “There is a way. Firstly, you have to get all life, to want it to return. If you have some life, it needs more life, and it’s life already there, which pulls in the life, from the other side. It can be a slow process, and you have to build on what you have. However, it can speed up. Some life pulls in more life, from the other side of this physical universe. As an example, if there is moss, and small bits of life, in the soil; it wants more life around it, and it persists and makes it safe, for the other life to take up residence. The animals are attracted to eat it, and in exchange, they carry the seeds on their fur, or ingest the seeds, passing the seeds, later on, with a manure package, to help it grow, so the plants grow, in new places. There is an exchange. Both want and need each other.” Akeala thought about this. “Is that why fruit’s sweet? It’s trying to get the animals to like it, so they eat it, and take the seeds and drop it, and this spreads the seeds. The droppings are good for the soil, and create bacteria, resulting in better environments for life?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 243 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“That’s correct. However, on a planet where the vegetation has been cut down, it makes less oxygen, like on Sequetus 3, and there, the animals were killed for food. This tells life in general; that it isn’t wanted, in the game-of-life. Life leaves and the planet becomes, like Mars.” “Why did it not become exactly like Mars, then?” “The Talkron stopped it. They began to remove humankind, for their own purposes, but we don’t know what all those purposes are; yet. However, in saying this, if the Talkron had not removed humankind, the world might have gone like Mars, and still could. It went past a point of no return, centuries ago.” “So; that removal was a good thing?” asked Akeala. “What is good for the predator isn’t necessarily good for the hunted, and vice versa. Good only depends on whose point of view it is, and the potential quantity, sharing those views.” “Why do we not have the same trouble, on our planets?” asked Akeala. “Oh, we have; in the past. However, now with the long-life population, and the lower reproductive hormone levels, it means that the populations are smaller. Their drive to oppress other life, is less. The rush, to populate or perish, isn’t there. Two or three children produced, over a couple of hundred years, has a different pressure on a planet, than two or three children every twenty years. Short-lifers

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 244 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

have a pressure to populate, at ten times the speed of long-lifers. That pressure on the other organisms is just not there, with long-life civilizations.” Akeala sighed. “I wish I was a ling-lifer.” “Ah, but you are really. You are Boguard and you will remember who you were, next lifetime. The age of the body isn’t that precious, once you know who you are,” explained Amanda. “Hmmph,” was all Akeala said. “That’s easy for you,” she added next. “I am only a novice….” A sudden draft blew Kuro off the Captain’s chair. She jumped back on, and dug her claws in, deep into the fabric. Akeala laughed. “I think Kuro likes the Captain.” “I’m sure she does,” answered Amanda.

Ω

The old man sat there, in very palatial surroundings. He looked at Jaron, with tears welling up, in his eyes. He had just watched another visio, of his daughter. She looked very normal, speaking exceptionally well, waving to him, and working hard. He listened to her speak, for twenty minutes. He saw that she also had tears. She wiped them away. The Master Templar quietly dabbed his eyes. He wasn’t ashamed of showing his feelings He looked at Jaron. “You’ve totally healed her: when no one else could?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 245 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Back of the Royal Palace

Jaron nodded. “Yes, sir. I had a theory and it worked.” “Again, you undo the effects of the Talkron, even on a personal scale.” Jaron nodded. The old man breathed out. “I am over seventy years old now. Your Boguard have rescued me, from an imprisonment, worse than death. You saved my Temple. You preserved the worth of Goren Torren. You saved my daughter, or Amy of Rambus did, many times, and again, recently. I owe you and I owe you. What can I do, to repay you?” Jaron smiled. “Sir, by promoting your values, it repays that debt, a thousand times. Normally that’s all I would ask.” E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 246 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“This time, you want something else?” Jaron indicated, for the next visio to play. It did. It showed the Talkron. It showed the history, of their presence. It showed Sequetus 3. Jaron turned it off. “Sir, they aren’t from this galaxy. They’re from another. I don’t know where; exactly. I do know that if they came here, we can also go there. I don’t know the size, of their forces. However, an invading party doesn’t have the passion, of a defending force. We’re the defending force. They have been enslaving us, and enslaving life, in general. We can reverse that.” The old man straightened, in his chair and asked an orderly, to bring them both fresh kalo. “If what you explain about the Warp Drives is true, then we’re merely inflicting more pain on life, each time we travel. How does that work, into your equation?” Jaron smiled. He turned on another visio. It was the Man-o-War: Wellum. It was a direct feed- link. The Master Templar looked over to Jaron, who then explained, “That’s a Man-o-War, a Boguard ship. It’s powered by one life-force, willingly, who is now directly communicating with me via this link, even though it’s on Sequetus 4, right at this moment.” The Master Templar looked at Jaron, disbelievingly.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 247 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The voice, from the image of the ship, answered. “Sir, yes. I’m Wellum. That’s correct. I’m imbuing power, to this Boguard craft; willingly.” The Master Templar sat back, as Wellum explained more. The ship was talking to him, hundreds of trillions of kinopacs, away. The Master Templar shook his head, in amazement. He then turned to Jaron, “This is true?” “Every piece of it, sir, but there is more.” Wellum next explained, and showed a visio, of the first battles of Kantee, and how the Kantee ship that he had been captured, imprisoned in, and forced to power, was liberated.” The Master Templar then asked, “He was recruited, if that’s the word, to your cause?” Jaron nodded. “Wellum?” “Yes Captain. That is completely correct. We can recruit or convert, most of those imprisoned, in each of your Warp Drive Fleet.” “Are they still, under our control?” asked the Master Templar. Wellum laughed. “No, sir. They’re under their own control, and what they do, would be of their own volition.” The Master Templar smiled. “That is a powerful thing. A willing cause, as opposed to, an unwanted fear. Do I turn all my ships over to you then, Wellum? “No sir, they will be inducted by Captain Jaron’s ship life, who is known as Amanda. We don’t really

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 248 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

have gender, but we adopt that way of being, for you, as gender is more acceptable.” The Master Templar looked at Jaron, and smiled. “I see, so this is my repayment time?” Jaron smiled. “Yes, sir. Would you like to speak with your daughter; direct?” The Master Templar’s eyes welled up; again. He nodded and waited several seconds. “Hello, Father.” Choked with emotion, all that they could manage: was, to look at each other. He couldn’t speak. He tried, but no sound would come out. A big tear ran down his cheek. “I’m in the ship, which you know as Wellum.” It was all she could say, as her eyes were full of tears, like his. The Master Templar looked at his daughter’s visio hologram, and wanted to put his arms, around her. She smiled at him. “I too, wish that I could put my arms around you, Father. Here is Aki, Father.” Anki turned and put out her hand, and another hand grabbed it, and it was Akeala. “Hello, Grand Pop.” The old man cried. “Grand pop?” he said; when he had steeled himself. Then, he started to laugh. He sighed. “You are all on Sequetus 4?” “Yes, Father.” Anki showed an image of outside, and the desolate landscape. Akeala stood, in front of the image. “I’ve been working with Aunt Amy, and we have dug up

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 249 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

something. It’s over two hundred thousand years old; we think.” The Master Templar looked at Jaron. “Amy of Rambus, is there, too: the Goddess of War?” Jaron nodded, and indicated to the visio. “Not only her, sir.” “Hello, Grandfather, Master Templar, sir.” The Master Templar looked at Yandra, his half grandson of sorts. He smiled. “Hello son. It’s very good, to see you, too. I hope you are keeping your sister, out of trouble.” Yandra was about to answer, when a black blur shot past, and grabbed Akeala, by her tunic. “That sir, is Kuro, a native small animal, which seems to like Aki a lot, and she it,” explained Yandra. The conversation went on, for fifteen minutes more, when the Master Templar sighed, and looked up, at Jaron. “Obviously I’ll give you our ships. When will it start?” Jaron called into the air, as though to anyone, who may have been listening. “Amanda?” “Yes, Captain.” came a voice from nowhere, but the air. “How soon?” “We can have an immediate start, as soon as everyone is ready, Captain. The life forms, in the warp drives of the first few craft, have been contacted, by the Man-o-Wars, around Jilta. They’re waiting, to be allowed to make the transition. I might add, if any don’t want to continue helping you,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 250 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Master Templar; we have plenty who will willingly take their place. This is all a voluntary induction, Mister Master Templar. No one is forced to enlist, here sir.” The Master Templar was feeling much more at ease. He looked around. His grandchildren and daughter waved, goodbye. The connection ceased.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 251 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 10

READINESS

The Master Templar was standing at his desk, in his war room. He had several aides by him. His traditional double kalo, was in his hand. “Start, young Jaron.” He sipped. Jaron looked towards the other Boguard. “Ready: Amanda,” he called, into the air. “Converting now, Captain,” returned the voice, out from nowhere. They all watched, as seven Man-o-Wars surrounded one destroyer. The destroyer began to glow. It was ten million Ks away. “It won’t supernova?” asked the Master Templar, just a bit apprehensively. “No chance of that, Master Templar,” responded Amanda. The Master Templar nodded and looked sideways to Jaron. “How does she do that, the voice in the air?” he asked, quietly. Jaron shrugged. Amanda laughed. “If I communicated by thought, you might feel overwhelmed, so I do it this way. You actually only think, that you hear a voice. There is no real sound, as such.” “You think, that makes it so much better?” he joked, shrugging, unconvinced.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 252 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The screens showed the destroyer, growing translucent and the crew in it, a blue color. Then, the Warp Drives sections showed red, with a black intensity, in the center of the red. The black became maroon, then paler, until it became purple, followed by a blue and faded to white, until it vanished. At that point, the whole ship ceased being translucent, and it took on its opaque hull shape, seemingly bathed in a white light, from outside. However, the light appeared to have no source. The Master Templar asked, “Is it complete?” A female voice came, out from the air, “Yes Master Templar. My name is Alina, and I am your Destroyer Alina. I am reporting for duty, sir.” The Master Templar laughed. “You are very welcome here, Destroyer Alina. I suppose you report to…” He wasn’t sure about whom to name, and looked over, to Jaron. Jaron smiled. “Yes, sir. She has a Corduke Captain, and they will be bonded in a ceremony, in which we will initiate the Cordukes and their ships in their roles.” Jaron turned to the screen. “Welcome out there, Alina. We’re very glad; to have you with us.” “Thank you, Captain.”

Ω

That night, the Master Templar met with his twenty-three Cordellos. They fully supported him.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 253 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

By that night’s end, the entire Jilta Home Fleet had been converted. The following week, there were internal ceremonies and special events, marking the change. Either the fleet had new captains, or the existing captains were invited to join the Cordukes. The ships’ bonding continued; for a week. The Jilta Home Fleet was brought; to readiness. The fleet then divided itself into groups. Six ships of the fleet joined each Man-o-War, and made a new group of seven. Included in this group, were frigates and a cruiser. Those fleets then went out, and converted more of the existing larger fleets. They traveled faster than ever before, faster than any Warp Drive system. It was apparently the threat of pain, which prevented the Warp Drives, from reaching their potential. With that threat gone, each ship’s speed increased.

Ω

The Master Templar was sitting in his office. Jaron, and three Boguard and six Cordellos were there. The Cordello from Silt, spoke. “Captain Jaron. Even if we do manage to convert all our fleet, the entire Templar Fleet, there’s only fifteen hundred ships. Will that be enough, for Sequetus and what comes next?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 254 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Sir,” explained Jaron, “It’s enough. What we need to do, is to engage them, be victorious at Sequetus, regain Sequetus, and remove the threat. We need to take all their bases, but prevent them from destroying those bases. We need to take over their operation, not destroy it. Then, we will know exactly what is happening and exactly, how they’re operating. We have to know what they’re doing, to our populace, and our civilian leaders, out there. Once we know that, we can challenge what is going on, and undo it. However, without knowing what they’re doing, and how they’re doing it, their agents are not under our control. We’re then, effectively powerless to stop them, let alone work out who they are, and what their allegiances are.” The Silt Cordello sat, looking directly at Jaron. He added, “Thank you, Captain. I expect a lot of things, that never made any sense to us, will start to be understood, soon.” “Yes sir, social confusion will start to disappear. However, the first target is Sequetus. We can’t do it, without Sequetus being taken, first.” “What then?” asked another tough looking Cordello, who was also a Corduke. “We need to be ready, to then invade their galaxy. We are gaining, fast. Before the Talkron can get word of what is happening, we need to be where they are. We need to be taking this war back to them, their area, and not waging it here. Wage war in their district, not ours.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 255 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“That’s easily said,” responded another Cordello. “Yes, exactly so, sir. However, it needs saying. We have all these problems, here, with Sequetus, Brandon Mirac, his psychrons, the pirates, my own abductions, and the Master Templar’s daughter being captured. All this harm is coming from a single source, and that’s here now in Sequetus. It’s been beaten back, to this one entrance point. It seems to have no other foothold. We need to stamp it out from our galaxy and then move, to their quarter of the universe.” Another Cordello spoke. “Do we know how many other galaxies are infected, with these Talkron? Is it just this one: Andromeda?” “Actually, we don’t yet know, sir,” explained Jaron. “Do we know how we’re going to take on a whole galaxy, of billions of worlds that have already been depraved, by these Talkron?” asked the Cordello. Jaron nodded. “Yes, sir. I do. If we take the Sequetus System, we have a good chance of victory. We do to their craft, what we did with your fleet.” The Cordello pondered on that. “What if we lose?” the Cordello asked, looking at the Master Templar. “Then, we are doomed, to eventual slavery,” answered Jaron. “There is no other way, to predict it. “Fight, or become oppressed.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 256 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The Master Templar had been silent, during most of this. He now spoke. “We know what the Man-o-Wars are doing, but the life that resides within it, what is it?” Instantly, a small ball, of pale wispy light appeared, to the right of the Master Templar. A patient and pleasant voice emanated, from it. It was Amanda. “Excuse me, for eaves dropping, my senior spiritual friends. I’ll reveal more about my colleagues and me; in due course. The speculation about my kind, the life that we are, is conjecture, that we will end, at the right time. For now, we’re working together, for the mutual benefit of you and us. We’re on your side. We have a common enemy, the Talkron.” Jaron shrugged. “Sirs, I think it’s time that we all moved, to the next phase of our plans. Those of you, who have the mission to remove the Talkron agents, must keep persevering. Don’t let them resurface. We expect that as soon as we have the last of their rebirthing tanks isolated, their controllers will vanish and their agents will slump, into a mild apathy. They will be effectively useless, as agents.” Jaron looked up, into the air, as though deep in thought. He turned to all in the meeting. “Sirs, I’ve worn out my time here, and I must go. Please, do your jobs well. May we all be free again, to walk a galaxy, without being slaves.” With that he abruptly stood. A Boguard opened the door and he strode out. The two Boguard who

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 257 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

trailed after him looked tall in their old-styled shocksuits of a millennium ago.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 258 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 11

MARS SIDE

Jaron was running, down the corridors. His Boguard were just keeping up, and more were gathering with him from the sides, as he ran. One dashed in, and threw Jaron, his helmet. Others ran to him, pushed it on; another tightened it down. As soon as they reached the open courtyard, Jaron was already leaving the ground. He looked towards the stars, and his body took a straight line out, and within three seconds, had vanished completely; from view. “Status Amanda. Quickly!” “We have been found, Captain. Somehow, they worked out where we were. They dropped a force of two hundred, all around the Pyramid. I don’t know how they did this, without my knowledge.” “What about Wellum?” “He is with Castano on the outside, fighting them. They aren’t like the Warp Drive craft, exactly. They’re like… volunteers, ….” “For the other side?” “Yes, Captain. They’re willing, for the other side, as you put it.” “How long until I get there? Twenty minutes, Captain. It isn’t instant.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 259 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“What about our other ships, our Man-o-Wars? How long?” “They will be hours, Captain, though the Boguard Man-o-Wars from Jilta, are already moving, with you. They’re around you, and on their way, and will arrive when you do. We’re pulling them in with you.” “Will we be in time?” There was silence. Only silence. Jaron was hurtling through a purple to white existence, and there was only silence.

Ω

He approached it, as though through a tunnel. Jaron blasted out of the white shimmering purple, into orange space, just above the atmosphere, of Sequetus 4.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 260 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He was going too fast. He thought he might slam into the atmosphere and burn up. He saw flashing light. He saw it, millions of Ks away, then more, overhead: closer, then more, to his right. The planet was only a second, from hitting him; he was going straight into it, becoming dust. A bright light quickly swelled out, from the planet and engulfed him: Amanda. Jaron hurriedly looked around inside, took his bearings; within four strides, was at the stairs and within one more stride, seemed to be a breath away, from the Captain’s chair. Kuro hid in a corner. Jaron sat, and barked, “Bearings, datum enemy, direction, now!”

Marines readying for dropping on Mars

“Captain, we were pulling out artifacts, from outside the pyramid. Two hundred crack marine

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 261 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

troopers appeared from nowhere, with support enemy volunteers.” “While Wellum defended, I took aboard Akeala. Amy and Anki fled, into the pyramid. I defended more. The marines detonated the side of the pyramid, with atomics. It blew. Wellum and I were outnumbered, ten to one, by enemy volunteer craft. We injured four of the volunteer enemy.” Jaron could see the imagery. He knew the rules of Amanda and Wellum. They couldn’t do anything outward, without a captain. They couldn’t really fight back. They couldn’t attack in their own right. They had a sworn oath, never to react, never to take a life, without proper consideration, from their captain. That was their rules of engagement, for being in the physical universe. However, they could defend themselves. Jaron watched the screens, showing Amanda and Wellum trying to get between the enemy and the pyramid, and then defending. However, it was useless against the odds, which they were fighting. Jaron saw Amy; on the screen replay. “Anki, follow me. Our craft will retaliate. They have the Boguard and Akeala. Belkron is at the entrance, quickly, hurry.” The door slowly closed behind them. Jaron watched, as the entry front was blown, and the enemy engineers entered. There was smoke inside and more detonations. Next, more smoke and further explosions occurred. Following that, a hole

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 262 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

appeared, on the other side of the pyramid. Then, the enemy departed. “Going in; Amanda.” “Ready, Captain. Your ray proof suit is by the door with weapons.” Jaron nodded, and stood. “Where is Aki?” “I am now beside you, Papa.” Akeala put her hand onto his shoulder. He felt the warmth of her skin. It was reassuring. “Wellum?” “Yes Captain Jaron.” “Where is your Captain?” As soon as Jaron asked the question, he knew the answer: dead. Wellum didn’t answer. “Castano?” “Inside,” came Wellum. Jaron nodded. There was one other Boguard, on board Wellum. Go Captain. I’ll cover with Amanda. Jaron was relieved. Wellum wasn’t outwardly suffering, the loss of his Captain. Jaron understood. Castano and another Boguard were still inside. “Aki.” “Yes, Papa?” “You stay with Amanda. Meet me at the door. Cover me.” Jaron went through the airlock and jumped down, to the desert floor. There was no sign of the enemy. He ran to the rubble. It was still smoking. The side of the pyramid had cracked a kinopac long, along the far side.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 263 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“No, Papa. Go; via the entrance.” It was Akeala’s voice. “I can see that you can get in; there.” The other five Boguard Man-o-War were around him, and over the pyramid, now. A large team of Boguard Fronts had amassed outside, to join him. Outside was heavily irradiated.

Boguard Fronts readying to go

Jaron found where Aki was guiding him. He crawled over a large rock. The radiation count was high. It was almost dark. He felt a gap, with his hands. He put his attention, onto the mass of stones. They budged a fraction. He slowly slipped through. “I’m on the other side.” “Right, Papa. I see you, in my mind.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 264 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Good girl.” He could see smoke, from a long battle. He kept his suit on. There was little air, and the gamma ray count was still high. He worked his way to the inner pyramid, and came to the open void. There were four dead feelups, on the grass. He saw two dead enemy troopers. One had his suit ripped open, and the other his helmet ripped off. “Amy.” He called out, on the voice-comm speaker. There was no answer. He continued calling. Then, he saw a body. It wasn’t the enemy. It wasn’t moving, either. He rolled it over. It was dead. It was Belkron Blu. Jaron breathed deeply, in pain. He put his hand on Belkron’s chest, and closed his eyes. He was too long dead, to bring back. He looked around the pyramid. He thought, Sorry Belkron. We will miss you. Jaron felt a reply from outside, and understood. Save Amy. He felt Belkron’s chest, and imbued, from the not quite dead body cells, their memory, of what had happened. He saw Anki and Amy fighting, from the body’s cellular memory. They were shooting. Belkron was firing, as well. He was hit, and waved to the others, to get into the tunnels, and then; he was hit again, and twice more, and then died. The memory finished. Jaron stood; looked around, and sent this recovered memory, to Akeala. He felt her accept it. He looked towards the tunnels and saw that they had

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 265 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

been locked, but compromised. He felt their doors and could sense the past battle. The damage to the doors, had molecular and broadmatter memory. He imbued his attention, into it, and had the results. Anki and Amy had been taken outside. Jaron then ran, as fast as his radiation suit, would allow. He exited the gaping hole, looked up, and saw ten Boguard Fronts. They had arrived from the other Man-o-Wars. A normal complement of Fronts, was five per ship. These had twenty-five. He looked around. There were four dead Boguard, in the rubble. He straightened. He sensed outwards and within. “There are no more living crew; here. Retain a two-man detail. Save what animal life you can, and seal the entrance.” He looked over to the water and trees, where small animal bodies lay unconscious, through lack of air. They would be saved. All life was precious. He strode back, to the opening. The crews would hold vigil and swiftly tend their dead, but they had a fight ahead, to get into. Jaron boarded Amanda. “Survey, please,” he called. “They’re on the moon, Captain.” “Thank you, Amanda. Wellum, Castano and Aki, come with me. Get two more Man-o-Wars, to follow. The rest lay back. Surprise is our element, here. They know we’re here; now, so we must attack now. More reinforcements will arrive shortly and they must further the attack, as soon as they arrive. Take the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 266 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Sequetus 3 moons first. This is our moment in destiny. We must seize it or die. I’ll lead.” Jaron had only just given the orders, and then the ships were hurtling through space, towards the moon in hurried warp field hops. They quickly approached the near side, to Sequetus 3. They passed the historic Apollo sites. There it was, a five- kinopac long, aboveground base, just below the crater crust. Huge towers were above the ground, in the crater center. “Papa, maybe we should wait?” Jaron looked over, to his daughter. He saw the hesitation, in her eyes. It wasn’t a fear of battle, but rather, of what they might find. “No, my beautiful daughter. Time is on their side, not ours. Speed is all that I have. It’s the only advantage, which we possess.” The Captain has to stay, with his ship. Wellum and Amanda: Can you operate with me remotely? he thought. Yes and Yes Captain came the responses. “Good, then you stay with me, up here, while I enter their base down there. Aki, I’m taking you, with me.”

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 267 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 12

MOONSIDE

The four Man-o-Wars hovered over Moonbase. Over the next minute, two hundred rockets launched at the Man-o-Wars. Jaron held the seat of his chair, as Amanda swerved up, back, upside down, avoided, side placed, and out-stepped every rocket attempt. The images, which Amanda was putting out to the base, where multiple pictures of where they were. They were huge one second, and then they vanished. Physical sensors couldn’t find them. The agreement between a Man-o-War and the physical universe was less binding, as it was, on the rest of matter. Simply put, whatever life was, who operated the Man-o-War; it had no agreement with broadmatter, unlike other life. Lasers ripped outwards from the moon, they missed, deflected, and bounced back. The rockets exploded, but they never scarred one Man-o-War.

Ω

The display was visible from the Earth. Beel was in New York watching, through the city library telescope. He showed Dianna. “That isn’t good news,” she said, slowly.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 268 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Aye,” he replied, leaning back; wishing he was up there, helping.

Ω

The four Man-o-Wars drew down, closer and closer, to Moonbase surface. Eventually, the base entrance was covered. The rocket batteries had been destroyed. Jaron looked at the time. There seemed to be none left. He had been in the Sequetus System for an hour and a half, and yet; it seemed like only minutes had passed. He looked through the screens. The doors, to Moonbase opened. He gave the mental command. There was no doubt, as to who controlled those doors, and the base obeyed. He looked up, and saw bright lights, arriving. They were the Sandrist fleet. They were shining, whiter, and cleaner, now that the Captains and ships had bonded. Their numbers had doubled. The Man- o-Wars were pulling them in.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 269 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Sandrist fleet over Sequetus

Captain, go down there. Wellum is guiding the new ships, here. There are thirteen man-o-wars; now. The new Federation ships have launched interceptors. They have fighters, presently covering earth. Templar frigates are now taking out the other craft, in the system. Sequetus system space will be ours, in the next hour. Go down now. Get your wife and friend on Moonbase.

Jaron thought, you won’t come with me? I need you. No. Take Akeala. She is Wellum’s Captain now, but she can be spared from him. Our attention will be with you. In two seconds, Jaron had pulled his daughter tightly to him, and was instantly on Moonbase.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 270 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Akeala looked up. The enemy wasn’t surrendering, and Talkron fighters had launched, from the far side of the moon. Both sides suffered losses. Akeala sported three rifles, a lightweight missile launcher and more. Jaron had his cap, and himself. They came to the first door. The base had re- sealed. Jaron thought a command and it opened again. He looked at Akeala. She sensed it, also: that three squads of Talkron guards were on the other side, waiting. Akeala leapt through the acron shield and shot one, then the next and the following one. Jaron jumped through the shield, looked over and the roof fell in, onto the others. He and Aki ran, to the far right side of the door. Sirens wailed. He heard crashing noises. Three vehicles were coming, down a passage. He raised them from the ground, by using his intention, only. Akeala quickly shot each of the occupants, before they aimed a gun. There are no Talkron yet, suggested Jaron. Nor any agents, either. These are only thought- controlled troopers, she sent back. She shot three more. Jaron looked at her, and fleetingly wondered who his daughter really was, as she nodded, rolled, and shot another behind him. He motioned, towards the far door. He couldn’t unlock it, with thought. “Bolted,” she called, as she rolled out the rocket launcher, from over her shoulder. Two seconds later, the door was ricocheting, off the walls.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 271 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron and Akeala bounded through, running along the floors, walls, and any way they could, to gather speed. Akeala started to slow. Stop here, Papa. I feel something, about Mother. Jaron stopped. I agree. They stood, outside a room. Jaron far-saw the other side. He looked around, over the benches, and there he saw someone: he saw her. Jaron slowly walked there. He saw her. He fell to his knees, gagging. He didn’t know how this was happening to him. His face was stretched, as though forces were pulling at him. “Papa!” Akeala called to him, bounding over. “What’s the matter?” He looked into the room. Akeala didn’t wait, but launched a missile, at the nearest door. She saw three guards by the distant corner, and shot them, immediately. Two more guards appeared at the opening, which she had blown away. She exploded the arm off one, and scored the other, through the head. She stormed in. She could see several bodies. She froze. There was a body, which she didn’t want to look at. She looked at the foot, then the trousers, and finally, the tunic. She recognized it. She looked over and three guards floated mid-air. She aimed and drilled holes in their skulls, with her laser. She didn’t have to see the rest of the body, the rest of her mutilated mother. She fired more holes, into the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 272 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

guards’ heads. She grabbed their weapons and slung them over her back, picking up more guns, as she went. She turned to see her mother’s face. Her eyes were gone. Her arms were lacerated, her mouth torn away. Akeala put her hand, gently, onto her mother’s body. She had to know. She got the answer from the cellular memory. Anki had been severely tortured: whilst alive. Her father had slowly made his way over, to the body and looked at his daughter. He cringed. He was too late. He looked, and looked. He just didn’t know, what to do. He didn’t know. What should he do? He couldn’t get any answer, from his mind. What should he have done? They heard a noise, a moan. They looked around and there was another body, alive, on the far side of the room. They leapt through the air in one stride. There it was. It was naked, naked of clothes and missing layers of skin. Her first four skin layers were gone, and she was in immense pain. She was awake; through stimulants forced into her. Jaron could see this, all in slow motion. He slowly saw Boguard Fronts, surrounding him, but he barely noticed. Her body had been tortured, beyond any endurance, but kept alive, the whole time. She stared at him, through disbelieving eyes. They hadn’t blinded her. He knew why, as they wanted her to see. Her eyelids were gone.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 273 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron didn’t know what to do. He felt her mind urging him to finish it. Let her out from the pain. They had removed her tongue, so she couldn’t speak. The pain was all that he could sense, her pain. Any sound, or air movement, the pressure of her body on the bench, added to the pain. Breathing magnified it. Jaron looked around. He wanted to get help. He couldn’t help his wife, but he could help Amy, his greatest friend, the one who made winning wars, possible. He knelt down and whispered, “Please don’t die Amy, oh greatest Goddess of War. We need you, still.” He looked into her eyes; she could see him now. There was peace there, knowing he was here, now. She tried to speak, but the pain around her face was tearing at her, She slowly rasped, with broken words, “Please kill…me…, friend….” She stared at him. A tear ran down, the raw exposed facial flesh. Jaron swallowed. “We have help coming….please don’t ask me….” She whispered again, “Please…, friend…, time….” Jaron was watching her eyes, watching them, watching him. Watching them, pleading with him, to end the mortality, which was binding her, to this infinite moment of agony. Akeala was at his side. “Oh, Aunty… please….” Amy’s eyes looked to Akeala. “Please…kill…” Akeala looked at her father.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 274 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He stood, and lifted the rifle from Akeala’s shoulder. He looked at his daughter. He looked over, to his dead wife’s body. He looked at Amy again; staring at him. She was showing her teeth, trying to smile. “Please….” That was all she could say. Jaron raised the weapon. He sensed his fellow Boguard Fronts around him, now. His fingers couldn’t do it. They wouldn’t close, on the trigger. They wouldn’t obey. He watched, as Amy tried to close her eyes. Another tear rolled, down her cheek. Jaron could see and feel her pain. There was the pain of failure, the pain of asking him to do, that what she may never be able to do, for herself. He didn’t want this. He didn’t want to do this. Couldn’t someone else do it? Why did it have to be him? He didn’t notice for several seconds, that he had pulled the trigger twice and Amy lay there, head inclined back and her eyes open, staring at the ceiling. Jaron looked at her. She looked dead. He checked for breathing and pulse. She was dead. He looked around, and there were now fifteen Boguard, and another twenty Sandrist troopers. They had their weapons lowered. They said nothing. They looked at each other. They were silent. Amy of Rambus, the Goddess of War was dead. Their thoughts went back, to the Man-o-Wars, the destroyers and their interceptors. Amy of Rambus had died, and Anki the daughter of the Master Templar had been tortured, to death, as well.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 275 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron didn’t know what to do. His daughter looked at him. She slowly took the weapon, from his hand. She looked at the others, and motioned for them to care, for the bodies of their two fallen comrades. Jaron felt limp. He stared at Amy and looked back, at Anki. He didn’t hear or feel Amanda’s thoughts. He was oblivious to all, except his own thinking, inside his own world. Jaron’s body started to convulse in shock; his hands trembled and he dropped to his knees. He fell forward with his face down, on the ground, kneeling, and crying. He stayed there, half in grief, in the same position, for two hours. The Boguard Fronts didn’t move, other than stand there ready, weapons raised, in case they were needed. No one interfered. His daughter stood by him, watching him. She saw that her mother’s body was covered, and that Amy’s body was clothed. She made sure no one moved them, until her father was ready. No one would touch their bodies, until he gave orders. After the third hour, someone came past him, and said his name was Commander Beel. He leaned down and put his arm, around his friend’s shoulder. Beel had been brought up to the battle, from Earth, as one of the first actions, by the Sandrist fleet. He said that the Moonbase battle had now been won, and they were in control of Sequetus 3, Sequetus 4, their moons and Sequetus space.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 276 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron was gently helped to his feet, at the instruction of his daughter. He was steered, past the commander, and just continued to stare, blankly. His friends, his … it reminded him of a time, on another ship, sometime back on Sequetus, or in Sequetus space, an earlier lifetime. He had lost someone very close to him, then too. He looked up, and around himself. It all seemed so surreal. Amanda had given up, trying to get through to him. She instructed Wellum to pick up Captain Akeala, and Amanda would get the Boguard, to bring Captain Jaron, aboard her.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 277 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 13

PASSAGE

There were still some Talkron forces on Moonbase. They finally surrendered. Yandra, Castano and Wellum, and a battle-ready Templar fleet, took the second and smaller Moon, which they simply called Moon 2. The Sandrist fleet secured the third satellite body, or asteroid, near the Earth. As the fleets arrived, Federation and Templar troopers took to the myriads of tunnels, which threaded through all these orbiting bodies. Yandra was on the top level of Moonbase, directing the incoming converted Templar ships, which seemed to be constantly arriving, inside the inner system near Earth. They were regular now, at a rate of about two or three an hour, fully converted, with a novice Man-o-War style trained Corduke crew. Akeala was still in shock. Her father had said nothing, for many hours. He looked, nodded and simulated a smile, as needed. He was otherwise beyond her reach. “He is effectively: gone,” Akeala said, with tears in her eyes. Yandra put his arm, around his half-sister. “This is war. You’ve seen much, and so has he. When you see too much, it locks those memories up, inside.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 278 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

When there is too much, too quickly, it overloads, with hurt and harm. It just can’t be sorted out, fast. His mind is in a confusion, of who he is, who his friends, now gone, were. In the past, he would have been confused, and he used your mother and Amy of Rambus, as fixed stable points of reference upon which to resolve the problems and confusions he faced. Now: they’re gone, and all those confused problems, in his mind, they need resolving again.” “So: what can we do?” she asked. “Let him be. Let him have the solitude, which he needs, until he has sorted out, what needs sorting.” “That could take days, weeks or months, and we don’t have that much time,” she pleaded. Yandra pulled her aside, as a Boguard officer let a squad of Cordukes past. “This is war. We haven’t seen, as much as he has, so let us hold the mantle of responsibility, until he returns. We have to finish what he started. We’re his children. We have to become stable points, for him, now. He is a great man, our father. We are fortunate to be born with him, as our natural biological parent. However, he is only a man. He may wear that cap, which gives him accelerated and enhanced spiritual ability, but he is only a man. It’s even possible, that the cap has a reverse side, and makes the confusions even more so. I just don’t know. Yet, what I do know; is that the right thing is to complete the mission, not be bogged in his confusions. Let him sort them out, and

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 279 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

when we have this area cleaned up and straightened out, we hope he has sorted out his own state. He is only a mortal man, Akeala.” She looked at her brother. “What? I thought he was, was a, was a god.” She grabbed her brother and held him tight. “Can’t he undo, what was done?” Yandra put his arms around his grieving distressed sister. He looked down the corridor, as troopers were sidestepping them, understanding their plight. He sighed. “Yes, he is a god, as you and I are, and we all are. Nevertheless, he has his body and that makes him mortal, as well.” Yandra received a message, from his Man-o- War. He looked at Akeala. “Tubin is here, in the outer system, with three Man-o-Wars. They have a fleet of eight converted Corduke frigates, and he just brought with him, thirty-five more converted Federation ships.” Akeala looked up, at Yandra. She wiped the hair from her face, and then wiped her eyes. “You are a good brother: thank you.” She stepped back. “Let’s meet Tubin.” Then she asked, as an afterthought, “Who is in charge, whilst Papa is…?” Yandra smiled. “I am. Follow me,” and he led her, to the Moonbase landing bay.

Ω

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 280 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron was back at the Moonbase entry, watching as they formally brought Amy and Anki out, from the underground base. There were lines of guards, and troopers, Cordukes and Boguard. The uniforms were all different, but the purpose was the same. They were standing in the Moonbase passageways, weapons lowered, heads down. While they had the moon secured, hundreds of kinopacs of tunnels hadn’t all been taken yet, and there was still heavy resistance. Slowly, they carried the bodies, shoulder height, through the corridors, up through the base. One by one, the each Boguard knelt, on one knee. The Boguard dipped their heads lower as Amy of Rambus, Goddess of War passed. She was carried high, with a hundred strong triple width column of Boguard, Cordukes and Templars of both genders. The group mind of the Boguard was one of bereavement and honor, to have known her. To have fought in this theater, where she died, was greatness to all present. She died the greatest honorable death, in battle, trying to right a monumental wrong, and the slavery brought on by the Talkron. For the Boguard, she was a heroine, of unparalleled magnitude. The Cordukes dipped down, onto one knee, following the Boguard tradition. They also honored one of their own. Amy was a Corduke, of the highest standing. She was also their Goddess of War. She was responsible for the increased strength of the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 281 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Corduke network over the years. She had become a founding pillar, of that institution. Many of the Cordukes had tears in their eyes, as she passed. At the end of the passage, was the surface of the moon, beyond that, were the acron shields protecting the inside atmosphere, from escaping. Then there was Jaron, his daughter and two sons. Amassing overhead, beyond the base, were lines of Man-o-Wars and converted IFFCo vessels. They stretched out of sight, dotting further than the eye could see, blending into the stars. Jaron stood there. Tubin was on his left and Akeala beside him. On his far right was Yandra, and next to him, Sheril. Further alongside, was Castano, and beside him, Captain Beel. The procession took only minutes. For Jaron, it seemed a long time. He watched, wondering how he could turn back events, and go back in time. He was thinking of doing just that, when a voice quietly whispered. It was Amanda. Captain, it thought quietly, let her go, where she must go. She had been a tortured soul as well as a tortured body. Nevertheless, her tortured nature is what made her great. She was always a great person, always. She rose to her greatness around us to show us; how high, that we can go. She also knew that the way she lived, and the way she fought, would bring her here, one day. She died; the way she fought. She had no mercy for her enemies, and if there was a self-cause in this for her,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 282 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

that was it. She became what she created, for her enemies. However, in saying that, she had one friend, above all friends, and that was you, Captain. You finally set her free. It was that freedom, which she wanted, more than anything. She loved you Captain. She spent her last hours, before capture, with me, Captain and confessed she loved you, as Anki did. She was so grateful, that it was you, who set her free. You set her free. Jaron couldn’t stop himself, from falling to his knees again. The thoughts were driving home to him, the truth. He looked at his hand, which had held the gun that killed her. He clenched his face, to hold back the pain and grief. Yandra saw the uncertainty, in the eyes of his siblings. He held his hand up, to ask them, not to interfere: to leave their father to deal with what he had to. Yandra knelt down, next to his father. He said nothing. He simply knelt with him, side by side. His siblings knelt down too. They felt the pain, which their father felt. They watched, as the makeshift caskets were slowly carried outside, to waiting floaters. Soon, to have drifted up to, and over the horizon. Their bodies would be taken, to outside the system. From there, they were to be sent to Jilta, where they would receive a State Templar Blessing. It was their last wish, that they would both be buried together, on Rambus.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 283 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

These thoughts were swimming, through Jaron’s mind. Amanda confirmed. I feel that they both saw the future, minutes before it came. They made a pact, between them. They would die together and they would meet again, as young girls. They wanted their bodies buried on Rambus, where they shared many good times. It was a short period of youth, for Amy. Her parents were good mining Templars, of the unrighteous tradition. Amy rescued Anki. The rest; you know. Why, Amanda, why? Why all this? Why all this pain and suffering? Is that the purpose of this life, to suffer? That’s true, for any being, in this physical universe. There is pleasure, but for every pleasure, there is pain and suffering. It’s the same, just a duality. The attainment of a goal; is pleasure. The loss of it; is suffering. Suffering? Yes, Lorde and Captain Jaron. To be in this universe, one must endure suffering. This has been the prime lesson, of some of the greatest minds and beings, whom have existed, in this universe. They have known it. There will never be full freedom while one resides in this physical universe. The universe will always be accompanied, by pain and suffering. These are the rules by which we enter. Jaron looked up.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 284 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

If one can understand suffering, then one can perhaps at least experience the freedom which understanding allows. Jaron got himself to his knees. Yandra quickly stood with him. He looked to his father. Jaron nodded. “Thank you, son.” He watched, as the last floater vanished, from view. It was as though Jaron had awoken. “I still need to be alone. I need this time, to myself.” He turned to the others. “You have to sort this out, yourselves. Secure the rest of this planet. Implement a structure, within the Federation and the Temple, which ensures that this won’t happen again. Firstly, secure Earth. Over time rehabilitate it, and the life, that was once there.” Jaron then looked up, at the big blue orb and spotted a small patch of green, on the South American continent. “That planet was once saturated, with life.” He looked to the others, kissed his daughter on the forehead, bowed to his sons, and then the other captains. With that, and one last nod to them all, he simply faded from view and vanished. Akeala let out a little gasp. Yandra smiled and turned to Tubin. “He is with Amanda. He is going to be alone, out there, for a while. I can feel his mind. Amanda is now alongside that old ship, the one that has been circling Earth, for thirteen thousand years.” “Black Knight?” asked Beel.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 285 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yandra nodded. “Yes, he’s inside now. It only took seconds.” Yandra smiled. “Amazing. I’m watching him. He knows the ship.” Yandra turned and looked at them all. “He knows the ship.” Yandra repeated. Castano looked confused. “He knows it?” “Yes,” Yandra smiled. “It’s his ship. He put it there; thousands of years ago.” Tubin looked up, to the Earth. He couldn’t see the ship, but he was getting clear mental imagery, from Yandra. He could sense that Akeala was viewing it too. All three looked at each other. They knew, what the other sibling was thinking, and the questions they were silently asking.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 286 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 14

EPILOGUE

They buried Amy where she wanted her body to rest, next to the graves of her parents and siblings on Rambus. The gravesite overlooked the lakes. On Yaltipia, there was a planet wide ceremony, for her passing. She was accorded the highest status in the field for service beyond any call of duty, of any Boguard. They expected her to return to their ranks, in due course. On Palbo, they bestowed on her, full planet wide honors, as being the one, who liberated Palbo from the jaws of Brandon Mirak and his psychron backers. On Jilta, they found more Talkron agents, and an interesting phenomena occurred. People started to wake up, from a lifetime of anti-social activity. It was as though the source, of what was mentally driving criminal behavior in the world was vanishing, and people were becoming more themselves. It was as if the evil, which drove people, was dissipating. The Master Templar took the death of his daughter, a second time now, as final. The planet accorded her a state funeral, and after the service, she was buried on Rambus, the planet, where she once found true happiness, for a short time with her friend.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 287 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The Master Templar was a strong symbol, for his people. He didn’t capitulate. He used the death of his daughter rightfully, as she would have wanted. He drove home the need, to push out the Talkron from every vestige and advantage point, which they had, in the galaxy. His daughter’s death spurred him on, to make an enormous commitment to get his people to see where war and criminality was really coming from, its source. Evil behavior wasn’t a nebulous phrase, such as the Imperial Federation Warp Drive Bank, it was people. Those people had names, and they could be found and stopped. Their efforts, to push down society for some mentally and spiritually bent ambition, could be thwarted. Jaron threw himself into a secluded retreat. He made it nobody’s business, other than his children’s and his ship. He remained on Black Knight, and would stay there, until he decided otherwise. Amanda said anyone interfering with her Captain’s instructions, would have her and her fellow Man-o- War ships, to deal with. Sheril was appointed, to begin the rehabilitation of Earth. Yandra was to take control of Sequetus and root out the last of the Talkron. Akeala was to assist him. Tubin was in charge of the Templar Fleet, from the Palbo quarter. Akeala discovered that the metal box, which they were digging up on Mars near the pyramid, had a homing beacon. It activated, during the dig. It was still active and no one seemed to be able, to turn

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 288 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

it off. The box itself was some kind of metal, still unopened. Many of the animals, from within the pyramid on Mars survived, but not all. Most plant species survived the attack. Over many years, Torrenist volunteers, from planet Sandrist, restored the pyramid and its life. Kuro survived the battle and stayed, aboard Amanda. Templars, Cordukes and the Boguard, all regarded Belkron Blu as being an exceptional human being, and gave him a full military funeral. Later on, military academies, through the galaxy, studied his life. Statues of honor; of he and those he fought and died with, were erected in the Outer Worlds, where he had learned the martial art, of struck-fighting.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 289 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The End of

Final Passage

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 290 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 291 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Vigil CHAPTER 3

Sub-Contents

Sub-chapter 1 Vigil

Sub-chapter 2 Sequetus 2

Sub-chapter 3 New York

Sub-chapter 4 Preparation

Sub-chapter 5 Venus

Sub-chapter 6 Six Worlds

Sub-chapter 7 Grason

Sub-chapter 8 Planet Search

Sub-chapter 9 Confession

Sub-chapter 10 Returning

Sub-chapter 11 Venus Side

Sub-chapter 12 Hallowmen

Sub-chapter 13 Epilogue

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 292 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 1

V I G I L

aron sat in the cockpit of Black Knight. He looked at the instructions. They were old, older J than Standard, older than any known language of the Confederated Council of Planets, and unidentifiable. Amanda was the ship, beside him, there if needed. Black Knight slowly responded, and turned, to Jaron’s command. He smiled. It still understands me, he thought to Amanda and the Boguard in general. Of course. Time is only what you consider, which traps you. It will always work, if you command without reservation, and give no power to time, at all, thought Amanda. Jaron looked over the instrument panel. He then floated back, to the hold. He examined the writing on the wall. He looked at the lines. He floated up, to the observation port. He sat in the chair. It felt familiar, even comfortable, to be there. After twenty minutes of observing, he returned his attention to Amanda. I do remember it, he thought, to Amanda. Of course. You did forget, but really, you always knew. Don’t remember, as that strengthens

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 293 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

forgetting. Just know, my Lorde Jaron. Imbue its knowledge into you, as you must, but know it.

Black Knight

Jaron looked down at planet Earth, as it revolved below him. He felt at rest. He relaxed and let his

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 294 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

mind drift back, to times past; which he wished he might always know. He thought of his wife, now dead, and her best friend, the greatest fighting companion that he had known. He didn’t dwell on how they died. Instead, he thought of his old home down below, in the last of the Amazon basin. He sometimes wondered, if all this fighting was worth it. Would it make a difference, in the end? At the end of time, would it really matter? He just drifted with his mind. He let it be and go where it would go. He wouldn’t resist it, his mind. He would just let it be.

Ω

Jaron observed Earth; he observed the ongoing Battle for Sequetus 2. It was a long and drawn out protracted fight, which had already lasted ten days. He received relayed messages, as the battle ensued, but really, he wasn’t that interested. Others would win it without him. The enemy had buried itself deep down into the planet. His son, Yandra had cracked the great sealed door there. The planet surface base was atomic bomb-proofed. However, the ground underneath the base, wasn’t impenetrable. More and more craft arrived in the Sequetus Series, from the various Federation sectors, the Outer Worlds and the far-Outer-Worlds. There were now over two thousand ships, parked off, around, and through Sequetus.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 295 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The last of the enemy ships succumbed, one by one. There was no great order, in their capitulation. They just fell apart or surrendered. With each surrender, was an opportunity of ship conversion. Consequently, the Federation numbers grew even more. By the third day, all craft in space and on the planet’s surfaces, had given in. Whole ships surrendered, even if the crew and Talkron aboard didn’t. It also meant that hand-to-hand combat was again, part of war. With enemy ships refusing to obey warp drive commands, from their masters, the Federation crews were able to finish every battle; victorious.

Station-ship in Sequetus

The three station-ships in the system surrendered. Talkron commanders were finding E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 296 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

ships openly rebelling, against them. Ship’s systems were being overridden as targeted warp drive life entities were given direction, from the Federation fleet outside.

Ω

Soon, it was only Sequetus 2, resisting them.

Sequetus 2 - Venus

Yandra sat in his orbiting ship, looking down on the planet, which was well fortified, with many planet defenses. The central base was three kinopacs, underground. Effectively, that made one perfect

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 297 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

defense. Yandra looked around, at his other commanders. “What do you see? We work by group understanding. What do you see?” The Boguard and Corduke captains, plus Beel, Akeala and Lorde Tubin were present. The Man-o- War life-forces were there, as well. Akeala was the first, to speak. “If we can’t bombard it, because we are concerned with what is inside, we must come; from underneath. This is a siege; and we must use siege techniques. “Wellum?” “Yes, Captain Akeala,” said Wellum, another ship, whose voice came through the air, as if from out of nowhere. “Will a siege work?” she asked. “There is little else, Captain. If you attack to destroy, you will lose the life, which is inside the base. Please, don’t do that. The life-force in there is far too important. Please.” “Can you say, what is there?” she asked. “Captain, we could be wrong. Nevertheless, our sensors show that there is life captured down there, suspended electrically. Moreover, there is a lot of it, it’s enormous; in quantity. Whatever the life is in there, it’s vast, beyond any phenomena that you’ve experienced in war, with the Talkron, to date. Yandra made a gesture to any others, to say what they thought. “Sir, we know that Moon 2 was a headquarters of the Talkron, for their Sequetus operations. There

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 298 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

was over twenty thousand staff there. In addition, we found sixty-five thousand Talkron, agents, troopers and administrators on the moon proper, scattered over it, in pockets, and we are still finding more.” It was Castano. “Really, we don’t know what is down there, on Sequetus 2. That’s what we are being careful about. We found their ships, and thousands of them, on the asteroids, in various stages of construction. They were building an armada, much larger than anything we have here, but not finished. We also found four more partly built, Station-ships.” Beel added, “We heard yesterday, that another of their Station-ships converted, to our side, out past Palbo.” “Excellent,” concluded Castano. Akeala added, “So, we need to know what they have been doing, down there, so that we can use the right tactics. We mustn’t just blunder forward, to enter.” “That’s correct, sister,” explained Yandra. “It looks like they have been building an armada, for an invasion. We can see now, well over a thousand ships in various stages of construction. Moon was a mining base. It has the titanium needed; to make the ships. Moon 2 seems to have supplied the personnel, for the labor to build the ships. Some of those ships built, are possibly already out there, such as those Station-ships, around Palbo. However, they need a crew and that crew has something to do with

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 299 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Sequetus 3. If I’m right, they have used Sequetus 3 to lure crews from outside of the physical universe. When those crews took residence on Sequetus 3, drawn in by the bodies born there, these Talkron depopulated the planet, by removing the life from the bodies, similar to what we found, on Kantee. Now, they mightn’t need Sequetus, because they have enough life sources, for their crews.” Yandra looked around. The others nodded, in agreement, at his train of thought. “That’s possible,” added Beel. “If that’s the case, then they will need access to many fast short- life bodies, and I don’t see those; down there. Akeala butted in. “No, we found those, or experiments with them here, on the moon. They have grown fully mature adult bodies, in only seven years, from birth! From the data in their files, it seems they were attempting to have fully grown mature adult bodies developed for this galaxy, after four years, which then lived only twenty-five years and died. These were purely expendable invasion humanoid bodies; being grown. “From the notes, the bodies were inserted with DNA, to make them extremely reproductively active, so that they could begin a mission on a ship with a smaller crew and within a few decades, have a fully- manned crew, which they trained themselves. The only drawback they hadn’t worked out, was how to get the reproductive drive to cease, after a selected

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 300 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

number of generations.” Akeala looked about, to make sure her audience was paying attention, to her. She continued. “On Earth, for example, they couldn’t stop that reproductive drive. This caused the population to grow too fast. It in turn stripped the planet of the resources, to support itself. My guess is that this hadn’t been thoroughly worked out. “It looks like these bodies on the moon were slightly smaller, so more of them could travel faster, more economically. “The Talkron, were also experimenting, with the existing populations on Sequetus 3, to make those bodies more perfect. The Talkron wanted the population to expand, at a fourfold rate. However, they also knew, that if these body types were allowed into the galaxy, they would populate, beyond what their fighting armada could conquer. The Talkron wouldn’t then be able to keep track of them, as they lived such short lives. Consequently, the Talkron were scared to let them travel, into the galaxy. In fact, they couldn’t let them go, uncontrolled, until they had developed a DNA program, to limit the number of generations a body could reproduce for. Their records indicate that they saw seven generations, as the ideal reproduction limit.” Akeala look at Beel. “Why was this not done, in the Andromeda Galaxy, where they come from?” asked Beel. Akeala turned. “That’s simple. They were using Earth DNA. Earth DNA isn’t all native to this planet,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 301 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

and it has bits and pieces, from many other sectors of the galaxy, inserted into it. It’s a well-advanced DNA. It is a highly-strung body, and goes anywhere in the galaxy, but it seems it might only work, here in this galaxy. Otherwise, Beel, to answer your question, we don’t know why not.” Yandra nodded. “We know that short-lifers can adapt to almost any planet. While long-lifers might suffer, the short-lifers seem more resilient, to handle bacterial and viral strains that might attack long- lifers, out there. It’s a very well constructed humanoid, for here.” He smiled. The other commanders and captains watched in inspired awe, as these three siblings worked out what was happening, and what they would do next. Wellum broke their thoughts. “You should know that a small fleet of othersiders, as we’ll call them, our equivalent of the other side, have just left the system. These, are the volunteers, which Amanda referred to earlier. We haven’t been able to track them, which makes me suspect that they have left space, for another galaxy, all together.” Yandra looked around. “Then, they will be seeking help and reinforcements, and restructuring their strategy. If they have a galaxy, that’s already converted to their way, then they could have access to a million times more ships, than we have.” “Correct,” added Castano. “That’s the exact reason, why we must secure this Sequetus System. This was their beachhead. It’s apparent, that this

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 302 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

was a galactic invasion. It was well planned. We exposed them. They have run. We need to push them out, completely. If they return, it might be fivefold, a thousand fold, or a million fold. If we don’t do this, for fear of the unknown, then we could be beaten, by a smaller force.”

Othersiders leaving Moon 2

Castano looked at the screen, which showed the fleeing ship. “A smaller force and our fear could overwhelm us, but if we’ve no fear… we are extremely potent.” Akeala nodded. “Agreed. We need to move now, get into their bases, learn what they have, and how to use their technological advantage, against them. An invading army only wins, by technological advantage, superiority in size, or surprise.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 303 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yandra looked at his sister. ”We will make it our business, to know all about their technology. To invade, from a long distance, also requires a much larger sized support crew, at home. They may not have that advantage; anymore. We are speculating, but if we’ve driven them out, then they underestimated our resistance, or lacked the resources, to meet it. Let’s hope, that it’s the latter.”

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 304 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 2

SEQUETUS 2

Yandra was watching the machines, bore down through the rock. It was difficult, with the planet’s atmosphere comprised partly of sulfuric acid, making mechanical parts wear faster.

The surface of Venus

It took a week, to bore down fifty pacs. Akeala was already concerned at the lack of speed. The othersiders had left, twelve days ago, and the Federation Alliance was nowhere near, getting into that base. The Talkron on the other hand had, sent out skirmishes from the base, to raid the alliance, as

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 305 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

they were now calling Jaron’s group. They were the Boguard, IFFCo, and the Temple, combining forces against a technological superior race, but one, which was now on the run. “Wellum?” asked Akeala. “Yes, Captain?” “How long will it take the othersiders, to get from here to Andromeda?” Wellum paused, in silence. He considered. Yandra expected, that he might have been asking Amanda. Finally, Wellum answered, “It could take a year, perhaps three.” “Why so long?” asked Akeala. “I thought that travel for your kind, was almost instantaneous, like thought, just a consideration, and you’re there.” Yandra sensed that he perceived a chuckle from the ship, to his sister’s question. “Yes, and no, Captain. I expect it would take…hmmmm… hours to days, for us to move a Man-o-War from here to Jilta, for example. A Man- O-War is fast, as it was built with its speed understood. Its molecules are imbued with that fundamental idea.” Akeala stopped him. “I thought you could get here within minutes to hours.” “There are many variables. Let me explain them. If it’s just the Man-o-War ship and me, yes, minutes to hours. If I’m bringing along a team, it depends on their consideration, and belief, that it’s possible. If I was taking a group of civilians from

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 306 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jilta, I could take months, and the more passengers, the slower I can go. I can’t take anyone anywhere, if they think it’s impossible. The travel speed depends on the willing agreements, of the people traveling. What life considers; life gets. That’s the universal law.” Wellum continued, after allowing time for that concept to take hold. “As for reaching another galaxy, it’s so much further. It’s perhaps several hundred thousand times the distance than crossing one. One must also take into account, the fact that the maximum speed of travel would have to approach the speed of light squared, which no ship can travel. Nothing with life in it, except for Jaron, when wearing that headpiece, can approach it. Moreover, he only approached that speed because there were Man-o-Wars, at both ends, and we used admiration particles, to move him out from the universe and bring him back. These same particles are the basis of gravity. Therefore, I make a conservative calculation that it could take between one to three years; before they get there and return. In addition, the more they return with, the longer it will take to prepare. Furthermore, if there is a reason why their invasion force wasn’t a hundred times its current size, it was this alone. People who kill and torture, have heavy considerations about life, have a low source of admiration, and won’t travel fast.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 307 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yandra understood. He relayed the estimate to the other commanders, who subsequently reaffirmed the expected time return time.

Ω

The burrowing continued, for another two weeks. There were five new entry points, which they had made, under the Sequetus 2 base. At the same time, there were smaller bases and outposts that were in the process of capture. The result was mostly one large mega base, left to subdue. Yandra looked at the screens, which he had erected. Beel was watching along with six others. “I’m not sure that this siege is working. We’ve lost seven craft, in the last week, to the planet’s 400 K winds. We’ve lost over three hundred personnel by simply trying to get onto the planet. If our craft aren’t blown to bits, by enemy rockets, crushed by the wind, then the sulfuric acid in the atmosphere eats into what is left. Our suits are dissolved away, and we’ve an operational time of only two hours out there.” Yandra looked at them all. He understood Beel. “Well, we can’t use atomics, because of what’s in there. We’ve five machines, under two of their tunnels, now.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 308 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Beel nodded. “Correct, but that cap rock is fantastically hard, and wearing out our machinery.” Yandra watched, as another two craft pulled out from the atmosphere, after an aborted entry attempt. He shook his head. The wind was the worst. It didn’t matter, that the temperature was hundreds of degrees. They could overcome that for a short time, but the wind was impossible, to fight.

Venus storms

He turned. “We’ve high atmospheric temperature, due to the heating of the carbon E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 309 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

dioxide atmosphere. We have winds we can’t get through, and when we do, that acid eats into our machines and suits. Therefore, the solution must be to find out what they used, and how they did it. How did they get down there and build it?” They all stood, looking down at the planet. They could see the plan of the base, on the screen. They had that mapped out. The base they were trying to enter into had corridors and passages, stretching at least a thousand Ks in many directions. They had twenty levels, which they could find and monitor. There were pockets of big open spaces, but mostly, the underground was laced with a web, of thousands of Ks of tunnels. The question was, how to get into them.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 310 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 3

NEW YORK

Polton Beel was back, in the old New York library. They had slung wires into the building. Photosensitive cells were put on the roof, and via satellites, the building and its neighbors were being powered, every hour of the day. “Have you been to Europe?” asked Charlene. Beel shook his head. “Yu Rup is really just a place, in our stories o’ Sandrist. I read where it ‘s been dead, for a hundred years noo, nothing alive at all, almost.” Charlene handed Beel another book, on ancient Sumerian13 history. “Do you really think you’re going to find where these Talkron, as you call them, came from?” “That’s what I believe. They were the first here, if I’m right, an’ these books are our best clues.” “What about just going there, to Sumer, now?” asked Dianne, enjoying the chase, for data. Beel shook his head. “The tablets that ‘re once the pride o’ the Iraq museums; vanished at the turn of the millennium. It seems a group o’ people stormed in on the museums, on the heels of some

13 INFORMATION: Sumer: Where the first civilization sprang from, in current day Iraq. The civilization arrived, out of nothing.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 311 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

invasion, and the tablets vanished. All ten thousand vanished, in several trucks. The locals said it was people from Yu Rup, who took ‘em.” Dianne showed him a picture, of some of the tablets. “How are you going to work out where they are and so on, if you can’t find them. That’s impossible.” Beel looked up. “Maybe. Nevertheless, if I can get one or two, and take them to Jaron, maybe he can find the others. It’s just an idea. Those Talkron came from somewhere, and these clues you have here, on Earth, are from a long time ago, and they may help.” “What about their computers, up there? Surely they are able to tell you,” suggested Dianne. Beel laughed, not to ridicule Dianne’s question, but because he thought it was a funny idea. “Nope. Those ‘n the moon actually melted literally, int’ a strange liquid, when we stormed the moon bases. The entire moon network started t’ shut down, before our eyes, an’ we had a heck of a time gett’n through any doors, anywhere. Their security was good. Remember, we’re dealing with people, who can traverse from another galaxy, an’ they have technology, way ahead of ours.” “Then; what is the point. How can we win?” asked Charlene, holding the book closed. “Please shine more light; here. I think I see something.” The room brightened. “They may have that advantage, but we’ve the necessity t’ become

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 312 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

smarter, an’ that need is on our side. Therefore, we’ll overcome them, if for that reason, alone. I believe ‘n the goodness o’ mankind. We’ll win. Please pass me that magnifying glass.” Charlene handed him the glass. “See here, this is the symbol of the Talkron, ‘n the bottom left. It’s their star.” “It’s broken. It shows nothing. What use is that?” Beel smiled. “I know, but the whereabouts of this piece of clay didn’t come from Iraq, it was ‘n the Museum of Sidnee, wherever that ’s.” Dianne nodded. “Sydney is on the other side, of the world.” Beel smiled, and looked at them, both. “Have ya’ ever been outside, o’ New York?” Dianne and Charlene looked at each other, shaking their heads, cautiously.

Ω

Jaron looked out, over the planet. He had been in his ship, for six weeks, now. He hadn’t helped anyone. He had just sat there, looking out over the world, and beyond. He looked at his planet. Earth was once beautiful. It had been a ball of blue and green. Now, it was brown, yellow and a small patch here and there of green, but very small patches. He sighed.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 313 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amanda was the ship, next to him. “You can’t bring them back,” she said. Jaron laughed, aloud. “You think otherwise?” she asked. “I know I could, if I really wanted to.” Amanda knew it, too. “You aren’t going to go there, are you?” “Why not?” “It’s immoral, to go against the agreements of the universe.” “Is it? Why is it immoral?” he asked. Amanda thought about that. “Well, if anyone could do it, they would, nothing would be the same, and everyone would be changing it. Then; the game, and its rules, are lost.” Jaron looked at a cloud. He loved the clouds, but there were so few of them. “I’m the only one, who can do it.” “I know. Nevertheless, what happens, if you do it? What happens after that? How do you know, that you can control it, for good? Have you thought of that? What happens if you make a mistake, and we all vanish from here, now?” Jaron sighed. “May be you’re right and it can’t be done.” Amanda sensed he was getting aggravated. “I’m not saying you can’t, as you can. I just don’t know how we can do it, and get away with it.” “Maybe we won’t. But should I give up?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 314 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amanda stopped for a moment before answering. “You rescued me, and I’m in your debt. You helped me get over the condition I was in, when I lost the person, closest to me. I’m here, and I’m going to do the same for you, even if you get upset with me.” Jaron smiled. “I’m not upset with you, Amanda. I just want to do something, not sit here, doing nothing. By not trying, what am I? I’m less of the being that I thought I was. Trying and failing, is better than simply giving into failure, before you try. That’s where I am now. I failed, and I haven’t tried to reverse it.” Amanda thought about that. “I wish you wouldn’t use logic, with me. You know it isn’t my strong point.” Jaron smiled. “We’re both going to do it; then. We are going to do it. You can help me, Amanda. Are there rules, against your kind, doing this?” Amanda thought. “No… but I don’t know how to, and only you have the Golden Cap.” “Correct, but you can see the region below us; now.” Amanda didn’t reply, for ten seconds. Jaron broke the wait. “You said that you wanted to go through. If anyone can do it, it will be you and me.” Amanda was stuck, trying to work out the projected parameters. “I don’t know.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 315 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron smiled. “That’s because it’s over eighty- six thousand years, from today. Of course, you don’t know. If we manage to go through it, we’ll be eighty-six thousand years; into the future.” “What if Centrecom is still there, and resurrected?” “He might be, Amanda. Are you scared?” Amanda was getting a blank feeling. “There is something wrong with this idea. I really wanted to do it, before, but now… there is something wrong. I don’t think that… we should…” Jaron nodded. “I understand that, Amanda, but what do you know?” Jaron waited and waited. Amanda took three minutes, to answer. “It’s right to do it, but it could be the end of me. That’s all I know. I don’t understand that, but … I’m scared of Centrecom.” “How could it be the end of you?” Jaron was worried, as he didn’t want to lose another one, close to him. He didn’t think he could cope with that. Amanda found that touching, and it pleased her. “I don’t know how I know, or even, what exactly I know. However, I do know that it is right to go. The risk doesn’t outweigh the rightness of going, and trying to do something.” Jaron sat there, looking out over the small cloud below his ship, as Amanda, drifted over Mexico. “The Zone has shown no activity, since we’ve been here,” he said.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 316 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Correct,” answered Amanda. “However, I haven’t been there, before.” Kuro sat back watching the two of them bantering. For her, it was as if Jaron was speaking to a flashing light, and the light was replying to him. Nevertheless, she understood a lot, of what was happening. She jumped from her chair and went to the exit link, trying to engage the switch on. She wanted to change craft and visio Jaron. “Okay, no need to scratch at the wall, you know,” said Amanda, a bit flustered. “He is still there, and he isn’t going: yet.” Kuro looked at the screen and then to the exit, and then at the screen, again. Amanda sighed, over the voice control. “He didn’t say he would take you, and I know what you’re thinking. No, you can’t stay up here, if we go. No, you can’t go back to Mars, just now. Well, you can, if you want.” Amanda wondered if she was losing it, now. She was having conversations, with a feelup from Mars. Of all the things, she has had to endure these thousands of years around Sequetus. Now, she had to put up with a feelup, who thought she was the animal incarnation, of Egyptian Pharaoh Royalty. Kuro strutted out from Amanda’s hull, through the airlock, into Jaron’s craft. “You’re welcome, too,” said Amanda.

Ω

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 317 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Sheryl was now holding classes, for those who wanted to learn The Way. There were classes, several times a week. She held up the same rock again, and asked everyone, what was inside it. “Reach into it. Don’t tell the person, next to you. Look at: what is inside?” She waited a minute. “Now, tell the person next to you, what isn’t inside? Lie about it, and tell them what isn’t there.” She laughed, as the local people were getting good, at lying about what wasn’t there. “Why are we lying, Miss Sheril?” Sheril laughed. “If you can tell, freely, from any compulsion to tell the truth, then you will see what is there. However, if you’re compelled to tell the truth, then you won’t see the truth, as you are following a compulsion. Therefore, I want you to tell lies, until it’s safe to do so. Then, you will be free to tell the truth yourself, by choice, you will be able to see, what is there. All right, can you tell me: what is inside, now?” A young girl looked to the others and laughed. “Of course I can’t. I don’t know what is there.” “Good. We’ll lie about it, some more. Can you do that?” “Yes.” “Good. Then do that and make sure you tell big lies, and respond to that person, by saying it was a very good lie. When you have that down good and

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 318 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

proper, we’ll go up a notch, to what could be there, and then, get you to really see what is in there. Once you can lie, without fear, you will then be able to speak the truth, as well, without fear.” The class continued, for the next three hours. Aron, the almost black puma, sometimes patrolled, looking over the students’ shoulders, as they sat. Often, he just sat by Sheril, looking distinguished. One of the students cursed, and threw a rock in the water. He was frustrated. Aron was quietly lying, beside Sheril’s legs. He stretched up and looked at the student, licking his lips. “You stupid cat. What are you looking at?” called the student. Aron got up, on his four legs and started to make a clicking guttural sound.

Aron

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 319 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Sheril leaned over, stroking him. “It’s all right, Aron. He is allowed to leave: only on the condition, that he doesn’t come back, and all further learning, for him is forfeit.” The boy stood. “You don’t know anything.” He pointed to the rock, that she was holding. “You can’t make that work. I’ve never seen it.” Sheril smiled. The rock began to lift, slowly, from her hand and float: though the air. All the children stared. It stopped; just in front of his nose. The other students, ten of them, continued looking at it, in awe. Sheril had never shown them what she could do. They had only heard of it, but never seen it. The boy looked around, not sure what this meant. “Well, maybe you can do that, and you have been away forty years to learn it. What good is it? We’ll never be able to learn it. None of us here can learn it. We are all too stupid.” The boy looked around. The others were beginning to nod. Sheril stood up. “Very well. If no one can tell me what is inside the rock, I will give up. I won’t hold another class. Who can tell me now? Come on.” The youngest, only four years old, put up his hand, while the others sat there, denying the possibility of what they had been asked, to do. Sheril nodded. “Miss, I know. I can see a frog.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 320 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The other children laughed. The rock was solid and no holes were in it. They had all held it, and felt it. It was a solid rock. Sheril asked, “Why do you say that Megalin?” “Because I can see it, Miss. I can see it, inside. I can.” Sheril had the rock float, back over, to her. She laid it on a big leaf, on the ground, in front of her. The other children stood up, in interest, now. They could sense, that something was about to happen. They watched, quietly. Even Aron did. Under Sheril’s gaze, the rock slowly started to separate, into two pieces. Sheril put more of her attention on it. It split. There it was; a small brown toad, thin, the length of a small finger. It was alive and unharmed. Megalin looked on amazed. “That’s the frog! That’s what I saw, miss. How did you do it?” Sheril laughed. “No. I only broke it. What they want to know is, how did you? I’ve had forty years, to learn what I did, but you, Megalin, you learned how to know, after only three days.

Ω

Beel was loading the last of the cases, onto a floater they had brought down to the planet, weeks before. Charlene was looking over the craft carefully, as though it might explode and kill them.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 321 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Dianne laughed. “Get used to it, Charlene, our friend from Europe, is going to show us what we should know, anyway. How far away is this Sydney, Polton? Over the next few hills, maybe three hills? Ten hills?” Charlene and Dianne climbed aboard, laughing and sat in the seats, allocated them. They strapped in; and the roof came over. Beel smiled. “It’s much more than that.” With that, the machine started to rise, and continued to rise and rise. Charlene started to grip the seatbelt slightly, then with terror, the side of the machine. After a minute, Dianne was beginning to think that she might vomit. It was absolutely terrifying! Out the window, she could firstly see buildings, then hills, and finally clouds. Beel nodded while watching them, on a screen. “My first time was just as bad. I actually wet myself. I’m sorry to admit it. Most people do, the first time, and take precautions for it. You aren’t your body, and we all have different body reactions. I brought you those bags, if you need to throw up.” He looked back, and double-sealed the rear compartments. He took off fast, for outer space. He could see his passengers were white, while their monitors showed their heart rates were fine. They would be okay. He looked back, as the floater was now outside of the gravitational pull of the planet, and they were

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 322 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

approaching a destroyer parked permanently two hundred Ks over New York, for his mission. Ten minutes later, they had secured, aboard the Sandrist Destroyer Yalo. Beel stepped from the floater and three junior officers greeted him. They saluted him, crisply. Beel motioned and Charlene and Dianne followed, walking bandy legged like. Beel made a point of jumping down the last two steps, and landed on solid steel. “You can do the same, ladies.” They didn’t, but gingerly stepped down. They looked out, through the open doors, beyond the acron shields, to see Earth. Dianne looked at Charlene. She pointed. The other one pointed. They said nothing but kept staring. A woman came up to Beel, stood to attention and saluted. “Well done, sir. Do you want me to take these… locals… to accommodation? I think they need to change, sir.” Beel looked at them. He agreed. Their body functions had overwhelmed them.14 Beel turned around to the two. “You’re my special guests. This is my ship, and it commands my small fleet. On this ship, you will be tended as the holiest of guests,

14 INFORMATION: BODY FUNCTIONS: Bodies in time of fear, or when the organism is going to have to flee or fight to survive, will discharge the bladder or bowel as a normal survival habit. It enables the organism to fight or flee better, so enhancing survival. It’s a very normal function.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 323 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

having been the first ever, to step aboard Sandrist territory, from Sequetus 3. Please follow Lieutenant Stacy and she will take you, to your cabins. You will get fresh clothes and your existing wear will be washed. You can then have a meal, and get used to being aboard. Learn what it’s like. This is the real world. We are honored, to have you aboard.” He bowed low. The girls looked at him, and then at each other. This was fantastic and yes, they did smell. They started to smile. Stacy nodded at the pair and winked. “Follow me and we’ll get you cleaned up. The Commander also wants you to have this. If you ever need to, while aboard, you can signal him immediately. He can hear you, via it. Put it around your necks, like this. It also allows us, to see where you are. It will allow you though to areas, where you are permitted. For example, if you get too close to that open port there, the doors will shut, even if the shields are on. They’re for your protection, so don’t lose them. Shower with it, eat with it, and don’t take them off, even when back down there.” The two girls accepted the keys and put the chains holding the keys, around their necks. “What is a shower?” Charlene whispered, to Dianne. Beel watched them. He smiled and turned to the Lieutenant. “There are books, in the rear of the floater. Unload them and have someone scan every page. Meet me in debrief, in twenty minutes. I’ll

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 324 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

also be getting clean. They are in the guest rooms, next to mine?” “Yes, sir.” “Good. Lead them to their quarters, and show them how to use the showers, toilets and so on. After that, take them to the canteen, and show them how that works, and find them something, which they can eat. Then; have them return, for debriefing, in…” He looked at his antique wristwatch. “Two hour’s time. Yes, I was presented with this priceless artifact. It still works. I’ll meet them: in two hours.” Beel walked out and nodded to the women, as he left. Charlene looked at Darlene, and quickly, they scampered after Stacy, who was already leading the way. They were very self-conscious, as it seemed, to them, that all the people on the ship were watching them. At every corridor, people stepped aside and looked. Every crew stood still, as they passed. “Do we smell that bad?” Charlene asked Darlene. Stacey turned. “I understand some of what you say, because I’ve been studying Ing-Lysh. You don’t smell. You’re from Sequetus 3, the holiest of places, for any Torrenist.” Darlene nodded. She leaned over to Charlene. “What is a Torrenist?” Stacy smiled to herself. “Here are your rooms, and your shared bathroom. This is a tap. Water comes out of it, when you do this.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 325 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Charlene was impressed. “Wow. I don’t need to get a bucket?” “What’s this?’ Darlene was putting her hand in the toilet, to feel its water. She was going to taste it, when Stacy stopped her. Stacy moaned silently, and smiled. “I see. I’ll explain it in a moment, but its best to keep your hands out of it, unless you’re cleaning it. Over here, are some clothes. Here is a bag. Put your old clothes in this, and we’ll clean them. Someone will be here, in fifteen minutes’ time, to pick them up. Stacy looked at the girls. “These other clothes, you will have to work out, how to put them on. Look at mine. They have this, here, that opens all the way, from the side of the neck, down to the thigh. You then step into it; it’s easy, and you can do it up. Stacy sat on Charlene’s cot. “These are nylop boots and they simply roll on and off; like this. If you can’t get it worked out, someone will show you, soon enough. I’ll be back in thirty minutes, to get you something to eat. We are expecting you, to meet with the Commander for debriefing, and we don’t keep him waiting.” Stacy didn’t wait, but simply indicated how the toilet worked, the small tiny shower, and that it went for two minutes and stopped for five minutes, and yes, it was recycled water, as they suspected.` Dianne was curious, about what was recycled water. Charlene still wanted to know, if they needed a bucket, to get the water out from the toilet.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 326 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Stacey left, wondering if there was really that much hope, for the planet. However, she did like the girls, and it was an honor, to have them aboard the Destroyer Yalo.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 327 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 4

PREPARATION

Jaron sat at the bridge of his ship. Amanda still could mind-call clearly. Jaron looked at Kuro, who somehow, seemed to have total run of both ships now. Jaron hadn’t spoken much, the last two days. He was deep in thought, trying to work out, what was the correct course of action? He had been mentally numb, for a month, after the death of Amy and Anki, not knowing how he should feel, or what he should do. He had ideas, but they came and went. The result: was no action. Right now, he still didn’t feel like doing anything. People from the fleet, had been calling him. He had Amanda screen all the calls. He would accept Beel’s calls, sometimes. He would listen to Tubin, Akeala and Yandra. His children he had time for, but in reality, they didn’t need him, and were capable of resolving the day-to-day crisis, which seemed to be forever brewing, around Sequetus. However, he was grateful for briefings, on important matters. As he told Amanda, to tell them, he wanted them now to make decisions, and not heave all the responsibility onto him. He didn’t want to be the only one, that if the whole universe

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 328 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

imploded, to be told that it was his fault. Someone else could shoulder it, too. His children and crew understood. So did Amanda. He was blaming himself, for the loss of his wife, and old-time friend, Amy. If it wasn’t for him, they could have retired happily, on Jilta. However, they didn’t, and they followed him instead, and ended up, being tortured beyond belief, and recognition. Amanda asked him if he wanted to talk about it, and he said no. He said he was happy, to think it out, so she let him. She saw that it was fitting. This was how she met Captain Jaron, after she lost Captain Bigow in the Battle of Kantee. Jaron had waited patiently, waited for her, to come out from her grief, shock and self-pity. She would accord Captain Jaron, the exact same private time of solitude, which he needed, and had accorded her.

Ω

Dianne was looking at the light switch. She stooped down, looking straight at it. Quietly, she whispered off, and the lights dimmed. She chuckled. Then, she twirled around and heard a gut wrenching scream coming from the bathroom, and some cursing. It was Charlene. Upon swinging the door wide open, she saw Charlene pulling at some clothing, trying to pull them, out of that toilet

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 329 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

machine. Charlene cursed. “Don’t just look, help me.” Dianne grabbed hold, and they both pulled. The toilet let go and the girls fell backwards, with a wet towel, draped over them. Charlene wasn’t laughing, but Dianne thought it funny, and asked, “Well?” Charlene stood. “I tried to wash my old clothes, with this small brush. It didn’t work.” She held up a tube of tooth whitener and an electric toothbrush. “Then, I tried to wash the smelly stuff off it, in that wash bowl, on the ground. When I accidently touched this lever, that bowl tried to swallow the shorts, and did so, and then; it tried to swallow my towel, and that was when you came in.” The door outside gave a small bell-sound, and the girls jumped up, and hid in the shower closet. “It’s only me,” called Stacey, from the next room. The girls slowly came out into their room, now wet, as well as embarrassed. Stacey nodded. “I brought you an orderly. It’s my fault, as I should have realized. Her name is Midshipman Lanis.” Lanis gave a small half bow. She was a junior officer, which befitted important guests. Lanis smiled. “I’ve also studied Ing-Lysh and I’ll help you, to understand more, of what we have here. She walked past the pair and called, “On please.” The

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 330 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

light brightened and she called again, as she went into the bathroom. The girls were looking over her shoulder, as she surveyed the room. Lanis sniffed the air, grimaced and turned. “Okay, you first, Charlene. Off with your clothes, now.” She turned to the shower cubicle and called out, “Warm medium: all round,” and water started spraying all over, in three directions, from otherwise unseen nozzles She grabbed another towel, and gave it to Charlene. “Wrap this around yourself while you undress, if you’re shy. Here are all the towels, drop yours in the chute, as soon as you have used it once. No germs, and it will be sterilized, immediately. She bundled Charlene into the shower, and handed her the soap. “Rub it, till it lathers, to get the dirt and smell off your body. You’ve two minutes of water, only. Get it all done and off. Yes, you’ve got it. I’m sending your old smelly clothes in this bag, down the chute, too. Here are your new clothes: put them on, once you’re dry, use the towel to dry yourself. I’ll be outside, if you need any help.” She bundled Dianne out, and showed her how to work the lights and locks, with her key from around her neck. Twenty minutes later, both girls were on their way to debriefing wearing modern day trooper garb, one piece, with roll up nylop boots. Their hair was washed, and tied back. As they walked, several of the male troopers stopped and looked. The girls

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 331 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

were slightly taller than their Sandrist counterparts, but otherwise, not anything more striking. It was just that they had a certain raw naïve innocent freshness, about them. That was how Stacey explained it to Beel. It attracted men.

Ω

Jaron looked out, from the cabin of Black Knight. “I’m ready, I think,” he called, to the air. “You’re still going ahead with it?” came Amanda’s response, from nowhere and everywhere. “Yes, Amanda. I have to try.” “How are you going to be sure, that you don’t make great errors, or put us in jeopardy? It isn’t as if your body will be here, to warn you, if there’s an error this time. You will be in the past. If you change it, how will you know, if the future changes so rapidly, that you must return? How will you know, to instantly undo, what you have just done?” Jaron looked at Earth. It slowly rotated. ”I’ll mark time here, and now, with a mental viewing machine. Here….” He put his hand up, and indicated a position in space, that he was now remotely viewing, through. “I can see through this position, even if I’m a half galaxy, away. In fact, any person can do it. I can create one of these any place, and look through it, any time and see anywhere.” “I know that, Captain. Yet few know that they can, and would use the ability. In your case, you will

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 332 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

be traveling in time. How do you know, that you will be able to see through time?” Jaron was standing now. “I don’t really, do it. I just think that I can. It’s time, Amanda. You, I, and Kuro too, need to go.

Ω

Aron was waiting, with the children. Two of them had mastered the art, of moving a leaf, floating in water, without touching it. Aron jumped on the leaf, the instant that it moved. He then looked, towards the next leaf. It would start to float above the water, and then he would pounce on it, next. It was a great game, which he and the children were playing. Sheril looked on, with amusement. She wondered if the great cat was somehow becoming younger. Now they had enrolled three children, from the next village. She and her almost black puma had become famous, throughout the Amazon. As the days went by, she was getting invitations to visit near and far villagers. She accepted some, and on several occasions, delegations came to see her and Aron.

Ω

Black Knight and Amanda were now over Mexico. Jaron and Amanda were in unison. Amanda

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 333 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

had separated and Jaron was aboard. Black Knight was locked down again. Jaron gave the countdown, three, two and …. Amanda and Jaron were gone, from the Sequetus System.

The world took on a green hue, and then started to vanish, as though a pale fog was rolling over the view. There it was; the tunnel. It was slightly different, to last time, as the first two times had also differed to each other as well. Yet, there was no mistake: they were traveling the vortex, through the portal of the Zone.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 334 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 5

VENUS

Yandra was on the planet Venus, in the utility barracks. There were several such barracks. They were places where anyone could rest between shifts, as the borers continued to tunnel, beneath the cap rock of the surface. They had managed to break into five tunnels so far and the Talkron had fought them, out from each. Yandra looked at the others. Akeala was also in the room. “We’ve made no real gains. It’s hard going. It isn’t like the moon, where after a week, all the tunnels were ours. Here, it’s tougher. There are traps and their holding out, is to their credit.” Akeala nodded. “Yes, they have placed their facility well, on a planet that’s corrosive to all who would attack them. I suspect that they have a time program, they are working to, so as to hold-out, until their help arrives.” Yandra concurred. “Our real dilemma is when will that be? We think it could be years away, but how do we know that?” An aide approached, and broke into their briefing. “Sir, we’ve another breach: into their tunnels. This time, we are two Ks under the surface, in region Belga.” He handed them, the map.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 335 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yandra looked at it, then to Akeala. He looked over at a Boguard instructor. “Can the Fronts get down there, do you think? It’s pointless, trying to send down Federation troopers. They are no match, for the Talkron.” The Boguard instructor stepped forward. “Captain Yandra. We have our own risks, to consider, too. If they manage to capture one of us, we risk them bleeding the information, of Yaltipia’s whereabouts.” Yandra knew that. He looked to the other Boguard; all were Boguard in the room. “Understood. Then, we must mark where each of us are, and have an agreement, that if one of us is captured, then the others must agree that instantly that captured Boguard brother must die swiftly, of a cerebral hemorrhage. Thus: there is no risk. The only condition is, that due time will have to be allowed for, in case we can make a rescue.” They all looked at him, their thoughts going out, to the hundreds of brothers and ships, linked by their thought network. Yandra felt the body of unity, between them. It was strong. It was as real a bond. “Follow me,” he said. “I’ll lead the first Boguard Fronts. The same rule applies, to me. I must die the same way, if it happens. Do you all understand?” The bond of hundreds replied, yes, and they understood.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 336 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yandra grabbed his helmet, weapons belt, and made his way to the exit, leading to his floater. Others followed him.

Ω

It was dark and they were down deep. It was hot. There was little space. Yandra looked ahead, at the break-in. They had gotten through the tunnel, and there were no immediate signs, that the tunnel was inhabited. No Talkron erupted with laser fire, or psychokinetics. The Boguard crept forward, looking through the hole. It was forty pacs ahead. Yandra was aware of his suit; corroding slowly in the atmosphere, and he could feel heat, penetrating his lining, overloading its cooling system. They got closer. Yandra far-saw into the hole. He tried to look up, into the tunnel. “I’m either getting it’s empty, or it’s a picture, of it being empty.” A Boguard Instructor was lying next to him. He breathed quietly and murmured. “It’s a picture, of nothing. I see it, too.” “They are there, then,” Yandra whispered. “I can feel their presence and I can tell that they can feel ours.” Yandra looked back, at the forty white-suited Boguard Fronts, behind them. He could feel their thoughts. They were with him. He looked ahead. He could feel the Talkron, also thinking the same.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 337 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

There were two sets of unison mind here. Both were equally poised. Both were waiting, for the other to make a mistake. Yandra sent his mind out further, this time, into the nothingness. He penetrated the nothing, which the Talkron had erected, for him to see. It should have stopped him, but he went through it, with his own far-seeing remote viewpoint. He saw further. As his remote viewpoint drifted down the tunnel, he could feel the Talkron’s fear. It scared them, as it wasn’t what they had thought it would be. Yandra’s viewpoint came to another corner, and looked down that tunnel: it was black. He was sharing the images, from his far viewpoint with his Boguard brothers, and they shared it with others, including the Man-o-Wars. The viewpoint went down, and down, further. However, the scene was still black. He couldn’t get past the blackness. He decided that it wasn’t black and then he saw it: the tunnel appeared to him - it wasn’t black. The remote viewpoint returned the image, of over a thousand Talkron troops, waiting for his fifty Boguard; waiting for him, to make his move.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 338 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yandra breathed deeply, and looked at the instructor’s eyes. He let the viewpoint look down further, and there was another blackness, three Ks, further down the tunnel. It was so dark, and he couldn’t get it, to brighten. It was a different kind of blackness. It wasn’t lessening. It was a huge blackness, bigger than any that he had imagined. It was so big, but so beautiful, it had a colored fringe to the blackness, and a yearning. It had an admiration for the viewer, it loved the viewer, and it wanted the viewer, to see it. It was yearning for him, and it was all embracing, for the viewer. Yandra was fascinated. He really wanted to see, into that blackness. As though being awoken, from a bad dream, he was being shaken by the instructor and he looked up. He was no longer in the tunnel, anymore. The Boguard were carrying him out. He looked down,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 339 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

and started to move his body. He still had his helmet on, and knew where he was. The instructor set him down. There were Boguard all around, and he looked to the entrance, from where they had exited. Shaking his head, he looked up, at the instructor. “My Lorde, we almost lost you. That was a trap, a trap to draw in all life. They have something down there, which draws in life, sucks in life. We all saw it. We almost lost you; from your body. We almost lost all of us, as we were all interconnected, and we all started to be drawn down, into that black trap. It was the wavelength of beauty and admiration, which pulled us in. Admiration of life, is the wavelength that can trap life.” Yandra looked around. “Then how did we…?” “Get out?” Yandra nodded, noting the perspiration, on the inside of his helmet visor. The instructor pointed to above. Wellum? asked Yandra. Yes, Captain Yandra. You had Akeala with you, in your mind. She then had her mind, linked to me. While you had each other, and you were losing yourselves, down that vortex of black admiration, into that beautiful blackness, we in turn, anchored ourselves, to all of you. You were in unison mind, but whatever is down there, the manufacturer of that

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 340 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

wavelength: it out-did the entire unison mind, of two hundred strong Boguard. Then; you and your ships saved us? asked Yandra. We did. We have our own anchor, back where we come from. We also started to lose ourselves. That blackness was absolute beauty, and it admired us greatly, too. However, we had moored our anchor, into the infinite beyond, the absolute all of everything beyond the physical universe, the infinite infinity. What is down there, was no match, so it withdrew; we survived, and hauled you out. Yandra thought about that. He looked at his Boguard instructor, who was also wondering, about what Wellum was referring. What was that link, to the infinity of infinities? How did he moor himself: there?

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 341 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 6

SIX WORLDS

Jaron and Amanda came out, exactly where they thought they should. After the green light tunnel, were the purple worlds; Six Worlds. Jaron respectfully stayed, several thousands of Ks away, from the planetoids. Amanda asked what he was waiting for, and honestly, he didn’t know. “This place spooks me,” he merely answered. He looked down, and saw the wreckage of an old Federation destroyer, then another, and the parts of another. Jaron tried to feel, the ghosts of that battle of Six Worlds. He recalled the distant memory, of a fine Marshal, and others dead, who had come from the far planets of the Pleiades, to battle Centrecom. Amanda opened up her instruments, to scan the planets. They were all there, six planets. “Amanda,” “Yes, Captain.” “Any sign of any life, at all?” “No, Captain. Nothing.” “What about inside the planetoids, in their centers? I feel that they are inside.” “Hmmmm. There’s something small, on one, but only one planetoid..” “Which?” “Yildon,” answered Amanda.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 342 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron nodded. “Interesting, as I seem to have a memory of it, Yildon. I’m curious, as to why, it’s all so dead.”

Approaching Six Worlds

Amanda scanned through the planetoid, and displayed her findings, on the screen. “This planet has several life-forces, residing in it. The others have none, at all. In fact; this planet has …” she stopped, and waited, and then resumed, “It has quite a few life forms, many small ones, with only a few larger ones, and only one or two, that we could describe as big.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 343 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron looked deep, into the planetoid, with his own mind. He was wearing the cap. It surprised him that it worked so clearly. He could now sense the life down there, as well. It was small. Amanda slowly moved, to hover finally over the surface of this second smallest, of six planetoids. There were no entry ports to inside, this time. They spent an hour, crisscrossing the surface and found nothing. “Amanda, what guise are you using outside, what are you appearing as?” asked Jaron. “I’m a battle cruiser. I don’t want some upstart, on a rock, to think it can blast away, without fearing reprisals,” offered Amanda. “Perhaps, that’s too strong, for who is down there. Scale your image of yourself down, to that of a ferry-shuttle. You can always strike back, but appear as a shuttle. It might be that you’re scaring them, whoever they are. The planetoid may not otherwise reveal itself. I get that the life is scared. I feel fear, coming from inside.” “Correct, I think. I’m now an unarmed, floating shuttle.” “Good, continue the search, for an opening.” Amanda continued to cross over the rocks. Yildon wasn’t a large planet. Jaron vaguely recalled, it being perhaps only hundreds of Ks in diameter, inside.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 344 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“It has worked,” called Jaron. “A previously shrouded opening has now appeared. It is small, seventeen Ks to port. Proceed there, with caution.”

Landing on Yildon

Jaron watched, as they slowly approached. It was a round opening, just wide enough for Amanda. He nodded for her to continue down, into and through. Down they went, past the rocks, past small cliffs, into blackness.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 345 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron was experiencing that feeling, that he had been here before, and he had. As Amanda slipped down, into the center of the hollowed out planetoid, her screens went blank. She went to the infrared scanners and they were only marginally more receptive. She turned on her lights. It was still dark. “Is it night?” Jaron asked. He tried to see, but what he saw, didn’t match his memory. No. Just no light. No manufacture of light. Is a suit needed? He asked. Yes, Captain. Very low oxygen. Jaron watched the screens, as Amanda slid down, over the surface, of the inside of Yildon. Yildon, the once great hollowed out planetoid, full of life, was now, almost dead. Slowly Jaron directed the small craft, where to go, down past the dais, where he recalled Pegasus had previously stopped. He could see the woods approaching, all dead. He swallowed. This isn’t what he had thought, or what he would have wanted, in a victory over Centercom. Amanda was feeling his guilt and she too, started to feel some remorse, as she wondered if she may have been here, once before. I feel it, Captain. The déjàvu feeling. It’s scaring me. I shouldn’t have that feeling. I haven’t been here, before. I feel the fear, as though there is evil here, and it scares me. Jaron nodded. Well, that description scared the halz out of me, Amanda. He swallowed.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 346 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He had his suit on, and his helmet partially connected. He looked down, by the airlock floor. He smiled and quietly said, “Kuro, this adventure isn’t for feelups. If you go out there, most likely, you will die fast.” The little black animal squatted on her hind legs and looked at Jaron, then outside, through the screen. It understood, sat back and watched. Jaron stepped into the lock, secured his helmet tightly, and flicked his breathing apparatus onto steady. He pressed the inner door close button, the door swished behind him and sealed. The second that air was removed, Jaron pressed open on the other door. He looked outside, into the blackness. Mentally, he was guiding Amanda through pictures, which he was able to recall, from over a thousand years, before, as Goren Torren. He hadn’t forgotten who he was, and his memories of those previous lives were still clear. So long as he allowed himself to believe, they were real. If they were real to him, they were like reliving yesterday. Jaron hung onto the side of Amanda, the shuttle, as they slowly skimmed over the surface, down a hill. They carefully approached the desolate wood. There weren’t any trees there. All he could see, were some old bent petrified trunks, half sticking out of the ground, reminding him of the earlier days, when life abounded. Jaron recalled his lesson from the life, which inhabited the whole world.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 347 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron swallowed. Was it like this everywhere, he wondered? Did life vanish, wherever he went? Was this his hidden purpose, to eradicate life from the physical universe? He pondered. I hear you, Captain. That wasn’t your doing, I think. However, there was a greater life here, certainly. It isn’t here, now, but once it was. I have the records of the larger Life Of The World, which has now gone.

Jaron in Yildon

Jaron swallowed and said nothing. He continued to stare, out towards the blackness. He felt the remorse of many lifetimes of pain and suffering, now coming to haunt him. The death he saw out there, now, was partly his doing, no matter how he tried to justify the feelings of guilt. He was there, back then as Goren Torren. He was there when they defeated

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 348 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Centercom, and this was the result: a dead and decaying landscape and planet. He sighed. He wondered to himself. He never really knew the lesson, which Centrecom must have been learning. Jaron had a philosophy, and that was; life was on a journey in the physical universe, to learn. Jaron looked out, thinking about his previous victory, over Centrecom. Nothing seemed alive. He wondered what Centrecom was learning. They glided over, where he knew little Vila had lived. He looked for the ruins of the village, but found none. They weren’t there, as though time had completely eradicated them, from the memory of the planet. Jaron kept guiding them down, past the wood. He could see the water ahead, where they first encountered Vila, fishing for kelp. Jaron half smiled, at the thought that the kelp might be alive, but felt it was unlikely. The water looked dead, and uninviting, as though nothing would survive there. The shoreline was rimmed, with brown scum. Jaron pointed up to the river and beyond. “Out there, about thirty Ks away, was a small town. It was run by the Masters.” I understand. Amanda was getting some very strange feelings, and they weren’t coming from the planet. They were coming from her, as though her own self, or something, was being pushed. She was feeling pressure, but it wasn’t on her hull or anything

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 349 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

physical. It was herself, inside herself. She didn’t share it with Jaron. She continued to allow herself, to be guided by him.

Map of Yildon, in Six Worlds

She had an earlier diagram, of this region. Goren Torren had drawn it up, after his escape from Six Worlds, a millennium ago. Amanda now had the map on the screen, displayed on Jaron’s visor. Jaron glanced at the glowing map. He almost smiled, at having recalled doing its drawing. “Look out there!” He pointed. “Amanda, what is that?” he called. It was a faint pinkish glow and they were approaching it. A life-force, Captain. Jaron’s heart began to beat faster. He started to feel relief that maybe not all had died. He was perspiring now, though it wasn’t hot. There: he saw

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 350 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

it, on the rocks, on the plain. Its outline was unmistakable. It was an adult Rytoen. Amanda moved nearer, to it. It reared up on the rocks, in defiance. There was a slight glow, emanating from around, as it spread out its wings. It was challenging Amanda to defy it, or attack it, as it would defend its territory. Jaron could see that the animal shouldn’t be disturbed. “It is tame, compared to what it once was. It once was terrifying, in control of the skies, and much of the ground. Now, it looks almost tame.”

Rytoen

I feel it, Captain, as though it has little life left in it. It has nothing to defend, no space, or territory left. I can feel into the animal’s psyche. It has lost its will to survive. It’s just hanging there, because

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 351 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

there’s no other place, for the life to go. What vitality once pulsed through its veins, is now, totally beaten, into failure. “Like me,” breathed Jaron, to himself. He thought it curious: that the light emanated from the animal, a creator of light. Amanda ignored the comment. At least her captain was getting a chance to express himself, and it was better expressed, than left unsaid. She believed that. They continued, past the Rytoen and skimmed, over the lake’s surface. It was quiet, below. I see no real active life, but there are a few larger life- forces, and a few smaller ones too: some fish species. There is a microcosm, but it is small, weak and definitely dying. It won’t survive, much longer. This planet reminds me of Mars, but not quite as far- gone. There is still time, for someone to save this planet, Jaron. Jaron nodded. The idea that a planet could be saved, instead of destroyed, brightened him up, considerably. The cliffs and hills rose up from the lake and there were the remnants of the city, crumbing to dust. I see it, Captain; the same thing that you see. It was a single light, shining, out from a building. Amanda approached, cautiously. She was feeling very nervous. There was something, in the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 352 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

building, that wanted something, from them. Be careful, Captain. “I can feel it Amanda. I’ll need to get out here.” Amanda checked her weapons batteries. They were fully charged. Very well, Captain. I have the records of the last time that you entered this city, and what lay, through there. This time, you have the cap; I’m here, and will be monitoring you. However, there is a limit to how far down I can monitor, without blowing a hole through their city superstructure, to communicate with you. Jaron was starting to perceive her fear. He understood. He also knew that this had to be. “Thank you, Amanda. Watch my back, well.” He jumped, and slowly floated, down from the hold door, to the planet’s surface. There wasn’t much gravity. The inside of the planetoid was hollow, revolving and the low gravity came from centrifugal force, only. Jaron felt the ground, beneath his feet. Oxygen was at very low levels. He would pass out, if he removed his helmet. As he took a few steps, away from Amanda, he looked back and nodded at the small ferry craft, which was her disguise. He looked forward to the light. It was on a building. He tentatively stepped, towards it.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 353 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 7

GRASON

Jaron saw the light wink off and then on, at him. He knew this was to draw him in. He raised his weapon. “Cover me, Amanda!” His breathing was heavy, inside the helmet. I’m right behind you, my Captain. Jaron smiled at the reference to him, of being her Captain. Yes, she wouldn’t allow him, to be harmed. “I’m pressing this door hatch. It seems familiar.” He could feel Amanda’s acknowledgement, as the doorway slid open. Jaron relayed that there was still low-level power, present. The door moved open slowly. As the door slid, he could see down, into a dark corridor. He stepped forwards, whilst looking sideways and around. His monitors were reading his fear. He could hear his breathing, see the adrenalin levels spiking on the right hand graph, in his visor. There he could see his oxygen level intake, his heart rate, blood pressure and other vital signs. He ignored them. To his left, was a set of stairs. He knew those; from before. He wasn’t being beckoned, to those. He knew where they led. The other stair on the right, was calling to him.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 354 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He took the left stair, again. The next door that he came to, he slid open, manually. He went down a corridor and then opened the first door. There was the large open room, from over a thousand years ago. It was here, where he met the Masters. They were still here, now, but only as vaporized ghosts. They really didn’t exist. Amanda was feeling her own fear levels spike, too. She was worried. Captain! Talk to me! “I’m here, Amanda. You can see, all that I see.” I like the sound of your voice. “Thank you, and right now, so do I.” He looked around. “There is nothing here that I can feel telling me, to be here. This is all memory, of a bad time, in the past. It was once life, life created, by someone, but it was life. Now, it has all died. The spirits of those, who were here, have gone too. They aren’t here.” That’s correct, but I have fear. “Me too, Amanda.” Jaron holstered his gun and walked over, to the windows overlooking the lake, below. He remembered meeting the Masters, in this very spot and looking out, into their world. Now, the windows were broken. There was no wind. There was just an uncanny silence. He stood and watched, for a minute. He was beginning to get a warning feeling. He turned, with his gun drawn, but no one was there. He looked around. It was here: where he had been captured and implanted, with false memories.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 355 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He could still recall them. He prayed that they were false, because the time that these memories were meant to impact, was still in the future, compared to the world of Sequetus, which he had left. The death, which he was to bring about, according to those memories, had been averted, he thought. He looked around, some more. He could tell Amanda was accessing those old implanted memories. “What?” he thought to her. Hmmm. Captain. I can’t think, with these records. Have you gone forward in time, to see yourself, if they are real, or false? No I have not! Why not? Fear. Understood, she replied. Where to now? Let’s find the other stairs, down, he thought back to her. With that, he slowly backed away from the room and its memories. It didn’t seem like a thousand years ago, that he had been here. It seemed perhaps, one year or two. He slowly opened the door again, and cautiously turned back, into the corridor. He looked at the other set of stairs. He went down one step, and then the other. They were made of stone, but maintained, as though someone was still using them. He breathed deeply. I’m with you, came Amanda’s thought.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 356 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron nodded. The steps led down, several building levels. Jaron wasn’t sure how far down they were going. With every step, he was beginning to feel more fear. He was getting further away, from Amanda. She could still feel him. She was still there, but further away, from help. Jaron was now beginning to realize that he was operating, against mission protocol. This wasn’t the Boguard way. He should have someone, there, with him. He swallowed, as he realized where he was. He was at the bottom of the stairs. They lead out to another level hallway. There was water, ahead of him. “I think I’m at lake level, Amanda.” I think so too.

Jaron in the Masters residence at Yildon

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 357 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amanda’s fear levels were spiking, higher again. This wasn’t the time, to communicate it, to her captain. She maintained a vigilant watch, on all the monitors. “I can sense there is another opening I must go through,” he called out, to her. Okay, she briskly replied. Jaron approached the opening, being careful not to slip into the water, on his right. He checked the oxygen levels outside his suit. It was higher, at around five percent, and rising. He slowly made his way forward. He reached the end. He pushed at the door, and it didn’t move at first, then it opened. Jaron could see a faint light, ahead. It was dull, but visible. He approached it, with his weapon drawn. I’m with you, Captain. The oxygen levels have reached twelve percent. There is a life form there, to your right. It doesn’t appear armed. It isn’t moving. Jaron looked in that direction. He could see in his visor, the shape that Amanda was outlining, as the life form. Correct, Captain. That’s it. It is alive. “Correct, Captain. I am alive,” came the voice, from the shape. The shape got bigger and stood; a full two pacs tall. It turned around to reveal itself, as the same height as Jaron. Jaron looked at it. It looked at him. Jaron swallowed, slowly pulled back his gun, and more

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 358 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

slowly, holstered it. Jaron breathed carefully. “My name is Jaron. My apologies for being rude with the weapon.” Jaron dipped a bow ever so slowly, being manner perfect, but not taking an eye from the figure, in front of him. Amanda was watching, and monitoring the figure. Unarmed, she gave the thought. She scanned its brain. Cap free. Thank you, Jaron replied. The figure gave him a fleeting smile. “It was rude, as you put it,” said the figure, motioning to the gun. “However, in the circumstances, knowing who you are and where you’ve come from, it’s understandable.” It bowed slightly in response, also not allowing its eyes, to leave Jaron. You getting this Amanda? Yes, Captain. What now? The figure smiled. “Sirs, Captain Jaron, and Amanda. You both are welcome, and we’ve been waiting for you. You can use thought or speech. I can use both; fluently. Standard is fine with me. Jaron stood straighter. “You can take off the helmet, Captain. I can see you’re uncomfortable. And Amanda will tell you I can’t or won’t harm you.” He’s correct, Captain. How sir, do you know us, both?

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 359 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The figure nodded to Jaron. “We are in the future and that simply means that we know the past. It is recorded and easy to find out. Jaron, you invaded this space, or liberated it; depending on the point of view. Invader and liberator can be the same thing, really. Since then, there are records of you, from when you returned to Sequetus and what you did, over the next many years. Of course, you don’t yet have those records. On the other hand, we, in the future have the benefit of being able to look back. In short, you both are known; to us.” Jaron was beginning to feel uneasy. The figure smiled. “I’m not about to short- circuit the future for you, and tell you what you do. You will find out soon enough, when you go through present time, in your future in due course. That isn’t why you’re here. I haven’t been impelling you and Amanda here, for that purpose.” The figure held up his hand. “My name is Grason. Yes, I am a descendant of the Masters, whom I believe you will have good recall of. You fought the controlling life entity, Centrecom. You defeated it.” Jaron nodded. “Yes, the rogue computer program.” Grason shook his head. “That is not quite correct. It was a life form. A life that you actually already knew. Isn’t that right, Amanda?” Amanda? Jaron thought.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 360 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amanda wasn’t replying. Her fear spikes had gone, beyond count. She was now still, finding herself unable to move, or communicate. Jaron could see with his mind, Kuro, in front of the ship’s screens, trying to awaken the ship. Jaron looked at Kuro, and encouraged her to stir Amanda. Kuro understood. She jumped down, leaped up from the floor, and onto the Captain’s chair to bite it. At any other time, this was forbidden.

Grason of Six Worlds

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 361 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

There was no response from Amanda. Kuro scratched the captain’s chair. This should have given her an electric shock. Scratching was something, which Amanda absolutely riled against. Still, there was nothing. Kuro looked at the screens and the monitors, showing Jaron, as though indicating, to him, that there was nothing else, she could do. Amanda was in shock. Jaron looked at Grason. “What have you done?” Grason smiled. “I’ve done nothing. The thing with Amanda, is that, she is Amanda. Only she can tell you. Is that not right, Amanda?: There was no reply. Jaron looked at Grason sideways, and felt as though perhaps, he might need his gun. Grason shook his head. “You still don’t understand, do you. Look at you, Jaron. I’m a match for you and vice versa. We are from different times. You know I don’t have a cap. However, you do. Otherwise, we are the same. I can make this seat rise, and so can you.” Grason raised the chair a pac and lowered it. “If we were to fight each other, we wouldn’t need weapons. We would use this, ourselves.” Grason tapped his head. “You and I are far more powerful, than any weapon, which we could develop.” “How do you know, Grason?” asked Jaron, cautiously.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 362 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“I’m a descendant, of the Masters. Nevertheless, I’m not one of them.” Grason walked to a window. He then turned and said, “Follow me. The Sequetus history books are full of Amanda. She is in many of their historical works, especially religious writings. She works for a very high authority. I know you have been wondering who, and so have we, to be honest. However, she has been on Earth many, many, times, in many forms, in many disguises.” Jaron was following Grason, as he led them to a larger room, which seemed to be more comfortable. There were chairs. Grason continued. “She has not always been female. Often, she has been male. She is portrayed in the history books, as there, to help humankind. She is never bad… but that doesn’t mean she can’t make a mistake. Isn’t that so, Amanda?” There was no reply, from the ship. Jaron wasn’t sure, where this conversation was going. Grason smiled. “I have the advantage, of history being behind me. It’s much easier; for me. I knew you both would arrive. It’s simple. There are historical records of you, arriving here in the past, and it was known to be, about 86,000 years ago.” “So; what are your intentions, to Amada and me, now? Are they hostile?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 363 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Grason shook his head. “No, I’m merely the keeper, of Six Worlds. I have been waiting for you both. Amanda is the important one, not you. I am sorry, Jaron. You’re merely her keeper. Her burden is far greater; than yours.” Clearly, Jaron still didn’t understand. Grason continued. “She has been trying to rectify something in history, which happened a long time ago and she is after something from the future, which is why you both came here. You want to fix up your past, and she, hers. She has not told you; I can tell.” “Then, who is she?” asked Jaron You will know, at, and in, the right time, butted in Amanda. Thank you, Grason for the lesson. It’s good that you’re here, and I know where you are from, and that you’re waiting for us. I understand. I would have told you, at the right time, Jaron. I’m sorry; that it wasn’t me, to tell you. Jaron stepped back from the window, looking into the air. “Perhaps, you should tell me now, Amanda?” Grason walked to the window. He spoke to the nothingness, out there. “Then, you also understand the danger, of what you’re about to do? You could stay here, Amanda, and become who you intended to be, all those years, ago. You could repair the ravaged worlds, which you left destroyed. You could bring back the life that you promised. You could do all this, but if you leave, it all becomes a risk, again.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 364 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amanda manifested, in front of them both. Jaron stood back. He put his hand up, instinctively to shield away the light, emanating throughout the room. Correct, Grason. I could stay and I could simply repair what I have destroyed. I could do that, or I could take what I came for, and return, and attempt to reverse all the wrongs, which happened, over the many tens of thousands of millennia, between when it all first started, and now. That was why I was sent here, and that’s what I must still do. Grason considered, for a moment. “I thought that might be what you would say. You were always the most important one of your kind in the religious and history books on Sequetus, and I understand why.”

Amanda

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 365 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Then, you know what I’m here for, and what I must do? Yes, answered Grason, in thought pattern. Jaron put up his hand to shield his eyes as Amanda appeared visually in front of them. What if it goes wrong, like last time? thought Grason. It won’t, she thought back. Jaron is here, to make sure. You might be worse, next time, and then what? thought Grason. Jaron was watching both of them, and realized that they knew each other: very well. Slowly, he joined the thought patterns. He looked at the image of Amanda. He stepped closer, watching them both. They seemed to be confronting each other. Look around you Amanda. This is all that is left. I know, Grason. That is why you must help me. You want me to risk myself, and my friends; again? Yes. That’s the only way that I can reverse the past. You know that. I can exist, forever regretting, and all regret is – is the urge to get back into the past, undo what has been done, and make the future, new, from that point, again. That is all regret is. I’m full of regrets, and this is my chance, to go back and undo all the errors. Errors, Amanda? They weren’t just errors. You wiped out all of humanity, everywhere, except for a

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 366 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

few. It was those few, who were able to return through the past and undo you, like him. Jaron watched, as Grason pointed to Jaron. Jaron stepped back. He felt little danger as these two, friends or adversaries, confronted each other. You have seen the future, thought Amanda. You have seen it, from your vantage point of being here, now. Do I succeed; or do I fail; again? Can I get off this treadmill of failure? What do I have to do, to fix what I’ve done? Please tell, me. What? Jaron watched Grason, as he turned and walked back to the window that overlooked the Yildon Sea. Jaron wasn’t totally forgotten. It was as though he was unimportant, in the scheme of all this. He looked around, wondering if he should leave. “Jaron,” Grason called out. “You just try to understand. She said she would tell you, when you are ready. Be patient. I’m not here to harm you, or her. She, like you, is on her own journey, though this universe. She has her path to follow and needs to be very sure, that it’s the right path. Be patient.” With that, he turned and the light source, that was Amanda, followed him outside. Jaron stood there, watching them both. Grason, like Amanda, was beginning to glow, the manifestation of his body grew less and less, and his light grew, more and more. They drifted out, over the land, over the water.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 367 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron looked back. He held his helmet, in his hand. He stepped into the security of the building, while watching the two light forms, outside. Jaron looked around. It was desolate, as though no one really lived here. He looked out at the pair of light sources, over the water. He wondered who could they be, and who was Amanda: really? Then, as out from nowhere, he suddenly understood. He understood who she was, and all, which she was now attempting to do.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 368 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 8

PLANET SEARCH

Yandra looked out, at the Venus landscape. This wasn’t going, as planned. There was something down there, which was evil. He knew it was his own singular term for it, evil, but that was how he described it. Tubin was on the screen. “Yes, Tubin?” “Brother, I just want to let you that now we have located another Station City, again buried, under the surface of the Earth.” Yandra sighed. “Where is it this time?” “It is called Mountains of the Moon. It is in Africa. This is the second such mountain range, the other being between Spain and France.” Yandra nodded. “It makes sense. The planet was always very tense. Something had to be stirring it up, all those years. How old are these bases, brother?” “At least four thousand years old. I’ve a feeling these date back to the time of the pyramids.” Yandra looked out over the screens, showing the Venus heat and barren landscape. “What about Beel? What is he finding? “He is in Australia, looking for Sumerian artifacts. I believe he has found something, though I’m not sure if it has value, yet.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 369 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yandra nodded. They needed to find something, soon. They still had no real idea where these Talkron were from. “What’s my mother doing?” Tubin smiled. “She has a small band of magicians, in tow. That’s all I know.” Tubin tried to suppress his smile. Yandra ignored Tubin’s sense, of what was funny. “What is Akeala doing? Is she still chasing after Father?” Tubin shook his head. “No. She gave up trying to get into Black Knight. She received three very mild electric shocks from the craft, which caused her no real harm. She says that was our Father, making sure no one entered while he was away. She is worried he might have gone through into the Zone; however.” Yandra looked at the other screens and at Black Knight. “He most likely did, and Amanda has gone with him. Who knows what they are doing? Like Akeala, I hope he doesn’t get himself, or us, into trouble. However, he wasn’t much use, to us, the way he was. Therefore, I’m not about to chase after him. What have you got down there, now, Tubin? What have you found, exactly? I know you have been investigating these two sites, for several weeks.” Tubin turned on two more screens. Yandra watched them, as Tubin narrated. “These here, show the digging. See the shimmering effect? The area has been screened-off, with a

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 370 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

shroud. The shroud shows the area, as uninhabited forest. The region was special, out of reach and protected from the terrestrials, when under Hymondy’s rule. Before that, it had protection from the United Nations, as a sacred heritage site. So, someone knew about it. Maybe agents got it protected. The same applies, to the one, in the Pyrenees Mountains in Europe.” Yandra had his attention on smoke, now coming out from a tunneling location, on Venus. He held up his hand to Tubin, and quickly got some answers. He looked back to Tubin. “Sorry. It seems that there is some sulfur, coming out of one of the tunnels and we have to evacuate, again. It’s tough, down there. Boguard are ineffective, as there is a special trap waiting for them. It has to be Cordukes only. They are hardy, but don’t have all their abilities tuned in.” Tubin smiled. “Agreed, they are good stock, and look at me.” He laughed. Yandra did look at him. “Brother, you’re as Boguard, as me. You just don’t say it yet. Continue please, and pardon my interruption.” Tubin explained more. “We got past the shroud and found this place: here.” He showed a tunnel and quickly, they were underground with flashing lights and screens. The cavern was half a pac wide, and showed many layered and glazed balconies “It seems their intent may have been, to trap some kind of life, down here. Alternatively, it could have been a

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 371 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

receiving point, something transmitted over long distances, to here. We aren’t quite sure.” Yandra looked at the screens. He could see the pulsating light, in the picture. Moreover, he saw the flashing colors and pictures, which flashed with them. “Whatever was happening on that planet, it wasn’t good. There was never a planet under so much duress, war, illness, and upset, as Sequetus 3. There was never a moment, in its history, when it wasn’t at war with itself, somewhere. Furthermore, out there, the same with the Confederated Council of Planets, or the Federation. It seems that left to their own devices, people like other people, and they repair their differences, but only until some other person comes along, and stirs it up again. In our case, it was the Talkron.

Ω

Commander Beel was looking at his troops. They had combed the hills area, which they were searching. He looked up into the sky and saw three more floaters, traversing the air, in a crisscross fashion. He looked over at Charlene and Dianne, who had decided they would exchange their earlier New York style dress, for Federation Sandrist trooper garb. “Do you have it, yet?” he called up to the lieutenant, on the first floater.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 372 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Not yet, sir. We have the general location, and a small lock on the coordinates, of where it should be, but we are unable to get any beacon to come to life, yet.” Beel turned around, to the two New Yorkers. “We need to be leaving, soon. The weather will be getting foul and night will be here in the next two hours.” “We’ll find it, Commander,” said Charlene. She had been correct, so far, in locating all the containers of clay tablets, and was confident, that she had the right location, this time. From the find of one single clay-tablet, they had been able to get it imbued by Wellum, and he was able to search the planet, for similar heavy concentrations of life and clay, of similar qualities. He had located the region in the Euphrates valley, where the tablets had originally been made. Then, he was able to find two buried containers with two thousand tablets in each, hidden for well over a thousand years. The next hot spot was somewhere nearby outside of the old remains of the city of Sydney, in the Blue Mountains. They were now on the side of a hill, looking for the entrance, to a natural cave. The other locations were similar, buried in natural caves, which had withstood thousands of years of floods, fires and other disasters. This had been deemed better, than hiding them in manmade structures. In a manmade depository, they would likely have been found, years

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 373 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

ago, and looted. In a natural cave, hidden from everyone’s eyes, they wouldn’t have been disturbed, for perhaps another ten or twenty thousand years, or longer.

Overlooking a small part of the Blue Mountains

“Commander! Come quickly. I think we’ve got it!” a voice called excitedly, through the air.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 374 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Beel turned. Three of his men were now going down the side of the gorge, to the base of a rocky outcrop. Six minutes later and Beel was there, too. It was getting dark, under the few trees. It was a strange valley. Beel looked around. They were in a sunken plain, below the rest of the mountains and cliffs, but otherwise, it was unremarkable to view. One would never have seen it, if they weren’t searching here, exactly for it. Charlene was already at the entrance. “It’s like the others; covered by light vegetation, and very natural looking. But looking here you can see how these rocks aren’t as eroded as the others around them.” Charlene pointed to the less scoured part, of the rocks. “These have an extra thousand year’s wear. These new ones have been here a thousand or so years only, and really aren’t natural rocks, but a composite cement based product, with a silicon compound, to enable it to last tens of thousands of more years.” Beel was watching, as his staff set about scanning all the rocks. One of them raised his hands, meaning he had found it. It was the edge, of the composite product. They would remove the existing natural rocks, and come in through the side, into the tunnel, where the artifacts were expected to be hidden.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 375 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

An hour later, they were pulling out six titanium metal containers. Beel looked at Charlene. She nodded to another trooper, who snipped a seal on the side of the metal lid. Charlene carefully opened the lid. The vacuum seal broke, air rushed in, and she peered over, into it. After removing the cloth packing, she found small wrapped cardboard boxes. She carefully pulled one out and handed it to Beel. He smiled. “You open it. You understand it better.” He gently handed it back to her. Charlene slowly unwrapped it. The thousand year old cardboard came off, followed by a thousand year old fibrous animal wool. It was perfect, not a chip from it. Charlene held the raw tablet, with her soft- gloves. She turned it over; raised it to the light and nodded. “This one is a different version. It is… discussing the ethics or legal system, I think. I’m not totally sure. We need to spend hours on it, just this one piece, but there are symbols, which we recognize, as meaning law-like.” Beel nodded. “Excellent.” Are we missing any? Charlene shook her head. “The American allied forces that took Iraq at the turn of the millennium, back then, assisted some men dressed in black, raiding the Iraq national museum, and took away ten thousand Sumerian clay tablets, in these boxes.15

15 INFORMATION: Cuneiform Clay Tablets: The raid, as described, did happen, in the very first hours of the E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 376 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

They shipped them, to allied command posts, scattered around the world. This one, in Australia, was the last.” Beel stood back then, waved to the floaters, to come on down. It was getting dark and their bright lights were all they had for lighting to see by. He stood, well away. Beel was a happy man. Only three weeks ago, he had gone to Scotland, for the raising of a previous load of boxes. They were similarly hidden, in the Scottish highlands, near where his ancestors had come from. Those weeks had been fruitful, but these were the key, being the last. Now, they could examine what all the tablets meant, as a collective overall whole.

Ψ

Iraq war, and invasion by America and allies. Of the ten thousand tablets, which were stolen from the museum, six hundred were recovered. Witnesses have been reported, as saying that those raiding the museum arrived in trucks, they were European looking, in dark uniforms, with soldiers in allied uniforms, protecting those doing the looting.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 377 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 9

CONFESSION

Jaron was watching, as the two light sources approached. The greener source took on its solid form again. The more purple light, the one identified as Amada, remained in the room for a few seconds, and then left. Grason looked at Jaron. “You need an explanation. Amanda, are you….?” A voice came, out from the air, from nowhere. It was Amanda. It sounded stronger and surer. “Very well, Captain. It’s time for me, to tell you about who I am.” Jaron nodded. “I already worked out, why you’re here, and I admire that.” “You mean, me being the same life-force, as whom you defeated, who you used to know, as Centrecom?” Jaron nodded. “Yes. That is obvious now, but who are you really, Amanda?” Amanda sighed. “Perhaps I should explain who Grason and I, both are. He is, for a start, the same as I am. He is from the other side, beyond the physical universe, where there is life only, without time. His job here, has been to wait for me. He knew that I would return. It isn’t only in the religious scriptures all through Earth, but we are in The Early

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 378 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Works, The Way and other galactic historical recordings.” Jaron was standing looking, out over the water. “So, you, like me, want something, which can take you back, to undo those things, which you did, correct?” He turned and looked, towards the center of the room. Amanda’s light reappeared there. “Yes Jaron. That’s what I seek. I only hope you can still be my Captain, with what you know, of who I am, and what I’ve done. I need a Captain. I’m still bound by the oath of rules, which I swore by, to be allowed into the physical universe.” Jaron nodded. “We are still a linked pair, Amanda. I gave an oath to you, too, when we bonded. Nothing has jeopardized that oath. We are still the same life, who took the oath together. Neither of us has died. We remain; with the same purpose. My purpose has not differed. Neither has yours. So, what do you propose we do next?” The light of Amanda grew in intensity. “I need the computer, which Centercom was operating, out from. You were correct in that it was a program, but I wasn’t a program. I was badly influenced by a corrupted program. It’s the same way, which you humans are corrupted; by the mind, of the body you’re running. I’m not making excuses. It’s just a fact. Having that program, the hard wiring, and fixing both, we can go back into the past, and change what we did.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 379 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron turned to Grason. “Is that not dangerous, her taking the same program, which originally created the trouble? Would it not be better for her, to just start afresh?” Grason laughed. “Those were my very words, I think.” He moved over to both Jaron and Amanda. “I think the truth is that all life wants to atone, for what it has done, not just make it better. The magnitude, of what happened with Amanda is … I can’t describe the damage, and destruction, to life. It affected those on the other side, significantly.” Jaron looked over and the light of Amanda grew less, as though ashamed. Grason continued. “That’s why I’m here, in this bodily form. We do take bodily form sometimes, you know, our kind.” Jaron half laughed. “Yes, I saw pictures, in the early texts about your kind, on Earth. You had wings, if that was you.” Grason smiled. “That was the only way they could illustrate us, being able to raise ourselves, off the ground. You can do that, too. I know. The point being, we are a life form, no different to you, other than one major aspect. That is our volume. I am the same proportion larger than you, as you are compared to Kuro. Kuro exhibits all the qualities of life, and can experience pain, affection, contempt, humor, jealousy, and understanding. She is life. However, she is small. Moreover, you’re bigger, much bigger, and you can understand her. Amanda

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 380 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

and our kind, are that same leap; but upward and larger, again. That’s all. We make mistakes, like you do, can get jealous, grieve the loss of someone close, and see humor, where it’s funny.” Jaron looked out, over the water. “Then, what she wants to do, is wire in that same computer, but your job is to remove the harm before she accesses it.” Grason looked out, over the water with him. “Yes, and if she is successful, you will be able to travel back with your body to help your friends, and she will be able to change her destiny, from some point past.” Jaron turned to Grason. “What about you?” Grason laughed. “I just go back, to where I came from.” “What will happen, here?” asked Jaron, as he looked out over the sea and plains, to the side. “If she fixes the past, it will be repaired, and this will be full of life.” “However, if she doesn’t?” Jaron asked. “Will she be worse, and destroy more?” “Precisely so, Jaron. That’s why you’re her Captain, and why I’m here. If she gets worse, you will have to kill her. You’re the only one, who can do that. You did it before, and have proven yourself capable to us. Shall we start?” Jaron turned to Amanda, and her image of light, was very low. Jaron was aware of the moisture in his eyes. He had been chosen, because he could kill

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 381 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

those, whom he loved. He stood looking, out over the water. Was he ready for this? Please, pleaded Amanda. Jaron thought of Amanda, then he thought of Anki, and then of Amy. It returned to him: the pain, and the hurt. He doubted that he could kill again, let alone who he loved. He was about to say that he couldn’t, and the light changed its wave length, and got smaller. Please Jaron, I am already dying. I have far less power, than before. That is what happens if you hurt others. You lose. If you kill me, it won’t be death; it will be liberation, from harming again. You won’t lose, Captain. I beg you, Captain. Please…. Please, help me, as our oath says. As Jaron turned away, he recalled the oath he took, as a captain; to come to the aid of his ship, and never let her suffer distress. “Tell me about the Talkron, do we still defeat them? They are the source; are they not?” Grason nodded, looking out over the water, with Jaron. “They are the source, but not the sole source. I believe Amanda has referred to what she calls volunteers, or othersiders. Renegades would be a better term. They are the source of evil, behind the Talkron. They trace back, to our own kind.” Grason didn’t stop. “A long time back, some of our own kind, rebelled, and took to opposing us, and they are the real source, and it is they, who we are really battling. You must battle the Talkron, and you

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 382 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

will. Understand there is a source behind them, and that’s who Amanda and I are here for.” Jaron did understand. “Then, why does she have to go back?” Grason nodded. “Amanda used to be the ultimate, in our society. She was the second most important, who there was. She wasn’t as all- powerful, as the one who leads, but she had power. She was certainly the most powerful on Sequetus, over those thousands of years. However, doing what she did with Six Worlds, that cost her, her power, and she lost trust. We need her back, but she must atone her past, regardless of the higher risk. Once done and accepted back into power, I believe that we can stop the Talkron othersiders.” Jaron understood. He smiled at Amanda. “Well Amanda, you wanted to be here, again, and here we both are. Are you ready? I brought you here; for this.” Amanda brightened. “Yes, Captain. Thank you, Captain. I know where we must go, Captain.” Jaron looked at the light source, and it enveloped him. He felt warm, youthful, and exuberant. He looked over, through the light, to see Grason smiling widely. “Show me an image, please Amanda,” said Jaron, laughing to his re-energized Man-o-War. A picture of a dark cavern came into view, in one of the other planetoids. Jaron nodded. “Now?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 383 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Now, came the reply. In a split second, all three of them, were in the other cavern. It was dark. Jaron waved his hand in the air, and a light appeared. Grason smiled, as he looked around. “Is he always so eager, to show himself?” he asked Amanda. “Always,” she replied, mocking her Captain. “That’s fine for you two, with all your power. Just find where all these computer components are,” said Jaron. He looked around and put his helmet on. The oxygen was low, only a few percent. He also was now weightless. “We are near the center of the planet?” Grason drifted past nodding, and indicated the far wall. “This whole room is loaded with circuitry.” Soon, Grason was pulling out drawers, from walls. Jaron looked around, and saw that the walls were lined with circuitry. Grason explained that what Amada was searching for, was the same, as what Jaron was wearing, but much bigger. They were the coils, and could be fitted, into the Man-o-War. It took several hours, and they had salvaged many armfuls, of computerized components. Jaron looked on, shaking his head as they placed them, into the ship. “I still don’t see, how all these physical universe components can help an entity, of life like you.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 384 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Grason laughed as he opened another floating container. “That, over your head, bypasses counter- commands, by inducing a harmonious refining of power, to that which you produce. It draws on the latent power, in broadmatter. The same will work, for Amanda. All the thoughts, ideas, wants and so on, which life puts into the physical universe, interferes with her. By putting similar coils around her, she will create a field, which blocks out all this additional interference. She will be the natural native power that she is, without interference, and be able to work purely on thought, alone. It will then, be only what she believes she can’t do, that will limit her. Nothing else will be able to stop her.” “That’s scary, and a bit extraordinary?” asked Jaron. “It is needed,” explained Grason. “Not scary, because you were able to stop her last time. Let us get this, into your Man-o-War.” They were soon back in the planet, loading more. With that, they began to move the component boxes into passageways, and from there, to the planet’s surface. Over the next twenty-six hours, the pair wired-up the re-invigorated Man-o-War, known as Amanda.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 385 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 10

RETURNING

The Man-o-War was brought to a state of readiness. Kuro was interested in Grason, but he wasn’t so interested in her, other than being polite, to a small level of life. Grason was standing on the bridge, having inspected the vital computer signs of the ship. “I must leave now. I believe you’ve been successful, in the installation,” said Grason. “Perhaps only time will tell. Time is a great revealer. It exposes all lies.” With that, nothing more said, Grason bowed low, and faded from view. Jaron looked over and then back to Amanda’s control panel. “Where did he go?” Nowhere, Captain. He simply resumed his former point of being, with no space or position of being. Jaron knew better, than to have asked. He nudged Kuro slightly, to the side of his chair. She didn’t want to move. He pushed her harder. She stayed fixed, in space. Jaron looked up. The chair became very cold, causing the small feelup to saunter off. Jaron touched it and sat.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 386 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ω

Yandra was startled, by an emergency message coming in. It was Akeala. “Yes?” he quickly answered. “It’s Papa, and he is back with Amanda. Look. Black Knight is turning, and moving away from Mexico, and Amanda is with him.” Akeala was excited. Yandra watched, as the screens showed the old ship beginning to pull away from Earth, but stopping again, after some minutes, at a higher orbit.

Ω

An hour later, Akeala was aboard Amanda, holding Kuro. She greeted her father. She still couldn’t get any data from him, other than he intended to somehow fix the past, whatever that meant. “No, I don’t intend to get involved, right now, with anything that you’re doing, down there. You’re all doing exactly, what is best. You must leave Amanda and I, to sort out what we’ve got to do.” Jaron smiled at her. “No, I won’t tell you what that is.” “Oh, Papa, I do hate it, when you know my thoughts, so intimately. All right, we’ll leave you to go and do; what you must. You look well. Kuro looks fine, too.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 387 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

She kissed Jaron on the cheek, and waved from the other side of the airlock, and in two minutes, her floater was drifting back, across space.

Ω

“Amanda, do you see it?” “Yes, Captain. I’ve got it. Now?” “Yes, now.” Instantly, they were on Mars. Jaron looked at the screens, and there it was. He thought: Now? Yes Captain. He was outside by the obelisk, which Akeala and Anki had brought to the surface, just before the raid by the Talkron. Jaron was standing in front of it, now. Jaron put his hand on its surface. Amanda instantly felt, through the glove into the material. “It isn’t from this system. It’s a metal, unknown in this galaxy. That’s why there is no oxidation, or wear. I can’t see through; into it.” Jaron put his hand closer. “I can. I can feel the molecules. Follow my point of attention, Amanda.” Jaron looked deeply, into the molecular structure. He could see the atoms, and the agreement they had, with their maker. Jaron let his mental ability drift, with the metal atoms. He could feel them. He let himself drift away, yearning to go back, to where they came from, to help them return home. He let his attention go,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 388 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

all around it; feeling the direction, which the atoms would like most to go. He felt their yearning, to be amongst their own kind. He let himself be pulled into them, and their desire, to be home. He then felt a great attraction to the metal, a desire to be the metal, to make it part, of himself. He felt that he was the obelisk, and wanted to go home.

The obelisk on Mars

He looked around, saw the direction, and looked through the planet, to the other side, down past the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 389 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

outer limits of the Santonia Galaxy, to way beyond. His attention went out to far distant space, and his arm came up, and pointed. He had it, the direction, and he looked down and outward and felt Amanda, there with him. He brought himself, back to the present, back out from the obelisk, out from the atoms. He looked around. “Did you get it, Amanda?” “Yes, Captain. I know where it was made, what planet; what system, and what section of what galaxy. I have it,” she said exuberantly. “Is that how they tracked it here?” he asked. “Yes, Captain. They put it there, or someone else did, and ever since, they have been able to track it. It’s exactly, as you thought.” Amanda repositioned herself. “What do you wish to do with it, Captain? It’s still a tracking beacon. It’s Talkron. It’s how they found the giant race. My guess is, that the giants took it with them, and the Talkron somehow followed them here, with it. Perhaps it was a gift?” “Hmm. I think that we need to be rid; of it. Can we manufacture another, in the exact same space and rearrange the atoms and harmonies and broadmatter, and all the agreements, so the original is no longer there?” “It’s the only way, Captain. Are you ready?” Jaron nodded and put his hand on the obelisk. He penetrated into the metal, its shape, and began

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 390 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

to imagine creating the metal and form. He felt Amanda, joining him. Together, they imagined themselves forging the metal, and the time to make it. They felt their minds, creating the atoms, the energies, the bonds, and the agreements of the metal, which made up the obelisk. As the two agreements met, the old and the new, they began to push at each other, like they were competing for the exact same space, same time, same force, same energy. Then like two waves hitting each other, at the exact same instant, the agreements of the obelisk started to break down, and in less than one more second, the obelisk was no longer there. Instead of two obelisks, there was now none. Jaron stood back. He looked down, at the hole in the ground, as the sand started to fall: back in. He stepped away. The obelisk was gone.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 391 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 11

VENUS SIDE

Yandra stood, watching the screen while drinking hot kalo. His generals stood with him. He turned and put the cup down. “This is the third month, and we’ve little to show. We need to change what we are doing, or we’ll be here in three years, and those who left the system, will be back; with reinforcements.” Yandra looked around. “Sir,” called one of the Boguard, a Man-o-War Captain, “I think purely intelligent low-force solutions evade us. We need to use greater force.” The others, around the table, were nodding. Yandra looked towards the Cordukes. “You’re the ones, suffering the most losses, down there. Do you agree that we pull out, and use more force?” The Corduke Admiral nodded. “Yes. We are getting few gains, compared to the expenditure of personnel.” Yandra looked at the Sandrist deputy commander. “Lieutenant, what are your thoughts?” “The same, sir. There is no other solution. It’s possible we could make a threat, use enough force, to scare them and make them give in, come out and fight. However, just waiting isn’t intelligent, and

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 392 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

gives the advantage to them. They know how far away they are, from reinforcements. We do not.” Yandra nodded. He looked at his brother Tubin, who nodded. Yandra breathed deeply. “Very well. We’ll pull back. Akeala, can you get enough Man-o-Wars together, to bring in three very large asteroids, some surface busters? Perhaps the same ones, which they were threatening, to use against Earth, to stop them from returning to the moon, in their Twentieth Century?” Akeala stood up, from leaning against the wall. She quickly stood correctly. “Of course, we can have them here; in about seven days.” Yandra looked around the room. There was agreement. They all knew a one-kilometer rock would crack through the planet’s crust. It would also extinguish all life, within five thousand Ks.

Ω

Five days later, huge asteroids were being towed, into the Venus orbit range. Yandra had placed speakers down into the tunnels, telling those stationed there, exactly what was going to happen, and that the Talkron forces were welcome, to surrender. On the sixth day, the asteroids were finally stationary, over Venus. More announcements followed.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 393 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

On the seventh day, an announcement stated that in an hour, the first and smallest asteroid would impact, two hundred Ks, from the furthest underground tunnel. There was no response.

Ω

Commander Beel was back, in his destroyer. All the clay tablets had been laid out, on benches. There were 8,592, all told. The tablets covered his destroyer’s entire floors and benches, of all the spare rooms. Dianne and Charlene found themselves absorbed, by the project. After a week, the entire crew, and three other ships of the Sandrist fleet, were doing nothing but cataloguing, image taking, recording, and learning everything, about the tablets. It was exhausting, with little data was coming from them, yet. Commander Beel was not sleeping. He had become preoccupied with a fear, that the Talkron could appear any day, now. His crew was equally as worked up, as he.

Ω

The first asteroid was pushed out of its orbit, causing it to gain speed. Its trajectory was perfect. It went faster and faster, racing across the sky; blazing.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 394 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yandra stood: watching the screens. His camp were on spring-absorbing mobile floaters, secured above the Venus surface. They could evacuate, at a moment’s notice. His staff watched the asteroid-turned-missile, screaming loudly, overhead.

Asteroid turned weapon

They held on, as it then slammed into the surface. From out in space, the shockwave was being recorded, as it traveled a thousand Ks an hour, across the orange landscape. The asteroid didn’t penetrate the crust, but would cause many failures, inside the Talkron tunnels. The first tunnels were hit, and then the next, and so on, as the wave ripped through the enemy positions. Gases exploded into the atmosphere, from underground. Flames leapt up through the ground.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 395 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yandra’s own headquarters bounced and rode three pacs, into the air. The wave threw the generals and captains from their seats. They clamored back and looked at the viewscreens. They knew the enemy wouldn’t survive long, without help. Yandra then reached over, to the microphone. “All troops forward. Take the tunnels.” Quickly, the carriers, Man-o-Wars, and destroyers took to their positions. Thousands of suited ground assault troops jumped down to the surface, and in minutes, had filtered below the ground. The fighting was fierce. The enemy had been prepared, but the shocks had overwhelmed them, and the escape of air had left them vulnerable. The Federation was gaining ground. The enemy waited and the Federation troops slowed. Yandra pulled his men back, into safer positions. They had made gains. He gave the order, for the next asteroid to be brought into position. He reached for the microphone. “Hear this, those of you under the ground. In five minutes time, our troops will be withdrawing. You just had a hundred pac wide asteroid, hit the ground. This next one will be two hundred and fifty pacs wide. It will, without any doubt, leave ninety percent of you, dead. There is no question, of how much resistance the last ten percent of you alive, will give us. You won’t. Likely, all the available air, not already being released, will

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 396 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

vanish, in the first thirty seconds, after impact. The sulfuric acid will enter your breathing apparatus. Those not killed by the percussion of the impact or falling debris, will die from acid in the lungs. My troops are now beginning to pull back.” Yandra waited and gave the instruction, to withdraw his people and evacuate the planet. He showed this, on all the screens. Next, he gave the instruction to place the second asteroid into a low, decaying orbit. He showed this on the screens also. He broadcast it on all bands. He wanted the enemy to have full knowledge of what was coming. He made his next announcement. “You don’t all have to die. Upon your surrender, you will be treated with dignity. You have voice-scanning equipment and you can read my sincerity. I don’t want to kill you. However, I would rather have you dead in the next hour, than wait any longer. It’s purely your own choice, now. I believe I’ve demonstrated that I will kill you, and that I believe it necessary, if you don’t surrender.” He waited, and then added. “We’ll accept partial or whole surrender. We’ll accept surrender of small units, or whole divisions. We’ll accept the surrender of just one man. You are not criminals. You are troops, in a war zone. When the war is over, you can go home. Nevertheless, until then, you will be our prisoners. We’ve the resources, to treat you humanely. You have five minutes, no more. After

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 397 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

that, the asteroid will be on its way. You can see it now being positioned. You have five minutes, to let me know.” Yandra sat back and looked at his generals. “Sirs, I think it might be time, that we also leave the planet. This rock will impact close by. It’s designed to disrupt and kill.” The generals agreed. They stepped back and made for the door. The rock began to move, and started to gain speed. It slowly made its way, across the heavens. Yandra was about to exit, when he saw on the screen, two people clamber from the tunnels, to above the ground. Then, there was another, and another. Soon, there were twenty above the ground. Shortly, that twenty was a hundred. Yandra bounded back to the microphone. “Your men are surrendering. All above the ground will be saved. All destroyers, fire upon that asteroid. Rockets to the asteroid. Everyone in the tunnels get out. If you stay, you will die. Those out, get down. We’ll break up the asteroid, into multiple parts. It will still impact. It will still kill. Mainly, you will die if you’re underground. Impact is in two minutes. Get out!” Yandra then called on his generals. “Stay, and bring your troops down to round up this lot. There are now at least a thousand, above the ground and numbers are swelling. They will have air, for an hour. We need to pick them up fast, before they go

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 398 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

back, below, after impact. In the meantime, aim at that rock. Break it.” Yandra watched with his generals, as they gave their orders and the rock began to explode, and veer its trajectory, slightly. It exploded again, and again, and was now in four pieces. Those pieces were also exploding and starting to burn up, in the atmosphere. The rockets were of no use, after the first minute. The asteroid pieces were racing faster. Lasers were still targeting some of the larger rocks, but they became pointless eventually. Some rocks burned up, in the atmosphere. Some exploded, near the Federation headquarters. Others exploded on the far side of the tunnels, and some drove, into the mountains.

Asteroid breaking up over Venus

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 399 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The shock waves, though smaller due to the asteroid being broken up into smaller rocks, were more often. There was one, then another, and another and finally, a fourth wave, tearing through the tunnels. The earlier asteroid had already weakened the tunnels. After each explosion from the ground, the sky was lit up by flares, which flashed into open space, above the atmosphere. Yandra’s office rose and flipped, with the second wave. He and his generals were amongst the injured. They never got out. The troop carriers landed, amongst the exploding debris. Four thousand Federation troopers went onto the ground. They began to round up tens of thousands outside; barely a shot was fired, above ground. The Boguard Fronts took to the tunnels first this time, followed by Corduke Hallowmen, a tough dedicated special squad of Cordukes, which had arrived in the system, only three days before. Yandra and his leaders found refuge, in a makeshift HQ, aboard a large floater. Ferries descended, to evacuate the surrendering Talkron troops. The only trouble, was as expected, no real Talkron were amongst them.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 400 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 12

HALLOWMEN

Reen Ballo had been a Hallowman for three years. The unit had been initiated by the Master Templar, under tight security. It was overseen by an office of the founding-Cordellos. The founding-Cordellos were those five original Cordello planets, which had started the Temple, in Jilta. Reen was now in the tunnel. This is why he had been trained. His squad of men and women had his same purpose, to unite life and move it forward, in harmony. Their beliefs were the same as all Templars, with the exception, that they knew how to make life get on with its original purpose. In this instance, their job was to find tormented life, and help it move on; help it unfix itself from the torment it was suffering, in the physical universe. Often, life manifested itself, without a body, inhabiting places where it had once died, a tormented death. The Hallowmen’s task was to help such trapped life, and allow it to move on. Reen looked towards his second in command, and the other deputy by his side. They had all been briefed. He looked back and glanced at the ten Hallowmen, behind him. Their job wasn’t simple this time, not that it ever really was.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 401 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The ground began to shake. Reen looked at his second, again. “Scared?” he asked. His second held her instruments up. “Absolutely.” “Have you got anything? “Yes, a lot of it. Masses of it, and it’s starting to move around. The readings show a lot of disturbance.” The second’s name was Yeenol, and she was from Jilta. In her hand, was an instrument that was able to interpret the proximity and volume of life. What it was measuring, was the interruption of the dissipation of energy, between two separate points in the instrument, which were in a vacuum and working, only in broadmatter. As the broadmatter was disrupted, the flow of energy waves lessened. This was measurable, in photon loss. Life slowed down and diverted photons in a vacuum, if it was in close proximity to broadmatter. Reen was lying flat on the ground, like the rest of his unit. Their job was to work out what was down there, its quantity and what was its purpose. The Templars suspected that what was happening in Sequetus, was happening in other populated areas, in the Santonia Galaxy. Their job was to ascertain the risk, to the rest of the galaxy. Was Sequetus just the exposed tip, of what the Talkron had been doing? Yeenol looked over at two of her other staff, and they nodded behind their visors. They were getting the readings; as well. It was getting closer. These

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 402 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

staff were to send back recordings to their ships, which in turn would relay their findings; to the Master Templar. Once a correct evaluation had been made, then, countermeasures could be worked out. To date, several hot spots had been found. Sequetus was the worst and most pronounced. The ground erupted, again. It was another shock wave. The floors lifted up an entire pac and cracked. The Hallowmen fell back, against the walls and then onto the floor. “Check your suits for leaks, check visors!” Reen called, to his squad. There was no damage reported, however. They looked ahead and it was black. Yeenol looked at her instruments. “The reading is high, and now getting higher. It’s big, whatever is down there.” “How big?” asked Reen. “Planetary big, like a whole population.” Yeenol looked over, half excited. Reen swallowed. He was quietly scared. He motioned, for the squad to go forward. They advanced. Reen stopped on one knee, and held up his hand. He was fully suited and had his helmet firmly on. He shook his head. Yeenol turned to him, looking down. “I can hear it, too, like a hive of bees, and it’s getting louder. It’s showing as spikes, on my instruments.” Reen swallowed. He looked back and the expectant faces behind, were watching. They would

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 403 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

follow him, as that was their training. He stared forward. “What are we going to encounter? What’s coming?” Yeenol shook her head. “I’ve no idea. It depends on what was done to the life forms, they have captured here, and how much volume of life, we find.” She held her instruments up, turned down their volume, and looked into the blackness, of the tunnel. Reen shook his head. The noise was no longer a hum. It was a growing intensity, of unpleasant resonating ringing, in his ears. He was sweating. He looked at Yeenol. She was sweating, too. “It’s going off the dial. I … it has gone…. The instruments don’t read this. It’s too big, there’s too much volume. Maybe too angry.” “How big?” “A whole planet big.” “Thousands? Thousands of lives?” Yeenol shook her head. The worry read on her face. She threw the instruments on the ground and jumped up. “There are billions. Billions of beings, captured here, now let lose, and coming.” Reen saw the look of terror, on her face, and those of her staff. “How angry then…? Yeenol. How angry?” She looked at him, “As terrifying is it gets. Runnnn!!!!!” she screamed, as she turned and started to sprint back, past the squad, with her other staff in tow, in their baggy white suits.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 404 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Reen looked back, ahead into the tunnel. He was starting to get pictures in his mind, of hurt and pain. He started to feel pain in his hands, pain in his legs, and pain in his head. A word came to mind and that world was revenge. He saw pictures of people being killed, being torn apart. The pictures floated through the air. They were just sheets of energy on nothing, just two-dimensional energy. They increased in intensity, and got stronger. It was a heavy stream of pictures, screaming past him, of people dying, being hurt, and tortured. Millions of them streamed past and overhead. Reen stood and the pictures were now passing, through him. He looked. Another eruption overhead happened, then another. The screaming intensified in his mind, and the pictures came more and the noise grew. The heat increased and the pictures started to tear at his memory, his sanity, and then, he didn’t know where he was. The pain in his body was now unbearable. It was as if he was being cooked alive, with millions of spikes in his flesh, drawing blood. He screamed in terror and started to back away. He saw animals out there; eating him and eating all the others; the heat was melting his body and the needles were skewering his skin. Those were the pictures, and what they were telling him, as they passed through him, on their way out, of the tunnel. The noise was like metal, ripping at his eardrums, and he dropped to his knees. His nose

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 405 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

started to bleed, his suit was vibrating and his visor cracked. He looked at his hands: his gloves were deteriorating, and they blew off. His hands started to melt, his left eye ceased to work, and then the right, and finally, his suit deteriorated into bits, blowing away in the storm, of angry pictures. His flesh soon became scattered and he looked down at his body remnants, and the bodies, of his fallen comrades. He joined the other nine billion lost angry souls, of Sequetus 3, as they searched for the surface of their tomb, Sequetus 2.

Ω

Yandra was watching the screens, when he saw a central eruption point. Then gasses, exploded and a light shone out, from under the crust. Another light shone through from below, and a third and a fourth. He stared, as a torrent of bright sparks took to the sky, billions of sparks, like little pictures, and he saw them go, saw them leave the planet. He knew they were free, the tormented population of life, from Sequetus 3. They rose higher into the sky, into the clouds, spreading outer wider, but moving up. The phenomenon continued for seven minutes before it started to subside.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 406 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 13

EPILOGUE

Thirty hours, after taking the first prisoner, Venus was theirs. More bases were found, and they capitulated. The asteroid threat was too horrifying, for the Talkron troops to oppose. They announced their positions and came out, onto the surface. The Federation fleet broadcast images, of those surrendering, and soon, all pockets of resistance had ceased. The large underground base did need further flushing out. There was more than one base down there, and there was fighting for a full thirty hours, in many regions. The underground bases were interconnected, on many different levels. Nevertheless, finally, the inhabitants of the planet surrendered. Yandra toured some of the underground tunnels, as they secured them. He looked at the destruction. The tunnels, or what remained of them, had been overwhelmingly destroyed. There had been too much killing. Yandra looked at his generals and wondered; would it be this way; everywhere that they had to go to fight? Would the Talkron put up such an intense resistance; everywhere? How about in their home galaxy?

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 407 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The Federation allies started to map the tunnels, learning what they could, as they took control. While the Federation didn’t yet have a full understanding of the workings of the Venus operation, from the initial data, it appeared the planet had been occupied by the Talkron, from around 1200 AD, Earth time. Whatever it was doing, Venus had been doing it, for two thousand years, at least. Yandra stood, at one of the many open underground canyons. It stretched wide for tens of Ks. There were even floaters, inside the canyons. The canyons were natural and linked by capillary vents, now fitted with rail. They inspected Talkron troop berthing quarters. Tens of thousands had surrendered en masse; they still had to be provided for, and the best way was to use their existing premises, until better solutions could be worked out. The Federation engineers repaired the Talkron food growing algae tanks. They also found artificial water lakes, underground orchards, and other food producing facilities. Yandra marveled at the ingenuity of the recycling measures used, to keep the Venus operation completely undetectable and isolated, from outside. Yandra inspected the thousands of kinopacs of growing vats, which the Talkron had assembled, many containing half-grown bodies. This was a potential invasion army. They could grow millions, in a year. The collected tormented souls from Sequetus

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 408 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

3, would occupy the bodies, which had been stored and kept in equilibrium, with static electrical controls. Those souls were now mercifully released, and their controls destroyed, during the attack of the asteroids. Now; the question remained, what to do with the bodies, growing in the vats? Regardless of their original purpose, these bodies were still life, and life was being drawn into them, from outside of the physical universe. To turn off life support, to these half-grown bodies seemed a cruel and senseless act. The bodies had no intent to harm others. The future of these bodies would have to be a conscience decision, involving all allied groups. Commander Beel continued to decode the Sumerian tablets. It made sense, what he found, but it was slow work. None of his team had been involved in the securing of Sequetus 2. Sheril and her group of followers grew, in number, to over a thousand, in the Amazon. Akeala was horrified when her father said he was going to vanish again and did, with them finding no trace of him, or his Man-o-War.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 409 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

End of

Vigil

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 410 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 411 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Maluka Rising CHAPTER 4

Sub-Contents

Maps

Sub-chapter 1 Master Templar

Sub-chapter 2 Sheril and the Amazon

Sub-chapter 3 Jaron and Amanda

Sub-chapter 4 Garth Kwok

Sub-chapter 5 Maroen

Sub-chapter 6 Garth’s World

Sub-chapter 7 Aka

Sub-chapter 8 Trans Galactic Ship Corp

Sub-chapter 9 Palace Conversation

Sub-chapter 10 1642

Sub-chapter 11 The Estimate

Sub-chapter 12 Hallowmen

Sub-chapter 13 Malukan Defender

Sub-chapter 14 Amelia

Sub-chapter 15 Aragon

Sub-chapter 16 Epilogue

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 412 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

MAPS

Jilta Planetary Centrum

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 413 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jilta Planet

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 414 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Maluka Planet

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 415 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 1

MASTER TEMPLAR

he Master Templar sat in his stateroom, looking over the courtyard. Beyond the T Royal Palace of Jilta, to the west, were the mountains. He was waiting for his next meeting, with the Commissioner of the Hallowmen. He considered this one of his best actions, developing such a corps. They were pulling in results, otherwise unseen before. There was a knock on the door. His aide entered, a Boguard. “Sir, the Marshal Commissioner of the Hallowmen has arrived to see you.” “Show him up.” The Master Templar stood. He was a powerful older man, possessed with a reason for ensuring that his world, and many others, were protected, well into the future. It had been a year and a half since they began to expunge the remnants of the Talkron and their agents, throughout Jilta. Still he felt them though, or he believed that he felt them. He just couldn’t get the thought of them out of his mind. It was as if they were still there, unseen, planting ideas in him, and watching them grow. The Hallowman came up several flights of stairs, through the rear entry, as it was this man’s custom.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 416 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Palace Corridor

The Hallowman delighted in seeing the same Boguard each year, when he presented himself to the Master Templar. Now, he was worried. The Master Templar had survived many attacks on his life, lived through the death of Anki, his daughter, and much more. However, for all that, the Master Templar wasn’t about to survive the death, of his short-lived body. That was as inevitable as it got. One more corridor, and a flight of stairs, then, he would be there.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 417 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The Palace State Room

He entered, and stood the official pac distance, in from the doorway, with the Boguard aide behind him. The Marshal bowed low, as was the tradition. The Master Templar was standing in the room’s center, and gave a reciprocal short nod, of acknowledgement. That over with, the Hallowman entered, and looked at the old man. The Master Templar looked stronger, than ever. The Master Templar nodded. “I seem to think you approve of my health, Grant.” The Marshal smiled. They had been friends, for a long time. Marshal Grant Tagora had been the first choice, by the Master Templar, to head the new Hallowmen division. He was the most distinguished Corduke, and the only person who refused the offered position of Cordello. “Please,” the Master Templar indicated, pointing to the seat.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 418 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The Marshal moved closer, careful to make sure that the Master Templar sat down, before he did. This was the palace protocol. Grant looked around the room, as he always did. The Master Templar nodded to the aide, who closed the windows and swept the air, with his instruments. He wanted to make sure that there was no eaves dropping, beams, aimed at the building from afar. “What have you got?” The Marshal handed over a pile of papers, made of real paper, a sign of important information. Such information was difficult to copy. In a world of computers, paper and copying machines was now an ancient technology; which only the more sophisticated spies knew how to deal with. “This here, sir, is my intelligence estimate, of the situation. In essence, Sequetus 3, or planet Earth, was made toxic, deliberately. Many people knew about it, but their greed and fear stopped them, from doing anything. They thought their planet was an infinite resource, like their expanding population. However, all planets are finite. They outstripped it, and the planet life folded.” The Master Templar sat and listened. “Back then, they had a money-model as their most important standard. While they had old religious texts telling them to be careful, and that even the love of money is the root of all evil16, they

16 INFORMATION: 1 Timothy 6:10 “For the love of money is the root of all evil: which while some coveted E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 419 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

somehow ended up with a democratic system, controlled by monetary power brokers. The Talkron, in turn, controlled the brokers. The monetary people owned the media. The media convinced the people that money was the only real issue, which needed solving, and that until the people had enough, there was simply not enough money. They even gave a name to their monetary system, and called it the economy, which by implication meant not enough money. The democratic parties then pushed the concept, that the party offering the most money, should be given power. That is what happened. That was the social mechanics of Sequetus 3 - money.” “Did that cause the fall of their democracy?” asked the Master Templar. Grant sighed. “Almost so. The democratic countries fought hard, to get the world under democratic rule, that is, under their international bank cartel. It worked. It meant that the banking cartel, which owned, or had great sway in the established media, could lead the thinking of the average person. They ran the drug industry: pharmaceuticals, which helped keep the population’s intelligence down. It was the votes of the not-so- bright, which kept their democracy going. The less

after, they have erred from the faith and pierced themselves with many sorrows.” King James Bible.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 420 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

bright always had the balance of power. They decided, so the decisions were obviously flawed.” The Master Templar had heard this criticism, before, and was a firm believer in the voting process of leadership. “Though, surely, they were able to vote in people, who would reform their democracy?” Grant shook his head. “Every country was eventually established with a two party democratic system, with both parties being almost identical. The media had sway over which one they wanted, so the politicians did, as the media lobbied. This in turn, was what the banking industry wanted, and that in turn, was what the agents of the Talkron were pushing for. Understand, that the average person on Earth wasn’t very intelligent, and so long as the democratic forces were able to promise wealth and prosperity, they ruled.” “Did it change under Lorde Hymondy?” asked the Master Templar. The Marshal nodded. “It did, for a short time. He too, was hamstrung; Lorde Hymondy needed to keep a public relations profile. He had lost his original power base from here in Jilta, and being only the administrator of Earth, placed great pressure on him, to agree to what the locals wanted.” The Master Templar nodded. “I understand that pressure, here. So when did the planet turn? I can see indications here, that we in Jilta are being pushed, to develop similar ways. What were the critical points along the way, which made large

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 421 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

differences? When could they have turned back, and didn’t, because of some kind of intervention?” asked the Master Templar. He was genuinely concerned. Grant nodded. “There was a time, when Hymondy pushed for radical reforms on the planet. However, he had by then, lost his seat of power of Jilta. He pushed to get Earth cleaned up, but it didn’t work. The media told the populace that he wasn’t thinking of Earth’s interests. There were seventeen attempts on his life, back then.” The Master Templar stood and walked around the room. “Did he not work out that someone was clearly against him?” “He did. Nevertheless, he lacked Goren Torren, our Lorde of Wisdom. He didn’t have the Independent, and as a result, he couldn’t get the correct why, on what was happening, or who was attacking him. That, in turn, led him to withdraw his programs, and try to fight them, at their own game. He couldn’t dictate what to do, or how to run the planet. He had an open rebellion, at one point, and he erred on the side of being humane. He wouldn’t crush those opposing him, with arms. He couldn’t, as he wasn’t from Earth.” The Master Templar poured Kalo. “Marshal?” “Thank you, sir. No sweetener.” An aide handed Grant, his cup. He continued. “There was a critical moment, when the planet was obviously running short on oxygen. That was when it was exposed, that the number of oxygen generating

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 422 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

trees, plants and plankton had been reduced by two thirds, while the machines and ways of using oxygen, had increased twenty fold. That was during their year, of 2035. Many governments tried to change the situation. None did more than cry about it, though. The democratic process is that, it only needs a majority to agree to do nothing, and nothing is done. This has been the cause of Earth’s ruin, since their first empires.” The Master Templar brightened up. “I saw an educational program about that. There was one city, called Rome. I know. In Rome, to get power, the politicians would give away corn and games to the masses, and in doing so, become elected.” Grant nodded. “Correct, and it was that way on Earth, until its demise.” “That’s until they ran out of air.” “Correct, my Lorde. In addition, when they had crossed the line, and gone too far down that road, to return, it was impossible to pull back, without catastrophic effects. Some wild schemers called for a culling, of ninety percent of the population. Others called for mandatory sterilization of all people over twenty-two years old. Some tried to prohibit mechanical transport to every second week. Some simply wanted to overthrow industry. In all, they were doomed to fail, as none received majority agreement.” “Correct. I read about it,” explained the Master Templar. “Shall we move outside?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 423 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The Hallowman looked around, and out to the mountains, straining to see, if anyone out there could observe him. “It’s safe,” explained the Master Templar. The aide opposite nodded to him. They moved, and made their way, to the outside courtyard. As they moved Grant spoke of how some of the crazier schemes to solve the planet were really the work of the Talkron, to make the more rational schemes seem ridiculous. He gave the example of the Rationale Party, as it was called. It was established in most democracies. They were secretly funded by the banks, and promoted that people should be forbidden to spend and carry out financial transactions every second day, and thus supposedly cut industrial waste and pollution by half. Of course it was nonsense, and most people knew it. However, it enabled these crackpot ideas to be lumped together by the media, with intelligent solutions, and for anyone who was concerned with the obvious deadline of planet Earth to be labeled, a crackpot. “It was a clever subversion.” “Tell me more,” requested the Master Templar. Grant moved closer to him, and they walked between some trees, as three Boguard aides trailed, behind. Grant had been told, not to worry about them, but that wasn’t his way. He always worried. He said that was his job to. Grant looked around. “Sir, there are similarities to here, and many of the planets are populated by

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 424 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

us, short-lifers. I have information here, that our exodus, out from Earth, is possibly part of an earlier attempt, to subvert the Federation, with short-lived bodies.” The Master Templar, himself a short-lifer, like Grant, was intrigued. “Continue, please. It’s dangerous ground for the Temple, but we must know. How is it that we got here? Was there an overall plan to do to the Federation what had been already done, to Earth?” Grant nodded and looked around. “When our races from holy Earth were evacuated, it was on humanitarian grounds. Our short-lived races were stuck on that planet, dying or forced to die, are my thoughts. By dying, I mean there were billions dying. Therefore, mankind of Earth had been given approval to migrate, to the Federation’s other planets. We went out in waves, and because of that, the economic climate, on all the Federation planets changed.” “How so?” asked the Master Templar.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 425 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

From the Royal Courtyard

“Well, sir, have a look. The long-life economies are based on endurance, saving money through hard work. There is no frantic hurry. These endurance economies have been slowly replaced, by the Earth- styled economies of borrowing. The banks and financial institutions that we have now, didn’t exist until short-lifers settled here. Before we came, banks were nothing of importance. They were just a business where you placed saved money and valuables, for safekeeping. They were relatively unimportant. Now, as lending institutions, they have power over all who borrow.” The Master Templar stopped walking. “We have rid ourselves of the Imperial Federation Warp Drive Bank. It’s now a relic. As of a year ago, the government of Jilta appropriated it. So, how does that fit in?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 426 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Grant nodded. “You have power. You’re not democratic. You’re theocratic, but benign. So, therefore, you’re tolerated by the people, and this newer styled democratic government can’t challenge you or the Temple… yet.” The Master Templar looked at the Marshal. Grant continued. “Sir, I believe that if the banks had the power, and they had the media, similar to what they had on Earth, they would do to you what they did to every rising religious institution there. They would make it ungodly to belong to.” The Master Templar looked at Grant. He then looked over to a flower. “Do you think I could be tossed, thrown out?” Grant laughed. “Every few years they try, and you outsmart them. Yet, that’s the illusion of time, right? Nothing good lasts, they say; not even a Master Templar.” The Master Templar looked up and nodded slowly, while holding a rare flower and smelling it, before letting go. “A rose,” he said. Grant deeply breathed the air. He almost smiled. He had spoken much to the Master Templar in the past, about the Master Templar’s passion for Jilta to be a true democratic institution. Nothing would sway the Master Templar from it. He always would simply say that it was up to good-minded people and groups, to better the education of the not so bright, and raise them, so they could make good decisions.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 427 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Grant looked at the Master Templar, who was smiling at him now. “I think it’s time for me to head back to Earth, sir. I need to get more data again, before anyone gets the idea of closing our investigators down. I have fifty Hallowmen on that planet now, and they are still searching for clues, as to what went on, and what went wrong, there.” The Master Templar nodded and looked back to his palace. “Please take me back, Grant. I’m a long way from inside, now.” Grant nodded and held his old friend’s arm, and slowly guided them back, along the winding path. “One last question, Grant,” said the Master Templar. “What did the governments of Earth do, when it was obvious their climate change was going to affect the planet, so dramatically?” Grant stopped for a moment. “In the United States they built prisons. This period in their history, was also after their so-called terrorist scares, at the turn of the new millennium. It was also after the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 428 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Kyoto Accords17, to which that country said they couldn’t adhere. However, in essence, they built prisons, tightened laws, so that if the population got too out-of-control, they could swiftly imprison two million people.” The Master Templar looked up. “That was a lot of people. What did that nation’s allies do?” he asked. “They did the same, and the funny part was, the people didn’t even know their nations were passing laws, stripping the population of their freedoms, so that if they ever woke up to it, they would be locked away.”18 “Was it the Talkron?” asked the Master Templar.

17 INFORMATION: Kyoto Accords: Kyoto is an inland city in Japan, the historic seat of the Emperor of Japan. In 1997 governments met from around the world to decide what to do about the rapid warming of the planet and impending climate change. The accords drawn up were known as the Kyoto Accords. The nation that stood out most as objecting the accords was the USA, stating the accords were weighted against industrial countries, and not enough against developing countries. As a result the accords failed to reach a consensus, and no action resulted by governments to curtail the impending climate change of Earth.

18 INFORMATION: Planetary Mass Prisons of Earth: By 2010 Earth had many unmanned prisons. In Australia and its territories they were mostly out in the oceans and inland in its deserts. America had them scattered throughout.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 429 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The Marshal shrugged. “I’m not really sure, but that’s how it happened.” The Master Templar nodded. They were now back, inside the stateroom. “Then, you need to go back there, find out what was happening, and why the planet didn’t avert a disaster, which was so obvious. I believe that the Kyoto Accords were the first major attempt, before intervention, to stop the catastrophe. It failed. I want to know why, and what happened. I want to know if there are any similarities to our worlds, and I want to know what the solution is. I intend to keep power. However, if I fail, I have a successor, but that successor isn’t ready yet.” Marshal Grant Tagora knew when his meeting had finished. It had been exactly one hour, since he had arrived. He bowed low, and stepped backwards, towards the door. He slowly turned, nodded to the Boguard present, and started to leave. “Grant,” called the Master Templar. “Yes, sir?” “The Temple, the House of Torren, and I, personally, all owe you an enormous debt. We will never be able to repay it. I just want you to know, that you’re absolutely vital, to the cause.” The Marshal stopped, and smiled at his old friend. “Master Templar – Elysis Morander, I remember when they used to call you The Fox, when you were young, before you took this office. Both you and I are a pair, Elysis.” The Marshal raised his

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 430 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

hand, in the form of a casual salute. “Until we meet again, and when I bring you the conclusion of the estimate, which I have been promising you.” The Marshal then assumed a formal stance, bowed deeply again, turned and promptly strode out. The Master Templar chuckled to himself, about having been reminded, of his earlier days. She smiled. The Fox was a short story given by Goren Torren during one of his staged events on Earth. He sat down in his large sofa, and looked out, of the window thinking about the past. He signaled one of the Boguard aides. “Sir?” “Can you get Captain Macrod Curr for me?” asked the Master Templar.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 431 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 2

SHERIL AND THE AMAZON

Sheril looked out over the small riverbank, to the other side. “Who can hear what the trees are saying?” she asked her small class. Megalin raised her hand. “Miss, I know.” Sheril nodded. “Yes, you’re tuned into the trees. I can tell. I can hear them; whispering to you. They tell you, that they like the rain.” Megalin stepped back, and looked at the trees, on the other side. They were so big. She looked at Sheril. “That’s what they are saying. How did….” Sheril nodded. “I can hear you, and I hear the trees. They are alive; they have thoughts, like you. They also have feelings and emotions like all life does.” Megalin looked at Sheril, as if she was an old time goddess. “You know.” “Yes, Megalin. I know, and so do you. Now, who else?” Sheril asked, as she looked around the rest of the group. A young boy put up his hand and said, “The fish say that they are hungry.” The other children laughed.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 432 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Sheril looked at the boy and nodded. “They do, too. What about the trees, on the other side of the river Boni, can you hear them?”

Trees

Boni was only seven years. He put his hand to his head and stared. “Miss, they tell me that they are in pain.” Boni started to feel a tear, pooling in his eye, and he tried to look away. Sheril walked over to him, knelt down and put her hand on his shoulder. “You’re very awake, as a

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 433 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

spirit guide, Boni. Tell me more, about their pain. I want to know,” she said, with understanding. Boni looked around at the others, and Sheril put her hand up, and said in mind talk: The first person, who laughs, will go swimming with the hungry fish. There was silence. Boni half smiled and wiped his eye, and looked across the river. He could feel the trees. Sheril felt with him, and she helped him feel, what the trees were saying. “They can’t breathe, Miss. They are choking. They are in a lot of pain, and….” Boni started to cry. Sheril sat right down, on the sand next to him. She looked at the young boy, face to face. “You can feel something, which I can’t. This is important, Boni. You are getting a message, which I do not get. You have an extra gift. I must know more, please. Tell me: what do they have to say?” Boni looked at her, and then across the river. He looked up in the air, and then to the ground. He walked over, to a small plant, nearby. He picked off one of its leaves. “The tree said that I could give this, to you. Look inside, Miss. Can’t you see it?” Sheryl tried to see, what was there. She saw the leaf, some veins and some life. She saw the aura, and the now diminishing life of the leaf. She shook her head. “Tell me. I can’t see it.” As Boni held the leaf in both hands and stared into it; he was able to put his attention, right into the leaf.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 434 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Sheril felt the strength of his ability. She was a little envious, but very grateful that the boy had it. She saw into the leaf, following his thoughts, reading what he saw. He could feel her too, and he went deeper. He looked at the leaf, then at her, and then back at the leaf, and then at her. Sheril gave a gasp, as though she had been pricked, with a pin. It hurt, but on a psychic level. She looked at Boni, searching for an answer. He nodded. “That is happening to all the life of the world, Miss. All the trees are experiencing this. They are under some attack, and it isn’t from the physical world. They are being attacked, and hurt, in another world, on another level. They get hurt and hurt and hurt, so much so, that they can’t stay. They leave.” Sheril dismissed the others. She took Boni to the side of the bank. Sheril permitted Megalin to stay and observe. Sheril was quiet. She sat, looking out over the water to the tall trees. She looked at them. They were thinner than what she remembered, as a child. She had thought the cause was pollution; and had never suspected that the trees were under some attack, from inside their own field, of life-force. Sheril looked at the leaf, and imbued it, with her own life. She cupped it in her hands, as if in a cup of water. The leaf came back to life again. She then withdrew her imbuement of life, and watched the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 435 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

cells of the leaf. Slowly, they died. She could see them. They were being attacked; each cell, one after the other was being punctured, causing all life, to leave the cells. She looked over to Boni, and asked, “Are my pictures right? Am I seeing correctly?” The young boy said, “Of course, yes, Miss.” Sheril smiled. “Boni, really, tell me if I’m wrong. I’m not as good, as you are. Do I see correctly?” Boni looked at her and then at the leaf, and then at her. “Yes, Miss. The life of the tree is being attacked by another, a long way, from here.” Sheril put her hand down, and placed the leaf in a pool of water. “How?” she asked. Boni shook his head. “I can only see. I don’t know how, or why. I can only see.” Sheril sighed. She wanted to know. “Miss,” said Megalin, “I know.” Sheril looked at her, with surprise.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 436 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 3

JARON AND AMANDA

“Captain?” asked Amanda. “Yes, Amanda?” “Do you know where we are?” Amanda asked. “No, Amanda. I just know that we decided we would step through the time frames, of the universe.” Jaron answered, as he looked around, feeling bewildered. He stared at his hand. It was translucent. He glanced at his feet, and he could just see the ground, through them. He looked out and away, and saw some trees. They were very clear, rustling in the wind. He looked around at the field beyond, then the clouds. He looked at his hands again. He could see the ground through them too. He clasped them together, to make sure he could feel his hands. He put his hand onto the ground, and he could feel that too. He saw a tree. He liked the texture of its bark. It was fifty meters away. Instantly, he was there, in front of it. He hadn’t even decided to move there. He looked at his hands again, and then placed them, up against the tree. He could feel it. He pushed hard against the bark, and his hands slowly went into the tree. He quickly withdrew them out. “Amanda, what … where are we?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 437 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Sequetus 3, Captain,” answered Amanda. “You’re on Earth. You can’t recall what happened?” Jaron shook his head, pushing his hand curiously through a tree trunk, and looking at it, on the other side. He looked around and realized he couldn’t see Amanda. She appeared before him, as a translucent wavering light. Jaron stood back and thought, Amanda? Yes, Captain. Jaron looked over at a small pond; he then walked to it. He saw the clouds in its reflection, and then his own reflection. He was wearing his white shocksuit, and his golden cap. He heard a thundering noise behind him, and a scream. He turned quickly, and there were horses, bearing down upon him. He was still too shocked to move. They were pulling a carriage. Jaron had no idea what they were, but was thinking back, to his youth. Maybe he knew about the uses of horses. Moreover, the driver sitting on the carriage saw him. Half out of terror, and the other of fear, he whipped the horses, as they were almost upon Jaron. The horses saw him, and began to rear and scream, but the duress of the whip thrust them forward. Jaron held his arm up, to protect his face. The horses and carriage raced on and through him, and out, the other side. The carriage driver looked back at him, wide-eyed in fright, and shook the reigns, to push the horses even more, even faster.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 438 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron waved the dust from around his face. It made no difference. The wind blew it away. He looked out to the mountains. The air was clear and clean. There were trees and grasses, and the air smelled rich to his nostrils. He looked for Amanda, and she appeared again, as a small light in front of him. Jaron asked, “Tell me the truth. Am I dead, Amanda?” Amanda laughed. “What is death? If you mean, are you a life-force, and you have no body, then yes, that’s true. However, if you mean that you are bodiless, no, that isn’t true. You do.” Jaron thought he might have heard her softly laughing. He waved away an insect that was now buzzing around him, as though trying to work out, how to feed off from him. He went to brush it away and his hand appeared on its other side, without touching the insect. “Am I a ghost?” The light of Amanda twinkled, in front of him. “In a fashion, perhaps, but not really.” “All right, Amanda. Please tell me what happened, and where we are, please.” Amanda sighed. Here is what occurred.

Ω

A few minutes before, Amanda was looking down at Earth. “Captain, it’s time to go.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 439 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Where? Down there?” “Yes, Captain. That’s a start, but it isn’t all. I believe, what you wanted, will allow us to alter that, what we perceive. You won’t be physically there.” Jaron nodded. “Tell me, what do you have in mind?” “Very well Captain. It is like this. The universe moves forward, in a series of present time flashes. We call them nows, that span a series of eighteen universes a second. You actually don’t move in this universe; you only perceive movement. You alter position; every eighteenth of a second, and your mind tells you that you’re moving by making the necessary computation. You don’t move. You change from one position in one universe, instantly to the next position in the following universe. You appear to be moving, in a single universe. That, however, is an illusion. You’re doing, what we call the now sequence, from one universe frame, to the next. All life in the physical universe does this. It’s an enormous agreement and series of computations, made by all life; that are almost too complex, to understand.” “Hmm….” was all Jaron could say. Amanda continued. “You experimented in the Boguard of moving your attention from now, to back in time, right?” Jaron nodded. “Yes.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 440 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Well, what that was, was you sending back a mental machine into the past, and looking at the past universes, and experiencing them again.” “That description is simply memory,” protested Jaron. “No, it wasn’t memory. You were able to influence your thought back then, when you visited yourself. You also transmitted ideas to yourself, back then. This happened when you stopped the bullet at the United Nations building. You seemed to be there in the UN building, looking at yourself, but you weren’t. You were actually still back on Yaltipia, in the caves. However, you had a mental machine you projected to back then, in time, back to the UN building. All your attention was on, and in, that machine. However, that was only your attention, not you.” Jaron looked at his hands. During their conversation, they had left Black Knight, and were now back, on Earth. “Those aren’t your real hands. You’re creating the image of them, and very accurately.” “Where am I, then?” Amanda laughed. “Where are you, Captain?” “I’m here!” “Correct. That’s where you are, however, you have a body, back on Black Knight.” Jaron looked up. “I was there, then, now…”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 441 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amanda put them both back, aboard the ship. “Watch, now Captain. That’s your body. It’s sleeping, as such. Now, we’re on Earth.” Jaron looked up, to above the atmosphere and was able to remotely view the ship. From a distance, outside of the atmosphere, he could see Black Knight. “I have shrouded the ship, so no one will find it, not even Akeala. I have given her a second ship image, to try to get into, but she will give up, trying to enter it.” Jaron looked at his feet and saw something, which darted past. He jumped back. He looked again. “Kuro!” Amanda sighed. “That wasn’t meant to happen; she was supposed to stay up there, and not come here, like this. It’s like there is you, and a ghost of her. You can ignore her, as she isn’t sure about where she thinks she is. She will follow us, however, so please don’t distress about her.” Jaron shrugged.

Ω

Even earlier, Jaron was with Amanda, speaking over the intercom system. “I’m ready. I assume it will be similar to when I go back into the past, like back in Yaltipia.” “Hmmm,” was all Amada said.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 442 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron was excited, as he was sure that he would be able to take his body. He had it all worked out, though Amanda seemed to not be letting on too much. She had asked him to tell her, what year he wanted to visit, and she insisted that he give the first figures, which came to mind; no thinking allowed. Jaron had quickly spouted the numbers 1587. Amanda pointed out that those numbers were a date on Sequetus. She asked where, and he simply said Yoo Rup. Amanda said that was Europe. As a light appeared before him, he focused on it. He smiled. “You know Amanda; you’re very aesthetic, as that light. Jaron saw the light turn a slight shade of pink. He smiled. Ready to go, Captain? Jaron nodded. He expected somehow, to have to move, inside Amanda, and she explained: Lie your body down, Captain. It’s important. Jaron did.

Ω

Jaron remembered now. He remembered as he looked down at his body, and the room seemed to lose its solid feel. Jaron could feel his golden cap, around his temples, and he could perceive the presence of Amanda. He understood.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 443 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The very next instant, and they were in Europe. A horse team, pulling a carriage, was bearing down upon them. Jaron recalled it all now. The disorientation left him. He looked around and could sense Amanda, as light, pulsating not far from him. Is this going to be any benefit to me? asked Jaron. It’s your time, Jaron. This is the year you chose. It’s the continent you nominated. I looked into your mind, and you have pictures of nearby here, somewhere. What does that mean, Amanda? That you have pictures of here? she asked. Exactly, he answered. You tell me, she responded. Have I been here before? asked Jaron. Very funny, Captain. Before when? Before now, he responded. Before now? she asked. Jaron stopped and thought: No, before, in the future… You mean, I could be here now, elsewhere? The concept that he had been on Earth before, had only fleetingly been entertained. You’re here now. I know that. However, am I also here as…. Correct Captain. That’s what we’re here, to explore. Why are you carrying that date, in your mind? Why do you have this location, in your memory?

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 444 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron nodded while thinking. He looked down both ends of the road. “Then, if I’m following what seems to me, to be the right direction, we should follow that carriage.” The light that was Amanda disappeared. Jaron looked around, and saw more dust coming from the same track, as the previous carriage. He stepped back, into the cover of the trees. The thunder of the horses’ hooves grew louder, and the ground began to shake. He watched them go past. The driver hadn’t seen him. After they had gone, Jaron looked in their direction. “I expect we should start walking.” Walking? “Yes, it will help me think.” Jaron began to walk. He was taking a lot of effort, to watch his steps, to make sure that he appeared to be walking. He didn’t want to seem, as if he was a floating image. “So, Amanda, tell me, how do we go back in time, and how is it that I have this image of my body again?” Amanda was happy to explain. The universe moves through eighteen frames a second. With your cap helping, and with the coils and circuitry, which I possess in my ship, we’re able to tune out, and be away from the noise, of the physical universe. Noise? asked Jaron? The chatter of all the minds; I call that noise. The mental chatter from all the creations by life. Life itself chatters. This gives chaff of thought. It

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 445 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

pervades the universe as matter. It’s overwhelming to us, in our native existence, without bodies. Jaron thought about this concept. Are you trying to tell me, that the physical universe is a result of thought? Amanda didn’t answer and continued her explanation: With these coils around us, you and I tune into broadmatter. Broadmatter doesn’t influence us; greatly. We’re able to tap into broadmatter, and pull out energy, which then enables us to screen out the physical universe. If we can screen it out, and hold it out, we can go exterior to the physical universe. When that happens, we’re no longer in any of the frames, which we believe we’re meant to be in, so we’re able to select the frames, in which we want to be. Jaron said nothing but waited.

Searching through the

Myriads of Time

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 446 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

You have a lot of attention on this date, so it was easy to be drawn back to this point, in time. If you had no attention here, then it wouldn’t be so easy. However, as you want to be here, we followed that yearning, and here we are. “Didn’t I do that, in Ataran, when we were experimenting with going back, into the past?” asked Jaron. Amanda answered him. No. Your attention then, went way down through the past, to where you could see yourself, very clearly. It was more real there and then, than where you were back there; in the present. You were able to give yourself thoughts and ideas that you wouldn’t have been able to; otherwise. You were in the present on Ataran, and you sent your attention down back, into the past, and from there, linked your present time self, to your past self. Then; you gave your past self a message. That’s déjàvu Captain. That’s all déjàvu is, nothing else. Next time you experience déjàvu, Captain, look up into the future, and see yourself. You can do that, and strengthen the line and bridge of your attention into the future. Then, while you’re in the future, put your attention into the past. Jaron looked at Amanda. I’m not sure. Now I’m getting confused and dizzy. I think I understand what déjàvu is.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 447 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

I’m pleased to help, Captain. Next time that you have déjàvu, see if you can locate yourself and see what comes, from that. Jaron laughed. Will I not vanish? I thought nothing could occupy the space in the universe, and duplicate itself. No, Captain, you don’t occupy space. You’re a life-force, and don’t have physical properties. You’re not duplicating yourself. What is the difference with us, here now, then? Captain, in this instance, you’re here: now. Jaron looked up. They were crossing the brow of a hill. He saw a walled town, further on. Jaron was walking properly now. He also had the appearance of his body’s image, looking denser and more real. He continued, walking to the perimeter wall of the town. He walked a small narrow track that followed the wall. A person stepped out from the shadows, and yelled at Jaron. Jaron didn’t understand. Amanda? He thought. Yes, Captain, I will translate the thoughts, for you both. “Stop in the name of the Bishop.” A lance was thrust, in front of Jaron. Jaron balked. “Who are you?’ demanded the guard. Jaron thought. “My name is Jaron,” was the translation that went into the mind of the guard. “What do you want here?” asked the guard.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 448 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“I want to learn.” The guard looked at Jaron, in his white shocksuit. He looked at his clean-shaven face, and his shorter hair. Jaron on the other hand, was taken aback, by the repugnant smell of the guard, who hadn’t washed, for several weeks. He smelled as though he slept with animals, not humans. Jaron felt inside the man’s mind, and withdrew. The man did sleep with animals. Pigs were his bedmates. Jaron looked at the guard, as the lance was pushing harder, against Jaron’s throat. The guard’s clothes were strange, heavy wool, with a leather front piece, protecting his chest. He also had brown leather leg bands and boots. He sported a short knife, dangling on his belt. The guard called out something, which Jaron didn’t understand. Where’s my translation? thought Jaron. Sorry, he is calling for another guard. The other guard appeared; from behind a thinly planked gate. He was similarly dressed, but slept with horses, so didn’t smell as bad. Jaron somehow wondered; perhaps the horses could give them both tips on how to keep themselves clean. The small town might be better for it. The second guard took one look at Jaron, and in turn, called for another. That person shortly arrived, at the gate.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 449 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron looked around at the gate. It was four pacs high and the walls were only three pacs high. He estimated that the town likely had only a thousand people. Two children crept around, behind the guard, and Jaron could hear them speaking, in the local language. It sounded nothing like Standard, yet he thought he might have been getting a feel for it. Amanda was still translating. The first guard stood in front of Jaron, lance held out. He called to the second guard, who was now yelling to another person. This time, it was a black robed man, who came out through the gate. This robed man stepped forward, and he wasn’t scared, like the others. He walked out from beyond the gate, and circled Jaron holding a crucifix. He stepped back, to stand beside the guards. He nodded to the second guard, “Bring him inside. He is the one.” The guard barked at Jaron, which meant that he had to move inside, under the threat of the lance.

Ω

Jaron had been roughly jostled, pushed, prodded and threatened. He was concerned not to break his attention, from the image, which he was projecting of himself. He didn’t want to have the lance go through his image, as it would spoil what he was learning.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 450 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron was shoved up, inside, a stinking building. He wondered if this was where the pigs were kept. He wrinkled his nose. He saw the black robed man, standing there. He was then led inside, and the door locked behind him. They walked down a flight of stone steps, and the smell became more rank. There was almost no light. They weren’t completely underground; the very top of the room had barred outside windows, along two walls. It was a small prison, with three cells. Jaron was pushed into one of the cells. There was a young woman, in the other cell. Jaron looked at the woman. She seemed to attract him, under her grime. She stared back at him. “I know you, right? Where from?” she called. Jaron stepped away from the cell door. He looked at her hard. “If I said, when, it would be more accurate. Let us say, in the future, we meet again, and I’m from there, another place; out there. There are worlds from out there, like this. You and I maybe meet there.” The woman thought this was confusing talk. She looked at the man. His clothes seemed to shine. His hair was clean. His face was shaven. He did not smell bad. He was a rare type of person. She sat up, pulling against her chains. “Tell me again, who you are.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 451 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron looked back at her and then walked to the window. He had no chains attached. He stood on his tiptoes, and looked out. He saw the trees. He sighed, turned and smiled, looking back at her. “Are we meant to be here now, together?” she asked. Jaron looked at his memories. “You’re interesting, and that’s a very interesting question. I’m sure you don’t ask that, always.” She sat up and looked at him. “You’re not from here. You’re like…. I don’t know what. You’re from… out there.” She pointed out, through the window. She had Jaron’s attention now. He walked over to the bars separating them, curiously looking at her. She certainly looked familiar. Jaron half laughed to himself. “I knew a girl, who looked like you, and we met in a prison. It was much colder, than this then.” She strained at her chains to move closer, over to the bars. “Was that in Geneva?” Jaron was confused. He shook his head. “No, Sleebo. Where is Geneva?” She looked at him and pointed out the window. “Out there. Where is Sleebo?” Jaron smiled. “Out there, too.” The woman sat back down. “I haven’t heard of it.” She looked a bit dejected. Jaron looked at her. “I think when people are together, they were always meant to be together.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 452 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The woman looked up interested again. “Have we met before? You look familiar. I’m sure that we have met.” “No. We’re meant to meet in 1576, in Venice,” said Jaron, in all seriousness. “I have been to Venice,” suggested Amelia, not looking a bit surprised. I don’t remember you. What is your name?” Jaron looked out to the stars, and simply answered, “Bruno.” She accepted that. “Are we going to Venice?” Jaron looked over, to where Amanda would have been, if she had been visible. Well? he thought.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 453 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 4

GARTH KWOK

Garth Kwok had been a normal Malukan. He had never wanted to become better than he was, and was happy for the world to be, as it was. He was pleased to listen to state broadcast transmissions, raise his family, and die at the age of two hundred and seventy-five years old, like any other Malukan. He was a middle class worker. He knew that he hadn’t been bred, for thinking. That didn’t bother him. He was happy to be the simple cog in the machine, and not its operator. However, something happened to him. He had a daughter, who had joined the state-run troopers, and she had changed. She was no longer the gem of a girl, which he had raised. She had become an angry and hateful person, and this hate had surfaced, once she had joined Malukan Guards. Garth didn’t say much, and then one day he came home, to find his wife had been arrested. She had been charged, with inciting sedition. Garth couldn’t believe it, until he read the report, and watched the recorded visio. There was his wife and daughter, in his home, having an argument, about the standard of Malukan life. It wasn’t as if Garth, and his wife Aka were really that unhappy. They knew that after they came

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 454 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

of distinguished age19, they would be shipped to an outer planet of Maluka, where they would be allowed to live the rest of their lives, in peace and quiet. There, they would ripen in old age, until they joined their ancestors, in the beyond. Anyway, that was how it was promoted, on the Malukan state-run media. No one questioned the media. Garth was a janitor, in the building, where he lived. That was, until he found his wife had been arrested. He stood in shock, with a C-S in front of him. He had never had City Security come to his home before, and they were there waiting, when he got back, off from his shift. There they were; just standing, waiting. He showed them inside. They sat down, and pulled out the all-play20. That was when he saw, what changed his life.

19 DEFINITION: Distinguished Age: A term used in Maluka, meaning that the person was no longer contributing to the state or society. That age was generally around 220 years old. It however varied from person to person. The state recognised the person’s achievements, and was granted residence off in another world. This was how the state made room for those on Maluka, the head planet of the sector. To be allowed to reside on Maluka, one had to continually show they contributed to the state and planet, or else they would be moved to another domicile, appointed by the state. Source: Searfinders Index p. 6771.

20 DEFINITION: All-play: A portable hand held recorder that plays back a three dimensional hologram of a pre-recorded event. The image is about two hands high. Made by State All Industries Maluka. Source: Searfinders Index p. 3.998.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 455 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The recording had been made; from inside the lapel of his daughter’s guard uniform. There was his wife, arguing that the state didn’t know everything, and that the state didn’t own the people. That was what was called radical-thinking in Maluka, and considered a vestige-crime, punishable by transportation to the Far-Colonies of Maluka. Garth still recalled that day: his daughter was standing at the door, with three C-Ss, as they took his wife away. He never spoke to his daughter again, ever. He thought back about the past. He could recall when he first heard about the resistance movement, and thought that it was stupid. His life was going along, fine. He had a nice wife, and family. Garth never wanted for too much. That was what they warned about, on the state-run media, not to want too much. They warned, want was the source of all evil. He had thought that was correct. It was wanting, which created the problems in the world. People wanted too much. Many books had been written on the subject of wanting, and how it was an evil trait. The state had warned them, and now the state had found his wife guilty. She had been proven to have wanted a better world, and that was the biggest want, of all. To want something that was outside of your life’s potential, was the worst want, and it was a source of a fruitless and wasteful life of wanting.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 456 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Garth had wondered what he should do, when he saw his wife being escorted away. How should he react? Did he want her back? He did want her, but wasn’t wanting an evil crime? He was confused, and didn’t know what to do. That was when he met a very unique woman.

Planet Gogon Surface

He stared, thinking of the memory of it all, now. It had been strange. He looked out from the Gogon cave where he was now living, wondering if he was now wanting to return to Maluka.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 457 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Gogon Cave

He remembered the way it used to be, the way he used to exist. He thought that was strange now. He would work his days on the job, watch the state- run news, and listen to the great strides which Maluka had made, economically. He would also listen to the state-run challenge shows21, as they were known. He used to be a great supporter of them.

21 INFORMATION: Challenge-shows: On Maluka the state-run media promoted challenge-shows. This was where the average person could get notoriety and fame, and even money, by being part of a local group to win broadcast competitions. It was reasoned by the state that such shows gave people a feeling of belonging and self betterment, and satisfaction, and were a release for what otherwise might become anti-state attitudes. It was better to give that frustration an outlet, and a chance to win, rather than have it surface as rebel activities. Source: Searfinders Index p 4983 – Maluka – 3

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 458 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He also remembered the state-run show-tells22. These were where ordinary people like him, were invited to speak on the state-run media, and say how they could get back, to the old Malukan days of power. Ordinary people were invited, to suggest how they could one day bring back prosperity, to Maluka. He thought these were good. This wasn’t wanting, it was dreaming, explained the state, and it was fine to dream. Then, his wife was taken by the state. It seemed so unfair to him, as it was just an angry moment, between his wife and daughter. He remembered thinking: what could a small insect like him, do against an injustice, like this? He was looking out from his window that day, feeling sorry for himself, and looking at the massive buildings, opposite his. That was until the door buzzer sounded.

22 INFORMATION: Show Tells: Malukan betterment shows run by the Malukan State Broadcast Bureau. They were informal shows showing local members of the community, to the larger parts of the community. They promoted life betterment of Maluka. Source: Searfinders Index p 4888.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 459 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Maluka Prime Planetary Center

He turned, and looked at the door. He walked over and opened it. There was a woman. She seemed different. There was an intensity about her, which made him invite her in, to listen to what she had to say. She had said she was with the state-run water department. He knew that wasn’t true, as he had met plenty of those. This person was different, so, he asked her inside his apartment out of curiosity.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 460 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 5

MAROEN

Instructor Maroen was a member, of the Boguard Fronts. Garth looked at her. She wore the same kind of clothes as he did, but she seemed brighter. “The front of what?” he asked. Maroen walked, to the other side of his apartment, and looked out, from his window. He stood beside her. “Did you know you have four security cameras, watching you right now, watching you speak, with me?” Garth looked out. He couldn’t see anything. He looked at her and then outside again. She just sighed. Malukans, she thought to herself. “I see no cameras,” he said. Maroen smiled, and pointed to the opposite building. “On its seventy-fourth floor.” She pointed to another. “Next to that building, on the thirteenth floor, is another camera. There is another: over the cinema there, and one, at the top of Duds department store.” Garth looked at her. “Are you an insurgent?” he asked naively. She looked at him, smiled and nodded. “That’s correct, Garth.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 461 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Malukan City Life

“Then, you’re not really from the water department?” She shook her head. Garth was pleased that he had worked that out, beforehand. Garth thought about this a bit more, and looked out, over at the buildings. Then, it dawned on him. If that were true, then he was about to face the Outer Colonies, or be killed in the process.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 462 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He looked at her; he was about to speak, and she just nodded her head. “That’s correct. Someone, from high up, framed your wife. I will explain that. They don’t have what they wanted, yet. They have your daughter, or at least her mind. However, what they want, is you, Mister Garth Kwok. They want you. More precisely, they want your mind. You have been under suspicion for some time, and they want you.” Garth looked out, and at the people, passing below. He really was a bit confused. He looked up. “What were you doing, four years ago?” she asked him quietly. He was about to answer, when he realized he couldn’t remember four years ago. There was a bang on the door. Garth looked at Maroen and then out the window. She nodded. “Yes, they are here, because we were speaking together by your window, and now they have all the evidence, which they need, to really lock you away. You’re about to be arrested, on the vestige-crime of association. You’re associating with me, but really it’s the vestige-crime of remembering, remembering who you really are, or were.” Garth looked at her. He didn’t know what to say. “Then, who was…?” he was about to ask. He turned, to the sound of heavy thumping, on the door. There were three C-Ss outside, now trying to bash their way in.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 463 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Your daughter wasn’t your daughter. It’s time to go, Mister Garth.” With that, she placed four small caps on the corners of the window. The door behind exploded inwards. The window blew outwards. “Here!” she yelled. She threw her hand, up in the air. A rope was being shot into it, from outside. She instantly caught a small missile, with the rope attached. She wrapped it around his waist, and called, “Now, now, now!” The door behind them was crashing to the floor, and three burly C-Ss leaped in through the dust, to see Garth and Maroen being yanked outwards through the window opening. Maroen looked at Garth’s face, as he appeared half petrified, and half just a bit puzzled, as though his life had changed before, and now, this was just one more episode. The C-Ss ran to the window, and as one was about to raise his rifle, Maroen raised her finger and shook it. She looked intensely at him, and smiled. If you do, you’re dead. We have lasers trained on your faces, all of you. Be good, or be dead. The C-Ss looked at each other incredulously, and yes, there were small blue laser dots on their foreheads. They blinked, and quickly ducked down, out of sight, behind the walls. The senior of them began screaming orders, into his lapel microphone. Garth looked above, and saw their escape vehicle was a small C-S patrol car, racing away over

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 464 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

the building tops. He was about to suggest that it was illegal to impersonate the C-Ss. Maroen winked at Garth, and pulled out her gun and aimed back at the window. The C-Ss were aiming their weapons. She shot, then another, and finally a third. She put the gun back in her holster. The C-Ss fell back stunned, but not dead. Garth looked down, as he swayed, dangling precariously, above the city streets. He was moving at about two hundred kinopacs an hour, he thought. He looked up, as the vehicle above was getting closer. They were slowly being winched, aboard.

Ω

It didn’t take long for a small fleet of floaters to come charging, after them. Maroen was finally inside the vehicle in the pilot’s seat. She saw that Garth was strapped in, at the back. Her co-pilot grinned. “I just love it, Maroen. You get more destruction, per nanosecond than any woman from Yaltipia.” Maroen winked at Markoni. He was her bondmate, ever since training school. “Maybe so. Perhaps, but there was still one, who will always be greater.” Markoni didn’t need reminding. “Amy of Rambus, the Goddess of War,” he murmured, under his breath. Now that Amy had died in battle, Markoni

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 465 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

had adopted her name and image, as his unit’s patron guiding force.

Floater pursuit over Maluka PPC

“Well, she wasn’t exactly from Yaltipia, but she might have been, as her spirit has always been with us.” He yelled above the wind, roaring through their canopy. Maroen nodded. She turned and called back to Garth. “Have you ever heard of her, Garth? Amy, the Goddess of War.” Garth cringed. Gods and goddesses weren’t proper thoughts, to have in Maluka. A vestige-crime E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 466 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

of imagination, he thought. He took many breaths, breathed deeply, and cringed lower. The pursuit craft were getting closer. There were two missiles, coming their way, and so Markoni swerved. The missiles went aimlessly, towards the ground. Maroen took the controls. “Hang onto your lunch Garth, and don’t choke.” With that, she pulled the floater straight up, almost vertically, then upside down and back towards the pursuers, inverted. Then, she side swerved, and two of the pursuit craft fired at each other, in the confusion. Maroen was on her way back, into the center of Maluka Prime Planetary Center. The pursuit craft turned, but they were slower. Maroen could see three more, coming in, from out over the bay, and then another. She was pushing top speed, to the center of the sprawling mass of Maluka PPC. Maluka PPC boasted seven million people. Maroen, saw a tall building, and instead of going around it, she aimed for it. Garth reared back, as he saw the wall of steel and glass, dead ahead. The walls started to open, and their craft’s reverse thrusters engaged. It took all of three seconds, and then, their floater was on the floor of the fifth level, of the building.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 467 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Boguard Leader Maroen

“Come on. We have only seconds, Garth. Get out, or die. These C-Ss aren’t going to be taking you to court. They will kill you first, and then feed your body, to the fish in the bay.” Garth unstrapped and jumped from his seat: when he looked out, he saw that their pursuers were only a kinopac away. Maroen led. Garth hesitated and looked back, as their floater exploded.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 468 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“It’s no use to us now, Garth. Follow me.” With that, she ran down a corridor, as Markoni hauled on Garth, to hurry him. They turned into the stairwell, and ran down more steps. Garth counted the levels, until level eleven. Then, Maroen simply stopped, stood and listened. They all stopped. They could hear the footsteps of C-Ss above, in pursuit down the stairs. The C-Ss were soon shooting, in the direction of their quarry’s breathing. They threw two percussion grenades, in the general direction of Maroen, which exploded. The Boguard ducked. After the flash, they called back to the C-Ss, “You’d be foolish to follow. If you do, you will all die. The tunnels belong to us. You know that.” Maroen smiled, as she leaned back against a wall, out of sight, and looked at Garth. “I could taunt them more, but here, we leave them.” She opened a low half door, by her side. It was black inside. Lights lit up beyond the door, as she jumped in. Markoni pushed Garth, and he followed. They closed the door, behind them. They sprinted down about a hundred pacs, and came to a three-way junction. They chose the right tunnel. That led to three more branches; they took the central tunnel. Then, this crazy Boguard woman led Garth and the group, down three more sets of stairs.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 469 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Garth’s nose reeled, at the awful smell. It was raw sewerage and it seemed to get worse, the further down they went. Maroen smiled, slowly breathing. She had slowed to a walk. “All those doors are locked. They have no lights, which all turned off after us, as previously arranged.” Garth stopped. He was panting heavily. This wasn’t the normal lot, of a janitor. He looked up at the group, then down the tunnel. He began to shake his head. He was leaning forward, with his hands on his knees taking deep breaths. Markoni turned to Maroen. “It’s time, better tell him or he isn’t going anywhere. Right Mister Garth?” Garth looked at them both. “You Markoni, seem to know what I think. You, Madam Maroen aren’t who you seem. Neither of you are. What is going on? I’m not moving until I find out.” He continued panting. Markoni smiled. “Lights,” he called. The lights turned on. They were in a larger open space. “Present yourselves, please, Boguard Fronts.” Seventeen Fronts came forward, all wearing black shocksuits. Garth stepped back, looking worried. He wasn’t a fighter and these were obviously professional soldiers. “No need to worry, Garth,” explained Markoni. “They won’t hurt you. If we wanted to harm you, we

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 470 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

would simply let you go. Those above us, up there, would kill you.” Garth stood straight, looking around, and thought of this. He had caught his breath now. He looked at this group; their weapons, and how they looked. “Are you rebels? You can’t overthrow this government. It’s too big.” Markoni shook his head. “No, we’re not from this part of the galaxy.” Garth looked at him sideways. “Are you Jiltanian?” Maroen smiled “Nope. However, I have been there. I’m not from Palbo either, though I have been there, too.”

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 471 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 6

GARTH’S WORLD

Markoni looked at Garth, with a smile. He then pulled over an old crate and sat down. The other Boguard Fronts squatted, while Maroen and two others stayed on watch. Garth looked at them, and their uniforms. He then looked at Maroen, who had somehow shed her water department uniform. “Are you an invasion force?” asked Garth. “I can’t fight you, and I know I can’t escape, so you may as well tell me the truth. I could use a little of that, even if it scares the wild out of me.” Maroen half smiled, while watching him. Markoni nodded. “Very well. Unknown forces overthrew the empire of Maluka, about twelve hundred standard years ago.” He watched Garth, who gave no reaction, so he continued. “The system lost its Royal leader, then. It became a second planet to Palbo, and together, they acted in unison. They had a means of space travel, known as Warp Drives. Maluka developed its own technology, through its association with Earth. Earth was an Outer Colony of Maluka at the time.” Garth looked at him, strangely. “It was a prison planet?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 472 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Garth nodded. “Earth then, was a prison planet of sorts. I will get to that, later.” He could tell Garth was attentive, much more than his janitor personality should permit him, to be. That suited Markoni. Garth was sifting through his Malukan mental implants, and was slowly finding the real Garth, underneath. “That means of travel; Warp Drives, hurts a lot of life, when it operates. That’s where the group, to which I belong, comes in. I won’t tell you about where we come from. However, I will tell you where the group comes from, which took over your government. They are from a nearby galaxy. Not the closest galaxy, but nearby. They have a name, and that name is Talkron.” Garth more or less shrugged. The Boguard Fronts were monitoring his thought patterns. Nothing negative was coming from him. “You’re right, that there have been insurgents. We’re not they, however. We seldom get involved in local politics, or with the game, of who runs whom. However, the Talkron are different. They use a technology, known as psychronics, and they use this to alter people’s minds, to do their bidding. They use it, to stop their enemies from recalling who they are, and what they have done. It’s a kind of effective memory death. They can monitor their subjects, while they still live, but the memory is effectively dead. If their enemies physically die, they know they will lose them, and lose the opportunity to control

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 473 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

them. Thus, they prefer their enemies to be memory dead, and simply monitor them, from that point onwards.” Garth thought about this. “Is that what you are insinuating, that I’m memory dead?” Garth thought quickly about what he could remember about himself, and really, there was little. Markoni always tried to avoid telling the subject, what he thought about them, as it often turned the subject, against him. Markoni cleared his throat. “No, you are merely their enemy. What they did to you, I have no idea. However, they were monitoring you heavily, with up to ten agents allocated to you, at any one time. As their enemy, you must have been extraordinary.” Markoni bit his lip, as perhaps he may have said too much. Garth thought about that. “And my wife? I have loved her, for a long time.” He looked over at the professional soldiers, in front of him. “You’re professionals, aren’t you?” They all nodded in unison. They were following every word. “You’ve been monitoring them, while they monitored me?” They nodded. Garth thought more. He recalled the chase, the missiles, the breaking down of his door. He looked at the Boguard Fronts. “Then, who am I?” Markoni looked over at Maroen, who smiled and nodded.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 474 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Garth was following their eyes, and facial expressions. “Spill it, or I won’t cooperate.” Markoni smiled. “For a start, your apparent daughter, the woman you thought was your daughter, was an agent. She was recruited five years ago, to watch over you. She had six month’s training to learn how to act, as your daughter.” Markoni turned on the all-play, and in front of them, was a copy of Garth’s so-called daughter, learning how to mimic being Garth’s real daughter. “It’s from her files, at Palace Centrum.” Garth nodded. As he watched, he tried to recall all her birthdays. All he could remember: was the same birthday scene in his mind, being played for each birthday he recalled. He tried to recall his daughter’s birth, graduation, and nothing was there. He sighed with deep regret. “My wife Aka, is real?” he asked. Markoni smiled. “She is real, and she is your partner. She has been your partner, for fifty years at least. That’s what I have learned. You tell me, if I’m wrong.” Garth tried to recall getting married. It was only three years ago, but he had only the one image of their wedding, as though it was a cutout picture, being looked at, from different angles. He sighed. “Is she…” he tried to ask. Maroen called out. “She is alive, Garth. I have met her. That was how we learned more, about you.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 475 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Garth looked up. He couldn’t remember much about Aka, but he did know he liked her a lot, and that he had strong feelings for her. He was beginning to doubt his emotions, as to what was real, and what was implanted “That’s good. Will I meet her?” Markoni smiled. “Yes, if you want. However, she isn’t here Garth. She isn’t even on this planet.” “Which one, then?” asked Garth. Maroen stepped over. “She’s on Gogon.” Garth looked at her. “How can we get there, and back? It’s a prison planet, and heavily guarded.” Maroen smiled. “Look around yourself. Where are we, now? What did we just do? We’re in one of the most heavily defended centers of the galaxy, and, with care, we go anywhere we like.” Garth looked around. “If that’s so, how do you manage to live, down here?” Markoni smiled. “That’s our heritage. We thrive in caves and the subterranean.” Garth thought for a moment. Then he turned to them. “When will I get to see Aka? I want to.” Markoni smiled. “That was all that we wanted to hear. Follow us, Garth, and you will be there, soon. We won’t be escorting you. However, others will. We have more, to do here.”

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 476 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 7

AKA

Garth stood, looking out from the cave, remembering how it was on Maluka. Life was harder on Gogon. A gentle hand caressed his shoulder. It was Aka’s, and he wrapped his fingers tenderly, around her arm. “Do you miss Maluka?” she asked. Her voice was soothing. Garth laughed lightly. “No. I have you, and I have most of my memories, again. I’m whole, once more.” He turned to his wife. He could now recall his real children; all three of them. They were living on other planets; unaware of what their father was doing, now. He didn’t mind that. “We’d better get back down there, and work on our infrastructural government plans. If those Boguard are correct, and a new government is going to be installed, then we have only several months, to work out how to do it.” Aka looked back, outside of the cave, one last time. She then returned to the dark, closing the door behind them.

Ω

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 477 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Maroen was watching the monitors. They still didn’t have the center of where the Talkron were in Maluka, which was their second objective. Their mission was to get all potential leaders out from the planet, to form a new government. Then they had to find where the Talkron really were, and report it swiftly to Yaltipia. They had their leaders now, all of them. That hadn’t gone without a hitch, however. They could feel the Talkron minds searching for the Fronts. The Boguard were evading those minds, while at the same time trying to find and locate the Talkron.

Ω

Planet Gogon

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 478 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

A Man-o-War was approaching planet Gogon. It went into shrouded invisibility mode, and side stepped the dockside unit, in the Gogon outer orbit. Slowly, the Man-o-War went over to the night side of the planet, and waited. After three hours in darkness, the ship settled down into the atmosphere, undetected by the planet’s security systems. Gogon was an open prison, where they made use of the herded population. Although the prisoners weren’t confined to any particular area, each prisoner had a tracking beacon implanted, inside him. That beacon transmitted: the person’s position, his health, vital signs, and even what the person saw, heard and was saying23. This meant that prisoners couldn’t

23 INFORMATION: The Beacon: (Terrestrial) This technology was reportedly developed on Earth before the beginning of the twenty-first century, and reportedly first used in the Kuwait War with Iraq in the 1990s. The technology was in its infancy then. It would have progressed considerably by the time the reader comes across it in this volume. The name The Beacon is the name given in this book only, and not a code name used for its development on Earth. In carrying The Beacon the user can be unaware of its use. The Beacon can also be used as a receiver and relay messages to the nervous system whereby the subject can believe he is hearing voices and commands from someone he can’t otherwise determine the source of. The Beacon is placed inside the subject’s body, and can be in the brain, behind the spine, or a place that makes it easy to access the neuron system. Prisons are where subjects are easily obtained for experiments.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 479 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

plan an escape or rebellion without their authorities knowing. Maroen jumped from the Man-o-War, to the surface, followed by Markoni. They were being shrouded, and otherwise invisible, to standard tracking satellites. Markoni looked around. It looked desolate. Maroen was next to him. She waved back at the other four Boguard Fronts, staying inside the craft, monitoring their actions. She signaled; the vehicle lifted from the surface, and disappeared from view.

Landing on Gogon

They could see the cave, not far ahead. The map on Markoni’s visor guided them. He nodded to Maroen. “They are expecting us, I hope.” She looked around, and could see the first rays of dawn, starting to stream over the horizon. “We E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 480 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

don’t have much choice. We can’t stay out here. The shroud doesn’t work well, while we move in the daylight. Come on. We simply have to get under cover, urgently.” As they expected, there were several rebel guards, at the mouth of the cave. The shroud covered them as they walked at night, but as soon as they entered the cave, the shroud no longer operated. The guards were shocked, to see two figures materialize from nowhere, inside the cave. Markoni and Maroen smiled at the guards. Their Man-o-War was still tracking them. Maroen slowly put her weapons down, in front of her. She carefully raised her hands. Markoni did the same. A guard came forward, to take their weapons, and Markoni shook his head and said, “You’d better not do that. They are ours. We’re here, to see Garth and Aka. We have a job for them.” The guard didn’t pay much attention, but kept his gun trained, on the pair of them, as the other picked up the old receiver piece of a radio, which had been hardwired to a cable, down below. He confirmed that the cave had visitors. The guard near Markoni went to push the weapons aside from the Boguard pair, with his foot. As she did so, Markoni’s gun moved by itself, and the guard’s foot missed it. She tried again, and the gun slid away again. The guard looked at Markoni suspiciously.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 481 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Markoni shrugged, with his hands still up in the air. “It’s mine, not yours. It won’t do what you want.” “We will see,” said the guard, and she went to stamp her foot, onto the gun. Again, it moved, on its own accord, to the side and avoided her, a fourth time. By now, Maroen had lowered her hands, placing them firmly on her hips. The guard using the radio looked over at her, and Maroen just shrugged and gave him a look that indicated this silly game, wasn’t of her making. Now, the other guard was trying to jump on the weapon, and each time, she missed. Then the first guard said, with his gun drawn, “That’s enough.” With that, the second guard’s gun got too hot to handle, and started to burn her. She cried in pain. As it fell from her hand, Markoni’s gun flipped up from the ground, into his hands. He had it trained on her in an instant. The first guard’s gun had also become too hot, and been dropped as well. Markoni smiled, and then both guards’ weapons rose from the ground, and drifted into Markoni’s arms. The first guard shook his head and turned, to open the door. The second guard, a woman, looked embarrassed, as Markoni handed her, back her weapon.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 482 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

From the other side of the cave, came the sound of clapping. They all turned. It was Garth. “Markoni, you’re still impressive. It must be important, if you are here. I see that you’ve met Velma, and her partner, Telono.” The first guard bowed. “I’m always pleased to meet a talented trooper.” He bowed lower. Velma wasn’t so happy, as she was embarrassed to have looked so silly, and so she bowed, without saying anything. Markoni bowed back, but not as low. “The pleasure is mine, and when this war, that’s about to start, finishes, I’ll be glad to introduce you to this.” With the introductions out of the way, Velma and Telono left, going deeper into the cave. Markoni, Maroen, Garth and Aki descended down to the subterranean voids, now totally dedicated to rebel use. Markoni smiled, as he looked around. Garth saw that Markoni was impressed, and explained. “There are at least a thousand rebels, on this base. Being so close to Maluka, it has never been detected or suspected. Once we got our foothold here, we have been able to bring in people from right under their noses. They just haven’t suspected such a base could be here. Thus, they haven’t look for it.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 483 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“We’re self-sufficient, under the surface here; thanks to the Boguard Instructors, whom you left here, to teach us subterranean horticulture.” Maroen looked around. It was like Yaltipia, in many ways. There were water springs, lots of pedestrian traffic, and the temperature was comfortable, both for people and crop production. Markoni nodded to her thoughts. Maroen brightened when she saw the two Boguard Instructors in the distance. They waved. Welcome, thought one. Thank you. Impressive, Maroen returned the thought.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 484 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Garth smiled, and looked at the pair of them. “Thought transfer. I can see it, on your faces,” he said, with a smile. You do thought talk? asked Maroen to Garth. No, he answered. I don’t know how. Maroen laughed. Garth looked a bit bewildered, as the thoughts, which he had just received, were so clear. Maroen looked at Aka, who was watching them both. “I was showing Garth how thought transference worked, between Boguard.” I know, were Aka’s thoughts in return. Markoni butted in next. “I’ll keep it to speech, as we all agree on that. However, how did you learn to speak with thought? Who taught you?” Garth looked at Aka. “It just developed, when we two first met, and it grew, from there. As we continue to know and admire each other, it seems to get stronger. We both started to use it, without realizing, and then one day, we knew that we had it. I think that was why the Talkron tagged us, decades ago, to get us out from their way. They wanted us gone.” Aka led them all, to a smaller room. “You’ll be here only a few hours, and I’m to help you understand better, the strengths of what we have.” Maroen asked, “Do others have this ability, here?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 485 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Garth explained more. “Half this base has. Once Aka and I found we had it, we started to teach others. It doesn’t take much teaching, either.” Markoni smiled. “We know.” Aka added, “We’re not as advanced as you, but we would like to be.” Garth nodded. “That was one of the reasons, for this base. We searched for leaders on Maluka, and its outer-lying planets. We looked for people, with similar abilities. People with this ability, are the cream. They are more inclined to help others, give more of themselves, and make better judgments and decisions, for the group, which they represent. They are more honest. That’s why we want our democracy, should we get it, to contain people, who have this ability. We can teach it. We just need to have a fair system, whereby those who learn it, get more say.” Maroen didn’t say anything. This was politics, and not part of their mission brief. Garth continued anyway. “One-man-one-vote with everyone all being the same, has a flaw in it. That’s what we have been researching.” Markoni looked at Aka, and she nodded. “You’re going through, what all great societies have experienced. All people need to have a say, in the government, otherwise you get injustices, coming from the inability of the average person, to correct the system, in how it runs.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 486 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Garth continued. “That is what happened on Sequetus 3. They had one vote, one person, regardless of how talented the person was. There was no test, in their later days. In their original democratic system, developed in Greece, they had a kind of means-test, attached to the vote. That system of voting was scrapped, later, and it developed downwards, and promised the most to the least able, to be elected. Therefore, our intent here, is to raise the ability of those, who vote. We aren’t going to force everyone to vote, but if they want to, they have to show that their vote has worth.” Maroen considered this. “Have you got that system worked out, yet?” Aka sighed. “No, we haven’t. It still has flaws in it. It needs to be fair, in everyone’s estimation, where it cannot be abused, and we’re still working on it.” Markoni nodded. “All systems have flaws in them. Perhaps you need the one, which has the least flaws. Good luck, and when you find it, export it.” They were sitting at a table now, in a conference room. An aide came in, offering hot kalo.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 487 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 8

TRANS-GALACTIC SHIP CORP

“The Trans-Galactic Ship Corporation of Maluka, or Trans Galactic Ship, is the power base of the Talkron; here on Maluka. If we can take this powerful organization away, it’s like removing the nerve center, from the Talkron. Without Trans Galactic Ship the Imperial Federation Warp Drive Bank folds, here. They have no other outlet for their ship manufacturing now in the galaxy, other than here. The Temple and independent operators, under Temple and Boguard guidance, no longer operate, the way they used to. Only Trans Galactic Ship is left, manufacturing warp drives.” Garth sipped his kalo. “If we get rid of Trans Galactic Ship, will we be subject to your guidance, as you put it?” Markoni smiled. “Yes, and no. If you don’t become oppressive, we will have no interest. If you become another Talkron, then, yes. If you run your own media, or own the media through private means, as they do with Trans Galactic, and directly run the judiciary, and the police, yes. We will get involved, again. The galaxy is too small, for one group to develop, without pressure and guidance, from its neighbors.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 488 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Garth conceded this point. “Understood. What is it you propose we do here, on Maluka?” he asked, as he pointed to the map on the wall. “We’re preparing to take the Palace. We need the full occupation of all the offices, the buildings and somehow, to get the workforce on our side. We will neutralize the warp drive components, so they don’t work. The Talkron will be able to flee, but that’s all. They have their own ships, which don’t respond, to our warp drive disabling technology.” Aka looked at Maroen. “I hope that these ships don’t supernova, when taken over.” Maroen smiled while sipping her kalo. “No, they will not. I will be there right amongst them, when we do it. “The rest of the Federation has had its fleets converted. This means that the ships manufactured by the Warp Drive Bank, and thus the Talkron, are no longer operable, except through agreement.” Garth looked perplexed. Markoni put down his kalo. “Up until now, the warp drives have worked, by drawing in the very life energy unit, from outside of the physical universe. The warp drives control that life-energy, through the application of pain. The life unit inside, is trapped. What we do, is liberate the life unit, by using life units already liberated, to guide and help the trapped unit, to become free. Does that sound simple enough?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 489 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Garth looked at Aki. “No, I think that it isn’t simple, and sounds like gibberish. I don’t mean to offend.” He smiled. The room immediately went black. Garth started to rise; but a force held him. He tried to yell, but he couldn’t get his vocal cords to work. “Garth, don’t fight it. You have just deeply offended one of those lives. They inhabit our own ships, and work from agreement. Her name is Feelay. It’s alright Feelay, Garth knows that you’re there.” The lights came back on again, and the center of the room was dark, except for a small twinkling radiating light. My name is Feelay. Thank you, Captain Markoni, my Captain. Garth and Aka. I have a crash course for you, explaining what life really is. You are life, so am I. You have a body made of flesh. I have chosen the computer circuitry in this ship, up here. I can leave, any time that I want. You cannot. You are trapped by another life, and that’s the life of your body, which you are supposed to be operating. You have two minds, your own, and the mind of the body. You get those two confused. I have only my own mind, and my own will. This, friends, by ability standards, is far greater than yours. Feelay continued. If I took real human form, and a real body, I would become like you, and slowly lose my real ability. That’s because the body would

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 490 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

take over my thinking. I would become like your prisoners, outside there. I wouldn’t know the difference, between the controller’s thoughts, who is controlling the prisoner, and the prisoner: myself. Garth nodded at the white image, as it turned to yellow. I’m now going to show you something powerful. I haven’t shown it to you before, Captain. You will see it firsthand, now.

The Anatomy of Time

This is a three dimensional look, at time. It appears that time follows a uniform path, which is unalterable. Mostly, it does, but there are pockets of activity, that the universe can widen, to go down, instead of using the main path. The universe isn’t bound to the one singular path, which it’s following. The future can be changed. You see the wide opening: there? That’s where we’re headed, now.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 491 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

What we’re trying to do, is not to go down that path, as it involves the enslavement of all humankind,24 by the Talkron. We want the universe to go down these smaller side vents, we call them, from the other side, outside the physical universe, where there is no time. If we don’t, you will become slaves to your bodies, which have you trapped. You will be slaves. Eventually, all of you have to answer to the Talkron, who are inserting these prisoner type devises, into newborns, on selected planets. The prisoners are simply those, upon which they first experimented. Then, they used the devises on

24 MORE INFORMATION: REMOTE NEURAL MONITORING: (Terrestrial) If the reader wants to know more of this technology, it’s called RNM. It was developed partially in response to apparent terrorist threats. It’s reportedly being used in the USA, UK, Spain, Germany and France. Also look up the case in the USA of John St. Clair Akwel’s lawsuit. The technology is such that now there is no need for an outside agency to monitor a brain or neural ways by detaining the subject. One can become a subject by simply going on line with gaming computers, which use special caps to monitor players’ brainwaves. By using this technology it permits the user to not use a computer mouse. By using thought over the Internet one can control the outcome of a game. Companies that manufacture these devices commercially are in the USA and Japan. The user can in turn be monitored by using blue-tooth technology tuned into his thought patterns, which are singularly his, and monitor them by supercomputers (more powerful than a brain) using satellites. A subject can then be followed using GPS tracking, and his private data, such as typing of credit card numbers at banks, can become known. This technology is years old at the writing of this book.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 492 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

smaller livestock, to control the food chain. However, the intention has always been to use it, to control humanity. Now, here is your choice, Garth. You can come with us, to go down a side vent of the future, or die: trying. You have a choice. You can stay a prisoner. Perhaps one day, you will wake up, with no memory of how you had a choice. Maybe, being a prisoner, under unknown external control, could be bliss for you. You can always ask the prisoners, upstairs. They are now happy, to be there. They just don’t know that they aren’t free. That’s the difference, between them and you. So, Garth, who is better off? Are the prisoners on the surface, living their blissfully ignorant life, better off, or happier? They do as they are compelled, or are you, being free down here, in a hole, more fortunate? Garth leaned forward, as the image of time vanished, and the room returned to its normal solid look. Garth again had the feeling, of being in the present. Garth looked at his hands. He couldn’t see through them, anymore. He looked at the others. He cleared his throat. “I have met the prisoners, up there. They are less than human. Yes, they are very happy, or so they say. Nevertheless, that seems a compelled happiness. It’s as if a happy-drug drives them. If they knew the freedom, which they had lost, I’m sure they wouldn’t be saying that they are happy. Nevertheless, they don’t say

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 493 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

this, because they are controlled. They are compelled to say that they are happy. It’s that external compulsion, against which we’re rebelling.” The others looked at Garth, and he continued. “I believe happiness isn’t the issue, at all. It’s being free, free to choose. Choice is the senior ideal we must strive for. To have a choice is vital to living a happy life. It has to be.” “What do we do next, Feelay?” asked Garth. Markoni leaned over and explained each of the points, which they and the others had to follow, to make this rebellion on Maluka work. He outlined, that if it did go wrong, the city and planet could supernova, as had happened before, with other planets. However, it wasn’t expected that the Talkron would flee, leaving behind all their work, destroyed. They would want to return, with reinforcements later on, and take it back, rather than lose thousands of years of work and planning. No, they would leave with the expectation of coming back, as they did, in Sequetus. Markoni outlined the invasion, and its relative success, so far.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 494 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 9

PALACE CONVERSATION

Macrod Curr had been asked to sit, with the Master Templar. “You summoned me, sir?” The Master Templar was frail. He leaned forward, in front of Macrod Curr, and looked at his own hands. “My body is aging, fast,” he said. He smiled at Macrod Curr. “I could never summon you here, Mister Curr. More likely, it’s the other way around. We’re here: doing your bidding.” Macrod Curr sat back. “Sir, I will be very honest, as you have asked me to sit with you. I don’t subscribe, that one can order another around. One does what one does, because he believes it to be the right thing, to do. I’m here, because I want the galaxy to turn in a specific direction, to head down to what you and I would agree, is a good future. You want the same thing. We’re both men of influence and power. We’re perhaps like the fabled bears and tigers, of the Jiltanian past. Both roamed the mountains, not far from here. Both ruled in their own right. They crossed paths, but never joined forces. They are now extinct. I believe that we need to unite, rather than face extinction. That, whether you or I believe it, is what is happening. I’m not

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 495 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

even saying, there may, or may not be a higher force behind this, as there may well be. However, I willingly play my part. For me to do so, I call you sir, as you have been perhaps one of the greatest men, to occupy this palace. You’re certainly the wisest, and I mean that, with all sincerity.” The Master Templar held back a tear that was forming, and shook his head. “They are powerful words, when it’s truth. It humbles me, what you say, Macrod. I don’t have many friends. Can I count you, as one?” Macrod nodded, with a short bow. “Sir, I’m honored, and I believe that we are friends. Friends are those, who share the common cause, walk down the future path together, and want to see each other survive, so that they can meet again. We’re friends, Master Templar, regardless of titles.” The Master Templar nodded. “We both, to a degree, follow what Goren Torren taught; am I right?” Macrod nodded. The Master Templar looked away. “As regards this war with the Malukans, are we likely to win?” Macrod straightened. “Sir, it’s more an intelligence operation, and less of a war.” “We’re the aggressor’s, are we not?” asked the Master Templar. Macrod sat back and looked at the old man. “You’re worried about future history, and how they might view you?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 496 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The Master Templar simply smiled, looked and nodded, to an aide, for kalo to be poured. “No, I’m not worried how history judges me, as against how it will judge the Temple, and what is right and wrong.” Macrod nodded. “Right is what furthers the species and us all, and helps us raise ourselves to greater state, of being. Wrong is what pushes us down, lessens our existences, and makes us more depraved.” The Master Templar nodded. “Yes, and I know what we’re doing is right. Yet, if we lose, it won’t be right. The Malukans have been building an invasion force, to invade us, for the past several hundred standard years. Their force almost equals the rest of the Federation sectors, combined. We know that. Their attempt to hide the Trans Galactic Ship Corporation, as part of the Warp Drive Bank, never worked. If we lose this war, we lose everything. That would be the most profound wrong that there is.” Macrod nodded. The Master Templar continued. “We have won, in all the other battles. We won Sleebo against the pirates, Jilta against the generals, Palbo against Mirac. We won Kantee against the Talkron, and more recently, Sequetus. Now, we’re setting our sights on Maluka, and its fleets of ships.” Macrod stood and walked to the window. “After the Malukans lost the Battle for Sequetus 3, we never went back, to take the advantage. We found

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 497 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

that they had a fleet still there; twice as big, compared to what they lost in that battle. Nevertheless, by us not going after the source of the Galaxy’s evil, they overthrew the Federation Alliance, in only decades. They would have ruled us all, if it weren’t for Goren Torren. This time, we can’t make the same error.” Macrod accepted his kalo, sipped it, and placed it back, in the table. “That’s correct. We couldn’t take them, and they, with the Palboans, and Brandon Mirak, almost took it all from us, again. They took Jilta. They took the entire Galaxy, and if it weren’t for the work of the man, whom we both hold so high, Goren Torren, we wouldn’t now be talking. If we otherwise existed at all, we would be hiding under a rock, too scared to come out,” Macrod said. The Master Templar was pleased to hear that. It was the mention of Torren, which brightened his mood. “He took on insurmountable odds, an entire Galaxy, piece by piece, and won. It was impossible, otherwise. Yet: he won. If he were here, now, he wouldn’t stop, or back away. He would do what is right. That’s what he said. He just never outlined how to work out right from wrong. He just said every being knows right from wrong.” Macrod nodded. “That’s correct, sir.” The Master Templar sighed. “You have this palace secure?” “Yes, sir.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 498 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Good. I will give you our entire fleet, and more with my blessing. Do you need my Cordukes?” Macrod nodded. “Yes, more than ever, sir. We want them to lead, at the side of the Boguard. We don’t feel comfortable being out there in front, alone. This is a joint effort, please.” The Master Templar nodded. “There is something about the Talkron, that scares you, and not me, isn’t there? You know something, which I don’t.” Macrod sipped his kalo, placed it back on its coaster, and stood. He walked to the windows and looked out, over the hills and mountains, beyond the courtyard. He looked at the Boguard attendant, who seemed to pay him no attention, but who was feeling every thought, of both of them. Macrod came back and sat down. “Sir, the Talkron and the Boguard are the same race, and have the same talents. One uses them for good, and the other for bad. We originate from the same planet. They evicted us, or we fled. It doesn’t matter which. They followed in an insane drive to conquer all, and enslave all life, including ours. We had thought it impossible to beat them, until now, until you and this anomaly of a life-force, named Goren Torren. He taught us to stop hiding and seek out our opponents.” Macrod sat back and nodded to the aide, who then closed the door. “Sir, this is for your ears only.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 499 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Macrod received the thought of total acceptance from the Master Templar. “Sir, the Talkron have been hunting us. We have experimented with many things, to evade them. We have experimented with time itself, as a means of defending ourselves. We have found that the Talkron also have been experimenting with time. They have in the past, altered events, when it suited them. I understand that we have been free of the Talkron, at least three times in the last eleven hundred standard years. You will have no memory of that, because each time we are totally victorious, such as in the Battle of Sequetus 3, when we did continue and overthrow Maluka, they turned the past against us. We did it again, after Goren Torren was assassinated, where they turned it again, and most recently after victory over Palbo, where we simply turned around and took Maluka, again. Each time, they went back into the past, knowing who was involved and took them out, through assassination or torture, so these events never occurred.” The Master Templar looked on, incredulously. He sat back, as though there was something niggling in his own mind, as if he had been there; before. Macrod Curr leaned forward. “Sir, I feel you’re now experiencing déjàvu. That phenomenon is simply yourself in the future, looking back in on your own past presence.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 500 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“I will tell you now, this too. You have been assassinated, four times in your office, as Master Templar. Maybe you can’t recall it, but…” The Master Templar leaned forward, almost excited. “I can, however. I do have memory. I thought I was paranoid, even crazy. I thought that I had died, several times. Once, I thought a Boguard killed me, and simply prevented me from breathing.” Macrod nodded. “Correct. However, that was a Talkron. We went back earlier, into the past, and stopped the assassin from entering the palace. We still have him prisoner, and that’s the only way to hold them, from going back through time again, avoiding us, completing their mission, and changing history.” The Master Templar couldn’t stop himself. “I was killed in Palbo, right?” Macrod nodded. “Yes, during your visit, last year. It was a renegade cruiser, apparently. Actually, it was a Talkron thought-controlled captain. He had ten Talkron pushing in, on him. It can’t be repeated now, as the larger life-force, which inhabits the warp drives of that ship, is now free, and on our side.” The Master Templar nodded, excitedly. “The third was last year, and I got sick. I felt myself leave the body, and look down, on what was happening. I saw ethereal images of three people present, hovering in the room with me. Then, a whirl wind of light came in, and I awoke, in my body.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 501 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Macrod nodded. “Again, it was the Talkron. They did that to kill your grandchildren, as infants in Palbo. Since then a ship known as Amanda, who was here, with your son-in-law, Jaron at the time, has also been responsible for ridding us, of them. “The fourth time you died was during the invasion of Jilta, by Palbo. You died and we simply went back in time a few days earlier, and had you moved to another location, and the bomb went off, in the wrong prison cell.” The Master Templar sat back, relaxed. He looked at his hands. He smiled. “I think they shake less, and I’m pleased. They are real memories, and not some crazy old man’s fears or delusions.” Macros sat back. “That’s true, and what are delusions anyway? They are the reality of one life or person, not being real to another. They are nothing else. As for reality, and what is; that depends on the being. Sir, I must go. If you need me, I’m available. If I could, may I be excused?” The Master Templar leaned forward. “Of course. I have one last question. How will you prevent them, from changing the past again?” Macrod smiled. “Sir, they are trying. They really are. They have the same ability, which we have. However, by weighing the present and future in our favor, it lends more credibility, to the past. In other words, if we succeed in the future against Maluka, then that has an effect of making it harder, though not impossible, for them to change the past,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 502 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

to alter our future success. The bigger effect we make in the present, the harder it is to change the past. That’s why we work, to make the future the way we want it, and not just dive back into the past, to change it, as our only means of fighting. It needs both. We need to attend to the past, to protect the future, and then we must make that future happen.” Macrod looked at him, to see that this was understood. The Master Templar smiled, looking at his hands. “They shake less, now.” Macrod smiled and looked at the other Boguard, the Master Templar’s aide. Macrod bowed low, looking at the Master Templar. That answered his question, about the hands. Macrod now knew that he knew. He bowed again, and the Master Templar nodded, in return. Macrod turned and left the room.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 503 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 10

1642

Jaron was looking at the guard, who had forced him into the prison, at lance point. Jaron looked around. His cell was dark, and there were a few walls, with some small torches burning. A priest came forward. He looked at Jaron. “Explain yourself.” Do you want me to do anything? asked Amanda. Jaron looked at the man. Not yet, he replied to Amanda. Jaron then looked at the young woman, who was watching intently, while trying to appear half-asleep. Another man walked into the cell, wearing a black robe, with a black hood over his head. He looked at Jaron, looked at Jaron’s clothes and back to the guard. “Bring the other one in, the carriage driver.” The driver was escorted, into the dark cell. “Is this the one you described?” The man nodded. “He isn’t human, he’s a ghost. I saw right through his body, and my horses rode straight through him, without harming him.” The woman became more interested. The priest then nodded for the carriage driver to be taken away, and looked at Jaron. “Hold him firmly.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 504 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The two guards grabbed Jaron, by the wrists. Jaron had a way of holding his body tight. They held him hard. He struggled slightly, to give a better effect. He was very curious. One of the guards drew a knife, cut Jaron’s wrist and drew blood. Jaron was alarmed and looked at it. He then tried to re-call himself, back to Black Knight. He could see his body there, but it was now bleeding, where he had received the wound. Blood was dripping, onto the floor of Black Knight. Amanda, I have made my body too real. I’m too real, and if they kill me here…. Got it, Captain. Not yet however. Maybe I can talk my way out of it. There are things here, to learn. Jaron looked at the priest, who was smiling. “You’re mortal, then? Shackle him to the wall, where we will interrogate him more,” instructed the priest. Jaron was pushed over, and restrained against the wall. He looked around and there were metal instruments on the floor, and a bench. He looked at the guards. There were four of them; now. The guards started to stoke a fire, in a hearth opposite. There was a call, from a nearby room. “They are going to find out your secrets, hey?” Jaron looked over. It was the woman, but she was older than he thought. She was clearly a woman.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 505 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

She reached towards the bars. Jaron asked, “Does this place always smell like dead rats?” The woman laughed. “You’re worried how the room smells, when you’re going to die? You’re funny, mister.” Jaron looked over again at the woman. He stared. He felt a lump in his throat. He could barely ask, “Why are you here?” She smiled and answered. “I was caught healing a young boy, with a ground root.” Jaron looked over at her, obviously not understanding. “Healing people of illness, is interfering with the almighty upstairs. That’s a crime. Only he has the power to heal. My crime is blasphemy, and I’m being tried, as a witch.” Jaron shook his head. The likeness was still uncanny. “Your trial is when?” She looked at the other door. A priest entered. “It’s now, and her confession, just then to you, was her trial. I’m thankful. She is guilty, so no further trial is needed.” The woman looked shocked. The priest walked over to Jaron. “That was her third offense and Amelia will be sentenced. She will die, by burning. It will be in public. She is right, in that it’s against God’s law, for anyone other than him to heal, and cure. Only using his divine intervention is allowed. This was her third offence, and obviously,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 506 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

she is under evil forces, conspiring against God, to usurp his power. She needs to be made an example of. Amelia sat back. The priest walked over past her cell and she spat at him. The priest looked at the guard, who then shook his head and stepped over and opened her cell. “That’s a mistake, you stupid wench. I will teach you a lesson. You need to be taught.” Jaron called to the priest, “I think that isn’t wise.” The priest gave Jaron a look of disgusted contempt. Amelia looked at Jaron and said, “Shut up. This is between this one, and me.” Jaron shrugged, still shackled to the wall. The priest entered the cell. He looked at Jaron, and then the woman, wondering. He walked over to her. He checked that she was chained, and close to the wall. The chains appeared intact. He leaned down, and kicked her foot. She withdrew, crouching on the floor. The priest smiled. He got down lower. “So, you like to spit at priests, little Amelia.” He went to grab her, by the cheek with his right hand. She spat at him again. He lost control, and lunged at her throat. She immediately raised her hand, to protect herself. He grabbed her chain, and she grabbed him, quickly wrapping the chain around his neck. She pulled him in tighter, held him with her hands. She

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 507 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

held his head, and bit his nose, and kept biting and biting, closing down on his nose, like a clamp. He was going purple, from lack of air. The priest screamed. He was heavy. She tightened the chains, around his neck. She had hold of one of his hands, rolled him over, and thrust her thumb, deep into his left eye. Jaron had seen enough and smiled. This was who he thought she was. He shook his head. The guards quickly rushed in, to the priest’s side, and kicked and kicked the woman. She let go, and they kicked her three more times, before helping the priest away, who was now minus a piece of his nose. Amelia spat that out. She had the priest’s blood over her face and arms. In addition, she was now bleeding from her own kicks. There were bruises, but no bones were broken. She grimaced, at the pain of her damaged muscles. The guards then left the priest, as he retreated upstairs. They walked over to Jaron, and looked at his clothes. “You shouldn’t smile, mister, as you haven’t been tried, yet. You could still get off, and not suffer, what she is going to experience.” Jaron looked at the girl, and then at the guard. “Thank you for the advice, kind sir. When will my trial start?” Jaron was feeling more confident, knowing who was in the next cell. The guard indicated to his fellow guard, who walked over, with a red-hot iron poker.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 508 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron stared at it. It was very hot, and he could feel it, from where he was shackled. He struggled with the chain. He couldn’t free himself. He started to sweat. “How is that a trial?” His eyes were bulging. Amanda, he called, but received no response. The girl looked over curiously. “Mister, you don’t understand. They work for God. If he wants to set you free, he will. Otherwise, if they simply kill you, then that proves you work with the devil.” Jaron was wild-eyed, pulling on his chains. “What kind of logic is that? I die? Of course I will die, if they do that. Are they crazy?” A guard smiled. He pulled up Jaron’s shirtsleeve, pressed the poker onto his flesh, and Jaron screamed in agony. The guard smiled. “Sounds like the devil’s cry, to me.” The girl tried to turn away, but also wanted to get free, so was pulling at her chains. She was screaming abuse at the guards, and spitting at them, from over the other side of the cell. The guards just laughed, and slowly undid Jaron’s shocksuit front vest. “This material is from the devil. We are only confirming, what we already know.” “This isn’t a trial, and the devil is only a carryover, from the previous religion, Zoroasterism. Did you not know that?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 509 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The guard looked at Jaron, and then turned to hear, the priest, back at the cell gate. “Tell me more, my friend.” Jaron looked at the man’s eyes. His face had healed, or the part of his nose had. Jaron swallowed. The poker was pulled back, away from his arm. The priest nodded. “Put it in deep, this time, right over the heart. We will see, if he is protected by God or not.” Jaron looked at the priest, who gave him a knowing smile. The priest thought: You’re mine, this time, now. The poker started to descend, and began to touch Jaron’s skin. He screamed. It was then burning, deep into his flesh. The smell became pungent. Jaron started to black out. Then, the poker flew away, through the air. The other poker, resting in the coals fell, and scattered across the floor. The priest was thrown against the wall. A force, which almost knocked them unconscious, threw the guards across the room. Jaron looked through the tears, in his eyes. His heart was thumping. In front of him was an extraordinarily tall person, emanating light, a full two pacs tall. The person had large wings, also emanating light. Jaron swallowed. “Amanda?” he murmured. “Yes Jaron, my Captain. However, here I am better known as Michael. Here, let me unchain you.” The voice was strong and masculine.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 510 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The chains simply dissolved, and Jaron fell to the floor. Amanda, as Michael, picked him up, and looked over, to the other cell. “Amelia, come with us, please.” The chains holding her dissolved, too. The cell wall iron bars, between them, bowed apart. Amelia stood upright and looked around. She looked over at the angel, felt her wrists, and simply asked, “Do you know me?” Tears of relief, were forming in her eyes and she wiped them away. The angel responded. “Of course. You are famous, well into the future. There, they will know you, as a goddess. Here, help my Captain. I can’t take him with me, while he is like this, but I will escort you to the doors, above. Amelia grabbed Jaron, as he was coming around. “You have friends in high places, mister. I’m pleased to know you, otherwise tomorrow, I was going to be a rats’ roast dinner.” Jaron half laughed. He almost cried. It was so good, to hear her voice. The angel walked past the priest. Talkron, I will return for you. He looked deep into his mind. I’m stronger now, back here, he thought. “I know you will tell your masters, so tell them, that Michael is back. Tell them he is stronger, than ever.” With that, he raised the priest, into the air. The guards held their arms up, as if to block out the light. Michael looked at the guards. “Do you work for him?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 511 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The guards glanced at each other. They didn’t know what to say. Michael then turned, and let the priest fall to the ground. “Then, let the creator judge you two, who fight and destroy his creations.” Michael flicked his hand and the doors opened. Jaron was getting his feet. Captain I can’t take you, and the girl with me, through time. She doesn’t agree, so it can’t be done. I know you won’t leave, without her, so you’ll have to run. Hurry, there are more Talkron, stirring. I can feel them. Jaron nodded. He was happy, though in great pain. “Come on, Amelia, we have to run,” he said. They made it, to the ground level. They looked around. Michael was standing, beside them. A guard decided that he should stand back. Michael stood there, with arms folded. Jaron and Amelia started to run. Jaron looked at his wound. It had healed. The pain was dissipating, quickly. He ran, with Amelia fast behind him. His clothes changed from shocksuit to local garb, in mid stride. Go Captain, was the thought, which he received. A guard jumped out, to stop them with a lance, Jaron went to block his thrust, but the guard fell, to the ground instead. Jaron looked up. Turn right, and the gate is now open.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 512 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron called to Amelia, “Turn right, as the gate there is now open.” Amelia caught up with him. “That’s never open, but…” She looked at the gate. It was now open. She then looked above and saw a light following above the pair.

Fleeing the Talkron

As they ran through the gate to the woods beyond Amelia smiled. She liked this man, and his friend.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 513 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 11

THE ESTIMATE

The Master Templar nodded. “What have you got, Grant?” The senior Cordello nodded, as he sat down opposite him, accepting a glass of water. The Master Templar sipped his kalo. “Elysis, it’s very simple, extraordinarily simple, if you follow the works, of the Torren.” The Master Templar nodded. He looked at his aide, who then bowed; exited while closing the doors as he did so. “The Talkron have been pushing into this sector, or this galaxy, for over ten thousand years. They have been settling into a long-term operation, of undermining what we do, to thwart them. It’s probable, that they are behind the short-lives of Sequetus 3, even though it backfired on them. The short-lives meant that the House of Torren spread faster, than they could extinguish it. I believe that they bred us, as a plan for their invasion, into the rest of the galaxy. They set up in Palbo, and you already know the rest.” Marshal Grant Tagora looked at his old friend. He swallowed. Elysis was getting old, he thought to himself. The Marshal continued. “It was the spirit of Goren Torren, who defeated them then, on Sequetus

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 514 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

3, and whose wisdom holds us strong; now. We have the Talkron backing away, but they haven’t gone, Your Excellency. They are still here, amongst us. I have evidence, which you will need to see; yourself.” He handed the Master Templar a hundred-page report. He continued. “The essence of the solution, is to defeat them, obviously. However, they are experts of deceiving the mind. On Sequetus 3, they used the Earth media to generate and build up acceptance, of oppressive laws. During the time of Hymondy, it wasn’t an enlightened era. The planet experienced seven major acts, of what they termed terrorism. The San Francisco Bridge, was totally destroyed, which was the worst. They had a repressive law, all ready to pass, when that happened. It took many freedoms away, from the House of Torren. It was a blatant anti-religious law. “The Talkron then sank two ships, carrying over seven thousand passengers, and more anti-terrorist laws were brought in. These oppressive laws continued to grow, and be passed. Most earlier so- called free nations, could monitor their own citizens through satellites, monitor their phone calls, their mail, and eventually it was legal, to monitor their thoughts. Countries were then allowed to freely trade data on their citizens, with the other nations, in the name of national security.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 515 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The Marshal looked at the report, in the Master Templar’s hands. “The details of which law, who pushed it, and so on, are in that report.” The Master Templar looked around. “Did they not work out, who was behind all this?” “No, Hymondy never did. He was faced with an anti-long-life lobby, and several times, various nations tried to impeach him. My data now shows, that these nations had a connection, to Talkron based groups. He had no chance. The Master Templar sat back. “Do we have the same phenomena, here?” “Elysis, they are here, and my information shows that the High Commissions of Maluka, as the source of much of their activity, on many of our planets, but not all. The Malukans also have allies, in Siltonia, and Centor.” The Master Templar stood and looked out the window. He turned. “If they could unite those two states, and the Malukans had a force, big enough, to defeat us, and take Jilta, they could take half the old Federation.” He looked down at his old friend, who was now taking another sip of water. Grant put the glass down, and nodded. “Maybe. How can they do that, against the Boguard Man-o- Wars? They are impregnable, are they not?” The Master Templar sat down again. He sighed and shrugged his shoulders. “I just don’t know. Sometimes, important battles have been lost through

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 516 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

overconfidence, and not believing in the data, obtained about your enemy.” “Do you feel that we may be the effect of disinformation, by the Talkron, about the Malukans?” asked the Marshal. The Master Templar sat back. He was getting old, but he knew he still had a sharp mind. “I just don’t know. It might be. I also am careful, in what I judge and think. I very seldom make a spontaneous decision, except perhaps, about the quality of good kalo.” He raised the pot and poured some more.

Ω

Jaron and Amelia sat in the woods. Amelia looked at him. “You’re not from here, are you?” Jaron shook his head. “No.” “Where?” she asked. Jaron pointed up. “Didn’t we have this conversation, before?” “The trees?” she asked. Jaron shook his head. “No, further away.” Amelia looked at him. “You’re from God? Is that how you know about time?” Jaron was about to speak, when a light appeared a few pacs away. It was Michael. “I believe Jaron was about to say, he is from the north of Europe.” Michael looked at Jaron.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 517 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Captain, you can’t put the future, in jeopardy. Already we may have altered the future too much, and if any of us isn’t there, at your battles, because you changed her; here, you may have to come back here, to kill her, or fix the future in some other way. Jaron looked at his body, in Black Knight, through his mind. It had also healed. He stood. “Amelia, could you excuse Michael and me, please?” Amelia shrugged. “Who am I, to get in the way of angels? It looks to me, like you’re about to have an argument, and it looks domestic, from the tension in the air.” Michael looked over at Amelia. “Hmmm. You won’t do, will you?” Amelia stood. “I will not do what, Michael? If that, is really your name.” Michael laughed. He turned to Jaron. “You better tell her, who we really are. I really am Michael.” Jaron stepped over, beside Michael, looking at Amelia. “Yes, but he is really Amanda, too, and I’m his Captain.” Amelia started the laugh. “You have problems. You’re more confused, than I am. One of you is really confused, and I can’t tell which.” Jaron looked away; indignant. “Well, I’m not confused.” Amelia turned to Michael. “Well?” Michael shrugged. “I don’t care, and I have a job to do, I am who I am.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 518 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amelia looked at them both. “I don’t know why you’re here, but I want to thank you. You’re both very honorable.” She walked towards them. “What is more, as it gets dark, it’s even better to be around you. I believe you both.” They both turned to her and said at the same time, “You do?” Amelia nodded. “I don’t know why, but I get a good feeling around both of you. That’s apart from saving me, from being burnt, and becoming a rodent’s dinner, in the morning.” Michael turned to Jaron. “She is, who she is. We came here, for one reason only, and that was to get her, and meet her. What do you think?” Jaron smiled at Amelia. We came here to see her, and that’s true. However, now we’re here, do you think we could take her with us, please? Hmmm. That’s likely not possible. Please Amanda, please? Michael turned away. If you tell her the truth and the future alters, what happens then? That’s what I want. What if you vanish, for example. Amanda, I have never been scared, of my decisions. They are always based on doing what appears right, at the time. It seems right, to take her. Why? She will get into more trouble, and will only be killed, again, by the Talkron, over and over. Who is

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 519 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

to say, that the Talkron aren’t here, hunting us, and trying to play a four dimensional game, by erasing the players? That’s exactly what they are doing, responded Amanda - as Michael. In that case, do what you can. Jaron turned. “Please sit, Amelia.” Michael started to move away. “He is leaving,” cried Amelia. “No, he is not, but I can make the light.” Jaron looked and where he stared, the air space became a source of light. It hovered there, lighting up the space around them. “Michael is ensuring no one comes near us while we speak. “ Amelia shrugged. “Today is most wonderful. Carry on.” She stared into his blue eyes. “Hmm,” she murmured to herself. Jaron called out. “Michael, don’t go too far. I might still need you.” “That’s obvious, and I can still hear you,” came back the voice, from beyond the darkness. Jaron looked at Amelia and she stared into his eyes, as though in a daze. “Amelia, I’m from the future.” He waited. She stared at him. “That’s nice. From tomorrow?” “No, like from about two thousand five hundred years into the future.” “That’s nice. Do we know each other?” “Yes, but not like here.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 520 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Did I meet you, on Rambus?” she asked, in a daze. Jaron jumped up. “What did you say?” Amelia shook her head. “I’m not sure what I said. Something about rambling, I think.” Michael was back, standing beside them both. “No Amelia, you said Rambus.” “Hmm, I did. So what?” “I did meet you on Rambus, almost. I was there, though we never met.” Jaron looked at her and stared into her mind. “Rambus is a planet, and you lived there, for a while.” Amelia withdrew slightly. “I’m hot. What is all this, and what is a planet?” This isn’t going to get us far. We need to move, as they have people searching the woods; now. They are Talkron, and not afraid of the dark, Amanda communicated to Jaron. “Not afraid of the dark,” repeated Amelia absent-mindedly. Jaron looked at Michael. Michael nodded. “A planet is what goes around the sun. The sun is what is up there, during the day. The world is round and it kind of circles the sun. Our sun has ten planets. There are many suns out there. Each of those points of white is a star, and they are also suns. Many have planets, like this one, which we’re standing on, now. Rambus is one such planet. In the future, you will be there.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 521 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron stood back, to see where this was going. He looked at Michael, who shrugged. He looked at Amelia, who looked at them both, as though they were something to be wary about. She just nodded. “We need to find a place to sleep. I know a person, who might be able to help. Jaron and Michael glanced at each other. Her thoughts were clean. Michael said, “I will leave you two, as I have another house-call to do.” With that, he vanished. Amelia was suddenly concerned. She looked around. “No offense, but I do feel more secure, when he is around. Those trees out there, have spirits, and they can be scary.” Jaron laughed. “There are many life-forms, in the trees. None mean you, nor I, any harm. They actually like you, Amelia. The trees, well, …” Jaron hesitated, as he looked out there. She watched him, as he was straining to feel, amongst the trees. She did like him. Jaron brought his attention back. She was holding his hand. “I feel more secure, now,” she said. Jaron smiled. “Amelia, in the future, we never had that kind of relationship.” Amelia smiled. “Times change. That was in the future.” Jaron leaned over and kissed her softly on the forehead. “Yes, that was then, and I’m sure I was madly in love with you. However, I was also married

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 522 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

and I don’t want to tempt the future. Anyhow, I’m at least twenty-five, years older than you, now.” Amelia stepped back and looked at him. “No one lives that long! Anyhow, I understand.” She turned from him and started to walk away, into the blackness. Jaron caught up. He linked his arm around hers. “The trees like you, did you know that?” She looked up at him. “Really? You truly are twenty-five years older, than me?” Jaron nodded. “What is a house-call, and where did your friend go?” Up here, came the answer into her mind. Amelia looked up and saw the shadow of Michael, floating above them, from tree to tree. A house call means to meet someone, at his or her home. “Well then, we need to find some place to stay, and move, if the woods stay friendly,” she said to them both. They could all feel some force now searching for them nearby.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 523 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 12

HALLOWMEN

The first Hallowmen had arrived in Maluka a year before. Randal Steel was new to the corps. He had a mission-deputy named Warren Walters. Both were short-lifers in their early thirties. Randal looked at the image of Aragon, across the river. Aragon was the capital city, of the continent of Alania. Aragon was also a super city, of two million people, built for the sole purpose of administering the Trans Galactic Ship Corporation. “That tall building, there, in the rear middle ground; that’s the one, into which we need to enter. It has the records, of where we will find the station- city, that they are operating.” Warren peered at the screen, and then at the real view, from over the shipside, from where they were working. “Sure Randal. That’s simple. There are only a few thousand people, working in there. It should be easy, to get into the tightest security, in the whole damned universe.” A ship chugged past. They kept low “How do you propose we get there? Swim?” asked Warren. He and Randal has been best friends, all through their Academia years. They had joined the Cordukes together, upon graduation. The Cordukes had been

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 524 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

recruiting top students heavily, a few years ago. It didn’t take long for Randal and Warren to be offered a position, within the Hallowmen. It sounded exciting.

City of Aragon from across the river

Warren looked over at the city again, and then ducked back, behind the railing. “Even if we were to swim at night, we need clean dry clothes, to get inside that building. We would be found, sooner than later.”

Ω

Marshal Grant Tagora shook his head. That was the sixth pair of Hallowmen, which he had lost on Maluka, in as many weeks. He looked at his aides. “Well, you can see the reports. How do we crack this? How do we get in?” “Sir, it appears that they know our people are there. We can tell that they are unable to see them,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 525 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

or hear them, but when our people are anywhere close to a target, they are always picked up, and vanish. That’s the last that we see of them.” Grant nodded and looked at the screen, showing the last reports. “They were across the river. Then, the transmission stopped.” “Did we have the follow up crew, as we were intending?” “No, and that’s the unusual part. The follow up crew just got up, and walked away. They turned themselves in. We know that, as they had transmitters, which told us exactly what they were doing.” They were sitting in an underground bunker, outside of the city of Gilton, buried under the Alpition Mountains. Mount Rakmoor was a remote headquarters, set up a two kinopacs under the mountain, during the early days, before the Brandon Mirak invasion, by Palbo. The meeting place was also known as Camp Halz, because of the wild nature, and the look of Rakmoor, above them. The Marshal had chosen this location, to set up his Hallowmen HQ, because it was well below the prying eyes of any satellites, no matter how powerful their supercomputer protection was. They had mined Rakmoor, in its early days, for its heavier metals of lead, cadmium and then titanium. Due to the cold and ice, that used to come up from the South Polar Regions, Mount Rakmoor

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 526 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

was as an inhospitable place on the planet, as could be found. Due to the metal content, the mountain was riddled with now unused tunnels. The mines had closed hundreds of standard years, before. When the Palboan dictator Mirak was on the rampage and looking hostile, Mount Rakmoor was reopened, as a remote headquarters, should Jilta fall. The base was to have been used as a staging comeback point, though it was ineffective.

Planet Jilta

Marshal Grant Tagora liked it however, because it was well secured, and more so because it had its

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 527 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

center, two kinopacs under the mountain. That meant satellites could not track internal radio communications, couldn’t follow any broadcasts, no matter how deliberate or accidental. The metal in the ground around the mine acted as a diffuser, to all transmissions, and that applied to mental thought, as well. Grant Tagora was well aware, that the Boguard could read minds, or quiet talk, as recorded in the early days of Torren. Grant had called his top-level advisors together for a meeting. They were now think-storming, as he called it. Together, he reasoned, with all of them present, they should be able to work out what was going on, whereas singly the answers might escape each of them. One of his generals nodded. “Grant, what we know is that on Palbo, their psychrons were experimenting with supercomputers, and putting them in orbit, to monitor the citizens, whom they found questionable, suspicious or dangerous.” “Yes, but we lost their data records, and the Palboan computers melted down, when the Boguard forces arrived.” “So, were those computers set to melt, if anyone invaded, or just if the Boguard invaded?” asked another. There were seven generals and another two marshals present. Grant held the floor, and nodded to another marshal.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 528 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“We know that on Earth, before it started to be depopulated, that there were similar computers in orbit.” The others agreed with this. “We know that there are small supercomputers in Corado, up north in Jilta, built by the Warp Drive Bank, now taken over, by our world government. As the bank operated here freely and unobstructed, we can’t discount these computers, being still being used against us.” Another general butted in. “I know what you think and I agree; it seems wrong that the Bank can operate now, being who they are. A problem we have, is that Jilta is a democratic society, and until they have proven themselves a legal threat, which they have not, nothing can be done here. There is no law on this planet, forbidding them from interfering with life, the way they have. Neither, have we found, any illegal link, to the station-ships, with which they are dealing. The Jiltanian government has not made any new laws, to curtail their surveillance activities with supercomputers.” Grant smiled. “Whilst the Master Templar still breathes, I back him a hundred percent, on leaving it that way. Education of the public is needed, as is lobbying to get that education disseminated. Democracy works to the degree that the populace is informed. Now, back to matters, at hand. What about Maluka?” Those in the room slowly nodded. Another Marshal stood. “Earth had mind- mapping to such a detailed degree, that almost half

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 529 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

its citizens were mapped.” The marshal looked around, to see he had everyone’s attention. “They were mapping the life-force, which ran each body. They could map you at birth. It was illegal, not to get a person registered at birth, with their Institute of Concerned Records, and get all children recorded. From then, they mapped and monitored them, non- stop. Even after death, it didn’t stop. It was found, that the being, when reborn exhibited the same so- called brain wave patterns.” “Brain waves, ha!” interrupted another general. “Well, it doesn’t matter what you call them. The brain is still the switchboard, between the body and the life-force that’s running it. It emits frequencies, which depends on the life resident in it, and that life- force can be tracked, irrespective of the body, once it’s mapped. That is what was going on Earth. My guess is any of us, who were once resident on Earth in former lifetimes, could now be tracked here, on Jilta, so long as they still have our former records, and they have the software, to follow us.” Another general got up and paced. “I recall being there. That was a thousand years, before. I have my own memories of it.” He was referring to Earth. “Then; that means you could be tracked here, to Mount Rakmoor,” answered another General. “However, they wouldn’t be able to track you, to Camp Halz. Their computers can’t do that. We have tried to replicate the computers of Earth, and our

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 530 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

computers can’t reach anywhere near as far down, as Camp Halz.” The other general was relieved. “So; does that mean on Maluka, that is what is happening?” “Yes, that’s most likely. If we send in teams of Hallowmen, who were once on Earth in their early days, who had once been mind mapped, then they likely have those impressions. They then can be found if they set foot on Maluka. I believe that’s what is happening there now, to the new crews that we send there.” “What, not send in Hallowmen, who were once from Earth, lifetimes before? That would eliminate almost all of us.” There was consensus. It seemed a rule of thumb, that almost all those recruited, could be traced that far back, in their memory, to Earth. It had been found that anyone who spent a lifetime on Earth, could usually recall it easily enough, many lifetimes later. They just had to get away from the planet, a few lifetimes, to be able to do it. “Then, what other options do we have?” “We need to recruit long-lifers, and those which we can’t trace back to Earth,” explained another general. Grant looked around. There was agreement. That was going to be an operation, by itself. Templars, who were long-lifers, were rare. Getting them into the Cordukes was hard enough, but into

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 531 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

the Hallowmen, was going to be extraordinarily difficult.

Ω

Warren Walters looked out, over the balcony of the ship, again. “It beats me, why I joined, at times. I’ve been shot at, and almost killed, so many times the past year; it isn’t something, which I laugh at, anymore. My mother tries, every vacation, to talk me out of this, you know.” Randal Steel looked at him. “We both know why we’re here. We have no previous life memory, of Earth. I never thought being a Templar with no memory of Earth, would be a positive point. It seemed that the opposite was true, when I was in the Academia. Earth, Earth and Earth, was all I ever heard about. Now, to find that being a long-lifer, and being of no association to Earth, is a positive thing, it’s … I don’t know. That’s almost something to laugh at.” Warren looked above. “Those satellites up there: can’t track us. It’s an interesting phenomenon. We’re the furthest any Hallowmen have gone, and we’re going to get a lot closer.” “It’s time to go, there’s our boat.” They both slipped over the side. The small boat was hired, to take them to the other side of the river, while it was dark. The security on the river was tight, but as they found, they were relatively

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 532 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

untraceable. The Malukans were in paranoid fear, of being tracked and infiltrated; so they placed most of their attention on short-lived bodies, those once from Earth, and their own dissidents, or so it seemed.

Planet Maluka

Of course, this fear was being seeped into their society, from somewhere. The fear was being slowly pushed into their culture; decade after decade, hate would be filtered down to them, via their media, books, and entertainment. They would fear the Jiltanians, and most recently the Palboans, and even the short-lifers from Earth, once a former prison colony.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 533 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The Malukans occasionally reflected, on how great it all was, back in their early days, the days when they had the Sequetus Series, as part of their sector. Those days were gone now, but they had profited from that misadventure. There was almost no record of the Battle of Sequetus 3, on Maluka. They only referred to it, as a bad skirmish, in their history records. It was as though that part of their psyche had been stripped. It didn’t exist. For those who did know, recording the battle brought with it a question of: what honest benefit would the average Malukan gain, from understanding it? It was a war, which the Malukans had been brought into, by the Jiltanians, to expand the Jilta territories. That’s what they taught Malukans at school, so that was the Malukan truth, now. Randal wondered too at times, if his own regime was telling all. How could one ever know, he wondered? He slid over the side of the boat, and began to wade ashore. Warren was only a moment behind him, before also splashing into the salt-water river, up to his waist. Slowly, they began to make their way. Randal held his weapon below his body, in the water, as he pushed forward. He could see the outline of his personnel invisibility shroud. It seemed a surreal piece of protection. He could also see the large buildings, looming up ahead. So far, there was no sign, that they had been detected.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 534 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 535 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 13

MALUKAN DEFENDER

“Chief, you were right. We have another two of them over here. That makes four of them, in the last four days. Will we take them out; now?” The Chief of Security shook his head. He had been with Trans Galactic for over two hundred and eighty years, now. His great grandfather had been part of Trans Galactic, when it started, and had created its faster-than-light speed travel. The Chief’s name was Vernal. He looked at the imagery, which their supercomputer was giving them. It showed two slightly blurry looking dots crossing the river, to Aragon. If Maluka had a holy city, it was this one, Aragon, the city of wealth, the bringer of fortune. Since Trans Galactic had been taken over by the Imperial Federation Warp Drive Bank, there had never been a better, more profitable time, in Maluka, or its territories. The Malukans never had it so prosperous. All a citizen had to do, was keep his nose clean, do what the state said, and he could share in the wealth, with no worries to his financial status, in the future. The average Malukan was also ten times better off financially now, than before the Federation.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 536 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Vernal looked down, at the images. He knew whom he worked for, and he had his own life, mapped out in front of him. He wasn’t about to put it in jeopardy, by acting too rashly, just in case these were stray fishermen, wearing some strange head gear. Even so, he knew, deep down, these were simply fanatical Jiltanian Templars, trying to subvert the Malukan economy. They were jealous. His nephew told him about the time, when he went to Jilta several years ago, and the way people treated him, because he came from Maluka. They hated Malukans. Vernal looked at the images of the two, on the screen, as they finally crossed the riverbank. They were now in the street. Vernal turned, to the second set of images. It was another team, coming from the other side of buildings on Angrosos Way25. Vernal’s supervisor came up to him. Vernal always thought that this man was special. He had abilities, which could tell what people were thinking. Vernal had experienced this. The supervisor stood next to Vernal. He nodded. “What are you going to do?”

25 EXPLANATION: Angrosos Passage: Malukan cities have many above and belowground streets and they have different titles depending on which, above or below ground. Above the ground it’s called Angrosos Way, below ground it’s known as Angrosos Passage. It travels the full length of Aragon City Centrum Searfinders Index p 4890. (City Centrum = Central Business District - Ed)

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 537 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“I’m going to let them get close to where they seek, so I can see their ability and their target. They have no mental registration with us, so we will have to monitor their thoughts, until we truly know their mental waves, and can catch and recognize them, in the future. Obviously, they are enemies and if they escape through death, we need to be able to recognize them, in case they are reborn on Maluka.” Vernal was sweating towards the end. The supervisor was impressed. He smiled. All that data came out, just as it should have, as per the instructed recorded implant, in Vernal’s mind. “What else?” he asked. “Should that happen, then the hospital will notify us and we will remove the infant, and inform the mother that her child is dead. However, we will actually be keeping this child and being26 hostage, from an early age.” Vernal looked happy, having gotten this message out of his head. The supervisor smiled again. “What else?” he asked while looking friendly. Vernal began to spout the next phase. “Should the life-force or being not escape us, we will intern him or her in an electrical field, ten times worse than death, with his fellow conspirators, and they will join the other dozens, which we already have.”

26 DEFINITION: Being: Here it means the life-force, or the life unit, which runs and operates the body, and answers up to me or I. Source: Searfinders index p. 5001.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 538 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The supervisor gave Vernal a smile, and with it, he allowed the supercomputer to caress Vernal’s thought waves, with that same smile. Vernal had been a supervisor on the Malukan Moon Oros, for a third of a century. He knew the work was easy, but the lifestyle was something else. That wasn’t easy. Living in lunar habitats was hard. It was demanding. One never had any real friends. Vernal knew what friends were. They were something others had, but not him. He enjoyed the solitude of lunar life, along with only a few thousand others, who oversaw the development of Maluka, through the last two thousand years. The mental implant27 that he carried in his thoughts told him that they were all heroes. Lunar Management was almost a trademark of the Talkron. The Talkron took to moons, like planet bound fowl take to waterways. It seemed natural to them, to be able to survive and grow in lunar tunnels, and sub structures. The Talkron method of operation, had generally been to firstly establish a base, on a planet. Then, they establish a planetary hierarchy. That meant controlling media, banking and the judiciary, with

27 DEFINITION: Implant: A mental implant in this sense isn’t a physical chip or something hard wired into the body. An implant here is a mental idea, computation, which is laid into the subject though various ways such as hypnosis, emotional overwhelm, drugs and the like. Searfinders Medical Index, p. 399.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 539 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

their agents, their own kind, and those who would work for them. With that form of control in place, the next to come, were the lunar stages. They would terra- form28 the lunar landscape, and make them their own. It might take centuries; before anyone would realize a Talkron presence, and they would do all they could, to remain unseen.

Talkron Lunar Management of Moon Oros

The hallmark of the Talkron was: remain unseen. That was wanted most of all. As long as they could remain unobserved, they were safe, and perhaps a thousand fold more effective. Thus, in the past, they warned Federation planets against visiting

28 DEFINITION: Terra-form: To create the landscape of a planet, lunar surface or asteroid. It may involve the planting of life, and starting new life forms. Searfinders Index p. 378.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 540 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

their moons. Such warnings included threats, use of illogic and sabotage. Vernal looked up at the screen. Those dots and blurred imaged were getting closer; now. Obviously, it was a rebel rendezvous. He had to act. Vernal hated rebels. That was part of his programming. The rebels hated the mental implanting. However, Vernal knew it was for their own good, and he was fine, right? Wasn’t Vernal leading a perfectly free life? Of course, he was. This was how he thought. The mind-mapping of every citizen did have opponents, when he was younger. However, did it not remove all crime, from the city? Was it not the ultimate deterrent? Wasn’t it the ultimate threat to criminals: that they couldn’t get away, with their crimes? Vernal laughed aloud, as he thought at what the rebels would do, if they somehow got power. They would open up Maluka for criminals. They could do that. They would remove the great opulence of the state. They would remove Trans Galactic Ship. Vernal had been briefed, on what had happened to the Imperial Federation War Drive Bank. He knew that the Bank had been taken out, by the Jiltanian do-gooders. Ha, he thought. Jiltanians; they were the scourge of the Federation. Who did they think they were? Every Malukan had this duty. It was up to Vernal, now. He looked at his hands. He was beginning to shake. All this conspiracy; against the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 541 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

state, was making him angry. He had to act, before it was too late. His implants were telling him this, screaming at him. If he didn’t act now, they could all die. “Get me City Security of Aragon,” he barked to an aide, on the other side of the room. His supervisor had gone now, and it was up to Vernal. He was going to be the hero. No one would stop him. He would stop the criminals. For the good of Maluka, the good of the state, and its entire people, he would stop them. He started to send off the data, to City Security. As he did so, he felt a lessening of tension, as though his body was feeling calmer, and more at ease.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 542 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 14

AMELIA

Jaron looked at her. Amelia was sleeping. He could feel Amanda’s thoughts. This was the wrong time to meet her, and there was nothing to be done here. Jaron and Amanda had disagreed on this; several times. Captain. Yes, Amanda, thought Jaron looking up into the dark sky. We’re in the wrong time. No. I feel it’s the right time for something, and it includes her and me. Any ideas then, Captain? Not really, only that if we leave, we will interrupt or change something important. Hmmm Yes, exactly. If we leave, we don’t finish something, which was once finished, but now remains undone. That’s what I feel, and it’s very strong. It has to do with her, and myself. However, it isn’t me. Then what? asked Amanda, now curious. Jaron looked up at the sky and then down at the woman. He watched the clouds move, in front of the moon.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 543 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Do you think the Talkron are here? I think that’s why I was drawn here. I think they also were drawing me here, because she is here, to trap me. Are they still here, now? Jaron asked. I think so, answered Amanda. The Talkron were young here then. I think, from what I feel. From my past history memories here, they have been on this planet, for about three hundred Earth years. I think this planet, and its inhabitants might have been handed from one owner to another. However, really, even though I have been here off and on, over many years, as you have too, it seems, that I’m not certain of anything. However, I agree. I think they may have changed the history of this girl, so she doesn’t meet you, and that was meant to lure you here. Jaron looked around. He listened to a far off wolf. There was another wolf joining it. He moved closer to Amelia. I was here, a little bit after this time, as Goren Torren. Amanda appeared before him as Michael. “Jaron, you’re here also, as you, now, I can feel you.” Jaron looked at Michael. “Hmm. Do you think that’s it? I’m here: somewhere?” Jaron looked at the woman, and then to Michael. “I don’t feel that she belongs with me, but I do realize, that she is with me. Perhaps she needs to find me: here. Then, what am I doing here? This is Sequetus 3, Earth.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 544 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Michael turned, to look at Jaron. “That, you must work out. The point is she is here now, there, in front of us.” Jaron looked at her and then at Michael. “Then, I need to find myself, and find out what am I doing on this planet; this lifetime. I had never thought I could exist here, earlier, than that single lifetime, on Earth. I’m deeply puzzled, and worried. What am I, or was I, doing here on Earth, during its Medieval period, and why?” Michael looked over, at the woman. She was stirring. She opened her eyes and glanced at the pair. Light was emanating from Michael, and it lit up the nearby trees around them. Michael turned to face her. Amelia sat up. “I wondered if you were a dream, and you seem not to be. I have never had two dreams play into each other, like this, so I expect that you’re both real.” Jaron looked at Michael, and then at Amelia. She had been watching them, for some time, feigning sleep. “So, who are you two, really?” Really? Jaron thought to her. She stared at him; wide eyed. Michael looked at Jaron, and then at her. Well? He thought again. This time, she shook her head as though something was loose. Jaron thought again. You’re right, we’re not from here.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 545 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

She stared at him and was about to verbally ask, and then stopped, and thought. She looked up at Jaron, and thought, Then where? Jaron in response, pointed up, to the sky. He smiled. She was about to ask something else, and Jaron raised his hand, as though to stop the game. “I’m not from there. I’m simply from out there.” Out there. “Stop that!” she retorted. “Stop listening to my thoughts, and I don’t want to hear yours, either.” “Sorry,” Jaron answered back. “We won’t do that again.” She looked at him, perplexed. Jaron waved his hand, and a kaleidoscope of images of small bright spots appeared, glittering, in the night. “This is an image, of what is out there. These white dots up there, are suns, like yours. Many have worlds like this, going around them, as yours does.” Amelia wasn’t scared, but rather intrigued. Jaron brought up and lowered the planets, explained them and showed her, how they worked. “I’m a person like you, Amelia. I have come a long way, to expand my ability, to be able to do things, like this. Anyone can do it, if they get the opportunity, and have the fortitude and persistence to.” “Me too?” Jaron nodded.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 546 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“How?” she asked. She was very eager.

Ω

I have you, thought Amanda, to Jaron. Jaron looked at Amelia, and then at Amanda, as though frozen in time. The universe stayed still. Jaron and Amanda were able to see; in that specific frame of the universe. It was now a static frame, where there was no time, only frozen impartiality, or where there was no life. Jaron had no form. Neither did Amanda. The universe had no three dimensional quality, about it. There was no solidity to it. It was as though the universe was a flat, two-dimensional screen, which was everywhere that one looked. Jaron could change position at will, within it, but the universe didn’t move. He truly understood time, now. It really was the change from one flat three- dimensional universe frame, to another, and nothing else. Time wasn’t a commodity. It was what one considered as an action, between frames; it was the doing, from one frame of the universe, to the next; it was all of these, and what life viewing the universe, considered it to be. When Jaron and Amanda had previously left the universe, to travel in time, they had to flow around and outside of the physical universe. Now, they could stay in it and not leave. Now they could slide, from one frame, to another. Amanda explained that it was the coils she had working, inside her ship.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 547 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

They were drawing on broadmatter energy, to be able to be separate, from one frame of the universe, to the next. Amanda was highly refining her experience, in time-moving. Ready? asked Amanda. Ready, responded Jaron. Jaron watched, as the universe started to move again, but backwards, as they began to go, back in time. It regained its solidity, through consecutive frames changing one after the other. It was time, which gave the physical universe, its last component of solidity. In what seemed a few seconds, the frames slowed and Jaron asked, Here? Yes. However, we’re in northern Italy. You’re also close by, in a body. Is she here, too? Yes, Captain. However, as you can see she doesn’t meet him. Her life doesn’t join his. They pass by. Someone has interfered; with their past meeting. Jaron looked back, into his memory. He looked through the frames of the physical universe, of where they were. He could also look forward, into time, and then back again, as though sweeping time, for data. He looked at the subject of Amelia. It was 1572. He was a priest then, happily learning. He could see himself. He could also see Amelia, looking at him. However, there was nothing happening. Are you sure that you want to do this, Captain?

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 548 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron looked in his memory. He could see back, the hundreds of years of time, back through the parallel vortexes of what really happened, and what almost happened, and what was most likely to have happened, if he changed her and him now. It was as though, if he changed his past, thousands of years ago, his memories changed, to suit the events, as he changed them. He didn’t have to come out from the present time, of where he was, and return to Black Knight around planet Earth, to find out what had happened. He already knew. Right now, he had an almost infinite variety of pasts, present, and future memories. He only had to select what he would do. He looked at a memory. He inspected its probability, for that was all memories were; probabilities of happenings, now past. He looked over, at the streetscape. There: he was as Giordano Bruno29. He was a priest. Jaron

29 INFORMATION: Giordano Bruno: 1548 – 1600. He was ordained as a priest at 24, but was reading widely of forbidden works, known as a free thinker. He was originally named Fillippo Bruno, but changed his name to Giordano to honour his tutor in metaphysics, by the same name. Bruno was in trouble with the Church over the years, and lectured in England and many other countries across Europe, publishing books on his theories. In 1579 he arrived in Geneva seeking religious liberty and security. He had great talent. He denied he was a sorcerer, but was widely known for his memory abilities. He taught at universities in England, Germany, and Czechoslovakia. He believed the sun was one of many stars and that there were many worlds, even with other E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 549 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

looked at the position, of where Amanda was. “I was an ordained Dominican priest?” Apparently, Amanda thought back. Jaron shrugged. He looked at the image of Bruno, and wondered if he even looked like, he did. Giordano Bruno looked around, obviously sensing something. He had just given a lesson, to an interested group of businessmen, on the current theory of logic, and that perhaps there wasn’t just mono logic, but dual logic. Jaron was intrigued. He thought over to the figure, Mono logic? Yes, came back the reply. Everything is ordained. Everything is as per God’s wishes. Nothing escapes him, as he pervades everywhere. Amanda was sensing an inner dilemma building inside her Captain. Correct, there are two logics, at least. There is right and wrong, and it isn’t single, as you assume. Bruno thought about this, for a moment. He looked at the shimmering air, in front of him. He looked at it hard. He walked around it, and stared at it. He wanted to put his finger in it, but decided against that. He shrugged, and began to walk away.

people. In 1592 he was imprisoned in Italy, sent to Rome and tried, and in 1600 was burned by the Roman inquisition when Pope Clement VIII declared him a heretic.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 550 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Turn around. Instantly, Bruno did, and looked at the shimmering light. He quickly stepped away, but the shimmering followed him. Bruno walked faster. He turned right, and crossed a wooden bridge, watching the shimmering, as it followed him. He was going to turn right, off the bridge but the shimmering air got there first, so he went the other way. He walked fast. Finally, he turned around, and faced the shimmering effect. “Who, or what are you, and may the spirit of the angels remove your demonic presence!” He held up the palm of his hand. The shimmering moved back a few paces. Bruno smiled. “I have you now, and he kept following and eventually chased the demonic shimmering, down an alley. He stopped dumb struck, when he was confronted by Michael. Bruno swallowed. He crossed his chest and murmured, that he apologized, for forever doubting. He swallowed. “I’m in trouble.” Michael shook his head. “Not half as much, if you don’t pay attention.” Bruno took a quick step back, and turned. Michael now stood on the other side of him, blocking his escape. “Don’t run, please.” Instantly, Bruno began to run. Michael lifted him, just enough off the ground, by decision, so his feet were no longer touching. “Can you for the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 551 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

moment, my young Captain, pay attention. Sorry, Captain.” Bruno looked around. No one was in sight. He looked at a rat, watching him. He flicked his hand at the rat intending it to go away. “I will lower you, if you don’t run, and will listen to me.” Bruno nodded. He was lowered. He was happy, that his feet touched the ground, now. Michael asked, “You’re fine now, and won’t run?” Bruno looked sideways. “I’m … no. I will be fine.” Michael looked at the rat, and the rat turned, and fled. “You were sent by, Him?” Michael shook his head. “Not directly. Actually, you sent me, on an errand.” Bruno looked at the huge muscular angel. “Me?” he asked meekly. “Yes. Now, pay attention. I’m going to give you instructions, you must follow, and you must be open, to understand what you see.” Bruno nodded. Michael then looked, in the direction of the shimmering light. “That isn’t the devil. It’s you, but in the future. I’m here, so the two of you can communicate. Don’t ask how.” Michael looked at Bruno. “I said, don’t ask, but I can feel your thinking. Turn it off, and just accept for a moment, what you can see, please.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 552 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Bruno swallowed and looked at the shimmering. Michael then waved to the shimmering and it started to show a picture, of another part of Italy. “This is in 1642. Captain, please move closer.” Jaron moved closer, into the image. Bruno stared, and stepped forward. “That has a likeness,” he said. Jaron spoke while Michael, or Amanda, translated the words into a Naples Italian dialect. “Yes, I’m you, but from well into the future. You’re right, in thinking that there are other worlds out there, other planets. You have your own belief, it’s good. You’re right, in your critical thinking. Now, listen. There is a woman, whom you must meet. I met her, and somehow I have unthreaded the past, and I need to thread it back, into the future. To bring the desired future about, which is good for all, you need to meet her.” Bruno looked to Michael, who simply nodded. Pay attention to yourself, thought Jaron to Bruno. Bruno looked at Michael, who just sighed, and turned to Jaron. “Captain, how did you get to be the person, who most influences the entire galaxy, when you’re like this, him, eh?” Jaron looked at himself. “Bruno, it’s correct. You do become someone extraordinary, but not so much this lifetime, but in future lifetimes. Your name as Bruno however, isn’t forgotten, and is remembered, down through history, as well.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 553 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Future lifetimes?” Bruno asked incredulously. “That subject is forbidden.” Jaron nodded. “Yes, I know, but it’s true. Now, this woman is about to pass, and you will miss her. She crosses your path many times, and you haven’t noticed her, any of these times. This is the last time, that her path crosses yours. You must meet her. She has memories, into the future. You must meet her, and she will become an inspiration, for you.” Bruno looked down back through the alley and a young woman walked past, along the other street. She disappeared, by the alley opening. “Why are you behind that shimmering air? Why can’t you and I meet?’ asked Bruno. “Nothing exists, in the same place, at the same time, as a duplicate of itself, in this universe. If we met, we would both vanish. However, a picture of me, in the future, is barely tolerable and bends the laws of the universe, but it doesn’t break them.” Bruno thought about this. “Who made the laws of the universe?” Hurry, man! This was Michael’s mental instruction; Bruno jumped, and saw Jaron waving, to him. Jaron gave another image of her, of Amelia, as she was being tortured, at the hands of the Talkron, posing as priests, in 1642. Bruno nodded. He understood. He ran; he was going to save this woman. He rounded the corner, saw the young woman, and sprinted after her.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 554 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He caught her, in less than a minute, out of breath. “Excuse me. I’m here, to meet you,” he panted. Amelia looked at him. “I’m sorry; I don’t know you. Have we met? You do look familiar.” Bruno nodded. He thought she had a nice smile. He was still catching his breath. “Did I meet you in?” She tried to think. “It was… You look so familiar, as if I really do know you. Where was that?” Bruno shrugged. He looked back at the alley and Michael was still there, leaning on a wall, but semi translucent. He waved, at Bruno to continue. Bruno swallowed. “In the future, I think.” Amelia liked that. She smiled. “You’re very forward, but I don’t normally talk to strangers.” As she was about to leave, Bruno stepped in her way. “We’re not strangers. We met; in the future. How can we be strangers?” Amelia thought about that. “How do you know that we met in the future?” “It was from another life time, I’m told, in the future, and out there, I’m to believe.” Amelia looked, to where he was pointing. She smiled. “Are you a writer?” Bruno nodded. “I am.” He swallowed. “Walk with me down by the Grand Canal, out in the open, and tell me more of what you write. I am interested. You see, I have dreams of worlds, out there. They haunt me.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 555 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Bruno nodded. He was now very interested, in this woman. He understood why that angel was so forceful, about him, having to meet her. He felt his pocket and swallowed again. He had no money. He wondered what he should do. Here is a one-time help, with money. You’ve done well Bruno. The future is congealing now, as we desire. We can sense it. You must learn from this woman, and you must travel with her, and teach, with her. Bruno glanced behind him; he saw Michael and the shimmering air, next to him. Then, he felt his pockets weigh down. He pulled out a pouch, and opened it. It contained silver and gold coins.” Amelia looked at them, too. She smiled. “So, you’re a rich writer, trying to impress me?” Bruno shrugged. “So, it would seem. I think.” He put that pouch away and brought out two more, from different pockets. There was the same amount inside each pouch. He pulled out one of the gold coins and looked at it; closely. “It looks real.” He handed it to her; she shrugged, and gave it back. “So, mister rich writer, what do you want to do? Tell me about your writing. You have my attention.” Bruno smiled. “I’m meant to take you to other countries, and teach what it is you know. What is it that you know?” Amelia looked at Bruno. He was cute, but he was certainly strange. She had never met a man like him, before. She didn’t care about the money, and

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 556 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

she didn’t think he did, either. However, he seemed genuinely interested, in wanting to learn about what her strange dreams were, and maybe, that made them compatible.

Ω

Back in 1642, Jaron was watching the woman, in front of him. She started to fade from view. Jaron swallowed, as she became ethereal and slowly vanished. Her presence was gone. Jaron turned to Amanda, “She will be all right. She will move up, through time and avoid the Talkron torture of 1642, as she is in a different life time-stream, now. That stream is with Bruno, at least for several years.” Jaron next looked into his memories of the future and smiled. He breathed out relief. Moisture collected in his eyes. He sat quiet for a moment, looking into space. Amanda was also quiet, giving him the time to explore the worlds, which he wanted to shift, by being back in time. Jaron looked up, to the sky. “She avoids being tortured, after Mars Base is raided. It seems that the Talkron don’t chase her down, now. We succeeded.” Jaron was fighting off the emotion of grief, from success.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 557 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

That’s correct Captain. However, the Talkron torture you, as Bruno, instead, and that’s your death, in 1600. Do you wish to correct that? Jaron looked to where Amelia was. I know that happens, now. Nevertheless, it doesn’t change me, nor what happens, in the future. My life as Goren Torren is unaffected. Jaron looked towards Amanda. My concern was for her, and has been, only for her. She was my greatest fighting companion and inspiration against the Talkron. Thank you, Amanda. Thank you very much, for helping. I couldn’t leave her suffering the torture, the way she did. I feel better now. I can see the memories of Amy now, finally being flooded with newer and better times. She still is killed in that battle on Mars while I’m away in Jilta. I’m not about to change that. What the Talkron did to her, the torture, has been avoided. Instead, I found her body dead on the floor, next to Anki. They both died, in the gun battle, from the invading Talkron. Neither of them suffered torture. Amanda sighed. She was satisfied. The past was successfully changed. Jaron nodded. He was ready to return to the Sequetus 3, of his birth time.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 558 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 15

ARAGON

Marshal Grant Tagora was aboard a converted Templar frigate. He was watching the screens. He had lost hundreds of men and woman on Maluka, so far. However, the Hallowmen kept coming in, to volunteer. He sat back. His team was only volunteers, hardened by their own decision, to go and right wrongs. They weren’t conscripted Templars or Cordukes, given mission orders. His group would have been the best of gentlemen, at another time. That’s how he ran his team. There were several thousand of them now, all over the galaxy. He had files on them, and their families. He had met each of them, and they had called him Grant, the same as the Master Templar had. He sat back. He liked his team, his huge family, of which he was the father figure. His team knew their fate and they carried their own death suicide pacts. They carried death pills, exploding devices in their brains, and necks. They knew, when it was over. Grant also knew their parents, and their brothers, and sisters. He devoted some time each day to knowing something about them. When one of his team died, they were memorialized. He lamented

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 559 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

each one who perished, in their service of the House of Torren. The screens showed maps, of Maluka. They had made inroads. For every twenty teams that arrived and went onto Maluka, one team survived. The attrition rate was extreme. There was little else he could think to do; than suffer the pain of losses. Finally, he had several teams in Aragon. He had teams on two of their moons. None had been able to penetrate Moon Oros, however. His personal fleet was now out from Tinkly. The planet was the old Jiltanian outpost that had, once been inside the early Malukan sector. Since the Battle of Sequetus 3 it had fallen inside Jiltanian borders. At Talagor, an ex-Malukan system, were Corduke Fleets. All ships in all fleets had been converted. The ship drives were free life, operating on their own volition. The Jiltanian sector divided the known Santonia Galaxy into three. There was the Jilta sector, and its allies, in Kalanon, Farsen and now Palbo, forming a block of determined spirit, against an ingress of evil. It was as if the demarcation lines of the old Battle for Sequetus 3 were being drawn up; again. This time, the target was Maluka. Timbor, Penek and Pilik were abstaining from conflict with Maluka. However, the Temple had on their side, the Outer Worlds, and beyond them, the far Outer Worlds. They were so far from Sequetus,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 560 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

that they had to have their zealous cries watered down for worry that the Federation would fear them, more than the Talkron threat. The sector of Tilb was quietly pressured, by the Jilta’s own old Out-Worlds. These small regions of hardened fighting, from Iranda and Talap, had quietly infiltrated into Tilb society, over many months under Corduke direction. Tilb wasn’t taking sides. This left Siltonia, Tilk and Patu as the only sectors with any sympathy, to Maluka. For the past year, they were being neutralized. Teams of Cordukes, again, had been going in. The Cordellos and their networks had pacified all other sectors.

Ω

Gurano was standing, on the top floor of the Giando Tower30. The passing satellites were no longer noticing him. Corduke ships, way out there, had given him a 4D shroud. By 4D meant that he was being shrouded, by four different craft, from four different sides. In theory, it meant he would never be detected. However, in reality, he knew that it was also likely, at one point, that his shroud would be revealed and he would have to escape, until his shroud was reinstated.

30 INFORMATION: Giando Tower: The largest building in Aragon, measuring 227 floors. Searfinders Index p. 5867.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 561 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The trouble was that the ships out there were also under shrouds. They had to move, to avoid detection, being so close. They were within the Maluka system itself, not far from Maluka. It was a close, six-way cross. There were six ships, in the small fleet. They were covering each other five ways, and at the same time, they covered their teams on the ground, with four-way shrouds. The operation was complex, and if one ship had to move, they all moved, as a group.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 562 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Aragon Central from Giando Tower

Until that time, when Gurano’s shroud would become exposed, he was recording, and his data was being sent back, successfully. He looked at his instruments. They were pinging in both directions, meaning his data was going out, and it was being acknowledged, as being received.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 563 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He looked towards the next building. He turned on his instruments. They began to record. There were heat emissions, water vapor output, and energy from lines, broadmatter emissions, and gravity- inpull. All these readings meant something, when analyzed as a whole. There was also the output of carbon dioxide from the air vents, telling him the ratio of people breathing compared to the volume. They compared that, to the size of the building. The numbers inside were then calculated. He now nodded, to his partner. She was a volunteer, too. She was strong. She was about to stand, when two doors blew in. She rolled, grabbed her weapon and began firing. Gurano covered her and shot three of the enemy, which looked like ordinary City Security. He headed to the side of the window. She barricaded the door. He looked at his partner, and she shook her head. “I’m not going, without a fight,” she screamed over the wails of explosion noises from the side. She shot one of the C-Ss in the arm. Gurano knew when Feli was angry, and this was it. He took his hand away from the detonator button, which would have blown both their bodies to pieces. He shot two more C-Ss. “Follow me,” he called. “Get away from the windows. Follow!” he yelled, as he dove to his right while throwing two grenades out through cracks, in the doors.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 564 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He then dived through a small open hatch, in the wall. He had spied it, when they entered. The data in his small tabulator showed the chute fell fifteen floors: straight down. He reasoned that it was better, than dying there. Feli followed, and jumped through, without any second thought. Gurano was in freefall. Feli was behind him. They both knew that they would most likely break their necks. However, the chute didn’t end at a bare metal floor, but rather, slid out sideways and started to veer away from being a sheer vertical drop. They veered more. Their decent was slowing, for no apparent reason. Gurano felt that he might now survive. He could see light coming up ahead. He swallowed. He could hear Feli, cursing him, from behind. That made him strangely happy. Then, the end of the shoot came, and they shot out sideways through it, into a large open room, like bullets from a gun. However, they didn’t die. They started to slow down, tumbled over the floor, and finally ended, upside down against a far wall. Gurano looked at the concrete beneath his face, and started to push himself up. He was amazed that his body still worked. Nothing was broken. Feli was upside down, against the wall, too. She saw figures in black, and she tried to fire her weapon. It misfired. She screamed. “Centor junk! Gurano, why can’t we have our guns made in Jilta?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 565 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Gurano shook his head, as his own weapon flew away, from his hands. He looked up and there were four figures. The nearest was reaching out her hand, to him. She was wearing an antiquated dark shocksuit. “My name is Maroen.” She reached down and helped pull him up. Feli screamed at Markoni, “Don’t touch me. I’m fine. Don’t touch!” “Very well, Hallowman Feli, my name is Markoni. It’s nice to meet you. We need to hurry, though.” Feli looked at him, upside down. She was wedged, between two pieces of ducting. “Gurano, are you going to stand gawking, or you gonna get me out?” she screamed, twisting violently. Gurano looked at the four in shocksuits, and ran over to Feli. He pulled her away from the wall, and she quickly righted herself.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 566 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Markoni handing back weapons

Markoni tossed them their rifles. “We’re Boguard. Follow us. By the way, a nice escape you two! We need to get further, under the building. You’re on the second basement floor. We need to go to the seventh basement floor.” Gurano caught up with Markoni, as he was taking aim, and four C-Ss were coming down the stairs. “The plans only show five lower floors.” Markoni slowly smiled. “That’s correct. The other floors belong to us, not the Talkron. Quickly.” With that, they took four steps down, and in minutes were lower, under the buildings.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 567 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“This is below sea level here, and we have two more floors to go.” Markoni winked at Gurano, who in turn glanced over, at Feli. Feli looked at those, who had saved them. “You’re Malukan?” Maroen laughed aloud, as she leaped over the landing. She indicated to them, to hurry. “Three tunnels and one more floor, and they’ll never find us.” Feli looked back. “I’m not surprised. I would be lost here; for years.” Maroen smiled. “This is our world. You have been to the Royal Court of Jilta? You’re Hallowmen, correct?” Feli looked at Gurano. They were verging on forbidden talk. Maroen felt it, in their thoughts. “It’s fine if you don’t say. We understand that, and honor oaths, of confidentiality. However, in the Royal Palace, there are the Boguard, who are the care keepers of the palace, and have been so, since the Confederated Council of Planets. That’s who we are, and belong to.” Feli looked at them. “You seem a long way, from home.” Maroen smiled. “If you only knew. Jilta is not our home. We are only there; to guard the palace.” After the final stairs, and last corridors, a dozen Boguard Fronts met them. They were bigger and

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 568 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

stronger, than anyone, who Feli had ever seen. They looked her over. She stood taller, with her chin out. “Who are you trying to be then?” she asked the nearest. That Boguard Front simply looked at her. He shook his head. “We’re not challenging you, Hallowman Feli. We’re on your side. I admire you.” She looked him up and down. “What use is your hulk, in a place like this, then?” The Boguard Front looked at her, and she started to rise from the ground. I have other abilities too, Hallowman. Being able to make my body any size, is one of them. When you’re ready and able, you too, can change your body shape. However, until you’ve had the training, please be quiet. We have a war to fight; together. I’m not your enemy. With that, the Boguard Front gently lowered her back down, on to the floor. Gurano had remained quiet, during this. He nodded. “I had heard rumors, that Boguard could do extraordinary things. However, I thought they were rumors, started for some special purpose, not because they are real.” He turned to Feli. “Hallowman, are you all right?” “Yep,” she said. Then she added “Fine.” She checked to see if her gun was charged, and plugged it into the power pack, strapped to her back. The Boguard Front she had spoken to; then turned and saluted Markoni. Markoni half returned

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 569 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

the salute, nodded and led the way down, through the next tunnel. Feli looked at the water running along the side of the tunnel. She had smelled it and it was rotten. She kept her mouth closed, and didn’t offer another word. She was glad to be alive. This was the most secure, that she had felt, in weeks. She swallowed. She was beginning to wonder that perhaps she might get out from this war, alive.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 570 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 16

EPILOGUE

The ship conversions continued, and spread to the far-Outer Worlds. They passed through all the Federation Sectors. Marshal Grant Tagora sat back. His men and women were being placed correctly. The attrition rate was declining. His crews seemed to be winning, for some reason. It seemed they were now learning about Maluka, what was where, and which buildings were important.

Ω

The Master Templar sat back, as Macrod Curr explained the happenings on Maluka. It seemed the Federation was ready for the final cleansing of the Talkron, from all their borders.

Ω

Jaron reappeared, back in Black Knight. His mission had been successful. Akeala was excited about his return. Yandra had secured all of Sequetus, and was now building up defenses, against the probable return of the Talkron. He wasn’t expecting them

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 571 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

soon, but he was preparing. His crew was further occupied, researching on Earth where the Talkron had come from.

Ω

Tubin had returned to Palbo with his Palboan Templar Fleet. He was readying for what was likely his next program: to take Maluka, with regular troops. The Palboans were similar to the Malukans, in many ways. The Talkron had controlled them, and the Talkron had once directly implanted Tubin. He had lost his mother, to the Talkron. Tubin had a personal vendetta, against the Talkron. They killed his two infant brothers as well. He vowed to be their most powerful enemy, after his father. He also came from good Sequetus genes, and he reasoned that gave him every right to take his stand, and demand the Talkron be expunged, from the Malukan sector. Furthermore, he reasoned that as Earth was once Malukan, he again had more right to be there, than most. He didn’t want killing. He wanted to be free of Talkron control, forever. His recruiting ground was wide open. Those who volunteered, were those who had been once implanted, and under the direct control, of the Talkron. As with all ex-implant victims, they now became zealous opponents to implanters, who would never back away. They had already been there, and experienced Talkron life. Death had become a

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 572 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

preferred option, to the other way of Talkron life, for these people.

Ω

A provisional government was being prepared on Gogon, getting ready for their invasion day.

Ω

Under the surface of Yaltipia, the full Boulan was meeting, in Ataran. None of them was anywhere near convinced that they could win, a so-called full out war. If a war was being orchestrated, by outside influences, this council needed to know. They agreed. It looked like the Federation and the galaxy were going to war, and were poised for victory. However, no war ever ended in its dreamed victory. Those who won, simply lost less. That was all war was: the story of two losers. On the other hand, the Boguard had no option but to fight, for they knew that the Talkron had been planning their galactic invasion, for millennia. “Sirs, the Talkron have left, and have taken with them, some of the fastest craft we have detected. They are a match for our Man-o-Wars. On and around Maluka, are thousands of craft. These Trans Galactic ships may, or may not, be simply converted.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 573 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

We honestly don’t know. They could also be booby trapped, being Malukan.” “What of Jilta?” asked another Boulan executive. “Is it secure? We can’t risk what almost happened, under Brandon Mirak.” A murmur went through the Boulan. This was the first full meeting of the Boulan, in two decades. Normally, the Boulan met in smaller groups and elected their executives, to meet and make decisions. This was too important, and the full five hundred were present, except for Jaron. “We need to send at least another battalion, to fortify the Royal Palace.” “Is that enough? It almost was not, last time, and we lost it, temporarily.” They recalled how the generals of Brandon Mirak had taken the palace, for their own. Back then, it was the quick thinking of the palace Boguard, and the resistance of the Templars, that held out and won it back. “We can’t risk it happening, again.” There was a consensus.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 574 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

End of

Maluka Rising

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 575 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 576 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Orbat CHAPTER 5

Sub-Contents

Sub-chapter 1 Yaltipia

Sub-chapter 2 Orbat

Sub-chapter 3 New Orbat City

Sub-chapter 4 Sheril

Sub-chapter 5 Black Knight Again

Sub-chapter 6 Karavat

Sub-chapter 7 Akeala Dreaming

Sub-chapter 8 Readiness

Sub-chapter 9 Conversations

Sub-chapter 10 Maroen & Markoni

Sub-chapter 11 The Palace

Sub-chapter 12 Amazon

Sub-chapter 13 Epilogue

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 577 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 1

YALTIPIA

aron was back in Ataran of Yaltipia, meeting with the executive board of the Boulan. He had J finished debriefing his most recent mission, back into time. He was now preparing, his next mission. “Lorde Jaron.” It was Consulair Brijet Yaldon. She bowed. While Jaron was esteemed, due to his lineage and who he was, he wasn’t the leader of the Boguard. There was no single leader. The eighteen consulair members, or the Executive Council of Ataran, which was its formal name, led the Boguard. To become a consulair, one wasn’t appointed, nor elected. One had to be invited to join, by the other consulair members, or their deputy-consulair members. Each consulair had three deputies. A consulair either died, or retired. Their replacement had to be a unanimous decision, by the surviving consulairs. They usually chose someone, from one of the deputy ranks. Once chosen, the candidates name was put to the five hundred regular Boulan, for verbal ratification. The candidate was discussed by the consulair members. If there was no dissenting voice, from either body, the appointment was said to be unanimous.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 578 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

While Jaron wasn’t part of the Executive Council of Ataran, or even a deputy consulair, he was a senior member of the Boulan, and titled Lorde. His title of Lorde was an honorary title, carried over from his Temple appointment. The Boguard didn’t have Lorde as a Boguard rank, but they acknowledged it as a status, and used outside titles within their ranks, when suitable. That was their custom. Jaron’s full title was Excellency Lorde Boulan Jaron of Sequetus 3. Jaron had just received a standing ovation by the entire Boulan, for his work. He had stood there, in front of them, with Amanda. Her image was beside him, as he downloaded the brief memories, of their experience of time traveling, to medieval Earth. Jaron could feel Amanda, her thoughts and sensations. She glowed, as Jaron explained what they had done. As he talked of the Talkron, which they had met, in the past, Amanda changed hue and shades of light, as the story progressed. The Boulan learned that the Talkron weren’t only in the past, they were active there, too. This; they had suspected; now they acknowledged it, as fact. The Boulan now had their own time chrononauts, as Jaron called them. Jaron outlined the theories of time, and how these Talkron chrononauts were going back into time, and that they were now actively working in the present, as well as in the past, and most likely, into the future.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 579 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The image of Amanda

Jaron explained that the physical universe went through time vents, to progress from one instant to the next, and that as the universe changed, it depended on the future, to pull the present, and the past universe, to push it, into the present. Jaron explained that while the past had great bearing on the present, so did the future. To change the present, one could act in three main theatres. There was the past, and now they knew about the future. The past affected the future, and the future affected the past. It was a new concept, for although one accepted that the past created the future, it was new thinking, that the future was inextricably tied, into creating the past.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 580 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

If one did go into the future, and change it, one would come back, to a different past, which had altered, to accommodate the new future. This was a universal law; it couldn’t be violated. Travel in time was possible, but the law of the bonds, between past, present and future, were absolute. Jaron was now sitting in a mountain retreat, on Yaltipia. He looked at Yaltipia’s sister planet of Orbat. He turned back to Brijet. He recalled the first time they had met, decades ago, on his first Boguard mission. Then, they had shared command of the mission, which took place, above the little known planet, of Rambus. How the universe had changed, since then. He sighed, and had his attention brought back to the present, by the sound of Brijet’s voice. “So, are they also heavily active, in the future?” asked Brijet. “The present is propelled by the past. We all know that, and have that as our basic text, in every religious and formal saying. However, if the future is also pulling our present, then that can explain why we are having so much trouble now; shaping the present. Someone in the future, is undoing it.” Jaron nodded. “That’s correct. The past, future and present must bleed into each other. They must shape and interact, as a whole. If the future changes, then the present changes with it, so the present can explain the future. The future effects the past, and believe it or not, the past changes,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 581 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

unknown to any outside of those who know of the future change.” Brijet sat back and looked out, at the clouds. She didn’t say anything. She just thought. She had seen so much in her time, and just as she believed that they were finally winning, new theatres of effort were always required.

Looking to Orbat from Yaltipia

After she had been on mission, with Jaron to Rambus, decades ago, she had been quickly promoted. She had seen theatres of war in Sleebo, and then, in Palbo. Her major missions however, were later, in the field of time-warping. She, and dozens, and then, hundreds of other Boulan, had broken through into the past, after Jaron had first discovered how to get one’s point of attention there. Like him, they found they could change their thoughts back then, and back then, become aware of

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 582 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

the future. By doing this, they could change the present, and thus the past, as time wore on. She had found of course, that not only was it possible, to go actually into the past, but the Talkron were somehow active there, too. Now, she has discovered, that the .Talkron also infiltrates the future. Jaron could feel her thoughts. They were strong, and obvious. She turned to him, though half glancing back at Orbat. “You are thinking, like I am?” Jaron smiled. “Yes, the Pleiadians on Orbat, have been quiet for hundreds of years, since the intervention of Sequetus 3.” She nodded. “Yes, but we need them now, and their abilities.” Jaron looked at Orbat. It was an amazing duality of two planets, each revolving around the other, around a shared epicenter, which revolved around its sun. Jaron thought it familiar, to the moon of his youth. He would sit in the Amazon jungle, looking up at the Earth’s moon, wondering if one day, that he might travel there. He looked over at Brijet. “I’m ready to go; to Orbat.” She smiled, and unmasked a thought, which she had been hiding. “This evening, Lorde Jaron, you were appointed to full Boulan Consulair, of the Executive Council of Ataran. Your title is now: Excellency Lorde Consulair of Ataran, Jaron of

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 583 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Sequetus 3.” She smiled widely, looking directly at him. Jaron was genuinely surprised. He looked back at her. He could say nothing. She broke the silence. “You aren’t going to refuse?” No, thought Jaron. Of course not. However, I’m not of Aaron birth. I’m from Earth. I’m surprised. She laughed. “Lorde Jaron, you are the holy of holies, when it comes to lineage. Nevertheless, your humility is well placed, and it will serve you. The Executive Council will meet you, in an hour’s time. You will find a new wardrobe, in your berthing premises. The Executive Council will greet you as a new member, but more importantly, they will be the ones to brief you, on your next mission.” Jaron nodded, and smiled. He said nothing. Brijet stood, and looked at their sister planet, and as Jaron stood, looking at her, she nodded in the direction of Orbat. She smiled.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 584 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Chapter 2

O R B A T

Jaron was on his way to Orbat. It was only a few minutes ago, that they had left the smooth air confines of Yaltipia, and were in the open blackness, of space. Jaron looked into the cockpit of the shuttle. A young Boguard Leader was at the controls. “We will be there in three and a half hours, sir.” Jaron nodded. He walked back to the passengers’ lounge. A waiter came over, and asked, if he needed anything. Jaron shook his head, and looked towards Brijet. She just smiled, shook her head at the waiter, and looked out through the porthole, at Orbat. She liked the openness, and the vastness of Yaltipia, but she also admired the lush wetness, of Orbat. She sighed. It was a lonely universe knowing that no one else knew where you were, or who you were. She looked over to Jaron, while casually masking her thoughts. She admired him, the one, who was to save them all. He definitely was the prophesized one. However, at the same time, she saw his aging body. He was now getting old, fast. They seemed like the same age, when they met off Rambus, those decades ago. Her body had barely anything to show, for those past decades. Jaron on the other hand, had gotten

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 585 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

considerably older, as though he had lived two hundred years.

Orbat

Brijet sighed, and put her mind to the mission ahead. She tried not to show it, but she felt empathy for short-lifers. Barely had they gained adulthood, than they quickly aged, and died. It was as if they were diseased, from birth. She wondered who had altered their genes, and what the motive was for so doing. That riddle still hadn’t been answered. The shuttle began to slow, on cue. Orbat and its bright blue seas were very close, now. There was a set docking procedure, between the twin planets. Shuttles couldn’t simply traverse E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 586 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

space, and land on a planet, without quarantine and checks being performed. Orbat had a dozen docking stations, which received craft. Passengers and goods were off loaded, and new craft took the passengers down, onto the planet. These craft had been designed for the heavier air, and stricter security. Jaron and Brijet were waiting in the security VIP lounge of the docking station. Around them, was a detail of fourteen Boguard security staff. They had the room to themselves. The docking station captain had just entered the room. He was a middle aged Pleiadian. He hadn’t met any of the Aaron, before. He had never been on their planet. He had heard strange rumors about the race, but now, having seen them face to face, he was relieved, to find they appeared as human, as he was. He looked at their dress. It seemed very formal. His own security personnel had been in touch, with this delegation’s security people. This impromptu visit had caught the captain, off guard. He could see by the decorative insignia, on the uniform of the central pair, that this was an important sophisticated group, of Aaron. They weren’t simple farmers. He could see that. The ship they had arrived in, it was unlike any other, that he’d seen, before. The captain nodded and gave a Pleiadian salute, to his chest. “My sirs, it’s obvious to me, that you are important ambassadors from Yaltipia, and I’m to treat you, as though you are your Twin Planet’s emissaries.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 587 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron stood. “Thank you, captain. In fact, we really are our planet’s emissaries. We are on our way, to meet with our twin planet’s Governor General.” The captain took a quarter step back. He knew nothing about this mission, and felt aghast. Jaron looked at the captain: Captain, you are correct. You weren’t informed. However, the security of this mission, to meet your Governor General, is so high, that no advance warning was possible. Now that we are inside your planet’s protective magnetic sphere, and no radio messages can leave, towards outer space, we will let you make the necessary inquiries. The captain had experienced thought communication; twice in his life before, but never was it so clear, refined, and as perfect a thought pattern, as this. He stood there; mouth open. Brijet coughed, a little embarrassed, for the captain in front of her. “Captain,” she said, “Do you think we can set down with a vehicle immediately, at the Governor General’s office?” The captain looked a bit ruffled. “I believe that it can be arranged. I will let the Yaltipian Ambassador also know, that you are on the way, and ask him to make the arrangements.” Jaron nodded. The Yaltipian Ambassador had already been well informed, of their arrival. The captain left, and eight minutes later, returned. He looked at the surrounding Boguard,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 588 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

realizing these men and women were highly protective of this pair, and capable of handling anything, which might happen. He nodded. “Lorde Jaron, I understand who you are now. You will be taken immediately, to the residence and the lawns, of the Governor General. All of you will be there, in seventeen minutes.” The captain slowly saluted, then bowed twice, just to be sure. He exited, backwards. Brijet smiled. “This captain isn’t used to seeing dignitaries.” “All the better, for us. His thoughts are easier to discern,” answered Jaron. The shuttle was beginning to enter the atmosphere, and the Orbat terrain was becoming clearer to see between the layers of cloud below. There were mountains, farmlands, reservoirs, and then the edge of their city.

Ω

The Governor General was standing on the lawns, with his wife, by his side. Jaron was looking down, from the window. “He looks friendly.” Brijet nodded. “He is.” The shuttle halted, on the marked out lawn shuttle bay. Eight Boguard alighted, with Jaron and Brijet following.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 589 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The Governor General was alert, not to allow any slip of his own thoughts. While the races from Orbat and Yaltipia were extremely cooperative, they were acknowledged, as being very separate. For that reason, there was a slight hesitancy, during meetings, of races. The visiting party was ushered inside the house. The Governor General had a security detail of twenty-six bodyguards, not so many as to intimidate the Boguard, but enough, so that they all felt protected. Outside of his compound, were another two hundred security personnel, and in the outer grounds of the compound, were a further three dozen secret-security personnel. The senior Boguard Security Officer looked; at both Jaron and Brijet: All clean outside. There are no impure thoughts leaking anywhere, which we can detect. Brijet nodded. They had brought their highest sensing Boguard staff. Moments later, they were in the Governor General’s reception room. Jaron was looking at the wall paintings. “They are very beautiful scenes. They remind me of Jilta, or even; parts of Earth.” The Governor General nodded, “Yes Jaron, it’s what I’m led to believe. Tell me, what is Earth like, now?” Jaron was shown to a seat, in a formal meeting room, attended by waiters and aides. They were also to enjoy a formal Orbat meal. “Earth, it’s quite dry,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 590 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

and there is not much life left. It has an oxygen content of eleven percent now, and has only a handful of species left.” The Governor General looked at Brijet. “Have you ever been to Earth, Brijet?” She smiled. “No, sir, Haran31.” She accepted a fluted crystal glass of Jiltanian muron32 juice. Jaron tasted the juice, smiled, and put it down. “Hmm, lovely - apple, it’s called on Earth. I had some on Jilta. Whilst on Tarj Himble of Palbo, we had an orchard, of Earth fruits. The local staff insisted that I feel at home. Palbo was a good planet, with good people, regardless of who ruled over them, previously.” Governor General Haran Dobel nodded towards the door. “My son and daughter would like to meet you, Jaron, and you too; Brijet. We don’t get many important guests here, as you can imagine, being insolated, by choice.”

31 NOTE: Haran Dobel: The Governor General of Orbat, has six children, and one wife, at time of writing. Data from Searfinders Index p. 6,756.

32DEFINITION: Muron: The apple of Earth was exported to many planets, and was traded extensively, by Muron Enterprises. The apple became known as the Muron. Unlike many other foods in the Federation, apples, or murons, where not a trademarked or licensed food, owned by anyone person or group. It was known as a free-food. Murons became very popular in the far-Outer-Worlds. Searfinders Index: pp. 6,789 – 6,792.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 591 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Brijet smiled. “We do understand, as we have a similar practice, ourselves. I admit, that it’s hard to beat having a visitor from Earth, and I’m used to playing second in line, to Lorde Jaron.” She smiled, as the couple walking through the door, made straight for Jaron. Jaron looked over. “My apologies, Brijet, but it seems I’m the only one, who knows, that you outrank me.” The Pleiadian woman was relatively young. “Father,” she said formally, “May I play the visio?” Before her father could answer, she turned to Jaron and thought: It’s an historical record of Earth, from when we were there, before being chased by the Talkron, thousands of years ago. More recently, it is about the era, under Hymondy III. Jaron smiled and nodded. Your thought is very clear. The Governor General watched them, and smiled. “I see my daughter; Telanor, is taking the opportunity, to practice her talents. She is one of the few, who has them still.” Jaron nodded. “I can sense that. What happened to your thought abilities?” Telanor looked at her father, who just shrugged, as though to give the floor to his veracious daughter. Her brother had quietly walked in, and sat. He knew Telanor was always her best, around guests. As she aimed her finger at the wall, a screen began to lower; and the light diminished; as the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 592 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

windows blackened. “Technology,” she chuckled, and then added: That wasn’t me. She passed one of the aides a small disk. “Please, play the visio, named Earth History.” The aide nodded, and the screen was soon alive, with pictures. “This, Lorde Jaron and Excellency Brijet, is what Earth used to be like, thousands of years ago.” The screen showed jungles, from the air, from out in space, and up close. “There were hundreds of thousands of species, all somehow in unique harmony. Our race was in a city, on a small island, in the Atlantic Ocean. In short; we were an electronics people, from which the fabled Atlantis myths grew. We fled the Talkron, to get there, though we knew them by another name, but they were the same race.” Telanor continued. “We were on each other’s food chain, the Talkron and our ancestors. Then, along came the human population. They weren’t there, during the time, when we first occupied the planet. Back then, we had what are now termed Neanderthals, into whom we spliced some genes, to increase the size of their skulls and brains.” Telanor looked at her father, who nodded. Jaron smiled at their easy thought transfer, and how well it was masked. Telanor continued. “We, as a race, arrived on that planet, Sequetus 3, about 120,000 years ago. There were few of us. We couldn’t tame the world easily, and we needed food. We saw this

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 593 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Neanderthal race, as an easy race to work with. They were primitive, but eager to learn. We made a small change to their gene structure, to give the race a larger skull, and a change in their hormone levels. We also increased its longevity, and made them adaptable, to the cold.” Telanor looked around. “Please continue, daughter,” her father said. “They need to know.” “The race already had telepathic abilities, and we increased it, so that they could think- communicate with other species, including us. They didn’t have much of a language, but with our help, they developed it, along with their social culture. They also developed writing and art. They adapted well, with the other animals, and fitted in, taking only what they needed. They weren’t obsessed with sexual activities. We had turned that down. They lived for three hundred years, and were perfect; for the planet.” What? thought Jaron, without waiting. Telanor nodded. “Correct, my Lorde. Although your human Cro-Magnon genes have only three percent of the genome of the Neanderthal, you have lost almost all, of what we introduced.” Jaron apologized to everyone, and asked her to continue. Telanor nodded. “The Neanderthal – which we simply called Kugan, which means old-man, in our original dialect – could mesmerize animals into being

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 594 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

still, so they could kill them for food. They were very adept; even knowing what we were thinking; at times. She continued. “I heard your story about the Bootes giants on Sequetus 4, and we did see evidence of this on Earth, as some of our villagers disappeared occasionally. Our records show that our people never understood what was happening, or that this other race otherwise existed. I presume that the giants just took what they needed for food, being herdsmen. Otherwise, they just left us alone. Likely, we even helped them, by fostering the longevity of the Neanderthal race.” She explained more with the imagery. “We taught the Neanderthal ways to grow, and harvest fruits and vegetables. We traded with them. They copied us. We left them with a low sexual drive, so that they could fit into the world of other species, and not over populate. We didn’t want it to outstrip the planet’s resources, thousands of years later.” Jaron nodded. “That’s exactly what did happen on Earth, during Goren Torren’s time. Cro-Magnon man continued to grow, into the tens of billions, after Hymondy left, until mankind ruined its host, the life of Earth; itself.” Telanor nodded. “We weren’t there, at that point, but yes, that seems to be what happened. I will continue. Neanderthal man was designed, to expand his knowledge, to learn new skills, be master, but not to outstrip the planet’s resources.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 595 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Telanor looked at Brijet, who clearly didn’t understand the phenomena, of which they were speaking. Telanor looked to her father. The Governor General stood. “There are some phenomena on Earth, about which you must understand more. Earth, and its peoples; has been interfered with. Just as modern day Cro-Magnon man did to its host planet, a cancer cell does to its own body, when introduced. “A cancer cell is simply a DNA strand, which has broken. A normal strand has a program, which stops it from continual outward growth. A broken cancerous DNA cell has two parts, one with the limiting program, and the other without. One part dies eventually, and the other continues to divide and divide, without the limiting counter program, to stop. Eventually, the growing cancer cells rob the body of nutrients, until the host dies of starvation. “Mankind, similar to your body, did the same, Lorde Jaron. It has an altered version of DNA, and the limiting factor in the DNA, which stops the race from overrunning the planet, is the same as a cancer cell. The cancer cell does to its body, what Cro- Magnon man did to Earth. The program: to not overpopulate the Earth, had been genetically removed, from modern man. He was altered, into a short-life humanoid, with an inclination to propagate, due to an increased sexual drive, and continued expanding, until there were no nutrients left, upon which to live. The host planet died, of course.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 596 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Planet Earth became barren, the animals and vegetation, which man needed to survive, died too.” The governor made sure his audience was still attentive. “Even as far back as 2010 Earth’s time, the people there knew what was happening. However, they could do nothing about it. They were compelled to satisfy their DNA-engineered increased hormonal sex drive, thereby creating more children. The races there each looked at each other, and blamed the other races amongst them, for their overpopulation generated troubles. The western races blamed the eastern races, and vice versa. Actually, it happened well before, which originally created the trouble.” Telanor was now butting in. “Our Atlantis Island came under attack. It was permanently inundated; covered with hundreds of meters of seawater, after the polar north ice melted, which in turn brought about a realignment, of continental plate boundaries. Almost nothing would have been left of it, after a few thousand years. We tried to go back and fix what was happening, but someone was there, ensuring that his or her work at altering the human race was not thwarted.” Telanor accepted water, drank and continued. “Our records are quite extensive, here. We fled, fifty-three thousand years ago. When we came back, we found this newer Cro-Magnon man, with a smaller skull, and a very limited telepathic ability, now breeding with our Neanderthals. Cro-Magnon males

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 597 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

were given high-level doses of testosterone producing DNA, and this made them very aggressive, as well as virile, and fertile. “We tried many times, to counter this, by giving Neanderthals mitochondrial DNA, which is a DNA to stop Neanderthal females from bearing off spring, from Cro-Magnon males. It had a limited workability, however; it was no match to bulk testosterone.” Telanor shrugged at Jaron as though to apologize for his race. “During our time there, we had the pituitary gland working properly, so it sent the message in Neanderthal man, to stop over breeding. All animals have this mechanism. There is an optimum point, where the male body stops producing testosterone, and the animal population slows down, at this point. There is normal compatibility between the brain and the pituitary gland. It then triggers the other organs to produce or not produce testosterone33 and thus regulates fertility.” Jaron nodded. “Then; what happened to your people, on Earth?”

33 INFORMATION: Pituitary Gland: This is a small gland, the size of a small pea, at the base of the brain inside the skull. Its purpose is to: control the functions of endocrine production, regulate the amount of testosterone produced, regulate other hormones. It regulates muscle growth, it regulates body growth. It directs other organs and endocrine glands to produce other hormones. It affects the kidneys and muscles as well.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 598 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Telanor moved closer to the screen. “They were hunted and had to flee. We didn’t know who it was, but someone was killing our Neanderthals. While we used to sortie out there to Earth and back, from the Pleiades, we couldn’t beat some other kind of master-plan, which was following, behind us.” “What was that plan?” asked Brijet. She was holding an elegant cup of kalo, admiring the cup’s exquisiteness, while savoring the taste. She smiled. Excellent kalo. An orderly came over with a kalo pot, to top up her cup. Telanor half shrugged. “It seems it was to heavily populate the planet, for a further purpose, which we don’t know.” Brijet put her own cup down and nodded towards the windows. The light came on. That was me, not technology. Brijet turned and smiled. She looked at everyone around, including the orderlies, aides, and Boguard security. There were thirty people in the room, participating and caring, for this elaborate meeting. Brijet looked out towards the sky, and the windows opened. She turned and thought to the Pleiadians: You may not be aware of why we are now on Yaltipia, and why our race invited your race: here. We have the same abilities as you, and we have the same persecutors: the Talkron. We know the purpose of Earth, and it has been a fast breeding ground, to get a population for invasion, into the rest of the galaxy. They are coming after us, and they

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 599 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

are after you, too. They want us; more than you. However, your race and my race have a common ancestry. Our races and our persecutors aren’t from this galaxy. The Governor General turned to look out to the horizon. We know much of that. We don’t have the records that you have, but we surmised the Early Works were common, to both of us. We knew that what Goren Torren did, a millennium ago, wouldn’t hold this enemy off: indefinitely. It would be back. We’ve been watching the events of the galaxy. However, we thought you might have won, without us. The Governor General turned. His thought ability really was clear and strong. Everyone was receiving it. We joined together, your race and ours, once before, and I’m to believe in the future as well. The daughter of an earlier Governor General led an army to Palbo, and won. I thought there was peace there now. Jaron joined the Governor General. He thought: Her name was Felice, and she became one of us, Boguard, using our ways, as well as yours. She did win. She was one of the greatest military commanders we ever united between our worlds. I’m here now, as a representative of Earth, Yaltipia and Orbat. Telanor stood. The meal was over. Then you are, or were, the Magi? You were Torren? I have

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 600 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

presumed you were, the one chosen, and found again. Jaron looked at her. Simply, yes. It’s not over. It’s coming to a head; again. It isn’t a matter of us driving out the Talkron, as we did once before, and slowing them down. They have an agenda: for all planets, including this one. It is large scale, but worked out using small-scale targets. We have beaten them back to Maluka now. We drove them out from Earth, just recently. Our purges found them engrained, in many peacetime operations, on many of our Federation worlds. They have had agents, preparing worlds out there, to be invaded. They also have had very large space-based ships, drawing in life, from outside of this universe. Dagalt, the Governor General’s son, stepped over to them. “While I can understand your thoughts clearly, my own transmission isn’t up to that, of my sister or father. So, Lorde Jaron, I have been watching you since you arrived in the Federation. I had wondered who you really were, and we well suspected, that you might have been our foretold Magi.” Jaron turned to the apparently younger man. “Emissary Dagalt, I’m pleased to speak Standard, believe me. You are the head of the Pleiadian Security. You were on that unidentified ship, after we were attacked in warp drive fields, when I was in the bloat?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 601 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Dagalt nodded. “Our people were. We’ve been keeping an eye on you, just as our brothers down there, on Yaltipia, keep an eye on us. One could consider it spying, but I believe watching each other’s backs, is a more tactful way, of describing how we work, with each other.” “Quite so,” interrupted Brijet. Jaron looked out again, at the sky. “Then you understand that, the Talkron’s plan, means they will probably return with larger numbers, and attempt to enslave us all, even here on Orbat?” Dagalt nodded. “Yes, and I see that the battle would be like an ant, against an elephant.” Jaron kept looking out towards the sky. “Then presumably, you don’t wish to become extinct, as our Neanderthals did?” The Governor General looked out at the sky, too. “This is leading somewhere, and it’s out there. You are the Magi; you have a solution, whereby an ant can defeat an elephant. So, Lorde Jaron, what is it?” Jaron continued looking at the sky, straining his eyes. “The solution is a galactic military alliance, against our enemy common enemy: the Talkron, but also an alliance with an ally, who could be compared in size to a giant mammoth.” Telanor asked quickly, “Here? How so?” Jaron turned and pointed towards the sky. Dagalt received a call, from out of the air, for his hearing only. He looked up. “The invasion has

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 602 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

started, they are here, and a fleet of Talkron ships have arrived, unannounced!” The others looked panic-stricken. Jaron quickly thought: No, they are my allies. They have been here, for many months. Please look out, at the sky, and see them. Their leader is my own ship, named Amanda. The governor general looked out and saw the lights. “Then; who is your duality? You had Navia Charlton as yours, when you were Torren. Who is it: now?” Jaron sighed. She, Navia, came back this lifetime, and I’ve been fighting alongside of her, until recently. However, she died at the hands of the Talkron, on Sequetus 4, Mars. Jaron’s mind went back, to the time of the death of Amy, and he brought up the two memories, one where she died by torture, and the other, where she died in battle, in the Martian pyramid. Telanor looked at him. “You travelled time?” she asked half accusingly, and stepped back, in partial fear. “That is forbidden, in our spiritual texts. The Early Works warn us strongly, not to. It’s forbidden!” Jaron looked at her. “Yes, with the one out there, with Amanda, it’s possible, but very dangerous. It’s extraordinarily dangerous. I almost erased the entire Aaron race, during an early experiment.” Jaron showed her the memory, of him stopping the assassin’s bullet, which killed Goren Torren. Next, he showed her his memory of the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 603 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

shimmering of the Boguard, where it was about to cease to exist, until Jaron permitted the assassination. “We almost ceased to exist, and almost handed over the universe to the Talkron at that point. Time isn’t a place, to do battle. We are too inexperienced, in time fighting.” Telanor considered that. Jaron looked at her. “I didn’t broadcast that dual thought of Amy’s, death. How did you perceive it?” Telanor stepped further away. She was out of her depth, in Jaron’s presence.

Amanda and friends over Orbat skies

Her brother read the fear in her eyes. He didn’t know what was happening. His security codes were ringing, in his head. “They are armed?” he asked. Jaron nodded. “Always.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 604 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“We can’t approve that. They will have to leave! They put us at risk, please.” Just then, the light in the room began to waiver. Jaron looked over. “Hello, Amanda.” “Good morning Captain. I’m so glad to see you. I missed you.” “I missed you too, Amanda.” Jaron turned around, and while everyone was watching the shimmering colored lights, which were in the Governor General’s room, Jaron indicated towards the outside. He stretched out his hand and beckoned them to see. “This is Amanda, a Boguard Man-o-War, who is my duality, now.” With that announcement, the glowing wavering light of Amanda glowed more intently and moved over to be beside her captain.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 605 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 3

NEW ORBAT CITY

The planet security had to be almost forcefully shut down, because Amanda and her fleet of six Man-o- Wars had created a wave of panic, throughout the population.

New Orbat City

Lorde Jaron was sitting, opposite six Pleiadian generals. They were on the seventh floor of a building, opposite the bay. New Orbat was a magnificent city, fully modern. Jaron stood by the twinkling light, of Amanda. Dagalt was standing with the view of the city behind him. “So, we understand how the Talkron E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 606 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

work, how they travel, and how they will find us,” he said. Amanda butted in: They have already found you here, as of two months, ago. They have been tracking you, through the warp fields, and a tracer managed to cling to one of your craft, and they have already tracked you here.” Dagalt looked to his father, and then at his generals. “Perhaps that’s true, but do you have evidence?” Amanda lit up, speaking. “You use warp drives, do you not? With the pain you inflict on the drive-life, it creates a pulling-in effect on the life-force, in the drives. While the warp fields can be fast, they can also be dangerous, if you don’t know how to navigate them properly. Your race developed these drives, in your galaxy. You fled with them, knowing what they did, and this continual harmful act is the single cause, of the demise of your abilities. No being, or group of beings, can keep natural abilities intact, while giving harm knowingly, to other life. It just can’t happen. The abilities will diminish, as yours have.” “The solution then, is to give up the craft, and warp drive travel? That leaves us open, to instant annihilation,” replied Dagalt, defiantly. “Not at all. You will need to form an alliance, with your newly rehabilitated craft, after we liberate them,” explained Amanda.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 607 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

They had been at this same argument verses counter argument; for an hour. Finally, Amanda announced: Even if you disagree to cooperate, you can’t stop us, from converting your craft. By the creed, which I explained to you, the harm, which must happen to any being, who harms another being, a similar fate happens to that being, if he stands by, watching, and does nothing to help another fellow being in distress. In other words, the fate of you and your abilities effects all of us, including me, if we agree to do nothing. Telanor smiled. “So; what you are saying, is that you are going to do this liberation, whether we agree or not.” Amanda immediately took on the appearance of a tall muscular strong confident male. He spoke very clearly, and wore a uniform. “I don’t have any gender. In fact, no being does, but I believe you may pay me more respect, if I am in front of you, with the apparency of this male body. Simply put, Madam Telanor, yes, I will liberate my comrades from your craft, and there is nothing that you can do about it, to prevent me. What you can do, is staff those ships, after they are liberated, to help us fight the inevitable armada, which are now building up against us, in another galaxy.” The Pleiadians were dumfounded, and speechless.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 608 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amanda, as the large male continued. “Furthermore, you can be subject to the future that is coming, or you can create a better one, yourself. Believe me, when I say, it’s better if you create it yourself.” The Governor General looked to Jaron. “Lorde Jaron, do you agree with this…” Jaron smiled. “Sir, the enemy is coming. We saw that, as Boguard. We are no match, against it. We tried, a thousand years ago. We slowed it down, and its evil actions crept through the rest of our societies. Now; we have a chance, and we have to remove this evil totally, finally, and completely. We can’t do that, if we stay here, permitting our own evil to continue in any form, such as those trapped, in our warp drives. These vehicles, your ships, must be mobilized voluntarily, not via forced warp drive means, which we all have been using. We, as the Boguard, realized that we had a choice to agree to work with these beings, such as Amanda, who originate beyond the physical universe, or one day, become slaves to the Talkron. We chose the former.” Telanor turned to face Dagalt, her father, and the generals. “This is the Magi. I know that. I back his freedom. Let them convert our ships.” Each Pleiadian, in turn reiterated the same.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 609 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 610 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 4

SHERIL

Sheril looked out, over to the other side of the river. She had been brought to the very outer edge, of what was left of the Amazon jungle. This was where the grasses adjoined the desert. She looked out, and saw dead tree, after dead tree. “There’s so much death,” she whispered, to her young aide. The small boy looked up. “Yes, Miss. It makes me cry. All the trees are dying and it looks like it is the life itself, not just the world, which is dying. Life is dying.” Sheril looked down. She didn’t completely understand this young boy. She knelt. “Please tell me more, Boni.” Boni was only seven now, but he had a rare insight. It was as if he really wasn’t of the world, and the others knew it. It was as if he lived in a far off world of imagination, and dreams. He smiled. “The trees are both life, and the world, Miss. They are both, physical like this sand and dirt, and life that turns the dirt into living things, like trees and bodies. When there is enough life present, we say it is living. Then; a bigger life or spirit, can live within it, like our puma does, or like I do, within my body. The same happens, with the trees. The trees are alive, like anything else. However, they are being separated;

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 611 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

from it, and the life is leaving. It is as if the life is being sucked off away, and gone.” Sheril looked at all the dead tree trunks: a forest of ghost trees, lining the river. “Is there a way to get across there, without the hungry fish eating us?” she asked. Megalin, who was on her other side, nodded. “The hungry fish have gone, too.” Sheril looked down. She sensed through the water and found that the child was correct. There was no life, left in there. It was dead; no piranha. She looked over to the far bank, and then back, to where she stood. She saw a tree half-dead, close by, and walked over to it. She studied its branches. On one side of the same branch, there were leaves, but on the other, it was dead. She noticed that the tree branches seemed to be dead, but only on the side, facing the river. She looked around more, and it was the same, with the other trees. Sheril then felt as though something bit her, and she slapped at the pain. She looked, but there was no bite. However the pain remained. She stepped over; towards the river, and was about to step into the river, when she became dizzy, and felt she had to sit down. She staggered and held up her hand, to indicate that she was all right. The children already knew otherwise, and they grabbed her, and pulled her five pacs, away from the water.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 612 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“It isn’t safe, near the river, Miss. What is happening to the trees, will happen to you,” explained Boni. Sheril allowed herself to be guided another ten pacs, in from the riverbank. Megalin walked over to a tree, asked the tree for forgiveness, and she snapped off two small branches, with a dozen vibrant green leaves, on each branch. She walked back, past Sheril. She looked at the tree that was half dying, and stepped, a pac closer to the river, and set the branch down, and in an instant, jumped back past the tree line. She then threw the other branch next to the half-half dying tree. She then walked back to Sheril, and turned, looking at the branches. Boni said, “We’ve done this many times, Miss. It will take some moments, but watch.” Sheril did watch, and after only ten minutes, it was obvious: the branch nearer the river was dying, at an accelerated rate, whereas, the other branch was just barely drooping. Megalin explained it. “The tree branch nearer to us is just missing the water, and is cut off from. If I plant it in the ground, which I will, it still has a chance to grow, and survive. The other branch is in a ring, of a widening zone, Miss, a zone, that if you are alive, you soon won’t be. The life will leave you.” Sheril understood and got up. The children grabbed her hands, to restrain her. She smiled and

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 613 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

nodded. “I only want to get a closer look. How close can I get, to that branch?” “Two pacs would be fine, now, but tomorrow, you will need three pacs. This zone is moving in to us, at the rate, of a pac each day.” Sheril looked at both of them. They nodded. Sheril felt their minds. They knew, and she knew, that they knew. She stepped back, and stood, feeling, searching, and scanning the horizon. The children watched her, and were about to ask a question. Please be quiet, now. Let me do what I can. We all have our gifts. Please let me use mine. I’m searching for something. The children went quiet. They waited and watched.

Ω

Sheril was later aboard a destroyer. Beel was sitting opposite with two of his lieutenants. “Ay, I understand what’ yoos saying Miss Sheril. Yoos tellin’ me, that there’s still Talkron doon there.” Sheril never fully understood Beel’s thick accent, but nodded anyway. “I believe that there is an orbiting station-ship around there, or somewhere nearby, aiming at the planet, sucking the life, from out of the trees. Look at it, the visio shows it is barren. Its atmosphere used to have twenty-two percent oxygen, and now, that ratio varies, down to

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 614 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

as low as eleven percent. When I was young, the planet was at a low, but it was regaining the land, converting the towns, back into rainforest. Now, all those rainforests have vanished, in the twenty years, which we have been away. There has been a steady decrease of life, over the past twenty years, whereas before that, life was increasing. The reason is a Talkron presence. I can feel it.” It wasn’t long, before Beel had it isolated. He called Sheril, to the Bridge. “Down tha’, on the planet, tha’ are five points, that are noo desert, that shouldn’t be, and have b’n a widening zone o’ life leaving.”

Sequetus 3 – Earth – circa 1800

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 615 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Sheril looked at those points. “I can see from your maps how it deteriorates. Here is Sequetus 3, at around 1800, their time date.” Beel straightened. “Look here, the blue hue, com’n from the oceans. Life is represented by blue and green hues. Tha’ is a density of life, in the oceans, meaning tha’ is life all through the sea, which isn’t found on tha’ land. This is the reason, why the sea is so such a deep blue. It has so much life, and is tha’ source, of over half tha’ planet’s oxygen.”

Sequetus 3 – Earth – circa 2020

Beel’s aides were all around him. They had been gathering the data for months now, and assimilating it.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 616 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Beel nodded to an aide. The aide explained, “This shows the planet; at its global-warming stage. It’s the year 2029. Lorde Hymondy was present, and trying to do combat it.” The aide continued. “The planet was warming, at an accelerating rate. It would be another twenty years, before the planet would reach its point of absolute obvious oblivion. It was in 2025, still losing two hundred species a day: towards total extinction. Methane was coming up from under the oceans, that once were covered with ice. Previously the ice reflected the sun. With that gone, the sun penetrated the water, releasing methane. The methane heated the atmosphere further and much faster than carbon dioxide did. The people were mostly oblivious to it. Those individuals, who tried to do something about it, had their concerns targeted by black propagandists, and ridiculed. Hundreds of trillions of animals, birds, fish and insects, lost their lives, during this period. “Some people knew it was the end, but money- oriented businessmen and politicians were always easy allies for the Talkron, and they screwed as much life from the planet, as they could,. It was dying a horrible death. Looking back now, to then, one can see how it was an obvious plan. It was not accidental. If it was accidental, it would have self corrected itself, shortly after their year 2000. However, it didn’t.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 617 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Sheril shook her head. “Didn’t the solution, to remove the population, give some life back to the planet?” The aide smiled. “That is the propaganda which they were sold. The populace was convinced that by leaving the planet, it would bounce back, to its former green lush condition. The concept was like leaving a field fallow, for a year; it was expected to recover its soil properties, for new plants and trees.” The aide showed the next picture. It was worse. “What happened; was that the world continued to go downhill, more and more. Methane kept being released without man. Even when man did slow down the production of carbon dioxide, it was too late. The fuse to the end of the world was already lit. It meant that all life, was dying.” “I recall seeing many areas that seemed to be getting better, and overrun with plant life, again,” protested Sheril. The aide consented that. “Yes, there was a brief betterment, after the population left, and the warming of the seas began to ease off, with the methane settling back into the ground and ocean. Yes, the plant life began to grow back, but only temporarily. The resurgence you saw; was mostly in the Amazon and it lasted only seventy years. “You were lifted off the planet, with Lorde Jaron. My guess; is that the Talkron just before then, felt that they had no further purpose in what they had set out to do, and so, they gave up. However, when

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 618 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

you pair escaped, that put them back onto their original plan. Here you have a picture, of what the planet is like, now.” “The planet is all but dead!” exclaimed Sheril. Beel stepped forward. “That’s correct. However, it isn’t tha heatin’ of the oceans that’s a killing it noo. That was happ’n’n ‘til about 2090, and then, it started to slowly cool as Lorde Hymondy personally took a more dictatorial stand, for tha environment. He made the cost of using tha oil- based fuel and any energy, so expensive, that the temperature tha’ began to cool, and life started to grow, ag’n. But da methane was still out’a c’ntrol.”

Sequetus 3 – Earth – circa 3070

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 619 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Beel turned to look at Sheril. “However, what we are seeing ha noo, is life leaving, being lured away. It isn’t from ov’heatin’.” Sheril cocked her head partially understanding him. “Lured?” “Uh huh. Lured. All life has a choice, and is the primary function of any life, the ability to choose. Ya can bring in bacteria, an’ viruses, and make the environment so untenable, that more advanced life ‘ill leave.” “Is that what is happening?” asked Sheril Beel shook his head. “Nope; life is leaving; of its own accord. Tha is nothing else causing it, such as vibrations, bacteria, heat or any other environmental menace. Yoo felt it, when yoo went to near tha river.” Sheril thought for a minute and looked at the video display, of the current-day Sequetus. “My body started to feel faint, like it was being asked to leave, and I felt a kind of inner tingling, like a cleansing, and then a pain, as if my cells were dying. However, that life wasn’t actually me. That life; was the life of the cells, in my body.” Beel nodded. “Yoo’re right. Tha’ is happening on a cellular level, in all life. Life is still linked on a cellular level, even if the cells aren’t joined. We have demonstrated that. Take a cell, divide it, so it becomes two sets o’ cells. Blow toxic smoke onto one cell culture, and it learns to shrink away from tha smoke. Then do tha same to tha other cell culture,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 620 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

but don’t use smoke this time, just use air. The second cell culture now responds and reacts, just like tha first cell culture, which had received tha toxic smoke. Tha’ was no way that tha second culture could have learned tha reaction of the first, as it wasn’t together, with tha first culture. It just knoo. There seems to be ‘n interconnected life-thread, between cells34.” “So, what are you saying?” asked Sheril. Beel sighed. “I’m saying that tha’ is somethin’ luring life away, from the planet, and when the life goes, all life goes. It seems to have an decreasing presence.” “Do you have any ideas, about where it goes?” she asked. “At first, I suspected ‘n underground station- city. I scoured tha planet, but I couldn’t find any. I searched the moons. I investigated tha other planets. I scoured tha asteroids, and way out beyond tha heliosphere. There is nothing tha’, that c’n account for this.”

Ψ

34 NOTE: This experiment described above, was performed in the 1950s. It showed that the life of cells seemed to be connected to each other, beyond any physical attachment, and that a cell in isolation was effected by the learning of the life of another cell, in a different isolated area.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 621 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 5

BLACK KNIGHT AGAIN

Akeala was looking out, over at Black Knight. She had been on Mars, wrapping up the pyramid reconstruction project. She stared at the ship. There it was, slowly orbiting the planet, on its polar orbit. She glanced at Sheril. Sheril instantly recognized that glint in Akeala’s eyes. Sheril shook her head. “Commander Beel says we better not go near that thing. It’s his, Jaron’s.” “Oh, Sheril, Beel doesn’t know everything. Papa is such a mystery. What was he doing, back on this planet, over thirteen thousand years ago? You know that I want to know.” Sheril shrugged. “Why not ask him?” “Oh, Sheril, be a friend, and don’t keep telling me things I can’t do. He isn’t here.” Sheril thought: Please, we had better not get involved. It might be dangerous. Akeala laughed. You are just like Aunt Amy; as she was always warning me, trying to stop me getting into trouble. I miss her. “Please, can you pass me my helmet?” Sheril shook her head. “You are going to do this, regardless, right?” Akeala laughed, and then smiled, as she put on her helmet. Her voice was now reverberating,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 622 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

muffled from inside her suit. She strapped on her breathing and transit pack. “Wish me luck!” With that, she closed the airlock, waved to Sheril, and turned to face the other door. Sheril breathed deeply. The airlock opened on the other side, and she saw Akeala jet out slowly, through space. Sheril turned and made her way, to the control cabin. When she got there, she saw a communication panel-light flashing. She expected it to be Akeala, but instead, it was Commander Beel. “Please tell me that isn’t Lorde Jaron’s daughter, out da’, goin’ where she’s no’ permitted to go.” Sheril looked at Beel and breathed out. She was in trouble. Well, only if Akeala got hurt, was she in trouble. She tried to smile at Beel. “She is so stuck on getting her own way.” Beel was seen shaking his head, on the screen. “You better make sure she do’ nort, get us reprimanded. I have enough problems ha, with what yoo found down below.” “Did you get any response from Jaron, with what you sent him?” she asked. Beel shook his head. “No, but it’s too early t’ tell yet. I wouldn’t expect a ret’n courier for another four days. In tha mean time, please keep ya’ step- daughter in line, and out a’ harm.” Sheril sat back. “Commander, please don’t relate her to me. It’s her upbringing. She is a

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 623 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Corduke, you know. I have next to zero chance, of controlling her.” Beel shook his head. He wouldn’t accept that. “Yoo, Sheril, are Boguard, regardless of where yas wa’ born, so live up ta’ it, and keep ha’ out of trouble; signing out.” The screen went blank. A text displayed across the bottom, saying that Beel was sending out a six- man detail, to help Sheril retrieve Captain Jaron’s daughter. Sheril crossed her arms, “Humph. What do I do now?” she asked grumpily, and aloud. Akeala piped in, and came on the screen. “Sorry Sheril, I was listening. I will be fine. I am, almost at the door.” Sheril nodded. “What abilities do you have Akeala, apart from eaves dropping?”

Ω

Akeala was now at Black Knight, about twenty pacs away, slowly moving, along its length. She checked her air and fuel, and had plenty, to make the trip another five times. She looked out back to her shuttle, and could see another two shuttles, coming in from the destroyer. She pulled out a scanner and ran it along the ship. Nothing came up on its screen. She put it away. “So far, so good. No traps that we can sense with our instruments.” She then got up closer, to within two pacs away. She looked very close at the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 624 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

structure, and stayed, watching the machine. She could tell Sheril was about to say something. “Don’t talk, please Sheril. Leave this to me. I know what I’m doing, I think.” Sheril was watching her, on the screen. Akeala’s images were coming through clear, from her camera, as well as from the shuttle.

Black Knight over Earth

One of the security details, from the destroyer asked, “Ma’am, do you want us to go there, and help, just in case we are needed?’ The security shuttles were lazily floating, next to Sheril’s craft.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 625 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Sheril shook her head. “No, but have three troopers on standby, please. However, don’t go out there, unless I give the word. She has been to that ship before, and received an electric shock. This time, there is no response from the ship. She is persistent, and I will give her that.” Akeala plugged in her reserve breathing, which would give her another hour. “Well, Mister Ship. I’m back. I remember the shock you gave me last time, and I got your message, too. So; here I am.” She looked up and down the ship. She jetted over, to the other side. She got closer. She looked at the lines of the ship. Very quietly, she whispered, “I’m not going to hurt you. You know me. I know you do. You know my Papa, too. She reached her hand out, as though caressing the hull of the ship. Her hand felt, as though it was touching the metal of the old craft. She imagined she was running her bare palm down its bare hull, as though she was on-planet. She felt a warm feeling infuse her. She smiled. “You’re right, Mister Ship. I think you have many secrets. I like secrets and I have many secrets too. You’re strong. I can feel that. You’ve been waiting. Someone sent you here, to wait. Only Papa has been able to enter you. I feel that you are a good ship.” She imagined who made the ship, and images came to mind, of a planet a long way off, beyond the galaxy, well before the thirteen thousand years past. She got the feeling, of an important purpose. There

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 626 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

were powerful people making this ship. It had a very precise goal, and she was right, it was waiting.

Ω

The head of the security detail on the shuttle, called out, in alarm. “She has disappeared! Gone!” Sheril felt her heart skip, as she was watching Akeala, as she vanished. “Quickly, alert Beel.” She cried out, for Akeala to hear her, and called again. Beel came on the visio. “I saw it. Play it back, in slow motion, a frame a second. I just did.” Sheril watched, as the scene showed Akeala, her eyes closed behind her suit, as she was merely almost touching the ship. Slowly, Akeala got closer, and closer, eyes closed. Her hand began to make contact, with the hull. A faint light began to glow at the connection point, and slowly it spread, and then Akeala faded from view, her eyes remaining closed the whole time. The destroyer was moving over, into a tighter orbit around Earth. Sheril was starting to suit up, when Akeala’s voice come through, on the speakers.

Ω

Akeala kept her eyes closed, feeling the ship. She felt warm all over and received images, of Black

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 627 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Knight’s makers. She looked down, as she felt her feet strike something hard. It was dark. The stars had gone. Her heart thumped, and she wondered what trouble she was in now. Lights, she thought. She stared around. She was inside a cabin, and she presumed it had to be Black Knight’s. She ran her hand over its inner wall surface. She got that warm nice feeling again, and it made her want to smile. “I think I like you, Mister Ship,” she said, aloud. She looked around, and saw that there were two seats; obviously, her father had been sitting in the central one. She took off her helmet and sat there; it felt comfortable, and she felt warm. She looked about, and leant back. She felt at ease, as if she had owned this ship, that it was hers, and not belonging to her father, at all. “Sheril,” she called out. Some type of three dimensional visio monitors came on, in the center of the room, and there was Sheril’s image. Akeala laughed and explained to her, that she was inside. Sheril seemed to be at ease, and was monitoring her, as was Beel. Akeala looked at the wall of the ship, and screens came on. The wall seemed to change from an opaque wall, to a translucent screen. Many different views flashed, next. There were several banks of them, monitoring almost every frequency, giving views of Earth, and information, from out in the solar system.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 628 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Akeala smiled, as she was even able to monitor, what Commander Beel was ordering for lunch. Akeala looked at the image of Earth. She put her attention on one portion of it, and the screen grew in size, and the others, not so important now, shrank in size. Akeala looked on, in wonderment. “Papa?” she called out. There was no answer, and she called again. She wondered if her father could perceive her, somehow. There was silence for a few minutes, and then, an apparition appeared, in front of her. At first, it made her jump. Then, she recognized it was of a man, she felt that she might have known. The apparition looked at her. “I wondered what you would look like, Akeala. Now, I know. I am; whom you think I am. I’m your father, Jaron, and have had many other names, since I imbued this image, into the ship. Yes, I made this ship, and we made it for you, Aki. You are its real captain. I was its creator. Yes, you’ve been in it before.” Akeala looked at the holographic image, as it slowly moved around her, looking at her. She asked, “If you are from the past, then how is it, that you know my name. You can’t have known know that, back then.” The image smiled. “I’m not a recording. I’m a mental figment, from the past, in the present. I am back in the past, looking at you here now. This figment is being sent through time, with this ship. I am looking at you now, as I’m preparing the ship.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 629 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

You might call this daydreaming, Akeala, but in reality, it’s sending a conscious representation of me, into the future, past or some other time dimension, to view events, so as to assist me, to make the events of my time come true.” “So, you can see me?” she asked, leaning towards the apparition. The image nodded. “Then; why?” The image put his hands up and out. “This ship is yours. We have been traveling down time, all of us, including you. I’m sure there are others of us, whom you know; who I know back here. Right now, you need your ship back, the same as I need mine, which I see that I have.” The apparition smiled. Akeala nodded, and half laughed. “Amanda,” she said softly. The apparition laughed too. “Yes, that is her. She is my real ship.” “What do I do now?” asked Akeala. The image shrugged. “You wanted this ship in the future, daughter. I made it for you. I made sure that it was ready, at the time you needed it. It is up to you, to do what you must, with it. Your future wasn’t my creation. That is yours.” With that instruction, the image began to fade, but with one last message. “You look good, Akeala. I only wished you had lived long enough, this life here, to be able to see you.” With that, and a very moist set of eyes, as though he was holding

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 630 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

something back, the old man looked down, and faded from view. His attention on the ship was gone. Akeala looked around at the ship. She felt very alone. A black blur dashed past her feet. Akeala shot upright, and looked behind her, startled. There was Kuro; standing on the console, her back arched, obviously pleased to be with Aki. Akeala laughed aloud. “How did you get here?” she asked. No sooner had she thought the question, did she receive the idea; Kuro had been dropped off in Black Knight, after their last mission to Earth’s past, and Jaron had moved on, from there. Similar to being in a Man-o-War, Black Knight had somehow inured its occupants from requiring food, sleep or any other biological needs. Akeala slowly asked aloud, “Are you a Man-o- War?” She unhurriedly looked around. There was no answer. She looked at the instruments. They were old, and there was nothing here, that she really could recall, having seen before. She looked at the feelup, as it watched her; inquisitively. “You know, don’t you?” she asked Kuro. There was no answer. Kuro jumped down onto the floor, and then jumped up, on her lap. Next, she jumped back down and jumped up, onto the console, again.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 631 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“What are you trying to tell me, small one?” There was no reply. Akeala wondered what Aunt Amy would do. She thought about her, often. She swallowed. “I do miss you, Aunty,” she said, aloud. Kuro sat, and gave forth a slight warbling sound. “What is it, little Kuro?” She looked and Kuro just stared back. Then, it hit Akeala, yes, Kuro was right, she had the answer. She should do, exactly what Aunt Amy had done. Akeala thought back. Yes, it had been on Kantee, when Papa was trying to get Amanda, to accept him. The only trouble was, that Akeala was now already inside. She looked around. She had an idea. “Have you lost someone, Mister Ship?” There was no answer. She looked around, exasperated, and had another idea. She looked at Kuro. “We might as well go, eh Kuro?” She leaned forward as though to call Sheril, to get the shuttle. “There is no point staying here, if we aren’t wanted, eh Kuro?” As she sat back, she looked up. She thought she heard a tiny little voice, but it could have been her imagination. She leaned over to Kuro, and looking about, whispered, “Did you hear that?” Karo gave her warbling sound; again. Akeala sat back. “Hello, are you there?” There was no response. Akeala shrugged and leaned over to the communications settings, but before she said

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 632 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

anything, she sat back. She heard it again. “Kuro, you heard it, right?” Kuro returned a warbling sound. Akeala looked around. “Where are you?” There was no answer. Akeala was very frustrated. Before she could lean and call Sheril, a small sound seemed to be heard. Please, don’t go. She looked at the feelup. “It’s a thought-voice.” Kuro warbled again. Akeala closed her eyes, and thought out: I heard you, but I’m not good at this. A picture, of someone young had entered her mind. It was a picture of a young girl. Please don’t go, the small image thought. “I’m not good at this,” repeated Akeala. Then she corrected herself. I’m good at this. Yes, you are, came the reply. Akeala sat back; eyes open. She thought she saw an image, but it was in her mind, not like the hologram, which she had seen, before. She closed her eyes, and thought of the ship, its hull, its metal, its molecules. Somehow, she was being drawn, down a path. I’m not a captain, so I don’t know these things, thought Akeala. The little voice replied. You want to help. That is the only need that we have of you. We? asked Akeala, now getting a little confident. Yes, we. Who are you? The ship? She asked.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 633 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

No, we aren’t the ship, not quite. Come closer; Akeala. Akeala allowed herself to be drawn closer, her mind seeing lights and images. She could see worry, pain, and more pain. What is this? she asked. We are the life, the life that is missing. We are what you could call, the future. Akeala looked around and could see many lights. They seemed to be the same color, which she had seen Beel show of Sequetus 3, as it was dying. With a shock, Akeala opened her eyes. She looked around the ship. “You are the dying life? You are the life, which has been leaving Sequetus 3?” The mental voice was stronger. Yes. Akeala closed her eyes again. Where are you? We are here, with you, around the ship, around Sequetus, Earth. Akeala wondered. Around Earth? Trapped. Trapped? How? Where? When… not where. The small voice went silent. Akeala searched for it with her mind, scanning, looking for a clue, as to where it was. She had lost it. She opened her eyes and looked at Kuro. Kuro was silent, but nodded three times, and then leapt through the air, onto Akeala’s lap, and started her warbling, again. Akeala tickled Kuro under and around the neck, and stroked her fur. “You saw it too, didn’t you little Kuro?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 634 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Kuro just warbled. Akeala wondered, and let her mind drift back. She sighed, and asked quietly, “Aunt Amy, where are you, now? I need you. I miss you.” Tears began to collect, in Akeala’s eyes. She thought life wasn’t meant to be this hard. She thought of all the fighting and battles, which she had gone through. She thought of all the adoration that she had received, for her bravery. She thought of her mother, and her efforts, to protect Akeala. Both Papa and Mama had sent her away after her birth. Akeala recalled the image of her mother, when she had had part of her brain cut into, and then, how Papa had helped her, to regain her former self. Akeala looked at the memory of her brave mother, and didn’t think she could do it anymore. Her mother had died; Aunt Amy was dead, too. Akeala had just gotten to know her mother again, after the psychrons had destroyed her mind. Now, the Talkron on Sequetus, had killed her. They had killed her, and she was gone. Akeala heaved in pain, and tears splashed down, onto the deck. She couldn’t stop them. They had killed her mother, and they killed her very best friend, Amy, too. Life was unfair and she cried, and cried. A little black furry friend came over and licked the tears from the side of her hand. Akeala looked down, at Kuro. “You are my friend, Kuro. You won’t leave me, will you? Will you? I need you. I don’t have any other friends.” She

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 635 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

cried again, and sobbed more. She cried and couldn’t stop crying.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 636 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 6

KARAVAT

Jaron and his delegation had travelled to Karavat, where they were to oversee the converting of the Pleiadian fleet. Brijet had called Jaron over, away from the others. “I have a disturbing report; from Sequetus 3.” She looked at him. “Actually, it’s three separate reports.” Jaron nodded. He asked his hosts, if he could be excused, to go out, onto the balcony. There were twenty people, in the large room, part of a complex buried deep, within the mountainside. Below him, was the city of Karavat. Beyond that, was the Bay of Biscal. Beyond the sky was the outline of Yaltipia, and its moon. The setting was very peaceful. A small, inflated dirigible whirled past. Jaron hadn’t felt this kind of peace, for a long time. He sighed and turned to Brijet. She understood. She knew that she had been sheltered, from most of the killing, the loss of friends, and the pain, which fighting brought. “It won’t always be that way,” she said. Jaron smiled. “I expect that it must end. Soon, I hope.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 637 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Karavat City overlooking the Bay of Biscal

Brijet nodded and looked down at some gulls, as they flew around the small balloon. “Perhaps we can go over the reports, later.” Jaron smiled. He knew that wasn’t possible. Jaron opened the hologram, and it appeared in front of him. It was Commander Beel, outlining how Sheril had found that life itself was vanishing, from

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 638 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

the planet Earth. In the hologram, Beel referred to it, as the Earth Syndrome. Then, Beel outlined what Akeala had done, and was apologetic, that he couldn’t prevent her doing so. However, in doing what she did, she had brought Jaron’s ship back to life, and said she had spoken to Lorde Jaron, in the past, in the form of a hologram. Next, Beel explained about Akeala’s reports of the small voices, and they having to do with time, or something. Jaron looked at Brijet. “There is more, isn’t there? Brijet nodded. “This Earth Syndrome isn’t just on Earth; it has been found on Jilta, and more recently, Palbo. In addition, it might just have been found on Kantee. The Boguard are out there, searching for other planets, now. We have known of it for two years, but we didn’t know it was on Earth, until we got this report.” “What is it?” Jaron asked.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 639 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The Observatory by the Bay of Biscal, Karavat

Brijet looked out to the bay. “It isn’t a disease. The life of these worlds is simply leaving the region, and the planets concerned. It starts in one area, and just slowly spreads. We can’t find the source, or the cause.” Jaron turned and watched the commanders inside, as they were confirming that their ships were converting.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 640 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron turned back to Brijet. “We are about to embark on a series of wars, and if we win, we could come back to a galaxy of desolated planets, with nothing gained.” He shook his head, leaning over the balcony. He watched the dirigible, as it circled their mountain, and was moving across the expressway, below. Jaron looked at the hologram, and then at Brijet. She nodded, and then, it slowly faded from their view. “So, the rest of the council knows about this?” Brijet nodded. “They just learned, a day ago.” “Are we just meant to, deal with it?” he asked. Brijet half smiled. “I wish this was just that simple. This has the Council more worried, than anything, to date.” Jaron looked, as the dirigible was almost gone. It was only a speck, in the distance. As Jaron watched the small craft, floating effortlessly in the distance, he thought he caught a glimpse of a shimmering, to his right. As he turned towards it, it vanished. As he looked away, from the corner of his eye, he saw it; again. He tried to see it sideways only, where the black and white photon sensors were the strongest. Yes, it was shimmering and he could almost see, or sense, an outline of a person. Jaron knew what was happening. He was receiving his own déjà vu. It was his message, from himself, to himself, outside of time.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 641 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Brijet could feel him, as he drew more distant. She looked around, but could see nothing. However, she sensed something was happening, so kept silent. Jaron closed his eyes, and in his mind, he felt Amanda. He quickly shared what he had experienced. Together, they located the image. It was Jaron, in the past, and in the future, spanning many time zones. He was outside of the physical universe, outside of the matter and the energy, that comprised it, and outside of time. Jaron looked around, and with the help of Amanda, felt his way across the galaxy. He could see Sequetus, its moon, and Black Knight. He could see his daughter; inside Black Knight. He knew now, why he couldn’t operate the ship. Yes, it was his, as he had been its creator, a long time ago. However, the ship was for her. He opened his eyes. He smiled. Brijet was still standing there, with him. Opposite, only a few pacs away from the balcony, was Amanda, his Man-o-War ship. Jaron turned to Brijet. “I have to leave you. You know that. I have more to do; in this galaxy elsewhere, while you, Brijet; have to move onto Maluka.” Brijet nodded. “Good speed, Lorde Jaron.” A crowd had gathered around Jaron, on the balcony, as he was now looking at his ship, Amanda. The Governor General and Telanor, looked on, from the main room.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 642 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“We know that you have to go,” Telanor called. “I feel that you’ve something even more urgent to do, than what you came here, for. Go, Magi. We won’t disappoint you.” The Pleiadians as a group, were aware enough, to feel the energy and the direction it was flowing. They could tell that it had to do with what they had already agreed to. Jaron was going to do, as a Magi could. Jaron looked back, and waved. He rose into the air, and simply levitated out, from the balcony, towards his ship. Telanor put her hand to her mouth, as though to stop herself, from speaking. Jaron was hundreds of pacs, above the ground. Amanda stopped glowing, and her shape was finally available for others to see, for just a few seconds. A door opened, and Jaron merely aimed his body and shot like a projectile, into the ship. The ship glowed for half a second, and then abruptly vanished, from view. The governor looked around. Everyone in his company had read the Early Works, and therefore knew of the ability of the Magi. By that evening, over a thousand Pleiadian ships converted, to free life-ships, as they were now called. The process continued for three more days.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 643 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 7

AKEALA DREAMING

Akeala stopped crying. Little Kuro was standing beside her, licking the salty tears, on her hands. “Thank you, Kuro. You are my friend, forever, aren’t you?” Akeala said. Kuro looked at her, looked away; looked back, and began her warbling sound. Akeala smiled, sniffed. “I’m lucky: to have you as my friend.” Kuro warbled some more, and raised a paw, let it fall, lifted it again and let it fall. “What do you want, little Kuro?” Kuro was signaling her. Akeala looked at the little feelup, and got it. “You want me to sing with you,” and so, Akeala did, and made up a small song, about three brave little feelups on Mars. Kuro warbled louder and stronger; in tune. Akeala hummed her song, now. Kuro watched Akeala, and she warbled more. Akeala laughed, and gave Kuro a tiny gentle hug. At that point, lights in the floor came on. Akeala hadn’t seen those, before. Next, the walls; they began to illuminate, as well.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 644 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Akeala put Kuro down, onto the seat next to hers, sat back and looked around. She looked at Kuro. Kuro lifted her paw and made the motioning signal, for more. Akeala looked sideways at the feelup, and then at the light, coming from the floor and walls, from the metal itself. There was no other source. Akeala looked hard, as it seemed to be resonating, with Kuro’s warbling. Akeala glanced closely at Kuro, who now motioned Akeala with her paw, again. Akeala brightened up. “Oh! You want me to sing!” She started to hum her tune again, about the brave feelups, on Mars. The lights in the metal began to change color, to a bright green, from a duller gray. Akeala got excited and sang more about the feelups, and the lights became brighter. Akeala looked at the cabin. She laughed, mid song, and couldn’t prevent herself, from laughing. “Mister Ship, you are happy, too,” she called out. “Ship happy,” came back a deep male voice, in a strange version, of accented Standard Galactic. Akeala sat back. “Mister Ship?” “Yes?” returned the voice. “Who are you?” asked Akeala. She looked at Kuro, who was still warbling. “Friend.” Akeala looked at Kuro, who seemed to be happy, still warbling.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 645 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Are you the ship?” “Ship, yes.” “Hello, then. I am named Akeala. This is Kuro.” “Aki and ala and Kuro.” Akeala sat back. “May name is Aki, and this is Kuro.” She sat back, wondering if this would be easier for the ship to understand. “Aki and Kuro.” Akeala smiled. “That is right. What is your name?” “Ship.” Akeala wondered. “Are you a computer or are you a life, like the Man-o-Wars.” “Not know.” “Hmmm. Where did you come from?” “Sleep.” Akeala wondered. “Where are you; now?” “Dreaming,” answered the ship. Akeala looked at Kuro. “Maybe I’m dreaming, too.” Kuro shook her head, slowly. “You understand all I say, don’t you, Kuro?” Kuro looked at her, and just started warbling; louder. Akeala smiled. “Mister Ship, can you make the ship work?” “Yes.” Akeala sat up. No one had made the ship work, not even Papa. “Can you make the ship work: for me?” Akeala’s heart beat faster.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 646 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Yes.” “Why do you want to do this, for me?” Akeala had to know. “You need friend; I need friend.” Akeala sat back, and couldn’t stop herself, and began to cry again, as she was so happy. She sniffed. “Mister Ship. You need a friend, too?” The ship began to pulse with light. “We can be a group of three friends, then?” asked Akeala. The ship answered. “Yes, I like Kuro, too.” Kuro kept warbling, enjoying the song that she was singing. Akeala looked at the little animal. Then she realized, the little animal and Ship were already friends, and maybe had been; for some time. The little feelup had found something, that woke the ship, and made the ship happy: her warbling. Akeala sniffed again, wiped the tears from her eyes, and smiled. “You are a very clever feelup, Kuro. I think I like you, Mister Ship.”

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 647 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 8

READINESS

The Master Templar had been told that; invasion was imminent. His fleets had been deployed: seventy- five percent offensive, and twenty-five percent defensive. He was in the Royal Courtyard, with Macrod Curr, overlooking Jilta. He was worried, of course. What would happen, if Maluka decided to openly attack, during this preparation time? Macrod Curr was standing, off to his side. “Elysis, if they attack us, we can still convert their craft. It’s that simple.” The senior Boguard, and the Master Templar, were both on a first name basis, now. The Master Templar stooped over, to examine another rose. When he was nervous, he became an avid gardener. That was how he dealt with stress. They both looked at the view, out across the city. Jilta was a beautiful city. It had been invaded before; occupied, and its people rose up, out of its ashes, to survive again. They had produced a better culture. Macrod Curr stood by the old man, and handed him a small spray bottle. It was loaded with small microbes, which enhanced plant growth. The

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 648 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

microbes, in making the plants stronger, helped make them immune, to parasites. “We have our guard in strategic locations, around the planet, positioned like last time,” said Macrod Curr. The Master Templar straightened. “They are good people here, Macrod. We have both short and long-lifers now, living side by side.” The Master Templar looked over at the clouds, forming at the top of the nearby mountains. “That means it’s going to rain, in half an hour. You had better take me inside.” Macrod nodded and looked at the other Boguard aides, always standing ready, nearby. They quickly walked over and took the garden tools. Macrod held the old man by the arm, and they started to walk; slowly back, to the palace, proper. “Macrod, have you any information, about the widening of the dead-zone?” Macrod stopped. “Sir, there is no information, other than what your granddaughter has found; that the phenomena is also in Sequetus, and now, is almost planet wide. The same phenomenon has been found in Palbo, Kantee, and several other planets.” “How many planets?” “We have found six, so far.” “They are all planets, in which we have a strength?” asked the Master Templar. They had arrived back at the palace proper.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 649 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Macrod nodded. “Your son-in-law is going to Sequetus now.” The old man stopped. “He isn’t going to Maluka?” Macrod stood still. “No.” The Master Templar looked him in the eye, and straightened. “This is perceived as a great threat, isn’t it? This is why the invasion was pushed forward two weeks, to keep any enemy here; off guard.” Macrod Curr smiled. “Elysis, I can only guess at the command intent of my own group, and it likely would be the same as yours.” The Master Templar smiled. “That is all I wanted to know.”

Ω

Jaron watched, as the screens went from the familiar warp drive field purple color, to the black of space. “Amanda, are we near Sequetus?” “Yes, as planned, Captain. We are in the system, taking the lazy way in.” Jaron looked over, at the console. “Amanda, see what you can pick up. There’s no need to go right into the system. Reconnoiter for a while, and see what transmissions that the system is emitting.” “I’m onto that, Captain.” An hour later, she reported that there was nothing unusual.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 650 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Take us in to see Cammander Beel, Amanda.” In less than a minute, Amanda had her Man-o- War alongside Beel’s destroyer. Three minutes more and Jaron was aboard, wearing a black shocksuit. They were in the Commander’s Office. The walls were bare, and there was a small table between Beel and Jaron. Beel was speaking. “The evidence that Sheril found was replicated more scientifically; six times. The death-zone, as we now call it, is growing, and now covers over four continents, and has totally wiped out life, in two oceans.” Jaron looked at the map. The Atlantic was dead, both north and south; the zone encroached into the Amazon, Africa and had reached much of North America. Europe was ruined. “Nothing lives in these areas?” asked Jaron. Beel shook his head. “Nothing, Lorde Jaron. There are no protective suits, which one can wear, and there is no way, we can penetrate with anything alive, and stay alive. It isn’t radioactive, and it’s not airborne. It’s just an absence of life there, and spreading.” Jaron pointed to the other areas that also showed death-zones. “They are spreading as well?” “Yes, and we expect the entire planet to be covered in around thirteen months, at the rate, that the zones are expanding. They also expand out into space, and go beyond the atmosphere, about three

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 651 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

hundred kinopacs. We’ve lost two fighters and an interceptor.” Jaron shook his head. “Do you have a date, when it started?” “It goes back two years, before we arrived.” Jaron thought hard. “That’s about the time when we invaded Kantee?” Beel nodded. “I had wondered if that was coincidental, too. It’s around that date.” Jaron nodded. “Where is Sheril?” “She is on the planet, finding any settlements, which might be in the way of the expanding zone. She is getting people, and any animals she can find, away from those areas. There is a team of two hundred, working with her. Mostly, they are Indian villagers helping, with us providing transport and support teams. Do you wish to see her?” Jaron thought for a moment. “Yes, but I want to see Akeala, first. She has my ship active?” Beel looked hesitant, and Jaron picked up the thought. He smiled. “Don’t worry, it’s her ship, now. Is she here?” Beel looked down and shook his head. “She won’t come out of the ship. I’ve tried to beg her to come out, and even insinuated that I’ve ordered it.” Jaron nodded. “That is bound not to work.” Beel brightened. “She just won’t come out. It’s like she has become a recluse, or something.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 652 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron stood. “So, obviously that is where I will go; first, alone.” Beel stood. “I might suggest you take your Man-o-War along. You could need her. I will send you the data and recordings, which I have, from your daughter.”

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 653 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 9

CONVERSATIONS

“What do you mean; it won’t allow me in?” Jaron asked Amanda. “It appears Captain, that Black Knight has changed your key code. You are no longer ‘it’.” Jaron was looking out through his suit visor, at the ship. He wasn’t thinking this was as humorous, as Amanda was making it out to be.

Jaron outside Black Knight

Amanda, do what you can, to open the door, please? thought Jaron. Sorry; it’s not opening, Captain. Blast it, then, thought Jaron.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 654 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

I can’t, and won’t Captain. It isn’t a good move. You made the ship impervious to this, and I don’t want to find out what you designed to ward off my attack. Jaron nodded. Papa, I can see you, on the screen. It was Akeala’s thought. Thank goodness. I was worried. You didn’t answer the destroyer, or my calls. Please, Akeala, let me in. Papa, I don’t know how. You have communication with the computer, named BEN. It’s from another era, and it works by thought transmissions, brain waves and your emotions. It’s very complex. I found that out, but didn’t know what it was. Ask it nicely; to open the door. Hold on, Papa. I think I know how to do it. Jaron waited for a few seconds and the door slowly opened. It closed, after he floated inside. “I’m safely inside Amanda.” Got that. BEN? asked Amanda. I will explain; when I get back. I can hardly wait, to hear it, she replied. Jaron shook his head. He wasn’t really thinking sarcasm was necessary, after fifteen minutes of floating aimlessly, in space.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 655 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron entering Black Knight

Ω

Beel looked across, to his aides. “He is inside.” There was a sigh of relief, from the other staff. “Let Sheril know he is in, and communicating with Akeala.” “Yes, sir,” replied an aide.

Ω

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 656 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron looked at his daughter. She looked frayed. He could feel that there was something wrong. Akeala wasn’t sure what to say. Jaron waited. Finally, Akeala spoke first. “Papa. I’m sorry for entering into your ship. I’m really sorry. I really am.” Jaron could see her eyes filling with tears. He knew she wasn’t saying all that she felt. She took a small step, towards him. He stepped towards her. She looked into his eyes, and tears started to flow. She tried to hold them back, and half choked in trying to stop herself from sobbing. “I don’t know what is the matter with me.” She wiped a cheek, and another line of tears formed. Jaron put his helmet down. He hadn’t even said hello. He wondered how to say hello, to his daughter; he didn’t really know. She then burst into sobs, of uncontrollable grief, and threw herself into his arms. “Oh, Papa, it’s not fair, it’s just not fair!” Jaron had only ever held his daughter three times. Once was immediately after her birth, and another time was three days, after that. She had been whisked away from their residence then, for fear that, she would die in her crib, as her two brothers had. That tactic had worked. Later on, he held her once, on Sandrist, when she was grown up,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 657 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

after she helped rescue him. Now, Jaron was still estranged, from Akeala, whom he never really got to know. He didn’t know how to console her, or how to make her feel better. He held her, and her pain was hurting him, too. He just held her, felt her heaving against his chest, as she cried, and wept. Jaron didn’t know the reason for this. He could only guess, though. What a life, into which he had brought his daughter. Akeala began to sob less. Jaron was relieved. He didn’t say anything. He just slowly stroked her hair, just to let her know he was there, and that just by touching her, he somehow understood. She slowly pulled away, and before he could say anything, she burst into tears again, and more grieving sobs. She murmured finally, that it wasn’t fair that Mama had gone. She had just found her; after all those years, and had been able to talk to her, but now, she could no longer do so, as her mother had died. She had so wanted to get to know her mother, and now, it was too late, she was dead. Akeala cried and bawled. Jaron just held her, with tears now forming, in his own eyes. Yes, that was what he too, had been withholding. He also had once lost Akeala’s mother, many years ago, and now she was taken from him again, in the minor battle, on Mars. His tears fell; onto her hair. She touched them, and pulled away. “You miss her so much, don’t you?’

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 658 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron looked into her eyes. “Yes, like life itself. She was my companion, for many different lifetimes. I barely got to know her this life, and they killed her.” He brushed away his own grief. She looked at him, and then sobbed again, “The only friend I had, was Aunt Amy, and she was killed; as well.” She fell into his arms again, and sobbed.

Ω

As they held each other, Amanda penetrated the psyche of both of them, and followed their thought to the ship. She wanted to discover who or what it was, which she recognized, as BEN. BEN, was the acronym for Biologically Encrypted Nanotech. It was a biological computer, and stored, within the ship itself. Amanda inwardly smiled. You are meant to be an artificial intelligence, BEN. BEN woke up. It looked around and sensed the Man-o-War next to him. Black Knight gave an outward thrust of current. Amanda was struck; slightly, by BEN. BEN, don’t do that. You have my friends; aboard. BEN didn’t heed her advice and shot out another jolt. Amanda appeared, on the other side, of Black Knight. BEN shot another jolt, and then another, and Amanda just appeared elsewhere.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 659 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

BEN, this is tiresome, and you’re using up your power. I can do this, until your fuel cells run out. I have much patience. BEN stopped, and thought. You: hurt me? Amanda chuckled to herself. Her flooring groaned. BEN, I will protect you; help you. I know you aren’t a computer program. How old are you? BEN relaxed. He thought immediately of two hundred thousand years, and said so.

Ω

Jaron was enjoying the embrace, which he was experiencing. Eventually, he pulled away. “I needed that,” he explained. Akeala laughed. “You did, did you?” Jaron smiled. “Aki, I love it, when you smile that way.” He just reached and embraced her again, this time almost crushing her. She pulled back, smiling, wiping another tear of joy away from her eyes. “I love you, Papa.” “I know, Aki, and I love you, too.” After a few moments of just admiring each other, Jaron looked at her, cocking his head. “How did you get BEN, to open the door for me?” Akeala smiled and shook her head. “It wasn’t me.” “Who, then?” he asked.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 660 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Akeala looked to her right and there was Kuro sitting on the console. She had her eyes half closed and she was warbling a song, of some sort. Jaron listened, and nodded. “She thinks she is singing a song, of two big feelups that had been away from each other, and now they are back together, again. The song is a very joyous one.” Akeala looked at him. “You are making this up? Right?” Jaron shook his head. “That’s the song, which she’s singing. I can feel her psyche. Feelups are extremely society oriented, and they think of us, as just big feelups. Her warbling is her humming, or singing a song, as you or I might.” Akeala looked at Kuro, and then back at her father. She was still in his arms. She wasn’t sure if she should believe him or not, but she didn’t care. She just rested her head on his shoulder.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 661 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 10

MAROEN & MARKONI

It was almost zero hour. Markoni looked at Maroen. Their people were throughout the tunnels, under the city. They had disabled most of the city’s communication centers. The word they had received, was that the invasion into Maluka, was underway. The outer colonies of Maluka had gone first. The Man-o-Wars had surrounded their planetary centers, and before the Malukan generals knew what had happened, their fleets had surrendered, totally. One planet fell, after another. It was similar to how the Federation had conquered the Confederated Council of Planets, the CCP. Maluka was still waiting, for word from its colonies, and it didn’t know its colonies had fallen. The plan was simple. A planet was nominated, which had a fleet. The fleet was located, and the Man-o-Wars would contact, via thought, the Warp Drive systems, who were running the ships. The systems would always respond; positively. It then took only hours, for an entire fleet to be converted. The commanders of the fleet were informed, as to what was happening to their ships, and that their warp drives would no longer operate. They were asked to surrender. They were informed that should they not surrender, then they would be isolated, and

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 662 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

the compartments, which they were currently in, would be starved of oxygen. Those still alive, would then be sent, onto the nearest planet, and offloaded. This happened, fleet after fleet, time after time. Markoni looked up through the slatted grate, to the world above the pavement. He swallowed. It would be any second, now. He thought of all that was happening, the plans, and what part, that each of them were to play. He recalled what had happened, during the past several days, leading up to this point.

Markoni waiting for his signal

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 663 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

On the larger planets, the population was simply given indoctrination videos, prepared well in advance. They were told that from now on, they were no longer tied to the old Malukan Empire. Furthermore, their warp drives wouldn’t operate, and until an interim government was set up, they were independent. They would be at liberty, to travel in normal standard non-warp drives, but it would take years, to reach any other civilization. The old quantum drive technology of freeze-thaw methods of travel; would all have to be re-developed. The planets capitulated, one after the other. The indoctrination videos were simply beamed down to whole populaces. People learned that they merely needed to keep working, at their usual work place jobs. They were told that the link with Maluka would be restored soon, and that the planet they had now, was their planet, and it wouldn’t be the same, as the old days. The people of the cities didn’t go into a panic. Mostly, the economies didn’t fail, but remained static or progressed. There were indoctrination videos for the military, the general public, political groups, and many more. There were altogether, over thirty videos, of how to act, during the so-called invasion. The colonial planets went down without a fight. There was no need for fighting. They showed the crews of the imperial Malukan ships the video

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 664 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

indoctrination, of what had been happening, who the Talkron were, and the mental effects, which the Talkron had been having on the populace, and the crew. The response from the crews was generally, that they decided that they didn’t want to fight a battle, which had no real purpose.

The invasion of Maluka begins

Maroen looked up and saw the lights. Her relief was instantaneous. They had been dug in, down under these buildings, for a week. They had no more rations, and no further communications to their mission-ops. They were simply running on grunt and faith, which was the motto, of the Boguard Fronts.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 665 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Markoni looked up. “That looks beautiful,” he breathed slowly. He looked around, to the men and women with him. There were thousands of squads like his, all over the planet; now. His squad had seven Boguard Fronts, and the remaining twenty were Malukan locals, lifted off from the colonial prison planets, imprisoned for being Malukan dissidents. Maroen and Markoni’s mission was to take over the governor’s office. There were others; taking the communications centers, the media houses, the military command quarters and more. Power would be blacked out for exactly three minutes, and after that, would come a pre-recorded message, telling people what was going on and why, and that they were to remain indoors. Those, who remained outside after the end of this message, had all of five minutes, or they would be considered enemy agents of the rebels, taking this planet. The message was that the dictatorship of Maluka was over. After that, Maroen, Markoni and his crew were to take the governor’s house. Then, in another two minutes, a live message would broadcast, to say that the government had surrendered unconditionally, with a new government installed. Martial law was in place for the next forty-eight hours, and by the next morning, the curfew would be lifted, and people could go about their business; as normal. A newscast would show all the outlying colonial planets, as having been taken over. They had

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 666 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

surrendered, and the surrender of all the fleets was shown as well. It was expected, that with no hope of resistance, all enemy action would cease, for the time being. It was only a few minutes, before twilight. The lights of the town went off. “That is our cue. Fronts go!” Maroen called out. There was no power, and no communications. The Malukans had also been preparing. Maroen looked up, as she dashed out of the underground pipe. The grates had been blown away, but next, they had to get through a hail of laser fire, from the roof, running on batteries and generators. Markoni screamed at the team, to race for the main door. He heard the generators blow. He glanced overhead, to see a flash from a Man-o-War slicing into their building. The guards were down, and the generators out. Next, the lasers turned onto the Man-o-Wars. Maroen was inside, and firing on whatever moved. Weapons down! She impelled. It wasn’t a request but a thought, which was as demanding as a brick to the head. Three guards fell to their knees, and two fell backwards. Others dropped their weapons. Markoni saw one that wasn’t about to, and the guard fired, and dived to his right. Markoni’s thought held him stationary, in mid-air. The man was temporarily paralyzed. Markoni further thought: This time I’m giving you a choice. Tell me honestly, and if

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 667 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

the answer is no, your heart will stop. Your choice; your pledge. Markoni received the reply. He instantly let the guard down to the ground, alive, and the weapon slipped from his hands. Markoni put the thought there, for all the others. It’s that easy. You can choose, and your thought will answer me. You can surrender, with honor, and that is the end of this game. Alternatively, you don’t surrender, and we apply enough force and pressure, so you do, or die. Choose. Markoni looked at one man. “Him!” he called, to three of his rebel Malukan team. They grabbed the man, and thrust him on the floor, face down. The rebels cocked their weapons. “Do we need to make an example, or are you going to override that mental implant, voluntarily? Don’t make us take your life, simply to be an example to others. We will know your choice, and your thoughts. Choose!” They waited. The guard on the ground said nothing, but Markoni could feel his thoughts, and he was listening to his implant, thinking, deciding, looking at the treasured memories of his children and wife in his memory, looking at his job. His implants were also trying to make his decisions for him. Eventually he made up his own mind. Markoni nodded. He is clean35, let’s go and catch up the schedule.

35 Definition: Clean: The Boguard Fronts, trained in the use of thought, use the term clean, to mean that the E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 668 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The rebels of Markoni’s group called back to the guards, “There are more of us here, who no longer have the mental implants, as you do, and you won’t know who can know your thoughts, so keep them clean of deceit.” As Markoni raced up the stairs with his team, the number of Boguard forces swelled, from those coming up from underground, as the Man-o-Wars took the outside plaza, and the building’s exterior. Two hundred Boguard and rebels were now filing into the building.

Ω

The invasion of Aragon was proceeding: better than expected. The Man-o-Wars were obfuscating36 the Malukan mental implants. People were confused about what to do. Thoughts, en-masse; were being fed into the planet’s mental implanting machinery, via the satellites. Those implanted, were getting messages to: do nothing rash, decide for yourself, these people are friendly, wait and see what happens first, and remember your family. After that, the satellites exploded; the towers, where the messages

person was thinking the truth, and was not a threat to the mission. Unclean meant the person is thinking of deceit. Searfinders Index: p. 1289.

36 Definition: Obfuscate: To bewilder, make things unclear, unintelligible, obscure. From the Latin fuscus ‘dark.’

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 669 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

were being sent from, collapsed. This acted like a wave, helping people, who were soon able to think for themselves, again. For many, this was a feeling of freshness. For others, they still had shadow memories of mental implants, and they were still working on them, following the old defunct orders.

Ω

Boguard Fronts came up, out from the muddy waters around Aragon, the military nerve center of Trans Galactic Shipping, the only known Warp Drive manufacturer, left in the Federation. The Fronts stormed up the banks of the river, below the buildings. Teams of hundreds of Corduke Hallowmen quickly followed. The first tower was taken in minutes, then the second fell. The power was soon down, in the towers. The defenders were unclear on what to do, and lay down their weapons, in droves. The gunneries came next, taken out by converts. Ships, once under the command of warp drives, were now taking out the planetary defenses, with pinpoint accuracy.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 670 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Aragon City under invasion

After ten minutes, the city was down, and had effectively surrendered.

Ω

Markoni had the governor’s staff, lying on the floor. None of his officers had died; thus far. Governor, we want the security code for the media room. Now! thought Markoni. The governor couldn’t resist the command. He knew he couldn’t divulge it, so instead, he tried to think about his wife and children. He tried. Then, Markoni sent the next message: Don’t give me the code.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 671 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Instantly, the governor’s mind flashed: 69361 speed! “Damn!” he groaned. Markoni smiled. “Implants work like that, sorry Governor.” Where? The Governor shook his head, and then willingly gave him a picture, of the wall next to the balcony. Maroen shared the picture, and saw the panel. She punched in the code numbers, and the wall behind her slid apart. “Okay, Governor, this is where we part company. The Corduke Hallowmen will take you from here.” Markoni nodded, and the four Hallowmen lowered their weapons. Markoni looked inside the head of the Governor. He had a major piece of microscopic circuitry, and, with one look from Markoni, some of the finer strands within it melted; harmlessly. Markoni scanned his eyes, and sensory channels. He wiped out three more sensors, two visionary, and one behind the left ear. The Governor heard a click inside his head, and wondered what it was. He looked at Markoni, puzzled. The voice in his head, which he had heard for years, was gone. It was now quiet and peaceful. He smiled, relieved. No more talking inside his head – silence. Markoni winked. “I hope you have a more peaceful time, listening to your own thoughts, from here on, Governor.” Markoni smiled as he waved and dashed away.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 672 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 673 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 11

THE PALACE

Garth Kwok and Aka stood in front of the palace steps. Behind them, were fifty other government representatives who had been previously interned, for anti-state activities. Garth looked around, behind him. There were several hundred rebels. On the hills were his people, armed. He looked up, and saw the Man-o-Wars. He waved. Cordukes lined the steps ahead, weapons drawn, held across their chests. Behind them in the shadows, were Boguard: ready, and anticipating the worst. The media cameras were on Garth, and his wife. The previous night, he had broadcast his life-story, his mental implants, his disagreement with the system, and about not being allowed to speak against it. It was telecast to the whole planet. Then, he broadcast his story about his internship, his memories of Aka, his daughter, dying, who was really a state plant, put there, to watch him. He then was shipped out to a prison planet, where he and others like him, decided that Maluka was better than that, and there was room for freedom, here. He looked ahead, swallowed, and held Aka’s hand. He slowly walked up the steps. He felt as

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 674 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

though rifles were trained on him. Aka felt it too. He squeezed her hand tightly, and took the next step. She did the same. They were half way. Garth looked up, and to his right, he thought he saw something, a glint in the sky. He thought that it was his imagination. Maroen saw it, too. Keep walking, she instructed them. She was in the crowd; to the side. Markoni saw the glint; again. It was important, that this was done in the open, so everyone could see the broadcast, of the new government inauguration. It would give stability to the government and industry. The less destructive a coup, the faster the coupe, and the more formal the passage of government after a coup, then the faster the transition to social stability and success. Garth took another step. He saw something flash, to his right. His brow was beginning to sweat. He held his wife’s hand, firmer, for reassurance. She guided him. There was a scuffle behind them. He didn’t look back. In the air, something cracked. Garth froze, but didn’t look up. Another ten steps, was the voice, which he heard in his mind. He also received the mental image, of a small ship, lowering amidst smoke. He swallowed. There were buildings, all around. They overlooked the steps. He could see Hallowmen

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 675 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

snipers on the rooftops and balconies. He could see many other people on the other balconies, too. He hoped that his wife and he, would live through this. He breathed heavily. There were two more steps to go. Then, there was the last step. He had arrived at the large old wooden doors. He had to stand there and knock: three times. His back was feeling hot. He heard another crack, and someone screamed, behind him. He didn’t look. He rapped once, on the door. He rapped a second time. He breathed hard, as the cameras were recording, and sending this feed out live, around Maluka. He rapped the door, for a third and final time. There was a commotion, as a camera fell onto the ground, and a cameraman collapsed. His camera skidded. No one noticed the blood, coming from cameraman’s ears. He had had an engineered brain aneurism. A micro transmitter exploded inside his head, when he wouldn’t follow its command. He was being controlled: externally. He had been told, that if he didn’t follow the command, he would die. The pain and pressure increased, inside his head. Boguard nearby, had already located the man, and located his implant to kill. They were physically immobilizing his neural pathways. He couldn’t physically follow the commands. They had him

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 676 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

momentarily paralyzed, until his brain had exploded, click. Paramedics were on standby. Hallowmen, dressed in red and white, rushed forward, grabbed the cameraman, and pushed him, onto a floater. Hallowmen, kitted out, as paramedics followed in their place. More Hallowmen, clad in City Security uniforms, told the crowd that the man had suffered a fit, and that he was being rushed to the hospital, where he would recover. In fact, he was already dead. Overhead, twenty-five Ks up, a small scout ship, not run on warp drives, had its gunnery section completely blown apart. These were free agents, protecting what they believed was right, and they would die with the integrity, of what they believed in. As their ship slowly entered the atmosphere, and burned its way across the heavens, a small prayer left the Hallowmen for their enemies, who had just died honorably, in battle. Garth Kwok glimpsed the smoke from something, as it streaked down through the heavens, into the bay. He waited, and waited. The door slowly groaned open. Garth stepped forward with Aka, two steps, three steps, and finally, they were safe, from outside sight. Garth sighed heavily. Aka put her arm around him. She thought he looked so good, in his uniform,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 677 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

made especially for the day. She looked behind, and smiled. She looked back down the steps; apprehensively. Garth tugged on her hand and they marched forward. “I’m beginning to feel calmer.” Aka breathed deeply and nodded. They weren’t there; yet. Hallowmen, and Cordukes lined the walkway. Garth could see Markoni now, up ahead, controlling everything, checking people’s minds. Garth knew what he was doing, and knew this wouldn’t have been successful, without Markoni. They were at the internal final steps now. Above them was a small delegation. Garth was bewildered. Something had changed. Markoni was there; ahead of them. He had run past the crowd on the side, and behind it. The media were upon Garth, and his twenty followers, who were to be sworn in, as the new government. Garth looked forward, towards the front. He had one more step to go.

Ω

The battle for the Malukan moons had been brief. The warp drives of one of the moons simply closed down. It withdrew power. Those inside surrendered.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 678 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Maluka was almost theirs.

Ω

Garth Kwok looked ahead of them. He was standing on the same level. The Governor was there. He nodded. Garth looked at Markoni. Markoni looked around, stared at Maroen. She stepped forward in her civilian nylop jumpsuit. She smiled at Garth. “Garth Kwok, this is Governor Pelps. He will be swearing you in. This makes your inauguration official. It’s a loophole, covered by marshal law, to make it legal. This legally can be done.” She looked at him, and Garth was obviously mildly shocked. This is a last minute change of plans, and something positive, which we didn’t expect. The Governor is your willing ally. We will explain later, but his implant has been disengaged. Garth looked to Markoni, who nodded once again, while scanning all the other faces and minds, in the room. The Governor stepped over and indicated for Garth to come forward and follow him. Garth swallowed. He kept waiting for a knife, laser or gun; from behind. It didn’t happen. There was a murmur, instead. Garth wondered. He was almost there, almost in power. He sat.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 679 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Governor Pelps read out a proclamation that Governor Garth Kwok, and his interim Cabinet, were now the temporary legitimate government, of Maluka. This interim mandate had power, for five standard years. Upon this expiration, there would be an election of the population’s representatives. Garth found himself raising his hand, as though it was a dream. He said the words, and repeated what Governor Pelps said to repeat. Finished, he turned around, and looked at all the people in the Palace Hall, perhaps eight hundred of them. The hall was full. Someone started to clap, then another, and soon, there was a great ovation. Governor Garth Kwok was led to a small dais, where he would speak to the crowd. His heart began to beat faster, and he found himself feeling exposed and vulnerable again. He looked out at the faces, as though trying to see, who was against him. In the distance, was another scuffle and a man went down, and another fell; injured. Make your speech, Governor Kwok, but be fast. We need to make this very public but get you out of here. Garth swallowed, and thanked Governor Pelps for the inauguration. Garth spoke of freedom, and then thanked all, and stepped off the dais. He was quickly surrounded by a three-deep curtain of bodyguards, and whisked from view, towards the rear.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 680 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

As his bodyguards bundled him into the next room, off the hall, the door behind closed and rang shut. Then, they quickly walked down a set of stairs, and into a tunnel. Governor Pelps smiled. “Garth Kwok, I remember you.” Garth smiled. “I hope Governor, that you will be kind to the populace, and I hope you are as benevolent now, as you were, when speaking twenty years ago,” said Pelps. Governor Garth Kwok smiled. “I believe even more so.” Aka squeezed Garth’s hand. Markoni strode over to them, as the ranks of the Hallowmen divided, for him to walk through. “You are safe here,” explained Markoni. “We will make more presentations to the population later, in less public spaces. I believe we are complete here, as far as the Boguard Fronts are concerned. Rule well, Governor; be fair, and rule as you would want others, to rule over you.” Markoni bowed: a long gracious bow.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 681 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 12

AMAZON

Jaron was standing fifty pacs back, from the banks of the river in the Amazon Basin, where Sheril had found the dying-zone. He could see the dead birds on the riverbank, and the dead fish, at the edge of the water. The vegetation was completely dead, on the other side of the river. Sheril tugged at Jaron’s arm, and held her other hand, to her mouth. There was a flock of birds, heading straight for the zone. The leading bird collapsed and tumbled out of the air, falling to the ground. Before the others could follow, the air formed like a buffer, and Jaron created a swirling turbulent airstream and pulled the rest of the flock, to safety. The birds quickly landed, perplexed at what had happened. One landed near its fallen companion, only pacs away. “Oh, no,” called Akeala, as she saw it was the fallen bird’s mate. “It will hop over to its fallen partner, on foot.” Akeala began to run down to the dying-zone. Jaron called after her, “Aki, don’t!” She didn’t listen, and she was almost upon the little bird. “Papa, these birds live for over seventy

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 682 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

years, and only ever have only one mate; for life. This one won’t ever give up, to reach its fallen mate.” Jaron extended his hand, Amanda, help. It was as though an invisible barrier, had just been erected, between Akeala and the dying zone. The little bird took one step, and bounced back, now even more confused. Akeala stopped and stood, a pac away. She looked at the parrot. “Hello, Mister Bird, tell me what happened.” The little green bird looked at Akeala, and then at its fallen mate. It squawked and fluttered its wings, and squawked some more. Aki cocked her head, shrugged and said, “I understand. Did anything else happen? The little bird looked at its mate, took a step closer, and hit the barrier again. It turned its head to Akeala, chirped, raised its wings again, and squawked some more. “I see. What else?” she asked. Jaron watched the pair of them, marginally less concerned. Sheril said quietly, “She has a strong gift, you know. We used to talk about people like her, when we were young, you and I.” Jaron looked at his daughter. He nodded. “Yes, she has. She is a fighter, has courage, and has an abundance of empathy too.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 683 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Large trees in the forest basin

Beel looked at them both, and asked, “These trees dying here; are they part of the Earth Syndrome, as well? Sheril nodded. “It has a well defined area where all life dies regardless. It also has a transient region, where some life can die, and other life can live. You might notice that you are feeling more tired here, and sleepy.” Jaron nodded. “Sleep is a natural healing mechanism of the body, when it’s hurt and attacked.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 684 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Sheril nodded. “You should bring Akeala back now. We will move further away.” Jaron called to Aki, but just as he did, he saw the little bird stumble and fall in front of her. Akeala stood and looked on helpless. “Come here; grab the hurt bird and bring it with you. It will recover back here, and scare the other birds away, or encourage them, to move with us.” Jaron watched her, as she carefully and quickly, scooped up the small bird and carefully put it in her open pouch. She started to walk faster, following Jaron. The other birds had taken flight. Well back from the demarcation line, they examined more trees. It was obvious, that further back, less trees were stricken. Akeala looked down, from where she was. “Papa, if I were to get a long pole, and stand well back, and hook the fallen mate, and bring it back from the dying-zone, would it recover? Jaron looked to Sheril. She shrugged. “You may have to get it, resuscitate it, and it still might be too late, but scientifically, we should try to get this data.” Beel nodded. Akeala had pulled down a long light dead branch. She looked at her father. “If I get too close and start to feel weak, I will pull away. I won’t risk myself.” Jaron nodded. He said to the others, “Stay here,” as he walked with his daughter, down to the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 685 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

impermeable invisible barrier. Amanda, what do you think? he thought to the ship, a hundred Ks overhead. Go ahead, was the reply.

Jaron was down, nearer the bank, to the fallen bird. Akeala was a pac closer, kneeling, and using the branch. She finally hooked it around the bird. Slowly she was pulling it back. Jaron shrugged, and simply decided the bird would move across the ground, and it did, into Akeala’s hands. She looked up. “Papa, my idea would have worked too, you know,” she said, reprovingly. Jaron smiled and stood, stepped back and beckoned her, to move with him. A moment later, they were both back, with the others. Jaron looked at the green bird, its eyes closed. Amanda? he thought.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 686 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

There is still life there, a thread of life, in its cells, clinging on. Amanda broadcast this, to all of them. Bring them up, all of you. This needs more investigation. Sheril sighed and looked at Jaron. “We are being instructed by your ship, Jaron?” Jaron nodded. “Always; that’s why she uses the female presentation of herself, as I can’t resist it. You and my daughter know that.” Akeala looked at Sheril, as though to imply she had no idea what he meant.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 687 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 13

EPILOGUE

The executive Council of Ataran was in session, and being briefed by Consulair Brijet. Her plan was simple. The Pleiadians would go with the Boguard; the Hallowmen would lead the Cordukes, and their armadas would all travel to the source of the Talkron, well over a galaxy away. The other Templars would remain with many of their Corduke members, and with the fleets from over the Federation. They would stay in control of the existing Federation worlds, along with civilian governments. There was peace now. The Malukan colonies were doing as expected. The operation to undo all the remote neural monitoring on Malukan worlds had been extremely successful. There was almost no backlash to the new regime. Brijet outlined that Jaron, with his special abilities, would first be used to turn around the death-zones, which were now appearing on more planets. No zones had appeared on Orbat or Yaltipia. They had however, been found on another five planets; in the past two weeks. In light of this, the penetration into the heart of the enemy had to happen swiftly.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 688 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

While some members of the council wondered, if they should reconnoiter first into the other galaxy, and then with better intelligence, return with the armada, most of the council favored swift action as representing the fastest route to victory.

Ω

Garth Kwok spent the first two weeks, outlining the Talkron system being used to control the minds of the people, and the population seemed to understand. He monitored his popularity, which soon rated at ninety-two percent. The prisons were gone through, with a fine board of review. Those imprisoned for political activities were released first. Those with other crimes of theft, and even murder, were all being looked at; again.

It was acknowledged that mental remote neural monitoring had various side effects of antisocial behavior. The mental implants inserted into the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 689 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

population could be deemed as a cause of antisocial behavior, in the first place, and be responsible for crimes. Those who had been driven insane by the implants, however, wouldn’t be released, for their own and society’s safety. That would be the job of future reviews. It was further acknowledged, that while crime may have other causes, many of the criminals would be released, as unconditionally pardoned, with the proviso, that they would be returned to serve their original sentences, if found again to commit any minor or major crime.

Ω

The Earth Syndrome was found to be affecting all life, within the death-zones. It was discovered that it was possible to resurrect some life, brought out from a zone, and such life acted, as though it never had been so affected, so long as the action was swift. No human life had experience being in the zone and having come out, resurrected. There was still no known cause of the phenomena. Jaron continued on Earth, with a team of researchers, to more accurately establish where the Talkron had come from, what planet, and what galaxy. With that knowledge, he returned to Yaltipia, which is where the next book takes you.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 690 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 691 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

End of

Orbat

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 692 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 693 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Galaxy CHAPTER 6

Sub-Contents

Maps Sub-chapter 1 Triangulum Galaxy Sub-chapter 2 Briefing Sub-chapter 3 The New Ship Sub-chapter 4 Commander Beel Sub-chapter 5 Black Knight Again Sub-chapter 6 Jilta Sub-chapter 7 Sequetus 3 Again Sub-chapter 8 Small Magellanic Cloud Sub-chapter 9 Planet Kodin Sub-chapter 10 Planet Kaladore Sub-chapter 11 IC 1613 Galaxy Sub-chapter 12 Station-Ship Sub-chapter 13 Confrontation Sub-chapter 14 Approaching Charon Sub-chapter 15 Eron Joon Sub-chapter 16 More On Eron Joon Sub-chapter 17 Lorde Charon Sub-chapter 18 Briefing Sub-chapter 19 Mount Talkron Sub-chapter 20 Combat Sub-chapter 21 Under Mount Talkron Sub-chapter 22 Dead-Zone Sub-chapter 23 Station-Ships Sub-chapter 24 Epilogue E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 694 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 695 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Map

The Local Group of Galaxies

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 696 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 1

TRIANGULUM GALAXY

aron was looking out at five hundred members of the Boulan. He had been asked to explain J firsthand the reason for the impending war. “This has to be a final war. It will be like nothing that we have experienced before.” Jaron looked out over the faces. “I can see many of you, who were with me on Palbo. Some of you were even with me in Sleebo, and before that, Rambus.” He looked at two, on his right, “One of you here was on the Man-o-War that lifted Captain Letone and I from Sequetus 3, Earth.” He smiled. He saw many familiar faces out there. They all knew who he was, who he had been. “Imagine fighting alongside of someone who you have known, and respected; someone whom you trusted and relied upon. You are about to turn to this person in battle, but they are no longer there, because they were removed from your memory and repositioned in space, with a very different memory. That is what the current war with the Talkron is about. It is changing the map of the universe, and changing who is in it. However, most of you are experienced chrononauts by now. I don’t need to tell you this. You are already engaged in this battle. It E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 697 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

is truly insidious, and we are babes in its experience, compared to the Talkron. If we stay still, and fight only this war, which I have described, the war we are currently in, we’ll lose. Right now, we are losing, though the recent wins in Kantee, Sequetus and Maluka may make us feel otherwise.” Jaron turned to the huge sixty-pac wide image of himself now hovering above the Boulan members. “Currently we have a fleeting advantage. We need to take this advantage to the Talkron, and fight it on their home ground, not ours. Fight on their worlds, not ours. We need to fight this war with our advantage, not theirs.” Jaron looked out to the faces watching. “Our galaxy is one of three major galaxies, in a group of galaxies, known as the Local Group. Our galaxy, which I knew as the Milky Way, has a series of other smaller galaxies associated with it, and which gravitationally bind each other. The other similar major galaxy in this Local Group, is the Andromeda Galaxy. It has dozens of smaller galaxies bound to it, also.” The image changed and Jaron continued. “You can see that there are fifty-four galaxies, in the Local Group. I want to draw your attention to the third largest galaxy, known as the Triangulum37 Galaxy.” He pointed to its relationship with the Milky Way.

37 Triangulum Galaxy: It is part of the Local Group of 54 galaxies, of which the Milky Way is part. Also known as the Pinwheel Galaxy. It is an unbarred spiral galaxy. There are E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 698 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Triangulum Galaxy

There are around forty billion stars in the Triangulum Galaxy. It is 2.7 million light years from Sequetus, which is why we have an interest in it. We are certain this is the home galaxy of the Talkron.” Jaron paused a moment, due to the mental and verbal murmur, through the underground canyon. He waited for it to subside. “The Talkron appear to have taken control of the Andromeda Galaxy, as a step along, out from Triangulum. However, we don’t know in what time frame they did this.”

three spiral galaxies in the Local Group. The Triangulum Galaxy is the third largest.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 699 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He glanced around. “It would appear that after this, they reached out to our galaxy, via the Small Magallanic Cloud, and then the Large Magallanic Cloud galaxies. Then they appear to have gone on a straight line to the Milky Way, or as we call it, the Santonia Galaxy.” Jaron was pointing to the hologram. “Their first stop off point was my planet, Earth, in Sequetus. Our sun was a direct line beacon for them. It had a rare blue planet; and it was the closest blue planet, in a direct line from their galaxy, into the Milky Way. Look at the map here” Jaron looked around. “It appears that their efforts have been about thirty thousand years in the planning, up to now. From Sequetus they spread out, and took Palbo, Kantee and Maluka. From there, they have been using their mental implanting, to soften up the Federation, prior to a full-scale physical

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 700 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

invasion. The Confederated Council of Planets was the first to fall, when the Talkron ceded to our galaxy warp drive technology, via Palbo and Kantee. They took over the Confederated Council of Planets, system by system, by using warp drives.” Jaron saw he had everyone’s attention fixed on him. “On Jilta was an unusual Federation lorde, who didn’t succumb to his mental implants very well. His name was Lorde Hymondy, and while he was from Talax, as all the Royals based out from Kantee were, Boguard surrounded him, and his rule was benign. He; in turn was fed data about Sequetus by the Boguard, and he sent his own personnel to investigate: headed by Independent Goren Torren.” Jaron lightly nodded. He continued. “On Sequetus 3, known as Earth, the population was being pushed to develop their own warp drive theory, under the name of unified field theory. This technology was exported to Maluka. The Malukans fought over the control of the Federation with Jilta. We, the Boguard, kept trying to tip the balance in our favor, with Jilta. However, as soon as we succeeded, that balance reverted to the Malukans. We now know the Talkron were in the physical universe time-fields, altering time around us.” Jaron could see the five hundred present were riveted to the information. “We now have new technology to correct this. In essence, planet Earth was a staging point, for an invasion fleet into our

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 701 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Galaxy. Its moon was once the tenth planet in Sequetus. Being mainly composed from titanium, and chrome; these became vital metals for the construction of interstellar travel vessels, and housing warp drive compartments. “The reason the Talkron failed recently, is because of their distance from home, and the costs of holding their territory. They must get some kind of agreement, from others to hold it for them, otherwise they fail. The distance they operate over is too great, to be highly effective, when they have us as opposition. They are now holding two major spiral galaxies, using force, and mental implanting; their own galaxy and Andromeda. To do that, they must use people who are already implanted, to hold newly implanted people. To control them in turn, more implanted victims are needed, and they too need mental implanting. The further down the line the control goes, the weaker the agreements are, to hold the line. Fear and threats only go so far, and only serve to weaken the spirit. Alternatively, the offer of genuine freedom can bring about a resurgence of the life-force, and well-being of the person.” Jaron looked around to see that the crowd in the canyon was still following him. “A person fighting for freedom, will be able to draw on much more ability and strength, than an opponent, who is being compelled to fight through fear, and mental implanting.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 702 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“We have a technology, which they don’t have. We have the Man-o-Wars, and conversion. We have many willing, from this galaxy, who want to go there, to settle old scores. However, in saying this, we don’t know really know what to expect. We don’t know the extent of their evil, their preparation, or their level of planning against a counter invasion.” Jaron looked around the great cavern. “You know that we are the Boguard. The Aaron is also a race, which comes from the Triangulum Galaxy. We are thus the forefathers of the Talkron, or in my planet’s case, their progeny.” He watched and waited. There was silence and a slight mental murmuring, throughout the crowd.

Ω

Jaron continued, after the crowd was ready. “I know that you believe that you have a past there, and the Pleiadians do, too. If you draw an imaginary line, out from where we are, in this Galaxy, from our center, to the Triangulum Galaxy, the line passes right through the Sequetus System. What we need to work out now, is from which planet of that huge galaxy, did the Aaron and the Pleiadians originate from?” “On Earth, there are many historical records, more than here. Here you have the Early Works. Your best minds have been researching these works, and there is little information, other than pointing to

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 703 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

somewhere, not in this Galaxy, as our origins. The Pleiadians have less information, than do the Aaron. The reason is that when your races fled, you were careful to make sure none of you, in the future would find your way back. That lessened the risk of you ever being found. You were scared that if someone went back, and then returned here, they would be followed. Thus all evidence of where you came from has been obscured or removed.” Jaron looked out, to see if any had questions. He paused, and then continued. “The solution was to cover your escape, and hope that whoever was after you, wouldn’t want to, or have a need to, follow you. After all, the other galaxies are big enough, and perhaps your pursuer didn’t need this one. Basically, you had no way to defeat them, so having their identity, and where you came from exactly, only increased the risk, not lowered it.” Jaron looked around. All faces were on him. He took a glass of water, sipped, and continued. “That changed when several events happened. When I was enlightened to my abilities, over a thousand years ago, and lectured, it let a certain amount of free ideas; permeate back into the Federation, via the Temple religion. You decided to enhance that operation, and that free will expanded.” He sipped some more water. “Your enemy was here in this galaxy. Before I came along, he had chased you well away from Sequetus, your first home, and the first home to the Pleiadians.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 704 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

There was a murmur, through the group. “You have been hiding, ever since. However, now you have more abilities than before, and newer weapons. That major weapon, has been the ability to change events in time, by transferring ideas and concepts to your own self, in an earlier time frame in the universe. That however; is fluky at best. The Talkron are already there, in the time fields, and they are making their future, in the same way. We’ll continue that battle, somehow. However, I believe it is a battle, we may not win. “You have a new ally, and that is the life-force in the Man-o-Wars. They have allied; to our cause. They appear to be pure life, perhaps as we were, eons ago, before we transgressed, with the killing, and all the hiding. They are like super-life, amongst us. They seem to be able to tap into that eternal life source, on the other side of broadmatter, beyond the physical universe itself. With that, they have brought the technology of releasing the trapped life, which is resident, in warp drive travel. They are able to undo the harm that the Talkron, and then us, have been perpetuating, in the name of faster than light speed travel.” He sipped his water and continued. “When life is liberated from the drives, it is given a choice to return to the other side of broadmatter, from which it came. That may also be where we all come from, or even where we still truly are. Alternatively, the liberated warp drive life can stay with us, in the same

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 705 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

ship it was liberated from, having one of us, or a Corduke, as its bonded captain, to then liberate other trapped life.” “There is an armada of these vehicles now ready off from most systems. Every one of the Federation sectors is behind this.

Armada over Jilta

“Here: you see an armada over Jilta. The planet has about three hundred ships on call. Its whole sector has ten times that much, and the Federation in general, has ten times that much again. That is thirty thousand ships to go forward, into the uncharted domains of your past. Of those thirty thousand, it was decided, that a quarter would remain behind, in the Santonia Galaxy as a defense force. The total personnel involved in this operation are twenty-five million crew and marines. They all are now being readied. This force is perhaps twenty

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 706 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

to a hundred times the force the Talkron sent to Sequetus and our galaxy.” Jaron looked around. “The Talkron will not anticipate this size, and they never thought it was needed to conquer us. There will be no other reinforcements. This will be a onetime hit on the enemy, and win the day. If we lose, we lose it all. This scenario was carefully thought over, and it was decided that we needed to act fast now, with volume, or we will lose.” Jaron looked around the faces. There were those nodding, and those; who seemed to still have questions. He felt the minds of those, who had questions. He continued. “I have been on Earth, exploring the death-zones, or the Earth Syndrome, as some of you call it. Earth was the first place this phenomenon, was discovered nearing its completion. Now, there are fourteen other planets with this same syndrome. With no new cases found, in the past four weeks, we hope this phenomenon is steadying. It is totally life threatening. It is absolutely deadly, but can’t be used as an excuse to prevent the invasion of our fleets.” Jaron looked around and could see more questions forming in more minds. He continued again. “There are basically two battle fronts. The first is the obvious front; to where our fleets are headed. My son, Yandra will be in this fleet. He will be my thought-line into this armada. I will not be

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 707 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

going to this theatre of war. I am staying in our own galaxy, to defeat the Earth Syndrome, or there may be no worlds left for our fleets to return to. With me, will be my daughter Akeala, and the Man-o-War known as Amanda.”

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 708 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Chapter 2

BRIEFING

Jaron next turned to Macrod Curr, standing behind him. Macrod stepped forward. He had never been in the Executive Council cavern of Ataran, let alone addressed it. Macrod breathed deeply, and started his part of the presentation. He looked around at very wise faces. “You know that the Master Templar has been aging fast. He is a short-lifer, and is almost at the end of his illustrious life. He is perhaps one of the greatest short-lived Earth descendants we will ever know. He is a friend and confidant to me, and has survived many assassination attempts, purges, and has seen his lineage killed. “The Temple, or House of Torren, as it is formerly known, divides into its Federation sectors, and has a hierarchy in those sectors. It also crosses into networks, such as the Corduke network. The Cordukes are their toughest network, which do all the dirty and hard tasks for the Temple. It is their military elite arm. “They also have a Kangas Squad, which is purely attached to the Jiltanian Cordukes. It is similar, in purpose, to our Boguard Fronts. An additional network is the recent Hallowmen network, which is also run from the Jilta, but not limited to that sector.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 709 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

They were extremely successful recently, in preparing for the invasion of Maluka. All these networks have their own separate intelligence arms.” Macrod flicked on an image, for all to view. “The Master Templar has been searching for an heir. There has only been one person, who really stands out, above all else, and that is his grandson, Lorde Tubin.” “As a successor to Lorde Jaron, as Cordello of Palbo, he has been extremely successful, in both his deeds and dreams. He has courage, and his work, in expanding the House of Torren has no peer.” “The Master Templar has finally nominated him, as his successor. That almost certainly means he will be voted in, as the Master Templar elect, next month at the biannual Cordellos’ Conference.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 710 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Lorde Tubin, Corduke, and Cordello

of the Palboan House of Torren.

“He is a Corduke, has completed their basic training, is a master at intelligence, a basic natural at public relations, and isn’t Boguard. He has the hearts of the Palboans, and is popular in Jilta. Even if the Master Templar were not his grandfather, there is a good chance that he would win the ballot without his grandfather’s help. He has been nominated to remain behind, with the defense fleet. He protested

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 711 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

strongly, but the insistence of his grandfather, the Master Templar, was so strong, that he was refused permission, to leave.” Macrod Curr looked at Jaron. “It seems his recent Earth lineage also is a reason why he is so popular. Being only one generation removed, since leaving Earth, means a lot to the Templars, and Torrenists. “The Cordellos meet in 17 Jiltanian days. The Master Templar feels that he isn’t likely to live out another year to the next Cordellos’ conference, so he wishes to hand over all the power he can, while still alive, as that makes the transition smooth. His intention, after his power is transferred to Tubin, is to tend his roses, which are an aromatic flower from Earth, which he is so passionate about. He is a great man, and deserves to be allowed, to retire in dignity. I and our team of Boguard at the Jiltanian Palace, are doing all we can to assist him to make his last dream come true.” Macrod Curr had not finished. “We are also encouraging Tubin’s nomination and selection, as obviously he works well with Boguard, and has an insatiable dislike of the Talkron, who once mentally manipulated him. Macrod turned to Jaron and bowed low. “Sir, it is your lectern, now. Thank you for the honor.”

Ω

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 712 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron nodded and smiled. “Thank you Macrod Curr. Your work on Jilta is without rival. When the planet seemed lost, it was a Macrod with two others, who saved it from the Palboan dictator, Brandon Mirak.” Lorde Jaron then bowed very low, in deep reverence to Macrod’s dedication. The Executive Council stood and applauded Macrod Curr, as he left the podium, him bowing slightly several times on the way out. Jaron smiled and looked at the members. “I have no doubt that you have a myriad of questions, but please allow me to continue my address, until I have exhausted myself. There is more I must tell you.” Jaron looked around and saw the Council agree, so he continued. “Before I get onto the Earth Syndrome itself, there is more that I must tell you, about Earth. “Firstly, is about their short-lived genes. Their short-lived genetics isn’t native to them. The first human race on Earth was the Neanderthal. They existed a lot longer than the current Cro-Magnon version, as Modern Man. The Neanderthal had a larger brain, and a bigger pituitary gland than in modern man. Of the primates on Earth, at that time, he was more advanced. He had thought abilities; he had social networks, speech, writing, art, and cultivated crops. He lived alongside of Cro-Magnon man, which had a smaller brain, and which had less

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 713 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

thought ability. For Cro-Magnon, life was only what he saw, heard, or felt. “For many on Earth, until Goren Torren came along, it was still that way. However, with Torren’s enlightenment, many people saw they were not this altered physical-form, but a spiritual life-force, in their own right, with their own life-force abilities. “Both these primate versions existed on Earth, for many tens of thousands of years, together. The Neanderthal was the most suitably adapted to the environment, and the more social of the two races. Cro-Magnon was the weaker of the two species, but Neanderthal had no need to remove Cro-Magnon, from its environment. There is also strong evidence the Neanderthals protected the lesser Cro-Magnon species.” Jaron showed a picture of both species. “The Neanderthal was however, hunted out to extinction. There was a reason for that. The Talkron needed Earth, so they could manufacture short-lived bodies, to man-up their ships. The Talkron didn’t really want an intelligent human with natural spiritual abilities.” There was a murmur, though this data was known about generally already. Jaron looked out. “The only problem with Cro- Magnon, though less suitable for Earth, and less intelligent, was that it also lived a long-life of hundreds of years, and the Talkron wanted a short- lived body, with faster short-life breeding habits. Therefore, they altered the pituitary gland, and in

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 714 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

place of the normal Cro-Magnon gland for this species, they replaced it with a spliced version, of an Earth hog’s pituitary gland. Instead of living three hundred years, the species now evolved to live for seventy-five years.” Jaron continued. “This gland is the shape of a pea, between the optic nerves, seated at the base of their brain. It has a frontal lobe that regulates their body’s growth hormone, and the hormones that regulate the speed of reproduction, fertilization, and sexual desires. With the desire to mate often, like hogs, humankind was sexually oriented, so that much of its activities were centered around this one desire. “So; when Goren Torren came to Earth, he found mankind engrossed in materialism, selling and using sexual desire. Reproduction was laced all through their culture, from sales to war, and it predicated many criminal acts. “The gland also secretes the growth hormone, which regulates growth, for hogs. Now humans were no longer living their natural three hundred years, but rather more the life expectancy of a hog. This created social problems, as the population had a feeling they should be able to live longer, but could not. How this works is that basically, the pituitary gland no longer gives out the human growth hormone, which is an inhibitor to the aging program of the DNA. Normally the hormone keeps the body young, by stopping it aging. However, the current

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 715 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

human body simply grows old and dies, which is what it is programmed to do, in the absence of its normal hormone. To some degree, some of this data was already discovered by the human race by the time Goren Torren arrived. However, it was suppressed, by Talkron agents.” Jaron looked around. “For us on Earth, the real problem was always the rapid rise in population. Along with that galloping population rise, was the seeding of technological advancement from the Talkron. The Talkron, seeded humankind technology, so as to speed up its development. This would have enabled humankind, to quickly engage in mining and ship manufacturing, on its moon. This would have been obscured, from the rest of the Federation, if it were not for the Templars, and the fall of the Palboan regimes. “Goren Torren noted at the time, that the Earth race didn’t follow the Matheson Hypothesis, and in this, Torren’s intelligence estimate back then, was correct. That was the odd point. Races that lived short lives barely prospered, as their creative geniuses died at relatively young ages, before they had time to fully develop their work. Alien technology, was seeded to Earth, through various Talkron means, such as crashed alien craft, direct gifts and treaties. By keeping these things secret, and by instilling fear into the planet’s leaders, those leaders were told, that they could have the technology, but only so much.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 716 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Mankind stayed on that planet, and after a brief sortie to their moon, they never returned to it. Even after intervention, Hymondy was unable to get the programs he wanted, set in place to mine and export from the moon.” Jaron took another drink and paused. He began again after a ten-second break. “Lorde Hymondy tried to get this corrected. He didn’t have resources from outside, as his previous power base, Jilta, was being denied. The Talkron were soon all over him, and his planet. He was a rogue to them, and they needed him out of there. His notes of what he was trying to do, were later lost, or destroyed. However, we did find evidence that he attempted to alter their status quo of short lives. “However, in saying this, it was obvious that the Talkron agents amongst them, started scare mongering, and thus his projects to make long-lifers of them, were thwarted at every opportunity. Even his scientists, were subjected to shootings, and bomb plots, under the cover of religious extremism. “What he tried, we have now replicated.” Jaron stopped and looked around. “We have now developed a long-life pituitary gland that originates from Earth, early man. It doesn’t belong to a hog or another animal. It was cloned from those with the so-called affliction termed Syndrome X. These people are extremely rare, who have glands, through misfortune, but fortunate for us, to be mostly a genetic Neanderthal gland. The Modern Man of Earth

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 717 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

has a three percent Neanderthal DNA content. So every now and again, there are people who have a developmental lifespan of four times normal Modern Man. We have used this to synthetically, create a DNA strand, which has this new gland as part of its building program. In effect, after a small medical operation, an Earth short-lifer can become a natural long-lifer, with no adverse effects.” Jaron could feel questions, so he explained more. “The Neanderthal lived over three hundred and eighty years. This information comes from the Pleiadians. So by using their real gland, Cro-Magnon can now live that long as well.” Jaron showed some images of what he was speaking. “The reason I am explaining this is because, as part of the war on our galaxy, the Talkron have unwittingly unleashed the short-lived humanoid amongst us. It will eventually out- consume its environment. The prediction is that both short and long-lifers are threatened; as a result. While this wasn’t the Talkron’s intent, it is what we have. It happened on Earth, so will happen on every planet. So we needed to solve this, and here is the solution.” “Due to the region of this gland, the operation isn’t pleasant, but the actual entry to the tissue where the gland is, isn’t at all painful. The operation takes only fifteen minutes. The new tissue is installed, in amongst the existing tissue. The cells in the body now have a choice from which to take their

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 718 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

commands. The existing gland was chosen from hogs, whereas the newer tissue is cloned from original humans, which go back to Neanderthals. The short-lived body simply rejects the older existing hog tissue, for the more compatible newer Neanderthal tissue. The human body slowly over a year imports the long-life genome into all its cells, while rejecting the short-life program, as foreign. The operation and aftercare is complete, during an afternoon. The patient is asked to stay for a couple of hours for observation, and after that, he or she leaves to return home. The white cells in the body do the rest.” Jaron was watching. There were going to be questions, so he put up his hand, and smiled. “I’ll explain more. The Temple or House of Torren has endorsed it, as Goren Torren was a long-lifer. The governments we have spoken with love it. “I sent Captain Beel to Sandrist, with a small medical team. It seems there, the surgery is very popular. People are briefed, about the source of the existing gland, told exactly what the new gland matter does, and their questions are answered in full. Generally, one hundred percent of the people wish to have the procedure. They quickly arrange the time and funds, to get this done. More doctors are learning about it. There are a few people cautious about having the operation, but that is expected. We are not forcing anyone to do this. However, as people get older, they will see their relatives and friends

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 719 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

only half their age, and they will soon be recommending to their children to do this. For many having this operation, who are middle aged, they start to regress in age, and are delighted. People generally feel stronger, happier and younger. For the planets out there, with short-lifers, it means people will have four children over two hundred years, instead of twenty years. This takes the burden off planetary environmental resources.” Jaron looked around. “That is the crux. People are having the same number of children but over hundreds of years, instead of decades. Population growth will fall to the stable levels of long-lifers.” Jaron breathed deep. “If Hymondy had been able to utilize this, he would have saved the horrendous population from overtaxing planetary resources to extinction. Within a generation, pretty much everyone would have had the operation. The number of births will be reduced dramatically. The economies of the short-lifers will have to adapt to a shrinking population, but they will adapt. “The interesting thing is that many people on Earth saw this smoking gun; before we did. It wasn’t just the population expansion, as there were other indicators, as well. For example, most mammals reach their adult full size in a set number of years, and the mammals then live eight to ten times that length of time. Mankind, as Cro-Magnon, would reach its full physical stature, at around twenty-eight years, but its life expectancy would only be three

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 720 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

times, or less, than that length of time. That did not make sense.” Jaron next looked out. He asked for questions. “Yes, sir,” he answered. “The new pituitary gland material seems to give the person a rejuvenation effect, like ten percent of his years, and from then on, they age at a four to one ratio.” Jaron nodded, and then answered. “The children of this new gland group will be long-lifers. Their bodies will have the new long-life material, from conception. All decedents of people having had the operation, will be long-lived.” Jaron nodded to the next question. “The surgical procedure is easily taught, and the medical industry will power along supplying it, with simple economics. Those wishing to perform the operation, will be licensed. Those wishing to receive it, will pay for the privilege.” Jaron looked at the next person and responded. “Correct sir. No one will be forced to undergo the operation. Yes, the population of a group originating from short-lifers will be expected to halve in fifty years, instead of double. The short-lived body will adjust itself, and the reproduction patterns of Earth- based humans will slow down dramatically to approximate long-lifers, instead of hogs. If this solution had taken root on Earth, when Hymondy was there, the population would have reduced by eighty percent in two hundred years. Of course it is difficult to say, exactly.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 721 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The next question was more difficult to answer. “It doesn’t appear that the death-zones are related to short-life activity. They exist on planets regardless of short-lifers or not. We have found one zone now on Maluka, and there were zero short-lifers there, until the Corduke network arrived, prior to our invasion fleet, three months ago.” Jaron smiled at the next question. “Yes, we have been very scientific in our approach in the zones. We have taken spores, and inserted them in radiation proof vacuum-sealed containers, and all life dies immediately it enters the zone. We have taken soil and put that in the zone, and all microscopic life, dies immediately. However, there is evidence that this can be reversed, and we have fully revived some animals that were once dead, after being withdrawn from the death-zone.” Jaron continued. “As to what is causing this dying zone, I have suspicions, and yet untested theories. This audience isn’t the right place, for unworthy speculation. If you wish to read about my theories, I do have them on record. However, until tested, they remain speculative.” Jaron looked around, and no one seemed to indicate there was more they wanted to say. “If there are no further questions, I’ll conclude this event,” he said. Jaron bowed, and the Executive Council stood applauding him, whilst he bowed again, before smartly turning and leaving.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 722 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 723 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 3

THE NEW SHIP

Jaron was seated for the next briefing. He had previously been on Yaltipia for three days. The fleets there were ready. The commanders of the various Boguard units were getting further instructions. The briefing instructor was leaning over the podium, with holographic representations to his right. “This will be a three pronged venture. The first venture will be into the Small Magellanic Cloud38. This is a small galaxy, attached the Santonia Galaxy, or the Milky Way. It is almost on a direct line to your final destination. Another team will broach into the Andromeda Galaxy39.

38 INFORMATION: The Small Magellanic Cloud: This is a dwarf galaxy, meaning it is small, and not spiralling, like the Milky Way. It was used by small vessels in the South Pacific to navigate by, and is quite visible to the naked eye, at night. It is irregular in shape, perhaps being interfered with by either the Milky Way or its partner, The Large Magellanic Cloud. The Small Megallanic Cloud Galaxy is 200,000 light years away, and has a diameter of 7,000 light years. It has several hundred million stars, and has about 7 billion times more mass, than the Sun. It can only be viewed from the Southern Hemisphere due to its inclination. It is one of the Milky Way’s nearest neighbours.

39 INFORMATION: Andromeda Galaxy: This has about a trillion stars and is 2.5 million light years; from the Milky Way. It is the largest spiral galaxy in the Local Group of thirty galaxies. The Milky Way has 200 – 400 billion stars by comparison. It is visible to the naked eye on cloudless nights from Earth. It appears more than six times as wide as the full E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 724 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“The IC 161340 Galaxy is next after the Cloud. There will then be a regroup outside of the Triangulum Galaxy41, and what you’ll learn before that, will help you decide how to move into there.” He looked around. The room held three hundred. It was a small cavern, with medium imbued lighting, illuminating the walls, from the floor. The crews, captains, commanders, and admirals, had already been taught the basics of the differing galaxies, and what they meant. They were now at their first tactical briefing. The briefing instructor nodded to Jaron. “Lorde Jaron will now instruct you, on what was recently found on Earth.”

moon, when photographed through a large telescope, though only the brighter region is available to the naked eye.

40 INFORMATION: IC 1613 Galaxy: This is a dwarf Galaxy. It is approximately 2.3 million light years distant. It is rarely seen by amateur astronomers, due to its low surface brightness. It is a bar-shaped structure, meaning that it has an axis, and its stellar population is quite old, perhaps 7 billion years. It has a strong red giant branch, and red clump populations.

41 INFORMATION: Triangulum Galaxy: This galaxy is a spiral galaxy, around 3 million light years away. It is one of the most distant permanent objects that is available to be seen with the naked eye. It has about 40 billion stars, and a diameter of 50,000 light years. It may be gravitationally bound to the Andromeda Galaxy. The nucleus doesn’t appear to contain a supermassive black hole.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 725 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron stood, and there was a mild polite soft applause. “Our destination in some areas has been a little occluded.” He looked around. “The Early Works hint at these stop-off points on the way to the Milky Way, and to Sequetus; specifically. The Early Works doesn’t however, state where in the Triangulum Galaxy the Aaron race originates from. Therefore, we must be willing to learn, to some degree, as our fleet progresses. “Our means of travel isn’t like the warp drives that you are used to. Certainly, you will be moving out from the physical universe, into the warp drive time-fields. That is where the similarity ends. The speed at which you will be traveling is about thirty times what you experience in warp drives. The enemy, so long as we are correct, has only half way reached Triangulum, by now. We are expecting him to have almost returned to that home galaxy, by the time we get there. “Our three armadas, which have direct orders to stop in these other galaxies, will be collecting data on their way. They will launch their own counter invasions into those galaxies, if the Talkron have taken them previously. However, if there are no Talkron there, then these galaxies will be left, free. We will not intervene. Although, if there are ships there under warp drive control, we will liberate those, and that applies to any station-ships as well. These are the destination coordinates, where we expect to

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 726 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

find, the Talkron.” Jaron pointed to the hologram, by his side. “As to Triangulum, that will take the bulk of the fleet. If we find what we expect, Triangulum has invaded Andromeda, taken it over, and then moved onto the Milky Way. Thus, our invasion of Andromeda is equally important. Our commanders and admirals, who go there, stay there. They will wage an offensive takeover of all warp drive facilities, converting and enlarging our force as they go. If on the other hand, there are no warp drive facilities in Andromeda, then our fleet there is to rejoin the main group; in Triangulum. The same strategy applies; to the fleets in the two smaller galaxies. “The Small Magellanic Cloud will be the first galaxy you arrive at, and you’ll all meet again after that, to reevaluate.” Jaron looked around. “Are there any questions?” Having answered those, Jaron sat down, to the left of the podium. There was going to be a break; with a new instructor after that.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 727 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 4

COMMANDER BEEL

Beel explained that it was indeed a great honor, to be invited to visit Yaltipia. It was a greater honor to address the Executive Council, and next the leaders of the group going forward, to the Triangulum Galaxy. He bowed very low, and received polite clapping of hands. He was introduced, as the singular most important person in saving Lorde Jaron from the Talkron, after Lorde Jaron had been whisked away by Cordukes to avoid a Talkron assassination, on Pablo. Beel sighed at how long ago, that was. He began to speak. “One of my tasks has been to evaluate from where the Talkron have been coming. That deductive process has been relatively simple. We simply followed back the paths of those: fleeing the Talkron.” “Sequetus, and particularly its third and fourth planets, is on a fairly direct line, out to the Andromeda and Triangulum Galaxies. That means that those fleeing from those galaxies, likely reached Sequetus before any other sector. Therefore; to work out where the Talkron start from, we reverse that data; we find out from where the races were fleeing.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 728 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“We have found two distinct external races, from outside of this galaxy. The first was on Mars, a giant race. They most definitely have the coordinates of the Small Magellanic Cloud etched on their ships. They also had warp drive technology, tens of thousands of years, before the Federation even existed. They seemed to become extinct on Mars, about the same time the Neanderthal race, was removed from Earth, as the senior human race. This date is important, and is thirty-three thousand years ago. On the giant’s ships, is the exact location of the planet they came from. For some of you, you’ll be going, directly there. These giants may no longer live there. They also may have been evacuating the planet for other reasons. We don’t really know. What we do know is that they all died on Mars from cancer, and we suspect it was radioactively triggered.” Beel turned to acknowledge the next image made available. “This is a cuneiform tablet. It is baked clay, thousands of years old. This writing is fired, baked into the tablet, and doesn’t wear away. About half a million, to a million tablets, have been discovered, over time. Only one hundred thousand of them have been published. The name cuneiform simply means wedge-shaped, as the symbols are wedge shaped. They originated in Sumer, about six thousand standard years ago. The number of characters was a thousand when this writing began, and only four hundred characters remained in use,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 729 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

after two thousand years of the language evolving. Cuneiform writing covers a total of three thousand years. It is a translated language, and many other languages have come from it.” Beel looked around to be sure he was understood. He had spent days rehearsing his Standard Galactic, without an accent. “The Pleiadians developed the language, when they arrived in that area of Earth. However, they were persecuted by those they fled, the Talkron. They briefly warred with the Talkron off and on, over what is now Egypt. Though they fled the region thousands of years before, they kept returning to the area, to try to reestablish it. They developed the writing in one of these times, of Talkron absence.” Beel ensured he was understood, again. He began to think he had developed a new inclination, public speaking. He smiled. “Many of these tablets were stored in the original nation of the area, Iraq. However, during an invasion of the country, over a thousand years ago, many of the tablets vanished. “The Pleiadians returned to the region many times, after their initial flight. They found the local Cro-Magnon man, not very effective or efficient. They had already found an extraterrestrial intelligent race living there, and it wasn’t the Talkron. It left fairly soon after the Pleiadians arrived. Not much is known by us, of that race. They called it the Anunnaki. The Pleiadians became locally known as,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 730 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

its replacement. What this other race was, or where it came from, we still don’t know. “The Pleiadians didn’t create the humanoid short-lived species of Cro-Magnon man, but they did try to raise him up intellectually, even with his short lifespan. The Pleiadians found that as new humankind, they were willing, and otherwise intelligent. However, they were not as good as the Neanderthals they had lost. “While the Pleiadians stayed, the region prospered, and the Sumerian wealth, spread to other kingdoms and regions. However, the Sumerians and Pleiadians were attacked, and that short war was recorded in Egyptian history, as well as other records, of the time. Egypt is a very old civilization and nation on Earth.” Beel accepted another flask of water and cleared his throat. “The Pleiadians back then wrote in many places where they came from, and why, especially in the fired clay cuneiform tablets. Possibly this is why the tablets later became scarce. “The Pleiadians ruled Sumer with a twelve man council. The Pleiadians also lived about seven hundred years each. Most definitely, they were the gods of that era.” Beel drank from the flask. He continued. “However, they knew, per the tablets, they would be persecuted again. They wrote down where they were originally from, and more or less how to find their home. It was where they were going, that was their secret then. They wrote all

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 731 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

about their origin, which system, and how to get there, via warp drive travel. You will see here, pictures of the various Pleiadian kings, which ruled the region. They are easily depicted, as they wore communication devices on their wrists, and they have wings, meaning that they fly.”42 “The Pleiadians also left us maps – more or less, on what the divisions of civilization are, in the Triangulum Galaxy. They are not dissimilar to the Federation Sectors, in size; and if one thinks: how the Federation was carved up, and who did the initial carving - the Talkron, it isn’t surprising.” One of the admirals wanted to know: why a race from a far off galaxy would be interested in this new galaxy. Beel smiled. “The Santonia Galaxy, or the Milky Way as called by those from Earth, is the holy of holies for this area. The Santonia Galaxy is seen as a magic mass of stars, from other galaxies. It spreads out across their skies, like a bright film of light, begging to be sought after, and conquered. This is how the Pleiadians described it, in the Cuneiform tablets, which we recovered.” Beel continued. “The early religions of Triangulum, stated that the gods resided in our Santonia Galaxy.

42 EXPLANATION: Communication Devices: The devices on the wrists of this race are in sculptures and carvings, shown through many years, on many statues’ wrists. It is only the people with wings that wear the devices. See the photographs in Notes Sumer.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 732 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“The good part of this for us is, that we have maps and ways to get back into the Triangulum galaxy, so you are not going in blind. We have their leading planets, and the systems that ruled at that time, and from where those persecuting the Pleiadians came. Our job, or your job, is to follow that line back to there.” Beel displayed the maps, and there was a murmur. “Yes, this is the way back, to where you originally came from. This isn’t just a map of who is attacking you, and where to neutralize them. This is the map to your original roots. It is a map to how you can reverse something from the past, which isn’t just engrained in your racial psych, but a purpose lying dormant in each one of you.” The crowd was getting excited. Jaron could sense it, and he looked over at the Executive Council members. This wasn’t merely a defense, but a previously failed ambition, getting new life. The Boguard had a purpose for this, more than any known purpose they had.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 733 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 5

BLACK KNIGHT AGAIN

Akeala had been called to the surface of Yaltipia. She was a veteran Boguard, now that she had completed three successful missions. She looked up and watched the fleets, swarming in the heavens. There were literally thousands of ships. She looked directly above her, and above ten Ks out, there was her new ship, her Black Knight. It just stayed there, waiting. Her father sat beside her on the planet’s surface. It was a beautiful late dry afternoon. Jaron pointed to a desolate single tall outcrop, not far off, with a lonely tree, on top, trying to survive. “Sometimes I feel like that tree out there,” said Jaron. Akeala held her father by the arm. “I understand that Papa. Mama and Amy were other trees, and they kept you company. You knew Mama over many lifetimes, didn’t you?” Jaron smiled at his daughter. They were sitting on the ground with their backs hard up against a large stone. “Yes, I knew her three times, that I recall. Possibly, it was more. With Amy, I just seemed to work with her like an equal, of similar purpose.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 734 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Akeala leaned over and put her head on his arm. “Do you have any idea where they are now?” Jaron nodded. “I might, but I am not letting on. I think any speculation from me, can convolute the wrong way. I will just let what unravels, happen. They will come back. You’ll see.”

Yaltipian Landscape

Akeala held her father’s arm tighter. “I guess there is only Tubin, Yandra and I left, to keep that old tree up there, from dying of loneliness.” Jaron looked at his daughter. “I am so proud to have you three. Whoever you three are, you have courage, fortitude, and all the genius I could ever expect.” Akeala gave him a big hug. She pointed to Orbat beyond the tree. “Do you sometimes wish you lived there?” E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 735 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron leaned over and kissed her softly on the forehead. “I am happy to be here with you. If I am with you, I am happy.” Akeala looked up at him. “Do you think we are missing out on the greatest adventure ever, Papa? I mean, Yandra is going to lead a fleet into Triangulum, or somewhere, and Tubin, Lorde Tubin, my big brother, is going to be Master Templar. You and I are staying here.” She grabbed him by the hand. “Don’t you think that could be just a little boring, compared to the big adventure out there?” She nodded beyond, into the direction of the encroaching darkness. Jaron put his arm around her. “I think not. Our work is far more dangerous, and requires more skill, than the others have.” Akeala brightened up, and looked up at him. “Really?” He nodded. “Certainly.” She kept looking at him. “Are you going to have that operation? The one to become a long-lifer.” He looked back at her, and said nothing. Then, she said, “Your hair is slowly graying.” Jaron laughed. He felt his daughter was very funny. “I thought you were saying that you didn’t want to see me go.” “Well, I meant that too,” she said, and snuggled closer to his arm. “I am going to have the op, because I want to stay this age now, and be fast and quick forever.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 736 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron nodded. “Well, I expect I better, otherwise I might end up never seeing any grandchildren. Akeala watched as the sun slowly set, behind the craggy rocks. Jaron asked, “Your new ship, have you worked it out yet?” He looked overhead, and noticed that it was more evident as the sky got darker. “It follows you around like a lost feelup.” “And two lost parrots Papa. Don’t forget Mister and Misses Parrot. They want to go where I go too. That reminds me. We should bring them down to the surface.” Jaron looked up and squinted. “I am not sure you understand that ship of yours yet; Akeala.” He smiled.

Black Knight watching over Yaltipia

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 737 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

She turned to look at her father, and he shared with her a remote viewpoint, watching her ship. She snuggled up to his arm again. “Well, I am happy that someone pays attention, to what I want.” Jaron smiled as Black Knight’s courier craft soon settled about fifty pacs from them. Akeala called out aloud to her two parrots, to tell them to fly and enjoy the space. She watched as they darted out from the small ship. “Like two green rockets, they are racing each other to see which will get to the top of the craggy outcrop first,” she said. Akeala laughed as they arrived there at the same time, and sat looking down, back on her and Jaron. They chirped to themselves. Jaron sat forward. “What you and I have to do, is perhaps as important as the entire venture to Triangulum. That phenomenon of the death-zones is scary. It has to be the Talkron, but I have not worked out what it could be.” Akeala sat forward. “Papa, I thought we were going to relax for a day.” Jaron shook his head. “Your parrot friends just reminded me. That is all. We can have moments together, and perhaps it is moments like these, when we can solve this.” Akeala looked at him. “You want to get Amanda involved, right?” Jaron nodded. “Yes, and I would like to get your ship involved. It has intellectual properties.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 738 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Akeala nodded. “I know that. It isn’t just a biochem computer.” Jaron looked out and thought to Amanda. Yes, Captain. Amanda’s thought was broadcast, to both Jaron and Akeala. Akeala thought to her ship: Mister Ship, are you there? Yes, Captain, came its reply. Jaron smiled at the reverence given Akeala, by her ship, in proudly referring to her as its captain. Jaron could remotely see Amanda. She was busily reviewing Akeala’s ship, monitoring it, as she didn’t totally accept it yet. Jaron, on the other hand, had nothing but satisfactory feelings. He was happy with the ship. Amanda still needed proof. For Jaron, it was only time that was needed. Over the next several hours, the four of them looked around the phenomenon, known as the death zones. The result was that they all decided to return to Earth. Earth was where it started, and it was where they would likely more easier stumble across clues.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 739 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 6

J I L T A

Lorde Tubin is here, to see His Excellency, Master Templar,” announced Macrod Curr. “Thank you, Macrod. Please show him into our courtyard. I always like it, to be able to talk to others there. I get such a strong peaceful feeling there, that good ideas swim to the surface of my mind.” Macrod Cur bowed and laughed. “It has worked for you sir, always. I think it is the best place, in the entire royal palace.” Macrod turned to meet Lorde Tubin, and escort him there. Lorde Tubin was waiting patiently in the hall. He had been pre-elected last night, by the Cordellos. Once the Master Templar had placed his nomination officially with Lorde Tubin, the others all followed. It was a unanimous election. After escorting Lorde Tubin to the courtyard, Macrod Curr bowed and said, “I’ll go and bring out the Master Templar, Lorde Tubin.” Tubin smiled. “Macrod, I know who the Boguard are, please, you don’t have to be so formal with me. I am the one, who should be bowing to you. You saved my father and me, so many times, that I can’t have anything but the highest esteem for you

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 740 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

personally. Your purpose of office outweighs my own.” Macrod Curr smiled. “You are very wise, Lorde Tubin. You’ll hold the position well. I’ll find the Master Templar.” He bowed. Lorde Tubin nodded approvingly, while looking out over the view.

The Royal Courtyard

The Master Templar was led outside, by Macrod Curr on one arm, while firmly holding a cane in the other hand. Lorde Tubin straightened. Macrod bowed to them both, and was about to leave, when the Master Templar requested that he stay. Macrod looked to Lorde Tubin, who nodded. “Of course I will,” said Macrod. He stepped back three paces and stood there, pretending not to listen. E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 741 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He saw at least another five watchful Boguard in the vicinity. The Master Templar led Tubin over to his roses. There, out of earshot from Macrod, he discussed how he would turn over all the power to Tubin, in the next week, and within the month it would be all his, the burden of the entire House of Torren, the Temple, would be Tubin’s. “After this casual meeting, you’ll formerly be the Master Templar, not I. I only hope that you don’t have to go through what I did. However, to a greater degree, I believe you already may have. You have lost your mother, my daughter, plus two brothers to the Talkron.” The Master Templar looked down at a nearby rose and gently lifted it. “Obey the old rules of the palace, not to cut the flowers. We are only a tenant here. The custodians over there, the Boguard, are the ones who really own it.” Tubin nodded.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 742 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 7

SEQUETUS 3 AGAIN

The fleet had left the Pleiades, the evening before. Yandra had spent the night with his father, alone. They talked, and just spent time to get to know each other. It was hard, being a real blood relative on Yaltipia, where bodies were not born, in a natural way. Those around them really didn’t understand, the natural bonds that still needed nurturing. Jaron hugged his son. This was rare, but as Jaron grew older, and with his wife and best friend dead, Jaron knew each mission might be his last to see Yandra. Akeala had made her own goodbyes to Yandra. They were very special to each other now.

Ω

Amanda was slowly warming to Akeala’s ship. You’ll need a better name for him than Mister Ship, my girl. Akeala smiled. She was aboard Amanda. Amanda had a new rule now, which was that birds didn’t come in, with Aki. Akeala smiled. “You sound like a mother Amanda. He isn’t my boyfriend. He is just a ship.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 743 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“I know that, but you still don’t know where he comes from. What is his background?” Akeala shook her head. “Who cares; it is a good ship. Papa made it, or that is what I am to believe. Only that he can’t really remember, or something.” Amanda was getting nowhere. Akeala stopped for a minute. What is the real problem Amanda? Tell me really. What is it? Amanda finally thought: I can’t feel what he is thinking or emoting. I can tell it is alive. It doesn’t seem to be from the Santonia Galaxy, Andromeda or Triangulum. I can’t feel him from the other side of Broadmatter, either, from the infinite source of life, where I come from. Where then? I don’t know, and can’t tell. That is what is keeping me off balance. Jaron entered the room. He looked at them both. “Is there something that I have missed?” He felt Akeala’s thoughts immediately. He laughed. “I go back a long way. I am who I am, and I can now recall being in this system, and others well before this.” Akeala looked at him. “You mean I am on a hereditary line from somewhere else?’ she asked. Jaron shook his head. “I am. You are my daughter this lifetime. You come from where you come from, but it may not be where I have been, or it might be. There is just no certainty, just because we share a blood lineage.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 744 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Akeala thought of this. “Then Papa, if you recall, where were you then, and where did this ship come from?” Jaron smiled. He didn’t like to see his daughter in a mystery she couldn’t get out from. He felt Amanda’s probing thoughts too. “I’ll simply say that it wasn’t this galaxy, or one that the Talkron had been to. That ship doesn’t use warp drives, and never has. It is a different galaxy. Therefore, the ship is also slightly different. Whereas, warp drives can be traced, through pain reflecting in broadmatter, this ship is run purely by its own volition. There are no leaks of pain to trace. And because of that, the Talkron couldn’t get rid of the ship, as it circled Earth, no matter how long they tried.” “Then what was it doing there, in the first place?” asked Akeala. Jaron smiled. “Life isn’t as simple, as it first seems. I came to Sequetus, as it was under attack. I also come from another concerned galaxy, in the Local Group. This ship delivered me here, and here is where I had to find out for myself, what was happening. While down there, on Sequetus 3, I just recall vaguely being attacked by a group of locals, thousands of years ago. It was before mankind was prevalent here. I died, and the only way I could get back to my ship, was to get a local human body, and that started a slippery slide downhill for me. Thousands of years later, I have finally made it back.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 745 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

My purpose has always been the same. I have been always trying to get back to Sequetus, for a reason I could never fully understand, until recently.” Akeala looked a little perplexed. Her father was a mystery. She wondered if she would ever understand him. “Papa, I never knew that. Why did you not tell me?” Jaron shook his head. “I didn’t know. I only worked it out while sitting up there in Black Knight, those months. I just had to let the old memories slowly come back to me, which they did. I am following the same purpose I was following thirty thousand years ago. The ship recognized me, and opened the door, and I was allowed inside.” Akeala considered this. Jaron added. “Amanda, the reason you feel uneasy, is because the ship is on a mission, and it is the same mission, which it was on, thirty thousand years ago. It doesn’t answer to you. It answers to a different source, a different group. That is all.” Jaron watched as Amanda emitted colors, pulsating on the floor. Akeala recognized this. It was Amanda, working out something. She was thinking. Finally, she spoke. “I have been communicating with your Mister Ship, Akeala, and your father is correct. The only difference is that now, I do know where it comes from, and Jaron is right, the Talkron would have no way of opening it. It has a link, to another team of ships and they are in a different space, but tightly

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 746 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

linked by a united bond, that the Talkron wouldn’t be able to break, I am sure.” Akeala looked around. “So; you both know where you….” She waited. “I’ll find out from the ship myself; later.” Jaron smiled. “That’s the correct way, daughter. Now we need to address the real matter, and work out what this death-zone might be.” Akeala knew when she had been cleverly dismissed, by her father. However, she would find his secrets soon enough. She wondered who he was, with all these abilities, so naturally. At least, she now knew why her ship was able to stay aloft, above Sequetus 3, for thousands of years.

Ω

After ten minutes, they were down on the surface floor, again. The death-zone had crept in from the river. The local villagers had saved much animal life, as it fell prey to the zone, by throwing ropes and using long poles with lassoes, to drag the dead life back. Sheril wiped her eyes. Beside, was her black puma, Aron, nuzzling her. Akeala looked down and it licked her hand, slightly startling her. Poltan Beel watched Akeala jump. He folded his arms.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 747 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The Dying Forest

Sheril pointed to the demarcation line. “It seems to be accelerating. We had nets in the streams to stop the fish, but it makes no difference now, as the nets are well inside the zone, as well. We’ll be moving the village again in a week. Other villagers have been moved, relocating all animals they find.” Jaron looked up. He nodded. His attention was on something else. It was starting to get dark, and a light could be seen, many Ks overhead. Sheril also looked up, explaining, “That is a defunct station-ship. It is completely inoperative.” E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 748 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron looked at Akeala, and said aloud, “Amanda, what do you get on it?” Akeala looked up, “Mister Ship, what are you getting on it?” It is dead, Captain. There is no life in it, and it isn’t active in any way, came Amanda’s thought to all. It is active, and killing, came the response from the Black Knight. Jaron felt Amanda bristle, in a strange unspoken and unexpressed way. This other ship had challenged her. Explain, she demanded. Jaron looked at the others. Beel was behind; also looking up and then across. You asked about the station-ship. It is still active. I believed you didn’t mean the image of the station-ship you see, floating above you. The thought from Akeala’s ship was very direct. Hmm…, Amanda moved closer to the station- ship; she circled it, went under it. She sent in her mental probes. It seems real to me, and doesn’t appear like an image. It reflects light, but has had no activity, after its operation was dismantled. That isn’t true, responded Akeala’s ship. It is operating. Amanda, you have the perceptive ability, to be able to shift time. Have another, deeper look. Just because it isn’t in the frame of now, that you are expecting, doesn’t mean that it is not there.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 749 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Amanda felt chided, but this was no time to be putting pride first. She looked again, Jaron felt a mental yelp from Amanda. Akeala looked; very worried. She felt it too. Amanda was her friend, and if her ship had hurt her, she didn’t know what she should do. I am fine, Aki, replied Amanda. Your ship was right, and the real station-ship attacked me, and tried to pull me in. It is clever, as it sits half a second into the future. It is drawing life from the future universe, and sucking it away. While that analogy might not be totally accurate, as life is really choosing to go with it. That leaves no life in the present, where there was life in the future, only half a second away. Jaron vanished. Akeala jumped. Sheril smiled. “Your father is still here, step daughter. Just wait. He is fine.” Akeala looked around. That didn’t stop her from worrying. Ship? she thought. Yes, Captain. He is still there and Sheril is right. Look down. Akeala did, and could see his footprints, as he was moving around them. He was somewhere, just ahead of them, in the future. Jaron returned. He nodded. Beel let out a sigh, and shook his head. He looked to the eyes of Akeala, as though his look explained what they were both feeling.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 750 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron stood there. “Your ship, and Amanda, are both right. In the future all life is there. It runs down to the river, across the other side, as far as I can see. There appears to be no dead-zone in the future. Akeala shook her head slowly, a little confused. “If life is there in the future, and it gets removed now, then where is it?” Amanda answered. It is where life believes it is. It has past and present in the physical universe, and it can be anywhere it decides it will be. I expect that for now, life is just not here in the now physical universe. It has also vanished from the past as you can see. I also suspect that the now universe, where life is being removed, will be expanded, and increased, and life be lost further into the future as well. That is correct Amanda, added the other ship. “Byron!” yelled Akeala. Everyone instantly looked at Akeala, as though she had just slipped. She smiled. “That is my ship’s name, Byron. Right, Byron?” Yes, Captain. You remembered. Thank you, and that gives me honor to be remembered that way. Akeala looked around. Remembered? Jaron smiled. “You’ll understand it, later, obviously. Now to this matter to hand.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 751 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Sheril said, “We need to understand the mechanism more. How does it work?” Amanda? I have my ideas, and what do you think. Byron? That is a good name; I seem to have a record… Amanda, please? asked Jaron. Sorry, Captain. It seems the real station-ship has gone into the warp fields, between frames of the universe. It is moving in exactly the same relative position to this planet. It is moving with the rotation of this planet, the expansion of the planet, the moving of the galaxy, the wobble of this planet around its axis, and all other movements. So it is moving exactly as the Earth moves. However, you can’t see it, in the future, or the past. It is just there, between the timeframes of the physical universe. Byron added: Correct Amanda. I also am able to pin point it down, to around eight frames into the future, around half a second, between the eighth and ninth frame of the physical universe, to be exact. Jaron looked at the others. Beel looked up. “Between the eight and ninth frame of the physical universe? How do you go there? Is there life there, or are just the machines in the station-ship itself doing this?” Jaron looked over at the villagers, and the animals. He squinted, at the apparent zone. “Time is a component of the physical universe. I have to

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 752 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

get into the warp fields, and I can do that; with Amanda. I have done it before, but not stationary; relative to another object. That is the difficulty. While the universe is pulsing one frame to another, in its own heartbeat, the objects within it are moving through broadmatter, at their own pace. To be able to be outside of the universe, between these frames, and be then able to fix relatively on an object and move with it, that is going to need some calculating.” Akeala looked above them. “Is it where the apparent station-ship is, but only out of synch with time?” she asked. Jaron looked up. “It seems so, but I want to confer with Amanda and Byron. I think we need to relocate, to above.”

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 753 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 8

SMALL MAGELLANIC CLOUD

Yandra was standing on the bridge, with the captain and his other officers of the cruiser. To his forward, left and right, was the communications crew. The fleet would be coming out from the warp fields, in several minutes. The journey to the small galaxy had been uneventful. The map within the small galaxy, indicating how to get to the planets, of the giant races, was imprinted into his mind. He wondered if after these eons, the planet would still be there. Five thousand years was a short time in a planet’s history, but it could see a whole human race come and vanish. Finally, there it was; the black with stars studded in space, on the screen. He looked at the central dais, which now held a large hologram, of the galaxy. It was beginning to fill, as their computer took in more of the data. Eventually, the holographic stars stopped growing. “Dim the clouds,” called Yandra, “Illuminate the planets of the giants; make green the planets in their systems.” He waited. The captain was standing beside Yandra. His executive aide leaned over, towards him. “The

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 754 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

image is being relayed to all other ships, as directed, sir.”

Small Magellanic Cloud Galaxy

“Thank you, Boson,” replied Yandra. He walked around, to the other side of the hologram. The lights of the supposedly populated planets came on. Where the planets were red, meant there were no longer any planets. There were seven of those, of the twenty-three listed from the maps, of the giant ships from Mars. The captain leaned across. “Seven gone; that’s bad. Accidentally, a galaxy could lose one or two in that time, collisions, meteors, and maybe death by

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 755 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

comet, but not almost a third of all populated planets.” Yandra asked for the connecting lines, of the previously known trade routes, to be shown. That didn’t reveal anything. Yandra sat back in a chair looking at the images, as they revolved slowly in front of him. Yandra looked up at the monitors. “We didn’t immediately check any warp drive leakage, on the way in. Do a scan of the galaxy, to see what leakage there is.” He waited. Leakage was what happened when a craft entered and left warp drive fields. Entering, marked a small tiny leak into the warp field. For a short time after the breach from the universe, to the warp drive fields, broadmatter vibrated tremendously. This gave otherwise unaccounted for minute temperature differences in space, where there were no atoms or molecules. This was ultimately thought caused by the pain of the life- force, captured in the warp drives, compelled to warp time and space around itself, to make the broadmatter shift. Common warp drive entry points, were thought to eventually create worm holes in space. High-powered computer on cruisers, which had the capacity to measure micro-temperature changes deep in space, could do leakage calculations. Yandra waited twenty minutes. His entire fleet was engaged in the exercise, linking up to each

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 756 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

other, cruisers almost a planet-wide distance apart from each other, scanning the small galaxy. After an hour, they began to link the information, into a data model. Slowly, collective information was forming. Yandra looked over it, as he walked around. “The different colors reflect the volume of traffic and how much leakage there has been. Yellow means it is recent, as it is hotter, and then red, and then purple and blue, meaning it is less recent and almost gone. The areas with the higher traffic will be hotter.”

Warp drive field leakage

Captain Belam called out to his ship, “Wallace, do you concur?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 757 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Yes Captain, I agree with everything that Executive Yandra had said. Furthermore, if I am allowed to put the planets and their systems back into the hologram, you will see which planet is hot, and so on. “Superimpose the stars as they were,” called Yandra. The points connecting the higher traffic areas were obvious. The stars that had been lost showed no leakage. Their loss must have been many eons ago. Yandra leaned over to the captain, “Can you and your ship make a plan of action, and bring it to me?” The captain smiled, “I believe Wallace is now onto it.”

Ω

The plan looked good. There were four major traffic planets. The galaxy was still divided into the equivalent of sectors; five of them. The nearest had a central hub system, which had been marked on the maps, of the giants’ ship, on Mars. That was this fleet’s first target. They would take the outer-ringed planets in this sector first, scout for ships to convert, and work their way inwards. After sixteen hours of study, a quarter of Yandra’s fleet departed for the nearest planet. It had some warp drive leakage, but not a lot, and looking from the leakage trails over the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 758 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

expanded map, perhaps there were two or three trips to the planet, in a week, using warp drives. “Perhaps it’s an Outer-World type arrangement,” suggested Yandra. The captain agreed. They could see their own small advance fleet moving into the system. More leakage was evident in the hologram.

Ω

Captain Palin, of the small advance fleet, was watching the destroyers on her left, and two cruisers on her right. She had two Man-o-Wars, as part of her contingent. She was Pleiadian, as was her crew. Two of her fleet destroyers were Corduke Templars. Their ships came out of warp drives with the small system appearing on their screens, ahead. Palin addressed her crew. This was the first operation, and it would be a ‘by-the-book’ one. “We’ll be going straight in, unannounced, and beam back to command, all data, which comes to us. Courier craft: get ready to warp out with all your recorded evidence, on my say so,” she read out. They observed for an hour the two planets of the system, which supported life. They then divided their contingent in half. The captain would go to the larger planet, with a slightly larger contingent. “The computer is estimating that perhaps there are three million people, on both planets combined.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 759 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

There is an escort, and what could be fighting craft on their way out to us,” explained the bridge aide to the captain. “We are getting some signals and are trying to decode them,” he further explained. The captain acknowledged. “Don’t communicate back; yet.” They were approaching the main planet now, a water planet, and receiving many different signals, lights, radio emissions, and more. “They don’t appear friendly, sir. Those are war machines on their way,” uttered the first mate. The captain acknowledged. “If our fleet appeared off Pleiades, Orbat wouldn’t send a welcome party first, either. Keep going.” “How will we tell which side these guys are on, or even if there is a side?” asked the mate. “Test for warp drive craft,” the captain called to his ship.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 760 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

First encounter in the

Small Magellanic Cloud Galaxy

“Testing now, sir. I found four. There is a warp drive system on their lead ship, with those different looking interceptors. There are two, off the other side of the planet, remaining in shadow; and one on the other planet, which Green-fleet is approaching. Our fleet there, is receiving a similar response.” The captain looked at the images of the other commanders, and particularly the Boguard in the Man-o-Wars. “Are we ready to make contact, with their warp drive cells?” All affirmed. The captain asked the Boguard, to lead that part of the operation, while she now distracted the opposition fighters out there. They now also had a synthetic computer match for the language, or at least a 99.9% translation.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 761 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The computer would now translate what Palin said. She first listened to what was being broadcast, to her. “Identify yourself, or we’ll commence hostile quarantine actions.” The captain leaned over. “This is Captain Palin, of the Pleiadian Republic Ship, Dalkron, asking permission to speak with your planetary leaders. I am from your neighboring larger Santonia Galaxy. We are not hostile.” There was a moment of silence. The executive said to the captain, “We are getting background communications, shadow affects. They are communicating to the planet, and it to the other planet. Both planets know of our presence.” Then the reply came. “If you are peaceful, you’ll allow yourselves to be boarded.” The captain leaned across to the microphone. “While we are peaceful, we need to find your intent also, sir. I would like to know if you are a shoot first, and ask later, type command. I would prefer verbal dialogue to missiles.” There was a pause. The captain watched as three of the planet’s interceptors traversed their fleet. Every gun and canon of the Santonia fleet, was trained on those interceptors. The word just came through from the ship, “Captain,” it said. “Yes, Wallace. What do you have?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 762 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“The life-force in their warp drive; it is ready for converting. The control of that larger ship out there, is now ours. The smaller ships, under conventional drives, remain with them.” The captain gave her order, “Convert.” The life from the Pleiadian and Santonia Galaxy ships, were now pouring over the Megallanic ship. The defending large ship went into paralysis, and the smaller conventional drive ships pulled back. An aide called over, “Sir, the warp drive ships on the rear of the planet, have pulled out from the universe. They are gone sir.” “How long, until the conversion is completed?” “Another twenty minutes, sir. That is a big piece of life in that warp drive compartment out there.” The captain leaned over to the microphone. “Sirs, of your planet. I’ll send you an image.” She then sent the diagrams on the outer hull, of the giant ships. “These were in our galaxy. They died, horrible deaths. They were hunted down by persons, from out this way. I am coming down to your planet, to speak with your dignitaries. So far, there has been no bloodshed. Harm isn’t our purpose. This is a special mission. I must speak with your leaders. I am coming down. We obviously have a technological advantage, as we have crossed the bounds of space, to get here, and we have disengaged your warp drives.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 763 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 764 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 9

PLANET KODIN

The captain strapped into her messenger craft. Her job was to get down on the planet, stay there, and create some situation of goodwill. There were pre- recorded messages and explanations, the same as used in the Federation, all now translated: into Kodinese.

Descending to the surface of Kodin

“The surface is dry, with most of its oxygen being produced by a plankton-like life,” explained the pilot as he read the gauges. The captain and her entourage looked out, over the dry barren landscape. “I hear they have the same on the other planet, only that there is less water and less oxygen.” E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 765 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The pilot concurred. The captain looked down. The buildings didn’t look as though they belonged to giants. Finally, the small messenger ship settled down, in a rock clearing.

The Milky Way Galaxy from Planet Kodin

Captain Palin studied the screens and looked at the water pooled nearby and then to the craggy hills, beyond. The water was green with algae, an obvious source of oxygen. She looked at the buildings, which rose partially out of the ground, and were dug partially under the surface. Palin’s small craft disengaged its drives. There was a delegation of six people, coming towards the captain on floaters. She could see at least several hundred, far off in the perimeters. Palin

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 766 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

estimated that the population lived very much under the ground, and was surfacing, only when necessary, such as now. The head of the delegation was about her height, and they were unarmed. Palin’s cruiser was overhead. It had lots of firepower. Palin thought that perhaps the population here knew this. The delegation had almost reached Palin. She swallowed. She couldn’t tell if the person she was meeting was male or female. She probed its mind. Being Pleiadian, Palin had some abilities. She felt it was female. Palin bowed. The humanoid before her had large dark eyes, and short cropped hair. Her features were slight. The delegation stopped a pac, in front. Palin nodded and one of her aides came forward with a gift, and presented it in front of the dignitary, while bowing very low. Bowing43 was normally accepted as a standard gesture, anywhere in their galaxy, of someone being polite. Palin was relieved when her counterpart similarly bowed. The gift was a translucent sphere, showing a map of from where they were coming from. Palin held it, and it lit up. It revolved, showed the path of where they had travelled, and where they were

43 NOTE ON BOWING: Bowing means to allow the other person to assume the higher status. I also allows the other person, should they wish, to strike a blow unimpeded first, as the person bowing has less defence. So bowing can mean: I trust you, and you are important to me.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 767 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

going. It showed the position of Earth and Mars. Palin set it before the dignitary on a mat. It then projected a hologram, explaining who they were, and that they were from Earth. It then showed the pyramid on Mars, and the crashed giant ship, with the bodies of those inside. The ball then went dark, and started up again, to repeat itself. Palin watched, and as it ended the second time, she bowed very low, then straightened. She put her hand over her heart and said her name. “Palin.” Her aide brought out a computerized instant translator, to enable her to speak in both languages. The machine had already digested enough transmissions from the planet, for basic translations, back and forth. Palin said, “My name is Palin. I honestly do come in peace. I come from out there,” and she pointed to the Milky Way and said, “Santonia Galaxy.” She stood there, staring at her home galaxy. It spread all across the sky in wonderful pink colors. The Kodin sun was already set on the other horizon. Palin wondered, and understood why a group might risk all, to go to such a wonderful beautiful place as her galaxy. It awed her. Palin was brought out from her reverie of home, when the humanoid behind her said, “Tivan.” Palin swung back around and bowed. Tivan smiled. “My name is Tivan. I am in charge of this town. You come from out there?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 768 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Palin gave another quick bow. “Yes. I had not thought it would look like this,” she said as he looked back to her home galaxy. “It looks magnificent.”

Tivan

Tivan smiled. Here was an invader who really didn’t know how to invade, she thought. “Palin. It is pleasing to meet you.” Palin turned back again, embarrassed. “My apologies Tivan. Is there a place we can speak, quietly? My fleet will get nervous, if we stand here

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 769 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

too long. They might believe it hostile. I am sure you have snipers, and they too, will be getting trigger-touchy.” Tivan went a pale shade of pink. “Totally so. Please follow me.” Tivan spoke quietly to her aide, on the right. She then turned to Palin. “The snipers are being stood down.” Palin walked beside Tivan. “Are you the true representative leader here? Tivan nodded. “Yes. Now that our leaders have no further means of escape, we’ll have to talk, you and I. I am the leader, and I can decide what is best for my people.” They were inside now. Palin thought to her ship: Do these people have implants? Yes, Captain. They do. Any station-ships? No, Captain. Can you override the implants’ circuitry? Yes, Captain. We’ll begin now. Captain Palin sat in a small circular room that overlooked the outside view. She leaned forward and began to explain what had been happening to the Federation, and that this fleet was an attempt to be rid of the effects of the Talkron. She then explained about the warp drives, and how they worked. She saw that Tivan was very polite, but felt her implants were stopping her, from absorbing the information.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 770 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Palin found out that the economy on the planet revolved around gold, as did the other planet, in the system. Gold was suspended, in a cloudy mix in the water. Their job was to refine the water, with filters to extract the gold. Gold it seemed, was worth here up to a thousand times more than in the Federation. Palin thought this likely meant; the ships using warp drives were small. When the conversion of the ship had finished, Tivan was told so. She was also told that she may have felt mental pressure, and that the implants she and others of her race had, were being deactivated. Tivan began to sit straighter, and was about to object, when she looked around and thought, and looked at Palin. “That was the implant, you called it? It was just disabled?” Palin nodded. “I believe so. As I said, we come in peace, and when we leave, you’ll be in control of your world more than ever before.” Palin leaned forward and pressed the sphere, and it gave a presentation of, how the Talkron implants worked on the people of the Federation, in the Santonia Galaxy. Tivan sat back. “You can leave this with me? I’ll wish to show it to others.” Palin looked across at the unusual looking humanoid, wondering if she was popular amongst her own kind or not. “I have many of these. I’ll give you more. Tonight, even if you don’t like it, we’ll be

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 771 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

transmitting all through your media, what you saw here. Tivan also found out that the free-drives, as Palin was calling them, as distinct from warp drives, could travel at up to thirty times faster than warp drives. Tivan further learned that the other two ships she had, one of which was to renter in a day, would be converted, as soon as they made contact. The other ship, on its way to the nearest neighboring system, would arrive there in a month, but would be overtaken by Palin’s fleet before it arrived. Palin explained that they would only educate Tivan’s people; free them from warp drives and implants, and then leave. They had no interest in conquering Kodin, and they were doing this to ensure the Santonia Galaxy, or Milky Way as called on Earth, would remain free of Talkron control and mental implants.

Ω

Palin sent a courier ship back, to her fleet command, at the end of the first evening. They had learned that the giants had long been exterminated by an earlier invading force, which Tivan couldn’t recall. Tivan also explained that they had no idea what the Talkron were, and had never heard of them. Tivan further said, that she had received their information on the giants via their history books, and

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 772 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

she had assumed they had vanished due to their own wars, amongst themselves. Palin also learned that the physical mental implants that Tivan and her people had, were only the width of a hair. On the third day, Palin had enough evidence to show what the implants were to Tivan, and where they came from. Every child had been given an implant through the back of the neck, at birth. The implants were simple and straightforward, and they instructed their host to not oppose the status quo, but to go with what the governments wanted. They were injected into the spinal nervous system, into disk three, between its two vertebrae, almost undetectable. The injections were disguised as a vaccine against viruses. The towns’ doctors just dutifully injected all new-born babies, as instructed, following their own implants. Later in life, the implant looked like an aging hairline anomaly of the disk, and nothing more. The vaccines were accepted on trust from manufacturers. These findings were broadcast widely in the Kodin media. The broadcast also explained that those from the Santonia Galaxy didn’t care if the people on Kodin believed them or not, as what Palin and her group were doing was to simply relieve the risk to the Santonia Galaxy, and after completing these same tasks in the Santonia Galaxy, they were providing the same help to neighboring galaxies. The day before Palin’s fleet was set to depart; Tivan came with a delegation of others, including

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 773 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

children. They were in the open, with the messenger craft to the side. “Captain Palin, I have been asked to come forward, with these of our future. In the six days, that you have been here, and your people have been amongst us, there has been absolutely no crime anywhere; our children say they are the happiest they have been, and there has not been one domestic disturbance. This wasn’t the case before.” Palin smiled. She explained that she understood the relief the population was experiencing. Palin then explained how the free-drives worked, on their ships. Tivan and her people of Kodin would have to negotiate with the ships they had previously ruled, and they would have to work out deals by which to travel. Tivan and her council had thought about this. Certainly, faster travel would make their operations less expensive. After almost a week, of absorbing the culture of the planet, its people, and learning as much as they could, Captain Palin and her fleet had to depart. They were being seen off by the township, with over ten thousand people outside, now. Palin was genuinely moved, as some of the population were crying. As their craft lifted higher, Palin looked down. Kodin had possibly one of the hardest planetary surfaces she had ever seen. She wished them well. After two seconds, she and her fleet were only a

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 774 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

small dot on the townspeople’s retina. Then; they were gone.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 775 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 10

PLANET KALADORE

Captain Palin joined the remainder of the fleet. The mission had been the textbook success they had sought. They then set course for the next nearest planetary system, and repeated that success. They did this: four more times. Each was fruitful and positive. However, liberation wasn’t having the same affect, as it had, in the Santonia Galaxy. It seemed that the people, while implanted, were not fighting, killing, ambitiously evil, or in many ways leading a lifestyle, that needed major betterment. On the fifth planet, a larger planet by the name of Kaladore, they had made the same entry. Here, the planet was already waiting. Palin and her fleet made their way into the outer-ringed planetary orbits, of the system. Suddenly, an ambush of three squadrons, of what looked something like frigates, assaulted them. Hundreds of fighters came out, from nowhere, as though shielded by cloaks of invisibility. They attacked down the flanks, severely damaging two of Palin’s ships, before they could warp out. Palin launched crews to protect the rest of the ships, whilst broadcasting who they were. The attack only intensified.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 776 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Palin ordered countermeasures, and her intercepters and fighters fired at the enemy.

The Batrania explodes in

the Battle of Kaladore

Their Corduke Destroyer Batrania was struck, and three enemy fighters entered it. Palin recognized suicide defense-sortie craft when she saw them, and the great ship began to glow, buckle and explode outwards.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 777 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Before Palin could call for assistance, three lights manifested on her ship’s port side. They were Man- o-War. Within seconds the warring enemy fleet had subsided, its cannons and lasers stopped blazing, its communications blacked out. Palin was back in control, and issued orders to the enemy fighters to cease fire, and pull back. They did so carefully, realizing that if their own ships were no longer under their own command’s control, the fighters could be prevented, from reentering those ships, and the fighter crews might soon die in space. Palin reiterated that her ships came in peace. As the Man-o-Wars entered the planet’s skies, their media was full of the news of panic and the battle, and the impending death of their city and the planet. The Kaladore ships were converting; now, there were over sixty ships, all lining up for conversion. The planet was different, to the outer planets. Its cities were congested, and there were several billion crowded down there. It was a small sized planet, and again, it lived on gold production, and the landscape was predominantly dessert. Palin wondered more about where the gold was going to, why, and if the implanting and takeover of the region was for that reason, to control the natural resource of gold. She calculated that in every destroyer, there was at least half a ton of gold in its circuitry. After a day of speculation in the planet’s media, of when the deathblows would come, in retaliation for

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 778 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

the battle, and loss of the Santonia destroyer, Palin ordered her own broadcasts to begin. She didn’t go onto the planet, for fear that she had too little control over the planet’s snipers, resulting in unnecessary loss of Pleiadians.

Kaladore City

After three days of more speculation, and the city beginning to wonder if the end was possibly not so close by, Palin began to play her messages again, the same as she played, in all previous cities in the sector. By the end of that day, the media was again questioning why the invaders didn’t make any real contact. Then Palan sent down her message that she wanted to meet the true representatives of the city, and the planet. This city below was the capital, and was mentioned on the giants’ ship. Captain Palin E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 779 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

was coming down with an entourage, outside the city limits, at the edge of the desert.

Rendezvous outside Kaladore City

After all else, the meeting was successful. Kaladore’s ships above, were converting at a frenzied rate, and the converted ships were aching, to move forward, to help in newer regions, with or without crews. On the planet, the physical implants were generally being overloaded with harmless impulses by Palin’s fleet, and fusing apart. The satellites giving the fearful data and alarming warnings into the implants, were also neutralized. The city and planet began to settle, and come out of their frenzied fears.

Ω

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 780 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Slowly, this was how the sectors were taken, a week at a time, though the speed was growing. Vanquished crews were released of their implants, and that meant relief for many. It was definitely recognizable. New crews, were easily recruited from the existing crews of the ships converted, and so it went on, through the Small Magellanic Cloud Galaxy. However, this was still a different victory, as while those in the Federation wanted to take the fight back to the Talkron, those from this smaller galaxy, had no such desire. It was reasoned by the Federationists, that as this small galaxy wasn’t so openly at war with the Talkron, they were not reacting like those of the Federation.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 781 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 11

IC 1613 GALAXY

Yandra was watching the latest holographic imagery, from the incursion into IC 1613 Galaxy. This would be the closest they would get to Triangulum Galaxy, before going right in.

IC 1613 Galaxy

The incursion into the Andromeda Galaxy was ongoing, and the reports returning were that it was fierce, and that the humanoid groups there were similar to humans from Santonia. The Andromeda Galaxy might take years to free, however, it was not the real target. Nevertheless, it was necessary to

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 782 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

start, and like a chain of fire once lit, it would succeed. Only an equal outside self-perpetuating force could stop their counter invasion, and implants were simply not that. That was why they were now going to the source of the Talkron, the Triangulum Galaxy. The fleets were learning more at every advance. They learned that the Talkron never told of their whereabouts, and hid. No one, bar a select few, really knew of them, and that select few didn’t know of the implants used against the general population. IC 1613 wasn’t an exception. Its major variation was the kind of humanoid people that the fleet encountered. The race here was tall, though perhaps not considered giants. Their cities were large, with up to five million a city and a planet of fifteen billion wasn’t unusual. It took half the fleet to overwhelm the defenses of any of these planets, though each planet capitulated, eventually. This race was similar in stature, to the Masters of Six Worlds. While little was known of Six Worlds, due to it being in the future, there was enough recorded by the few returning survivors of that fight, to enable Yandra to see an uncanny resemblance. Though, their reptilian styled bodies dispelled any general theory that this galaxy was the source of Six Worlds.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 783 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Olat of Calume City Center

After eleven weeks in IC 1613, the Santonia fleet moved onto their target galaxy. Time was finally running short. If they didn’t move in now, they risked the Talkron being alerted, that there was a Santonia armada on its way, and that it could arrive, at any time. An unprepared enemy was their greatest advantage.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 784 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 785 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 12

STATION SHIP

Jaron was standing at the door’s edge of Amanda. A hundred meters out from him, was the station-ship. They were supposed to believe that it was unmanned and disused. It was a hundred pacs across. Two hundred pacs to his side, was Akeala in Byron, also suited up. Akeala had tried to pry more information from Byron about her father’s earlier lifetimes, but Byron had remained silent, whilst being amused. They were in orbit, around Earth. The station- ship was another unusual phenomena brought in by the Talkron. It was strange; if the death-zone was caused by it, then why were there similar zones on other planets? There were no station-ships seen outside the planets concerned. Jaron was suited. He let go of the side of the Man-o-War, and released his tether. He floated over to the hulk, but did not touch it.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 786 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Station-ship over Sequetus 3

He looked at it closely, as his jet pack slowly pushed him. He looked at the lack of lights below from the Earth. He wondered as he recalled the visio takes. Once there were many artificial lights on Earth, after dark. Not now; however. Now the planet was dying again. He looked at the stars, as he slowly made his way around hundred pacs. Amanda, is it all fine, from your position? Yes, Captain. Nothing new is happening, either on the station-ship, or elsewhere around the planet. E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 787 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Thank you, he replied. He glided closer, to the edge of the station-ship. He stopped a few pacs away, and started to drift around its side. He could see nothing suspicious. He continued around to the other side. He could sense Akeala and Byron, watching. He closed in, on what appeared to be a door. Amanda was monitoring him, through the images he was supplying from his mind. Byron was, as well. He saw an opening, and drifted closer to it. “I am going in. It looks very real. I’ll not be doing anything rash, or unusual.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 788 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Entry to Station-ship over Earth

He slowly moved to the doorway. It opened and he stepped through. “It’s solid.” He carefully moved to the other side of the door lock. He stepped in. “There is gravity. Can you hear me?” “We can hear you,” came the reply from Akeala. “We can see you as well; inside. Don’t take off your helmet.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 789 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Agreed.” Jaron looked around. He turned on his searchlight. The corridors were otherwise dark. He had a strange feeling of foreboding, and wondered who had been inside this kind of station- ship, before. It was small compared the others he had reports on, the huge cities that were perhaps a hundred thousand times bigger, way out; past Palbo. Still, he wondered, this station-ship felt recent. What was its purpose, and why was it here?

Ω

On Jilta, similar searches were ongoing, by other the Boguard; all through space, their moons, and all Jiltanian satellites. Amanda and her kind were able to communicate intent outside of space and time. That was their nature. Those Man-o-Wars there in Sequetus, would communicate to their other Man-o-Wars in other sectors, immediately. They would communicate to their Boguard captains. So now, they too were searching for hidden station-ships after finding this one. Amanda’s Man-o-War network, was a network outside of time, which instantaneously communicated around space. Thought did not have time.

Ω

Akeala was getting impatient. Wait; please Aki, requested Byron.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 790 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

You don’t know me that well, do you? Maybe more than you think. Please wait. More than I think? What do you mean by that? You have been giving me these half pieces of data for the past few days. Give it to me, or shut up, please. Hmmm. I like you Aki. Byron, humph! she replied. Follow Father. I never left him. Of course, but where is he? Byron showed her an image of where he was inside the station-ship. I couldn’t show you this if it was real. It is an illusion, a very real illusion. It has no ability to function. Illusion? I can see Papa inside, walking, climbing, and shining his light. That’s correct, but do you really know if it is real, or a configured set of realities, which you are meant to perceive, but which are not there, as per the laws of broadmatter? Huh? I’ll cover that again: look at your father. He is climbing a ladder. He is moving his body, like he is climbing a ladder. His arms show that. He has a searchlight. You and he can see, what is meant to be seen. His muscles hurt and lift, just as if, what he is experiencing is real. What is reality Akeala? Is it what the person perceives? It might be. However, for us here, reality is the broadmatter that stretches and warps under the influence of the atoms and molecules, that sit in it. The broadmatter out there,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 791 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

in space where that station-ship is, registers zero molecules and zero atoms. The broadmatter is not stretching, and it is not inciting any gravitational pull by atoms. It is the effect of gravity, which incites molecules, to pull at each other; to create more gravity. There are no gravitational forces. There are no molecules or atoms; there. There is only the mental perception of them. Jaron was receiving all this data. Correct Amanda? Do you get the same data? It isn’t here? Yes, Captain. Byron is right. However, I can’t see you inside there, as the outside shell, which doesn’t exist, is obscuring you. Jaron thought of this. He swung his hand, slowly at the wall, hitting and ricocheted off it. He breathed out sharply. “That hurt. I need those younger years, book me in for that operation; when I get back, Aki.” Akeala laughed. It broke the tension. Captain? called Amanda, Your body is spiking with pain. I am not surprised. That hurt, and if that was an illusion, then I don’t know what to think. Captain, there is an old philosophical riddle. It comes from Sequetus 3, and an old philosopher there asked, if a tree fell in a forest, and there was no one there to hear or see it fall, did the tree really fall, and was there a tree at all? Amanda moved her ship closer to the station- ship.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 792 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron thought about that. If there was no life to see the tree, and perceive it in any way, then there was no tree. The physical universe only exists, where life is there to perceive it. It doesn’t exist anywhere else. Therefore, an illusion is something you perceive to be there, and it appears real. That would mean, that if there isn’t really a station-ship here, but I am meant to see one, then all life will see the same illusion, or the same tree. That is one of the rules here, we must all agree. Therefore, if I see it, then, you must also, as you are life, and so is Byron, regardless of his instruments. Jaron put his hand onto the wall. He looked at it and tried to imbue his mind into the wall. It didn’t work. He shone his searchlight, on the wall. He put his mind into the wall. This time, he could perceive into it as though it were real, but it shimmered, as though not quite solid. I am going to attempt to put my attention into the future, just one frame. Lock onto me Amanda, please. Got you, Captain. Papa, I got you, and Byron has you. I have you, sir, added Byron. Jaron kept his eyes on the apparent hull of the station-ship. He could feel one timeframe ahead, and all he could see was the Earth in front of him. He couldn’t see any more structure of the station- ship. He looked a frame behind him and there was the picture of the station-ship, its illusion. He

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 793 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

referenced himself to the station-ship illusion, and looked two frames ahead. Be careful, Captain. Don’t go into the future. I can feel your body in the present is lessening, as though you are becoming an illusion as well. Thank you, Amanda. I understand. I’ll continue and hold onto the rail here, and if it is an illusion, I hope it holds me well. With that, he began to look into the future another frame, then four frames, and slowly, he crept up to the eighth frame into the future, almost half a second. Captain, your body is becoming ethereal, please come back. Jaron looked at his hands. They were becoming paler. He looked at the rail, which he was holding. It was gone. He looked to the solidness of the station-ship, and it was vanishing. He looked out towards the Earth and saw it below him; then it started to become paler. He looked at the stars and they began to flash back and forth black, purple, black, and purple. Jaron swallowed. He was at the peripheral edge of the warp drive fields. “Amanda? He called. No answer. Amanda?” he called again; there was no answer.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 794 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 13

CONFRONTATION

The fleet spent the first week in, mapping the galaxy. The fleet’s galactic roadmap was not as accurate, as they had first surmised. However, more or less they had its equivalent of sectors worked out. There were twelve sectors. From the information on the Cuneiform tablets, there were three possible centers, or ruling areas of the galaxy. It was difficult to ascertain exactly. There was more data from the CS 1613 Galaxy now, and that seemed to confirm one sector, dominating the other two major sectors. The way to their targeted system, which had many planets inhabited, as per the information, was a straight line, in via other planetary systems. It meant going to one side of the galaxy, and where all teams would assemble, and then start dealing with one planetary system after the other, taking the inhabited worlds as they found them. The name of the system they were seeking seemed to be pronounced Heehsaw, which sounded strange to both the Federationists and Pleiadians. To get through the planets to arrive at Heehsaw, the Pleiadians also needed to take the planetary systems either side on the way. It wasn’t just a matter of going straight in. The strategy was that they needed to be able to retreat as well, as a last

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 795 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

resort. To underestimate the Talkron would be a mistake of great magnitude. The first planetary system they reached was called Hanshun; it had only one planet. It was on the galactic rim, and little seemed present, other than some agrarian farming. There was one warp drive craft in the system, and it willingly surrendered, to the dismay of its executives and crew. The people on the planet were slight, had little civilization behind them, and perhaps were only as advanced as Earth was, around 450 A.D. The single warp drive craft had aboard a few administrators, and observers. They possessed mild implants; but they were not major decision makers. The next two planets visited were similar to Hanshun, and uneventful. Again, the warp drive craft, which were small and unarmed, surrendered. Like Hanshun, those in the craft were put on the ground, with the local inhabitants. The Santonia fleet was slowly moving into the galaxy. By the sixth planet system, they found mining craft, and the fleet simply commandeered those. They took over the ships and offloaded the crew. To avoid finding more warp drive craft appearing later at their rear, Yandra left some Federation crews behind, to watch over from where they had advanced. By the tenth planet system, the planets were bigger, with more population, and they were more

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 796 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

advanced. It seemed obvious that they were getting closer, to the hub of a galactic empire. As they took over the ships, they were able to get a clearer understanding of how the galaxy ran, and who was running it. The converted ships told all they could. On the twentieth system, they came across a ship that looked similar to the ship, which left Earth during its invasion by the Federation. Yandra thought he recognized it.

Othersider ship

Before Yandra could do anything, or approach it, it had gone. They took the planet, with little effort.

Ω

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 797 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The next planet had a very large civilization. The Man-o-Wars came out into its sky. The result was little interest displayed by the locals. Yandra was scratching his head. They were unsure of what to do, when one of their aides alerted them. “Sir, the planet itself has a very high social structure. Its buildings are perhaps, more sophisticated than our own. They are broadcasting, without interruption. It doesn’t make sense.”

Yalanore City, Yalanore.

The aide turned and looked at the hologram. “Sir, these moons, they have unusual craters.” Yandra concurred. “Also the planet has no defenses, which may happen under two circumstances. One is where it has no enemies, or secondly,…” and he turned, “This is a trap.” E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 798 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Before he could engage the warp fields and give orders, lasers burst from the moons simultaneously. Their fleet was crippled in seconds. The enemy next issued rockets, and then fighting ships. Yandra, and his one hundred advance ships, was no match for them. “Sir, none of these enemy ships use warp drives, they are all conventional quantum-drives, and hundreds of them.” Yandra saw it; a carefully laid out trap. They were baited, went straight in, and the trap was sprung. They couldn’t take control of the enemy ships, and now they had to fight. The planet also came alive, and hundreds more ships and fighters lifted off, heading towards the fleet. Yandra jumped to call his ships, which could warp out, to do so. When a ship was hit, and injured, the life running it often couldn’t pull the damaged hulk, and searing molecules, out from the physical universe. The ship’s structure often was too convoluted to warp. Over half of Yandra’s fleet warped out, immediately. They got out. The rest, which had followed him into the system, were now battling to form some semblance of a defense formation. Yandra knew that the moment any of his remaining fleet ships split from their formation, they would be individually targeted and overwhelmed. It

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 799 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

would mean death for them, and their crews. For the life that was running the ship drives, it probably would be captured, again. Yandra saw his ship’s captain; calling out his fighters and interceptors. He had a hundred craft launched in minutes. So did the other ships; soon there were thousands of small Federation craft out there. There were thousands more of the enemy, too. Next, unexpectedly, the enemy had warp drive craft, appearing from nowhere. The enemy had used conventional quantum drives to attack and maim the Federation fleet, and then they had warp drives waiting in the warp fields at a predetermined point of time, to assail them. Yandra saw the first destroyer of his fleet glow. It was the FS Tidora, with no chance of saving any life.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 800 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The FS Tidora explodes in

the Battle of Yalanore

Like a dream, Yandra saw his ships from the Pleiades, and the Cordukes, fighting tenaciously on the screens. However, they were being overwhelmed. More and more enemy ships, were appearing from the warp fields, and they were issuing more and more fighter and bomber-type squadrons. It wasn’t long before Yandra estimated that they were fighting a force, seven times their own size. He knew that it was suicide for any of his escaped group of warp drive ships to return, for they would be compelled to stay and suffer fighting overwhelming odds. Yandra slowly sat back; he had his Marshalls there around him, directing the fleet. They were dividing the enemy, however, they were being pushed back. Every time they tried to regroup, the enemy seemed to have an endless stream of fighters and interceptors available. It seemed not to matter to the enemy to waste their own lives, as long as they were able to attack the Federationists. More of Yandra’s ships went down, and three exploded, ramming into each other. He counted at least two dozen of his ships ablaze, with thirty enemy ships afire. The end wouldn’t be far off, he thought. He thought of his father, and his sister. What could they do, he wondered? He wondered, and with an image of his father in mind, he got a very strange E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 801 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

answer. Decide. Decide it is your turn to have luck. Luck, is events beyond your control. Decide, son. Yandra shook his head, and came to the present, looking ahead, and yes, it was time, and he was tired of fighting and fighting these many years. He needed luck; he swallowed. The enemy fleet started to explode on his right. Then on his left, he saw three balls of white light, and then another two, and six more, followed by another seven. They were Man-o-Wars! He watched, to see what might happen, before he decided whether to issue an instruction for them to leave. There was no point, they be sucked into this vortex of a fight they would lose; he watched. The Marshal’s were ordering their fleets to form a defense ball. This was the military position, which no one could win from, but it forestalled final blows. In a perfect sphere, they grouped, with all guns protecting each other. Yandra recognized it; the Orion Circle, named after the captain of the Confederated Council of Planets, Captain Ilad Orion. He had used it against the invading Federation fleet, a long time ago. Then, the circle had lasted for months. The CCP craft couldn’t warp out, but they defended themselves for months. It was only the lack of provisions, which eventually made them surrender. Here, the Man-o-Wars were doing something different, they were preying on the Triangulum fleet, and converting their warp drive ships. Yandra

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 802 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

watched, as six Man-o-Wars gathered around their next target ship. Other Man-o-Wars assembled, and defended those six, against any who wanted to fight them. Three enemy interceptors launched an attack on the Man-o-Wars; the interceptors vaporized. Four fighters got too close, and merely became molecular dust. A conventional destroyer attacked and quickly became space debris. There were no explosions; offending craft just became dust. There was no fire, just clouds of white vapor, like dust. Enemy warp drive craft converted, and then officially surrendered. Even when those crew on board, were trying to send out messages that they were not surrendering, their systems were doing otherwise. The life sources, previously entrapped, within their warp drive compartments, were now free. Firstly, it was surrender. Next, the broadcast was to tell its crew, what had just happened, through their own public address system. Their ships had just taken over their ships, and it was impossible, short of them trying to attack their own ship, for them to stop it. One crew did try self-destruction, but that crew suffocated, and shown on the visios to all ships. This was going to happen to anyone, who tried to go against their ships, once they had surrendered. All enemy, were soon informed, that all their warp drives had been notified, and they were eager to convert. Trying to warp out, once a warp drive

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 803 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

source had been informed of freedom, proved ineffective. The ships always stayed. The battle attack started to diminish. Now the enemy warp drive craft couldn’t, or wouldn’t, warp out. Yandra saw the difference. Soon, there were enemy ships helping the Man-o-Wars, as happened in the Federation. Yandra’s own warp drive fleet, which had taken refuge in the warp fields, was now returning. After three hours, half the Triangulum warp drive fleet had converted, and the numbers were increasing. The quantum drive ships trying to attack the Federation were failing, and becoming more desperate. Yandra could feel their captains trying to appease their implants, at any cost now. They had to win, or die in the attempt. They were not going to win, and the only other way to follow the implant, was to die. The Man-o-Wars were no longer as active in the conversions, as this was almost complete. They were next seen defending the Federation ships, against suicide attacks, by whole quantum drive destroyers and cruisers. The enemy was now going insane, attacking each other. They were turning on themselves, any way they could, to die in the attempt, as victory was now impossible.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 804 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

One more hour, and the battle was over. The enemy was vanquished. Its conventional quantum fleet lay scattered in space, debris, floating pieces of ship, parts of bodies, half ships, parts of fighters and more. Yandra didn’t feel elated. He didn’t feel he had won anything. They had lost life, and the life of an enemy lost, was a life gone, which couldn’t have his implants removed. Rather, enemy lost, would return to collect another body, from the same people who implanted them. Yandra was in touch with the Man- o-Wars, and understood. The implants also directed those dead to return, to get another body, and fight their unholy war again, and again, and again. He wondered if every race, which had compulsions to: fight or die, had been similarly implanted. The final count was: three thousand ships converted. Over seventy-five thousand had their implants, overridden to be ineffective. Yandra looked at the bloodied fields of space. He had lost hundreds of craft, and tens of thousands of crew. They had been all good men and women of the Federation and Pleiades. Boguard were lost. He wondered if this was the luck, he had wished for. He saw in the corner of his eye, that same craft, the one labeled an othersider, vanish from space into the warp fields again. Yandra sighed. That meant they were on the right path, and that there would be more fighting to come.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 805 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ω

The Federation fleet was soon flying over the unprotected skies of Yalanore. Its Governor was broadcast an ultimatum, which he couldn’t refuse. He was to uplift from the city, and make his way, to the battle fleet overhead. The ramifications for not following this order were too grave.

The Governor Lifts off Yalanore

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 806 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The Governor boarded his craft, lifted skywards. It was a non-military craft, specially designed for luxury, and meeting dignitaries in. It lifted amongst the golden buildings of the government sector. Slowly it rose. Above his planet, he could clearly see the devastation. It had been a bloodbath. He wondered at the valor of his planet’s men, in not surrendering. They had fought hard and well. His small shuttle arrived at Yandra’s flagship. It circled once, and was given permission to enter a designated hanger. The small shuttle was escorted by ten Federation fighters, and two Federation interceptors. The Governor wasn’t met with significant honors, as he had thought he might have. Upon alighting, he was met by a security detail. The Governor, and his own security personnel, were simply escorted to meet with Yandra. He wondered what these people were, who come to conquer, and didn’t even have the most basic of manners to know how to greet a dignitary. Even in the greatness victory, there should be a moment of small humiliation, for the victor. He was escorted to the Captain’s Lounge, and ushered quietly inside. His aides were asked to sit in an anteroom, attached to the lounge. They were all offered food, and kalo. Yandra stood from the table and pointed to the translation microphone. He beckoned the Governor to sit.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 807 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yandra sat directly opposite. Two large important chairs had been arranged, opposite each other, with no table between. They were accorded equal significance. No one else was immediately present. “Sir, your fleet was defeated, and it basically surrendered en masse. However, I can tell what you are thinking, so I want you to see, how your men died.” The Governor said nothing to this, but looked at Yandra. Yandra raised his hand in the air, and the lights dimmed. A hologram came on, between the Governor and Yandra. It was of the battle. Yandra fast-forwarded the battle. “I wish to show you this part, the carnage at the end.” The Governor watched, as he saw his own men and women directing their ships to self-destruct, to die, rather than be beaten. They collided, crashed and rammed each other. Their fighters also joined in, a bloodlust of self-destruction. After several minutes Yandra called out, “Enough. The sight of wasted good lives sickens me. Those were good crew of yours who died. They deserved better.” The hologram shrank and moved to the side. The lights returned. The fire of the battle diminished, though not totally gone. The Governor swallowed, as he was shocked and speechless. “Your Excellency of Yalanore, sir: your men were killed by your own men. Simply, that is insane, when

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 808 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

they could have lived. There is no valor in this, and no honor in victory.” What the Governor didn’t know, was that he, and his aides, and those around him in his residence and office, were having their implants overridden. They could feel a kind of normalcy in computation, and decision making now, which they couldn’t manage, only three hours ago. The Governor felt the shame, and embarrassment for his victor. He glanced at the diminished hologram, and shook his head. Two of their own cruisers had just collided in it. Yandra felt the man’s mind of confusion and regret, and continued. “We didn’t come here, to wage war. We came here to offer peace, and rid your galaxy of this insanity. Let me please, explain how.” Over the next two hours, the Governor and Yandra exchanged views, but most importantly, the Governor understood the mission that Yandra was on, and why he was there. Moreover, whilst the meeting continued, two small station-cities were found, in the system and converted; the captured life was freed. Over the next week, the planet’s population was rid of all its mental implants. They details of where Yandra’s fleet was to go next, where decided.

Ω

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 809 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yandra stood on the Bridge of his flagship. They had been successful, at a price. Now they occupied their first full Triangulum sector.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 810 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 14

APPROACHING CHARON

Yandra and his crews realized that the first planets were not a sample of what was coming. The battles and tactics were more ferocious, and the enemy more cunning the further into the centre of the galaxy they went. Their fleet’s best weapon was their allies, the Man-o-Wars. As soon as they came out of the warp drive fields, enemy fleets tended to fall back, and move away. A newer phenomenon was that the closer they got to Charon, the less warp drive craft they found. Yandra was in front of his executives. They had just finished claiming three more sectors, with the probability they had more fleets of converts with teams, in two other sectors. Slowly, they were surrounding the central sector of Charon. “I am concerned: up until two planets ago, we were facing a fierce opposition. Now, there is almost none, and it is more reminiscent of the days, prior to the Battle of Yalanore, which was a baited trap. What are your thoughts?” Yandra indicated to his First-Officer. “Sir, the enemy has lost over seventeen thousand quantum drive craft, and we have destroyed a thousand of their warp drives, and

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 811 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

converted another forty-seven thousand to date, of which a quarter were military craft. I believe that the Talkron have run out of ships and resources, sir. It is possibly, that simple.” Yandra looked long at the first officer. He thought about this, while waiting for any word from the other staff and commanders. He looked at the Boguard captains, from the Man-o-Wars, as they communicated with their ships. A Boguard captain nodded, as about to speak. “Captain Yandra, I can’t feel the enemy at all, other than a deep presence on Charon.” Yandra looked around the room. “I am not completely convinced that the Talkron are hiding somewhere, waiting for us to leave. To conquer the larger Andromeda Galaxy, the ancillary galaxies, and launch a major attack into our own Santonia galaxy, I feel that two thirds of their fleets are possibly elsewhere.” “In warp fields?” suggested a destroyer captain. Yandra shrugged. “What would you do? Not what did they do, but what would you do, if you were them, and you were invading? What precaution would you take for a counter invasion?” Yandra looked around. Another Boguard captain indicated he would like to speak. “Sir, I would make sure, that if I was losing, I would hide as you suggested. Then when your back is turned, I would thrust a blade into your

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 812 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

heart, and turn the blade, until you were dead.” The Boguard nodded. Yandra smiled slowly. “Yes, and if I look ahead, I can almost feel it between my shoulders now. So, how do they do that? Another Boguard raised his hand slightly. “Sir, if we look at how they did it, from the future perspective, looking back, to when it did happen, perhaps we’ll find out.” One of the Corduke captains turned in his seat and looked at the Boguard. “You can remember the future?” The Boguard nodded. “I can put a mental remote viewing device into the future, and have it look down into the past, from where I placed it. It will bring memories to view, all of which are relayed to the present.” A Pleiadian captain opened his eyes and breathed deep as if to exclaim, this was intriguing. The Boguard continued. “I am not anyone special here, in this. All of you can do it.” He smiled. A Corduke chuckled. “So, if we all look to find the memories, we should all come up with the same?” Yandra looked to the Boguard captain, again. The captain half smiled, almost trying to suppress it. “We might. However, it also might be that there is no absolute future, and this is what the Talkron play in. They go into the past and future, altering it, to move the present aside. One can

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 813 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

change the future and the past, and thereby alter the present.” A few of the Cordukes shook their heads. They were out of it now, confused. Yandra held up his hand. “I believe we have just entered a field of para-abilities, things which life hypothetically can do, but which is not proven.” An aide looked over with a scowl. “How so?” Yandra stood, arms folded. “We are missing the point now. However, simply put, if we could change the past and the future, we wouldn’t be able to prove it. That is because any proof relies on the past, at the time prior to its changing. However, it subsequently changes. Now; how can you prove that? You can’t.” “I believe that they will want us to arrive at Charon, and leave. Then, they will return. So we should move onto Charon, occupy it, and refuse to go.” Yandra looked at the Leading Boguard Captain. The captain smiled. “I believe we are going to get there, fight like crazy, and win. That is what my fleet of Man-o-Wars and I believe happened, in the future, and am willing to make sure happens. We need to get there, and push the present, and pull the past and future into line with it, so it is too hard to change.” Yandra looked around. That seemed to be a group assessment. It was agreed.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 814 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ω

The planet Charon was now undefended. As expected, there was less military presence, the closer they approached, and the military ships they found were under quantum drives. Yandra looked down from his seat on the bridge, and saw the planet’s image on a screen. He expanded it. “It isn’t emitting many signals,” was all he said. The pictures grew. Yandra looked at the planet. “It is half surfaced, with buildings and paving.” His crew scanned more. “The planet is still over three billion Ks away, sir.” It was the mate. Yandra was starting to see the vague images. “There is almost no sea, and no clouds. I don’t see any green.” He lamented at the lack of Yaltipian cavern life. “There is no military presence anywhere,” said the mate. “Is this a trap?” asked Yandra. “Think, please. We need to outwit this.” There was no answer from the commanders, only a desire to go in. Yandra looked around, and he had representatives from all ship groups, with him. The Boguard wanted to press on. The Pleiadians wanted to move in. This was the end of their quest. They shouldn’t stop, now. They had been preparing for this, for thousands of years.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 815 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yandra nodded to the expectant faces. They would go in, invade. “Sir, I am receiving a message. It is an invitation from their planetary Governor, to descend. The message is that the Talkron have gone; fled.” Yandra looked around. Could he believe it, or would this be the greatest trap of all?

Ω

Charon was bigger, than first suspected. Its gravity was 0.87 Standard Gravity. Yandra read the signals. It was a highly sophisticated planet, with a technology more evolved than the Federation. Yandra had his personal craft ready for departure. He stood on the hanger deck looking over his crew. He had explained why it was he, who would be going down onto the planet. He was neutral. His physical and life-memory lineage didn’t go back to the Triangulum Galaxy. He wasn’t from this place originally. He believed he might just have an advantage over those with Aaron, or Pleiadian ancestry. He looked at his flagship crew, his first officers. “If this is a trap, you have your plan of what to do. Do it.” With that, Yandra turned and walked to his unarmed transport courier. He was traveling with forty other executives, including Cordukes, Hallowmen, six Boguard and four Pleiadians.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 816 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yandra’s best diplomats were with him. They had been in briefing for months, and had ventured onto every planet the fleet had stopped at, learning all the while about Charon. Yandra looked back one last time at the cruiser, before stepping aboard his craft. The cruiser decks were covered with planetary assault craft, as did half the fleet. This was, to most of those present, their ancestral home planet, the planet from which their forbears had fled. They never intended to destroy it, but take it piece by piece, as needed. Ideally, they wanted to take it whole, make it theirs, once again.

Descending to Charon

Yandra’s craft started to descend, through the atmosphere. Land not covered by buildings and roadways, was desolate. Water seemed scarce.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 817 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

They soon were approaching Charon Prime, the capital of the planet, home to eighty million, in the one city. Yandra and his party just gawked at the size of the buildings, and the transport system. There was nothing in the Federation to remotely resemble it. Yandra began to wonder what they were really doing here; planning to attack such a magnificent city would be a great crime. His small craft descended. He looked at the others of his team. They included negotiators, those who could read thoughts, could alter matter. He knew there were cruisers, Man-o-Wars, destroyers and tens of thousands of other craft up there, all willing to cook the planet to a cinder. This was the home of the Talkron, but he wondered now; where were they? He shared his thoughts with the others of his team. They seemed to understand his concern. The city was getting closer. The air was a brilliant blue. Yandra moved up into the pilots’ cabin. “Continue, please. I just want to see what you see.” He took a seat behind the three pilots. In front was a cloud, then the tall buildings of Charon Prime. They were hundreds of stories tall, with thousands of craft moving in regulated form, crisscrossing the sky. Yandra wondered why there were no craft coming up to greet them.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 818 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The pilot cut in, “Sir, three craft now, coming up to meet us.” These ships, are they unarmed and … friendly? Seems so, Sir, returned a dozen thoughts from out in space. Yandra sat back. He waited.

Charon Prime

They were soon below the hundred story building line tops. Their escort was in front of them.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 819 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The buildings were now both sides, and their craft continued down. They started to pull up twenty floors above the ground. A huge building opened up, like a yawn. Inside they went. Are you still with us? thought Yandra Yes, Sir, came the many thoughts. Yandra checked his translating machine again, and its backup. His ship had no weapons. They could be stepping into a dangerous trap again, or they could be successful. Perhaps they had already beaten the Talkron. In ten minutes, they would know, he hoped. Their craft stopped. He looked out, from the pilots’ window, and he could see a lot of people gathering, waiting. He was suspicious and slowly walked towards a small entourage, in his craft’s lounge. Their craft had settled. Their escort craft were still above them, in the air. Yandra’s door opened. They had a file of two hundred people out there, in honor of the newly arrived. Yandra stepped down first. The honor guard saluted him. The others stepped out behind him. He looked at all the expectant faces watching him. Yandra looked at who was at the other end, of the honor guard. Yandra stopped, and wasn’t really sure what to do. He looked again, and continued. He had not anticipated this.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 820 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He walked with the others in his party behind him. His hosts were beckoning them, into another further room, with waiters and attendants. Yandra placed his hand over his chest, and heart, a sign of formal military salute, and respect in many cultures. He introduced himself. They had already discerned the language, enough to have the translation machine work its magic. The machine was tuned to Yandra’s voice, and knew his inflections. It changed his speech digitally, into the speech of Charon, with his own dialect and manner in it. Whoever he was directing the speech to, would reply, and their voice would similarly be translated, into Standard Galactic. The speech was aimed at the participants, from the machine. It sounded as though the words were coming from the mouths of those speaking. This was done, by manipulating the volume to the left and right ears separately. The sound was then directed with varying volumes, for left and right to the recipient. The result was that when the translation machine was synchronized, to both parties, it sounded as though both parties were speaking the other’s language fluently.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 821 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 15

ERON JOON

“My name is Eron Joon, Lead Captain Yandra,” replied the emissary, to the introduction of Yandra. Yandra bowed, slightly, not very sure how the right introduction should be, to such a race. Yandra looked to the others of his group around him. He thought: Any implants? None detected, was the reply from above. Eron Joon indicated that the entourage should now follow him. He curtly nodded to the people of his group around him, and they started to step away, back into the background. “Follow me, please.” Yandra’s entourage simply followed. From above, the many ships watched vigilantly their various leaders. They knew this enemy. Many converted ships were above the city too, also waiting, perhaps looking for a small excuse to cause harm to those who had entrapped them for so long. Eron accepted a drink from his waiter, and suggested the others try their local citrus produce.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 822 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Eron Joon of Charon

It is clean of toxins, pollutants and drugs, came the thoughts, down from above. Eron Joon turned to the window, with drink in hand, and looked out. “I think you want to know more. I can feel your thoughts.” Yandra nodded. “Yes, thoughts were crossing my mind as to… what you are.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 823 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Eron laughed, in a fashion. “I am alive, as you are. You inhabit a biological body. I inhabit a mechanical body, well superior to any biological units, available in either of our galaxies.” Yandra looked at him, with no emotion, and continued waiting, for further explanation. Eron sipped. “I can work every moment of the day and night. My biological counterparts must sleep, so the body can detoxify and cleanse itself, of disease. I don’t need to waste that time.” He put his glass down, and continued. “I am a thousand years old, by your years. I have another three thousand years left in this unit, and then I can transfer myself to another upgraded unit, with no memory loss.” Eron smiled. “You, on the other hand, you experience memory loss, as you go from one biological unit, to the next, upon its death. You also find the death of your units painful, and the unit itself tries to hold you in.” Eron smiled, and could tell the others in the entourage were interested. “You find it amazing, if you exteriorize from your biological unit. Yours tries to stop you from so doing. Mine, has no will of its own. Yours has its own will, its own memories, and its own determination. When it is upset, you, my Lead Captain Yandra, have to learn to cool it down, and I think you call it, holding its temper. I understand many of you are unable to do that, and this is the source of much of your galactic unrest, and even wars. It has a temper, your body, and it

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 824 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

runs you, your version of humanity. Mine, I run it. It is far more practical.” Eron looked at them all. “Drink?” He held up his glass. “We can still indulge ourselves in sensory pleasure.” Yandra was not sure what to say. Eron looked over, to one of the waiters, “You! Come here, please.” The waiter obeyed. Eron pulled away the man’s shirt and gouged out his facial flesh. The man just stood there with minor fluid from the skin, dripping.

A Bioclone of Charon

Yandra looked agog, as the waiter didn’t even flinch. The group was more amazed, as the waiter wasn’t human at all. “He is happy to be here. His unit isn’t as practical as mine. He is part biological, part

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 825 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

mechanical. He is what we call a bioclone44. You may leave now and get repaired,” he said to the bioclone. Eron Joon turned back to Yandra. “It has a living unit operating it. However, the unit of life isn’t large like you or I. It is nothing but the same size life unit, which you might get as a pet, on one of your worlds.” Eron looked over, and thought this funny and chuckled. Yandra was beginning to feel bad, about this. Eron smiled looking Yandra up and down. “Your biological unit doesn’t like me, or this world, and is starting to tell you to cleanse the universe of us. I, on the other hand, have already cleansed this part of the galaxy of your kind of units.” Yandra looked at the bioclone and then back at Eron. “I don’t think this is a time for debate on our origins’ rightness.” “Origin rightness?” retorted Eron. “I come from here, the same place as those Boguard and Pleideans, up there. They are hoping to make this planet theirs, again. However, what they don’t know, is that all those thousands of years ago, we replaced them, with better units, more practical units. You really just need to leave and go back home.”

44 DEFINITION: Bioclone: Humanoid robots, of the Triangulum Galaxy. It is a digitally created machine, but run by a life force.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 826 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 827 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 16

MORE ON ERON JOON

Eron Joon led the entourage over to where a huge map began to shine on the wall. “I am this planet’s administrator. I can compute faster than those life- forms running the Man-O-Wars. I know who they are. I know you have seen our ships.” All the bioclones suddenly left. Yandra sensed out, something was changing. Be careful, came a thought to Yandra. It was from above. Eron Joon smiled. You think your minds can outplay me. I think it is time for you to leave. I am who I am. You’ll not change that. Yandra stepped to Eron. “We are here because we seek the Talkron, and its end. I am unbending on that.” They have gone. Those who were left, fled. You beat them. Yandra looked around. “No, we did not.” Eron started to rise, above the ground. You mortal, why do you not seek to be like us? You seek immortality, and this is the end of that search. I know you want to not be a short-lifer, and you can join me. You can be anything you wish. You can be any gender, if you wish. You can be any identity you

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 828 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

dream of, and you can surrender that identity at will, and select another.

Eros Joon

Eron became Eros Joon. “You can be either gender that you wish. Just choose.” Yandra said nothing. “I am waiting,” demanded Eros Joon, but quickly reverting back to Eron Joon. He continued to rise, higher off from the ground. Two of Yandra’s Boguard entourage also began to rise, of their own volition. Then; three others did. The Pleiadians and Cordukes had heard of this

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 829 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Boguard ability, but never really believed the Boguard were capable of it. Suddenly, there were three of Joon, each smiling, in response, beckoning the Boguard to come and do something, to provoke him. It was a test of strengths, and Joon wanted it. He wanted to test the strength of the Boguard. The Boguard surrounded Yandra, to protect him. They settled with feet on the floor, under them. Joon smiled. He became six copies, appearing newly around Yandra. Yandra began to rise slightly in the air, at Joon’s behest. He then settled, as per the Boguard’s intention. Yandra was the target. Joon cocked his head, and Yandra rose again. He lowered again. Next, Joon stepped forward, and ten of him were now in the room, or at least ten images, then twenty, all beckoning Yandra’s troupe. Yandra sent a thought: Don’t engage. He seeks provocation, so as to strike. Don’t engage. The thought was to his troupe, and their ships. Some of their troupe were raised higher. The Boguard raised around them. They mentally tapped into the wills of the life-forces that were controlling the myriad of ships, the converts, and the Man-o- Wars. The troupe lowered. Joon could be seen: trying harder. He smiled with concern, expressed on his face. “I have been waiting for this. I am not just a single life unit.” He

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 830 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

was the apparitional representation of the life, that the Talkron stood for. He thrust out his hand, to sweep away the Boguard. A wind came from nowhere and buffeted them, and was immediately still. Joon looked around. He raised both hands in the air and the walls began the flake, crumple, and fall in, with lumps of the ceiling collapsing. Another mind was there, a collective group-mind of the Boguard, along with the Pleiadians and Cordukes, too. It was tapping into the concerted minds, of the ships. The ceilings and walls went back into their original form and place. The Boguard folded their arms and looked on, calmly. Joon and his many forms screamed, “Be gone!” and flames burst from behind him, and heat blasted the troupe, but was squelched. Joon was becoming frantic. He called on the heat from a thousand suns. “I am who I am, you can’t defeat me. It is impossible. None can.” The minds of all those there, the tens of thousands, hundreds of thousands, from beyond, those liberated, those as Boguard, all thought as one. The Boguard were now recalling earlier times, earlier battles. They were battles like this, where they and the Pleiadians had lost, and fled. Joon was beginning to feel victory. He could feel the doubts in their minds, the doubts sewn by the seeds of earlier defeat.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 831 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Then from nowhere the Boguard felt a newer mind, a calming mind. It was the mind that didn’t know defeat. It was a calm mind, like it was always there. It was the deepest mind, beyond the bounds of time, beyond the limits of the physical universe. It was the mind behind the Man-o-Wars. That infinite mind, was with them. The Boguard began to lose the solid nature of their form, as their bodies became less visual and less real. Joon stepped back, watching the passive faces of this transparent Boguard. The Boguard were simply there, letting out no outward expression, other than simply being at that place, being one with the physical universe and beyond. They were in tune with the other life-force out there, those running the Man-o-Wars. Finally, Yandra spoke. He was calm, of a unified mind, with full awareness, around him. He could see that the walls no longer had the dense reality, they once had. He looked at Joon. “You and we are the creators, of all around us, Joon. Life created the physical universe, wherein it resides. We created this apparition called reality. This around us, is an apparent city. It is what you and other life have created. It is nothing more. It is a great city Joon, but it is no more real than the laf-laffa45 in my hand.”

45 Definition: Laf-Laffa: A brightly coloured moth, found in the caves of Yaltipia. Its wings measured three hand widths across, and were composed of bright blues, E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 832 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The image of the Yaltipian butterfly began to rise, and move jaggedly upwards to the waving of its wings. Joon snapped his fingers and the moth vanished. He smiled. Yandra next snapped his fingers, and the walls began to lose their opaque dense look, and took on a translucent wavering pale imagery.

Ψ

greens, and crimson, against a black background. The male has a yellow and orange stripe running down its back. Searfinders Dictionary p. 767.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 833 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 17

LORDE CHARON

Clouds began to form, in the corner of the room. The floors began to shake. The few Boguard there looked out, through the walls, and beyond the physical presence of Joon. They were now staring towards the shimmering city, and then to a mountain beyond.

Talkron Mountain

Finally, the real source of the Talkron presented itself, thought Yandra. Yandra wore a glint of satisfaction, knowing that there was something real, beyond the apparition of this idyllic city.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 834 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

A rumbling started to crack in the air, in the distance. It grew louder. Yandra looked more satisfied, the more the noise grew, though it was becoming so intense, that it began to hurt his ears. Next, a counter noise was heard. It was manufactured to be exactly the same wavelength, as the rumbling, to cancel out the earlier noise. Then the shimmering walls of the building began to fade. They started to lose their new look. Outside, the traffic in the air began to look pale. The walls no longer held the reality they had hours before. The buildings started to look hollow, smaller, and everything physical began to shimmer slightly. Nothing was solid or fixed. Then, finally, a single burst of light exploded outward in front of them. An apparition appeared in the light’s dark afterimage. Answering this, the bodies of Yandra’s troupe emanated light of the same intensity, same wavelength, thereby cancelling the light, created by the apparition. Before the group, the apparition grew. It was human in form, though ethereal. The buildings around them had lost all former shape, and all that remained, were remnants of earlier buildings, desolate from earlier battles past, a long time ago. Yandra looked around. They were in a building that was a burned out derelict. Joon and his kind

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 835 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

were gone. This was real, less ethereal, less shimmering. It was a greater reality. Yandra looked at the apparition in front of him. It smiled. “You see, I am like you.” Yandra nodded. All was calm around him. The apparition spoke. “I am Lorde Charon, and this is my city. You have come here to disturb my quiet. What is it you really seek?”

Lorde Charon

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 836 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yandra looked at the being of the man in front of him. “I am here with these who come to reclaim what is rightfully theirs, and to remove you form doing the same again.” The being in front of Yandra began to laugh. “You have come this far, and it is admirable. However, don’t repeat the old mistake in thinking you can defeat me. You cannot, any more than the others could, for thousands of years before you.” Five Boguard rose, of their accord, and drifted their way to Lorde Charon. “We do remember you, and this place. It is a part of us as much as it has been a part of you. In fact, it is more part of us. This was our home, not yours. It was also the home of the now Pleiadians, and ourselves, two independently separate humanoid races. We both possessed great natural innate abilities, living in a greater harmony with the planet, and all its life. The planet’s life-of-the-world was here, providing for us, while we were providing for it.” The Boguard projected an ethereal hologram, which all could see. “Then our machines became contaminated. They were already living with a small life of their own, a life that we had imbued them. They were not host to some captured life from the large source-of-life, which feeds the galactic life-pool. They were imbued with life from each of us.” The Boguard looked at their Pleiadian counterparts, who were nodding in agreement. Their memories were synchronizing; missing elements

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 837 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

were flooding from one psyche to another. The synchronizing of memories made them both greater. They felt not just a unison of mind for each other, but also a unifying; of the minds of their races. It was as if there was a separate racial mind, that they now shared, which was now bringing them back together. It was the Aaron mind, and the otherwise forgotten, Arreal46 mind, together. With it came fragmented images, and the otherwise lost recordings and memories of their long past persecution. Yandra smiled. “You, Lorde Charon, I presume are the one who persecuted the Aaron and the Arreal, on this planet, and the other hundred more planets, on which they had fled. They were a harmonious duo race, with natural abilities, and I believe you hunted them down. You are the same life then as now. Am I correct?” Lorde Charon grew in size. The burned out buildings behind his image began to glow, as though alight. They started to burn, intensely. “Their abilities were not natural.” Charon claimed. “They were evil. No one has any more ability than the landscape around me. No life has. Life is just life. It has no power over the illusion of the universe around us. Only I do. Only I have the ability to create, and

46 DEFINITION: Arreal: The race, that after its migration became the Pleiadians. It cohabited the same planet as the Aaron. Both had natural abilities. Both fled to Earth, after their persecutions in their home universe.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 838 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

uncreate at will.” The embers fumed in his background. Yandra stood forward. “Oh, contrary, Lorde Charon. Life has nothing but natural ability. These abilities are imbued into every being by nature. The universe and life flow two ways. The life-force which is us, gives reality to the universe, and the universe in return imbues abilities to the being to govern it.” Yandra looked around. “Life is absolutely full of natural ability.” With that, Lorde Chandra waved his arm and lightning shot up from the planet to strike the ships in space. Lorde Charon grinned. Yandra and the Boguard waved their hands as one, and the lightning bolts ceased, before they reached their targets. Yandra stepped closer. “We have now retaken every planet the Aaron lost. Perhaps you’ll remember me, my Lorde Charon. I have the body that belongs to the gene pool, of Earth. However, I am not my body. I am also, not held back, by the gene pool of the Aaron or the Arreal. I am different.” Yandra threw out his hand, and images began to play out, in different positions around him. These were the images from his mind, of the persecution of the two separate races of the Aaron and Arreal, on the planet of Charon. “Yes,” he added. “When the Aaron and Areal fled to Earth, to create an additional two more races, the Neanderthal and Cro-Magnon man, you interfered

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 839 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

again, to stop the natural ability of each.” Yandra smiled, as they had been collecting and piecing the information of the Earth jig-saw, and now it was falling into place. “You wiped out the former and denigrated the life and livingness of the latter. You also sent in your agents to attack all with natural ability, and any who tried to develop it.” Yandra stepped closer. Lorde Charon grew slightly less in size. “We now have all your outer planets, and your colonies, which were once Aaron and Arreal. They are ours, and the once captured life, is now with us, spilling and pooling its memories of what has been happening in these three galaxies for the past tens of millennia. This is how we know about you.” Yandra jumped forward to be only inches in front of the apparition of Lorde Chandra. “I am unaffected by any fear you may invoke, in the genes of my brethren. Attack away Lorde Charon, I am impervious to you.” With that, Yandra stepped into, and out the other side of the image of Lorde Charon. He turned to the others. “What you are willing to be, can’t affect you.” Yandra turned around to face the apparition again. “On Earth, you were insanely fanatical, in your repression of anything that resembled natural ability. You infiltrated every form of persecution and hunt. The body of Cro-Magnon man posed your greatest problem. You needed it to invade the rest

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 840 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

of the galaxy, to staff and manufacture your ships. You had destroyed all suitable humanoid bodies on this and other Triangulum planets.” Lorde Charon seemed unaffected by the accusation. “The Boguard set about creating more planets of suitable population, against you. They seeded modern man, but in a long-life state, on all suitable planets of the Santonia Galaxy. However, you wanted to control it all, control all life, and you set about following the Boguard everywhere you could. Your need to destroy, disable, and remove all life became an insane obsession.” The size of the image of Lorde Chard reduced. Yandra continued, spoke of the plagues and illness Charon had sent down on planets. Charon got smaller. Yandra smiled at him, just before Charon left. “There was an old Aaron saying planted into each of the cultures they started. The truth will set us free.” Yandra swung his arms in the air and lunged at Lorde Caron’s image. “What I say now, is the truth. You’ll depart, and we are regaining what is our natural heritage.” The image of Lorde Charon vanished. Yandra elevated several pacs, above the ground. He looked around to his captains, up to his Man-o- Wars, and to others. All the ships were playing his image, telecasting it to all the fleet. He radiated.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 841 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

“Over there,” he pointed to Mount Talkron. “That is where our enemy is, in his last stronghold. We are now going take this mountain. We are going to take this planet from his machines!”

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 842 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 18

BRIEFING

The assault troops from the Federation ships began to land on Charon. Millions were now ferrying down. This was the assault, and battle, for which they had ultimately waited and planned for, patiently. The planet would soon be theirs. The other cities outside of Charon Prime had capitulated, after short fierce fighting. Charon Prime may have been a ruined city, but it was a Talkron city, controlled by life-run Talkron machines, fiercely protecting their domain. Yandra had set up a command post, in the old remains of western Charon Prime, where a vicious battle for the city had been waged tens of thousands of years before. There was no life since, in the city; no vegetation had taken back the region. It was still just as dead as it was back then. Yandra was briefing his generals. “You can no doubt feel an added presence of some other life force. I feel it of the Aaron, and the Arreal. It is as though additional life that died, when you left, has come back to reclaim your species. Tap into it for strength. It is a natural force, which belongs to each of you. It remembers you.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 843 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Corduke Assault trooper on Charon

He turned to the screen. “Here, we can see the mountain. There appears to be station-cities inside it, perhaps several. We are not sure how they work, but they are large and are likely different, to what we have experienced before. They seem to interconnect to the station-ships and station-cities, which we have found on the outer lying planets of this system, and perhaps in the outer regions of this galaxy.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 844 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

General Marrs stood, “Sir, if those station-cities are interconnected, to those further out in the galaxy, it might explain why those out there, have sometimes not succumbed to conversion. They seemed to convert, and then reconvert. Is it the interconnection between the station-cities, which is doing this?” Yandra looked at his sixty generals, with the most senior rank sitting in the front row. “They are interconnected. Therefore, it could be that, but it could also be that if one station-ship were to supernova, then they all could. Moreover, that might apply to the station-ships found outside Earth, and more recently nearer Jilta. That is why we are going only with conversion. It could also be that if we interfere with one out there, and it blows, we all blow with it here.” He looked around. “So, only conversion is for handling these cities and ships. Only life will handle the trapped life. If any more force is applied to the life in warp drives, it could supernova. That must be understood. More force applied to a warp drive equals supernova, and absolute death. So only life is to treat life. That is how we convert. Is that understood by all?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 845 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Bioclone Bodies are the implants

Yandra looked to the next question. “Sir, the machines that are amassing against us. They are not truly robotic, but an amalgamation of life and machine, bioclones, I believe. Are they all implanted to do evil?” Yandra shook his head. “We have taken two bioclones apart since entering the Triangulum Galaxy. They have an automatic hard wire response, whereby if they see, anticipate, know of the presence of a biological unit, such as ours, the stimulus response mechanism of the machine unit is so strong, that the life force running it can’t prevent the machine from carrying out the action. They don’t have an implant, the machine body is the implant itself. They have many reactive programs installed into them. One is to kill something they don’t understand. They are programmed to kill life, and not see life as anything other than a malfunctioning E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 846 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

machine, which needs to be decommissioned. They will kill you. Next question.” “Why doesn’t the life-force impose its will against the machine? They are meant to be running together.” Yandra smiled. “The machine also has built into it other certain programs. Life is basically good. The machine is hardwired to be reactive, acting out its program. Should the life-force try to stop the machine from carrying out its program, the life-force is given pain, electrically. This forces the life-force to capitulate, and give in to the auto stimulus response of the machine.” Yandra could see the group shudder. He laughed as he spoke next. “By the time these beings, I’ll call them that, had reached Earth, they had perfected this so well they could install the same auto stimulus response system into our bodies of Earth. I know, as I have to deal with it every day. The difference between I and others from Earth, is that I was born in Yaltipia, and I was raised in a different background, and that stimulus response mechanism in my body is weak.” Yandra smiled. “I’ll not speculate how my father rises over this mechanism. That is just the magnitude of who, or what he is. Next question, please?” Another general stood. “Why doesn’t the life- force of the enemy go outside the mechanical body, like the rest of us can?”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 847 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yandra laughed a little and then sighed. “The machine has a small electrical trap, inside it, for the life-force. It lures the life-force in, with pictures; beautifully digitally recorded memories. The life- force is lured inside the circuitry of the bioclones, and when it’s inside the circuitry the machine imposes an electrical force around the life-force. The machine gives pain, and hallucinations, should the life-force attempt to leave. “The bioclone then replays images that are prerecorded, and through the choice of pain or no pain, the life-force starts to learn to regulate and run the bioclone body. The life-force of a bioclone is totally convinced; it can’t leave, and that to leave is worse than death.” The general nodded as did many others. “How do we defeat it then?” Yandra looked up and over to Mount Talkron. “You have to kill it. It is the only way to liberate the life force. We have tried many other ways, and liberation can’t otherwise be done. The life-force is held in more pain, when captured by us, than if it were killed outright. By kill I mean total destruction of the bioclone machinery, so that it can’t be repaired.” There was a murmur through the audience. The briefing was being sent out to all crews, of all ships.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 848 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 19

MOUNT TALKRON

Yandra was watching his troops, as they slowly advanced over the ground to Mount Talkron. This was the same styled campaign, which they had experienced in other cities, on other planets, though with greater magnitude. He watched through screens, as the bioclones in the distance began to amass. Yandra was giving a final briefing to troops, on the ground. “We have over a quarter of a million troops, here now. The bioclones have less, though really, they are an unknown. They will be strongest in places, to trap and surprise. Whilst the enemy might appear to have an overwhelming strength with their mechanical bodies, our superior strength lies in the willingness of each of us, and the intellect that we each process. It also lies most in our purpose. The bioclones are a trapped life, not dissimilar to a warp drive life-force, in a ship. It has to be liberated. The only way to do this, is to destroy the machine that entraps it. No pain will come to the life that loses its machine. It will experience confusion, and some loss of control of the machine, but I promise you, it will experience no pain, upon its death. Relief awaits it, so do your job right.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 849 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Bioclones amassing under

Mount Talkron

Yandra stepped down from the lectern. The transmission to the ships and all crew ceased. It was now up to the generals, and their troops.

Ω

The Boguard Fronts were the first to step forward, out from the tall multistory ruins. There were traps; expected. Buildings would explode. Noxious gasses would erupt from the ground.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 850 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Anything that a biological body could be prone to, had been thought of, and laid out, to snare it. The Fronts were prepared. Their chief weapon was their intellect, as Executive Yandra had said. They saw the traps, in their minds. They looked into the future, saw the past from that point from which they viewed, and looked back into the memory of that future. They saw each, and every, trap sprung. They were the Boguard Fronts.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 851 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Boguard Fronts were the first to

advance onto Mount Talkron

The bioclones were now pushing out from the mountain, moving down, being far bigger and stronger than any Boguard.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 852 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 20

COMBAT

The combat had been brutal for three days. Cammander Makile Gile was the head of his bioclone squadron. He had personally killed seventeen biological units, to date. He was receiving great praise, over their unit’s airwaves. He was a crack Talkron Huntsman. He had, before him, twenty-three Boguard and Cordukes, and relished in their slaughter. The last three, he blew away their brains, in front of each other. He had lost an arm in that operation, but it had been swiftly replaced, by the engineer corps, behind him. He looked overhead, as a squadron of Federation craft circled, and then raced to Mount Talkron. They let lose their rockets, and the mountain returned fire. Commander Gile had once been on Earth, and only weeks ago returned, to find the dreaded Boguard and Pleiadians to be soon camping on their mountain doorstep. He cursed himself for not realizing what was going on. He had been duped, into agreeing with those stupid administrator bioclones, who ran the Santonia operation. Infiltrate they said, not overtly conquer. They said that an overt operation would lose. Gile had never believed them, and once they lost Earth he moved up his own

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 853 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

operation, to take the planet over by force, and take the rest of the Santonia Galaxy, as he had always believed it should have been. He had personally blasted the head of the stupid Talkron Administrators on Sequetus himself. One Chief Administrator, had even been stupid enough to be caught by a mad woman, and trapped by her mental manipulations for months. He had gotten hold of that woman on Mars, Sequetus 4, and ended her life. He had made an example of her, and her companion. The torture of their biological bodies was so good for him. He looked up into the sky, and recalled the joy he felt, as her eyes were removed, slowly in the presence of her companion. It gave him so much pleasure that day, that perhaps it was worth losing this war, just to be able the recall that one single day of revenge. He breathed out, and an explosion above, brought him out of his reverie of pleasure. He crouched, as the debris fell around him. He stood and brushed off his armor. He looked around himself. He spotted another unit of Cordukes, on the other side of his city. His suit was now double strength armor plated, and he had impregnated into the facial armor, more sensory devices. He could see the enemy, a kinopac away, on the other side of the rubble, to his left. He smiled. They were Hallowmen, the best to kill. He had been in Maluka for a week, when those rodents infested their waters, before the Talkron

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 854 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Administrators had lost that planet too. He hated Hallowmen even more than the Boguard, with their fancy criminal magic. Rodents he thought. What was the difference between killing a rodent, and a human body, he wondered? It felt the same, to Makile Gile. There were plenty of humans, the great human bodies, and they killed other life too, as he did, now. They killed the animals, and the trees of their home planet, on Earth. Did they care for the lesser animals? No, he answered himself. They never deserved that planet, in the first place.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 855 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Commander Makile Gile,

Talkron Huntsman

He was pleased that he was part of their demise. He believed in karma, that simple law of life, and he was the karma maker, for the human race. He smiled at the easy word, which he had learned from Earth. Karma: cause and effect. Gile leaned against the wall. He looked into the sensors. The Hallowmen were getting closer. He could almost smell their stinking biological bodies. How they stank, he thought to himself. He wondered if that was why he hated them so much. Was it the smell, of the human body, which gave him this hatred? It had to be something, and obviously, it had to be something like smell, as that was all the real difference there was. On the other hand, perhaps it was that they bred all over the place. Maybe that was it. They bred and had those baby things, just as rats did. Maybe the humans were just overgrown rats. He hated them both, so much. Gile could see them now, through the stone ruins, of the old-quarter. He had heard that the old humans had loved this part, of their great so-called city. It was said to have been tens of thousands of years old. He loved using it for target shooting, many years ago. He just loved to destroy anything, which the biological units were reputed to like. That kind of destruction just gave him simple pleasure. It was something to look back on, and smile about. E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 856 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Corduke Hallowman Jones had seen action, in both Earth and Maluka. He was one of the fortunates, as others referred to them. He went into battle, and it all just went right for him. Jones wondered if there wasn’t some external life, sitting on his shoulder, helping him through the battles, second by second.

Corduke Hallowman Jones

Gile heard a noise. He turned off expelling his air. He looked at the sensor. There were three biological units, to his left, in front of the collapsed building. They were getting close to his side of the street. He slowly raised his rifle. His armor made a squeak, and he froze. He waited. Overhead, he saw two clouds, and a glint, from something. He looked in his visor. It was too far away to detect him, and

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 857 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

was out in space. Probably it was a ship; belonging to these overgrown rats. Gile could feel his temperature rising, as his data cooling system was working overtime, cooling his insides, while not allowing the heat to expel. Jones looked at his heat sensors, the only way to observe these machines, other than by sight. The satellites up there were still too recent, to be able to ascertain fixtures against mobile units. Give it three more days, and the whole planet would be mapped. Then; anything that moved, would be registered, and monitored. Until then, they were alone on the ground. There was that movement, again. He motioned for his comrades to be careful, as there was something, on the other side of the building. Gile had worked his way, around to a fallen structure, and lay low and waited. His suit was getting hot, but it would cool soon. As soon as his weapon discharged, his machine would start expelling heat, and go into a massive cooling mode. There they were; the three of them. He didn’t wait. It was getting too hot. He jumped from his position. He let loose four volleys. He didn’t aim them, as he just knew where they were going to go, and they did. The first blew away half the suit of the Hallowman, on the left. The one of the right got his legs shot out, and then his head blew off. Jones let lose three shot and fell to his right, as a volley just missed his visor. He could have sworn that he heard the air vaporize, as the shot went past.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 858 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He looked over at his comrades, and saw their blood, body parts and armor scattered. He swallowed. He replayed the image of what they had all just witnessed. He was able to get recordings, from his fallen Hallowmen, all ship-monitored. There: he saw it. It was a monster of a Talkron machine. “Jimmy” Jones whispered. “Are you there?” “Yes, boss.” It was his communications specialist, their fourth member. He was well behind. “What kind of beast of a machine, is that?” “Nothing that I would want in my dreams, boss. It is huge. Look at the way it wields that canon. That is enough, to bring down an interceptor.” “Yes. It is big. You had better call down a squad, of interceptors, as this boy has been making his way into our cordon, and if you look at the direction he is heading, by night he will be at our command HQ. We had better nail this one. Send all the data back, aloft, and make sure Ground HQ knows about him, too.” “Got that, boss.” There was a ten-second wait. “Boss, help is coming, but you are going to have to draw him out, I am told.” Jones looked back to the second street and raised his hands to Jimmy, as is to ask, how was he going to do that? Gile was feeling better. His heat balance was fine now. He looked through the rubble, into which he had fallen. He could see the body parts, of the Hallowmen. He felt good. Their death pleased him.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 859 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He couldn’t find the third, however. He must still be out there. He waited. Jones also waited. He wondered why the machine wasn’t coming out. Gile had to turn off his heat discharging again. “Damn, you, rat lover.” He called to no one in particular. Jones heard that. “Listen to the machine hating life. You are life too, you know.” Gile thought that was unusual. “A rat talking. Amazing.” Jones didn’t know what to do, so he continued. “What are you going to do, once we run this planet of yours again, machine?” “Ha, you’ll not get it. Should it happen, by the time you get back, we’ll have taken Jilta and all your lady rats will be dead back there.” Jones smiled. “You been to Jilta?” “No, you blood sucking rat. I have been to Earth and Maluka. I know how you live.” “I have been there too, to both.” “Why do you do this, rat?” Jones thought for an answer. “Because it is right, right for life, right for all species, and it furthers: life-harmony in the universe. What about you?” Jones started to reposition himself. Gile was moving too. “Oh, I just like to kill you rats. It makes me feel nice.” With that, Commander Makile Gile threw his body out from a trench and had Jones in his sights.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 860 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He was about to shoot. Jones had his back turned. Then an idea entered his mind: Life-harmony of the universe. He wondered what that was, and what could it mean? He was aiming slowly; his hands were around the gun and the trigger. He recalled the different species, which he had exterminated, even the rats. He didn’t want to do this. He felt pain in his arm. He had to shoot. He wondered about the life, he had exterminated. He had a fleeting thought of what he was. He turned, and looked back. There were three interceptors. He looked at them. They were firing rockets and shooting thousands of rounds at him. They would be upon him in a flash. His whole body was aching to dive into a ditch. He slowly shook his head. He refused the implanted command. He wondered at the moisture in his eyes. This was new. He looked at the rockets. He understood. He opened his arms, holding his weapon wide. The rockets closed, and he held his hands rigidly out, his body defiant. Jones turned, and saw his adversary turn away from him, leaving a clear and easy wide shot for Jones. Jones aimed, and was about to pull the trigger when the Talkron’s body exploded and incinerated, into a million pieces. Jones ducked and crouched there, gawking. He didn’t know what had happened. He listened to one of the pilots, as he radioed down. “He had you in his sights for five seconds. He never took the shot.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 861 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Then he decided to turn. He threw his arms wide open, inviting us to bring about his end.” Jones stood, and thought about this enemy, and who he had been. Maybe Jones had been effectively fighting this one bioclone in at least three theaters of war, and maybe more, before that. Who knew? Jones walked to his fallen comrades, said a prayer on their behalf, thanked them, and wished them well. Others would come in, and collect their remains, incinerate them, and more prayers would happen back at their homes, in Santonia Galaxy. They were super heroes. Jones then walked over to, where his enemy had stood. Jones stood there now, on top of the rubble heap. He looked back, at where he had been crouching. He looked at the remains, of the machine. Its parts were all over the debris. He thought of this. The machine should have taken the clean shot. If he had, it would still be alive. Jones looked, at where the interceptors had come from. The enemy should have taken at least one shot at them, too. Possibly, he would have taken an interceptor out. The machine’s cannon was big enough. Jones searched and found its head, or parts of it. It was huge. He lifted it, and brought it back to where the machine had stood. There; Jones said a slow prayer, for the lost life of his enemy. There was life involved, and somehow, it had saved his own. Thank you, he thought, at the end of his prayer.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 862 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Still Jones wondered. Why didn’t the machine take the shot? Life-harmony of the universe, came the reply.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 863 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 21

UNDER MOUNT TALKRON

Yandra had been in these tunnels, for days. His men were getting nowhere. The tunnels of Mount Talkron were anything up to a hundred and seventy levels deep, up and down, and through different rock and substrata. Yandra had just finished his audience, with Hallowman Major Jones. It seemed that an idea had gone much further into the enemy, than firepower had. After the battle that Jones had won, other Talkron units seemed to also give up, or wanted to be destroyed. It was as though they wanted to die. Yandra wondered how much control the life units had, in those Talkron machines. This was the second week, in the tunnels. The Boguard engineers had been at the forefront. It was the Boguard Fronts, which had the greatest success. The battle was grinding, halting. The planet overall was certainly theirs, and resistance elsewhere to them didn’t exist anymore. However, they couldn’t deal with the station-cities. They kept on operating, and it wasn’t known what the station- cities were doing.

Ω

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 864 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yandra was now back aboard his flagship. He was having an audience, with his chiefs of staff. “I see we have several options,” he said. “I would like to hear your ideas.” One of his generals spoke. He was a Hallowman. “Sir, I believe my men would like to return to their homes. We have achieved what we came to do. I know we are not totally complete, but there is talk of returning, amongst our group.” Yandra nodded. “I understand. Your men are originally from Sequetus 3, and its colonized planets. The Boguard, I believe, are divided. Am I right?” He looked at a Lead Captain. “Yes sir. Our men and women would like to either return or stay. It is about an even count.” “Same here, sir,” added a Pleiadian general. Yandra looked around. “When we ventured here we selected our crews from those who would want to remain here in the future, as a colonial force. This galaxy has over a hundred planets that need re- colonizing, with both your species. I believe the Earth species should remain in Santonia Galaxy. I agree with the Cordukes on that point.” He looked around. “Does anyone have any ideas, on handling the station-ships?” He looked around again. He thought to the ships, and Man-o- Wars, on a general broadcast range: Any ideas of what to do about the station-ships?

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 865 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

There was a mental murmur. Then a single thought returned. Sir, the only solution again, is to use ideas, instead of just brute force. Our troops have taken the cities, and removed all the bioclones. However, we have not found a way to convert the warp drive compartments of the station-ships. These machines are different to the others, and to pre-empt your next thought; we can’t interfere using force, and we believe this might be the true home of the Talkron. There is something else being planned here by them. Yandra sat down. He looked at all his generals and fleet leaders. Do you mean that the Talkron are residing, outside of our space? We believe it could be, sir. We would also add, they may be outside of our time. Yandra knew what this meant. Even while he could defeat the enemy here and now, they could return, at any time they wanted, and alter the events that had occurred. They could alter the past of Commander Makile Gile, for example. That could totally turn the victory of the past few weeks. Yandra suspected the Talkron were likely at that; right now. Lead Captain Yandra. It was one of the Man-o- Wars. There have been instances, of our kind, and the Boguard, going through time. They returned. Yes, but some also perished, some made blunders, from which we almost lost the universe.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 866 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

This is an area, that the Talkron seem far more expert, than we are. Yandra stopped. He knew what they all were thinking. There was one, his father, the wild and radically unexplained phenomenon in the Santonia galaxy, with an equally as unexplained Man-o-War. Together their missions were now legend. Perhaps this next battle was theirs.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 867 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 22

DEAD ZONES

Sheril was sitting under her favorite large tree. To her right was Boni, and to his right was Megalin. She was still able to see down, to the river. The dead- zone had come up two more Ks. It seemed to have slowed, over the last month. Sheril hoped that was a significant sign. Boni was sitting by his tree. She glanced at him. He had grown physically, the past many months, and how grown in his ability to communicate with other life forms. She wondered if there were more new people, who could do this with other species, arriving on the planet. Maybe Boni was one of them, she thought. Boni looked over and smiled. He was young but had an all-knowing look, thought Sheril. He seemed to be feeling his mind, into the life source of the tree. He smiled as he spoke. “The trees have several spirits each, Miss. Each tree, has a mind. However, the strongest mind is the group mind, which they all seem to be willing to share. They have a mind for all of them Miss, and then, there is a mind for the whole mountain range, and then there is another mind for the whole of the Amazon. You only have to look and see.” Sheril closed her eyes and tried to look.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 868 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Boni laughed. “Miss, that is fine, but the mind isn’t in you, it is in them. Look at them, see what they are; communicate with them, and insist they communicate back to you. They will, you know; if you insist.”

The trees had their own minds,

the groves had higher minds,

the forests, and so on.

Boni smiled. “I heard one answer you, Miss. Congratulations.” Sheril laughed. She felt an answer too. “What do I do, now?” she asked. “Tell it, to tell you, what happened.” Sheril thought out this to her tree, and smiled. “It answered, and it also said that it liked me.”

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 869 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Boni laughed. “Yes. I heard that, Miss. I think your tree is excited, to speak with you.” He giggled. Some leaves seemed to slowly wave down back and forth in the wind. A leaf landed on Sheril‘s knee. Sheril looked at Boni. He nodded and smiled. “A present.” A small nut fell to the ground on Sheril’s right. She looked up. There were no animals above her. “Thank you, Mister Tree.” She held the nut in her palm, and felt warm and appreciated. She heard the response. She looked at Boni. “I am communicating with a single tree. Correct?” “Yes, Miss.” “How do I know which I am conversing with, the tree, the grove, mountain of trees, or the whole forest?” Boni looked around, and over to the valley, and then at Megalin. He then looked at Sheril. “Life doesn’t follow physical universe laws. The physical universe follows life’s laws. Don’t expect of life, that which you expect of life’s creation; the world out there.” He could see that Sheril was confused. He continued. “The life of the Amazon is like Megalin’s body.” He could see they were still confused. Megalin gave Boni a silly look, and said, “You always do that, and I can’t understand you.” Boni apologized and continued. “Your body has life all through it. You are the driver of the body, like the pilot of the interceptor, we see come down here, sometimes. He is flying the craft. You control what

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 870 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

you want the body to do. However, there is more life than you are, and more minds in your body. You don’t think of beating your heart. There is a separate mind for that. You can communicate with it though. There is also a mind for all the body parts of one area, such as a leg or arm. It answers for all the bone, muscles, and cartilage. An arm will answer, if you tell it to talk back to you. Normally no one listens to it, so it doesn’t talk, unless hurt.” Sheril nodded and motioned for Megalin to please remain quiet for a moment longer. “Then, the forest is like a limb, and a grove is like a muscle, and something out there for the whole Amazon basin is like me?” Bono smiled. “Something, like that. The difference is that you are mobile, and it isn’t.”

Ω

Sheril looked out, from the village. She had become an avid tree listener. She learned about the pain. She learned of the loss of life, and how it scared the trees. The trees communicated to each of themselves, and to their neighbors, as the dead-zone encroached. The trees also communicated to the animals, to those that would listen. Sheril noticed that animals, which should be enemies, were now cohabitating the same space. There was no room, for a greater separation of the species.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 871 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The big cats, walked amongst the people, and the great snakes, slithered across the front of their huts. The villages were now living closer together, and almost one village per mountain. There was no doubt, that the mountains couldn’t sustain this for much longer. Many villagers had already come to Sheril, asking when it would end. She honestly didn’t know, but reiterated that there were other worlds in the same condition, and that the solution had to be coming; soon.

Ω

Master Templar Lorde Tubin had formerly accepted full control of the House of Torren, and Temple. As his first order, he wanted nothing to change that was working. This immediately put the Cordellos, as a group, at ease. He had already met with the head of the Hallowmen, and the head of the Cordukes. The three most powerful Cordukes were with him, again this day. Lorde Tubin, as he preferred to be called, moved slowly about the room, looking out. “That new station-ship, which we found last month, just outside our system, seems to be impregnable. Can any of you think of a reason as to why it is there?” The most powerful Corduke, named Wayne Thomas, had ideas. “It is there, to supernova, if we

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 872 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

succeed in conquering the Triangulum Galaxy. I am convinced. Clearly, it also has to do with the dead- zones, as they encroach out from our oceans. We had to evacuate another region yesterday, and there will be two more, ready to pull out, in three weeks. The encroachment is accelerating. In six years at this rate, Jilta will be dead.” Tubin nodded. “Are there any suggestions?” The next most senior Corduke spoke. “I believe we should tow it; to the most outer reaches of space, and start now.” One of the Cordello’s present shook his head. “Under conventional drives, it won’t work, and would take decades to remove from just our system. None of the free-craft, or converted craft, will touch it. The word is; that it is far too dangerous for them. It will take too long to move conventionally, and we don’t know if moving it will set its warp drives off, and the city supernova in space, sucking Jilta in with it.” It seemed that everyone agreed. The best solution so far, was to do nothing. Tubin looked around. He wondered where his father was now.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 873 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 23

STATION SHIPS

Amanda? Yes, Captain I am outside this thing still, in a future, between the eighth and ninth frame of the physical universe time-pulse. I am almost a third of a second, ahead of you. Do you still have me? Yes, Captain. Byron too? No, Captain. Something has gone wrong with Aki’s perception and Byron can’t pick you up. Jaron thought back to Aki, and got her in his mind, and smiled. Amanda, I can see him. Byron too. Jaron received a picture of her smiling face. He was gradually making his way, along the outside of the station-ship. There was an entry ahead. He slipped his hand, inside the crevice. He looked out. It was eerie that there was no space. He felt a shard of fear pass through him. His hand felt the side of the doorway. His mind went into its lock. He could feel its molecules; there were real physical agreements there.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 874 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Treadmore, station-ship,

eight pulses into the future.

He could feel his own body, its heart beating. He was aware of the skin on his face, his suit rubbing up against his nerve endings. The physical universe that he had brought with him, his body and his suit, were telling him that he didn’t belong. There was a slight numbness of being. He checked his agreement around the little piece of now, which he had brought with him. He checked

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 875 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

his golden cap. It was working perfectly, enhancing his ability, putting it in harmony with the broadmatter either side him. He could almost feel the coagulated broadmatter, holding his suit and body together, in this realm of…. He didn’t have a name for it. It wasn’t nothing, as it was not, not there. He looked at the station-ship, and then his suit and visor. He could see the condensation on his faceplate. His breathing was rhythmical. He expected that what he was looking at here was a micro universe, his own universe, something that was simply out of harmony with the physical universe, but having its own present time, and its own broadmatter. He felt its time, and recognized he had his own time-pulse, and it was out of synchronization with the time pulse of the physical universe. He looked around and tried to discern how far the broadmatter reached away from the station-ship. It was only a few molecules thick, with broadmatter encrusted around the outside of that thickness. It contained their universe, and allowed it to pulse independently of the physical universe. He looked at his own suit. It was separate. He had his own universe, and the city had its. Where they joined, they had a mutual agreement. All his thoughts and analytical computations were being transmitted. The other three absorbed, and were silent, but to that degree, they were also now part of Jaron’s micro universe.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 876 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Akeala took some of her attention away from her father, for an instant, and looked at her body, and it was more ethereal, less real. As she went into more agreement, with her father’s perceptions, her own perception grew less. Akeala got a tweak from Byron, to stay on course, and not wander. Stay with her father. This is why they were here, drifting through all those eons, to be here now. Jaron smiled as he felt his daughter return to his awareness. He also wondered who might be inside the ship, and scanned the station-ship. He couldn’t find any conscious entity, though he found the warp drive compartments. He could see through the ship, make it translucent to his vision, in his mind. He swallowed as he saw the pain. He actually saw pain. It ran visually in streaks, pulsing out from the warp drive compartments. He wondered if the drives were leaking. Next he felt his way through the control centers. He saw the name on the door, Treadmore. The door opened and closed. There was no egress of air. His instruments showed there was breathable oxygen inside. He kept his helmet on. I’m going to the control center. I don’t perceive anyone else here. However, there are warp drive compartments, and they seem awfully intense. I am feeling into them, and I am receiving heavy reactions back.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 877 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron arrived at the control center. It was as he thought. It was active, and working. He thought to the ship, but was careful, not to activate any concern. He wanted to see if the ship itself was alive, or under the control of some other being, somewhere. He thought to the others: It isn’t alive, as such. It is under an external control. I have not worked out what or where, or even when. It has its own imbued life, from another life, but that is all. I can’t discern from who, or where; only that they are not here. He scanned the controls. He left them, as they were all preset. He was sure they were preset to Earth. I am going to the warp drive compartments. When he arrived, the doors were glowing red. He swallowed. This was a manifestation of pain, and pain indicated loss. They could be about to lose the station-ship. If the station-ship supernovas, out here in the future, the planet will be gone in two seconds. It will implode in the future of the physical universe, and pull Earth back in; on itself. He tried to feel inside the warp drive compartments. They were getting fuller and fuller. They were too full, and bursting with pain. The compartments are set to blow. I can feel their links to other similar ships in other systems, other galaxies. They are drawing in life from the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 878 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

planets, over which they are stationed. This isn’t just a station-ship, sucking in life from the other side of the physical universe. This is drawing life out, from the physical universe as well, in the future, to force the station-ship to supernova. You have two, each and opposite forces, like a huge standing wave of life coming in from two sources, but nowhere for it to go. All the ships are set, like a chain reaction, to ignite the galaxy, along with other nearby galaxies, in a life-fusion reaction of supernova after supernova. Jaron felt himself running his attention through the molecules of the ship. He swallowed, and felt the first stage of fear. The ships in the different galaxies in this time frame are all connected together, so that when one goes, the others go. They are drawing life in, from the physical universe, at such a rate, that when all these blow, and supernova, they are meant to explode throughout the galaxies, with such impact, that the galaxies will feel the effect. Implode the galaxy Papa? Yes, Daughter. The galaxy only exists; where there is life, to observe it, even through monitors. It exists nowhere else. These are stationed over all the main life bearing centers. When they go, all life will be swept into the supernovas, and the galaxies are meant to vanish in, with them. Akeala asked if this was the same in the other galaxies. Jaron looked around. They are definitely

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 879 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

situated and coordinated in Andromeda, the Triangulum Galaxy and the other dwarf galaxies of our Local Group. They will all go. I don’t know if these ships are outside the Local Group of not. Papa, what happens if all these galaxies go, what then? Jaron felt and put his attention out many years, to well outside the Santonia Galaxy. He received the answer. The warp drive ships will supernova, all of them. They will overreact to the overloaded pulse of pain that will shoot out across the galaxies. The physical universe reality will tear, and start to implode. Its creation will be doubted by life in other distant galaxies, and its invincibility will start to erode. After that, it will fade, and likely it will cease to be. Papa, wait; we are going to get you, right Byron? No, Captain. That is negative. Akeala looked around the ship. Byron, I am the Captain. Byron laughed. Yes, but I am the ship. You are not going in there. Captain Jaron is doing now exactly, what he was selected and trained to do, eons ago. Your job is to do, what you were trained for. Jaron thought back, I am? Byron half laughed. Please Captain Jaron, just do what you are trained for. Amanda? Thought Jaron.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 880 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Sorry, Captain. You and that ship are out of my league; now. There is only one higher than I am. Time is growing short, Amanda, Jaron thought. I can feel them all growing, to a point of no return. They are going to explode. Jaron looked into the future. Do you see it, Amanda? There is almost no time. They have already gone. It has already exploded. Time has run out, in the future, not far off. I am going to try to do something. Let me go, you stupid ship. Parrots attack the ship. Kuro, do something. There was no response, accept for the fluttering of feathers, and a mad black blur. Amanda thought out: I am going in. My turn Byron. Byron thought back: Good decision. Help him do what he is trained to do. This is your moment now, Amanda. This is your redemption, as he promised you. “What do you mean, you stupid ship? How can you know?” Aki, he knows. Byron, meld with me. Aki, give me your mind, now. Akeala couldn’t resist the command. I am moving into the future. I need to tether myself mentally to you Byron, and more importantly, to you, Aki. You stay there, and Byron, we’ll do, what we always knew we were going to do. Amanda began to move,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 881 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Bryon acknowledged. I know, you can and will do it. It is your final destiny, Amanda. Nothing is totally certain, so good luck. Amanda vanished from view. She counted the images of the universes, as it pulsed. There was one. Then another pulsed, a third, and more until, she stopped in the eighth pulse. She looked down and the Earth was barren. She stepped into the next frame and the Earth was bountiful. She stepped back and edged over, in between the universal pulses. She wondered how Jaron did it. It was far more difficult, than she had imagined. She felt him, pulling her. She could see him now, and shared the image with Akeala, and Byron. I am moving over, and she was by her captain’s side. I am here, Captain. Jaron smiled, as he saw her beautiful flickering light, and let the others see her, too. I know what we are all going to do, and I know what will happen to you, Captain. So do I, Amanda. You, too. Amanda looked back at her ship that she was now exterior to. I’ll miss it. Jaron looked at his body. I’ll miss it, too. I’ll miss you, Aki, my sweet daughter. I love you. Akeala started to scream, as she saw what the intention was. Byron was ready, and he said, in plain Standard Galactic. “Akeala, this is why he trained. Amanda,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 882 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

too. Me, also. You are trained, to be here, for this instant. You have come down the track of time, for this one instant, to correct what went terribly wrong, in the past, that is about to happen. now. The life in all those station-ships, are going to be set free. There is only one way. Your Father needs to be the conduit, to let out the trapped life. He is the key. Rather than allow it to be a supernova, Amanda is going to conduit all that pent up power, hate and anger, back into the main body of life, outside of the physical universe. It will quell the pain. The physical universe will remain intact. I’ll remain here. I am around Earth, in the physical universe, to make sure that when all that life leaves, it doesn’t leave with the physical universe in tow. I am, in turn, connected to thousands of others, like me, in a different galaxies and universes again, to where your Father came from, all those eons ago. He has threaded his way through this universe, to this point now. It is where you too, come from, Aki. You are his other part, and it is you, who is the one who will be with him, after he is gone.” Akeala was wiping her eyes. I think I understand, but he will be gone. There must be another way. Byron also understood. A great Earth human being once said that life is suffering. You’ll suffer Aki, but the trillions of others who will live will suffer less. Life isn’t a right, in the physical universe, Aki.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 883 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

It is a privilege. It has been my privilege to know you, and to know the Captain, and Amanda. Akeala looked sideways. You aren’t going? I will, once this is done, but this ship, will remain, as a ship, yours. Akeala started to get the images of what was happening in the future. It was getting hotter. Jaron was putting his mind into the station-ship’s warp drives, it was searing agony, ripping at his body’s nerve endings, shorting them out, his body was frying, and the life was leaving. His golden cap was transmitting huge amounts of pain from the drives compartments to the physical universe, bypassing his body as much as it could. Amanda was doing what she could, to breach the gap of realities, of where the life was, its pain, and to where it was going. Akeala held her hand to her mouth. Tears began to form, in her eyes. She could sense her brother, Yandra, there, and her other brother Tubin, was present, too. She held strong, and sent out the link. She needed their support. They sent the links to others, spreading out the pain.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 884 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jaron inside the station-ship

Jaron allowed the life to flow through him, along him, and it hurt him as it passed, for it mistook him for its enemy, which had entrapped it. He knew that this was going to happen. Finally, the life of the station-ship had departed, and then the next linked station-ship went through. Amanda was handling the overload, and she was linked, to Byron. Amanda saw her ship’s metal body explode, as the fifth station city of life flowed through her. After the twentieth station-ship was emptied of life, Byron was beginning to glow translucently. Akeala was concerned for her animals. Next, another ship of life went through, and the power surges were lost to another place, which she didn’t understand. This continued for hours, and eventually, Byron began to become more solid. He was cooling. E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 885 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Akeala looked around her. She stood and looked at the controls. They were returning to normal. She looked at the Earth, and the area below registered as the edge of the zone. It was receding, slightly. The zone was getting smaller. The danger had gone. Natural life was returning. Akeala looked around. The links to the other station-ships and cities were fading. Papa, she called out in her mind. Papa, where are you? She called many times, but there was no reply. She fell on her knees. Aunt Amy, she cried, he has gone too, like you and Mama. No one heard her. No one replied. She wept, and was alone. She cried, and her tears splashed on the floor.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 886 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 24

E P I L O G U E

Akeala had the controls of Byron working again. There was no one to talk to. She had suffered another loss, but her furry friend, Kuro was there to nudge her, to let her know that she too, knew what it was like to lose friends. She licked the salty tears away from Akeala’s hands, once again. They still had each other. Kuro’s companionship was important at that moment, for Akeala. She even laughed, as both of her parrots landed on her shoulders. Perhaps she wasn’t so alone, and life overall understood.

Ω

After the second day, Akeala had found the remains of the Man-o-War ship of Amanda. It was a burned out hulk, lying in a moon crater. Outside of it was Jaron’s destroyed helmet. There was nothing in there of value, and nothing worth preserving. Akeala walked around the site, suited up, for some time, wondering how the artifacts arrived. Akeala reasoned that half a second after they were destroyed, and the last station-ship of life had coursed through the pair of them, their remains would have appeared in the present. Here they were.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 887 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

It was her second visit to the site now. She just stood there, until her body gave way and she started heaving, and crying of the hurt that she was now carrying.

Death of an icon

On the third week after the end, as Akeala called it, her brother, Lorde Tubin, the Master Templar of the House of Torren, arrived. Even with all his training, he found this was the hardest loss to experience. He stood there, with his helmet on, not being able to wipe away his tears. He looked up, and could see the huge media ensemble above him, which seemed to go, wherever he went. He looked across, at his sister’s ship. He wanted to be alone, at this moment, and stood there; looking at the site. The site had been declared sacred. Nothing would be removed.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 888 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ω

The hulks of the station-ships and cities fell apart, through all the galaxies, into decaying orbits, and collapsed onto nearby planets and moons, which they had been designed to destroy. They had no life holding them anymore. The dead-zones began to recover everywhere, with small leaves appearing in the once dead trees; animals, birds, fish and insects were now able to cross over into the dead-zones. Thus was brought about a regeneration of living.

Ω

The life-force that was Jaron, Goren Torren, Phi Torel, and many other personas, on his search to prevent what was otherwise destined to happen, ended up back on his own home planet Nuvon, as did its caretaking friend and co-missionaire, named Byron. Byron having completed his mission, as an accompanying life-force, all those thirteen thousand years ago, when it was first learned on Nuvon, that the calamity was otherwise unavoidable, left the ship, on which Jaron, Akeala and he had travelled to on Earth.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 889 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Nuvon, with the Santonia Galaxy

behind, in the sky.

Byron looked out at the Milky Way, from the balcony of their small planet’s premises. “Do you think she will remember, and return?” Jaron looked over and smiled. “She will. We always do. She will remember. She will come back, one day.”

Ω

Yandra returned to his home Santonia Galaxy. The threat had passed. The Talkron ceased to exist. There was no one left, to oppose the fleet. The Boguard and the Pleiadians mostly stayed in Triangulum, to rebuild their previously destroyed civilizations.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 890 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yandra looked up from the Amazon surface, with his arm linked to his mother, Sheril. She hugged him. She understood Jaron now, finally, as she looked towards the stars. She understood who he was, his destiny. They didn’t say anything. The Boguard honored Jaron, unlike any other in their history. The House of Torren honored Jaron, as did planets individually, be they Torrenists or not.

Ω

Sheril passed onto Boni the caretaking of the Amazon. Boni took the task of understanding the world. Earth was given the status of a rehabilitation planet. Sheril was given, the task of chronicling: what had happened. It was to go into the Boguard archives. The names, Goren Torren, and then Jaron of the Amazon, would be accorded the greatness, which they deserved. As a witness, that this was in fact, done, this book is now complete; and so, ends the full recorded history of the Sequetus Series, and all who lived in it; it has now come to an end.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 891 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

End of

Galaxy End of the Sequetus Series

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 892 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

CHAPTER 7

GLOSSARY, DEFINITIONS, HISTORICAL NOTES

AND BACKGROUND DATA

Editorial note: When the term Terrestrial appears beside a word or term, of historical note, this means that it’s a terrestrial word, from Sequetus 3 – Earth – and the definition is a terrestrial definition, or historical note. It isn’t a fictional term or definition.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 893 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Aaron: Original name of the race on Yaltipia, otherwise known as Boguard outside the Pleiades, and the Galaxy. On Yaltipia the original race was called the Aaron. They went into the Galaxy known as the Boguard. Technically anyone can evolve to become a Boguard through their training programs and can join and become Boguard. However, to be Aaron, one needs to be born on Yaltipia within the Aaron race. Templar miniseries

Aaron Library: An underground library of 17 levels, that measure about a k wide in each direction. In Earth terms, it covers 17 square kilometers of library floor space. Templar miniseries

Academia: 1. A college of high learning, tertiary education, offering doctorates. 2. (Plural – academias) The institutions of the highest places of learning in the Federation. Source, Jiltanian after the gardener Academos who used to tend the gods in by making their gardens a paradise. New-Earth miniseries

Acran: Pleiadian for what translates into Devout Coordinator for On Planet Operations. This began in Sequetus 3. Acran Anderson was the first of many Acrans to follow. New-Earth miniseries

Acron Field: This is one of several kinds of fields that hold free- air inside military craft. The Acron Field is generated around a ship and prevents the free-air from leaving, while permitting large sold objects to enter and leave the ship. This effect is achieved by a magnetic force That’s held as a ridge at the perimeter. The magnetic force is strongest nearest the center of the source of the field. Through unifying fields gravitational, electrical and so on, the magnetic fields can be made denser, further out from specified epicenters. They then prevent free-air molecules passing; while at the same time allow more solid masses and objects to pass. Named after its inventor, Luis Acron of Tilk. New-Earth miniseries

Admiration Particles: Life can emit particles that draw on properties of the physical universe. What life admires, it draws closer. The more it admires, the greater the closeness. Gravity is possibly such a particle of admiration. Albert Einstein referred to gravity as affinity. Earth Syndrome miniseries.

Afterburners: When dumping fuel, out through the exhaust system, and igniting it, within the system, the continual explosion of such afterburning, adds speed to the craft. New-Earth miniseries

Aftersun: 1. When a ship has a permanent station orbiting a planet, the period when the ship goes into the shadow of the planet is called aftersun. 2. It simulates night. 3. The shifts aboard Federation military craft are divided into two per Standard Day. The first is called Foresun while the later Aftersun. There is no night aboard military craft. New-Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 894 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Agelay: Pronounced a-ja-lei. The capital city of the southern continent of Kanut of Palbo. Population 12 million. Juggernaut miniseries

Agent: 1. Two levels below independent. Starting at the top is: Independent, Junior Independent, Agent, and Agent Junior Grade. New-Earth miniseries

Akeala: 1. See Albine below. Same person. Daughter of Jaron and Anki. Templar Series. 2. She becomes a central figure in the freeing of Earth and the Federation from the effects of the Talkron. She has many of her father’s properties. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Albine: Daughter of Jaron and Anki. She is the granddaughter, of the Master Templar. Her grandmother was a long-lifer, but died before she was born. She had her name changed to Akeala, upon the advice of her protector, to avoid being killed, like her two brothers. Juggernaut miniseries

Alfrash: The planet that was first colonized by the Pleiadians. It has 1.04 Standard Gravity, was lush with forests, had deserts, polar ice, temperate and tropical rain forests. A super solar flare, itself a series of 12 flares, took out the colony over a sixty-year period. There were enough suspicious circumstances, to indicate that the flare(s) may not have been completely natural. Over ninety percent died, during those sixty years. The planet was abandoned, and at vast effort, it was engineered, to remove all evidence of previous occupation. New-Earth miniseries

Algamm Grass: Found on the edge of deserts, around Sandrist. It’s high in B vitamins and sought after, as a natural product, harvested and exported. It’s said that a short-lifer could become a long-lifer, by eating Algamm grass from birth, with every meal. This was never tested. Juggernaut miniseries

Algon Sea: The nearest sea to Jilta PPC, measuring 765 Ks across, at the widest point. New-Earth miniseries

Allied Council of Free Sectors: The name given to the first authority, controlling the new Federation Alliance. It came from the remnants of the Federation, after the Battle of Sequetus 3, and consisted of the military heads of all the known sectors, including Farsen, which was restored. It was the forerunner to The New Federation. New-Earth miniseries

Alliance, Federation: An alternative name for the Federation, after the Battle of Sequetus 3. New-Earth miniseries

Allied Council of Jilta: After the atomic war on Jilta the planet set up a temporary government called the Allied Council of Jilta. 2. After all the Royals had left their Federation planets; the planets no longer had their autocratic control. There were members of the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 895 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Federation military, as well as government, who tried to seize control of their own cities, countries and continents. Some seized atomic weapons. In the Federation, wars were starting to break out. On Jilta this culminated in an atomic war between three factions. After three years, and with almost all of Jilta PC and its sister cities completely wasted, the war ended. The government that took over was named the Allied Council of Jilta. This shouldn’t have happened and for several years after the Battle of Sequetus 3, Torren traveled to Jilta trying to stop the wars and the fighting. He was unsuccessful, and it continued to the almost total destruction of the former prosperous cities of Jilta. As the other planets became embroiled in similar wars Torren found he was just as ineffective, so he concentrated his efforts on Earth, and hoped that when he found who was behind what was happening on Earth, it would lead to the same solution for the rest of the Santonia Galaxy. New-Earth miniseries

Allied Imperial Federation: A fuller term for Federation Alliance. Allied Imperial Federation Forces. AIF, or AIFF all mean the same thing. New-Earth miniseries

All-play: A portable hand held recorder, that plays back a three dimensional hologram, of a pre-recorded event. The image is, about two hands high. Made by: State All Industries Maluka. Often used in Maluka to entrap subjects into telling more than they otherwise would. Recording on an all-play, is valid evidence in Maluka. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Alson: 1. A suburb in Jilta PC. 2. Alson, Academia, most prestigious tertiary Academia in all of Jilta. It teaches most degree doctorate courses and has forty five thousand students enrolled per year including full time, part time and by correspondence. New-Earth miniseries

Amanda: 1. The name taken and accepted by a Boguard Man-o- War, born BS 1013. Ceremony with Captain Bigow of Yaltipia, BS 1014. Crucial in the police action in Kantee against the Talkron. Juggernaut miniseries 2. She was subsequently captained by Jaron, and becomes his greatest advisor. She originates from beyond the physical universe, of the Angalian species, and would suggest she is still always there. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Amelia: 1. In 1642, Jaron meets Amelia Gustano of northern Italy. She is 38 years old at the time, daughter of Gustaf and Francesca Gunano. 2. A former lifetime of Amy of Rambus, but on Earth, during the Medieval period. Earth Syndrome miniseries.

Amy: The teenage daughter of a family of settlers on Rambus. She used to dream of finding out what was outside of Rambus. She became strong friends with Anki of Jilta. She was stranded off from Rambus after the planet was raided by pirates, and they killed her family and friends. On returning to her home planet and E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 896 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

experiencing the death of all she loved, and almost dying herself, she swore an oath that she was even the score. She was central in removing the pirates from Sleebo, and bringing down Brandon Mirac of Palbo. She earned the nickname, Goddess of War incarnate. Templar miniseries

Andromeda Galaxy: (Terrestrial) The Andromeda Galaxy is a spiral galaxy about 2.5 million light years from Earth. It gets its name from the constellation of Andromeda, which was named after the mythical princess

The galaxy has about the same mass as the Milky Way. It’s expected to collide with the Milky Way in 3.75 billion years. It can be seen with the naked eye from Earth on cloudless moonless nights. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Aneel, FAS Destroyer: The Aneel went through the portal with the Expeditionary task force BS 10, and never returned. Presumed destroyed. New-Earth miniseries

Angalian: The race of beings who aren’t native to the Santonia Galaxy. They inhabit the Man-o-Wars. They have been known to visit Sequetus 3 over the past five thousand years. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Anki: The teenage daughter of the master Templar of Jilta. Was shipwrecked on Rambus and saved by settlers there. She attended Academia Alson of Jilta. For former past lives of Anki see Anqi Storm and Vicra Starn, both separate lives at different times, but the same person. Templar miniseries. The woman, years later, who is the mother of Akeala, and Tubin, and married to Jaron. Anki’s mother was a long-lifer, Karine Malor - married to the Master Templar, a Cordello at the time, and died two years after Anki was born. Juggernaut miniseries.

Anqi Storm: 1. Malukan trooper, former resident of Sleebo. 2. Important in saving Sequetus 3. Daughter of Nobus Mas and Reqel Subar of Taronga PPC. Educated in biophysics in Anst Academia at Taronga, joined the Malukan Guards shortly after graduation. New-Earth miniseries

Antithesis: A direct contrast or opposition of person, action or idea. New-Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 897 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Aquel: A local length measure of stride from the planet Aqeliam. New-Earth miniseries

Aragon: Capital planetary city of Maluka, consisting of seventeen wards. Population 2 million, with three academia. Its age is 3,450 standard years, predating the Confederated Council of Planets. It is the headquarters of Trans Galactic Ship Corp. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Arano Moon: Lunar satellite of Maluka. It has been in orbit for two millennia. It’s hollow, and it has seventeen thousand inhabitants. Its center is tightly protected. Its diameter is three hundred and eighty kinopacs. Its standard gravity is 0.04 standard gravity, and its artificial operational means of gravity is centrifugal. It rotates three times a Malukan day. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Arenic Alps, Jilta: On the continent of Algorico, the Alps run through the center, and are on the opposite side of the planet to Jilta PC. New-Earth miniseries

Arganate: A plentiful translucent pale misty green non-precious stone That’s found on Jilta. The major quarries are in the northern hemisphere. The stone's properties are limestone based and calcium derived. Juggernaut miniseries

Arlon, Doctrains: Head of household staff of Residence of Jilta. Employer Goren Torren. Has a degree in Business Management from Academia Alson, Jilta. He moved with Goren Torren to Earth, and survived the Battle of Sequetus 3. On Earth he headed the Home of Goren Torren. He showed flair and became active with Boguard Letone in external affairs. He vanished after the FBI assault on Home, along with other Household Staff. Later he was found and did his part to bring about Intervention. After intervention he became a national USA celebrity on terrestrial television, made eleven movies, and married another member of his household. He returned to Jilta three times but remained as a resident of Earth. He had two long-life children. He died 498 BS a full supporter of the Temple movement. He was deemed a Minor Temple of Sequetus 3. See the definition of Temple. New-Earth miniseries

Armsman: Federation for Master at Arms, MAA. His prime purpose is to keep order, on a ship. New-Earth miniseries

Aron: A black puma in the Amazon, which befriends Sheril and which looks after the village children in return for being part of their group. The black puma is possibly a myth, and in this case Aron is likely only 90% black. Earth Syndrome Series

Arreal: The race, that after its migration, became known as the Pleiadians. It cohabited the same planet as the Aaron, in the Triangulum Galaxy, and like the Aaron, it had migrated out to over

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 898 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

a hundred planets through that galaxy. The races were attacked and they fled their planets. Both had natural abilities and were hunted down because of those abilities. Earth Syndrome Series

Arrival Day: The day of arrival of the First Fleet and its pioneers, to a new world, sponsored by the Templar movement, the anniversary of is celebrated as the Arrival Day each year. Templar miniseries

Ataran: City of Ataran, which housed the Boulan, the ruling class of the Aaron. Ataran had 110,000 people and was one of the oldest and biggest Aaron cities in Yaltipia. It was hydro powered by the cross currents of water flowing through the planet's crust. The city is at least 15 thousand years old. Templar miniseries

Auto-Credit: Similar to a credit card but instead of the credit being held at a bank, it’s held at one’s place of employment. Juggernaut miniseries

Auto-fecha: From auto-fetcher, (also a-fechaTM) an automatic computerized library vehicle device, which that when enabled with the correct code, leaves the study table, and brings the volume from the storage shelves, back to the intended user. They are the size of a shoebox, available in many modern libraries, in different models, colours and from many manufacturers. They were first developed on planet Peel. Juggernaut miniseries

Automatic beam: Simply means that weapons lock on target automatically and are fired by computer programs. The advantage is that they aren’t only accurate, but will continue well after the crew manning them is dead or incapacitated. New-Earth miniseries

Bacterol-bandages TM: Bandages with anti bacterial impregnated layers, which bring about fast healing. Made by Medicol Corp Inc. Jilta. Templar miniseries

Bailock: The name given to Jaron on Tors, by the local native, Garnow. The term became Jaron’s name there. It was local dialect for fast-god, due to the speed, which he descended from the sky. Juggernaut miniseries

Balgoss, Eroni: Base Commander of the Palboan outstation on Sleebo, pirate station. Aged 234 when killed in the fight for Mount Drapper. Templar miniseries

Ballard: Colloquial term for the rear end, of the native beast of burden of Jilta, a Kull. Source: Searfinders Index P 287. Used on many planets in the galaxy. 2. A peta-ballard means the prime part of the rear end of a kul, sometimes eaten. Templar miniseries

Baling: 1. The martial art of fighting with a two pac long thick stick made from the dense wood of the Baling tree of the Nalpan

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 899 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

province. 2. The name of a tree from Nalpan province. Their folklore says that this tree was intelligent and the chief god over Nalpan would come to think and get his best ideas whilst sitting under a Baling tree. 3. It’s said that a Baling stick has a mind of its own and after meditating with the stick, the stick and the fighter think as one, during a fight, in order to overcome a more powerful enemy. New-Earth miniseries

Bank: See The Imperial Federation Warp Drive Bank. Home planet Palbo. New-Earth miniseries

Banquast: A city of 60,000 on Yaltipia, made up of the warrior class of the Aaron. There were twenty-three warrior cities, of similar sizes. The city occupies six interconnected canyons. Templar miniseries

Barnell: The Boguard leader running the Boguard operation on Jilta, in 1,043 BS. Juggernaut miniseries

Battle Bar: 1. The saloon aboard a cruiser or destroyer, where alcohol can be served. 2. The name of the flight bar, on the FSS Nebulus. New-Earth miniseries

Battle of Sequetus 3. The: The Battle of Sequetus 3 is the official title for the battle between the Hymondian and Malukan forces, in the Sequetus Series, in 1990 local time. New-Earth miniseries

Battlemaster: The Malukan equivalent of a marshal and commander of a fleet, or armada. New-Earth miniseries

Battleroom: A temporary make shift war room, CIC – Combat Information Center – inside the palace. It’s 50 by 80 pacs, with seventy staff, troopers or Boguard. New-Earth miniseries

Battle of Six Worlds: A temporary make shift war room, CIC – Combat Information Center – inside the palace. It’s 50 by 80 pacs, with seventy staff, troopers or Boguard. New-Earth miniseries

Bauxite: (Terrestrial) The rock That’s mined, which when treated, is converted to aluminum. Templar miniseries

Bearing Harvest: A two week period on Sleebo, when it’s close to the sun and crops can be harvested. The whole of Sleebo get busy, harvesting the year’s crops, during this one two week period. Templar miniseries

Beel, Polton: Adventurer and freedom fighter from the far-Outer- Worlds. A short-lifer, aged 42 at the writing of Book 12 of the epic series. Juggernaut miniseries

Beeton: See Blu below. Juggernaut miniseries.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 900 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Belkron Blu: Corduke assumed name (real name Beeton Blu) of an operant working on the Palboan Sector. Trained in struck fighting in the out worlds of Jilta. He teamed up, with Amy of Rambus. Juggernaut Series.

Beran Sea: A sea in southern Palbo. The deepest part is 1,300 pacs. Juggernaut miniseries.

Bigow, Captain: Yaltipian (Boguard) captain, of the Man-o-War, Amanda. Born BS 789. He headed the mission onto Kantee (police action) to rescue the captured life-force Royals. Juggernaut miniseries.

Bilkars Profood: A Jiltanian protein bar, made and found, only on Jilta. Juggernaut miniseries

Biobots: The surgical automated worms, which are used to inspect, stitch and repair damaged tissue, during an operation. Biobots generally are 10-4 pacs in diameter. New-Earth miniseries

Bioclone: A humanoid robot, manufactured in the Triangulum Galaxy, though, run by a life force, not unlike its biological look- alike cousins, that it is modeled upon. The bioclone isn’t implanted, but rather is hardwired to destroy its biological counterparts, activated by a stimulus response mechanism. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Biotynes: The small insects bred and let loose onto a planet, that destroy human and mammal life by the pirates. The Warp Drive Bank sponsored the breeding and release of the insects themselves. Templar miniseries

Black Knight: (Terrestrial) This is the name dubbed, for the 15 ton satellite, that has been in space, on a polar orbit since before the first Sputnik.

Possibly, this object has been around Earth, for as long as 13,000 years. The Americans, and then the Russians, first observed it.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 901 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Each nation thought the other was responsible. The term Black Knight refers to a British attempt, back in the fifties, to put a satellite in orbit, but obviously this craft wasn’t theirs.

The photographs here are taken from later American missions, and the first photograph of the Black Knight was in the 1960’s. Earth Syndrome Miniseries

Blackheart: Pleiadian term, for meaning a person who lives against the better good of the community and self. A law breaker, a breaker of moral and ethical codes of behavior. One who creates turmoil, and one who does more harm than good around him. See also Clean Heart. New-Earth miniseries

Bloat: A A space life boat. Usually, 5 x 9 pacs in size and taking up to twelve passengers. Typically there was a minimum provision of one bloat per 25 crew, and one bloat for every 20 passengers. Juggernaut miniseries

Bloodwood, Jiltanian: A tree measuring up to 390 pacs tall, found in the temperate regions of Jilta. Its wood is a rich red, dense and sought after for making furniture on Jilta. Today the trees are numbered and protected. Each tree is plotted on a map. They can live to seven thousand standard years. There is an entire industry on Jilta dedicated to protecting these trees. They are the source of much of early Jiltanian folk lore. Each tree has resident within it hundreds and thousands of other species. Its aroma is known to keep away parasites and plagues. New-Earth miniseries

Blue Mountains: (Terrestrial) A mountain range on the east coast of Australia formed by the south Pacific continental plate and the Australian continent pressing up against each other. The mountains are blue due to the gaseous haze emitted by the foliage of eucalypt trees. Earth Syndrome Series

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 902 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Bluster: See Microwave bluster. New-Earth miniseries

Boguard: 1. Guard at the palace to protect of Lorde Hymondy III. 2. Race of bodyguard for the protection of Lorde Hymondy III. Their inception into the Federation region was about 550 standard years after Federation conquest. Origin of race unknown. Life expectancy indefinite. Run along military lines. Source of instruction: Lorde Hymondy III. They are known to speak many languages, are trained in martial arts, physics. No command links with IFFCo. Being a race the word Boguard is capitalized. New- Earth miniseries

Boguard Front: The assault corps of Boguard. They can be anything from 50 to 500 strong depending on the objective. The Boguard Captain Felice Karo made them famous when she defeated Palbo 1,000 years before. At that time there were up to twenty thousand Boguard Front that hit the planet at one time, carefully coordinated, taking out all communications systems in one unified moment. Templar Series

Boguard rank: The following is the Boguard field rank from highest to lowest:

Captain Guard Instructor Instructor Leader Boguard Boguard Novice (student) New-Earth miniseries

Boll, Pabs, Lieutenant: The on-planet fleet representative, during the Palboan raids, of the far-Outer-Worlds. Graduated Merida Academy, Palbo CC. Juggernaut miniseries

Bonding: 1. The official legal recognition that a male and female couple, had decided to cohabitate, as a single group, with the purpose of furthering the species through the production of children. The average BOND would last 36 years, with three offspring. Often re-bonding would occur later in life. 2. The ceremony accompanying the commitment, of between a Boguard Captain and his new Man-o-War. The bond is a lifetime agreement. Juggernaut miniseries

Boni: A seven year old boy, who can sense life, its pain, and has extreme empathy for life, over distance and time. Son of Fan and Gali of the Amazon. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Boulan: The Boulan number exactly 500. They reside in a small section of Ataran, of a square K in area. They are the ruling elite, of the Aaron and Boguard. Templar miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 903 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Bowing: Bowing means to allow the other person to assume the higher status. I also allows the other person, should they wish, to strike a blow unimpeded, as the person bowing has less defence. So bowing can mean: I trust you, and you are important to me. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Bridge briefing: 1. Bridge briefings are where missions are presented and discussed in a formal manner. They are recorded for future reference. Discussions of missions aren’t permitted outside of such briefings. All crew attend. 2. They are called bridge briefings, not because they happen on the bridge, because in larger craft they don’t, as the bridge can be too small for all crew. Only senior personnel present the bridge briefing usually from the bridge. New-Earth miniseries

Brijet Yaldon, Captain: 1. Female senior Boguard officer captaining the expeditionary forces fleet taking Captain Jaron to his objective mission. She was 283 years old at this time. It was her first command as an entire fleet command. Templar miniseries 2. Consulair Brijet became her title, after being admitted to the Boulan. 3. Brijet is the name of a fast bird (a sleek small bird of Yaltipia). Yaldon means esteemed or well regarded. Earth Syndrome Series.

Broadmatter Theory: Broadmatter is that matter That’s so small that current instruments can’t read it, but it acts similar to a sea supporting molecular-matter that floats within it. It transmits heat and ALL energy and in this way is very different from the concept of dark matter. Broadmatter makes up the bulk of the universe mass, and is the reason why the universe is expanding at an accelerated rate. Broadmatter ties in with space and time and without broadmatter there would be no space, no gravity and presumably no time. Without it all other matter would collectively condense. See Broadmatter theory Addendum at the end of Book Seven for more details. New-Earth miniseries

BS: 1. This indicates how many years since the Battle of Sequetus 3. 1038 BS means 1,038 Standard Years since the Battle of Sequetus 3. 2. A dating system, adopted through the galaxy since the Battle for Sequetus 3. New-Earth miniseries

Caff: 1. The place, where non-intoxicating beverages are served, aboard a vessel. New-Earth miniseries

Captain: 1. Middle rank in IFFCo. Usually In command of an interceptor squadron, a destroyer, or a fighter team. Below Lieutenant Commander in rank. 2. Highest field rank in the Boguard. New-Earth miniseries

Castano, Carole, Captain: Male Corduke Captain heading the Mission with Amy to find Jaron around Tors. Juggernaut Series

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 904 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Caraday, Bel: Son of Oralo Caraday of Jilta. Started in the Coproduce service when 18 years old. He is Commander of the Corduke Base and answerable to the Master Templar. Juggernaut miniseries

Carriers: 1. Short for non military ore carriers. They are generally made in space, and can be many kilometers long. They are under WD. The carriers connect up section after section (sometimes known as pods), and can be as many as four sections long. Often carrier-trains is used to express the long attached lengths of the carrier containers

2. Federation military carriers contain a compliment of between 100 to 800 fighters, and a total of onboard crew of 1,200 to 9,600. These ships pack a tight crew, have high morale. In the Federation of Jilta the word hive is used in slang to mean carrier, and darlt is often used for fighter. A darlt is an insect from Jiltanian mythology that when stirred would seek out its enemy anywhere to attack, even if it meant the insect itself died. The tradition of using this term goes back well before Federation of Jilta. New-Earth miniseries

Carriers, Ore Carriers: Unarmed Ships used to transport mining produce or spoil. While they are big they have a very small crew. New-Earth miniseries

Carvan: A city near two cross currents of water as well as geothermal power sources, and was one of four such citied devoted to manufacturing clean power for the other Aaron cities. Juggernaut miniseries

Castano, Carole: Corduke missionaire, 38 years old, short-lifer. From Jilta, and from parents, who were Templars. His father was a leading Cordello of Jilta. His rank was Captain. He was instrumental for saving Lorde Jaron stranded on Tors, saving Anki in Palbo, and becomes one of the most highly decorated Cordukes in his lifetime. Juggernaut miniseries

Cast-outs: The term given to those who are cast out into space unsuited. An illegal act, but practiced in some sectors, especially in remote mining areas.

Law systems turn a blind eye to the practice as most offences happen in return for illegal acts. That’s, when a person gets caught committing theft or murder, and there are no law enforcing officials around, often the local inhabitants, meet and pass sentence with cast-outing being the penalty. New-Earth miniseries

Cenon: Pronounced Che’non. 1. A planet in the Jiltanian out worlds where both Belkron Blu and Castano served. 2. Population 212 million. Agrarian economy, feudal by nature. Gravity 1.02, 45% water, three races. Juggernaut miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 905 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Centoria: A democratic rim sector of the galaxy, adjacent to Jilta. Centoria is the capital system, where there are two inhabited planets. Being adjacent to Earth, Centoria has the most number of temple buildings, secondly only to Jilta. Centoria is the closest system capital to Earth. New-Earth miniseries

Centrifugal Force: An apparent force that acts outward on a body, moving around a center, coming from the body’s inertia. A bucket on a rope, being whirled around one’s body is apparently pushed out, by centrifugal force. Juggernaut miniseries

Centrecom: 1. Either a life-force or a computer program that ran the Six Worlds. It was responsible for the depopulation of almost all the Santonia Galaxy at its time. It existed on the other side of the Portal, but tied to Earth. It was defeated by Goren Torren and the Boguard and the race known as the Pleiadians. New-Earth Series 2. A spiritual life form that had a pure intent, to help mankind, but had a, human-made computer program, at it was corrupted. Earth Syndrome miniseries.

Charlene Johnson: North American female living in New York, befriended by Commander Beel to assist in the Federation cause. Single 32 years old. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Charlton, Navia: Social anthropologist from Academia Alson, companion and associate in Sequetus 3 to Independent Goren Torren. Torren and Charlton both attended Academia Alson together studying, prior to Torren applying for his Independent’s Certificate in Jilta. They were married for three years during at this time. Upon the end of the Battle of Sequetus 3 Navia moved to Sequetus.

3. On Earth, she headed the Torren corporate empire of ACI. That corporation collapsed after a siege, by the terrestrial forces. She then took on a role gathering data and waited for the return of Torren, using the new corporation Acram. Upon intervention she continued on in Sequetus, and went back to her earlier profession of lecturing in anthropology until her retirement. She wrote 23 books while as a lecturer to universities in New York, London and Tokyo. She died 480 standard years after C Day. She never returned to see Jilta, maintaining that she wanted to retain good memories of her home. She never remarried, no children. See NEW FEDERATION for more data. 4. She is considered by the House of Torren to be one of the Temples (see definition of Temples) of Sequetus 3. New-Earth miniseries

Chrononaut: 1. One who can not only send attention back into, and forward into time, but one who can take himself there and change events around him. 2. (Terrestrial) Chrono from Greek, Khronos “time”. Naut fro, Greek nautes “sailor.” Chrononaut – One who sails through time. Earth Syndrome miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 906 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

City Security (C-S): 1. The body of armed civilian security personnel who are responsible for the peace of Jilta. 2. Police. Juggernaut Series

Civvies: (Terrestrial) Slang. Civilians. It also means civilian clothes, civilian life, as distinct to military. New-Earth miniseries

Clapboard: A computer pad upon which a flashscan is taken for identification verifying the user. The palm and three fingers must be present. New-Earth miniseries

Class A rocket: Non-explosive rocket. No warhead. New-Earth miniseries

Class B rocket: Non-explosive rocket. No warhead. New-Earth miniseries

Class C rocket: A non-atomic warhead, but packed with liquefied explosive gel. Designed to explode and send the burning gel to other areas to set those other areas alight. New-Earth miniseries

Class D rocket. The warhead is packed with explosive shells, so that when the war head explodes, it sends armor piercing unexploded shells through armor plate and they in turn explode, on the other side of armor plate. New-Earth miniseries

Class J rocket: J is the Juggernaut miniseries, containing atomics of various subclasses. New-Earth miniseries

Clean: The jargon term, used by Boguard Fronts, trained in the use of thought, to mean that the person was thinking the truth, and was not thinking a thought that was a threat to the mission. Unclean meant the person was thinking of deceit. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Clean Heart: Pleiadian term. A person who does more good for society and self than harm. A person who abides by the ethical and moral codes, and laws of society. See also Blackheart. New- Earth miniseries

Clerical Law: The Templar law as written by the Foundation Temple Goren Torren or as was ratified by the Sortet, during meetings of the ruling Cordellos. Templar miniseries

Clife: A long Federation military blade made from Magnopolop (a non metallic resilient compound) That’s worn in a sheath on every shocksuit. Clifes are either dress or combat style. Origin: from the days before Federation when the Royal race was planet bound, the clife was worn as an instrument for bonding of the earlier warrior clans. New-Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 907 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Cold Hype: Death that results from exposure to subzero temperatures in space, freezing of the limbs and body. New-Earth miniseries

Comm-tact: Trade name for a mass commercial visual communications system, and network. By Comm-Tact Industries, Jilta. New-Earth miniseries

Communications Center: A ship has a bridge. A Base has a Communication Center, which is the focus of all data going in and out. It can also be called a War Room, or a Combat Information Center, depending on the sector. New-Earth miniseries

Compu: ® The largest computer manufacturer in Crackess. Famed (or infamous) for its early invention – intelligent computers. After the Medallian Rebellion, the Compu executives were interned off-planet and CCP administrators placed inside the company. After this the company expanded, to become the largest interplanetary corporation in the Federation, with 1.7 million staff, in total. New-Earth miniseries

Compubanks: ® A collective name for viewscreens and computers, which plot a craft’s course and synchronize with Warp Drives. Manufactured by Compu Systems Interplanetary Inc. New-Earth miniseries

Compuboard: ® Often found in airports, these boards are an instant tally board showing craft departures and arrivals. In a space fleet they are used to show the tally of battle. Manufactured by Compu Systems Interplanetary Inc. New-Earth miniseries

Compudata: ® Abbreviation for Computer Data or non-intelligent computer information, or in slang: a dry-computer – meaning no intelligence. Manufactured by Compu Systems Interplanetary Inc. New-Earth miniseries

Compuscreens: ® Computer screens manufactured by Compu Systems Interplanetary Inc. New-Earth miniseries

Computers, Intelligent: 1. 5,550 Standard Galactic Years prior to Federation, Luis Medallia developed the first recorded fully mobile intelligent computer. At the time it was recorded as a brilliant technological marvel. Not only could it store and extrapolate data to logical conclusions, but also it had the ability to self perpetuate in other computers. The basis of all intelligent computers was the program create, coupled with the subprogram survive. 2. Intelligent computers led to the lowering of human-life to that of a servile status to computers. Without the intervention of neighboring galactic civilizations, and the Medallian Rebellion, these social degrading phenomena of humankind would have spread throughout the Santonia Galaxy. It’s speculated that without the Rebellion, within several millennium, all humanoid E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 908 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

races may have become extinct. The cost of the Medallian Rebellion was fifteen billion humanoid lives which were needed to defeat the intelligent machines. New-Earth miniseries

Confederacy: The loose governing body, democratic, that ruled the known outer galaxy prior to the conquest by the Federation. The full title is The Confederated Council of Planets. (CCP) It existed loosely for a hundred and twenty thousand years. The Federation defeated it in only decades defeated it. New-Earth miniseries

Confederacy: Full title - Confederated Council of Planets. (CCP) The loose and often extended term applied to the political attempt to bring the multitude of races, political systems et al together to end the warring of two hundred and thirty standard years in the Santonia Galaxy. The Confederacy failed at total unification and was succeeded by the Federation. New-Earth miniseries

Confederacy: Travel could take decades. As a result the Confederacy was never conquered by a single force or in agreement with itself. Often planets would get forgotten and cultures rediscovered over centuries. New-Earth miniseries

Conquest: The CCP was conquered by the Federation. While many planets simply didn’t fight and changed governorship of who was ruling them, some planets resisted and fought the Federation fleets and armies. During this fighting many government sections of cities were razed and government records lost. This was as much a cultural and economic set back as anything else. It was a loss of historical records. New-Earth miniseries

Consol Agent: The chief and legal representative of an intragalactic corporation to a planet. Similar in status to an ambassador. New-Earth miniseries

Control-fathers: Those who implemented the program to go back in time to avert the catastrophe that happened in the Galaxy, which originated in Sequetus 3. They in turn became to be known as the Masters on Six Worlds. New-Earth miniseries

Consulair: Boguard rank, reserved for Aaron born Boguard. It means the ruling executive council of the Boulan of Ataran, Yaltipia. Comes from local Aaron, Consul meaning advisor (Cons – advice, word or knowledge), and airus, meaning like. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Conversion, ship: Ship conversion refers to the changing of a Warp Drive system, of impelling life to power a ship, allowing life to join with the free-fleet, and willingly power a ship by free choice. The actual conversion is done by the life-forces, running the Boguard Man-o-War ships; imbuing life and freedom, into a

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 909 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

trapped life, which is under threat and duress, in the Warp Drive compartments of a Warp Drive Bank vessel. Earth Syndrome Series

Cordellos: The heads of the Houses, which represent the strongest Temples. There are Ten Cordellos, but that will later expand, to include more Minor Temples. There were originally five Cordellos, and they were presided over by the Great Sharman. There were another five Cordellos representing the Lessor Houses. This number has been increasing, as the Outer-Worlds becomes inhabited.

The word comes from old Standard Galactic cordelle, meaning small rope, indicating the knotted cord worn by the Cordellos. Templar miniseries

Cordukes: A network thirty years old at the writing of the fifth book, in Templar Series. It’s an intelligence gathering service, in employ of the Master Templar. It comes from the old Standard Galactic word, chorda, which comes from the confederacy term khorde, meaning string of a musical instrument. The connotation here, being that, if the Master Templar uses his Cordukes well, there will be harmony within the Temple. Juggernaut miniseries

Coreen Wind: The name given, to the cold wind of winter that comes off the mountains, of Tors. Before the Coreen Wind arrives, locals know to vacate the mountains. Juggernaut miniseries

Corrado City: Population of 700,000, and a Bank run city. On Jilta, north, northern hemisphere. Juggernaut miniseries

Council: 1. Another term for the Confederated Council of Planets, CCP. 2. Confederacy, CCP, Council, Confederated Council of Planets. New-Earth Series

Council of Order: A Boguard small body of persons whose task it was to decide what areas the Boguard should influence, and how, to bring about the goals of the Aaron. Templar Series

Crackess (Krackass): 1. Home of the Confederacy inspired uprisings against the Federation in the Hymondian Realm. This cost the lives of three million civilians and military. 2. Planet in the Federation that previously was relegated to backwaters after severe depression. It being a mining planet that also relied heavily on computer manufacture, it was depressed economically after the Medallian Rebellion. The planet later changed its name to Karakas. New-Earth Series

Crackess Uprisings: See Crackess. New-Earth miniseries

Cravana: Settlement in the Amazon of Sequetus 3. Population 420, at date 1,000 BS, and an outpost for the federation. It once had a population of 50,000 at date 500 BS. Templar miniseries E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 910 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Credit: 1. The galactic pronunciation of the credit is dahl. Its subunit is dihlo, and takes ten dihlos to a dahl, and ten strake to make a dihlo. For the sake of translation in this book we use the word credit. 2. Federation unit of currency, whereby tied to the Average Production Index. The average person earns about seven hundred credits (dahls) a week, but this varies upon the wealth of the planet. The value of credits remains constant and inflation and deflation are negligible with the Average Production Index system. 3. Material assets only rose and fell against the Average Production Index, not credits. New-Earth miniseries

Credit-Control-Office: A controlling office for credit liaison. Similar to a bank. on Sequetus 3. Juggernaut miniseries

Crosshair Nebula: The giant gas cloud in the Pleiades wherein the Karo Series lies. It’s a collection of dust particles that block out much view through the Pleiades. New-Earth miniseries

Cruiser: The largest Federation military strike ship. It’s half a Kinopac long of destructive power. It houses between forty to sixty interceptors with five escort fighters for each interceptor. Personnel number around 3,000 per ship. New-Earth miniseries

Cuneiform: A scrip, and wedged shape series of symbols, which number 1000 at the beginning of the language period, to 400 at the end, over three thousand years.

The period starts around 4000 BC to 1000 BC, and the language was still in use a thousand years later. There are around a million known cuneiform clay tablets. The tablets are fired clay, meaning that they were inscribed upon, and then fired to very hard resistant surfaces, so that today they are still easily read.

The language has been understood, and easily translated. The language started from picture grams. The word cuneiform means wedge shaped. Earth Syndrome Series

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 911 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Cydonia: (Terrestrial) From the Viking 1 Mars orbiter and released by NASA/JPL on July 25 1976. The photographs revealed, what appears to be a huge pyramid, and face, on the planet surface, sculptured into a mountain. There is also claimed, what appears to be the remnants of an old fortification. The findings have been controversial, as were follow up photos by the Surveyor craft. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Darlt: Jiltanian insect in early mythology. It had 12 legs, was the size of a finger. It was said to travel to any length to carry out its deadly sting. In the myth the darlt wouldn’t stir until stirred. A darlt hive was said to have killed the son of the god of Jilta, after its hive was brushed against, accidently during a hunting tournament. The insect was thus given intelligence by the god – Taurius, so that when Taurius destroyed the darlt species, the insect would realize why it was being destroyed. The term kill like a darlt means to not carelessly choose your target, but to seek one’s target intelligently, with purpose, and not fall back until the kill has been effected. New-Earth miniseries

Dates: 1. As of fifteen years after the Battle of Sequetus 3 all dates of history were recorded from that data, which on Sequetus 3 was known as 1989. So the year 2000 on Sequetus 3 was recorded as BS 11. BS standing for Battle of Sequetus 3. 2. All dates before the battle have a minus symbol before the number. BS -50 is a date 50 years before the battle, and would be 1939 local date. New-Earth Series

Decam: Slang term for decontamination when leaving an isolated world or system. New-Earth miniseries

Day-of-Foretelling: 1. From fifteen years after the Battle of Sequetus 3 all dates were recorded from that date, which on Sequetus 3 was known as 1989. So, the year 2000 on Sequetus 3 was recorded as BS 11. BS being the abbreviation of Battle of Sequetus 3. 2. All dates before the battle have a minus symbol before the number. BS -50 is a date 50 years before the battle, and would be 1939 local date. New-Earth miniseries

Defense Fleet Destroyers: This large class off Jiltanian destroyer bristles with guns, torpedoes, and single man defense-sortie-craft. New-Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 912 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Defense Marshal: The most senior Marshal ranking. See Marshal. New-Earth miniseries

Defense Sortie Craft (DSC): Craft likened to suicide capsules designed to singularly target an enemy incoming ship. The single crewman may, or might not evacuate, just prior to impact. The craft would come in at speeds low enough to not be deflected by the Acron or Proposhields. Once the warhead was (armed with electromagnetic pulse - EMP) within the shields the DSC detonated. The Acron and Proposhields would then be eliminated. The atmosphere around the launch bays leaves the ship and makes the launch and landing bays inoperative. Those caught in the bays die instantly as their bodies explode out due to zero external pressure. The effected launch bays remain down and open for hours, enabling enemy crews to board and fight their way into the ship. The EMP not only downs the shields, which enables external laser fire to be effective, but it disengages electronics, making electrical doors inoperative. The DSC is a very powerful weapon, but has almost no return rates for its single crews. Not used in the Battle of Sequetus 3. Crews often have some external reason why they volunteer. All crews are volunteers. They and their families are always subsequently highly honored and decorated. New-Earth miniseries

Delerum: A planet, seventeen light years from Earth. The home of the bone traders, that brought about the extinction of the great dinosaurs on Sequetus 3. New-Earth miniseries

Delopacs: Ten thousand pacs, 10 Ks. New-Earth miniseries

Destroyer: An IFFCo or Federation era military ship. It houses six interceptors and six fighters per interceptor. New-Earth miniseries

Dianne Smith: North American Caucasian woman living in New York, befriended by Commander Beel to assist in the Federation cause. Single 34 years old. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Director of Alerts: A trouble shooter for the Imperial Federation Warp Drive Bank. His job is to prevent trouble, and prevent it from escalating. He has broad sweeping powers. Juggernaut miniseries

Dispatchers: Staff – Boguard – who would deliver messages on behalf of Hymondy and ensure they are obeyed by the recipients. New-Earth miniseries

Dobel, Dagalt: Son of Haran Dobel, Governor General of Orbat, and Meleno Fagor. He is the head of Pleiadian security. Aged 256 years, trained in diplomacy, politics, and served ten years in the Pleiadian military. Earth Syndrome miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 913 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Dobel, Haran: Governor General of Orbat. 425 years old, succeeded by six children. Married once. Son of Gelan Dobel. Baronal Amalo. He was involved in the intervention of Sequetus 3, and became a personal friend of Hymondy III. Haran was a professional politician, since the age of one hundred and twenty years. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Dobel, Telanor: Daughter of Haran Dobel, and Meleno Fagor. Daughter of the Governor General of Orbat. She is two hundred and thirty years old, a graduate of three acadamias, married, with one son. Earth Syndrome miniseries.

Docks and Checks: The docking procedure used in space, and where the crew and ship are inspected per regulations. New-Earth miniseries

Do-gooder: A Talkron derogative term, seeped into the cultural psych of a planet, aimed at, and designed to degrade, those who might want to reform evils in society. Accusing a person of being a do-gooder is meant to deter a targeted person from bringing about social reform. Prevalent on Maluka. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Drysuit: “The helmet was similar to that of any aquanaut. Breathing tubes were connected to the suit through a series of cells, it was able to draw oxygen out of the water. The used air was expelled through the suit walls, which were of a molecular size small enough, being then absorbed by the water.” New-Earth miniseries

Duality: The universe can’t exist as singular events, items or happenings. It exists as dualities. Men and women are one such duality. New-Earth miniseries

Duchy: Duchies, may have up to a thousand stars of which only a few may have habitable planets. A sector has 1001 stars or more. There are two Duchies in the federation – Kalanon and Celtronia. New-Earth miniseries

Early Works, The: 1. The basic first historical record of the Pleiadians, which shows how they arrived in the Pleiades, and also, how to develop one’s potential. 2. Historical record in full, originated from within the Boguard. New-Earth miniseries ◄Return

Econdar: An education city of the Aaron in Yaltipia. It housed students and educators and administrators and had a population of 65,000 population. It was near the equator. Templar miniseries

Element analyzer: It analyses the physical elements for their various properties, a planet’s atmosphere, the temperature of space etc. New-Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 914 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Elevator: (Terrestrial) Lift. Interchangeable term for lift. New-Earth miniseries

Elevators: These are used to exclusively lift great tonnage into space. In effect they are one big gravity plate with two pilots and one navigator. Twenty-five elevators can lift a destroyer off a planet with specific gravity of 1.0. New-Earth miniseries

Empire of Earth: It lost in civil war to long-lifers, in BS 5789. The Earth Empire that ruled the Galaxy for over five thousand standard years. New-Earth miniseries

Empty Way, The: The Empty Way comes from the belief that the universe itself is nothing but an illusion, an empty way to fulfillment, and a false fulfillment. The Talkron adopted this philosophy. It means not only is universe empty but that people can theoretically move through the universe as though it’s empty. They can control it, as though it weighs less than a feather. Being Talkron, means to be in absolute control of The Empty Way. Juggernaut miniseries

Engineers, Federation: Federation Engineers are famous for their work, repairing almost anything, getting bases occupied, making bridges, and so on. Generally, they are non-combat crew. New-Earth miniseries

Estimate, also intelligence estimate: (Terrestrial) From the Free Dictionary – 1. “The appraisal, expressed in writing only, of available intelligence relating to a specific situation or condition with a view to determining the courses of action.” 2. “The strategic estimate of the capabilities, vulnerabilities, and proposed courses of action of foreign nations produced at the national level and as a composite of….” New-Earth miniseries

Executive Council of Ataran: The 12 members of the Boulan are known as Consulairs. They have life appointments, until retired or death takes them. It’s a great day when a new member is admitted. They reside in Ataran, Yaltipia. Earth Syndrome miniseries.

Exodus Week: As with clerical law, the Outer-Worlds celebrate a week remembering the exodus from Earth, to the newer Outer- Worlds, such as Rambus. Templar miniseries

Expedition Fleet: The Boguard fleet, of 4 ships, including a Man- O-War, which goes out on a mission for a designated predetermined objective. A total crew complement of up to 200. Templar miniseries

Express-undertube: The name given to the underground magno- rail link, that bridges Jilta P.C. and its outer lying sister cities. Juggernaut miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 915 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Far-Colonies: The Maluka far-Colonies are the remnants, of the flotsam of society. This is where thieves, criminals and the useless of society are shipped. There are sixteen known far- Colonies of Maluka. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Far-Outer-Worlds: The worlds beyond the Outer-Worlds, and beyond the center of the Galaxy. The far-Outer-Worlds number in the thousands. Juggernaut miniseries

Far-saw, far-see: The ability to see something remotely from a distance, well away from the object to be seen. New-Earth miniseries

Farsen: A region of space with few planets, but ruled over, by the Federation. New-Earth miniseries

FCS: Federation Civilian Ship. The title given to a registered civilian vessel, within the Federation. New-Earth miniseries

Federation: Stands for The Imperial Galactic Federation, The Lordes Of All Worlds And Vassals Within The Domains Of The Galaxy. It has been the governing body that ruled the Galaxy after the CCP. New-Earth miniseries

Federation: 1. The Imperial Galactic Federation (IGF), The Lordes of All Worlds and Vassals within the Domains of Santonia Galaxy (Santonia - Quadrant 451f or New General Catalogue 9154 Galaxy [Terrestrially termed Galaxy]). 2. FEDERATION - formally established in the standard year 13,576 upon cessation of the Santonia Wars of 13,331-574. Federation saw an end of 116,158 separate intra galactic domains of varying strengths. 3. Galactic political unification through federation after 120,000 years of varying peace and interplanetary warfare. New-Earth miniseries

Federation Fleet Command; 1. (IFFCo – Intragalactic Federation Fleet Command) The military command of the Federation fleets. On planet armies aren’t subject to IFFCo, but come under Planet Military and Guard – PMG, the military force over guards, and guardsmen and on-planet troopers. 2. IFFCo pronounced “if-co”, is the vast interstellar military arm of the Federation. It’s represented on all planets. 3. IFFCo doesn’t usurp the sovereign power of the royal sectors, and the sovereignty of each sector was senior to IFFCo, until the arrival of the junta that ruled the Federation, then IFFCo became senior to civilian authority. New- Earth miniseries

Federation Sectors: See attached front map. The sixteen Federation Sectors are: Hymondy, Maluka (Maluku), Pilik, Timbor, Penec, Centor, Qilto, Siltonia or Silt, Tilk, Patua, Serene, Penetia, Kalanon, Celtronia, Kantee and Farsen. Farsen did exist until taken by neighboring hostile sectors of Qilto, Penec and Pilik. Each sector is made up of provinces. New-Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 916 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Feelay: Pronounced Fee-lay A. She is the life unit, running a Man-o-War under Captain Markoni in the Malukan Sector. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Feelup: A small fury Martian mammal, which lives in trees. They are dark colored, with small bushy type tails. They are similar to what would be a cross between a domestic cat and a squirrel from Sequetus 3. They appear friendly, show affection, though timid. They have communications skills to other species, and have an apparency of mental reading. While feelups can be tamed, they aren’t considered a domestic animal. New Earth miniseries

Ferry-copter: A four-bladed rotorcraft that carries up to ten passengers. Various sizes. Juggernaut miniseries.

Feli Mack: Hallowman, recruited from, Academia Alson. He came from a mixed marriage of short and long-lifer. Both parents died in a vehicle crash at his early age. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Felice Karo: See Karo, Felice. New-Earth miniseries

Felicia: Capital of the province Felince of Tors. Population 17 thousand. Tropical, but known for heat. Juggernaut miniseries

Fibrerail: The train That’s used, through the tunnels of Yaltipia. The railcars are pulled up and down the canyons, more for vertical travel, but also lateral, to a degree. Templar miniseries

Fighters: 1. Fighters are the only real defense craft against interceptors. They are non-atmospheric and short ranged, and very fast. Usually they are quartered on carriers, cruisers or destroyers. 2. Fighters have a complement of one pilot with sometimes a second co-pilot.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 917 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Two more of the fighter crew remain at the carrier, so each fighter has a tight assigned squad of four personnel. Fighters further have allocated to them, a general staff of seven more support crew (cooks, doctors, administration staff etc) on board a carrier, cruiser or destroyer. Thus each fighter carries ten to twelve personnel. Also see carriers for more data. New-Earth miniseries

Final Battle: BS 26 That battle which was waged around Earth as the last battle for the Federation Alliance against the Far Federation. It was after the Alliance had fallen, subsequently to Jilta being taken. Those not under the Far Federation gathered around Sequetus for one last stand. The Alliance forces were outnumbered 10 to one. New-Earth miniseries

First Fleet: The First Fleet was those first ships bringing the pioneers to the new worlds for settlement. Each planet had its own First Fleet. Those who came on the First Fleet were revered. Templar miniseries

Flashscan: An instant scan of human details taken with multiple bands of light. The scan checks for life in what is being scanned, as well as other details such as finger prints, palm prints, foot prints, iris recognition, facial recognition etc. People aren’t always aware they have been flashscanned as these are used in docking bays, banks, stores, airports, trains, and even highways. New- Earth miniseries

Floater: Originally, a registered trademark, but now the term is used to mean any low speed city vehicle that can reverse gravity. (The polarity of broadmatter is reversed in series so that gravity phenomenon is defied.) The effect is that a floater can float any distance above a planet. Governors are placed on the vehicles, which control the floaters’ height limitation, such as 20 pacs, 50 pacs, 100 pacs, 200 pacs. Templar miniseries

Fluid-wellness: Given to any crew in the infirmary who are ill aboard Federation military vessels. It consists of protein mixes, vitamins and carbohydrates, depending on the body type. There are a dozen varieties, and within those types, various strengths. New-Earth miniseries

Fortunates: A slang term, for those who seemed to just luck-in, during their missions, during their time in the Hallowmen. It all just goes right. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Fransibar: Planet Capital of Orbat, of the Karo System, of the Pleiades. Population fifty-eight million. New-Earth miniseries

Free-area: Slang for a place free of tight discipline. New-Earth miniseries

Free Areas: 1. Areas, which are free from certain codes of military law. Often found as the recreation areas of military E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 918 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

personnel. 2. Slang - Free Areas are also civilian commercial areas, of trade. New-Earth miniseries

Free-food: Food which doesn’t have its DNA owned by any individual, or group or corporation. Anyone can take its seed and grow it without royalties being paid. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Frigate: A warship by the Templar movement, which was brought into being, to counter the piracy against its colonies. It had up to 45 crew. Templar miniseries

FSS: Federation Service Ship; the title given to each military ship in the Federation. New-Earth miniseries

Fundamental form: The original form that populated the Galaxy long before changes that adapted the body to environmental requirements. “People from Earth have fundamental form.” New- Earth miniseries

Fundamentels: The New World Doctrine followers refer to as being from the Temple and who have lost their way. Juggernaut miniseries

Future: The Boguard understand the universe to merely be a series of nows, lasting a very short duration, and that when all the nows are run consecutively, then life appears to exist, like a stream. However, as the life of the Boguard is considered separate to the physical universe, and actually in not part of it, then the Boguard, theoretically, isn’t controlled by time. It’s the belief of some Boguard that they have already lived many lifetimes in the past, and, also in the future. Whilst some can easily recall their past identities, some believe they may also recall their future and alter the future thereby and thus have an effect, on the present. Templar miniseries

Galactic Council, Boguard: It’s the Council's sole purpose to guide the future of the Galaxy towards a path of greater survival. Templar miniseries

Galaxy: (Terrestrial) The Milky Way is the Galaxy. Galaxy means milky way, and it also means the universe. Once there was thought to only be all the stars above in the heavens and they were in this Galaxy, called the Milky Way. There was no other Galaxy other than this Galaxy. There is no other name for it than above. Later on other galaxies were discovered. Thus you will read the term Galaxy as capitalized and it means the Milky Way, the Galaxy that Earth is part of. New-Earth miniseries

Galmo: A dry planet, with a breathable atmosphere. A servitude (prison) planet, of the Far Colonies of Maluka. The planet supports life at the polar regions, where there is water. Gravity is 1.03. Oxygen 11%. Earth Syndrome miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 919 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Gandin, Guard Instructor: Boguard leader, who lead the assault on Mount Drapper in Sleebo, against the pirate base. Templar miniseries

Gangels, Mount: The tallest mountain in Jilta, 250 Ks due west of Jilta PCC. Height 4,289 pacs, said to be home to the gods of Jilta. New-Earth miniseries

Garato: The Nalpan martial art of fighting, with rope and wire. New-Earth miniseries

Garnow: Local villager of the Handart village of the planet Tors, who befriends Jaron and helps him, after he was saved from an assassination attempt on Palbo. Juggernaut miniseries

Garth Kwot: Malukan rebel, aged 312 years. Two children. Both died, while in the service of the government. Garth Hant had been sentenced, and incarcerated, for voicing privately, opinions against the state. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Garule: Boguard, who, with Trabune and Arden Keote tracked Chelo Bade to Mortifor, from Carridan City of Jilta. Juggernaut miniseries

Gavii fruit: A tangy melon fruit that originated on the planet Paxel. Now common on most water planets and commercially grown, for market. Its fruit is often crushed for juice extracts and is a strong source of vitamins and minerals, notably vitamin B3. Juggernaut miniseries

General Surgeon: On a ship or a military base the head of the medical corps was called the General Surgeon. New-Earth miniseries

Giordano, Bruno: (Terrestrial) Born in Italy 1548, became a Dominican priest in 1565, but fled 11 years later due to his ideas.

He was the first to suggest what later would be best accepted as atomic and molecular theory, and that even atoms could eventually be broken down into an undividable element – thought. He believed in life on other worlds and believed in multiple universes existing at once.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 920 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

He claimed that Earth was in motion around the sun, there were millions of solar systems like ours, all moving, and that planets shone by reflected light from their suns, which were luminous. He spoke in Germany, London and taught his theories in Oxford. His ideas had him brought before the Church Inquisition in Italy, and while he invited the inquisitors to view the moons revolving around Jupiter they refused. He was burned at the stake in 1600. New Earth miniseries

Goddess Of War: Amy of Rambus, Goddess of War, was a short lifer, from Rambus. To some, she became a godlike deity. (Terrestrial) 2. Athena was one such goddess, so was the spear carrying Ankt of Egypt. Annouke, elder goddess of war of Egypt., Andraste of Celtic Britain, and Anahita of Persia. There have been others. Juggernaut miniseries

Gods of Jilta: 1. From mythology, dating back 15,000, who were said to be the ruling class and who ruled the world from Mount Gangels. 2. A saying, exclamation of emphasis. By the Gods of Jilta…. New-Earth miniseries

Gogon: A Malukan prison planet belonging to the old Malukan Empire. It was previously known as Verlain II, being part of the Verlain Series. The planet had little exportable product and so never prospered in the galactic trade sense. It fell away from any importance. It became a planet, to which the Malukans sent prisoners. That became its only export importance. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Goldor: Administrative Member of the Confederated Council of Planets. New-Earth miniseries

Goren Torren: 1. An independent, of Lorde Hymondy III. He graduated in Galactic Law at Academia Alson before being accepted into the School of Independent Learning of Jilta PCC. Once he had completed his apprenticeship, he finished a mandatory one year in the Federation Guards in a neighboring system, before returning for his independent internship. He was

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 921 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

the youngest intern cadet and graduated with honors. He once was married to Navia Charlton. Other relationships unknown. He inherited his family estate early in life. No siblings.

2. Torren comes from old Jiltanian, torre or torenza meaning heavy rain, and Goren comes from gore meaning to fetch. The addition of the letter n is to indicate it’s a masculine word. So Goren Torren would mean the man who seeks to make the heavy rains, or the one who breaks the drought.

Goren Torren stops the assassin’s bullet in mid flight.

3. The Independent, as prophesied by The Early Works as Magi.

4. The personage as promoted by The Master Templar, and accredited to be the founder of the movement that grew later on. For more history, see the NEW-EARTH SERIES.

5. The foundation Temple for the Houses of Torren. See definition of Temple. New-Earth miniseries

Gragon Weed: A poison plant, found on Palbo. Its properties, when ingested bring about a hypnotic state, whereby a person becomes easily suggestible. Juggernaut miniseries.

Gralgol Maximons: Most senior Talkron, on the Kantee Planet. Aged 1279 Standard Years, and not from the Kantee region. He took over the operation of Kantee centuries before this story began, after several royals – such as Hymondy and the Duke of Kallon – never returned for rejuvenation. He has been administering the Talkron operations, for almost a millennium. Juggernaut miniseries

Grand Council: The highest ecclesiastic body of Templars, convened to adjudicate accused crimes, against the Temple. Templar miniseries

Grangow plant: A common plant, growing seven pacs high, in the temperate regions of Tors. There are over twenty varieties.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 922 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The plant is used to build huts by natives and also used for fashioning implements. Juggernaut miniseries

Grango fruit: (Pronounced Gran-goh) The fruit from the Grangow plant. Common on Outer-Worlds, but not common in the old Federation. It’s a yellow citrus-like fruit, with thick skin, tangy sour juice and high in fiber. Juggernaut miniseries

Grason: The being that met Amanda and Jaron, in the planetoid Yildon of Six Worlds. Grason is a life form known as Angalian, a pure race, not native to the Santonia Galaxy. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Graviton: (Terrestrial) Is the force of gravity, and for many it’s described in theory as a particle. New-Earth miniseries

Great Hall: In the Jiltanian Palace is the Great Hall. It was designed and built by Jiltanian architect Gioveni Gabalo and is 1,275 standard years old, predating Federation royalty. New-Earth miniseries

Great hall: The great hall is a Templar tradition, whereby many temples would have a great hall, based on the Great Hall of the Palace of Jilta. Juggernaut miniseries

Great Holy War: As described in The Early Works there would be a holy war unrivalled in history that would set mankind straight again. Here mankind had a new chance after the war to take a higher place in the existence of things. New-Earth miniseries

Great Palace: The Palace of Jilta that was taken as residence by the Jiltanian leaders. It was once the home of Lorde Hymondy III. More recently the Master Templar resided there. It originates from the time before the Confederacy. Estimated as 1,780 years old. New-Earth miniseries

Great Search: After Goren Torren vanished one of the biggest searches in federation history was undertaken. The search wasn’t limited to just Sequetus as there were purported sightings in other systems, but there were none that proved true. New-Earth miniseries

Great Sharman: The first was John Anderson of Sequetus 3, who fired the assassin’s bullet that created the legend of Goren Torren. After the assassination was foiled Anderson hid and then joined the army. He was lifted off the planet by Letone to a higher status, but was then back on the planet, running the Temple Movement and was Torren’s representative on Earth. Each subsequent Great Sharman has been Torren’s representative in the Galaxy. There are other Sharmans, one for each major planet, which have the status of one hundred temples or more under them. New-Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 923 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Greendale Health Retreat: A 1,500-bed mental health retreat on Palbo, situated 45 Ks outside of Palbo City Centrum, the hub of central interplanetary government of Palbo. The retreat comprises 17 buildings, over 300 nurses, psychrons and psycho-surgeons, and over 200 administrative staff. It sits on 15 square kinopacs of land, has its own airport and security forces and a small weapons depot. Templar miniseries

Greetonne: Village of Tors. Population 456. Long lifers. Primitives. Juggernaut miniseries

Groundflight: ® A vehicle used on a planet’s surface. Groundflights can elevate two pacs above the ground. A groundflight seldom carries more than eight persons or that equivalent in cargo. Manufactured by Resilient Industries Inc of Jilta. The Groundflight model was the center piece of their production. New-Earth miniseries

Grunn: Talkron representative leader on the Palboan mission to the far-Outer-Worlds. Estimated 1,357 years old. After Sandrist, he has been captive in the mental universe of Amy of Rambus. Juggernaut Series

Grut: A curse word of the Federation. It came from the Confederated Council of Planets administrative planet Tilan. A grut was an instrument used to artificially inseminate wild animals, with outer planet genes, for domestication purposes. New-Earth miniseries

Guard Instructor: A high field rank in the Boguard, below Captain. New-Earth miniseries

Guardsman: The basic military personnel on a planet. Guardsmen are contracted and are mostly on the planet and less likely to see military action. They have defensive roles. They can be used as a supplement for local law and order. They can also be found on ships and remote bases during times of low conflict. See also Trooper. New-Earth miniseries

Gurano Togon: Hallowman, from Jilta. Recruited from Academia Alson. Age 28, short-lifer. Parents died in vehicle crash early in his life. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Gyrocopter: A single seated autogiro, which is a form of aircraft, which has freely rotating horizontal vanes and a propeller. The difference with a helicopter is that the vanes of the gyro aren’t powered but instead rotate in the slipstream. The power of lift comes from the propeller in front. Templar miniseries

Hallowmen: The term given to Corduke Special Forces, which work under extreme conditions. There are two divisions of these only, in the Galaxy. They take orders strictly from the Master

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 924 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Templar himself. Their purpose is to rehabilitate life, find it where it’s distraught, and free it. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Halz: The term to represent something bad. In ancient Jiltanian mythology, Aqin, son of God Zoltro of the mountains was kept captive in an underground prison, in Mount Halz by Zoltro’s enemy, named Lansider. Lansider kept Aqin alive for 25 years, some said under constant torture, until Zoltro relinquished his status as head god. Aqin was boiled alive and it was his skin that was given back to Zaltro by Lansider that made Zaltro give in. Lansider was never caught but was always there, potentially waiting to take what was important. So there are phrases such as hot as Halz, as bad as Halz. New-Earth miniseries

Harvester: The large multi -story machine, which extracts bauxite from the surface of the planet, Rambus. H1 means simply Harvester 1. There are five or six harvesters on Rambus. Templar miniseries

Heat seeking nose: Particle guns can be equipped with a heat sensor, which enables the particles to target the warmest parts of a body, the heart or brain. The heat seeker is accurate tor 20 to 30 pacs at 5 degrees. Settings can be changed. Standard trooper issue. New-Earth miniseries

Health Retreats: The retreats set up by the Bank to treat those who disobey their commands. See series deprogramming to understand more about what is done to people at these retreats. Detention centers would be a better suited name, than health retreats. The physicians overseeing those treated therein are psychrons. Templar miniseries

High Parade Dress: Parade dress with campaign bars, medals, honors, distinctions knives, and awards worn over Parade Dress which is a quality shocksuit. Parade Dress has gold braid for rank on top, of a standard shocksuit white issue uniform. New-Earth miniseries

High-holiday: The day of remembrance in the Temple, reserved to remember Lorde Torren and what he stood for. Templar miniseries

High-volves: Native animals, that are notoriously vicious, on the peaks of Sleebo. Hibernating carnivore that has a 25 year life span, weighs the same as a man. Templar miniseries

Highwater ™: Water combined with minerals, vitamins, and body-salts and with the citrus fruits of Jilta, sold commercially and made from similar fruits in different sectors. Made by the Highwater Company of Jilta. Templar miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 925 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Home: Residential headquarters in LA of Goren Torren, Boguard and household staff in Beverly Hills, California. The initial property was 3 acres, but was extended to 5 acres with additional purchases of neighboring properties. New-Earth miniseries

Hot-Pack: A survival pack, in which food is placed and heated by a blast cartridge. This was first developed by the Confederated Council of Planets and little changed, through the passing millennia. Origin unknown. Juggernaut miniseries

House of Torren: Part of the Temple Movement. Each House represents one of the Temples of the Templar movement. House of Torren, House of Charlton and so on. See Temple. Templar miniseries

Hymondy: 1. A Royal Lorde of the Federation. With rejuvenation he has reigned over Jilta since its conquest. Lorde Hymondy III of Jilta. His refusal to accept the status quo, and his keen appreciation of what wasn’t right, enabled him to expose the happenings on Earth, and this led to great changes in all sectors of the Galaxy. 2. The patron of Goren Torren of Jilta. 3. Hymondy III means that he had gone through three rejuvenation procedures. New-Earth miniseries

Ibolu, IP Cruiser: Palboan Imperial Cruiser, with 40 interceptors, 290 fighters, and 3,678 crew. Saw action off far-Outer-Worlds and Sequetus 3. Juggernaut miniseries.

IC 1613 Galaxy: This is a dwarf Galaxy. It is approximately 2.3 million light years distant. It is rarely seen by amateur astronomers, due to its low surface brightness. It is a bar- shaped structure, meaning that it has an axis, and its stellar population is quite old, perhaps 7 billion years. It has a strong red giant branch, and red clump populations. Earth Syndrome miniseries

IFFCo: Intragalactic Federation Fleet Command. See Federation Fleet Command. Pronounced: “if-co” New-Earth miniseries

Ikerus, I.P. Destroyer: Palboan (Imperial Palboan) destroyer of 754 crew, six interceptors and forty-eight fighters. Built BS 745. Juggernaut miniseries

Imperial Federation Warp Drive Bank: The organization, which control the transport regulations and lease agreements of the Federation Warp Drive systems. They are an all-powerful body that predict and plot the expansionist policies of the Federation. They are the instrumental power behind the Federation, as without it all commerce and military travel would effectively cease. See also Warp Drives. New-Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 926 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Imperial Templar Guard: A crack guard of 1,000 top guardsmen, chosen from the Temple Guard of Palbo, situated on Palbo who swore allegiance to the Temple and their Officer in Chief. Juggernaut miniseries

Implant: A mental phenomena whereby a person is made to think something when triggered. This can be as subtle as being told to forget something, or else. It might be as high powered as in subliminal sounds, hypnosis, drugged coercion, and it might be through the introduction of physical commands, through electromagnetic pulse, a small transmitter in the body, and so on. It can be on a personal level, or whole populations can be implanted over time. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Independent: 1. A contracted vocation of intelligence gathering and sometimes action amongst the royal families of the Federation. 2. A license is required after a five year internship, in which is possible to enter after completing a prior tertiary degree, independent schooling and apprenticeship. The quota for independent licenses is low. 3. Most independents have a non- military background, though this isn’t mandatory, but they must complete one year’s duty in an alternate defense force prior to acceptance. Most sectors have reciprocal exchange programs whereby independent students are permitted into off-world training programs. New-Earth miniseries

Independent, the: Short for: the Independent Goren Torren. (Now capitalized as Independent) New-Earth miniseries

Instructor: A Boguard high field rank. It’s below Guard Instructor, but above Officer. New-Earth miniseries

Ing-Lysh: The English language, as pronounced in the far-Outer- Worlds, after exodus from Earth. It is a phonetic language pronounced as English, but written in Standard Galactic phonetic symbols. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Interceptor: 1. A winged space craft that can stay in space or enter atmospheres. It’s the prime attack craft of the Federation.

It carries atomic warheads on its rockets. Manufactured by various corporations, the most common is Fair Space Industries Inc. The interceptor was the fastest of all Federation military attack style vehicles. E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 927 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

2. There were many models of interceptors, depending on the region they were to be used in. Various ones were wide bodied, some narrower. Some had more or less rockets. The variance depended on the gravity and the expected atmosphere the craft was to encounter. New-Earth miniseries

Jaron: Born 985 BS in the north east Amazon of the village Manquin, of Sequetus 3. Married Sheril Brud, also of the Amazon, but in Yaltipia 1002 BS. They had one son, named Yandra. Jaron became Boguard Leader rank, in 1015 BS. On Greetonne village Jaron is known as the god Bailock. He married Anki, daughter of the Master Templar after assuming the Palboan Cordelloship, and had four children to her, two of which died at the hands of the Talkron shortly after their births. The two children of this marriage who survived him are Tubin, (son) and Akeala (daughter). Juggernaut miniseries

Jenny Wanten: Resident terrestrial anthropologist in Western Australia. Instrumental in assisting Independent Goren Torren in his estimate of Earth. Graduated University of Western Australia 2013. Deemed a Minor Temple of Sequetus 3. See the definition of Temple. New-Earth miniseries

Jilta: (Pronounced Yilta in English) Is the Royal Planet in the Hymondian (now Jilta) sector. It’s the center of the sector and the residence of Lorde Hymondy III. Population half a billion.

Jilta is a watery planet with oceans over half its surface saturated, 11 continents, frozen polar regions, and some deserts.

Before the Hymondian Realm Jilta was a prominent hub planet of a small province of the CCP. New-Earth miniseries

Jilta P.C.: P.C. stands for Planet Center and is the capital city of the planet. Population 1.2 Million. New-Earth Series

Jilta P.P.C.; Jilta Prime Planetary Center, Jilta PCC, the inner center of Jilta PC, the capital city of the planet Jilta, where the government administrative offices are.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 928 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Jilta PC layout.

Population 210,000 (Note; to pronounce Jilta, it’s necessary to pronounce the J as a Y, so the reading of Jilta is pronounced Yilta in Standard Jiltanian speech. This pronunciation is a local dialect of Standard Galactic.) . New-Earth miniseries

Joon, Eron and or Eros: A life-form occupying a bioclone body. Joon is a sub-race and are Talkron senior executives of the Triangulum Galaxy. Eron (Eros) Joon has lived consecutive lifetimes over the past 25,000 years with full recall of each life. Joon means terror, and Eron means full, and Eros means often, on the old dialect of the planet. Eros and Eron are the same life entity, being simply female or male presentations of their multi faceted bioclone. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Juggernaut: Any blinding idea for which people are prepared to sacrifice their lives forsaking all else. Juggernaut miniseries

Junta: A military – or political – group that by using force, have seized power. New-Earth miniseries

K, Ks, Ks: Kinopac, a thousand pacs, over a kilometer long. Also used to mean kinopacs per hour. New-Earth miniseries

Kalanon (Kallon): Reluctant ally of Jilta. Kalanon was the Duchy of Kalanon, a relatively small sector. Its royal was the Duke of Kalanon. At the end of the Battle of Sequetus 3 he arrived in Sequetus to support Hymondy. New-Earth miniseries

Kalo: 1. Mild stimulant pick-me-up bean roasted and ground, that when mixed with hot water is a popular drink. 2. Very popular drink around Jilta. 3. A Jiltanian equivalent of coffee. 4. Kalo is from the underground root, a legume, of the kalo tree. The “beans” are roasted and ground. Depending on the soil conditions, the taste and aroma may change, but also the ratio of ‘bean” to root ratio depends on the stimulant effect. Kalo beans can also be eaten whole, similar to Earth peanuts, which are also a legume. 5. Kalo as a drink can be taken black, or mixed with creamer, sweetener added, or mixed with alcohol. It can be put into cakes. 6. The kalo industry was once a prime industry on Jilta, ranking only second behind learning. 7. Tradition has it that the kalo tree was a gift from the head god Zaltro, to his son. 8. It’s said on Jilta E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 929 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

that a drink of kalo a day, leads to good health and long life. New- Earth miniseries

Kangas Squad: Crack intelligence squad, of the Cordukes trained to do almost anything. One thousand elite persons. Operating out of Jilta, only. They take a special oath. Juggernaut miniseries

Kantee Planet: Kantee planet. The remnant of the Kantee Sector before it was taken over by Palbo, as the ruling planet of the system. Kantee is the old capital of the system where the royals originated. Juggernaut Series.

Kantee Sector: 1 One of the inner sectors of the Galaxy. Home of the royal bloodline and separate race known as Royals, who provided the push to form the Federation. While the Royal race didn’t seek a dominant role in the Santonia Galaxy, they were forced to rule it – benignly – or suffer the consequences of being overwhelmed by increasing wars and skirmishes of neighboring races of the Confederacy. New-Earth miniseries

Kanut: Southern Continent of Palbo. Named after the explorer, Kelmet Kanut. It’s the mining continent of Palbo. Juggernaut miniseries

Karakas: 1. A planet in the Outer World province of Belamore. In the Hymondian Sector, and in from the Penek Sector, its nearest neighbor. New-Earth miniseries

Karavat: A city on Orbat where ships are designed, and parts made. The city boasts over a million people, devoted to the production of defense weaponry, and electronics systems. Earth Syndrome miniseries. E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 930 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Karo, Felice. Pleiadian daughter of the Governor General of the Karo Series of the Pleiades.

Later, became Boguard and captain of the Boguard during the Battle for Centrecom, and battle of Palbo, where she excelled. She transmuted when she rehabilitated her otherwise lost abilities when training as Boguard. Said to be the duality of Goren Torren and just as important.

She is deemed and titled as one of the Temples of Sequetus 3. (See the definition of Temple.) New-Earth miniseries

Karo, Series: A series of 27 planets within the Pleiades, otherwise unknown to the Federation or the CCP. It has five of its 27 planets habitable, including those it’s terra-forming.

There are two races, the original Aaron, otherwise known as Boguard, on Yaltipia, and the Pleiadians, who arrived, after fleeing Earth in their long forgotten history, and who set up a new life, on Orbat. New-Earth miniseries

Kelvin: (Terrestrial) Temperature measured in the same as degrees Celsius, but where absolute zero, where there is no temperature at all, is zero on the Kelvin scale.

0o Kelvin = -273.15o Celsius New-Earth miniseries

Keote, Ardan: Ardan Keote was a boyfriend of Chelo Bade, a mining engineer, 278 years old, graduated Academia Gansol with honors. Works for Geodeck Att. El mining, Jilta. Juggernaut miniseries

Kick-bucket: 1. A mildly disrespectful term, given to ordinary crew drifters on Palboan ships. Juggernaut Series 2. The term for deckhands, on Palboan seas. It simply comes from the image that when one is upset, he can always go and kick the bucket, sitting outside the door. Originally used in the Palboan movie, Sultry Seas made BS 876. Juggernaut miniseries

Kildon, Canning Captain: Fleet captain of the Talkron lead cruiser fleet, that failed, off of Sandrist. He was from Palbo PC, and 398 years old at the time of Sandrist. Married twice, with three children. Juggernaut Series

Kinopac: 1. It’s exactly 1030.91 Meters. 2. A thousand pacs. Kinopacs is abbreviated to Ks. 3. K, slang meaning kinopac or kinopac per hour. New-Earth miniseries

Kintecs Province: A former industrial and technological planet famous for its intelligent computers before the Medallian Rebellion. It’s now in the Hymondian Sector. New-Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 931 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Kol: Boguard who traveled with Ardan to Mortifor. 569 years old. Highly distinguished. Juggernaut miniseries

Kul: A transport beast known for its cussedness. It can carry the weight of twenty men, over rocky ground. New-Earth miniseries

Kuro: 1. Kuro is a black feelup from Mars, its species preserved in the pyramid at Cydonia. 2. She is a Martian black feelup, befriended by Akeala and Jaron. Feelups can be domesticated. 3. (Terrestrial) In means black in Japanese. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Kwankindo: The martial art of unarmed combat. Taught in most military schools in Jiltanian Out Worlds. New-Earth miniseries

Kwot, Aka: Wife of Garth Kwot, sentenced to life service, to the state, for a vestige-crime, and was last officially seen on the planet Galmo, a Far Colony of Maluka. Earth Syndrome Series

Kwot, Garth: Janitor of the Karika Building of Maluka PPC. (Karika meaning beautiful place in indigenous Malukan) He later became a leader of the Malukan Resistance. Married to Aka Ringo (Kwot) and had three daughters Ano, Kela and Beto Kwot. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Laf-Laffa: A moth found the caves of Yaltipia. Its wings measured three hand widths across and were composed of bright blues, greens, and crimson against a black background. The male has a yellow and orange strip running down its back. Related to the Lallow. It lives as a moth for 3 weeks. Earth Syndrome Series

Lallow: - The word comes from the minute sound of its wings, Lal-loh. The lallow can live two years, and adopt the colors of various fungi for repelling enemies or attracting mates. They are a sign of good fortune and cherished by the Aaron. Many Aaron cultivate small sections outside their homes certain fungi the lallow feed upon, to attract them. The local lore says that while the lallow reside in the labyrinth of caves below Yaltipia, so can the Aaron. Templar miniseries

Lanis, Lyn, Midshipman: Junior officer aboard the Destroyer Yalo. 20 years old, from Sandrist. Earth Syndrome Miniseries

Last Battle, The: (Also see Final Battle) This was the last stand by the Federation Alliance against the Far Federation. There were no other battles after this. The Alliance totally fell at this point. Twenty-three ships were destroyed in this battle, and it was the first time the Alliance had confronted the enemy face on. New- Earth miniseries

Leader: Boguard field rank below Officer and above Boguard. See Boguard rank. New-Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 932 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Letone: (Historical information only) A Guard Instructor of the Boguard, Commander of the Boguard. He was assigned to Lorde Hymondy III of Jilta. He is seen below in the Wanted Poster. He died (presumed) in BS 27 when Home was raided by Earth intelligence agencies.

He was born on Yaltipia, age unknown. He was in charge of security at ACI under Goren Torren in California, Earth. He was also in charge of the mission that captured Anderson from the Wright Patterson Air base and brought back the dead alien Tog from the crash retrieval.

He was loyal and believed in the freedom of Sequetus 3 to maintain its own sovereignty without interference by external forces. A statue was erected in his honor in Los Angeles. He never married, no offspring known.

Deemed by the Templars as a Temple of Sequetus 3. New-Earth miniseries

Life-force: ((Terrestrial) That spiritual singular existence that gives energy to a living organism and which does its computing and decision making. New-Earth miniseries

Life suit: A pressurized, helmeted space suit. Also lifesuit. The suit can be worn in space with no atmospheres, toxic atmospheres and even atmospheres such as Venus, which has sulfuric acid clouds. The same suit can be worn underwater and is good to 180 pacs. Made by many manufacturers on many planets. New-Earth Series

Lift: (Terrestrial) Elevator. The terms are interchangeable. Lift is more English and elevator is more American. New-Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 933 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Local Group: 54 galaxies that are united through gravitational pull on each other, of which the Milky Way is a part. There are 3 spiral galaxies in the Local Group, being: The Milky Way, Andomeda Galaxy and the Triangulum Galaxy. The other galaxies are smaller dwarf and barrel galaxies. See the map. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Long-lifers: 1. A slang term meaning someone who would normally live a long-life, as distinct to some planets, which produce short-life humanoids. 2. A long-life is 250 standard years or more. Short life is less those 250 standard years. 3. See Genesis for a list of prior long-lifers of Sequetus 3. New-Earth miniseries

Lorde: 1. Lorde, meaning a title of trust, and honor, used by royalty and high ranking religious officials of the Federation. 2. (Terrestrial) Old English 1200 – 1300 The spelling of lord was lorde, along with other spellings in England at that time. From Hlaford means bread-keeper. Juggernaut miniseries

Lotta: A flesh eating predator from the mountains of Jilta. Protected species. The most similar mammal on Sequetus 3 would be the Bengal tiger in size and habitat. New-Earth miniseries

Lunar Management (Inc): The Corporation that looks after the management, of the lunar bases, on the moons around Maluka. They have a contract, that’s renegotiated every seventy-five years. Their job is to manage, not build, the installations. They are in charge of the mental and physical well-being of their employees, and ensure the bases function, according to their memorandums of operation manuals. The staff aren’t military, but civilian technicians. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Macrod Curr: 1. Boguard who works under Jilta within the tunnels and befriends Ardan. Macrod Curr seems different and more able than other Boguard. He then is sent on mission to bring Akeala to Yaltipia, and then to unite her and Lorde Jaron on Sandrist. 2. Curr means above men. The word Macrod is a word from a local old Yaltipian dialect for can’t be equaled or beaten. Juggernaut miniseries

Magi, The: From The Early Works, one who has redeemed his natural inherent abilities of life, who will lead the Galaxy away from a hidden tyranny. Goren Torren became the Magi of the Early Works. New-Earth miniseries

Magi: (Terrestrial) 1. The fourth century BC the Greeks saw the magi as being associated with the Zoroastrian religion of Persia and the term became synonymous with practitioners of magic, astrology, and higher knowledge. The Gospel of Mathew refers to magi being the wise men of the east. The number three (three wise men) was added perhaps a thousand years later to the English version. 2. The Old Chinese word for magician, wizard, is m’ag, coming from magi. The Old Chinese symbol for this is the

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 934 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

following cross: (A cross with serifs: ☩) The point being is that the term has crossed from China to the far West and generally means people who have wisdom and who can perform real magic. 3. The term illusionist, or one who performs tricks, to make people believe the magician is performing a real feat came during the Hellenistic period of Greece, when the term magician was applied by skeptic thinkers. This term survives today in the English words magic and magician. New-Earth miniseries

Magnaplate: n. The flexible plate threads that are electrically locked into polynylop. When woven into nylop and charged, the impregnated nylop adds dramatic strength and endurance to the wearer. v. magnoplating. New-Earth miniseries

Magnoclamps: ® Clamps which hold vehicles in space stationary to each other, and lock them together. They are used particularly on interceptors when they dock for refueling and need a quick turnaround. Magnoclamps are made by Standard Solid Industries, of planet Peel. New-Earth miniseries

Magnopolop: A non metallic resilient compound that has no magnetic properties. New-Earth miniseries

Magnotube: High speed rail, that travels a top speed 500 to 780 Ks, per hour. The trains at these speeds are held down on the track magnetically, but also held off the rail; magnetically. They are faster and more efficient than flight. New-Earth miniseries

Makka, Roddy: Corduke operative, in the southern seas of Palbo. 138 years old, origin Palboan. Juggernaut miniseries

Maluka, Lorde: A Royal Lorde who rules the Malukan sector, originally from the Kantee Sector. New-Earth Series

Maluka, also Maluku: 1. The main central and Royal Planet of the Malukan Sector. Famous for its industrial products, and engineering skills. The Malukan sector was once larger than it’s now and was the sector, in which Sequetus was. New-Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 935 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

2. The planet has gravity 0.97, oxygen 12%. It has a one-world government, self-proclaimed as benign. The Malukan Series of planets has three livable planets. Maluka is the central hub and the remnants of the old Malukan Empire, prior to the Battle for Sequetus 3. Earth Syndrome Series

Mangow Plant: A common plant around Tors. Often the pronouncing of the word mangow plant is used a unit of time on Tors. The plant is used a source of green food, clothing, timber.. Juggernaut miniseries

Man-O-War: The Boguard warship, which works in harmony with its crew, as though the ship itself was a living life-force in its own right. It works on thought rather than mechanical operation. The man-o-war varies in size up to a hundred crew, and can be as small as twelve crew. Templar miniseries

Markoni, Leader: Pronounced Mar-ko-nee, Male, member of the Boguard Fronts. He is the Boguard partner of Maroen. He is 198 standard years old, has 23 missions, 7 citations-for-courage. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Marinta Clay: Cordello of Jilta and head of the Corduke network BS 10052 - 62. Short-lifer, aged 54. Juggernaut miniseries

Maroen: Female Boguard Instructor: Pronounced Mar-o-en. Boguard Front Instructor, assigned to mission Maluka. Aged 173 standard years. Born on Yaltipia. Her service record includes: 17 missions, and 11 citations-of-courage. Earth Syndrome miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 936 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Mars: (Terrestrial) Mars has a history, of being thought to have an alternative civilization, to Earth. Today, there are many who would argue that the planet is less of an enigma, than it once was.

However, with the advent of the Internet, there is perhaps even more mystery. There are reported buildings found on Mars. Some are hoaxes, yet some are worth a close look at. Above and below, are photos from scans over the planet. Below, is a blown up section of above.

Today, with high-resolution photography, and with Google Mars, new data is being discovered, adding to the controversy.

The picture above: reported from Google Mars, and shows a crater that seems deep with water. The larger picture (see notes at back) shows the waterline, the water draining down into the crater. Even the spill from the smaller crater above it, can be seen draining downwards. See notes. The Earth Syndrome miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 937 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Mars Base: The scientific expedition base on Mars, set up by the Federation, on Sequetus 4, in the Cydonia region. Its job is to monitor the Sequetus Series, for Scientific purposes. New-Earth miniseries

Marshal: The senior military rank in IFFCo. The rank of Marshal in order downwards is.

Defense Marshal - five stars, Ranking Marshal - four stars, Reserve Marshal – three, Marshal - two and one stars. New-Earth miniseries

Masters: The self-proclaimed creators of life such as Togs, beyond the portal. New Earth Series

Master Templar: 1. The ecclesiastic head of the Templar movement. He was elected for life. The elected position had been male dominated since the movement began, but no rule to enforce so. The position is decided upon by a vote, by the Cordellos. Templar miniseries 2. Master Templar Elysis Morander is the former name, of the Master Templar of Jilta. Earth Syndrome Series

Martone: Boguard on Jilta, serving in the Royal Palace, 1043 BS. Juggernaut miniseries

Matherson, Wolly: Sociologist from Jilta at the beginning of Federation.

Matherson Hypotheses: 1. A social philosophy that planet civilizations will self-destruct to war unless intervened, and under what circumstances they do so. 2. The longer the life span of a race of humanoids, the faster it evolves culturally. Simply put, races that live longer gain more knowledge in a lifetime, have a greater expectancy of life ambitions, and so achieve more in a lifetime; thus long living races speed up cultural evolution.

Matow: Planet previously known for its industrious work ethic, and manufacturer of galactic ships on its three moons, prior to its demise at the hands of the Patuans. New-Earth miniseries

Meedle: 1. A drink often served in the Malukan sector. It’s distilled from barley and mixed with a cinnamon and pepper derivatives. It’s served warm to hot, and highly alcoholic. 2. On Sleebo meedle is drunk extensively, easily made, and there are great competitions for who can produce the best. Templar miniseries

Megalin: Four-year-old girl, of the Amazon Paqet tribe, gifted with a natural spiritual ability. Daughter of Palin and Turan. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Mepat: (Pronounced: Mee-pat) Captain of the Boguard stationed at Jilta. His Excellency High Commander of the Boguard. See E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 938 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

also the Great Manapet. He was deemed a Temple of Sequetus 3. See the definition of Temple. New-Earth miniseries

Merron City: On Palbo, a powerful city, that built cruisers and was the final manufacturing place of Warp drives. Population of 2.8 million. It was laid waste by Felice Karo, during the intervention of Sequetus 3. Getting Merron running again gave power to the Bank and Mirak did this for 150 years before being elected to the Board of the Bank. After 45 years on the Board was elected to the Boards chief executive and administrator. Templar miniseries

Michael: 1. The largest and strongest assistant life form from the life-universe, and from the other side of the physical-universe, who had been assisting people on Earth, over three thousand years. 2. Another name for Amanda while he is on Earth appearing, as a life-form. Earth Syndrome Series

Microwave bluster: A wave device, working on broad matter theory, which sends out a microwaves, which can be tuned to any known element, and through oscillating the broadmatter between atoms and molecules, it gets those molecules to drop their bonds and collapse in towards each other. For example, if the microwave bluster was tuned to iron, which is a metallic lattice, then that lattice that holds iron together, and gives iron its strength, breaks down and the iron in the path of a microwave bluster beam, becomes no stronger than chalk. Turned on a building, from above, an entire building can be made into rubble, and free fall into its own footprint. Technically, this works on broadmatter, which is the unobservable particle that space is full of, that holds atoms and molecules apart. Broadmatter is harmonized by atoms nearby, and in turn, holds those atoms apart and gives the element its strength and gravity properties, as well as preventing the molecules from falling in on each other. Once the broadmatter is polarized, for that specific element, say iron, then iron loses the property of holding each iron molecule in its metallic lattice. Iron then collapses under any strain. The blusters can be tuned to any element, or elements. So; all particles in the bluster’s path can reach the polarizing moment at exactly the same time. For example, in a building, all the iron and steel, in the beams, girders, columns, and the reinforcing in the concrete, will give way at the same precise moment. The building then collapses in a cloud of dust within its own footprint, just as in a controlled demolition. If the bluster is tuned to iron and calcium carbonate, which are the main elements in concrete, then a superrise can be turned to dust in a few seconds after twenty minutes of polarizing. The blusters draw their power from space itself, or the broadmatter within space. Space has energy, and isn’t an absolute zero vacuum, but a mass of small particles that glue the universe together. They measure a couple of degrees warmer than absolute zero. It’s this energy of free space, unlimited, that the bluster draws upon. Earth Syndrome miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 939 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Milky Way: (Terrestrial) This is the name of the galaxy of which the Earth is part. It’s referred to as milky, as that was what it appeared like when discovered. The rotation of the Milky Way is about 200 million years. There are 200 – 400 million stars. It’s a spiral galaxy. Our Solar System is 27,000 light years, from the center of the galaxy. It moves in relation to other galaxies at 600 km per second. The oldest known star in the galaxy is 13.2 billion years old, the same age as the said physical universe. The Milky Way is surrounded by smaller satellite galaxies, as is its equivalent neighbor, the Andromeda Galaxy. The word for milky way in Greek, is galaxy. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Mind-call: A call mentally from one to another or to all. A Boguard term. Templar miniseries

Mind-keeping: Either through drugs, hypnosis or both, a controller can control another mind, so that it will do only the controller’s bidding. This is called mindkeeping. Juggernaut miniseries

Mind Register: A device used to measure thought waves. It worked around the fact that that force deflected energies directed at a living force, and this deflection could be detected electronically. The deflection changes, as the person thinks of positive to non positive thoughts, such as fear and anger. New- Earth miniseries

Minor Cordello: A Cordello, representing a Minor Temple, such as the Minor Temple of Wanten, who represents Kalanon. Templar miniseries

Mirak, Brandon: Head of the Imperial Federation Warp Drive Bank, the chief administrator, and once elected by the Bank Board, he has a ten year term of office. Already having being elected as President of Merron City – population 2.8 million, got him onto the board of the Bank. Templar miniseries

Moon: (Terrestrial) 1. The Moon is 356,410 km from the Earth at its closest point. It has a diameter of 3,473 km and has a surface gravity of one sixth of Earth with a comparative mass of only one to eighty-one.

The difference between the comparative mass of Earth and the relative gravity is of unanswered interest. Obviously, the mass of

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 940 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

the moon is very unusual, compared to the volume; so the gravity of the moon isn’t in line, with its mass.

Here: are photographs of the far side of the moon that have sparked comment In the book Alien Agenda, by Jim Marrs. Evidence is that the moon is much older than the Earth. Marrs cites evidence, that the moon is hollow, and that it was placed around the Earth 12,000 years ago. The far side of the moon, is constantly facing away from Earth.

This photo comes from Apollo 8. Below are the needles, now famous.

Earth Syndrome miniseries

Moon 2: The identification label name given to the second moon, placed around Sequetus 3 (Earth). The moon was a third the size of the original moon of Earth. It rotates at the same exact speed as the first moon, but is three times the distance out from Earth. Analysis gave the origin of this moon as most likely from Saturn. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Morander Scott: From Taborack planet, short-lifer, and follower of the New World Doctrine. Son of Betty Murry and Stewart Scott. Juggernaut miniseries

Mortifor: The second station-city to be built. Three thousand years old. Built in space. Had over 150,000 inhabitants. Juggernaut miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 941 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Mount Drapper: A mystical mountain in the Kendal Ranges of Sleebo. It’s 18,000 pacs above sea level. It’s permanently covered with snow, and its peak is weeks away from the nearest village, by foot. It’s one of the remotest parts of the planet. Templar miniseries

Muron: The Apple of Earth was exported to many planets immediately after intervention. It was traded extensively by Muron Enterprises. The apple became known as the Muron. Unlike many other foods in the Federation, apples, or murons, where not a trademarked or licensed food, owned by any one person or group. It was known as free-food. Earth Syndrome miniseries.

New Age: The New-Age of Palbo, or Empire II, as some called it, then. It was a new reign of Palbo, over the other worlds. Mirac first used the term in a speech, to a crowd before he received his first programming. It was one of his last original thoughts. Templar miniseries

New Orbat, City: A military city on Orbat, totally set for defending the Pleiades. Population 1.3 million, located around Aconan Bay. Earth Syndrome miniseries

New World Doctrine: A set of principals adopted by Templars who had forsaken the old Federation as corrupt and departed from the original ways set forth, by Goren Torren of Sequetus. They believe the Temple to be the work of John Anderson, and not Goren Torren. The New World Doctrine focuses on the recorded lectures and what Torren, not the Temple, wrote. Templar miniseries

Niloglass: A synthetic, toughened, but very thin glass. Originally developed by Niloglass Industries of Jilta, but now made by many manufacturers. No longer trademarked. Juggernaut miniseries

Nylop: 1. A tough material That’s used to create fabric, especially for use in military clothing and upholstery in galactic craft. 2. A synthetic material of Confederacy origin, easily molded, resilient to tear, but pliable. Often used in the manufacture of garments. New-Earth miniseries

Off planet: 1. The term used to mean leaving or being away from the planet. 2. Leaving to go into space, or to another world. New- Earth miniseries

Offplanet: Meaning not from the planet that one is on, from another place, off from this planet. “Tomorrow, I go offplanet, for my holiday.” New-Earth miniseries

Off-worlds: A term used in the Karo Series, to refer to the habitable worlds, beyond Orbat and Yaltipia. New-Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 942 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Omm: The leader of Talkron for the Palbo region and sector. Over 500 years Standard Years old. Juggernaut miniseries

Ommandah: There were three races, on a rim planet, which had unique abilities. The first one was the Ommandah, the second was the Aaron, and the third was the Talkron. The Federation planet Palbo persecuted the Ommandah, after it learned their whereabouts. They vanished. The whereabouts of the rim planet was forgotten, possibly covered up, by the Aaron. Juggernaut miniseries

On planet, on-planet, and onplanet: The term used to mean going onto the planet from out in space or another world. “I’m going on- planet from the cruiser.” New-Earth miniseries

Orbat: The chief planet in the Karo Series in the Pleiades. Standard gravity: 0.97, Water 68% of its surface, 267 million kpacs from its solus. One of a binary pair of planets. New-Earth miniseries

Oros Moon: The second largest Malukan moon. 1200 Ks diameter. It had three major bases, but only for surveillance and tracking. This moon has no known resources. Population less than 2,000. Earth Syndrome miniseries.

Othersider: A term given by Man-o-Wars to those beings that are working with the Talkron. Also see the term volunteer in this instance. Also refer to renegade Angalian. Earth Syndrome miniseries.

Out synchronization, or out-of-sync: The term applies to the mechanism of misalignment, of sub atomic particles and time, when the Warp Drive fields engage. New-Earth miniseries

Out-Worlds of Jilta: The Out-Worlds of Jilta, also known as the Out-Worlds, are those worlds in the Jiltanian sector that were never truly conquered by the Federation, but which by treaty agreed to fall under it. New-Earth miniseries.

Outer Colonies: The Outer Colonies of Maluka, are planets, with harsh conditions, where rebels were sent, when caught, who needed less supervision, but where the planet conditions kill those who stray far from the colony bases. These colonies are hard, and most inmates die there at early ages. There are four such planets, bordering with the sector of Siltonia. Earth Syndrome miniseries.

Outer-Worlds: These aren’t to be confused with the out-worlds of Jilta, those small regions lying on the outer part of the Jilta sector. The Outer Worlds on the other hand are those worlds that fall outside of the Federation of the long-lifers. The outer-worlds were never inhabited, until the Temple or House of Torren pushed

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 943 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

humanity out there beyond the earlier Federation limits. Juggernaut miniseries

Overgrowner: The term given to the Angelians who were willingly working for the Talkron. Another word fro volunteer ship of the Talkron. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Ovid: 43 BC – AD 17 Roman poet: his full name is Publius Ovidius Naso. He is noted for his love poems, as the Amaores; his series of tales of mythological, legendary, and historical figures. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Pac: 1. Officially 1.03091 Meters (Terrestrial). 2. A length of standard measurement used throughout the Federation. 3. One pace or step. New-Earth miniseries

Palace Trust: A deed of trust given to the Boguard, by Lorde Hymondy III of Jilta, to care for the Royal Palace, and its occupants, until he returns, which he vowed he would. The trust was given 800 years before Battle for Sequetus 3. Templar miniseries

Palace Centrum: This is the central headquarters of Malukan Intelligence. It was once the Royal Palace, but was renamed when the Malukan Sector intelligence community took it over. It takes up a square kinopac of space, including the grounds, old palace, and gardens. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Palbo: In the Kantee Sector, the planet rose to prominence, due to it being the home and headquarters for the Warp Drive Bank. 38% water, not counting another 23% of frozen water caps. 12 continents, but with one supercontinent at the northern polar region. There are three native races on Palbo. Three moons, gravity 1.23. Oxygen 23%, nitrogen 75%. Templar miniseries

Palboan Empire: Under Brandon Mirac, the Palboan Empire was seized, and expanded, to include almost half the known inhabited planets, of the galaxy. 137 inhabited planets were under military control by Palbo, at its peak, by 1015 BS. Templar miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 944 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Palbo Temple Palace: The palace erected in Palbo, for the temple, and built to surpass the grandeur and esteem, of the Royal Palace of Jilta. Built around 1,025 BS. It contains 1098 rooms, and has over five hundred staff. Juggernaut miniseries

Parrock: A hybrid bird of Jilta, domesticated prior to Federation. Source; Searfinders Index PP. 1239-43. Juggernaut miniseries

Past-lives: (Terrestrial) 1. There is frequent mention of past-lives in the sixth book of the NEW-EARTH SERIES. This phenomena of a past-life is simply a person leaving his humanoid body, as a spiritual life force, and getting another humanoid baby’s body at its next birth. This is distinct to reincarnation, which allows for migration of the spirit between species. Past-life theory doesn’t subscribe to migration between species and this is the concept used in this book, past-lives. New-Earth miniseries

2. Factually there are no such things as past lives, as such. A life is a continuum of the life force in the universe, and monitors himself, and it doesn’t die. The body dies, but not the life-force, running it. So factually, the person has never lived and died a past life, he has merely lived and lived on, from a long time ago, to the present with different bodies. Juggernaut miniseries

Patua System: Planet system, nearest the Jiltanian System. New-Earth miniseries

Patu, Lorde: Ruler of Patua. New-Earth miniseries

Peel: Royal planet of Kalanon. Population 29.1 million. New-Earth miniseries

Penomb: Wife of Garnow, daughter of Tinra and Moor, of the village Greetonne, Tors. Penomb is a long-lifer, of 53 years of age. Juggernaut miniseries

Permanent Status: When a law is submitted and approved it’s provisional, but it’s put into effect straight away. After a predetermined number of years of testing the law, it goes before the Sortel again and gets ratified as a permanent law. To revert the law after that, it needed a new law be provisional and so on. Templar miniseries

Pilik: A thin rim sector, between the old Federation worlds and the Outer-Worlds. New-Earth miniseries

Pixiis: Official name is pixiis-agimius, (biotynes) the parasite that exists on southern Sleebo that was used on Rambus and other planets, to destroy populations. Templar miniseries

Planet Gega Computer: A computer That’s so large, that it can draw on sister components, a planet away, or even a system

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 945 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

away. It can run a planet and on some planets, it does. They are non-intelligent. To be most effective, there should be at least many such computers, on a planet. Juggernaut miniseries

Plant: Someone planted amongst a group to spy on them. “A plant that high amongst us?” An infiltrator, a spy, put there to steal, and pass on confidential data. New-Earth miniseries

Pleiades: (Terrestrial) 1. Star cluster known as the Pleiades, or Messier object 45 – M45 – or the Seven Sisters.

2. A cluster with seven stars known as the seven sisters containing middle aged B type stars – hot blue - in the constellation of Taurus. They were formed around 100 million years ago. The stars are 440 light-years away and about 48 light- years across. There are around 1,000 stars.

3. The name Pleiades comes from Greek mythology and the names of the seven sisters are the seven sisters from Greek mythology.

4. The Pleiades are reportedly referred to in the following ancient cultures: Maori, Australian Aboriginal, Persian, Chinese, Japanese, Mayan, Aztec, Sioux and Cherokee, Babylonian, Hindu (six mothers of war), Revelations 3:1, and perhaps is the Star of Najm referred to in the Quran. New-Earth miniseries

Pleiades: 1. There are three star systems with inhabited planets known by the Federation. They are: Thora, Lordal and Quintex, with about ten million people on each. 2. There is the Karo Series, a system with several occupied planets. When someone in this story is referring to the Pleiades as a civilization they are usually referring to these coming from the Karo system. 3. A relatively young set of stars in the Galaxy. New-Earth miniseries

Polynylop: 1. A fabric made from twisted metal thread that when intertwined with nylop produces a material that can be used to cover spacecraft skins, space suits, boots etc. It’s extremely strong, and rigid, and durable, depending on the ratio of nylop to the metal thread. Its strength varies, depending on the metal used. Polynylop is watertight to over 150 pacs, and airtight in space. 2. Polynylop 0 can be used in space suits. Polynylop 9

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 946 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

can be used in wear as desert clothing. The graded number represents how tight the thread is woven and its strength. Polynylop rope and twine, is the recommended material for tying down and securing loose objects in Federation craft. New-Earth miniseries

Powerdown boots: The boots use magnetism to give traction. They are a technology based on Broadmatter Theory, where the broadmatter gives the atoms and molecules their binding graviton attraction. The boots incite the broadmatter in the boots to cling to the molecules of the surface, that they are walking upon. Invented by Paramor Industries, Kallon. New-Earth miniseries.

Profood: They are self heating packs of food. This is the Federation equivalent of junk food, extensively used by outspacers, but high in protein and nutrient value. New-Earth miniseries

Projection-Master: A navigator of the Corduke’s ship. He would have the slight ability to project himself into the future to being in time to see events slightly ahead. Juggernaut miniseries

Proposhield: An electronic shield usually in the front of the ship that negates and or deflects laser fire. (See the Broadmatter Theory Addendum for more working data.) It operates differently to that of an Acron Shield. New Earth miniseries

Protector, of the Temple: The up righteous person, who has the sole charge of protecting the Temple, on his planet or area or region or even sector. It isn’t a solely ecclesiastic position, but rather, part ecclesiastic and part management. Jaron was the first Protector of the Temple of the Palbo Empire, spanning many sectors. He was ideally suited, being a short-lifer, and being born on Earth, the holy planet, it gave him a position, within the Temple as being more senior, than the highest of other positions, within the Temple. Jaron’s marriage to Anki, the daughter of the Master Templar, united the Palboan Temples, to those of Jilta. Juggernaut miniseries

Psycho-surgeon: Professionals from Earth who were seconded to Palbo, after Earth was introduced to the galactic civilizations, to operate of malcontents and those who would oppose the Warp Drive Bank’s rule. They introduced surgical implants, for new-born infants, the size of a grain of sand, implanted in the brain through the soft skulls of the new-born, to ensure future compliance as the child grew older. They later changed the name of their profession to the term psychrons, however the profession divided into two schools of activity. The psychrons dealt with purely the mind and non intrusive methods of implanting, while psycho-surgeons dealt with manipulating the body to change behavior. Templar miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 947 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Psychotronic mines: The mines go into Warp Drive automatically and send out millions of signals in millions of time slots. If any return, a signal is then is plotted. If there are any craft in the same time instant as the mine then it’s registered. If it can be plotted, with subsequent plots, as well then the craft can be intercepted and mined and destroyed. Time-mining it’s called. Juggernaut miniseries

Psychronics: The science of altering a person’s behavior be removing their choice and transferring the choice of behavior to another external to the subject. Outlawed in most civilized countries, popular on Earth and taught in most tertiary schools of study.

Psychrat-chamber: 1. A four pac chamber, which, when a person is placed into it, head first, it wraps itself around the person, applies a certain amount of pain and numbing sensation by the use of alternating currents to the whole body. At the same time the person is fed imagery through the eyes, to create an entire new memory for the person. Psychrons and psycho-surgeons do it. 2. Through drugging and hypnotically instructing the patient has to keep his eyes open and by projecting into the patient's eyes pictures and movies, along with a verbal sound track of the logic of what is happening and of why and what the patient is to think, the patent can be made to take up new causes, fight previous alliances and so on. A complete artificial memory can be induced, into the patient as real as any he had lived during his lifetime. Templar miniseries

Psychrons: A branch of physicians dealing in series- deprogramming, who originally came from Earth in 89 BS. They were shipped to Palbo from Earth to work with the Warp Drive Bank re-instate its control over the population, which had been liberated from the Bank by the Boguard and Felice Karo after BS 35

Psychrons are the control-fathers that the Masters on Six Worlds claim to have come from, and thereby linking their heredity line to the mind controllers of Earth from the 20th and 21st Century. Psychrons is another term for psycho-surgeons. Templar miniseries

Purge, The: Referring to the round up of the psychrons, by the populace of Palbo and beyond, after the fall of Brandon Mirac. Many psychrons and psycho-surgeons were summarily, executed. Some were interned, and some shipped to far away unpopulated world across the galaxy. The purge was unable to be controlled, and was a natural phenomenon of those, who has been mentally programmed, when they come out of the program to find what had happened to them. Juggernaut miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 948 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Quantum Drive: The sub-light method of travel during the Confederacy era of the Galaxy. Federation Warp Drives outdated the technology. New-Earth miniseries

Quiet-talk: The term used by four year old Mathew Wanten, to describe the concept of thought communication. New-Earth miniseries

Rambus: An Outer World planet discovered 789 BS. It has .96 standard Gravity. It’s mostly desert with huge lakes and weeds. There are some mountains, and in the colder area is snow on the mountains by the lakes. There is some sparse vegetation near the lakes. Oxygen is produced by the various plant growth, beneath the water of the lakes. Bauxite extraction is its primary industry. Its population was destroyed by the pirates. Rambus became a symbol to the Temple over later years, to never give up fighting back. Templar miniseries

Randolf, Imer: Captain of the IP Destroyer Ikerus. Long-lifer, son of Sari Nik and Manon Imer of Palbo CC. Has two children from a second bonding. Juggernaut miniseries.

Rangercraft: ® 1. A small spacecraft, manufactured by Rangercaft Industries Inc. of Jilta. The Rangercraft 1,2 and 3 models are sought after especially by mining enterprises, as they are economical, sturdy, and have excellent navigation systems. New-Earth miniseries

Rapid gunneries: Guns that fire over three thousand rounds of particle fire from space craft per second. Rapid gunneries work in space only, as they are generally inoperable on planets due to their excessive heat generation. New-Earth miniseries

Ratwalks: Slang Jiltanian term, for the moving pedestrian walkways, common in most central business districts. They move at 1 to 4 K, per hour. Juggernaut miniseries

Rebirthing Chamber: A small room, with transparent walls, and inside is an electronic bath, with a humanoid body, being grown, and in an electrostatic field. When a Talkron mission leaves, the personnel are hypnotically implanted, to remain in touch with a body, in such a bath. Each personnel have their own such body. (This body remains back at the base, whilst the personnel go on mission, with their regular body.) The rebirthing body is asked by a controller, what the person is doing on the mission, even though it may be billions of Ks away. The body will tell the controller, anything it knows. By the same mechanism, the controller may give the person on mission, ideas and thoughts that aren’t his own, but which he may then act upon. The personnel on mission are usually given the thought order, of not to be able to recall the rebirthing body. Most on mission are very unaware, that it exists. Juggernaut miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 949 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Recount coils: The coils used in broadmatter theory to bring about WDS operations. They cause a unifying of the different physical fields to change time and space. New-Earth miniseries

Reduction: A pirate term for administering the biotynes - the insects that burrow into human beings, mammals and destroy human populations. The insects are safely managed, using large spheres, that are sent from space down to the inhabited regions on a planet. Reduction can take from week, or months, depending on the resilience of the population being attacked. Templar miniseries

Regeneration: ® A process that Royals underwent when returning to their home in Kantee Sector. 2. Regeneration is complete body rejuvenation. 3. Regeneration is technology administered by the Warp Drive Bank. Regeneration isn’t permitted on non-royalty. New-Earth miniseries

Remote neural monitoring: (Terrestrial) If the reader wants to know more of this technology, look up RNM. It has been developed further, in response to the apparent terrorist threat. It’s reportedly being used in the USA, UK, Spain, Germany and France. (See NOTES at back) Earth Syndrome Series

Religion: (Terrestrial) means simply the organized way to explain oneself, the universe and how one fits in the cosmos now, the past, and in the future. Often answering the age old questions of who am I, what am I, do I’ve a purpose, and what happens after death? New-Earth miniseries

Residence: The home residential name for Goren Torren’s home on Jilta. It has now become the administrative center for the Houses of Torren of the Temples. New-Earth miniseries

Resurrection: The era after Earth had been introduced to the Federation, and the time when depopulation of Earth had been instigated, by the Warp Drive Bank by lifting off humanity in its billions to other worlds. It was seen as a time of healing of Sequetus 3 after it had been heavily polluted and ravaged by the short lived species of man on Earth. No one has records of those who survived the travels to new worlds or how many of those billions were lost in the ether worlds of warp drive space. The Templars kept the only true records for those they sponsored to arrive at the Outer Worlds. Templar miniseries

Rigrano: Fleet Commander serving the Palboan Fleet Command, originally born in Sleebo. Very highly decorated career officer, he saw service in Sequetus before being taken out of commission. 434 years old, son of Bubbo Brin and Dorin Rigrano of Dacal, North Sleebo. Templar miniseries

Rim sector: A sector on the rim of the galaxy, such as Timbor, Center and Maluka and so on. New-Earth miniseries E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 950 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Royal Courtyard: The courtyard, is part of the Jilta Royal Palace. The gardens of the palace go back a thousand years, or more. They are reserved for use by the ruling royalty or rulers, from the palace. There are said to contain every variety of Jilta plant life, somewhere in the courtyard, which extends for three acres, including indoors. New-Earth miniseries

Royal Palace: The royal palace of Jilta predates the Federation and the Confederated Council of Planets. It’s thousands, (perhaps seven) of years old dating back to the first one-world government of Jilta. It has three major building periods, consists of over 300 rooms, seven levels, including up to four levels underground in places. New-Earth miniseries

Royals: A tall humanoid race from the Kantee Sector of the Galaxy measuring up to 2.5 pacs tall. Royals as a race are olive complexioned, have stronger foreheads and cheek bones, and wide shoulders. Usually their hair is dark brown to black. They have a naturally high IQ. Prior to the development of W.D. Royals had no expansionist policies. Royals is sometimes capitalized – being a race, sometimes not. New-Earth miniseries

Rytoen: 1. A flying or gliding animal, with a loud frightening scream, said to be carnivorous. It lives 185 years, and grows to about four meters long. 2. It could be said to be similar to a dragon in Earth folk lore. 3. Rytoen live beyond the portal, and are used, to hunt down renegades on the planetoid Yildon. The scientist, Yablin Markel, developed the Rytoen on the Six Worlds group of planets. There are 25 rytoen, at any one time. They don’t have the ability to reproduce. When one rytoen dies, another is created in the planet’s laboratories. New Earth miniseries

Sandrist: A small rim planet in the far-Outer-Worlds, comprising 27 million people, mainly refugees from the Outer-Worlds, after the Brandon Mirac era of the Palbo Empire conquest. One fifth of its surface is water, the rest, desert regions. It’s now self-sufficient, is a substance economy, with almost no trade, with any other planets. Religion: Predominantly Torrenists, or Church of Torren. Juggernaut miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 951 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Santonia (Santona) Galaxy: 1. Named after astronomer Rel Santonia, who mapped the Galaxy for space travel seventy-five thousand standard years ago. 2. The name for the Galaxy in Federation is Santonia Galaxy or Santona Galaxy. The terrestrial name is simply Galaxy, or Milky Way, which has exactly the same meaning. Galaxy means a milky way. Galaxy is capitalized when referring to the galaxy we are in, as it’s the name of our galaxy – Galaxy. Galaxy and Santonia Galaxy mean the same. Galaxy is terrestrial, and Santonia Galaxy is Federation. New-Earth miniseries

Scram: 1. A blend of vitaminized protein cereal, and dried parrock egg. Origin, Jilta Academia for Martial Conquest. 2. Any form of mixed protein food, mashed (mixed) to make a meal. Juggernaut miniseries

Screens, ship: Aboard battlecraft are different types of screens. They aren’t linked to a central computer, but rather are run as completely isolated computers with their own separate attendants. These are datascreens, which access data; and commscreens, which access communications going in, out and around a ship; viewscreens, for general display of information, briefings and so on. There are mapscreens for showing overlay, ground enhancement and positions in space. For security of data these systems are physically never linked. New-Earth miniseries

Searfinders Index: ® 1. The two hundred and seventy-three reference volume set of books That’s used to standardize galactic cultures and education, which had been missing under the Confederacy. Searfinders Publishing Industries Inc. is headquartered in the Kantee Sector and has half a million staff around Santonia. Searfinders publish over 1,800 daily, weekly, monthly and quarterly publications through the Galaxy. 2. Searfinders are a conglomerate of publishing divisions. They have a mandate to accumulate and publish data, for the cultural future of humanoids, to bring about an improving civilization. 3. Searfinders are an aligned body of publishing houses. New-Earth miniseries

Sector: The region of space controlled by a Royal family within the Santonia Galaxy. A sector can have a million stars, of which only a few hundred are barely habitable. Some Sectors, Duchies, may have only a thousand stars of which only a few may have habitable planets. New-Earth miniseries

Sectoral Space: That space within the sector, three dimensional, which includes all the written and interpreted boundaries making up the sector and all its systems as a whole. Juggernaut Series.

Security Council of Palbo: The body of 13 men, six military, seven non-military, that answer to the President, and who preside over all security matters of the planet and its empire. Templar miniseries E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 952 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Sequetus: The solar system that includes Earth. The system is wondrous in all the different types of planets that are involved, and that Sequetus 3 and 4 are or were habitable. From Latin, sequi, meaning to follow. New-Earth miniseries

Sequetus 3: 1. Earth (terrestrial name). Fully colonized and expanding. It’s in pre-intervention stage of development. 6 billion inhabitants.

2. (Terrestrial) One natural satellite – moon. Diameter 7,654 miles - 12,654 km, 90 million miles (149.6 million km) from the sun. Density 5.5 times water. New-Earth miniseries

Sequetus 4: 1. Mars (terrestrial name). A planet that once boasted a large colony of some seven hundred thousand colonists. The planet was terminated and colonists moved to Sequetus 3. Named after one of the early explorers of the CCP, Mares Bey who gained a ruthless reputation in slaughtering local inhabitants.

2. (Terrestrial) Mars is 141.6 million miles or 228 million miles from the sun. Diameter 4,208 miles, or 6,787 kms. Its red color comes from the iron rich mineral surface. Tenuous carbon dioxide atmosphere. New-Earth miniseries

Sequetus Series: 1. The series of habitable planets in the Sequetus system. Series as a title applied only to systems that contain more than one habitable planet. Sequetus has Sequetus 3 and Sequetus 4 as its series. Sequetus 4 is barely habitable today but has been so in the past, and therefore qualifies for the title of Sequetus System to be upgraded to the title of Sequetus Series. 2. A System is the title of a star with one habitable planet. A Series is the title of a star with two or more habitable planets. New-Earth miniseries

Series deprogramming: 1. A form of mental and administrative exercises which may be as light as a short mission debrief, but could be as intrusive as removing memories, by the use of otherwise illegal controversial means. This may involve electrocution to the brain, removal of parts of the brain, microwaving to cook the brain, or ingesting chemicals to prevent the brain from operating. 2. On Sequetus 3 series deprogramming is done in psychiatric institutions and laws have been set in place to enable it to be administered by qualified Malukan agents (or others), as a legal therapy. New-Earth miniseries

Shaman: (Terrestrial) n. priest or clan witch doctor, claiming to have sole contact with gods etc.: hence n, shamanistic a. [f. G schamane & Russ. Shaman f. Tungusian saman.] (Oxford Dictionary) New-Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 953 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Sharman, the Great: 1. The sole person responsible for speaking to and being able to understand the spiritual deity of Goren Torren. To be the Great Sharman one needed to be able to transmigrate through time itself to be able to contact the Holy Torren. 2. The title was first accepted by John W. Anderson on Earth. In the two thousand years after the graduation of the Holy Torren in BS 31, there have been five holders of the title of The Great Sharman. 3. Sharman is an alteration of the word shaman. New-Earth miniseries

Shanar: Title pronounced upon a person by The Master Templar. Technically it isn’t a name but is received as a title. Such a person has to reach a certain mental and spiritual enlightenment state, as well as certain physical ability, before being granted Shanarian recognition. This was the title given to the public relations officer of the Master Templar 2020. New-Earth miniseries

Sheril: Born 987 BS, in the north east Amazon to an Indian tribe named Brud. Had one son, Yandra, to then husband Jaron Manquin, and moved to Yaltipia of the Pleiades. Templar miniseries

Shocksuit, Shock-suit: ® 1. Space wear for military duty in the Hymondian and some other sectors, manufactured by Hard Ware Enterprises Inc. Also worn by Boguard.

2. The shocksuit is designed to absorb blows and distribute the load of such physical shock around the body, so that no one place is overloaded with impact. The result is that the wearer is able to exert himself far greater with far less risk of damage. The standard shocksuit colors are dress-white, black, grey, sand, buff, and jungle green and navy blue. All the above colors are available in camouflage as well as special order colors. New-Earth miniseries

Short-lifers: Those who live a lifespan of between 70 – 150 years thereabouts. Until the emigration of peoples of Earth into the galaxy, short-liferism was listed as a physical treatable disease of the DNA. Short-lifer then became a derogatory term meaning someone with Earth ancestors. New-Earth miniseries

Shroud: 1. The manifestation of making something invisible to normal eyesight. It can be done by various means. One is to bend light rays around the subject. Another is to project a false picture of what is there. 2. Shrouds can be placed in position, by one source and that is a 1D (one dimension) shroud. The almost perfect shroud is placed there by four sources, a 4D shroud. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Siltonia: Sector, with Ranwick as the Capital and Royal Planet. Siltonia, also known as Silto, was a major ally of Jilta during the Battle of Sequetus 3. After the Royals slowly vanished the sector elevated to being a democratically run republic. New-Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 954 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Six Worlds, the: The name given to the six planetoids beyond the portal. The six worlds comprise: Yildon, the home of Vila and the Masters. Tibel, the home of Centrecom. Vauxou, Paleno, Ferrow, and Julipor. New-Earth Series

Skanes, Marly: Fellow biology student with Chelo Bade, at Academia Alson. Daughter of Vip Zed and Mono Skanes, of Jilta PC. They were offered a job at the Bank, after finding out, that their thesis was an astounding success. Juggernaut miniseries

Sleebo: Outer planet in the Malukan sector near the central rim. A cold planet much of which is frozen. After the Earth intervention day the planet became a major trading partner with Earth, due to the very close proximity, and a wealth of resources for the Templars. Templar miniseries.

Small Magellanic Cloud: This is a dwarf galaxy, meaning it is small, and not spiralling, like the Milky Way. It was used by small vessels in the South Pacific to navigate by, and is quite visible to the naked eye, at night. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Snow-trekkers: Ski operated vehicles, with four tracks and three skis. Made in Palbo. Usually rigged with cabins with seating for up to five. Juggernaut miniseries

Solan: 1. Planet in the Federation that previously was relegated to backwaters after severe economic depression. Solan was a mining planet that relied heavily on computer manufacture, but was wiped out economically after the Medallian Rebellion. 2. Remote province in Centor Sector. New-Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 955 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Soldo: An inner Pleiadian colony planet, of the Karo Series. It has had human habitation and pioneers for 300 years, population 3 million. New-Earth miniseries

Solus: The center of a system, star system source of heat and light. Note; a solus isn’t simply a star. A star must have a system of classified orbiting natural bodies, in order to be classed as the system's solus. New-Earth miniseries

Sortet: The annual Grand Meeting lasting two weeks, of the House of Torren. All Temples from the civilized world are represented. Traditionally the Sortet is on Jilta on the same date every standard year. Templar miniseries

Standard atmospheric: 1. A term applied to atmosphere pressures. This can vary to extremes. It’s a relative term. 2. Sequetus 3 is 95% Standard Atmospheric, while Mars is 2%, Jupiter varies from 800% and above. 3. 1.0 is Standard Atmospheric. New-Earth miniseries

Standard Book of Records. A subsidiary of Searfinders Index for government data records. New-Earth miniseries

Standard Centre: A relative measure from the center of a Galaxy. 0.0 is absolute center. 1.0 being very the outside rim. The measurement is decided on the proportion of mass within the nominated figure, not distance. Example 0.3 has 0.3 of the mass of the Galaxy to the center of the orbital position nominated. New- Earth miniseries

Standard Galactic (SG): 1. The language that was forcefully imposed upon Galaxy administrators after Federation conquest. Local languages still represent most dialogue, and there are over a million different languages in the Federation. New-Earth miniseries

Standard Gravity: The gravity of the original royal planet is 1.0. All other planet gravities are a comparison to this by the term Standard Gravity. New-Earth miniseries

Standard-year, Standard Year, standard year: 1. A standard- year is the measure of average time, which all the Royal Planets take to traverse one full annual cycle around their solus. Whilst each planet has its own local-year, and measures time on the planet in Earth-years, Jiltanian-years, and so on, there is a standard-year that all years can be measured against, and That’s by taking all the royal planets and making the average time of each of those years, a standard-year. 2. By using this as a benchmark, it means that all planets have had an input into making the standards upon which the Federation is built. 3. A standard-year is 1.0595 earth-years. New-Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 956 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Starion: An animal for riding, burden, and for racing; bred on Jilta. New-Earth miniseries

Station-City: The manmade city in space that has up to 150,000 inhabitants. It’s where warp drives are manufactured and where they get their energy. It’s the most secret thing the Bank has. It’s off the cross roads of all travel, away from systems, away from planets, highly secured. Juggernaut Series

Station-ship: Ships 1. Ships that aren’t designed for travel, which are simply there, as research vessels, in a region. 2. Overgrowner is a slang term for them, as they were often added to, during their life, to a point where they were unable to be transferred. They had over-grown. Often, they had no warp drive transport system, as they never expected to move them. 3. A large stationary vessel used by the Warp Drive Bank to bring life into the physical universe, from the alternative life-universe, beyond. They can be as small as only having a few dozen crew, or as large as having hundreds of thousands of crew, verging on becoming a manmade planetoid. Often these are also called Station Cities. Juggernaut miniseries

Steel, Randal: Hallowman, first class. 33 years old. Son of William Steel and Fi Smith, from Jilta. Graduated with honors the Jiltanian Academy. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Storm, Anqi: Malukan garrison trooper on Sequetus 4, daughter of Jarn Storm and Maggri Bulin. Born on Sleebo. Anqi Storm assisted Goren Torren in his work in setting up the defense of Sequetus 3. Grew up in Sleebo. Storm Island off the coast of Ankrass in Sleebo is named after her, as well as the Anqi Marine Park, also off Ankrass. She was deemed one of the Temples of Sequetus 3. See the definition of Temple. New-Earth miniseries

Strikers: Attack craft of the Boguard, not dissimilar to fighters, but which move at the use of thought, accelerate approximating the speed of thought, and which can actually alter position in space solely determined by thought. Templar miniseries

Struck-fighting: The martial art of fighting with stunners, called strucks. Popular in the Jiltanian out worlds. Outlawed in many planets. The struck has a 2,000 volt charge, but low amps. New- Earth miniseries

Sumer: (Terrestrial) An ancient region, in southwestern Asia, in present day Iraq. It sprung from city-states that became Babylon; from the 4th Century BC. Sumer is the first of the known recorded civilizations. The civilization began around 4,000 BC. They drained marshes, created Cuneiform writing, used taxation, had a history of the cosmos, and knew of the planets Neptune and Pluto, which couldn’t be seen without telescopes. They wrote and recorded on about fifty thousand baked clay tablets, which were

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 957 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

stored in libraries. The tablets were inscribed with a stylus, and baked hard, and unlike papyrus, didn’t get destroyed over time. When the Western powers invaded Iraq, one of the first major points called upon was the Iraq museum, which had 10,000 such tablets. Trucks arrived at the museum as US allied soldiers took the city. Caucasians staffed the trucks. The tablets haven’t been seen, since. (See NOTES of Book 21) Earth Syndrome miniseries

Sumerian Communication Devices: The devices on the wrists of this race are in sculptures and carvings, shown through many years, on many statues’ wrists. It is only the people with wings that wear the devices. See the photographs in Notes Sumer. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Superrise: A building that exceeds 200 floors. Predominant in countries with climate extremes or which have excess population problems.

Superrises could have up to seven floors of shops and offices and service industries below it. It could also have underground rail stations inside it. New-Earth miniseries

Suppressor-plates: Plates which absorb lasers in battle. These are defense plates that allowed the lasers to hit, absorb and transfer the energy of laser fire, rather that deflect the energy with proposhields. Thus CCP military craft were bigger and heavier than Federation craft so as to be able to absorb laser fire. New- Earth miniseries

Superior Council of Talkrons: The most senior body of Talkron. It can be the most senior on a planet, a system, or a sector, or even bigger. There is no limit to size. The governing factor is ability. Juggernaut miniseries

Supreme Council of Palbo: A full bench of nine judiciary that approved laws, and proclamations, put into effect by the President of Palbo. They are non-political and are drawn from the legal fraternity usually. 2. Some say the Supreme Council are only a rubber stamp for the planetary President’s Office, while the council was formed so as to curb excessive abuse of power. Templar miniseries

System-alignment ports: Whilst Warp Drives will work without the ports, only the drives themselves would be transported. To include the entire craft, its occupants and craft in the transportation, the crew and ship need to vibrate in harmony and synchronize with the Warp Drives. That’s the job of the system alignment ports. They polarize the electrons of all matter within the ship so that the Warp Drives recognize the ship and its load as itself, and transport it all accordingly. Port means to travel, teleport, transport, port, so systems-alignment port means traveling with the alignment of a whole system. Normally E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 958 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

alignment takes a variable time depending on the volume to be transported. New-Earth miniseries

System Security: The security personnel of a planet, a ship or a station. New-Earth miniseries

System, Warp Drive: A Warp Drive system is the hardware of the drives plus the integration circuitry as well as the intellectual knowledge of WD making up the full workable Warp Drive product. New-Earth miniseries

Taborack: A distant rim planet, in the far-Outer-Worlds, inhabited by less than three million. Recently settled, less than 120 years, but with a great influx of Templar refugees, upon the fall of the dictator, Brandon Mirak. Templar miniseries

Tagora, Grant, Marshal: A distinguished Corduke, who when Jilta was overrun by the Palboans, and Brandon Mirak, he never surrendered, and instead waged a guerilla war, from the nearby mountains against the Palboan military junta, on Jilta. After the liberation of Jilta and the freeing of the Master Templar, Grant Tagora and the Master Templar became close associates, and Tagora one of the closest advisors to the Royal Palace. After the invasion of Kantee, and the liberation of life there, Tagora was asked to head up the Hallowmen unit, answerable to only the Master Templar. Earth Syndrome Series

Talax: 1. Fabled, but also a real planet, where the Royals are said to come from originally. Whilst no history books actually record its existence as real, it’s said that in one of the myths it was an early Outer World, beyond Migor of the sector Timbor. New- Earth miniseries 2. The system is real, as is the planet Talax. It’s where the race comes from that were selected to be the bodies for the Royals. They are a two meter tall race or taller. Juggernaut miniseries.

Talker: A visual phone of Sandrist. Common, cheap, and used by satellite relay. Mostly available at some expense, when a city exceeds a million people. Before that, communication is by radio wave or in-ground cable. Juggernaut miniseries

Talkron: 1. The branch of a former race, of which the Aaron came from, that was thought extinct but still exists. It originated from a rim system, many millennia ago. 2. The Talkron bird that lives 25 years, similar to falcons in Sequetus. 3. They had been found to be involved in the rise of Brandon Mirak, placing agents within the Federation key civilian positions to subvert its society. Its real origins unknown. Its overall purpose still obscure. Juggernaut Series

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 959 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Tallum: A giant planet, in the Karo Series in the Pleiades. It has six moons, one of which is planned for colonization. Target date 4,000 years. New-Earth miniseries

Tarj Himble: Tarj means holy place in Palboan, and himble means hall. It’s the holiest and largest ecclesiastic set of buildings in Palbo. 28 buildings, 17,000 staff and comprise a full suburb of Palbo C.C. It has its own universities, three secondary schools, a large monastery, its own security guard, and its rule is autonomous to the civilian government of Palbo. Juggernaut miniseries

Tema: Administrative Member, of the Confederated Council of Planets. New-Earth miniseries

Templars: 1. Those who are the clergy of the House of Torren and the Temple, and who follow the Temples of Sequetus 3. 2. Those following the way of the Temple. Lay and clergy alike. Templar Series

Temple: 11. The term temple doesn’t mean a building that holds religious relics and statues. The term temple here means the body of the person who holds the spirit of Torren to their way of being. Every person who became a follower of Torren, and adopted some or all his teachings was referred to as a Temple of Torren.

2. There were some temples of Torren who were posthumously elevated to Temple-Status (sainthood) as being the pillars of the Temple movement. There is the Foundation Temple, and five Temple and five Minor Temple statuses as follows: Templar miniseries

Foundation Temple:

Goren Torren Temple Navia Charlton Temple Mepat Temple Letone Temple Felice Karo Temple Anqi Storm

Lesser Temple Mathew Wanten Lesser Temple Arlon Doctrains Lesser Temple Jenny Wanten

Minor-Temple Erin Torb Minor-Temple Hymondy III Templar miniseries

Temple Expansion Program: The 20 year program that the Temple runs, to expand its influence and membership across the galaxy. Juggernaut miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 960 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Temple Guard: The general guard of the Temple. Around 15 million Temple guardsmen were in the Federation and the Outer- Worlds by 1038 BS. Juggernaut miniseries

Temple Minor: A smaller temple, a subsidiary temple. A Temple could have as many as ten, or ten thousand Temple Minors. A Temple Minor could have as many as a hundred thousand members, with smaller local Missions consisting of thousands of members. Temple Minors and Missions are all temples. Templar miniseries

Temple Proper: The general guard, of the Temple. Around 15 million Temple guardsmen were in the Federation and the Outer- Worlds by 1038 BS. Juggernaut miniseries

Temple Robes: These are the formal wear of the Temple for court. They are: * Six multi-colors with tapestry design, the Master Templar. * Three colors with tapestry design, a Cordello. * Two Colors with tapestry design, a Temple Planet Leader. * Two colors with no tapestry, a Temple Regional Leader. * Gold, a Templar of The Court. * Red, Green, blue, or white are for minor rankings, and aren’t seen at court. * Black, given to honored Templars of the Boguard. Juggernaut miniseries

Temple Security: The security arm of the Temple movement. It handles the straight security affairs of the Temple. But it also has gotten involved in small clandestine activities as needed, such as hunting down pirates and where they originate. Templar miniseries

Temples: The buildings that are congregation points for those who follow the word of Goren Torren. Templar miniseries

Temples of Sequetus 3: The above eleven are the Temples of Sequetus 3. Templar Series

Temple Tribunal Affairs: The ecclesiastic body That’s a court, internally within the Temple. It can hear and adjudicate any crime committed, within it. Its powers are far sweeping. Its purpose is to protect the Temple. Juggernaut miniseries

Tending the rail: (Terrestrial) The executive stands at the rail at the side of the ship, to acknowledge new people as they board that ship. The rail is by the gangplank. Juggernaut miniseries.

Ten-Pointed Star of Sequetus:

1. The star has the following symbolism: In the center is the sun, source of persistence. It gives life to the eight planets and many planetoids of Sequetus. They are in the order closest to the sun:

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 961 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

being Mercury, on out to Eris. The ten points are indicate the green for life, dark blue for water, and pale blue for air. The shades of gray represent the other planets. The black represents space.

2. It’s said to be a Boguard symbol and if one was to fix his stare on the star for five minutes the star starts to rotate within the wheel, as does the sun.

3. (Terrestrial) There are 5 known planetoids, three additional to Pluto and Eris. There are likely a lot more yet to be found. There are 8 planets and 5 planetoids, or dwarf planets recognized in this solar system.

4. The Federation recognizes the ten planets of Sequetus in the Searfinders Index and no more. New-Earth miniseries

Tesla, Nikola: (Terrestrial) 1856 – 1943 Electrical Engineer, US inventor, born in Croatia; he developed the first alternating-current induction motor, as well as many differing forms of oscillators, wireless guidance systems, and the now famous Tesla coils.

He is one of the most famous inventors of all time. He had as one of his projects, free power for all mankind, using nothing but the atmosphere for the source of power. That light he is holding below, connects only to the atmosphere.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 962 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

(See Notes at the back of this volume.) The coils appear to be a source of perpetual energy, drawn from the atmosphere, or surrounding space. One of his plans was to get his coils to be a free source of energy, for mankind. There are many, such mass produced coils, today, that can be bought on the free market. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Theocracy: (Terrestrial) A rule by religion, or a religious order. Coming from Theo meaning God. Templar miniseries

The Way: The Boguard training and realization activity and program, that when adhered to, brings about the states of self- recognition and understanding, that enables a person to transform into being Boguard. It’s by invitation only. Templar miniseries

Throne: Slang. The special ornately carved seat, for Lorde Hymondy, at the end of the Great Hall. Whilst it’s used for meetings it also has a military function, meaning to sink down, into a battle mode of command. New-Earth miniseries

Tilk: The administrative planet, of the Serene System. New-Earth miniseries

Tilon: Planet in the Federation, which previously was relegated to backwaters after severe economic depression. It’s a mining planet that once relied heavily on computer manufacture. It was wiped out economically after the Medallian Rebellion. New-Earth miniseries

Timbor: A rim-sector on the rim, between the Centor sector and Pilk. Lower Timbor is nearest the very edge of the galaxy. New- Earth miniseries

Time: 1. That component of the physical universe, that gives the universe its consecutive qualities. Perhaps it’s the grease, which allows the universe to exist. It’s considered that for each person, there is a different existence of time, and that by common grouping

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 963 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

of experiences we’ve a physical universe agreement called time. 2. The Boguard have a program to alter time, so that the myriad of infinite number of time parallels can exist, the physical universe travels down a time continuum That’s the best survival for human kind. However, it could be changed if one were able to go forward or backwards, down that continuum, which is theoretically possible, under Aaron principles of time conservation laws. Templar miniseries

Time, The: The Early works prophesize, that at The Time, a magi will appear from Sequetus 3 and save the Galaxy from an encroaching evil. The Early Works outline the clues, which will show the Time. Templar miniseries

Time and space. Both time and space are properties of broadmatter. Time needs space and space needs time. They are invariably linked. One can’t have one without the other. Broadmatter is so small that it can move in space through time. See Broad Matter Theory Addendum. Templar miniseries

Time tracks: The physical universe is an agreed universe. Each life form has its agreement to be in it. The universes pass through time from one agreement to the next. To get to a time track in the future one needs agreement. There could be millions of time tracks available, but only one that all life agrees to. Juggernaut miniseries.

Time-mining: See psychotronic mines. Time-mining was outlawed after the Far Federation fell to the joint forces of the Boguard, the Pleiades, and Earth. New-Earth miniseries

Time Warping: The work of changing time, by sending one’s attention through time, to change your own mind. In the Boguard, there were around three hundred who had been trained to time warp. By changing their own minds, in the past, by efforts of déjà vu, they could alter the future, by getting themselves to have hunches, gut feelings, on what to do. These three hundred Boguard effectively though time, became the Boulan. Earth Syndrome miniseries.

Tinkly: Garrison planet run by the Hymondian realm within the Malukan sector. It’s a very dry planet with lakes and vegetation toward the poles. It has a 0.4 standard atmosphere, which is breathable. New-Earth miniseries

Torish: Boyfriend of Marly Skanes, Bank representative, and traveler to station-city, of Mortifor. Agent of the Warp Drive Bank during his time with Marly Skanes. History before meeting Marly, unknown. Juggernaut miniseries

Torren Crest: The adopted symbol of Goren Torren, Magi.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 964 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The crest is simply a smaller star at the bottom, being oneself – a small spirit looking for betterment. That spirit rises up and becomes larger, as it’s more fulfilled by the philosophy of Goren Torren. Up is the traditional direction of attainment and growth.

The outward thrust of the five pointed star represents the outward drive of the spiritual being as it trusts outwards to control the universe around it. One has more control as a larger star.

The white background symbolizes the spirit and its everywhereness through the universe. The initials TG are simply the physical world representation of the body, the agreed form and the name of Goren Torren.

Commissioned by Felice Karo and inspired by the PR firm, Galbaty and Michaels of New York. New-Earth miniseries

Torren, Goren: Independent of service to Lorde Hymondy, of Jilta, tenth generation descendent to Phil Torell. Son of Betta and Bil Torren. See Goren Torren. For more data read the NEW- EARTH SERIES. New-Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 965 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Torrens: Provincial capital city, in southern Sandrist. Population 230,000. Boasts over 200 Churches of Torrens, and 150 schools. Juggernaut Series

Torren, The: A way of referring or mentioning Goren Torren, as the Foundation Temple, of the Templar movement. Templar miniseries

Torren Works: The complete unabridged lectures, interviews, and written words of Goren Torren. It comprises over thirty lecture series and up to ten lectures, a series. It includes all speeches, of which the most important, was in the United Nations, at his assassination. It also includes a twenty-volume encyclopedic set of books, about his entire life, including when he was on Jilta, as an independent for Lorde Hymondy. Juggernaut miniseries

Tors: A planet in lower Timbor, where Jaron’s bloat found sanctuary. 63% water, 73% oxygen. Inhabited. Juggernaut miniseries

Touch-talk: This is brail. The term given to old brail writing when discovered on Manhattan Island BS 1038 by local inhabitants. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Trabune: The Boguard, who accompanies Arden to Carridan, and then to station-city, Mortifor. Juggernaut miniseries

Traditional-form: The traditional battle-formation of fleet versus fleet was cruisers at the center, destroyers on the flanks, with interceptors and fighters placed where needed. Usually this is a wide flat approach. After Sequetus this was found to be an ineffective fleet formation. New-Earth miniseries

Trans Galactic Ship Corporation: This Corporation started fifty standard years, before the Battle of Sequetus 3, in Maluka. It started as opposition to the Imperial Federation Warp Drive Bank. It was eventually amalgamated, with the Imperial Federation Warp Drive Bank. It has around a quarter of a million employees on Maluka and is the most powerful organization in the Malukan region. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Trell: Administrative Member of the Confederated Council of Planets. New-Earth miniseries

Triangulum Galaxy: It is part of the Local Group of 54 galaxies, of which the Milky Way is part. Also known as the Pinwheel Galaxy. It is an unbarred spiral galaxy. There are three spiral galaxies in the Local Group. The Triangulum Galaxy is the third largest. Earth Syndrome miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 966 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Trolley-bus: On cruisers and destroyers there are electric carts called a trolley-bus. They carry weapons, parts and so on, but can also carry passengers. Templar miniseries

Trooper: The basic military fixed force personnel of space. Troopers answer to PMG and IFFCo. A trooper serves in space command posts, and small military outposts. The training of troopers is similar to that of guardsmen, and the basic rank of trooper and guardsmen is alike. New-Earth miniseries

Truth, a: The Great Sharman explains a truth as being something that can’t be broken down into further explanation; that which needs no further explaining. New-Earth miniseries

Tube: The local term given to the rail cars, which travel the undertubes of Jilta P.C. and other Jilta cities. Juggernaut miniseries

Tubin: Second son to Jaron and Anki, born on Palbo, and an heir to his father’s empire. He, being a mix of short and a part long-life could live to an expected age of 140 years. Juggernaut miniseries

Tugract: A small heavy lifting ship used for dense planets to lift craft into space. It has lots of grunt, but no speed. The Tugract corps are specialized Federation engineers. New-Earth miniseries

Tugs: The space stations from which elevators work. Tugs support ten elevators each. New-Earth Series

Tunno-car: A small vehicle used in the underground tunnels of Yaltipia. It’s electrically powered, from electricity generated thermally under Yaltipia. It can seat two or four people, travel at speeds of up to 500 Ks. The cars are centrally coordinated for traffic control and computerized to arrive at their destination as swiftly as programmed. Templar miniseries

Underthought: The lower more depraved forms, of thought. Underthought is shrouded with evil, and its intent is to harm other life. New-Earth miniseries

Undertube: The rail beneath the city. The Jilta undertube is over 3,000 Standard Years old, and is on seven levels, each varying in age and technology. As the systems became old, it was cheaper to install new tunnels, than refurbish older ones. Jilta became riddled with tunnels. Juggernaut miniseries

Unison, unison-mind, and unison action: Whereby all minds present are strong enough to feel the presence of each other’s minds and then act in coordination with the other minds to bring about a single agreed upon effect into the physical universe. New- Earth miniseries

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 967 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Universes: By universes is defined as: the universe of the individual. There is the shared and common physical universe, but there is also the universe, of each individual life force. This number of universes, could number trillions or quadrillions or millions timers more than that. Such universes could overlap in common universes, and the greatest overlap was the physical universe. In the physical universe, there is time, which may not exist, on the other universes. The way to make the physical universe certain in the future, was to get agreement on the individual universes. (Note: This isn’t a new concept, but borrowed from a greater philosopher than this author, to explain this phenomenon.) Juggernaut miniseries

Vacuum Vault: A space within a planet, big enough to accommodate a Boguard spacecraft. The void is vacuum-sealed, so craft can warp in and warp out, from within it. Juggernaut miniseries

Vernal Karum: Head of Special Security on Moon Arano of Maluka. He has no known relatives that he can recall. Age 456 standard years. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Vestige Crime: Vestige means a mark or memory. A vestige- crime is a crime that looks like it isn’t a crime, but it really is a crime, against the memory and mark of the state. A vestige-crime is a crime of slander against the state, sedition. This is a serious crime in Maluka and has been on its statute books for well over a millennium. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Vicra Starn: Born in Norway of Earth shortly after the Battle of Sequetus 3. She was always interested in stars and UFOs. She just happened to be at the crash-retrieval site of an interceptor in Norway and reported it to the authorities. They visited her and no further action was taken. She then was at another retrieval site and this time met and spoke to Federation troopers, and to a Boguard (Letone). She informed Vicra’s parents of this, and they made reports to the authorities; and subsequently they died in a rail accident. The Boguard Letone brought Vicra off planet; as he had been monitoring her for two years.

She attended Guardsman and Trooper basic courses and was adopted by Commander’s Care (a trust the Commander set up to deal with children who saw IFFCo activities prior to Intervention and who in turn were removed off-planet when other means wasn’t available, so as to prevent them from further harm by agents or renegade Earth agencies.) When she was 12 years old, she was brought to the Flagship. There she later met Independent Torren, became involved in intervention activities. She married Mathew Torren in BS 36 and had children and died on planet Earth.

2. Aka Anqi Storm in her earlier life, and deemed a Temple of Sequetus 3. See the definition of Temple. New-Earth miniseries E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 968 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Viewspeak: An audio visio phone, but which is voice command activated and programmed, to respond to certain callers. Manufactured by Speakeasy Viewing Systems Jilta. New-Earth miniseries

Vila: The first alien person met by Independent Torren upon passing through the portal at Ground Zero. He becomes a traveling companion to Independent Torren and Felice from the Pleiades. New Earth Series

Visio: Slang for: visio screens on a craft or office. New-Earth miniseries

Viton: Planet under Malukan control. New-Earth miniseries

Volunteer: A term given by Man-o-Wars, to those beings that are working with the Talkron. Plus, see the term othersider in this instance. Also, refer to the renegade Angalian. Apparently, they operate from beyond the physical universe, but interfere within it. Earth Syndrome series.

Warp Drive: The faster-than-light speed travel around the Federation. Theoretically possible at the speed of light squared. See also Imperial Federation Warp Drive Bank. See Broadmatter Theory Addendum. New-Earth miniseries

Warp Drive Coils: The faster-than-light speed travel around the Federation. Theoretically possible at the speed of light squared. See also Imperial Federation Warp Drive Bank. See Broadmatter Theory Addendum. New-Earth miniseries

Warp Drive Coils: “Before them was the coil that circled the entire rear perimeter of the ship. It was the Warp Drive coil, and moved them from the now universe into another smaller universe which was only theirs, from which they could travel at accelerating speeds beyond the relative speed of light.

As free electrons surged into the coils, and then reversed, it created a charged field. That field was interwoven with another field, which was woven around the previous field, like coils around coils. The fields didn’t cancel each other out but instead created a greater field that extended over the whole ship. The influenced was hyperbolical, increased by smaller coils around the larger ones. Soon all the ship and its components would start to harmonize in resonance with the coil fields. Then the final accelerators would play. Around the coils small electronic particles would be accelerated. They cut the field from time itself. The ship could then be edged into the future or back into the past by nanoseconds.”

“Before them, was the dark grey void of space. No stars, no coil, nothing. All she saw was black, as though all before her, had E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 969 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

absorbed all light. Navia couldn’t determine how far the coil went up, but she felt it must have been sixty pacs. She looked towards the sides, nothing. It wasn’t as though the coil was black, or missing, but rather like a dark black fog shrouded the coil and it was prevented from being seen. The blackness had no edges, no corners or center. It felt as though you could simply walk into it to vanish forever.”

“The coil was a series of spikes, like millions of tiny tentacles they waved from a central band”

“The Drives occupy their own universe, or are at least accessed from a different universe.” New-Earth miniseries

Warmsuit: ® A one or two piece multilayered suit That’s thermostatically set to keep the body warm by warming layers separately within it. The suit has ten layers with glass and metal fibers, which conduct energy from the inner to outer layers. The suit has a thermal inducing battery within the lining. This stores electrical current, so as to transfer heat. As the suit’s outer layers cool to sub zero temperatures the suit uses battery power to warm the suit’s metallic layers. The cold outside air contracts and shrink the suit fabric, trapping warm air therein. As the suit warms, it then expands; allowing trapped warm air to ventilate out, permitting cooling. Also see Electroware. Made by Suit Enterprises, Dalka, and Jilta. New-Earth miniseries

Warren Walters: Hallowman First Class. Son of Betty and Bruce Walters of Jilta. Graduated Jilta Academia with first class honors. 33 years of age. Earth Syndrome miniseries

WDs: Warp Drives New-Earth miniseries

Weather Suits: Wear That’s the principle winter wear of Sleebo. The outer skin is an (imitation) fur lined, loose fitting garments. Shock suits are now often worn beneath. With the fur the dress looks baggy and unfinished. 2. Weather suit is a generic term and not a trademarked apparel item. Templar miniseries

Wellum: A life-force, which inhabits a Boguard Man-o-War, but who had been previously captured, and forced to run a Federation Warp Drive ship, and who was freed in the Battle of Kantee. He belongs to the Angalian race. Earth Syndrome miniseries.

Wheelie: ® A wheeled electric ground vehicle for mining camps. Dozens of models available. Maximum speed 15 Ks. Initially manufactured by the Wheelie Vehicle Co. Inc., Telco, Kinetics Province. Templar miniseries

Word, the: The Master Templar was given a spiritual understanding, through insight, that he was the chosen one, to promote the testimony of Goren Torren. This undertaking came to E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 970 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

him as a moment of revelation, during in deep meditation called the Word. Templar miniseries

Xelofom: Royal leader in Karacas, before the uprising. He believed that by placing mental implants into the brains of people, one could control the thoughts of the many, from an external source. He thought this would eradicate war, poverty and bring about an ideal society. It did the reverse, and led to the Karacas uprising. He was tortured by his own people and parts of his body dismembered while alive. New-Earth miniseries

Yalo, FSS Destroyer: Sandrist destroyer, under the command of Commander Polton Beel. It was the fleet lead destroyer, for the invasion of the Sequetus Series. Earth Syndrome miniseries

Yaltipia: Karo 4, of the Karo Series. It is the larger of the binary planets of Yaltipia and Orbat. Yaltipia is the home of the Boguard, and Aaron race. It varies in gravity around 1.4 standard. It has 28% water coverage. New-Earth miniseries

Yambol: Local villager of Tors, from Greetonne, who befriended Jaron. About 15 years of age. Juggernaut miniseries

Yandra: 1 Son of Jaron and Sheril of the Amazon, born on Yaltipia, to be Boguard. He was the first short-lifer, born as Aaron on Yaltipia two years after his parents left Sequetus 3. Jaron went off to fight the pirates on Sleebo and that was the last he saw of Yandra until the Juggernaut Series, where they reunited on Sandrist. Yandra went on to be one of the Boguard greats. Templar miniseries

Yildon: The second smallest world, of the Six Worlds beyond the portal. Yildon means little sister 86,000 years into the future. It’s where the Masters used to reside. It has countryside, mountains, lakes, and where the oxygen is made. The senior Masters lived in the buildings overlooking a lake in the mountains.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 971 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Yoo Rup: “Europe” as pronounced by residence of Sandrist. A continent on Sequetus 3. Juggernaut miniseries

Zaltro: The senior god of Mount Gangels, God Zaltro, of Jilta. He procrastinated in saving his son, and in turn his son was boiled alive. The phrase for the sake of Zaltro means not to procrastinate. See Halz. New-Earth miniseries

Zip Suit: ® A bullet proof suit, also known as zipsuit, made in Tilk by Tilk Industries. These are the preferred suits most government dignitaries wear. During the first 100 years after Federation there were a recorded 15,679 assassination attempts on various government officials in the Federation sectors, mostly in the first twenty years. Zip Suits became very necessary. New-Earth miniseries

Zone, The: (Terrestrial) 1. Otherwise called the Zone of Silence. The data given in Chapter 12 of Book 4 about the Zone is reportedly correct. In 1989, when The Silent Enemy was first written, this region in Mexico was referred to as the Zone. Now it’s referred, often to as the Zone of Silence. Refer to The Silent Enemy for more data.

2. A mysterious region in Mexico where unusual phenomena happen and where UFOs are reported as sighted, especially in the 1970’s and 80’s. It became notorious when a missile from the USA unintentionally veered off from course and came down in Mexico, in The Zone. The area is noted, for radios not working, microwaves not working, compasses not working, and extraterrestrial sightings reported.

It is also known for the strange colored cactus, purple and or red, instead of green. Apparently meteors are drawn there. The desert floor is reportedly littered, with meteorite stones. Also, the reports indicate, that there is a much higher incidence of meteorite activity over the Zone, than in other areas. The meteorite rocks that litter the surface vary, in type. However, they are above the surface, not buried under it.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 972 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

In September 1976, a 300 meter long UFO was reported, at 8:59 pm, outside of the small community of Ceballos, in the Zone. The craft was rectangular. Lights surrounded it, green to blue to white, pulsating light, with humming sound. All the dogs in the town started howling. Two-dozen residents gathered to watch the object at the outskirt of the town. There have been many other reported sightings, of other craft, and even sightings of extraterrestrials, which fit the descriptions of greys, in this region.

Mexico has many reported UFOs, and many You Tube videos recorded that really can’t be explained, out from the UFO type occurrence, particularly in 2012.

Acknowledgement: The artwork in the Sequetus Series was purchased from www.dreamstime.com. The author selected the artwork himself, including the cover art and the internal artwork. The maps in the series were done by others.

o0o

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 973 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

NOTES:

REMOTE NEURAL MONITORING:

If the reader wants to know more of this technology, it’s also referred to as RNM. Its most recent development has been in response to terrorist threats. It’s reportedly being used in the USA, UK, Spain, Germany and France. Also look up the case in the USA, of John St. Clair Akwel’s lawsuit. It’s an extrapolation of the MK ULTRA experiments that took place in the USA from the 1950s to the 70s.

The RNM technology is such, that now there is no need for an outside agency, to monitor a brain or neural way, by detaining the subject. One can become a subject to this technology by simply going online, with gaming machines, which use caps to monitor one’s brainwaves.

Internet gaming technology permits the user to forgo operating a computer mouse. Simply by using thought over the Internet, one can control the outcome of the game. Companies that manufacture these devices commercially are USA and Japanese based. This technology also means that the user, can in turn be monitored, by simply using blue-tooth technology, that now has the gamer’s thought patterns measured. These patterns are singularly the gamer’s own patterns, and monitoring them by supercomputers (more powerful than a brain) using satellites, means the following: the subject can be followed using GPS tracking, and his private data, such as typing of credit card numbers at banks, can be monitored. This technology is several years old at the writing of this book.

Claimed victims are reported to hear voices coming from unusual places, such as walls, ceilings and other unexpected locations. They claim of extended high pitched ringing and varying pitch changes, to the ringing (as distinct to medical hearing problems.)

Messages can be delivered to a victim by ELF – Extra Low Frequency. They can transmit from source to skull. ELF can penetrate through rock, concrete and dense matter. Today ELF can be delivered by satellite, and the theory is, that as all humans have their own separate DNA, they also have their own separate distinct radio frequency brain waves.

Today such surveillance could be very simple in theory, and perhaps one doesn’t need to register his brain waves via a game simulator in the I Cloud. Today most phones are registered and E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 974 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

tracked by GPS. Many cats and animals have to be micro chipped by law. Banks want to monitor the computer of their clients for security purposes.

Again in theory, within a small percentage of error, it’s relatively easy to determine the person using a phone, with that cat micro chipped by him, and with his computer linked to his credit card, is the person who has been intended to be monitored for brainwaves. Thus, in theory, with today’s technology, anyone could have his or her brainwaves recorded without knowing, be tracked, and given intended thoughts that are not their own.

As far back as 1992 a court case was brought against the NSA (National Security Agency) of the USA by ex-employee John St. Claire Akwel. The case describes the advanced technology back then, used to monitor remotely, hundreds of thousands of people in the USA and abroad. The capabilities reported included access to an individual’s sub vocalizations, as well as images, from the visual cortex, and sounds from the auditory cortex.

For those interested in more, they should also research synthetic telepathy, artificial telepathy, and artificial memory.

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 975 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

NOTES: ON LONGEVITY

SYNDROME X

Syndrome X is a real condition, whereby bodies age at a very reduced rate, compared to the current human being aging process.

One recent case was of a girl who stopped aging at the age of four or five, until her death at 20 years old. She was from Maryland USA. It was reported that different parts of her body appeared to age at different rates.

Another experiencing this, was a six year old who aged no more than six months.

There is a report of a woman who has aged ten years as of her forty years to date.

The condition appears to have people aging one year for every four years they live.

The cognitive development of the people concerned appears, however, to be no further advanced than their apparent body age.

THE PITUITARY GLAND:

The pituitary gland is situated between the optic nerves, behind the eyes, under the brain. It has three lobes. The front lobe, or the anterior lobe – is to release chemicals that are responsible for the following:

1. GH - growth hormone, or HGH - human growth hormone, or somatotropin, which brings on cell growth and cell proliferation

2. Prolactin, which is responsible for milk production following birth.

3. The follicle-stimulating hormone which develops the sperm and ovum.

4. The luteinizing hormone that affects the ovaries and testis. It stimulates ovulation, and testosterone and oestrogen production, and progesterone production (which prepares the uterus for pregnancy).

Another function of the gland is the release of hormones such as endorphins, which contribute to the feeling of well-being.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 976 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

ANIMALS THAT ARE KNOWN TO LIVE LONG:

Bohead whales, or arctic whales, can live over 211 years.

In Japan, the koi, a domesticated variety of common carp, reportedly live over 200 years.

The longest living vertebrates on Earth are tortoises. Galapagos tortoises live 200 years, and an Aldabra giant tortoise was known to have lived 250 years.

The ocean quahop clam lives 400 years

An Antarctic sponge lives over 1,500 in the cold ocean.

The Turritopsis nutricula jellyfish is ageless, as has developed the ability to cycle from a mature adult to an immature polyp and back again, thus avoiding death and possibly has no natural limit to its life span. It does this when threatened. It is the size of a fingernail and increasing its numbers in the oceans.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 977 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 978 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

NOTES: THE LOCAL GROUP

The Local Group of galaxies, refers to the three major spiral galaxies of the Milky Way, the Andromeda Galaxy, the Triangulum Galaxy, and the forty or so smaller dwarf and barrel galaxies that are attached to these three spiral galaxies. These galaxies all impact on each other with gravity.

The Small Magellanic Cloud: This is a dwarf galaxy, meaning it is small and not spiralling like the Milky Way. It was used by small vessels in the South Pacific to navigate by, and is quite visible to the naked eye at night. It is irregular is shape, perhaps being interfered with by either the Milky Way or its partner Large Magellanic Cloud. The Small Megallanic Cloud Galaxy is 200,000 light years away, and has a diameter of 7,000 light years. It has several hundred million stars and about 7 billion times more mass than the Sun. It can only be viewed from the Southern Hemisphere due to its inclination. It is one of the Milky Way’s nearest neighbours.

The Small Magellan Galaxy. (Galaxy photos from Wikipedia)

Andromeda Galaxy: This has about a trillion stars and is 2.5 million light years from the Milky Way. It is the largest spiral galaxy

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 979 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

in the Local Group of galaxies. The Milky Way has 200 – 400 billion stars by comparison. It is visible to the naked eye on cloudless nights from Earth. It appears more than six times as wide as the full moon when photographed through a large telescope, though only the brighter region is available to the naked eye.

Andromeda Galaxy

IC 1613 Galaxy: This is a dwarf galaxy, approximately 2.3 million light years distant. It is rarely seen by amateur astronomers due to its low surface brightness. It is a bar-shaped structure, meaning it has an axis, and its stellar population is quite old, perhaps 7 billion years. It has a strong red giant branch and red clump populations.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 980 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Triangulum Galaxy: This galaxy is a spiral galaxy, around 3 million light years away. It is one of the most distant permanent objects, which is available to be seen with the naked eye. It has about 40 billion stars, and a diameter of 50,000 light years. It may be gravitationally bound to the Andromeda Galaxy. The nucleus doesn’t appear to contain a supermassive black hole.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 981 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 982 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

NOTES: SUMER

Cuneiform Tablets:

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 983 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Iraq Museum:

Iraq Museum

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 984 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

STATUES:

The various statues mentioned in the text can be seen here. It was just by scrolling through some of these pictures that the author noticed that the statues had a wristband with something interesting on the band. The readers can view these photographs for themselves and make their own conclusions. The pictures were from carvings from the Middle East. Different writers suggest these carvings represent different causes. What this author notices is that the band, and the device or thing on the band, have a similarity.

Here the device on the wrist has ten divisions on a circular background. While the picture below shows the device having three divisions on a square shaped face. Notice the unusual device both subjects are holding, and that they are holding it exactly the same way and pointing it in the same manner.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 985 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 986 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Note that in both the above pictures there are wings present with the person wearing the wristband, with the device on it.

In the picture below, the device has been worn away, and its details are not visible. The object that is being held isn’t so visible in the right hand.

The picture below could be the same person as being depicted above, as again the wings are present. Notice the person on the right below without the wings (clean shaven), doesn’t seem to have the same importance as the one with the wings.

The fourth image below also has wings, though a different head style. The wristband, and the device on the wrist, are present,

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 987 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

though the details are not clearly evident to determine which of the two or more styles of devices are on the wrist band. The fourth picture also has the cone shaped device, which is being pointed, held or aimed in the same way as in the first two pictures.

The author of the Sequetus Series makes no claims of what these devices might be, but they are being used, as an interesting backdrop, for the Sequetus Series story.

There are more examples of the same wristbands below, with some kind of imprint upon the band. We see the same band and also the same person.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 988 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The next statue is the only one where the wearer is not depicted with wings. The wearer is bearded.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 989 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

While it is easy to dismiss these as being simply a religious relic, meaning they apply to some religious deity, with some kind of special meaning lost to antiquity, they are still an unusual curiosity, looking very modern, for their ancient place on these reliefs.

While the next picture of above isn’t extraordinarily clear, it shows that the face of the device on the wristband isn’t similar to the others.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 990 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Ψ

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 991 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

List of Sequetus Series Books:

THE NEW EARTH MINISERIES

Book 1. Advance on Sequetus 3 Book 2. Over Sequetus 3 Book 3. Chariots of Sequetus 3 Book 4. Magi Book 5. The Silent Enemy Book 6. The Federation Unravels Book 7. Savior of Sequetus 3 Book 8. New Federation

THE TEMPLAR MINISERIES

Book 9. Temples of Sequetus 3 Book 10. Temples and the Juggernaut Book 11. Escape From Federation Book 12. The Book of War

THE JUGGERNAUT MINISERIES

Book 13. Juggernauts Book 14. Temple Worlds Book 15. Far Outer Worlds and Sequetus 3 Book 16. The Talkron Hunter – Part I Book 17. The Talkron Hunter – Part II

THE EARTH SYNDROME MINISERIES

Book 18. The Earth Syndrome Book 19. Final Passage Book 20. Vigil Book 21. Maluka Rising Book 22. Orbat Book 23. Galaxy

Book 24. Expanded Series Glossary and Notes

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 992 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

Mindblowing!

This is the final miniseries – THE EARTH SYNDROME. Jaron’s mission into the past has been successful. The preparations for the invasion of Triangulum Galaxy are on schedule.

Follow the action, and don’t take your nose from the trail on this one. You are almost at the end, but we are not going to tell you how that goes. You’ll have to read it for yourself, but we’ll tell you that you’ll come out the other end with that wow factor, as you have just read a magnificent epic series.

Here you leave not only Earth, but finally the Galaxy itself, solving the enigma of Earth, and why it went the way, it did. This is the climactic episode of this series. It is a must-read book, with a must-read ending. They don’t write them any better than this.

The Sequetus Series consists of:

NEW-EARTH SERIES – 8 books.

TEMPLAR SERIES – 4 books.

JUGGERNAUT SERIES – 5 books.

THE EARTH SYNDROME SERIES – 6 books

So why don’t you fasten your seat belt, buckle in, and get catapulted into the last book in this wild and magnificent science fiction space opera epic, Galaxy.

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 993 | 994

N I C K B R O A D H U R S T

The end of the Sequetus Series

E A R T H S Y N D R O M E M I N I S E R I E S P a g e 994 | 994